TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB Founpep By WitiiaM Henry Leccert, 1870 1913 EDITOR PHILIP DOWELL ASSOCIATE EDITORS “Masia AVERY few : " Maves RICHARDS CONTENTS RITTON, NATHANIEL Lorp. Studies of West Indian plants—IV I Livincston, BurTON E., and EstaBrook, ARTHUR H. Observations on the degree of stomatal movement in certain plants - r§ Maxon, Witt1am R. Notes on the North American species of Phanero- phlebia_ - 23 Dorsey, M. J. Variation in the Ae structures of Vitis (plates oF ee | DAcHNoWSKI, ALFRED. The relation of Ohio bog ih Sa to the chem- ical nature of peat soils = - 53 SEAVER, FrED J. Studies in seein fungi The viability of the spores of Pyronema (plate 4) - 3 BICKNELL, EuGENE P. The ferns and fiowerlie sis of anaa ie 69 BRAINERD, Ezra. Violet acai between species of the mews group (plates 5-7) 85 RYDBERG, PER AXEL. Studies on de Rocky's Mountain fora—XXVI - 99 Fromme, Frep D. Sexual fusions and spore slink in the flax rust (plates 8, 9) - 113 DopcGE, BERNARD O. hatads of ice as he Oe adies a of the sete carp in certain species of the Ascobolaceae (plates 10-15) - - 139 Howe, R. HEBER, Jr. The lichens of the Linnean Herbarium with as on Acharian material - - 199 Evans, ALEXANDER W. diattone - Puerto Rico—XI olan 16, os - 209 RoBINSON, WINIFRED J. A taxonomic study of the saaaliot costes of the Hawaiian Islands—I (plates 18-20) - - =" 927 BRoapHuRST, JEAN. The genus shah id a its representatives in North America—I (plates 21, 22) - - 257 LorENz, ANNIE. Vegetative reproduction in ae New Radand F ae 279 Stosson, Marcaret. New ferns from Tropical America (plate 23)- - 285 MACKENSEN, BERNARD. Three new species of oie with a discussion of the identity of Opuntia Lindheimeri = - - 289 RYDBERG, PER AXEL. Studies on the Rocky Mountain fora—XXVI - 301 Wi.uston, Ruta. Discoid gemmae in Radula - - 329 Berry, Epwarp W. Notes on the genus Sp uidvinewsesne hie 24, 25)- 341 - BrRoapuurst, JEAN. The genus crore and its aster in North America—II (plates 26-29) - - 357 Berry, Epwarp W. Contributions to the Arar geek of i eile coastal plain—VIII. Texas (plates 30-32) - - - - - 387 DARLING, CHESTER ARTHUR. Mitosis in living cells - - 407 BICKNELL, EuGENE P. The ferns and flowering plants of tox 415 ili iv CONTENTS SKINNER, J. J., and BEATTIE, J. H. Effect of asparagin on ee and growth in wheat (plate 33 - ALDEN, ISABEL. A contribution to the life history « 4 Dyula sessilifolia (plates 34, 35) - 2 - 439 ANDREWS, F. M. Paaalaamie streaming in Miva SAFFORD, WILLIAM Epwin. Desmos the proper generic name for ie so- called Unonas of the Old World - Ol Pickett, F,L. A case of changed polarity in Sie se onis uae 36) 509 | Davis, BRADLEY Moore. Was Lamarck’s evening primrose (Oenothera Lamarckiana oe a form of Oenothera = Solander? (plates 37-39) - - 519 SCHREINER, OSWALD, and SKINNER, I. J. The “ae of suaniin on Plants 535 Roginson, C. B. Polycodium - 49 ROBINSON, WINIFRED J. A taxonomic eas oF the ¢ Prerdophyts of oo Hawaiian Islands—II (plates 40-44) - - 567 Evans, ALEXANDER W. New West Indian Laie tt tote is) - 603 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE - = « “ “ 29, 81, 133, 205, 249, 293, 349, 411, 447, 511, 561, 613 INDEX TO VOLUME 39 - “ * “ - f i Dates of Publication No. 1, for January. Pages I- 36. Issued 10 February, 1912, No. 2, for February. 37~- 84. 9 March, 1912. No. 3, for March. 85-138. 18 April, 1912. No. 4, for April. 139-208. 17 May, 1912. No. 5, for May. 209~256. _ 8 June, 1912. No. 6, for June. 257-300. 10 July, 1912. No. 7, for July. 301-356. 23 July, 1912. No. 8, for August. 357-414. 16 August, 1912. No. 9, for September. 415-454. g September, 1912. No. 10, for October. 455-518. 2 November, I9I2. No. 11, for November. 519-566. 18 November, 1912. No. 12, for December. 567-631. 31 December, 1912. Errata Page 96, line 8, for Viloa read Viola. Page 152, line 4, for Cubomta read Cubonta. Page 152, line 16, for violaceus read violascens. Page 235, line 12 from below, for 1831 read 1827. Page 244, line 2, for 1841 read 1832. Page 244, line 7, for 1841 read 1844. Page 246, line 5, for 1827 read 1829. Page 246, line 4 from below, for 1827 read 1826. : Page 247, line 4 from below, for 1832 read 1829. 4 Page 248, line 20, for 1832 read 1827. Page 313, line 22, for calceoliformis read calceoliforme. Page 377, line 14, for tubulare read tabulare. = & re . as VOL. 39 JANUARY 1912 BULLETIN TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB €nitor PHILIP DOWELL | : Associate Cviters JOHN HENDLEY BARNHART = Ropert ALMER HARPER JEAN BROADHURST MARSHALL AVERY Howe Ernest DUNBAR CLARK oe. HERBERT MAULE RICHARDS ALEXANDER: WILLIAM EVANS” NORMAN Tn phe ee CONTENTS © Sage Touma of West Indian plants—IV. . - - NATHANIEL LORD BRITTON _ Observations on the degree of stomatal movement in certain plants BURTON E. LIVINGSTON and ARTHUR 2 ESTABROOK = Notes on the North oe miners species of Phanerophlebia (WILLIAM R.: me INDEX TO awenrcan BOTANICAL LITERATURE - THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB President EDWARD S. BURGESS, Pu.D. Vice-Presidents JOHN HENDLEY BARNHART, A.M., M.D. HERBERT M. RICHARDS, Sc.D. te and Treasurer BERNARD O. DODGE, Pu. B. Sie of Pay, ‘Coenibia University w York City MEETINGS Meetings twice shack month from October to May inclusive: the second Tuesday, at 8:00 P.M., at the American Museum of Natural History; the last Wednesday, at 3:30 P.M., in the Museum Building of the New York Botanical Garden. 2h PUBLICATIONS _ All subscriptions and other business communications relating to the publications 3 oe the Club should be addressed to the Treasurer, Bernard O. Osge, Dept. of _- Botany, Columbia University, New York City. Bulletin. Monthly, established 1870. Price, $3.00 a year; single numbers 30 cents. Of former volumes, only 24-38 can be supplied Se ; certain numbers of other volumes are available, but the entire stock of some numbers has been _ reserved for the completion of sets. Manuscripts” aes for pletion in the a BULLETIN should be addressed to Philip Dowell, Editor, Port Richmond, N. Y oo peeing: Monthly, established 1901. Price, $1.00 a year. Manuscripts in- pe tended for poblication in ToRREYA should be addressed to Norman Taylor, Editor, ie Museum, rm Parkway, Brooklyn, N.Y. _ Memoirs. Occasional, established 1889. (See last pages of cover. ) " Preliminary Catalogieof Sanaa and Preridophyta psheange 100 miles of New York City, — Price, $1.00 We , e ere — eos ae should : = nied reprints, if desired, when Dose de return male proof to the editor. 25 copies of ipo without cover may be Covers: 2 25 for 75 inis, ‘additional covers I cent each, Plates for reprints, 4o cents each per 100, Vol. 39 No. 1 BULLETIN OF THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB een JANUARY Ig912 Studies of West Indian plants—IV NATHANIEL LORD BRITTON 16. DENDROPANAX IN THE WEST INDIES 1. DENDROPANAX ARBOREUM (L.) Dene. & Planch. A tree, up to 20 m. high, but usually much smaller and often flowering asashrub. Leaves chartaceous, from ovate to obovate, mostly acuminate at the apex, narrowed or rounded at the base, often 2 dm. long; inflorescence from shorter than the leaves to equaling them, or longer, the 20 umbels or fewer racemosely arranged and umbellate at the summit, sometimes leafy-bracted, but the bracts usually small, ovate to lanceolate; peduncles of the umbels slender, ascending, up to 3 cm. long in fruit; pedicels 11% to 3 times as long as the flowers, somewhat elongating in fruit; petals white or greenish; calyx rather sharply toothed, about 2 mm. wide at flowering time; fruit black, strongly lobed, 6-8 mm. thick. Widely distributed at lower and middle altitudes in moist or wet districts in Jamaica, Cuba, Hispaniola, Porto Rico, and on Signal Hill, St. Thomas. Ascends to 1,600 meters in Jamaica. >. DENDROPANAX SAMYDIFOLIUM (C. Wright) Seem. This species is known to me only from the original specimens collected by Wright at S. Felepina near La Grifa, western Cuba; Wright's description calls for a tree up to 13 meters high. The leaf base is decurrent on the petiole. The species seems very closely related to D. arboreum, which is abundant in the mountains and hills of western Cuba. ee ie neem Se ial ne et ea WH Ne en =u aS ES [The BULLETIN for December 1911 (38: 1-v, 531-570. pl. 35) was issued 6 Ja 1912.] 2 BRITTON : STUDIES OF WEsT INDIAN PLANTS 3. Dendropanax brachypodum (Urban) Britton nom. nov. Gilibertia brachypoda Urban, Symb. Ant. 5: 452. 1908. A short-petioled and long-pediceled Haitian mountain species, related to D. arboreum, known to me only from Professor Urban’s description. 4. DENDROPANAX LAURIFOLIUM (E. March.) R. C. Schneider A detailed description of this endemic Porto Rico mountain tree is published by Professor Urban in Symbolae Antillanae 1: 203. 5. DENDROPANAX CUNEIFOLIUM (C. Wright) Seem. A shrub or tree up to 6 m. high, the branches slender, often drooping. Leaves spatulate to oblong-oblanceolate, 2 dm. long or less, 1.5-6 cm. wide, obtuse, or bluntly acute at the apex, cuneate at the base, the petiole 1/6 to 1/4 the length of the blade; peduncle slender, straight, as long as the leaves or longer; umbel 7-20-flowered ; pedicels 1.5-2 cm. long; petals green, acute; flower- ing calyx about 4 mm. broad; fruit globose to globose-oblong, black, 6-8 mm. thick, the persistent style about half its length. Banks of streams and wooded bogs at lower and middle eleva- tions, Pinar del Rio and Isle of Pines, Cuba. 6. DENDROPANAX NUTANS (Sw.) Dene. & Planch. Known only from Blue Mountain Peak, Jamaica, where it is reported as abundant. Professor Urban (Symb. Ant. 1: 200) characterizes the umbel as strictly erect, but it is inclined or nodding in all specimens seen by me. 7- DENDROPANAX PENDULUM (Sw.) Dene. & Planch. A shrub about 4 m. h ovate, acute or bluntish at the base, triplinerved and r igh. Leaves chartaceous in texture, the apex, rounded or subcordate at ather prominently pinnately veined, BRITTON : STUDIES OF WEsT INDIAN PLANTS 3 the blades 12 cm. long or less, nearly twice as Jong as wide; petioles rather stout, one half to two thirds as long as the blades; peduncle much longer than the leaves, pendulous, 2 dm. long or less, bracted and jointed a little below the middle; umbel many- flowered; pedicels slender, 15-18 mm. long; flowering calyx broadly turbinate, 3.5 mm. broad; petals oblong-lanceolate, about as long as the calyx. Cockpit Country, Jamaica, Harris 9188, from Lapland, near Catadupa; this specimen agrees with the type specimen of Hedera nutans Sw., in the herbarium of the British Museum of Natural History. The species is also recorded by Marchand from Catha- rine’s Peak, collected by Eggers, 3651, which I have not seen. 8. Dendropanax grandiflorum sp. nov. A tree, about 8 m. high. Leaves chartaceous, obovate, 5~10 cm. long, 5 cm. wide or less, bluntly pointed at the apex, cuneate- narrowed at the base, rather strongly pinnately veined, the margins slightly revolute, the stout petioles about I cm. long or less; inflorescence of simple, terminal, few-flowered umbels, or rarely a secondary umbel borne halfway up on the peduncle; peduncle rather stout, 3-5 cm. long, bracted and jointed just above the base; flowers 8 or fewer in the umbels; pedicels rather stout, nearly erect, 1.5-2 cm. long; flowering calyx 8 mm. high, narrowly campanulate, its mouth 6-7 mm. broad; corolla 5 mm. long just before expanding, the bud rounded; anthers in the unopen bud about as long as the filaments; fruit oblong, I cm. long, 7 mm. thick, the persistent style 6-7 mm. long. Peckham woods, Upper Clarendon, Jamaica, July 7, 1911, Harris 10994. . 9g. Dendropanax elongatum sp. nov. A slender tree about 8 m. high. Leaves clustered at the ends of the branches, oblong to oblong-lanceolate, coriaceous, faintly - pinnately veined, acute at the apex, narrowed or somewhat rounded at the base, the blade 15 cm. long or less; the petiole one sixth to one third as long as the blade; peduncle shorter than the larger leaves, 8-12 cm. long, bracted somewhat below the middle, the bracts triangular-ovate, apparently nearly erect; very young inflorescence depressed-hemispheric, 8 mm. broad; the flower buds sessile or nearly so. Peckham woods, Upper Clarendon, Jamaica, at 800 to 900 meters elevation, January 3, 1910, Harris 10874. 4 BRITTON : STUDIES OF WEsT INDIAN PLANTS The very young state of the inflorescence does not enable me to give a description of the flowers of this interesting tree, and its generic position is therefore uncertain. Its jointed and bracted peduncle is similar to that of Dendropanax pendulum, but its foliage is altogether different from that species. 10. Dendropanax grande sp. nov. A tree up to 16 m. high. Leaves clustered at the ends of the branches, ovate to ovate-elliptic, coriaceous in texture, rather prominently pinnately veined, obtuse at both ends, the blade 15 cm. long or less, the stout petioles as long as the blades, or shorter; peduncle much shorter than the leaves, erect, stout, about 4 cm. long, bracted at the base; pedicels numerous, about 50, rather stout, 2 cm. long; flowering calyx subhemispheric, 5 mm. broad; petals lanceolate, about as long as the calyx; filaments rather stout, somewhat longer than the petals. Moneague, Jamaica, Alexander Prior, May 1850. 11. Dendropanax blakeanum sp. nov. one fifth to one third as long as the blade; peduncle erect, as long as the leaves or twice as long, bracted at the base; umbels 8-16- flowered; pedicels slender, 2 cm. long in fruit; flower buds ovoid- hemispheric, obtuse, 3 mm. long just before the petals unfold; calyx in young fruit turbinate, 4 mm. broad; fruit subglobose, 5 mm. in diameter; the conic persistent style 2.5 mm. long. John Crow or Blake Mountains, Jamaica, at 550 meters eleva- tion, Harris & Britton 10761, collected March to, 1909. Differs from Dendropanax nutans in the longer, strictly erect, few-flowered peduncles, and in the venation, texture, and shape of the leaves. 12. Dendropanax cordifolium Sp. nov. A tree about 6 m. high. Leaves clustered at the ends of the branches, chartaceous in texture, broadly ovate, prominently pin- nately veined, obtuse, or short-acuminate at the apex, cordate, or subcordate at the base, the blades 2 dm. long or less, about two thirds as wide as long, the stout petioles about one half as long as BRITTON : STUDIES OF West INDIAN PLANTS 5 the blades, or shorter; peduncle stout, bracted at and very near the base, inclined, longer than the petioles, 12-15 cm. long; umbels many-flowered; pedicels rather slender, 2.5 cm. long; flowering calyx broadly turbinate, 4-5 mm. broad; petals white, about as long as the calyx; filaments somewhat longer than the petals; persistent style of the young fruit very broadly conic, 2 mm. long or less. Woodlands, summit of Dolphin Head, Jamaica, March 17, 1908, Britton & Hollick 2856. 17. THE GENUS CAMERARIA (PLUMIER) L. The genus was accepted by Linnaeus from Plumier, C. latifolia being the type species, and C. angustifolia L. also appearing in the original publication of the genus, which is wholly West Indian in distribution, so far as I am aware. I, CAMERARIA LATIFOLIA L. Sp. Pl. 210. 1753 This is a shrub or tree up to 15 m. high, as observed by me at the United States Naval Station, Guantanamo Bay, Cuba. It has characteristic ovate-elliptic acuminate leaves. Its fruit is about 6cm. long. The species seems to be widely distributed in Cuba; occurring in the provinces of Oriente, Matanzas, and Havana. In Jamaica it is apparently rare, the only specimen seen by me being one collected by Dr. A. Hollick and myself (2045) in rocky woods at Negril, the extreme western end of that island. It is recorded from Haiti but I have seen no specimens from Hispaniola, which is presumably the type locality. : 2. CAMERARIA ANGUSTIFOLIA L. Sp. Pl. 210. 1753 My knowledge of this species rests wholly on Plumier’s descrip- tion and plate 72, figure 2, where it is illustrated as having linear- acuminate leaves and fruit 2.5 cm. long. According to Miller, cited by Grisebach, Fl. Br. W. I. 410, it was found in Jamaica, but it is unknown to us from that island. 3. CAMERARIA RETUSA Griseb. Fl. Br. W. I. 410. 1861 (C. angustifolia Griseb. loc. cit. not L.) This is wholly a Cuban species, so far as it is represented in our collections, occurring in the provinces of Santa Clara, Havana, 6 BRITTON : STUDIES OF WEsT INDIAN PLANTS Pinar del Rio, and on the Isle of Pines. It has lanceolate to oblong leaves, which are obtuse and emarginate at the apex. Its fruit is about 2 cm. long, the narrowly linear terminal wing about as long as the ovoid body. Its flowers are only about 1 cm. long, the corolla limb about 1.5 cm. wide. I take as the type of this species the specimen from ‘‘ West Indies,” collected by Lane, and preserved in the Kew Herbarium. 4. Cameraria oblongifolia sp. nov. A tree 4-6 m. high with slender twigs. Leaves oblong to oblong-lanceolate, acutish to obtuse or minutely emarginate at the apex, narrowed at the base, 2-3.5 cm. long, 14 mm. wide or less, the slender petiole about 2 mm. long; corolla about 17 mm. broad; fruit compressed, lanceolate, 2-3 cm. long, about 1 cm. wide, grooved at the base on one side, the terminal wing oblong- triangular, obtuse, about as long as the body. In wet woods near Tiffin, Camagiiey, November 1-5, 1909, Shafer 2877; also represented by part of Wright’s Cuban no. 2950, collected at Hanabana. The other part of Wright’s 2950, which has ovate-lanceolate acuminate leaves, may represent another species. It has much more slender and longer petioles than C. oblongifolia, but the speci- mens examined by me are too imperfect to afford a complete — description. Combs’ no. 19, collected in Cieneguita in the province of Santa Clara, appears to be the same as this, but our specimen of that number also is incomplete. 5. Cameraria microphylla sp. nov. A tree up to 5 m. high, intricately branched, the twigs very slender. Leaves oblong to oblong-obovate, 1 cm. long or less, 2-4 mm. wide, emarginate at the apex, narrowed at the base, the margins strongly revolute; fruit 2 cm. long, 4-6 mm. wide, com- pressed, the wing oblique, sinuate, terminal and lateral, similar to that of C. latifolia but very much smaller. Near the northwestern end of Cayo Coco, Camagiiey, October 23-24, 1909, Shafer 2709. BRITTON : STUDIES OF WEsT INDIAN PLANTS 7 18. UNDESCRIBED SPECIES FROM JAMAICA Acalypha jamaicensis sp. nov. A shrub, 2-2.7 m. high, the branches slender, the young ones densely pubescent. Leaves oblong-lanceolate to oblong-oblance- olate, thin in texture, rather strongly pinnately veined, 9-15 cm. long, 3-5 cm. wide, sharply serrate all around, long-acuminate at the apex, subcordate at the base, sparingly pubescent above, rather densely pubescent on the veins beneath, the slender pu- bescent petioles 4 cm. long or less; flowers apparently monoecious; staminate spikes dense, pubescent, slender-stalked, about 3 cm. long, the short narrow bracts ciliate; pistillate spikes 3-6 cm. long, their bracts ciliate and pubescent, especially on the veins, 5-7- cleft to about the middle, the lobes obtuse or acutish; style dis- sected into filiform segments; fruit compressed, pubescent, 2 mm. broad. Woodlands, Upper Clarendon, Jamaica. Type, Harris 10842, collected at Leicesterfield, January 28, 1910. Related to A. pruinosa Urban, a nearly glabrous species with more deeply cleft pistillate bracts. - Actinostemon jamaicensis sp. nov. A tree, up to 10 m. high, with slender, somewhat drooping branches, glabrous throughout. Leaves ovate to oblong-lanceo- late, thin, 5-7 cm. long, 2-3.5 cm. wide, acuminate at the apex, rounded or narrowed at the base, shining above, pale beneath, pinnately veined, the very slender petioles 1 cm. long or less; staminate inflorescence interruptedly spicate, slender, 4-5 cm. long, flowers opposite the upper leaves; stamens 12, in clusters of 3, the united part and the free part of the filaments about equal in length; fruit depressed-globose, 9-12 mm. broad, 8-9 mm. high, both apex and base slightly sunken; seed globose, 3-3.5 mm. in diameter. Thickets, Grant’s Pen, near Yallah’s Bay, Jamaica, May 26, 1911, Harris 10936, type; also at the same station, Harris 10643, 10818, and 10826, Britton 3470 and 3913; coastal thickets, Morant Point, Britton 4103. Clusia clarendonensis sp. nov. Asmall tree, up to 5 meters high. Leaves thick, rigid, obovate, 10 cm. long or less, 5-7 cm. wide, rounded at the apex, narrowed at the base, finely but rather strongly pinnately veined, the stout 8 BRITTON : STUDIES OF WEsT INDIAN PLANTS petioles 4-6 mm. long; fruiting peduncles stout, 3 cm. long; in- florescence about 3-flowered; fruiting pedicels about 1 cm. long; bracts triangular-ovate, acute, rigid, 5 mm. long; fruit oblong, obtuse, 2.5 cm. long, 1.5 cm. thick, the persistent sepals broadly triangular-ovate, scarious-margined; stigmas 5. Peckham woods, Upper Clarendon, Jamaica, in fruit July ., 1911, Harris to992. Related to C. venosa Jacq. Maytenus clarendonensis sp. nov. A tree, up to 18 meters high. Leaves broadly elliptic, coria- ceous, obtuse at both ends, 8—10 cm. long, 5-7 cm. wide, strongly revolute-margined, shining above, dull, and the veins rather prominent beneath, the stout petioles 1 cm. long or less; fruiting pedicels about 6 mm. long; capsules oblong, pointed at both ends, 15-18 mm. long, 8 mm. thick, roughened with depressed tubercles. Peckham woods, Upper Clarendon, Jamaica, in fruit July 5, 1911, Harris 10947. Related to M. jamaicensis Krug & Urban. Portlandia Harrisii sp. nov. A small tree up to 6 meters high. Leaves orbicular, coriaceous, sessile, 8-10 cm. long and broad, rounded at the apex, cordate at the base, shining and reticulate-veined on both surfaces; stipules broad, obtuse; flowers 2-5 together in the upper axils, about 5 cm. long; corolla campanulate, the tube apparently about as long as the limb; fruiting pedicels stout, 6-8 mm. long; immature capsules obovoid, obtusely 5-angled, 2 cm. long, 1.5 cm. thick, crowned by the short calyx teeth. . On limestone rocks, Peckham woods, Upper Clarendon, July 6, 1911, Harris 10975. Only old withered fallen corollas were obtained. Rondeletia saxicola Sp. nov. A shrub about 4 meters high, the twigs pilose-pubescent. Leaves thin, oblanceolate to oblong, acute at the apex, narrowed loosely appressed-pubescent se-pubescent at least on the 10 cm. long, 3 cm. wide or less, m. long; flowers in short-stalked - In diameter, the rather stout, densely pubescent peduncles 5-8 mm. long; bracts linear, acute, 5-8 mm. ong; calyx 4 mm. long, pubescent, lobed to below the middle, the lobes narrowly lanceolate, acute; fruit pubescent, about 5 mm. thick. BRITTON : STUDIES OF West INDIAN PLANTS 9 Rocky Cliff, Somerset, Manchester, September 23, 1908, Harris & Britton 10609. Bidens clarendonensis sp. nov. Perennial, glabrous, the stem and branches terete, trailing, somewhat woody. Leaves firm in texture, 4-7 cm. long,r hombic- ovate, acute at the apex, rather coarsely serrate, except at the broadly cuneate base, with slightly incurved gland-tipped teeth with revolute margins, the venation rather prominent, the petioles one fourth to one third as long as the blades; heads several to- gether, on stalks 1.5 cm. long or less; involucre nearly hemispheric, many-flowered, its bracts about 1 cm. long, linear, obtuse or with a triangular acutish tip, 1.5-2 mm. wide; ray flowers about 5, I.5-2 cm. long, the rays oblong, orange yellow, 2-toothed, 6-7 mm. wide, the tube about 3 mm. long; disk flowers 6 mm. long, the cylindric limb acutely 5-toothed; achenes 1 cm. long, less than 0.5 mm. thick, pappus of I or 2 subulate awns about 0.5 mm. long at flowering time, becoming 2 mm. long and downwardly barbed at maturity. Peckham woods, Upper Clarendon, July 7, 1911, Harris 100987. 19. UNDESCRIBED SPECIES FROM CUBA Mettenia acutifolia Britton & Wilson sp. nov. A slender tree, 3-8 m. high, with hirsutulous twigs and petioles. Leaves ovate, occasionally lanceolate, 2-6 cm. long, I-3.4 cm. broad, bluntly acuminate at the apex, rounded and equilateral or nearly so at the base, obscurely reticulate-veined and more or less pubescent with blackish hairs along the midrib and lateral veins above, hirsutulous on the midrib and lateral veins beneath, the margin ciliate; flowers unknown; valves of the cap- sule with crowded conic or subpyramidal tubercles, each tubercle tipped with a hair; seeds (immature) brownish black, lustrous, 4 mm. long, 3 mm. broad. Camp La Gloria, south of Sierra Moa, Oriente, Cuba, Decem- ber 30, 1910, Shafer 8250. Distinguished from M. globosa (Sw.) Griseb. by its spreading pubescence and by its pointed leaves. Clerodendron (?) calcicola sp. nov. A tree, 8 m. high, the branches smooth, the bark flaky in narrow strips. Leaves opposite, coriaceous, ovate to ovate-elliptic, 10 BRITTON : StuDIES OF WEsT INDIAN PLANTS distantly low-serrate, 10 cm. long or less, 3-5 cm. wide, glabrous, shining and with the inconspicuous venation somewhat impressed above, pale, strongly reticulate-veined with elevated venation, and rather densely pubescent beneath, the stout nearly terete petioles puberulent, 8-12 mm. long; flowers and fruit unknown. Apparently related to C. spinosum Urban, of Santo Domingo, which has similar leaves with bristle-tipped teeth and_ villous petioles. Pseudocarpidium pungens sp. nov. A tree 8 m. high, the twigs slender. Leaves oblong to oblong- lanceolate, 3-7 cm. long, 3 cm. wide or less, chartaceous, strongly pinnately veined, spinulose-dentate, the apex acuminate, spinulose- tipped, the base obtuse, the upper surface smooth and shining, the under surface dull and puberulent; fruit irregularly 4-lobed, puberulent, depressed, 8 mm. in diameter. Hillside, near Guantanamo, Oriente, Cuba, March 1909, Britton 1992, type; Sevilla Estate, near Santiago, Oriente, Cuba, Norman Taylor ro. Related to P. avicennioides (A. Rich.) Millsp., which has entire leaves and more deeply lobed fruit. Pseudocarpidium rigens (Griseb.) Britton comb. nov., Vitex rigens Griseb., has glabrous oblong to oblanceolate shining leaves, spinulose-dentate, at least above the middle, or some of them entire. Portlandia nitens sp. nov. A slender shrub, about 3 meters high. Leaves sessile, coria- ceous, broadly ovate-elliptic, rounded at the apex, cordate or subcordate at the base, i han th ; pedicels short, viscid; calyx viscid, its lobes linear, about 8 mm. long; corolla pink, campanu- late, 2.5 cm. long; capsule obovoid-oblong, 13 mm. long. Dry thicket, upper valley of the Rio Navas, Oriente, March 22, 1910, Shafer 4450. Elaeagia cubensis Sp. nov. A shrub, up to 3.2 meters hi young twigs, branches of the in pubescent. Leaves chartaceou long or less, 2.5~3 cm. wide, abr gh, the branches rather stout, the florescence, and pedicels minutely s, oblong or oblong-obovate, 7 cm. uptly short-acuminate at the apex, BRITTON : STUDIES OF WEsT INDIAN PLANTS 11 narrowed at the base, strongly pinnately veined, the petioles 6-9 mm. long; stipules narrow, obtuse, deciduous, I cm. long; panicles rather loosely flowered, 7 cm. long or less, minutely bracteolate; pedicels 2-3 mm. long; calyx tube obconic, 2 mm. long, the limb with 5 short rounded lobes; corolla white, 4 mm. long, its narrowly oblong lobes twice as long as the tube; filaments about as long as the corolla, the scale near the base of each with a dense tuft of white hairs; stigmas one fourth as long as the style. Monte Jiquarito, Sierra Maestra, Oriente, Cuba, at about 1,100 meters altitude, September 18, 1906, Norman Taylor 515. The genus has been hitherto known only from the South American Andes. 20. NOTES ON SPECIES OF SOLANUM SoLANUM BLopGETTII Chapm. This species is cited by Mr. O. E. Schulz* as a synonym of Solanum bahamense subarmatum (Willd.) O. E. Schulz, but he has wholly misunderstood its type specimens, which show that it is more nearly related to S. verbascifolium than to S. bahamense; it grows plentifully on Key West, Florida (Blodgett, type; Merrill; Pollard, Collins & Morris 3; Britton 520; Lansing 1969), in the Florida Everglades (Britton 237; Small & Wilson 1678, 1962; Small & Carter 2674, 2675, 2936, 3101), and is to be added to the West Indian Flora, as it occurs on Cat Cay, Bahamas (Millspaugh 2341; Brace 3749). The varietal name Solanum bahamense subarmatum, under which Mr. Schulz groups nearly or quite unarmed specimens of S. bahamense, is redundant, for there is every transition from very prickly plants to entirely unarmed ones throughout the range of the species, individual bushes often bearing prickles below and being quite devoid of them above. Harris 8169, from Plowden Hill, Jamaica, as represented by our specimen, is un- armed, though the duplicate of it, examined by Mr. Schulz, is referred by him to the typical prickly form. SOLANUM BOLDOENSE A. DC. This interesting Cuban vine is apparently of quite local distribution at widely separated - stations; about Matanzas — it * Urban, Symb. Anit: 6: 223. 12 BRITTON : STUDIES OF WeEstT INDIAN PLANTS grows especially in the famous gorge of the Yumury or Yumuri River (Rugel 145). Mr. Schulz (loc. cit. 170) erroneously spells this ‘‘Tomory,” while Mr. A. H. Moore* also has it wrong as ‘“Sumuri.” This gorge is one of the scenic attractions of the northern coast of Cuba; the handwriting of Rugel’s labels is somewhat difficult to decipher. In Pinar del Rio it inhabits limestone rocks at San Diego de los- Bafios (Britton, Earle & Gager 6674); C. Wright’s specimen 381 was collected in Oriente; the locality of the type specimen is doubtfully cited as Havana. 21. NOTES ON TWO JAMAICA PLANTS AMPELOCIssUs ALEXANDRI Urban, Symb. Ant. 6: 15. 1909 To the description may be added “berry depressed-globose, black, shining, 1.5 cm. in diameter, the pulp watery; seeds 2 or 3, depressed-obovoid, slightly rugose, rather deeply and broadly grooved, 5 mm. long, 4 mm. wide.” Wooded hillside, Union Hill near Moneague, St. Ann’s, Jamaica, at 500 meters altitude, Britton & Hollick 2767; this station is within a few miles of the type locality at Mount Diablo. TABERNAEMONTANA DISCOLOR Sw. Prodr. 52. 1788 Tabernaemontana ochroleuca Urban, Symb. Ant. 6: 34. 1909. An examination of the type specimen of Swartz’ species in the herbarium of the British Museum of Natural History estab- lishes the identity of these species. 22. THE GENUS GINORIA IN CUBA GINORIA AMERICANA Jacq. As intimated by Koehne (Bot. Jahrb. 3: 349) this species may sometimes bear spines, as observed by me on plants in the palm barren at Santa Clara, in March, 1910 (Britton & Wilson 6093). This shrub grows alo height of 2.5 meters, at lower ascending to 160 meters in riente. enn as Ninn BRITTON : StuDIES OF WEsT INDIAN PLANTS 13 GINORIA SPINOSA Griseb. Cat. Pl. Cub. 106. 1866 I know this only from Wright's 2545, collected in eastern Cuba (not western Cuba, as cited by Koehne). Rugel’s 727 from the Rio San Juan at Matanzas, as shown by our specimen, is certainly G. americana Jacq. and was so written up by Grisebach, though this number, as studied by Koehne, is by him referred to G. spinosa. The true G. spinosa Griseb. (Wright 2545) is quite a different plant, with much smaller leaves and acicular spines; it is possible, however, that the species are not distinct. GINORIA GLABRA Griseb. Cat. Pl. Cub. 106. 1866 Known to me from Wright’s 2544, collected in eastern Cuba; and from Shafer’s 8784, collected at Farallon de la Perla, Oriente, where it grows on cliffs as a shrub 6 dm. high. It is evidently quite distinct from the other species. Ginoria arborea sp. nov. A tree, 8 meters high, the trunk up to 2.5 dm. thick, the bark gray, the branching irregular, the twigs of the season 4- angled with internodes 5-15 mm. apart; nodal spines 4, spread- ing, recurved, yellowish, I-1.5 mm. long. Leaves sessile, linear- oblong, 1.5-3 cm. long, 2-5 mm. wide, coriaceous, bright green, shining, obtuse at the apex, narrowed at the base, strongly pin- nately veined, the veins prominent on both surfaces; flowers solitary in the axils; pedicels filiform, a little shorter than the leaves; sepals triangular-lanceolate, acute, 4 mm. long. Thicket, Leeward Point, United States Naval Station, Guanta- namo Bay, Cuba, March 1900, Britton 2217. GINORIA CURVISPINA Koehne, loc. cit. 349. 1882 In the palm barren near Santayana, Camagiiey, this species is a shrub I meter high (Britton 2368); near Tiffin, Camagiiey, it grows in wet woods and becomes nearly 3 meters high. Ginoria ginorioides (Griseb.) Britton comb. nov. Diplusodon ginorioides Griseb. Cat. Pl. Cub. 106. 1866. Ginoria Diplusodon Koehne, Bot. Jahrb. 3: 350. 1882. This beautiful shrub or tree inhabits cliffs and rocky hillsides; in the province of Santa Clara it ascends to 560 meters on the 14 BRITTON : STUDIES OF WEsT INDIAN PLANTS southern slope of the Trinidad Mountains, and at sea level on the southern coast becomes a tree up to 7 meters high; the flowers are rose pink to purple and densely cover leafless branches in March. NEw YorK BOTANICAL GARDEN. Observations on the degree of stomatal movement in certain plants * BurTON E. LIVINGSTON AND ARTHUR H. ESTABROOK The studies of Lloydt and of Livingstont on the relation of stomatal changes to the rate of plant transpiration have rendered it very desirable that some quantitative information upon the opening and closing of stomata in a large number of plants be made available. Primarily, such knowledge should hasten the acquisition of some generalization upon the relation between stomatal changes and the daily march of water loss in plants, a generalization that seems to be utterly lacking at the present time. We give, therefore, in the present paper, the results of a series of stomatal measurements on several different plant forms and at various hours of the day. Limitations in facilities and time prevented the testing of a larger number of forms as well as the undertaking of a study of the problem of stomatal influence upon transpiration as such; we have confined ourselves to an effort to determine approximately the degree of usual stomatal change which occurs between day and night under a somewhat widely representative complex of climatic conditions. The plants with which we have worked were all growing in the open soil in the recently established Botanical Garden of the Johns Hopkins University at Homewood, Baltimore, Maryland. The plants used were Funkia ovata, Isatis tinctoria, Allium Cepa, Eichhornia speciosa, and Oenothera biennts. Following Lloyd’s method,§ at various times of day and night samples of epidermis were stripped from the leaves without re- moval of the latter from the plants, and were quickly placed in absolute alcohol contained in suitable vials. Different but similar leaves of the same plant were used for any single series of observa- tions. Ata later time the samples were mounted in a solution of * Botanical contribution from The Johns Hopkins University No. 27. + Lloyd, F. E. The physiology of stomata. Pub bl. 89 Carnegie Inst. 1908. t Livingston, B. E. Stomata and transpiration in Tradescantia zebrina. Science IT. 29: 260, me 1909. § Loc. cit. p. 26. 15 16 LivinGsTON—EsTABROOK : STOMATAL MOVEMENT IN PLANTS iodin in absolute alcohol and the determinations made micro- scopically. These consisted in finding the mean number of stomata occurring per unit area, on either side of the leaf, and measuring with ocular micrometer the length and breadth of the stomatal openings. Twenty stomata, taken at random, were measured in each case. It was found by repeated tests that the average result obtained from twenty stomata was not considerably altered by employing a larger number; a higher degree of accuracy than that here obtained would entail no great difficulty, but would be quite useless in the present state of our knowledge. That the stomatal openings in the bits of epidermis fixed in alcohol by the method of Lloyd are generally unaltered by this treatment, is attested by Lloyd himself, by Miss S. Eckerson* and by Renner.t Since the method depends for its efficiency upon the rapidity with which the walls of the guard cells are dehydrated, it is clear that the reagent used must contain not more than a certain amount of water. We are not aware that this question of the requisite purity of the alcohol to be used in this sort of work has heretofore received attention in a quantitative way, and therefore present here the result of an extensive test in this regard, using the stomata of Eichhornia as subject. The bits of epidermis were placed in a series of “alcohols,” ranging from absolute to 80 per cent (volume). We were surprised to discover that, for these stomata at least, 90 per cent alcohol was apparently as satisfactory for our purpose as was absolute. With over 10 per cent of water a slight closure of previously open stomata could be detected. With more than 20 per cent of water this induced closure was marked. In spite of these indications we persisted in the use of absolute alcohol for all the tests. To bring out the method of handling the dimension data, TABLE I is presented. It includes the results of measurements of Allium stomata at 3:00 p. m. and at 12:30 a.m. Under each hour are first shown the actual dimensions, a and } (the long and short dimensions of the more or less elliptical cross sectional area * Wekeston, Soph 18) Yh nunmbel mill lesb veaula. dec@Gas a. Ge 224. 22S 1908. t+ Renner, O, Beitrage zur Physik der Transpiration, IQIO. Bot. Gaz. 46: 221- Flora 100: 451-547. LIVINGSTON—ESTABROOK : STOMATAL MOVEMENT IN PLANTS 17 TABLE [ Allium Cepa August 30, 3:00 p. m, August 37, 12:30 a. m. Dimensions of openings, i i i es Nab ci yageste Malaria Nab (axé) 15 X4.2 7-94 is XO 9.49 12.6 X3 6.15 15 x6 9.49 12 X4.5 7:35 15 XG 9.49 Remainder 15°: XG 9.49 closed 15 5-7 9.25 I4.I X4.2 7.70 I5 X4.2 7-94 15 X3.6 7-35 13.5 X3.9 7.26 12.9 X4.2 7.36 12.90 X4.5 7.62 13358 XO 8.90 14.1 X4.5 7.97 18. X<3.9 8.38 12.6 X4.8 7.78 {5 x0 9.49 12.90 X4.5 7.62 x6 9-49 12.9 5.1 8.11 Mean Vab (the index of ahi: Mean V ab (the index of relative diffusive capacity) is 8.40. diffusive capacity) is 0.685. of the stomatal pore). These are expressed in the form of an indicated product. In the second column of each series is shown the square root obtained, in each case, from the product of a and b. If we assume that the stomatal pore is elliptical in cross section, then the derived square root must represent the diameter of a circle with area equivalent to that of the ellipse in question. If minute elliptical openings allow the passage of diffusing gases at approximately the same rate as do circular openings of the same cross sectional area,* and also if such rates of gas diffusion through minute circular openings are proportional, not to cross sectional areas but to similar linear dimensions (as the diameters) of the openings;{ then it follows that the square roots given in the * Brown, H. T., and Escomb, I. Static diffusion of gases and liquids in relation to the assimilation of carbon and translocation in plants. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc London 193: 283-291. 1900. Stefan, J. Versuche iiber die Verdunstung. Sitzber. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, math. nat. K!. 68: 385-428. 1873. This contribution formed the point of departure for the work of Brown and Escomb (loc. cit.). See also, on this subject, Renner (loc. cit.). 18 LiIvincsToN—EsTABROOK : STOMATAL MOVEMENT IN PLANTS table should be proportional, under otherwise identical conditions, to the rate of diffusion of water vapor through the corresponding stomatal pores. . The studies of Brown and Escomb have left no doubt in regard to the validity of the principle of linear dimensions, as regards minute circular openings. The two assumptions, (1) that the configuration of the cross section of the stomatal pore nearly enough approaches that of an ellipse to permit the use of such calculations as ours, and (2) that diffusion through minute elliptical openings occurs at the same rate as through circular ones of the same cross sectional area, need further substantiation, but they are highly probable and at least carry us much further toward the inception of a quantitative knowledge of stomatal diffusive capacity than can any other method of treatment thus far avail- able. While it is undoubtedly true that a stoma may close very considerably without at the same time producing alteration in the long axis of the ellipse, yet by the time closure is nearly com- pleted that axis has shortened markedly in many plants. We are thus convinced that to assume the long axis as constant and com-- pute diffusive capacities on the basis of the length of the short axis alone is a method not generally applicable. If the square root of the product of the two elliptical axes may be taken as proportional to the diffusive capacities of the stomata involved, that is, to their power of! transmitting water vapor, then the mean of the square roots derived from all measurements should be a relative measure of the average stomatal diffusive capacity at the hour of sampling. At the base of each part of TABLE I is given this mean. It is seen at once from TABLE I that all stomata were open at the hour of daylight observation while the majority were closed at the night hour. The two open pores, out of twenty observed for the night hour, are seen to be less widely open than were any at the other time. All conditions being equal excepting that of » the size of opening, the diffusive capacity of the stomata appears to be approximately 69/840, or 8.2 per cent as great at about midnight as at 3 in the afternoon. In TABLE II are given the final results of the calculation for each case tested. Two series are presented, one carried out on August 30 and 31, the other on September 7 and 8, 1910. Besides LIVINGSTON—ESTABROOK : STOMATAL MOVEMENT IN PLANTs 19 the calculated diffusive capacities, are given the minima, means, and maxima of the actual dimensions. These latter are expressed as a series of three quantities, the middle one, in full face type, being the mean. The two series thus given for each hour represent, of course, the two axes of the stomatal ellipse. The number of stomata per square millimeter of leaf surface is given above the data in each case, excepting that of Allium, where it was not determined. Funkia has stomata only below and Allium has but one leaf surface to be considered. It appears from our results that the diffusive capacity of the stomatal openings reached the zero point at night in all cases excepting Allium, Eichhornia, and the lower leaf surface of Oeno- thera. This is not to be taken as meaning even that stomatal transpiration actually ceased when the index of diffusive capacity, as here determined, vanished. There must always be some stomata that are SLIGHTLY open, and some diffusion undoubtedly may occur when closure is apparently complete. Of course, cuticular transpiration must continue whether the stomata are open or closed. The greatest diffusive capacities are exhibited by the aquatic Eichhornia, and the stomata of this plant are clearly seen to alter TABLE II Funkia Lower leaf surface (54 stomata per sq. mm.) Time of observation | ere Dimensions of openings, icra Index of relative diffusive capacity Aug. 30 | 3:00 p. m. 0.6-0.5—3.0 | 3-93 10.0-I1.0-I5.0 6:30 p. m, 0 Xo 0.00 Aug. 31 12:30 a. In: 0,0-0.2'7-3.0 0.54 0.0-1.0—-I1.4 5:30 a.m. 0.0-1.08—4.5 1.05 0.0-3.6—15.0 10:00 a. m. 0.0-1.3-3.0 2.88 0.0-6.5-15.0 20 LrvinGSTON—ESTABROOK : STOMATAL MOVEMENT IN PLANTS TABLE II1—Continued Tsatis Upper leaf surface 3 Lower leaf surface : (173 stomata per sq. mm.) (182 stomata per sq. mm.) Time of obser- eumey Dimension of open-| Index of relative | Dimensi f op Ind f relatiy ings, micra diffusive capacity ings, micra diffusive capacity Aug. 30 3:00 p. m.| 0.0—2.4-4.5 0.0-2.5-4.8 4.56 ee 4:77 0.0-8.9-13-.5 0.0-9.5-15.0 6:30 p. m. oXo 0.00 0.0-0.15--3.0 0.27 0,0-0.45-9.0 Aug. 31 12:30 a. m. 0 Xo 0.00 0 Xo 0.00 5.30 a m. 0 Xo 0.00 0.0-0.08-1.5 : 0.21 0.0-0.53-10.5 . 10:00 a. m.| 0.0-0.66-3.0 0.0—2.2-4.2 I.17 4.65 0.0—2.1—13.5 0.0-9.9-1.50 TABLE I[1—Continued Allium Cepa Time of observation Dimensions of openings, micra Index of relative diffusive capacity Aug. 30 3:00 p. m 3-6-5.0-6.0 8.40 12.6-14.4-18.0 6:30 p. m. 3-0-4.2-6.0 7-32 I2.0-13.0-15.0 Aug. 31 12:30 a. m. 0.0-0.38—4.5 0.68 0.0-1,23-12.6 5:30 a. m. 3-0-§.4-7.5 8.37 9.0-13.2-15.6 reed 5-4-7-5-9.0 12.03 12 sea CEL ASO Gl 15.0-19.3-24.6 LIVINGsTON—EsTABROOK : STOMATAL MOVEMENT IN PLANTs 21 TABLE II—Continued Ejichhornia Upper leaf xsonged wer leaf surface Lo (9x stomata per sq. mm.) 4 (18 mm.) Time ot obser- | _ nis Di i f op r Index “d Pisani Dimensions of open- aes of relativ ings, micra diffusiy: city ings, micra usive capacity Aug. 30 3:00 p. m ————. _ —_—— —. 6:30 p. m 9.0-11.7—-12.0 4.8—7.3-9.0 15-75 13.53 18.0-21.2—24.0 22.5-25.2-27.6 Aug. 31 : 12:30 a.m.] 4.5—7.5-12.0 1.8-5.6-9.0 12.09 x Et.31 15.0-19.8-24.0 18.0—-23.1-27.0 5:30 a.m.| 4.5-9.2-11.4 3-9-6.7-12.0 13.89 ~ 1237 18.6-—21.0-24.0 20.I—22.7-27.0 10:00 a.m.| 6.0—-II.I-15.9 6.9—10.1-12.0 15.81 15.06 16.5—22.8-27.0 19.5-22.6-26.4 TABLE II—Continued Oenothera biennis Upper leaf surface (71 st Lower leaf surface (364 stomata Time of per sq. mm.) per sq. mm.) observation |~ RGreune Macrae Ween Dimensions of Index of relative Dimensions of Index of relative openings, micra diffusive capacity openings, micra diffusive capacity Sept. 7 ; I:00 p.m.| 3.6—-5.1-6.3 4.2-5.55-6.3 7-11 7-74 7-5-10.0-13.2 8.7—-10.9-18.0 3:45 p.m.| 3.0—-4.3-6.0 0.0—-2.2—5.1 6.42 4.23 6.3-9.8-15.0 0,0—7.2—12.9 6:20 p.m.| 2.4-3.3-4.8 0.0-1.6-3.6 : 5.82 3.18 7.8-10.4-12.0 0.0-6.5-12.9 11:40 p. m. o Xo 0.0—1.6-3.0 0.00 3 2.901 0.0—-5.5—-12.0 Sept. & 5:40 a.m.| 1.8-3.8-5.1 0.0-2.3-4.2 ‘ 5.85 3.87 6,.0—9.2--13.5 0.0-6.7-15.0 I1I:00 a.m.) 3.0-4.4-6.0 1.8—2.9-4.5 6.63 5-34 6.0-10.I-15.0 6.3-10.1-12.6 22 LIVINGSTON—ESTABROOK : STOMATAL MOVEMENT IN PLANTS their openings from day to night, though to a relatively slight degree. The diffusive capacity at night is about 12/16 (75 per cent) of its day magnitude for the upper leaf surface, and 11/15 (73.3 per cent) for the lower. Furthermore, Eichhornia possesses by far the largest daylight openings with which we have dealt. Next in order are Allium with an open capacity about half as great as in Eichhornia, and Oenothera with an open capacity some- what less than that of Alium. Funkia and IJsatis are not widely different from each other in the diffusive capacity of their open stomata, which is approximately half as great as that of Allium. A comparison of the amount and rate of stomatal closure, as exhibited by the two sides of the leaf, indicates that the upper stomata close and open more rapidly, or close more completely, than do the lower, though this difference is not pronounced in Eichhornia. Many other points of interest are suggested by the data of TABLE II, but the time is not ripe for more detailed discussion; our aim in presenting these results has been merely to make a beginning in the acquisition of information upon which somewhat critical and quantitative studies may be based. It is hoped that others will attack this problem, so that the theory of stomatal effects may, as soon as may be, be brought to rest upon a more adequate foundation of actual’measurements than is at present the case. LABORATORY OF EXPERIMENTAL EVOLUTION, JOHNS Hopkins UNIversiry. Notes on the North American species of Phanerophlebia* WILLIAM R. Maxon In determining recently two species of Phanerophlebia collected by the writer in the mountains of Chiriqui, in western Panama, it became necessary to go somewhat critically over most of the ma- terial of this genus in the U.S. National Herbarium. Specimens have been received from various sources during the past twelve years, so that it is now possible to separate the species somewhat more exactly than at the time of Dr. Underwood’s revision of the genus,} and partly by the use of characters not previously em- phasized. The following key and notes are offered merely as supplementing that treatment. One species, P. guatemalensis, appears not to have been well founded. Key to the North American species of Phanerophlebia Venation copiously areolate. Plants of lax spreading habit; pinnae few (5-11), normally 3-5-5 cm. broad; veins distant (mostly 3-3.5 mm. apart), spreading at v wide angle; sori distinctly infra- medial upon i veinlets, the first row distant usually about 2 mm. from the midvein, the other sori similarly situated or often nearly basal upon the branches 1. P. juglandtfolia. Plants apparently of more upright habit; pinnae numerous (16-20), mostly 2-3 cm. broad; veins closer, usually or supramedial (rarely subterminal), the first row usually 3-5 distant from the midvei 3. P. remotispora. Venation wholly free, or the veins ean anastomosing near the margin. Pinnae 3-5, cordat t least sul 1 t the b 2. P. pumila, Pinnae 10-30, variously cuneate, or unequally rounded or auriculate at the base, never cordate. Sori borne in a definite much nearer the margin than the midvein. 5. P. umbonata. Sorioccupying a medial zone or generally distributed over the — * Published by permission of the yaaa of the Smithsonian Institution. ft Bull. Torrey Club 26: 205-216. 15 My 23 24 Maxon: Notes on NortH AMERICAN PHANEROPHLEBIA Lamina 15-30 cm. long; pi t pp base, the auricles usually overlapping the rachis, the margins elsewhere serrate or often deeply incised. Lamina 40-90 cm. long; pinnae not auriculate. Pinnae 12-15 cm. long, mostly falcate; veins I.5-3 mm. apart at the base, the veinlets very - P. auriculata. ’ 3 5 & of een a ’ nearly all the outer veinlets prolonged into slender awnlike antrorse teeth. 4. P. nobilis. Pinnae 18-25 cm. long, usually very much broader (3-4 cm.); veins 4-6 mm. apart at the base, branched at a much wider angle; sori very large; margins heavily cartilaginous, the marginal teeth stout and short, one to each group of veinlets. 7. P. macrosora. I, PHANEROPHLEBIA JUGLANDIFOLIA (H. & Bj. Sm. In addition to Dr. Underwood’s description it may be noted that the rhizome is woody, relatively slender (about 1 cm. in diameter), 10 cm. long, or less, decumbent and without exception strongly curved. The small crown is densely clothed within with thin dark brown deltoid-oblong laxly ciliate scales, mostly with lighter brown margins. A few similar scales are borne at inter- vals along the strongly sulcate greenish or stramineous stipe. Both this and the next species are remarkable for the length of the stipe, which is usually much greater than that of the lamina. The characters of venation and position of sori mentioned above in the key appear to be constant, in the case of normally well- developed plants. As observed by the writer in Alta Verapaz, Guatemala (Maxon & Hay 3289), and in the mountains of Chiriqui (Maxon 4935; 5192, 5544), at from 900 to 1,500 meters elevation, P. juglandifolia grows in deep shade, on very humid heavily forested slopes. Additional specimens, not cited by Dr. Underwood, are as follows: Costa Rica: Alajuelita, altitude 900 meters, John Donnell Smith 8074; collected by A. Alfaro, original number 103. GUATEMALA: San Miguel Uspantan, altitude 6,000 ft., John Donnell Smith 3259;* collected by Heyde and Lux. Coban, Alta Verapaz, altitude 1,350 meters, H. von Tiirckheim I. 1856. * The balance of this number in the Nation: motispora. al Herbarium (3 sheets) is P. re- Maxon : Notes on NortH AMERICAN PHANEROPHLEBIA 25 The Coban plants, which are only partially fertile and are aberrant in the position of the sori, were listed* incorrectly by the writer as P. remotispora. 2. PHANEROPHLEBIA PUMILA (Mart. & Gal.) Fée. Of this species only the following material has been seen by the writer: Mexico: Top of the Sierra Madre, near Chilpancingo, Guerrero, E. W. Nelson 2222 (2 sheets). 3. PHANEROPHLEBIA REMOTISPORA Fourn. There are in the National Herbarium three sheets of specimens of this species from the vicinity of Cordoba, Vera Cruz, collected by Hugo Fink, 1889-1891, no. 60, and not listed by Dr. Under- wood. Two of these respresent fertile fronds which appear quite typical; the third is of a plant with four fronds (30 to 50 cm. high), three of which are sterile, the fourth partially fertile and showing the true characters of the species in the position of its sori. The rhizome, which is not very complete, appears to have been short and nearly erect; it is clothed with thin delicate pale brown laxly ciliate-fibrillose scales of oblong-ovate form. A few scales of similar character occur sparingly upon the lower part of the stipe, and mixed with them are others that are nearly capillary and of a rusty color. These last extend along the stipe and rachis throughout, but are readily abraded. The pinnae of this young and nearly sterile plant are narrowly ovate or oblong-ovate, 10 to 12 cm. long, 2.5 to 3 cm. broad (3.5 in one pinna), strongly falcate, long-acuminate and caudate. The margins are conspicu- ously long-spinulose nearly or quite to the base of the pinna (the spines very oblique or appressed), in this respect differing widely from P. juglandifolia. An additional specimen is: Mexico: Orizaba, altitude 4,000 ft., Aug. 26, 1891, Henry E. Seaton 49; distributed as Hemitelia sp. 4. PHANEROPHLEBIA NOBILIS (Schlecht.) Fée. A species readily distinguished by the characters noted in the key. The margins are, naturally, more freely spinulose in the * Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 13: 20. 1909. 26 Maxon: Notes on NortH AMERICAN PHANEROPHLEBIA sterile fronds, the numerous teeth being almost wholly correlated with those outer veinlets that extend to the margin. A single new specimen: Mexico: Ixtaccihuatl, C. A. Purpus in 1905, 1595. 5. PHANEROPHLEBIA UMBONATA Underw. A unique species, not to be confused readily with any other of the genus. A single additional specimen has been received: MExico: Sierra Madre, above Monterey, Nuevo Leon, altitude 3,000 ft., March 12, 1906, Pringle 13739. 6. PHANEROPHLEBIA AURICULATA Underw. This species is noteworthy not only for its auriculate and often incised pinnae, but for its thin, almost membranous texture. The following additional specimens have been received : New Mexico: Van Patten’s Camp, Organ Mountains, Dojfia Ana County, altitude about 6,300 ft., Wooton, May 14, 1899, and March 5, 1902. Filmore Cafion, Organ Mountains, Dofia Ana County, Wooton, Feb. 28, 1904. _ 7. PHANEROPHLEBIA MACROSORA (Baker) Underw. Bull. Torrey Club 26: 213. 1899 Aspidium juglandifolium var. macrosorum Baker, Journ. Bot. 25: 25. 1887. Phanerophlebia guatemalensis Underw. Bull. Torrey Club 26: 214. 1899. Complete material now at hand indicates very clearly that P. guatemalensis, founded upon John Donnell Smith’s no. 3241, collected by Heyde and Lux at San Miguel Uspantan, Department of Quiché, Guatemala, altitude 7,000 ft. , is identical with P. macrosora, which was described first as a variety by Baker based upon imperfect Costa Rican specimens collected by J. J. Cooper. Specimens of both type collections are in the National Herbarium, and in addition further very complete specimens from Guatemala, Costa Rica, and western Panama. These prove beyond all ques- tion the distinctness of the species as emended and indicate for it a probable continuous distribution along the higher mountains Maxon : Notes oN NortH AMERICAN PHANEROPHLEBIA 27 of Central America. From this material the following description is drawn: Rhizome very stout, decumbent, chaffy at the summit, bearing a semierect crown of 4 to 6 fronds, these 85 to 135 cm. long; stipes stout, 35 to 45 cm. long, 5 to 9 mm. thick at the base, at first very densely clothed on all sides with spreading light. brown to dirty yellowish brown oblong to oblong-ovate scales, these 1 to 2 cm. long, of thin texture, or those toward the base thicker, glossy, and with darker brown centers, all delicately erose or lightly fimbriate-lacerate; lamina oblong to very broadly oblong in out- line, 40 to 90 cm. long, 25 to 45 cm. broad, comprising 6 to 17 pairs of equal pinnae below the conform terminal segment of the same size; rachis very stout, strongly angled, copiously but de- ciduously chaffy, the scales narrow to nearly capillary, forming a loosely crispate covering; pinnae spreading or somewhat ascend- ing, 4.5 to 7 cm. apart on each side, straight or nearly so (rarely falcate), 18 to 25 cm. long, 3 to 4 cm. broad,* sharply long-acumi- nate, narrowly oblong to oblong-lanceolate from a strongly in- equilateral base, the upper side broadly cuneate and parallel to the rachis, the lower widely and abruptly excavate, all petiolate (the basal ones 5 to10. mm.); leaf tissue coriaceous, the under surface bearing numerous minute setiform reddish scales, especially along the veins; veins 4 to 6 mm. apart at the base, evident, or below conspicuously elevated, 3- to 5-forked, the lowest proximal branch usually extending nearly to the margin; margins strongly cartilag- inous, the marginal teeth stout and short, almost invariably only one to each group of veinlets; sori (except with age) very large, 2 to 3 mm. in diameter, hemispheric, distinctly inframedial as to the veinlets, 1 to 4 to each group, forming 1 to 4 lines (the outer ones often incomplete) upon each side of the midvein, the first row usually about 1 to 2 mm. distant, the others close or apart, never extending to the vicinity of the margin; indusia ample, but delicate and usually early withering. Specimens examined in the National Herbarium: Costa Rica: Without definite locality, J. J. Cooper (type col- lection). Foréts du Tittoral, southeastern slope of Volcano Irazu, altitude 2,400 meters, Pittier 848. Foréts du Copey, alti- tude 1,800 meters, Tonduz 11930. GUATEMALA: San Miguel Uspantan, Depart. Quiché, altitude 7,000 ft., J. D. Smith (Heyde & Lux) 3241 (type collection of P. * In one exceedingly fertile frond only 2 cm. broad. 28 Maxon: Notes on NortH AMERICAN PHANEROPHLEBIA guatemalensis). Volcano Atitlan, Depart. Solola, W. A. Keller- man 5774. PANAMA: Vicinity of Camp Aguacatal, eastern slope of Chi- riqui Volcano, altitude 2,100 to 2,300 meters, March 10-13, I9II, Maxon 5273, 5290. WASHINGTON, D. C. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE (1910-1911) The aim of this Index is to include all current botanical literature written by Americans, published in America, or based upon American material ; the word Amer- ica being used in the broadest sense. eviews, and papers that relate exclusively to forestry, agriculture, horticulture, manufactured products of vegetable origin, or laboratory methods are not included, and no attempt is made to index the literature of bacteriology. An occasional exception is made in favor of some paper appearing in an American periodical which is devoted wholly to botany. Reprints are not mentioned unless they differ from the original in to errors or omissions, their kindness will be appreciated. This Index is reprinted monthly on cards, and furnished in this form to subscribers at the rate of one cent for each card, Selections of cards are not permitted ; each subscriber must take all cards published during the term of his subscription, orre- spondence relating to the card issue should be addressed to the Treasurer of the Torrey Botanical Club. Arthur, J. C. Some Alaskan and Yukon rusts. Plant World 14: 233-236. O I9g11. Banker, H. J. Steccherinum septentrionale (Fr.) Banker in Indiana. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1910: 213-218. 1911. [lIllust.] Barker, E. E. Notes on the royal moccasin flower. Plant World 14: 190-194. f. 3. Au Igit. Bather, F. A.,& Calman, W.T. Transference of the term “genotype.” Science II. 34: 685. 17 N 1og11. Bicknell, E. P. The ferns and flowering plants of Nantucket—VIII. Bull. Torrey Club 38: 447-460. 4 N tor. Blumer, J. C. Change of aspect with altitude. Plant World 14: 236-248. O1gQII. Brainerd, E. Cyrus Guernsey Pringle. Rhodora 13: 225-232. 25 N 1911. [Illust.] Britton, E. G. Fungi on mosses. Bryologist 14: 103: N 191k Britton, N. L. Report on a visit to the Royal Gardens, Kew, Eng- land, and to the British Museum of Natural History. Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 12: 215-218. O 1911. Brown, N.E. Caladium pubescens. Curt. Bot. Mag. IV. 7: pl. 8402. N 1911 A plant from Peru. 29 30 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Campbell, D. H. A sketch of the history of plant morphology in America. Plant World 14: 105-110. My IgIlI. Cardot, J. Note sur les mousses rapportées par la seconde expédi- tion antarctique frangaise, sous le commandement du Dr. Jean Charcot. Rev. Bry. 38: 124-127. I9II. Chittenden, F. J. The effect of the frosts of the winter of 1908-09 on vegetation. Jour. Royal Hort. Soc. 36: 358-404. N 1910. Christ, H. On Psomiocarpa, a neglected genus of ferns. Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 56%: 1-3. pl. r +f. 2. 21 N 1911. Includes Psomiocarpa Maxoni sp. nov. from Jamaica. Chrysler, M. A. More botanical errors. Science II. 34: 603. 3 N IQII. Clark, C. F. Observations on the blooming of timothy. Plant World ta: 137-135. 72 1, 2c: Je 2008. Clinton, G. P. Report of the botanist 1908. Report Connecticut Agr. Exp. Sta. 1907-1908: 849-934. pl. 60-74. Jl 1909. Clute, W. N. The flora of the Chicago plain. Am. Bot. 1'7: 65-70. Au ig1t._ [Illust.] Clute, W. N., & Ferriss, J. H. A new species of Phlox. Am. Bot. 17: 74-76. Au I9II. Phlox argillacea sp. nov. ' Coker, W. C., & Wilson, L. Schizosaccharomyces octosporus. Myco- logia 3: 283-287. pl. 55 +f. 1,.2. N 1911. Cook, M. T. A common error concerning cecidia. Science IE 34: 683-684. 17 N I9gIIt. Cook, M. T. Some problems in cecidology. Bot. Gaz. 52: 386-390. 15 N 1911. Cooper, W. S. Reproduction by layering among conifers. Bot. Gaz. §3: 969-370 f..t.. if -N. 1911. Copeland, E. B. New ferns from Sibuyan. Leaflets Philip. Bot- 4: 1149-1152. 7 O I9gI11. Includes descriptions of 6 new species. Coulter, J. M. The endosperm of angiosperms. Bot. Gaz. 52: 380- 385. 15N 1911. Fairchild, D. Seeds and plants imported during the period from October 1 to December 31, 1910. U.S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 227: 1-60. 2N I9QII. Fernald, M.L. A pubescent variety of Vaccinium vacillans. Rhodora 43: 235, 236. 25 8 tOtl. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 31 Fink, B. Concerning botanical investigation in colleges. Science II. 34: 593-595. 3 N 1o11. Fink, B., & Lantis, V. Climatic conditions and plant growth in south- western Ohio in 1908 and 1909. Ohio Nat. 12: 385-396. N trort. Fisher, M. L. Report of corn pollination—II. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. I910: 245. 1911. Flynn, N. F. The sixteenth annual meeting of the Vermont Botanical Club. Rhodora 13: 237, 238. 25 N 1rog1t. Free, E.E. Studies in soil physics—II. The movements of soil water. Plant World 14: 59-66. Mr 1911;—III, Soil water and the plant. Plant World 14: 110-119. My 1911;—IV. The physical constants of soils. Plant World 14: 164-176. Jl1911;—V. Soil temperature. Plant World 14: 186-190. Au 191. Frier, G. M. Indiana weeds—their control and eradication. Proc, Indiana Acad. Sci. 1910: 323-334. 1911. [Illust.] Fuhrmeister, W. Jahresbericht der Deutschen Kakteen-Gesellschaft. Monats. Kakteenk. 21: 146-148. 15 O tort. Gager, C.S. Cryptomeric inheritance in Onagra. Bull. Torrey Club 38: 461-471. pl. 20, 21 +f. 1,2. 4N 1981. Gates, F. C. An addition to the description of Streptopus longipes Fernald. Rhodora 13: 237. 26. 201k, Gates, R. R. Mutation in Oenothera. Am. Nat. 45: 577-606. O IQIl. Greene, E.L. Accessions to Apocynum. Leaflets2: 164. 18 N ror. Greene, E. L. The genus Saviniona. Leaflets 2: 159-163. 18N IQII. Greene, E. L. Miscellaneous specific types—IV. Leaflets 2: 153-159. 18 N 1911. Continued from Leaflets 2: 152. rr My tort. Greenman, J. M. | Some Canadian Senecios. Ottawa Nat. 25: 114- 125, --N Iori. Four new species described. Greenwood, H.E. Some stages in the development of Pellia epiphylla. Bryologist 14: 93-100. pl. 15 +f. 38-40, 43. N 1911. Gussow, H.T. Plants causing skin irritations. Ottawa Nat. 25: 112, Big. Niort, Harper, R. M. The relation of climax vegetation to islands and peninsulas. Bull. Torrey Club 38: 515-525. 1 D 1911. Harris, J. A. The distribution of pure line means. Am. Nat. 45: 686-700. N rort. 32 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Hasse, H. E. Additions to the lichen flora of southern California— No. 6. Bryologist 14: 100-102. N IgIt. Includes descriptions of 4 new species. Hatchley, W. Y. Natural history notes. Ie and Proc. Hamilton Assoc. Sci. 25, 26: 122-124. 1910. Heller, A. A. The North American lupines—V. Muhlenbergia 7: 85-95. pl.6 +f. 13-17, 17 N1 Describes Lupinus oreganus, L. I eee nee L. Pipersmithii spp. nov. Hessler, R. Plants and man: Weeds and diseases. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1910: 49-69. I9QII. Hill, A. J. Notes on some of the principal mosses of the coast region of British Columbia. Bryologist 14: 103-106. N 1911. Hill, A.W. South America in its relation to horticulture. Jour. Roy. Hort. Soc. 37: 51-56. f. 25-29. O 1911. Howe, M.A. The plant photograph exhibit. Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 12: 218-230. O 1I9QII. Howe, M. A. Phycological studies—V. Some marine algae of Lower California, Mexico. Bull. Torrey Club 38: 489-514. pl. 27-34 + fod. VF 1918. Includes descriptions of 8 new species in Cladophora (1), Dictyota (1), Scinaia (1), Anatheca (1), Gracilaria (1), Fauchea (2), and Halymenia (1) Hubbard, F. C. Anthyllis Vulneraria at Cromwell, Connecticut. Rhodora 13: 240. 25 N I9gI1I. Hus, H. Frondescence and fasciation. Plant World 14: 181-186. iF At 1. Hus, H. The origin of species in nature. Am. Nat. 45: 641-667. j. 2-7. Agi. Hus, H., & Murdock, A. W. Inheritance of fasciation in Zea Mays. Plant World 14: 88-96. f..r.. Ap 1911. Jennings, O.E. Notes on ferns of the Isle of Pines, West Indies. Am. Fern Jour. 1: 129-136. 29 N i911. Jepson, W. L. The silva of California. Mem. Univ. Calif. 2: 1-480. pl. 1-85 +f. I-10 + map rz, 2. 29 D 1910. Johnson, A. G. Further notes on timothy rust. Proc. Indiana Acad. ‘Sty 2070! 205, 704, 7901; Kennedy, P. B. Alpine plants—I. Muhlenbergia 7: 95, 96. f. 18. 17 N 1911. Kern, F. D. The rusts of Guatemala—II. Mycologia 3: 288-290. N 1011. Uromyces Gouaniae sp. nov. described. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 33 Klugh, A. B. Festuca occidentalis in Ottawa. Ottawa Nat. 25: 123; N rort. Knowlton, C. H., and others. Report on the flora of the Boston district. Rhodora 13: 232-235. 25 N IQII. Koidzumi, G. Plantae siphonogamae a N. Yokoyama anno 1907 in Alaska arctica, Tschuktschore et Kamtschatka collectae. Bot. Mag. 25: 203-222. O 1o1r. Kunze, R. E. Beitrage zur sicheren Unterscheidung von Echinocactus Wislizeni Engelm. u. E. Lecontei Engelm. Monats. Kakteenk. 21: 156. 15 O rort. Land, W. J. G. An electrical constant temperature apparatus. Bot. Gaz. 52: 391-399. f. I=g.° 2h 10tt. Lemoine, [M.] Structure anatomique des Mélobésiées. Application a la classification. Ann. Inst. Océanog. 2?: 1-213. pl. 1-5. 15 F IQII. Lewis, I. M. The seedling of Quercus virginiana. Plant World 14: 119-123. f. I-10. My 1911. Livingston, B. E. A radio-atmometer for comparing light intensities. Plant World 14: 96-99. Ap I9gtit. Livingston, B. E. The relation of the osmotic pressure of the cell sap in plants to arid habitats. Plant World 14: 153-164. Jl 1911. MacDougal, D. T. Climatic selection in a hybrid progeny. Plant World 14: 129-131. f. 1. Je 1911. MacDougal, D. T. Induced and occasional parasitism. Bull. Torrey Club 38: 473-480. pl. 22-25. 4N 1981. MacDougal, D. T. The inheritance of habitat effects by plants. Plant World 14: 53-59. N 1o1r. MacDougal, D. T. The water relations of desert plants Pop. Sci. Mo. 79: 540-553. f. 1-5. D911. McMurray, N. A sunny crop. Am. Bot. 17: 70-72. Au 19gII. Macnamara, C. Notes on native orchids. Ottawa Nat. 25: 118-121. N rort. Marchal, E. Apparition en Belgique de l’oidium americain du grosseillier. (Sphaerotheca Mors-Uvae Berk. et Curt.) Bull. Soc. Roy. Bot. Belgique 46: 337, 338. 1 Mr roro. Markle, M.S. Two pine gametophytes in one ovule. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1910: 321. 191t. [Illust.] Maxon, W. R. A remarkable new fern from Panama. Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 56%: 1-5. pl. 1, 2. 22 N I9II. Polypodium podocarpum sp. nov. i Metcalf, H., & Collins, J. F. The control of the chestnut bark disease. U.S. Dept. Agr. Farmers’ Bull. 467: 1-24. 28 O 1911. 34 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Meyer, R. Echinopsis apiculata u. E. Salmiana. Monats. Kakteenk. 24°. 160, ..15 O 1911. Meyer, R. Einiges iiber Echinocactus recurvatus Lk. et Otto und seine Varietiten. Monats. Kakteenk. 21: 148-152. 15 O 1911. [Illust.] Murrill, W. A. The Agaricaceae of tropical North America—lV. Mycologia 3: 271-282. N I9gII. Includes descriptions of 21 new species in Leptoniella (4), Eccilia (3), Nolanea (2), Pluteus (6), Entoloma (1), Pleurotus (1), and Volvariopsis (4) Nelson, A. Contribution from the Rocky Mountain Herbarium—IX. New plants from Idaho. Bot. Gaz. 52: 261-274. 17 O 1911. Fifteen new species described. Orton, C. R. Disease resistance in varieties of potatoes. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1910: 219-221. I9QII. Pearl, R., & Bartlett, J. M. The Mendelian inheritance of certain chemical characters in maize. Zeits. Induk. Abst. und Vererbungs- lehre 6: 1-28. O 1911. Peirce, G. J. American botany. Plant World 14: 81-87. Ap I9II. Peirson, H. Abnormal development in maize. Jour. Bot. 49: 347, 348. N 1911. Petry, L. C., & Markle, M. S. An ecological survey of Whitewater Gorge. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 1910: 223-243. f. I-9. I9I1I. Phillips, F. J. Conifers without normal whorls. Plant World 14: 66-69. f.z. Mr 1911. Pretz,H.W. Aninteresting find. Am. Fern Jour. 1: 137-141. 29N 191. [Illust.] Asplenium Bradleyi D. C. Eaton. Quehl, L. Mamillaria Caput-Medusae Otto var. centrispina Salm- Dyck. Monats. Kakteenk. 21: 152. 15 O 1911. Quehl, L. Mamillaria Seideliana Quehl nov. spec. Monats. Kak- teenk. 21: 154, 155. 15 O1g11. ([Illust.] : Richter, M. C. Honey plants of California. Univ. Calif. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 217: 973-1037. f. 1-14. Je 1911. Robinson, B. L. Notes on the genus Cirsium. Rhodora 13: 238-240. 25 N 10g1I. Rohrer, J. B. Report of mycologist for year ending March 31, 1911— (Part II). Board of Agr. Trinidad and Tobago Circ. 4: 1-70. pl. I-13. 20Q0 1911. Safford, W. E. Edward Palmer. Am. Fern Jour. 1: 143-147. 29 N 19II. Safford, W. E. Notes of a naturalist afloat—I. Am. Fern Jour. 1: 121-129. pl. 5. 29 N 1911. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 35 Schindler, A. K. Halorrhagaceae novae—I. Repert. Sp. Nov. 9: 123-125... 15 Ja 1ort. Gunnera Margaretae Schindler from Peru. Sherff, E. BE. A new variety of Carex lupulina. Bull. Torrey Club 38: 481, 482. pl. 26. 4 N 1911. Carex lupulina albomarginata var. nov. Shreve, F. The influence of low temperature on the distribution of the giant cactus. Plant World 14: 136-146. f. P=9,:: J6 4911, Shull, G. H. Reversible sex-mutants in Lychnis dioica. Bot. Gaz. 52: 329-368. f. 1-15. 15 N tort. mith, R. I., & Stevens, F. L. Insects and fungous diseases of apple and pear. North Carolina Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 206: 43-126. Mr I9IO. Stapf, O. Phyllodoce amabilis. Curt. Bot. Mag. IV. 7: pl. 6405. N 1QIl, Stapf, O. Ruellia Devosiana. Curt. Bot. Mag. IV. 7: pl. 8406. N IQII. A native of Brazil, Stearns, E. Three big perennial roots. Am. Bot. 1y: 73-7 Ait IQII. Steil, W. N. Apogamy in Pellaea atropurpurea Bot. Gaz. 52: 400, 401. 15 N tort. Stuckert, T. Tercera contribucién al conocimiento de las GraminAceas argentinas. An. Mus. Nac. Buenos Aires 14: 1-218. pl. 1-4. I9QIt. ferry, BH Gerace A. Woolson. Am. Fern Jour. 1: 148, 149. 29 N rogrr. Townsend, C. W. A comment on the use of the term Labrador in natural history. Rhodora 13: 236, 237. 25 N 1o11. Tiirckheim, H. von. Botanische Forschungsreise in Santo Domingo in den Jahren 1909 und 1910. Allgem. Bot. Zeits. I7: 129-135. N IQII. Van Hook, J. M. Indiana fungi. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. IgI0: 205-212. IgIt. Wangerin, W. Cornaceae. Pflanzenreich 47%: 1-101. i t24. 17 Ap I9IO. Wangerin, W. Garryaceae. Pflanzenreich 4°: 1-18. f. is. t2 Ap I9To, Wangerin, W. Nyssaceae. Pflanzenreich 4°: 1-19. f. 1-4. 12 Ap I9Io. Weigel, w. G., & Frothingham, E. H. The aspens: their growth and management. U.S. Forest Serv. Bull. 93: I-35. 31 My 1911. 36 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Weingart, W. Cereus coerulescens S.-D. var. melanacanthus K. Schum. Monats. Kakteenk. 21: 139-140. 15 5 I91I. Weingart, W. Cereus monacanthus Lem. Monats. Kakteenk. 21: 157- 160. 15 O 19g1t. Weiss, F.E. The British Assocation for the Advancement of Science. Address to the botanical section. Science II. 34: 464-480. 13 O I9II. Wernham, H.F. Supplemental note on Hamelia. Jour. Bot. 49: 346. N 1911. Hamelia Brittoniana sp. nov. described. Wieland, G. R. On the Williamsonian tribe. Am. Jour. Sci. IV. 32: 433-466. f. 1-78. D 1911. Wieland, G. R. Recent contributions on cycadophytans. Am. Jour. Sci. 1Vs 32: 473-476: f,: 20... D 1911. Williams, I. C. Additional facts about the chestnut blight. Science LL 34: 904; 9OS-> 24-IN IGE, Wilson, E.H. New Chinese plants. Horticulture 14: 626-628. 4N IQII. Wilson, E.H. The kingdom of flowers. An account of the wealth of trees and shrubs of China and of what the Arnold Arboretum, with China’s help, is doing to enrich America. Nat. Geog. Mag. 22: 1003-1035. N 1911. [Illust.] Includes numerous photographs of named Chinese trees, etc. Wilson, W. B. A rare Mexican cycad. Trans. Kansas Acad. Sci. 23, 24: 132-137. Ja 1911. [Illust.] Dioon edule. Winslow, E. J. Lycopodium flabelliforme. Am. Fern Jour. 1: 141- 143. 29 N I9gItI. Witton, H. B. Diatoms. What they are and where they are found Jour. and Proc. Hamilton Assoc. Sci. 25, 26: 38-46. 1910. Wolff, H. Unmbelliferae-Apioideae-Bupleurum, Trinia et reliquae Ammineae heteroclitae. Pflanzenreich 478: 1-214. f. 1-24. 2Au 1910. , Wooster, L. C. The origin and development of plant and animal instincts. A theory of evolution in which life is the central agent. . Trans. Kansas Acad. Sci. 23, 24: 227-231. Ja 1911. Zon, R., & Briscoe, J. M. Eucalypts in Florida. U.S. Forest Serv. Bull. 87: 1-47. pl. 1-5 +f. r. 29 Ap 1911. Zon, R., & Graves, H. S. Light in relation to tree growth. U. S. Forest Serv. Bull. 92: 1-59. f. I-10. 30 Je 1911. MEMOIRS OF THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB A series of technical papers on botanical subjects, published at irregular intervals. Price $3.00 a volume, Not offered in exchange. No. 1; not furnished separately : Bailey, Liberty soo Stuidias of the types of various species of the genus Carex. Pages 1-85. 25 My 18809. Yai 1, No. 2; not ae ee — tely : Martindale, Isaac Comly. Marine algae of t sr ats coast and adjacent waters my Staten Island. Pages 87-111. 24 Ae Vol. 1, No. 3; price, 75 cents Spruce, Richard. Aéfaticae Bolivianae, in Andibus ‘Boliviae sctearitine annis 1885-6, a cl. H. H. Rusby lectae. Pages 1 13-140. 20 Ja ce Vol, 1, No. 4; price, 75 cents: Stubcevank Edward Lewis: On seedless fruits. Pages 141-187. 30 My 1890, Shee 2, No. 1; not furnished separately : Halsted, Byron David. Reserve food-materials in buds and surrounding parts. Pages 1-26, ioe PBS go. Vol. . ae 2; price, 75 cents: ee Vail, Anna Murray, & Hollick, Charles Arthur. —— to the ee ee Virginia. Pages 27-56, poe Be . 23 D 18090 : Vol. 2, No. 3; not furnished separately : Sore Holm, Herman Theodor. Contributions to the knowledge of the _ Of. =4 some North A American plants. Pages 57-108, plates Pe 15 Ap 18 i: Vol. 2, No. 4; price, 75 cen =~ Fie Wheelock, William Efner. The genus Polyga/a in ak America. Pages W056 152. 30D 18or. ar Vol. 3, No1; not furnished separately : a Small, John Kunkel, & Heller, Amos Arthur. Flora of western North Carolina and contiguous territory. Pages 1-39. 20 F 1892. No. 2; price, $2.00: - Morong, Thom ) iadaceee of North Americs [with illastratoas of all the species]. Pages £56, pire 20-74. 15 Mr 1893. Vol. 3, No. 3; not furnished separately : z Rusby, Henry Hurd. An enumeration of the plants collected in Bolivia by Miguel : Bang. [Part 1. me Pages 1-67. 28 Ap 1893. a) a Vol. 4, No. 1; not ‘Se, s ‘ Underwood, Lucien —— Index Hepfaticarum. Part I, Bibliography. ge I-91. 10 Je 1893 Vol. 4, No. 2; not furnished separately : a as Small, John Kunkel, & Vail, Anna Murray. Report on the botani tanical explora- : on of southwestern ries 2 during the season of 1892. Pages. ca pla : eas: -18N agit 7 Ap 1894. oe oe Vol. 4, No. 3; price, 50 cents Rusby, Henry Hurd. An enumeration of the Pants cole fn Biv by Mig _ Bang. Part 2. eee 203-274. 10 Mr-17 Ap a Vol. 4, No. 4; price, 50 cen Pettit, Anna Gtockton: Arachis hypogaca L. ee 275-296, plates ws 5 Je es Vol. 4, No. 5 5; price, 6 cents : : ‘ethes ic The North Se ne sae sot ee a a Pee iss an rice, List of Pteridophyta and spsedoiies 8 aes Se et without cultivation in northeastern orth America. Pages 1-377. 4 D 1893-31 D 1894. Vol. 6, No. 1; price, $1.25: Relate, Henry Hurd. An ppd of the plants collected in Bolivia by Miguel Bang. Part 3. Pages I-1 7 N 1896. a2; not furnished separat vi ely: Grout, Abel Joel. A revision of the North American /sothectaceae and Brachythecia. Pages 131-210. siege Vol o. 3; price, 50 ¢ Hazen, Tracy Elliot. The eh history of Giecus Jacigsts ( Haematococcus Basalt. Bales 21 rk plates 86, 87 Saad Ss . Je 1899. 4; price, 50 : Underwood, L pe Kn A review ar the Hei of ferns proposed prior to 1832. Becks 247-283, I ou 99. Vol. 6, No. 5; price, 25 cen Fink, Bruce. Notes on lichen distribution in es upper Mississippi Valley. Pages,285-307. 1 D 1899. Vol. 7; price, $3.00 Howe, Marshall Avery. sin i paticae ‘and Wanknee of California. Pages 1-208 » plates 88-122. 5 Aul ig z not furnished dame 3 ly : -Bloyd, Francis Ernest. The ponipsentive embryology of the Rubiaceae, Part I. Pie ein I-26, ee, he 26 Au‘ 1899. Part II. Pages 27-112, plates 5-15 Vol. 8, No. 2; price, $1.00 vans, Alexander William. panes 3 rs of the United States and Canada. Pages 113-183, plates 26-22. 15 F - Vol. 8, No. mg orice. 75 cents: we Britton, Elizabeth Gertrude, & T: aylor, Alexandrina. The life Mas of Agus stron lineata, Pages 185-211, pies 27-91. 30 Au 1902. Pista j Price, $3.00 : Emest Stanley. the ES Pages Pa plates | 1-9. t/ 4 O 1900. No longer 3 sold except in complete sets of the Memoi 2 : Vol. 10; price, $3.00 gs soc ors a Sandford. History of Pre-Clusian botany: in its relation to Aster, ages i-xii, 1-447. 22 we tpt i. Ad, No. 1; price, $1.75: The Now, American So rdariaceae. Pages 1-134, plates 1-19. Griffiths, David, Sa My Igor. ao apie ‘ae Didi of the United States. as ae ce rnc i ora New Fiovence tad and Acs (Baba Islands). —— Pages Sor = crt z eon of the North American Page ec Bie 10 Je ee ati f Bio as Ae with dis in Aste age EAI 2 tes ri. 15. Mr 1906. a oe Vol. 14, No. 1; price, $1.25: et ar Simmons. A study Pthe Lact ee 0, wer ar ZO My i9ck study of the Lac ariae of the United States. < ol. 14, No. 2) price, 75 cents : te its ee aR eas ervations on the California vine disease. Pages 111-153, pale “iBJe 1910, - Dept. of Botany. Columbia ‘Univety Now York City VOL. 39 FEBRUARY 1912 NO. 2. BULLETIN OF THE ae TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB — €ditor PHILIP DOWELL Associate €ditors JEAN BROADHURST _ MARSHALL Avery Howe Ernest DuNBAR CLARK 3 HERBERT MAULE RicHARDS- - ALEXANDER WILLIAM EVANS | NORMAN TAYLOR CONTE Nis: 2) Variation in the floral structures of Vitis (Plates 1-3). . . M, J. Dorsey 37 : The relation of Gato bog. vegetation to the chemical nature of peat : soils . RE Studies in decgiens) lashes se The reas of the nome of Pyronema = w So (Plate qs. . RED J. SEAVER 63 _ The oa ‘sekigstag plate of Nantucket—1X. EUGENE P. BICKNELL ee, 10 sweTDToCAn See: ata p THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB tee IP a, m President 3 eo ae aa - EDWARD S. BURGESS, Pu.D. Vice- Presidents _ JOHN: HENDLEY BARNHART, A.M., M.D. HERBERT M. RICHARDS, Sc.D. Sees and Treasurer’ ce = = <2 °*. BERNARD 0. DODGE, Pu.B. : To eae cae jee of eee Columbia guahisen’: ‘ York City Totes pace ON MEETINGS me 3 Meaiigtn twice each month from October to May inclusive: the second Tuesday, a, | 5 he 8:00. Bf M. ; at: the “American Museum of Natural History; the last Mare ae at & “fi P.M ~My ay the Se eigr See: of the New York Botanical Garden PUBLICATIONS — ae All subscriptions = other business communications relating to the Soret fy Dene should be addressed to the ‘Treasurer, Baines O. Dodge » Dept. ste r , Columbia hipaa, New York City. ~ Bulletin, Monthly, established 1870. g aes $3. 00 a year; single ceuben 30° Of former. volumes, only 24-38 can be supplied separately ; certain numbers volumes | are available, int the. ‘entire stock ‘of some numbers has bee comple tion of sets. "Manuscripts ‘intended for publication in es =o essed to Philip tere, Editor, Port Richmond, N.Y. - Pric we a year. Manuscripts in-~ ) REYA hose be addressed to Nona a SG Sse East pernase, sroag aaa N. ay “proof tb. the editor. 25 copies. of aa cover is” wanted, or if more than 25, ee Vol. 39 No, 2 BULLETIN OF THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB ee ee FEBRUARY tg12 Variation in the floral structures of Vitis* M. J. Dorsey (WITH PLATES I-3) The genus Vitis has invited special attention botanically and horticulturally on account of its economic importance. The normal morphology of the flower is, of course, well known, and some observations have been made respecting variation in the different floral members. It would seem, however, that there is accessible no sufficient account of variation in the floral types. In the present paper the writer proposes to bring together some general facts and observations and especially to record some studies on the structural and numerical variation in the floral parts of certain species and varieties. GENERAL FLORAL HABITS OF VITIS The flower of Vitis presents a number of interesting variations, occurring both in the number and in the development of floral parts. In the flowers of many other genera where there is a multiplication of floral envelopes, there is often a complete or partial metamorphosis of some of the members into others, as in doubling, where stamens may be found showing a more or less complete transformation into petals. In Vitis, however, there occur either only completely developed floral members, or if there are modifications, they are in the direction of the suppression of certain members. There is, moreover, a close numerical relation * June 1911. Laboratory of Plant Physiology, Cornell University, Contri- bution No. 4. [The BULLETIN for January 1912 (39: 1-36) was issued 10 F 1912.] 37 38 Dorsey: VARIATION IN FLORAL STRUCTURES OF VITIS between members of the floral organs in the several whorls; and this relation obtains when there occurs either an increase or decrease in the number of parts of the flower. FLOWER TyPEs: Vitis may be regarded as dioecious, polygamo- dioecious, or perfect. Individual vines of V. vulpina and V. bicolor occur in the wild in either the staminate or the perfect form. By staminate is meant forms in which no well-developed pistils are produced. In the open the staminate plants occur in the greater number; of the 347 vines observed by the writer, 218 were staminate and 129 perfect. In these species the reflexed or recurved type of stamen was an invariable accompaniment of the perfect flower; that is, in no case were upright stamens found along with well- developed stigmas. Two wild vines, however, of V. vulpina were found in which the stigmas were partially developed. Yet the upright stamen form is to be regarded as signalizing the typical - perfect flower, since, as is shown later, pollen development in the reflexed stamen may be poor. As has been observed by Engelmann (’94) and others, the cultivated varieties, on the other hand, have two distinct floral types which are quite constant for-all of the individual vines of a variety. These types are both perfect forms, the one possessing upright and the other reflexed or recurved stamens. As might be expected, the staminate form is not found under cultivation, except In rare instances where it may be of the self-sterile varieties, It may be of interest to consider briefly the significance of the perfect form of flower, in general. From the standpoint of the evolution of the floral forms, either we may regard the perfect flower as the original form, and the pistillate and staminate forms as being derived from this: or we may consider the original form to have had diclinous flowers, and the perfect form to have been a later development. grown in order to pollinate some’ There occur in the known species of Vitis, flowers (1) with stamens upright and pistils abortive (functionally staminate), (2) stamens upright and pistil fully developed and functional (perfect), and (3) stamens reflexed, pollen more or less abortive, and fully developed pistils (sometimes functionally pistillate). DorRSEY: VARIATION IN FLORAL STRUCTURES OF VITIS 39 Flowers possessing no stamens do not occur, or at least have not been recorded. Among these existent floral types which way is the evolution taking place? Goebel (’98) states ‘as a further peculiarity of the angiospermous flower that it is predominantly hermaphrodite, and unisexual flowers can be proved to be fre- quently the result of arrest of either the microsporophylls or the megasporophylls.”’ The perfect form of flower occurs in the cultivated varieties of many species of grape. In fact, this form of flower, according to Engelmann, has, by some, been considered of taxonomic value in V. vinifera. As has been noted, however, in wild vines of V. bi- color and V. vulpina the perfect flower with upright stamens was not observed in 347 individuals. Nevertheless, Beach (’98 and ’99) and Booth (’02) have shown that in many cultivated forms with perfect flowers, having reflexed stamens, the pollen is abortive to a variable extent, this often rendering the flower pistillate,— at least functionally. Under similar conditions, also, vines are found bearing flowers with partially developed stigmas; and func- tionally these may be considered on the border line between the perfect and staminate forms. (PLATE 1, FIG. 9.) Even taking into consideration these variations, there were observed to occur among the wild vines native to the region about Ithaca and Geneva, N. Y., only the staminate form and the perfect form with reflexed stamens. This would seem to indicate that the evolution is toward the dioecious habit. In the genera closely related to Vitis there is a similar condition with respect to differentiation. According to Small, Cissus L. is perfect or sometimes polygamous, Ampelopsis Michx. mostly perfect, and Parthenocissus Planch. perfect or polygamo-monoe- cious. In this regard the degree of differentiation in Vitis and in the genera related to it is therefore considerable. These varia- tions are both structural and functional. It is not clear which is the most primitive form, so that attempts to determine precisely the direction toward which evolutionary changes are now taking place would be largely speculation. THE FLOWER CLUSTER: The branching habit of the grape is sympodial. The tendrils, or early in the growth of the shoot, the clusters, are the terminal growths of the stem. Upon further 40 DorsEy: VARIATION IN FLORAL STRUCTURES OF VITIS elongation of the shoot new tendrils become terminal, while the older tendrils and clusters assume a lateral position upon the stem, opposite and alternating with the leaves. Intermediate forms between tendrils and flower clusters are common. Durand (’o1) shows that in their origin and anatomical structure the grape tendrils and clusters are identical, and that they may change naturally one to the other. Tendrils frequently occur that bear a number of buds, the tendril retaining in such cases its irritability in the region of the buds and twining much in the same way as the normal tendril. The flower clusters vary considerably, both in size and in number éf clusters upon the cane, in the different varieties and species. Instances are common in the varieties of V. Labrusca in which five or more clusters are borne in succession on a single cane. This may be accounted for largely by the fact that in this species a tendril or cluster is usually borne opposite each leaf (“continuous tendrils’). In the other native species, which have no tendril or cluster for each third leaf (‘‘intermittent tendrils’’), the number of clusters per cane is reduced somewhat, the usual number being two or three. The staminate cluster usually bears more flowers, has greater fragrance, and blooms earlier in the open than the perfect form. The flowers on the main axis of the cluster open commonly from one to four days or more earlier than those on the “shoulder.”’ The blooming period of the different varieties and species varies much, and in the case of V. vulpina and V. bicolor the blooming periods rarely overlap, V. bicolor flowering last. THE FLOWER: The grape flower is hypogynous. The calyx is represented by a narrow rim at the base of the flower. The normal perfect form has five green petals with five stamens op- posite. Yellowish nectariferous glands occur between the stamens and are equal in number to them. There is a large sessile stigma. The carpels are from two to four in number, each usually with two ovules. The perfect form differs from the staminate merely in Possessing a fully developed and functional pistil, this usually being abortive to the extent that no stigma is developed in the staminate flower. Engelmann (’94) divides the pistil-bearing form into two types, DorsEY: VARIATION IN FLORAL STRUCTURES OF VITIS 41 the ‘‘perfect’’ and-the “imperfect hermaphrodites.”’ This dis- tinction was made asa result of the difference in the filaments; the “perfect hermaphrodite”’ having upright stamens (PLATE 1, FIG. 1); and the imperfect the reflexed stamens, in which the filaments curl back and down, bringing the anthers below the plane of the stigma (PLATE 1, FIG. 2). From the standpoint of self pollination this last mentioned position is an important con- sideration. THE COROLLA: The corolla is gamopetalous; the united petals “in the bud forming the “cap” (PLATE I, FIG.3 and 5). In the opening of the flower the petals break away at the base and remain united at the tips. This is one of the characters distinguishing Vitis from Cissus, the latter opening by breaking at the apex instead of at the base. OPENING OF THE FLOWER: In the bud the cohering petals com- pletely enclose the stamens and pistil. The first evidence that the flower is opening is the breaking away of the petals at the base. In most cases the break occurs at the base of one petal, the small fracture in the epidermis thus formed permitting further drying out of the surrounding tissue. Other petals break away at the base, curling as they break, thus separating one from another along the shallow sutures between. When the petals are released at one side, those on the opposite side hold fast. - With further drying out, the tension brings the cap off sidewise, until it finally hangs by one petal, which soon breaks away, allowing the cap to fall (PLATE I, FIG. 4 and 5). In other cases all the petals break away at about the same time, the individual petals gradually separating and curling up at the base, until they finally open wide and fall off. The cap may be only a few minutes in coming off, or it may remain partly open for several hours, depend- ing upon the environmental conditions. Sometimes the cap breaks at the base and comes off almost instantly, the filaments gradually straightening out in the cases where the stamens are upright, or curling backward if the stamens are normally reflexed. It is quite probable that the movements of the cap are pri- marily due to a drying out process rather than to pressure from the stamens. If the cap is removed, the separate petals soon curl up, as in the normal opening. Ina very few cases the cap breaks 42 DorsEY: VARIATION IN FLORAL STRUCTURES OF ViTIs away at the top and the stamens extend through the slit. In some varieties this occurs more commonly at the beginning of the blooming season. The filaments are curled up under the cap before the flower opens and soon become straight and upright or reflexed (according to the flower type) when the cap is released or removed. In the wild staminate forms the filaments soon curl back, bringing the anthers near the base of the ovary (PLATE I, FIG. 6). In some cases the cap will hold a part of the stamens together while one or more may be released, the latter soon curling backward if the stamens are teflexed. The flower opens in much the same way in all of the flower types. Beach (’92) observed that in a number of varieties the anthers opened before the cap was thrown off. SPECIAL VARIATION IN FLOWER PARTS VARIATION IN THE STAMEN NUMBER: There are usually five stamens in the grape flower. In order to determine how constant the number of stamens per flower is, the flowers on a number of clusters were classified with respect to stamen number. This classification shows considerable variation in the number of sta- mens per flower, both above and below the normal number five, and also that the proportion of flowers having either more or less than five stamens was nearly constant for the clusters of each vine. This proportion was found to be quite characteristic for each vine without regard to the type of flower, variety, or species. In a total of 115 clusters counted, not a single vine was found in which the proportion of flowers for each stamen number was not quite constant. The proportion may differ materially in the different vines of a variety, as in Petite Sirah, a variety of V. vinifera; on one vine (TABLE I) there are more flowers having five stamens than six, while on an adjacent vine there are more having six stamens than five. TABLE I gives in a summarized form the data for all of the counts made; it includes for various species and certain cultivated varieties the total number of flowers per cluster, the number of flowers in each cluster for each stamen number, and the necessary indications respecting the type of flowers. The number of stamens varies from 3 to 9, or in other words, two below the usual number DorRsEY: VARIATION IN FLORAL STRUCTURES OF VITIS 43 TABLE I Uv | 2 Class frequency for no. of stamens Sh ; on Se per flower gmk Variety or species & S 3 25 & os 3 SS. ee a ae ee zo i = a ° = 2 6 8|o|eé o . SOU ALGMAOr es wean cues ot a emcee ee Or eee Meare 2s BNE ale Me! Ems Dae a VoGestalis<. co. as = & Cod 88 323 Fite ees cay ee i es I 125 576 Moning hoake Ir eee nf nM 2 147 560 ER oT te or et i Ss fe 37 551 . Sth baagreneteas is 3 2 38 559 2 rg tig aC 3 20 422 PEs Rp Ing Cae Chic NOR or al > Ce 4 25 321 PB ities ae kaw wile S, a) a 315 Seana ee eee ee a : 17 595 Sa een OY coe oo ie 2 252 et ae er wie Cig et ot Ea &- 13 558 Rites Weare Ne ie - 4 477 Noy lige eee gee hiatal a — 7 5 I2 500 Ve PUI PERA cans oe WwW 2 I I3 84 Ses soe cere os a ce ee 9 IOI PRs eens eh a S sia i II 118 UAE Oe eg Meee = es 4 16 128 Anns Te ee ee ie ey 5 Io 135 Ree Pre ee eh. obs a I 13 93 ce adds Goat pas womens oy Ny 2 25 92 eR Re Bete yr ee i = 3 18 166 eo RRS sare yar nag pile Ms Pe ae 10 85 Rr ne heh eey is x 5 13 100 SUE) Cie er aa ee er ed ts . I 9 II9 Teoh an Dag ie Se Sinai aa a “0 me 2 vs 99 sae ee ale ath Wag Ger as iy et 3 3 90 See mae More es 5 381 ae igae ar ” 2 2 6 371 Sa) et stant Us ok ECT si sign ac a 409 Rooyen ee en, G es es I 20 431 Ah ee ek es by 2 9 290 Pea ON ne epee en ag - 3 13 276 VA ipa yt fs ane a 7 233 Vee ee i - 5 9 424 Le Oe ee : oe OC 9 393 BP SARE et Aes, alana o is 7 6 315 Re Ne iro ear Nets bd os I 7 132 Se ee de ee 8 177 Re ee a a te 6 149 ee Gey ee eae “ ce re 23 I51 ER ae . pe URLs 23 247 i ea Tee ac he sate) Ss) 8 135 Pe Saree, i ere. 12 172 reed org AC idly li ce a ae 21 244 44 DorsEY: VARIATION IN FLORAL STRUCTURES OF VITIS % 5 Class frequency for no. of stamens | S4 bc ao per flower ceagtT: Variety or species 5S 3 wo So deicg (de eee ok £3 ae Sees 2 a \3| 4 5 7 9 Ve PING oi ae Wee 16 ar | 211 I2 244 ie Fail years ee “6 tO 28 | 118 4 150 Be gehts i eee ee a ee 9 217 ae RRet beac a Se be 26 | 194 8 228 “i eee is Sincere i cg Zi} 238 13 272 See eetis ka aaa ks “Ee 18} 259 15 292 ~ posi eal alee 9.20 Lae W iio’ Qi I 23 AST | Pape 579 LA Sie shea Nae . a 2 Ir | 159 38 209 wee eee edhe are : ee FE 42 )392 I 470 i Tinh ss Cotta he 4 24| 481 ! 156 661 ee Ww gS I 60 | 347 63 470 me yous ee i a 2 29 | 325 a3 426 eu he et 2 an 10 | 362 65 437 BO oes ue a 2 4 18 | 348 oI 457 are ee ou wees 5 24 | 416 70 510 es Eecueeoere ues % u I 328 2 538 Badd, gt oenaie p : = 2 55.1 483" goa 738 738 NO st tee een eenes . Bg 23 09 I 3 a oar toes aes 4 26 | 424 | 161 | 7 618 Concord (V. Lab.) 22 0. tied Ceo 4| 67 30 IOI BO feet e eet eee . 2 2 a 32 22 58 es Meeks ees Sees ee I 61 26-| 2 be 0 be sree eS cle 4 3 75 Et ae 88 Brighton (Lab., Hee [eC ag 13 44 38 | 2 127 = ty aoe : 7 2 Ir 83 22010 7F 117 sees 3 ee a ee r18 Hybrid Franc (vin., rup.) | C mer ey 1| 47 83 | 6 137 i ie oe i S 2 I 34 | 106] 6 147 3 27 SCTE OY 114 Jaeger No. 43 (vin.) y etiels Cc 9 itr 20 PATE ye oS 187 eee ne 2 a2 |} 193 (47 |. i 193 Janesville (Lab., a oe ee a a ee i A | 47 46/6} 1 ce “se “cc Te “ce ae . . 5 59 56 . ani 5 ss ss A ge 2 56 |66/|11r/} 1 136 oe “ae sé “ee 4 3 32 32 2 69 ve is hae OR ig 5 AS iae 93 6 I 41} 47), 8)-2 98 Massasoit (Lab., vin.)... Cc ah 10o| 81 a7 \ 4 175 . * ae a = 2 y 56 50| 6 I19 3 42 38 | 6 89 Norton (aest., LAOS Ci. ss So rie yt t | 18|46|18| 2 85 ecw 2 6 52 |64|14| 1 137 DorRSEY: VARIATION IN FLORAL STRUCTURES OF ViITIS 45 } | | | | | | | 3°) 3 = Class frequency for no. of stamens Sy Bu s g per flower Ses Variety or species 5 S 5 nae baal 3 oe 2 wl ad 4 ae UY Petite Sirah (vin.) *... |, Se ee le) a 2 268 ae “é shel aint su sth ‘ oe 2 292 ae F ce he a a a ee oe 3 167 oe oe oe t eRe e “eé ee I 160 ae e Be ew ieee ae oe “e 2 280 | te “ ‘i Wie cs “ se I 190 “ee “ec hai es Senate a “cc “ee 2 4 224 cei oe PEP een ne ce ae 3 5 195 “ec ry é + eects “e se I 9 128 Seibel No. 2..:......... Ho Sites ar 170 eo es ag ede 156 SDR sin wba a fe * 3 179 ee ene ee ee a 165 V. Labrusca(small cluster)} W | og | x a 24 Cross (Lab. & PRS 5 Cc ? I 35 372 “cs fe a ase “ss ‘cc 2 38 540 “sé ce hcon ee ‘e “ee 3 6 183 Cross (Lab. X vulp.)....| C 1H QI x 13 494 sé A ad Oia es “ec 4“ 2 9 645 oe tae RO eet crit ae ae 3 5 284 ae Coe bag Shans Rate oe oe 4 5 340 “ 3 ie ea gs a “c “ 5 I 14 260 sé Le ae, “a “6 6 13 380 Cross (Lab. X bic. x vin.) ae aie OE a cr 155 cza “é 3 “cc ae 2 if 1s 84 Cross (Lab. X vin.) ..... eae 4 228 e ee nig ete “ee “e 3 I 379 Cross (Lab. X vin. X oe ale ne es 63 338 “ee “a “ec “ II5 552 aie iets tengs eat oe a SNE Hees Goa Ves SO eNhe REE COIS Ie SMR Ge ne I15| 6 (2,630 21,385)/5,829) 783) 82 30,721 * Counted in 1909. T Counted in roro. and four above it. The highest number of flowers found in any cluster was 738, which occurred in a wild vine of V. vulpina. The staminate cluster usually has more flowers than either form of the perfect. It will be seen from an inspection of TABLE I that the variation 46 DorsEY: VARIATION IN FLORAL STRUCTURES OF ViITIs in the stamen number has, in general, a definite direction in the flowers of each vine. In most cases the mode falls on five, but in some of the cultivated varieties, as in Jaeger No. 43 and Seibel No. 2, the mode is distinctly on six; while in Janesville there are only a few flowers having five stamens, with the number having six and seven practically equal, more having eight stamens than five, and three flowers having nine. This is a striking variation from the usual number five. Among those included in this table there were no flowers observed having double the number of stamens, the nearest approach to this being nine. The summary of TABLE I, giving the total number of flowers for each stamen number, shows considerable variation in the number of stamens per flower in Vitis. The stamen number is variable in all the clusters included, whether of a species, variety, or cross. Out of a total of 30,721 grape flowers in which the stamens were counted, there are more (21,385) having five stamens than any other number; more (5,829) having six stamens than four, which is represented by 2,630 flowers; 783 have seven sta- mens and 82 have eight; while the two extremes are represented by much smaller numbers, 6 having nine stamens and 6 also three. The trend of the variation, therefore, is toward an increase in the number of stamens rather than a decrease. VARIATION IN COROLLA NUMBER: The number of parts to the cap is usually the same as the number of stamens (PLATE I, FIG. 3 and 5). Exceptions to this occur where two small stamens are found opposite one petal, or where two filaments are united more or less throughout their entire length; but this occurs so seldom, and the relation between the petal and the stamen number is so close, that TABLE I may be regarded as showing fairly accurately the variation in the number of petals in the cap as well as the stamen number. VARIATIONS IN THE NECTARIFEROUS GLANDS: The nectariferous glands vary much in color and size; they also correspond very closely in number with the stamens and petals. On some vines they are pale yellow while in other cases they are a dark yellow or yellowish green. On some of the cultivated varieties, as Concord and Worden of the blue varieties, and Diamond, Leader, or Pocklington of the green, they still persist in the mature berry Dorsey: VARIATION IN FLORAL SfRUCTURES OF Vitis 47 as yellowish or brownish dots around the base of the pedicel. In PLATE I, FIG. 7, 8, and 9, are shown some of the forms they assume in the staminate flower. In FIG. 7 (PLATE 1) the nectarifer- ous gland forms a distinct five-sided ridge around the abortive pistil; in FIG. 8 (PLATE 1) the glands protrude distinctly between the stamens; and in FIG. 1 (PLATE 1) they are shown in the perfect flower. Closely observed, this organ exhibits differences in almost every vine. VARIATION IN THE PISTIL: Where the number of stamens varies either above or below the usual number five, changes result in both the external and internal structure of the ovary. Externally the number of lateral surfaces of the pistil vary and correspond in number to the stamens. Internally there is associated with an for each stamen number, 4 berries that had five stamens, and all had two carpels; of the 29 berries that had six stamens 22 had 2 carpels and 7 had three; 23 had seven stamens, and of these 15 had 2 carpels and 8 had 3; 5 berries had eight stamens, one of which had 2 carpels and 4 had three. In the staminate flowers this relation, of course, would not hold. STRUCTURAL VARIATION IN THE STIGMA: A careful distittction does not seem to have been made by previous writers on this sub- ject between the stigma and pistil. Engelmann ('94) observes that ‘the sterile plants do bear male flowers with abortive pistils, so that while they never produce fruit themselves they may assist in fertilizing the others.” Booth ('02) states that “all of the Staminate flowers, so called, which I have observed, have small abortive pistils; which also conforms with the observations of Engelmann. Others report staminate flowers with no trace of Pistil remaining.” In the same publication he states further that “there is a vine on this station which bears both staminate and hermaphrodite flowers. Mr. N. B. White, Norwood, Mass., "eports that he has a male (?) Rip. X Lab. vine which has fruited twice in the last thirty years, the pistils evidently varying in 48 DorsEY: VARIATION IN FLORAL STRUCTURES OF ViTIs strength but being generally too weak to produce fruit.” Munson (’99) mentions that it is clear that the staminate vine can not bear since it has no pistil, ‘‘unless the vine changes its action from producing purely staminate flowers to bearing pistillate flowers, which in two or three instances only, in all my observation, I have known to occur.” In the instance mentioned by White, the stigma probably had a development similar to that shown in FIG. 10, PLATE 2, which isa photograph of two clusters from one cane of a Marian X Pocklington cross, which grew in the vineyard of the New York State Experiment Station. It will be seen from this photograph ~ that the flowers of this vine are functionally so nearly midway between the pistillate and perfect forms that on the same cluster some pistils have sufficient stigmatic tissue to permit of pollen germination, while others do not. During the three seasons in which the writer had the opportunity to observe this vine some clusters bore fruit each season. In PLATE 2, FIG. 15-18, there are shown photomicrographs of median sections of four pistils from this vine. Flowers with a similar stigmatic development have been observed by the writer on two wild vines of V. vulpina and also in a number of crosses at the New York State Experiment Station, in which V. Labrusca, V. bicolor, V.vulpina, and V. vinifera occurred. The series of median sections included (PLATES 2 and 3, FIG. 11-24) shows practically all gradations in stigmatic develop- ment between the truly perfect and the staminate forms. Even the purely staminate forms represented (PLATE 3, FIG. 19-24) in the sections show an abortive pistil with no stigmatic tissue, yet having carpels and rudimentary ovules. The statement of Booth (’o2) that all staminate flowers observed have small abortive pistils is corroborated. By following the series, then, it will be seen that the seed coats in the ovules are not fully developed in staminate forms and only partially so in some of the intermediate forms with small stigmatic surfaces. This fact is significant in that it indicates, that there is not a complete segregation of the pistillate and staminate forms but a suppression of pistil develop- ment in the case of the staminate flowers. Median sections through the pistils of some of the intermediate Dorsey: VARIATION IN FLORAL STRUCTURES OF ViTIs 49 forms are shown in PLATE 2, FIG. 15-18; these show different stages of stigmatic development occurring on different vines. The seed coats in the ovules show considerable development in PLATE 2, FIG. 14-18. The material, with the exception of PLATE 3, FIG. 21-24, was all fixed just after the flower was completely open, so there is probably not more than one or two days’ difference in their relative ages; the others were fixed before blooming, to show the relative position of the anthers, filaments, and pistils in the bud. The crouched position of the filaments will be noted jn PLATE 3, FIG. 22. In many flowers, however, the filaments are €ven more crouched and bent than in this instance. SOME ABNORMALITIES OF THE PISTIL: Cases are rarely observed in which one or more anthers of a flower may be found with the filament adhering to the side of the pistil, the tissue of both filament and pistil being united. In this way the stigmatic tissue and the anthers, sometimes partly abortive or deformed, are brought into very close contact. Some abnormalities of this nature have been observed where the stigmatic and anther tissues are intermingled, the pollen being to all appearances normal. This adherence is probably due to a lack of differentiation in the meristem and does not seem to be a case similar to that observed by Chamberlain (’97) in Salix petiolaris, in which microsporangia were found in the placenta of the ovary, as well as stigmas de- veloping on stamens. Some vines bear flowers with distinctly pinkish stigmas. The writer has observed this in a few wild vines of both V. vulpina and V. bicolor, and also in a number of cultivated varieties, as in the R. W. Munson. The stigma is distinctly lobed in some Vines, both cultivated and wild, the lobes generally corresponding to the carpels. In varieties like the Goff, where many grapes on a cluster show distinct sutures, varying in number from one to three or four, this tendency can be seen soon after blooming; and in a few extreme cases the pistil may be nearly separated into two Parts. In outline the stigmatic surface varies much, being oval, flaring or flat. Under favorable conditions the stigma may become receptive before the corolla opens. This condition was observed by the writer in both Concord and Hubbard Seedless. The writer wishes to acknowledge his indebtedness to Dr. "Ne, Sol. Baracr 4913 50 DorsEY: VARIATION IN FLORAL STRUCTURES OF VITIS B. M. Duggar, of Cornell University, under whom this work was done as a topical problem, for helpful suggestions and criticisms, to Professor U. P. Hedrick, of the New York State Experiment Station, for courtesy in the use of material, and to Mr. Ernest Dorsey for assistance in obtaining some of the data. SUMMARY Vitis is dioecious, polygamodioecious, or perfect. The flower forms which occur are the staminate, and the perfect (1) with upright and (2) with reflexed stamens. Individual vines either within the variety or species are quite distinct with respect to these flower forms. In Vitis the flower forms resemble those of the closely related genera, Cissus L., Ampelopsis Michx., and Parthenocissus Planch. The direction of the evolutionary changes in the flower forms is not entirely clear. The typical staminate cluster is larger than either form of the pistil-bearing. The typical grape flower is 5-merous, although about 30 per cent show a variation from this plan. The petals, nectariferous glands, and stamens correspond closely in number. The dehiscence of the corolla seems to result largely from a drying- out process rather than from being pushed off by the straightening out of the filaments. The number of stamens per flower was found to vary from three to nine, the variation being independent of the flower form, variety, or species. The flowers from different: clusters of the same vine show in general the frequency of distribution that is characteristic of the vine. Clusters from different vines may have different arrays. When the stamens are increased or decreased, the petals and nectariferous glands, in general, correspond in number. An increase in the number of stamens is associated with an increase in the number of carpels. In short, the numerical relations of the members of the floral whorls are commonly maintained. In occasional vines the stigma is, throughout, only partially | developed. This condition may be regarded as an intermediate form between the pistil-bearing and the staminate forms, both in structure and function. The staminate flowers have rudimentary pistils, in which the stigmas and ovules are abortive. DoRSEY: VARIATION IN FLORAL STRUCTURES OF VITIS 51 The variations in the flower of Vitis may be grouped into two classes: first, meristic, which would include differences in the number of the organs per flower; and, second, functional, including variations in the extent of development of the poten, stigma, and ovules. UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA EXPERIMENT STATION. LITERATURE CITED Beach, S. A. Notes on self-pollination of the grape. N. Y. State Exp. Sta. Ann. Rep. 11: 597-606... 1892. Beach, S. A. Self-fertility of the grape. N. Y. State Exp. Sta. Bull, 157: 397-441. 1898. Beach, S. A. Fertilizing self-sterile grapes. N. Y. State Exp. Sta. Bull. 169: 331-371. 1899. Booth, N. O. A study of grape pollen. N. Y. State Exp. Sta. Bull. 224: 291-302. 1902. Chamberlain, C. J. Contribution to the life history of Salix. Bot. Gaz. 23: 147-179. pl. 12-18. 1897. Durand, E. The tendrils of the grape. Proc. Agr. et Vit. (Ed. L’Est) 22: 283-295. I901. Goebel, K. Organography of plants. Parts I and II. (Cf. p. 528, Pt. II.) English translation by Balfour. Oxford, 1905 Engelmann,G. The true grape vines of the United States. Illustrated descriptive catalogue of American grape vines. Fourth edition. 1-198 (cf. pp. 7-18). 1894. Munson, T. V. Investigation and improvement of American grapes. Texas Exp. Sta. Bull. 56: 217-285 (cf. p. 245). 1899. Explanation of plates 1—3 PLATE I Fic. 1. The perfect flower with upright stamens Fic. 2 and 6. The perfect flower with reflexed stamens; FIG. 6, wild Vitis vul- pina, ‘ Fic. 4and 5. The position of the stamens and corolla in different stages in the eres of the grape flower Fic. 3 and 5. United oetiie forming the ‘‘cap,”’ also differences in the number of foe in the corolla. Fic. 7, 8, and 9. Different forms of nectariferous glands in staminate flowers PLATE 2 Fic. 10. hoyle, ok of two — hee the same cane of a Marian X Pock- lington cross, sh where only par tially devel oped stigmas were present. 52 DorRSEY: VARIATION IN FLORAL STRUCTURES OF VITIS Fic. 11-18. A series of photomicrographs of median sections through pistils having stigmatic tissue developed in different degrees. PLATE 3 Fic. 19-24. A continuation of the series 11-18, PLATE 2, showing median sec- tions through the pistils of the grape; these would usually be classed as staminate flowers. IG. 21, 22, 23, and 24 are median sections of unopened buds showing the relative position of the calyx, corolla, stamens, and pistil. The crouched position of the fila- ments is shown in FIG. 22. Fe ale ec at ree ea The relation of Ohio bog vegetation to the chemical nature of peat soils* ALFRED DACHNOWSKI The ecological relation of plants to soils, particularly to the chemical nature of the substratum, is especially interesting and has been extensively studied from the standpoint of the distribution of species, the succession of vegetation, and the adaptability of crops to certain soils. In mountainous countries and even in states like Ohio, with soils of morainal and of varied geognostic nature, one can observe sharply delimited distinctions in the distribution and in the whole appearance of vegetation units. And yet, though many species are confined to soils with a definite chemical relationship, a great many plants can grow on soils widely dissimilar in kind. Are the reasons for the generally observed distinctions to be sought in the chemical constitution of the soil, or is the distributional relationship due to the physical characters, particularly to relations prevailing in regard to the amount of available water and the specific quantity required by the plants, and to the thermal condition in the soil? Not all field work is adapted to throw light on this vexed question of a long standing dispute. Difficult as is the attempt to establish a correlation between vegetation and any one factor of the environment, it is possible, however, to make such a corre- lation with peat soils, within the area here investigated. It is now generally recognized that the nature of a lake and bog environment is constantly selective, and that the associations and societies of plants succeeding one another are each charac- terized by a definite physiognomy in response to their dependence upon soil conditions under atmospheric influences essentially similar otherwise. In an earlier paper the writer has listed the successions of the more genetically related vegetation units, their associations and societies, occurring in Ohio lakes and peat deposits (Plant World 15: 25-39. 1912). ee * Published by permission of the State Geologist as Contribution No. 66 from the Botanical Laboratory of Ohio State University. This paper was read at the Wash- ington meeting (1911) of the American Chemical Society. 53 54 DACHNOWSKI: BOG VEGETATION AND PEAT SOILS In connection with the problem of the utilization of Ohio peat, both chemical and calorimetric analyses were made of the peat samples collected. With the exception of the potash, phosphoric acid, and lime analyses, and the analyses of TABLEs II and III, all determinations were made under the auspices of the United States Bureau of Mines as a part of more general investigations of the fuels of the United States. This cooperative work between the State and the Federal Government has been made possible through the considerate and helpful interest of Dr. Charles A. Davis, in charge of the peat investigations of the U. S. Bureau of Mines. The analyses, as might be expected, vary widely, but there is a certain uniformity in regard to their chemical character. The analyses show the following range in chemical composition : TABLE I CHEMICAL ANALYSES OF OHIO PEAT. RANGE OF CHEMICAL COMPOSITION Minimum Maximum Wolatile combustibles 0005 26s ick 2k ee 50.99 74.79 Hiced cari 2 oF ee ee sg sige so 16.56 33.64 RES ee AAA Ma se sis we Mea yee Oy Rees 3.65 25.44 jy Swat miags Ne Va a aor maria Meine icc ite ae WOR MAPLS 1.01 3-68 Pots CaO) os oe ee es EES Ne 0.10 0.98 Phosphoric acid CPsOs). 5 5 osc ee ad wie ie tee iy Se 0.03 0.50 STOO ie Ly Sek er ce Ry ye hag er 0.00 4.52 ‘Therinal vaie? Calories). os es 3,962.00 5,409.00 Through the courtesy of Professor J. W. Ames of the Wooster (Ohio) Experiment Station a more detailed analysis of the ash of peat soil is here appended in TABLE II. TABLE II ANALYSES OF PEAT SOILS, CHEMICAL DEPARTMENT, OnIO AGR. Exp. STATION TOTAL AMOUNTS FOUND ' | ae Locality | Ash | Mn | SiO, | SOg | ung’ | Cao | Mgo| Na2O| P,0,| K,0| N | . Fes Os) | 5302 Akron 9.66|.0056| 3.21 ce Ra! Sdol aT -299 1504. 3.42 5303| . 14.58|.0099| 6.18} .97| 2.91/2.870| .331 345|.3117| 3.24 5304) . 9.84|.0220|} 4.05) I.03| 2.19)3.580| .361 342|.1531| 3-38 5305) : ns 14.38)}.0332| 5.26) 1-03) 2.44|3.650| .297| ——| .460 .2956, 3.10 5306) : bd Ba 4.01) .88) 2.65|2.800| .345| —— 337|.1860. 3.18 sae Lodi —| ||} —] §:15|4-529] «570 2.366) .506|.4753, —— eager s | ht 27h 490) 8-373 342) 3239) —— 44 SRGnT Pitas Aes ER §-62|4.060| .650'2.040| .374|.3569 —— 14463) . rue enue oe 11.15|2.210| .660,1.944| .256|.9835 —— are . oe = —| | 4.08}3.050 '1.066| .3 basy6 — — a O12. SAO) 490120181 A201. 14162| McGuffey |——| —— a ——| ——]3.585 Shi we ati psig 2.48 DACHNOWSKI: BOG VEGETATION AND PEAT SOILS 55 The water from peat soils is relatively clear; in several places of the state it is used occasionally for drinking purposes. The suspended particles impart to it a tinge of color from olive green to brown. Analyses of samples of bog water and bog lake water give the following results: TABLE III CHEMICAL ANALYSES OF BOG WATER AND LAKE WATER FROM CRANBERRY ISLAND, BUCKEYE LAKE As Bog water from Ron wate Constituents in parts per million cranberry- sphagnum aden shrub Lake water | association | associatio Nitrogen as ahve oo : a 10.34 11.48 | 4.50 Nitrogen as free ammonia.......... 15-19 Insttopen ag itritds.., 3. 0 0 0.0005 0.0003 | 0.00000 Nierogen as nitrates: ¢ 0h | 0.20 | 0.2 0.1000 we ph RPS eet in get EN | 30 1.00 1.00 mrciiten CKyECR. >. 471.80 70.30 70 Alkalinity (as CaCOs)............. | 30.00 | 40.00 | 75.00 seibewrer AR CaCO ye vy cee oe | 74.00 72.00 | 76.00 PROMOS ir aie gc Sete Aan 4h ghey | 140.00 160.00 200.00 Loss on ses ie 100.00 0.00 | 4.0 The osmotic pressure of these solutions is the same as that of Ohio lakes, the average lowering of the freezing point varying between 0°.005 and 0°.o10 when compared with that of distilled water. The acidity of the solutions varies from less than 0.00075 to 0.004 normal acid when titrated with an 0.05 NaOH solution and phenolphthalein.* The several analyses submitted do not reveal the obvious distinction between successions of vegetation on peat soils and the changes in the chemical character of the peat. The fact that certain plant associations have an absolutely defined morphological and topographic distinction, and the fact that these contrasts must be attributed to conditions prevailing in the soil, directs special attention to the contrasts between peat soils of the various vegeta- tion units or groups of plants. The following series in TABLE IV is especially suggestive in showing the more typical features of the correlation. DAE sey seman ee cree eR * Livingston, B. E. The physiological properties of bog water. Bot. Gaz. 39: 348-355. 5 56 DACHNOWSKI: BOG VEGETATION AND PEAT SOILS The correlation phenomena between vegetation units in bogs and the character of the peat soil are not in all cases as those given in TABLE IV. There are many exceptions to the rule for reasons TABLE IV CORRELATION BETWEEN VEGETATION UNITS IN OHIO BOGS AND CHARACTER OF PEAT ILS | | | | on | - ‘ ty = o i ee A] ao se. 8 Pe ae ee Bag oe F i. g & s Ci vo 2 le = $ & Vegetation unit 38 a a = ~ 60.1 4 o' 2 o oO a ° My ot [=") is) Locality 5% = a 4- 23 D 1890. = Vol. 2, No, 3; not furnished separatel i Holm, Herman Theodor. Contributions to the know latees of the gerinain some North 4 American lenin Pages 57-108, plates ie 15 Ap om, Vol. 2, No. 4; price, 75 cents Wheelock, William Efner. ‘The genus Polygala in North America Pages oe ~ 152, -30 D'18o91. me Vol. 3, Nol; not farnished separately =~ / and. contiguous Sexiiory: “Pages 1-39. 20F packs ., Vol 3, No. 2;. Haye e Naiadaceae of North Maes erin ilustrations cok all the pec Pages ee plates 20- 20-74. 15 Mr 1893. - Hes! 3, No. 3; not furnished sepi Bang. (Part es . Pages 1- 28 A os Vol. 4, ie 1: not Sens parately : cien Marcus. Index Hipaticarum. Part I, Biography. : Vol. 4, No. 2; not furnished gates Ae r , Job aa Vail, Anna Murray. : Rey i tion of southwes tern Virginia saci the ——— 1802. gee 93-20%, ee ~~ Vol. 4, No. 3; ‘price, , 50 cents at a oe = Henry H ee An & 1 in Bolivia by M B Pages 203-274. 1oMr-17 Aps895- Vol. 4, No. 4; Latta bse es: es Arachis Avie a (275- _ Vol. 4, No. = price, “The North American 3 price, $3.00 at of- Sides Are amg and Spermatpita growing without cultivation in- northeastern America. Pages 1-377. 4 D 1893-31 D 1894. Vol. 6, No.1; price, $1.25: . Rusby, Henry Hurd. An Soneaping of the plants collected in Bolivia by Miguel Bang. Part 3. Pages I- 7 N 1896. Vol. 6, es not furnished separately Grout, Abel Joel. A revision of the North American saya and Brachythecia. Pages ye ae 30 Jl 1897. Vol. 6, No. 3; price, 50 ce He, Hazen, The life history of Spha sale oii ( Haematococcus x : pivivlis\. a 21 1-246, dig 86, 87 (colored ’). 8 Je 1899. ie ahs Vol. 0. 4; price, 50 cents Under Lucien Marcus. ne view of the genera of ferns proposed prior to 1832. Pages 247-283. 1 D 1899. eae > ; Vol. 6, No. 5; price, 25 cents ie Fink, Bruce. Notes on lichen distribution in the upper Mississippi Valley. Pages 285-307. 1 D 1899. Vol. 7 ; price, $3.00 : Howe, Marshall Avery. ane eae ‘and 4 peninn of California. Pages — yp , plates 88-122. § Au : 7 ee hs Vo ae x not farnished separately « | Gloyd, Francis Emest. The comparative embryology of the Rubiaceae. Par teas “tae I-26, poten i-g. 26 Au 1899. Part Il, Pages 27-112, plates ee : Vol. 8, No, 2; price, $1.00 - Alexander The a of the United States and Cee a gle 11 3-183, gored 16-22. I5 Fi ‘ : Vol. 8, No. age BAe 75 cents : . Bitton, Eltzabeth Gertrude, & Taylor, Alexandrina. The life history of ——- lineata, Pages pate agers Ss ae 3° Au 1902. Emest Stanley. a cat aiihaiete: Pages es eis : oe 4 O 1900. No Tonge wold except in ‘complete sets of _ Memoirs ol. 10; price, $3.00 a 5 Baward a History of Pre-Clusian botany i in its relation to Aster, es i-xii, 1-447. 22 Nt 1902. ps en : The x . 21, No. 1; price, $1.75 : mye My ere e North American Sordariaceae. “Pages 1-134, plates 1-19: Hazen, vol 11, No. 2; price, $1.7 Tracy Elliot. The Ulothricaceae ‘and Casati secs of the United States. = Pages 135-259; plates 20-42. 200 1902. : Vol. 12, No. 1; price, $1.50: Northrop, Alice » Rich. Flora of New “Providence and Andros (Bahama Islands). 10 D 1902. ne aca 5 plates Fag map. oe ol. 12, No. 2; price, $1.00: 2 er, iewrand Sammon. ‘A contribution to a revision of the North ncoreae! ce rdnaceae. Pages 99-194. 13 Je 1906. “ee - esa _ Vol. 12, No. 3; ai 75 cents * volt regeneratio’ Pages. 195-241. to Je 1907 aan ea eee ol. 13; price, $3.00: ea a ndf ows ariations of Biotia n Asters, wi with dis : cussic variability in Aer a ak 4415, plates ae 15M 6. ae ohn uae ce, $1.25: : me _ A study of 1 3 ee Pages ¢ 1-109, f ~ pare me My 1 took of the eam! of the United States. a Vol. 14, Bed; price, 75 cents: Sakae vine nb sis Pages 111-153 Ormond. Observations on pie eee sh . tas BULLETIN OF THE €ditor PHILIP DOWELL Associate Editors CuarkK Evans THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB President EDWARD S. BURGESS, Pu.D. Vice-Presidents JOHN HENDLEY BARNHART, A.M., M.D. HERBERT M. RICHARDS, Sc.D Secretary and Treasurer BERNARD O. DODGE, Pu. B. Dept. of Botany, Columbia University New York City MEETINGS Meetings twice each month from October to May inclusive: the second Tuesday, at 8:00 P.M., at the American Museum of Natural History; the last Wednesday, at 3:30 P.M., in the Museum Building of the New York Botanical Garden. PUBLICATIONS b> _ All subscriptions and other business communications relating to the publications _ of the Club should be addressed to the Treasurer, Bernard O. Dodge, Dept. of she Botany, Columbia University, New York City. - Bulletin. Monthly, established 1870. Price, $3.00 a year; single numbers 30 cents. Of former volumes, only 24-38 can be ea separately ; certain numbers of other volumes are npr oe: the entire stock of some numbers has been reserved for the completion o! Manuscripts intended for ares in the te BULLETIN should be Cd to aD Dewalt "Editor, Port Richmond, N._ ; > Torreya. Monthly, egablichied 1901, Price, $1.00 a year. Manuscripts in- : ‘tended for publication in ToRREYA should be addressed to Norman Taylor, Editor, Central Museum, Eastern Parkway, Brooklyn, N. Y ae inet: Occasional, established 1889. (See last pages of cover. ) Preliminary Catalogue of Anthophyta and Pteridophyta within 100 miles = : New York wee 1888. sie $1.00 Contribut ion inthe BULLETIN should order reprints, if desired, when they retarn galley proof to the editor, 25 copiesof . reprints: without cover may be had gratis. If cov cover is wanted, or if more than 25 *, "2 eophes: are wanted, they may be ordered at the following rates from The New ~~ . E ae Co., ‘Lancaster, Pa., the contributor paying for all his reprints. on 4pp Sep tzppt6pp 200 ies fe a er ee 2 OR. 1.20 170° 2.20 2.50 2.85 <4 eee ass ee ee ee ae MF SR AS 4:70) 4 Covers: 25 for 2 cents, additional covers I cent each, ao t ch oo. La Lali oe Z Vol, 39 : No. 3 BULLETIN OF THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB MARCH 1g12 Violet hybrids between species of the palmata group Ezra BRAINERD (WITH PLATES 5-7) In my last paper on violet hybrids, published over six years ago, and in the one preceding it,* I described only one hybrid whose parents were both in the natural group represented by Viola palmata. I recognized the fact, however, that these closely allied species seemed “to be confluent when growing together,” and stated my belief that “they can and do interbreed.” It has been often observed that natural hybrids between doubtfully distinct species, or between a species and its variety, are the most difficult to determine with certainty; the less remote from each \ other the two species that hybridize, the less marked and less numerous are the signs of hybridity in the offspring. For six seasons now, I have had many suspicious intermediates of this group under cultivation, raising sometimes a hundred or more offspring from one plant, extending through three or four genera- tions. Some of the results of these experimental cultures, I trust, will prove of interest to students both of systematic botany and of heredity. VIOLA PALMATA X PAPILIONACEA Brainerd.t Leaves cordate-ovate as in V. papilionacea, lobed after the t Dowell, Ph. The violets of Staten Island. Bull. Torrey Club 37: 177. AP ror0, At least one of the specimens there cited (4777), Dr. Dowell would now call V, Papilionacea X triloba. (The Buttetin for February 1912 (39: 37-84. pl. 1-4) was issued 9 Mr 1912.] 85 86 BRAINERD: HYBRIDS OF THE PALMATA GROUP amous flowers ovoid-conical, 5-7 mm. long, or half as long as the normal capsule in either parent, containing in the 48 capsules examined an average of 43 seeds to the capsule. (PLATE 5, Aa.) In June 1906 Mr. W. DeWitte Miller sent me from Plain- field, N. J., a plant that he considered this hybrid. Three years after transplanting, the rootstock was much branched and 8-10 inches broad; in the spring of 1909 part of it was broken up and ten new plants obtained, which in a year or two became so luxuri- ant that half of them were purposely destroyed. From the original plant 23 offspring have been raised. Of these, 6 had deeply lobed leaves like those of V. palmata; 4 had uncut leaves like those of V. papilionacea; and the remaining 13 had leaves some- what lobed as in the hybrid. (See PLATE 6.) In I909 numerous offspring were raised from 8 of the above 23 plants, with the following results: (1) The seedlings from a plant with uncut leaves (in one instance 18) had always uncut leaves like the parent. (2) The seedlings from a plant with deeply cut leaves (in one instance 19) had always deeply cut leaves like the parent. (3) The seedlings of plants with leaves somewhat lobed as in the original hybrid, in the five instances tested, always gave plants of the three forms given by the original hybrid. In more technical language, the form of the hybrid leaf displays no dominance of the form of either parent but is a compromise between the two forms. But when plants having this hybrid form of leaf repro- duce, the offspring present variously the two extreme forms of the original species and the compromise form of the hybrid, in this conforming to the Mendelian law of ‘segregation.’ There is also approximate conformity to the Mendelian ratio of 1:1:2 in the number of each of the three kinds of offspring. The total progeny raised from plants having the hybrid form of leaf was 49; of these, 13 had deeply cut leaves (form A); 12 had uncut leaves (form a); and 24 had the compromise leaf (form Aa). This is as near to the above ratio as is practically possible with a total of 49 plants.* The further Mendelian principle is illus- trated: that when an offspring of a hybrid reverts to a pure character of either parent species, that character continues pure in succeeding generations if the plant is self-fertilized. In this * The theoretical ratio 12} : 12} : 24} cannot be concretely realized, as the number of each kind of hybrid forms must necessarily be a whole number. BRAINERD: HYBRIDS OF THE PALMATA GROUP 87 particular hybrid, when the leaf form of V. papilionacea once reappears, it is kept up in the subsequent progeny; so, when the leaf form of V. palmata once comes back, it comes to stay. Another instance of a cross between V. palmata and V. papili- onacea was found among several plants of V. palmata from Orange, N.J., exhibited by Miss Angell at the “ violet symposium” at Bronx Park, May 1905. The plants were later set out in the New York Botanical Garden. On examining them the following September, my attention was called to a stocky plant with leaves wider and less deeply lobed than the rest; cleistogamous flowers were abund- ant, but their capsules were nearly sterile. From the few ripe seeds obtained, plants were propagated for three generations, with results quite the same as in the hybrid from Plainfield. In the autumn of 1906 I received from Miss A. M. Ryan of New London, Conn., fresh leaves and a few ripe seeds of a plant collected by Miss Pauline Kaufman in the vicinity of New York City. The leaves were quite the same as those of Mr. Miller’s hybrid. Two plants only were raised from the seeds sent; but later, a brood of offspring from ea¢h of these. The first brood (sowing 320) consisted of nine heterogeneous plants, proving the hybrid nature of the mother, as well as of the plant collected by Miss Kaufman. Of the second brood (sowing 592) eight plants were raised, all with deeply lobed leaves like the mother, and hardly distinguishable from normal V. palmata except by smaller Capsules and greatly impaired fertility. My I have said nothing as yet of the inheritance in these hybrids of pubescence from V. palmata, or of the lack of it from V. papili- onacea; this, however, was quite similar to the inheritance of lobation, or the lack of it, though not as conspicuous. The most ™€resting circumstance was that frequently the lobed leaves and the pubescence of V. palmata were not both inherited by the Bo ering. “A-seedling with Iobed leaves would often’ be glabrous; and on the other hand, one with uncut leaves would often be pubescent and might have easily passed for V. sororia €xcept for its infertility. aberrant forms occasionally appear in the wild. In May ee. SaW some excellent photographs taken by Miss E. M. 8¢ of certain anomalous violéts found near her home in 88 BRAINERD: HYBRIDS OF THE PALMATA GROUP Spring Valley, N. Y. One showed plainly a glabrous specimen of V. palmata in flower. By the kindness of Miss Kittredge the live plant was presented to me in June. On collecting close- fertilized seeds the following August, I found on the average 16 seeds to the capsule; that is, about three fourths of the ovules were undeveloped. Among the offspring raised the following season, were plants representing not only the deeply lobed leaves of V. palmata but also the uncut leaves of V. papilionacea. Both forms, however, were glabrous, as was to be expected; for a dominant character like pubescence, when once lost, never reap- pears. Nevertheless, the hybrid origin of the wild plant was clearly established. Let me cite one further instance. On April 15, 1909, I found at Tryon, N. C., what seemed to be a colony of this glabrous V. palmata. In the vicinity grew both the normal hairy V. palmata and the glabrous V. papilionacea. Of the anomalous plants six with leaves moderately lobed were shipped to Vermont to be grown and studied in the garden. All proved to be more or less infertile, averaging about 20 seeds to the capsule. Offspring were raised from all six; and in each brood but one were to be seen plants with uncut leaves, indicating that one parent of the original hybrid was V. papilionacea; from which, doubtless, was also inherited the glabrous character of the plants at Tryon. Viola palmata X triloba hyb. nov. First 1-3 leaves of spring often uncut as in V. triloba, followed by others more or less 5—7-lobed, much like those of V. palmata but the basal lobes broadly dilated and coarsely toothed as in V. triloba; later leaves less dissected, mostly 3-lobed or obscurely lobed; capsules infertile, about one third of the ovules maturing into seeds; offspring multiform, often bearing on the middle segment of the trilobed leaves 4-8 undulations or coarse teeth. The genuine V. Angellae Pollard (Torreya 2: 24. 1902), proves to be this hybrid, as the original description and the type sheet of mature plants (U. S. National Herbarium no. 352,093) clearly show. One of the flowering plants on sheet no. 364,862 may, however, be pure V. palmata. It would seem that the original collection by Miss Angell, June 1899, contained many specimens of V. palmata, as some of them are to be seen mounted BRAINERD: HYBRIDS OF THE PALMATA GROUP 89 in the National Herbarium, and others were distributed only last summer with the name “ V. Angellae” on the printed labels. Possibly some of these plants may be imperfect reversions to V. palmata. F urthermore, as already stated, most of the speci- mens of “ V. Angellae”’ exhibited at Bronx Park May 1905 were V. palmata. Others also have erroneously assumed that plants that. they collected at the type station were therefore typical V. Angellae. Mr. Pollard distinctly states that his new species is associated with V. palmata in the Orange Mountains. In May 1908 Dr. E. L. Greene kindly sent me a dozen plants of his V. variabilis from the type station, opposite Harpers Ferry and named by him Maryland Heights. Most of these plants have since been growing in the garden, and from some of them have been raised two generations of offspring. These plants I make out to consist of two different hybrids of V. ¢riloba, one being the V. palmata X triloba above described. A close comparison of the characteristic leaf of this hybrid (PLATE 7, FIG. 3 and 4) with the leaves of the supposed parents (FIG. 1 and 2) will disclose its com- Promise outline. The leaves of Dr. Greene’s plant, though at first Suggesting V. palmata, differ in having the broad basal lobes of V. triloba even as early as May 31; while specimens collected July 22 and September 16 display leaves decidedly trilobed, and some hardly lobed at all. This tendency towards uncut leaves i autumn is characteristic of V. triloba but not of V. palmata. Furthermore, in some of the segregating offspring (PLATE 7, FIG. 5 and 7) may we not see in the oddly shaped middle segment the resultant of opposite impulses, one demanding 9-11 lobes, the other forbidding more than 3? So much for the evidence from the living plant, cultivated for r s€asons and through three generations. The conclusion drawn from this experiment is well sustained by a careful study of the seven sheets of “ V. variabilis” at the National Museum. . Four were collected May 14, 1898—two by Dr. Greene, and two by Mr. Pollard, who accompanied’ him—and three others by tT. Greene May 10, 1903; all from Maryland Heights oppo- Site Harpers Ferry. The 17 plants here mounted I regard as a medley of at least five distinct forms, three of which are repre- _ Sented in the live plants sent in 1908. I shall here speak of only fou 90 BRAINERD: HyBRIDS OF THE PALMATA GROUP the palmatifid form, which Dr. Greene says ‘‘is exceedingly similar to Mr. Pollard’s recently proposed V. Angellae, indeed so much like it that I have little if any doubt they are one, specifically.’”* In this I agree with Dr. Greene; and in both cases plants of pure V. palmata were collected with the hybrid V. palmata X triloba, three of the former and four of the latter appearing among the 17 mounted specimens labeled by Dr. Greene V. variabilis. . One of each kind is to be seen on U. S. National Herbarium sheet no. 328,245, collected by Mr. Pollard and labeled by him in pencil ‘‘ V. palmata.”’ A plant distributed by Mr. Witmer Stone, as V. palmata variabilis (Greene),t seems to be, at least in part, the hybrid under discussion. I have observed also several other specimens that appear to be this; but one may not with confidence identify a hybrid between two species so closely allied without abundant material or the data obtained by experimental cultures. Viola papilionacea X triloba hyb. nov. Leaves of late spring and summer shallowly, often obscurely, 3-5-lobed, uncut leaves subcordate, often broadly reniform; capsules even from cleistogamous flowers infertile; offspring inheriting diversely the opposed characters of the parent species. My first acquaintance with this hybrid was through some anomalous living plants sent from Washington, D. C., in May 1906, by Mr. E. S. Steele, along with samples of pure V. triloba. The six plants of the latter were quite alike—pubescent, cut-leaved, buff-seeded, fertile, and easily separated by the purple tinge of the early spring foliage from the anomalous plants. These were of three forms: (1) One plant fairly fertile, with pubescent uncut leaves as in V. sororia but bearing buff seeds. (2) Two plants fairly fertile, with uncut leaves and dark brown seeds as in V. papilionacea but pubescent. (3) One plant nearly sterile, averag- ing 63 brown seeds to a capsule, the leaves glabrous and some- what 3-lobed. Offspring were raised from all of these: those from - (1) and (2), 6 plants from each, seemed to be stable, that is, in each instance all had characters like those of the mother; the offspring from (3) were only two, one with uncut leaves, one with 3-lobed leaves. * Pittonia 5:91. 1902 } No. 5111, colony 5, Argus, Fa, June 8, 1903, Dr. C. D. Fretz. BRAINERD: HYBRIDS OF THE PALMATA GROUP 91 The problem is to account for the presence in a colony of normal V. ¢riloba of three plants so variant from V. triloba and from each other. But however confused the situation may appear, all may be accounted for by regarding the three odd plants as the descendants of a cross between V. triloba and V. papilionacea, a common species of the region. Plant (1) seems to have escaped the conflict of characters forced into the make-up of the original hybrid and attained to stability and relative fertility, inheriting uncut leaves from V. papilionacea but pubescence and buff seeds from V. triloba. Plant (2) seems to be.another stable ex-hybrid, inheriting also pubescence from V. ériloba’ but dark brown seeds as well as uncut leaves from V. papilionacea. Plant (3) is partly rescued from hybrid instability, at least as regards pubescence, but is still hybrid as regards leaf form— what we may call a subhybrid, still bearing in its infertility the stigma of its irregular parentage. Of the twelve plants of “‘ V. variabilis” sent me by Dr. Greene in 1908 I regard nine as the progeny of V. papilionacea X triloba; and the case is exactly parallel to the one just described, though on a somewhat larger scale. The differing characters of Dr. Greene’s plants are presented in the following synopsis, and will be found in all cases to be only new combinations of those found in the putative parents. The numbers given are those that the several plants bear in my notebook. Leaves with uncut blades. Blades broadly cordate-ovate, blunt-pointed, pubescent beneath. ® ater, MbOUt 24 iW a tepbale? foo A ee i 2, 12 Seeds dark } about-i4¢ in & cansuléwss <3 see. ben 5, 6, 7, 10 On the seven sheets of “ V. variabilis” in the U. S. National Herbarium there are only six plants that represent this group, and they all have uncut leaves. As none were collected later than May 14, the color of their seeds is unknown; nor has any plant developed leaves with subcordate reniform outline. These forms and the two with lobed leaves (no. 4, 9, and 8 above) indi- cate that Dr. Greene sent me a fuller representation of this hybrid 8roup than he had previously collected for himself. 92 BRAINERD: HYBRIDS OF THE PALMATA GROUP Dr. Greene’s conception of a species, which without hybrid- izing appears ‘under forms enough to make three,” is quite contrary to the latest inductions of biology. The law that ‘“‘like produces like,” even through seed (when pure or not affected by foreign pollen), is confirmed by numerous experimental tests. If we except the extremely rare cases of observed mutation, the offspring of a species or of a natural variety is always uniform.* Whenever a miscellaneous offspring appears, we may be confident that at no very remote past, species or varieties, as unlike or more unlike than the offspring, were sexually united in the parentage.t Several other examples of V. papilionacea X triloba might be cited, but I name only two from well known collections: No. 34, North American Violaceae, Greene and Pollard; ‘‘V. palmata dilatata Ell.” New Springville, Richmond Borough, N. Y., Wm. T. Davis, July 17, 1903; also no. 5108, colony 3, Violets of Philadelphia and vicinity; ‘ V. te i dilatata Ell.” Sherwood, Pa., June 17, 1903. Viola sororia X triloba hyb. nov. The confluence of these two species is generally recognized, and it is so common that many students of Viola have regarded them as forms of the same species; just as, because of a similar confluence, V. sagittata has been held to include V. fimbriatula. The shallow and obscure lobes of the hybrid leaf are the same as in V. papilionacea X triloba, but the foliage is never glabrous. But more satisfactory than this negative test is the discovery of the intermediate forms in a region from which V. papilionacea is absent. Along a shady limestone ledge in Orwell, Vt., where V. triloba and V. sororia were abundant, but no V. papilionacea, was found in 1904 a large colony of intermediates that will pass muster as V. sororia X triloba. In this case the most satisfactory evidence would come from the artificial production of the hybrid; this I trust will soon be attempted. * Dimorphism, such as th . f both staminate and pistillate plants, or of long-styled and short-styled forms, belongs to another class of phenomena. t See DeVries, H. Species and varieties. Lectures 6 & 7, on stability and vicinism. BRAINERD: HYBRIDS OF THE PALMATA GROUP 93 It may be noted that the leaf outline in V. triloba is relatively broader and less deeply cordate than in V. sororia (or in V. papilionacea), and that the hybrid offspring may inherit the uncut leaves of the latter and the broad outline of the former, thus presenting a decidedly reniform leaf. Such stable forms often emerge in experimental cultures and are occasionally met with in the wild near stations for V. triloba. I have usually found such broad-leaved specimens of ‘‘ V. sororia”’ to be infertile. It seems to be this that Dr. Greene has named V. populifolia. (Pittonia 3: 337. S 1898.) The two hybrids of V. Stoneana that follow are analogous to the two last described.* Viola papilionacea X Stoneana hyb. nov. Glabrous; first one or two leaves uncut, succeeded by larger ones 5~-7-lobed; the middle segment broad, the basal lunate coarsely serrate, the lateral but slightly if at all narrowed at the base; autumn leaves often much dilated and obscurely lobed; . Capsules more or less infertile, 7-12 mm. long; offspring diversi- form as to lobation. A plant of this was taken from Ivy Hill Cemetery, Phila- delphia, September 1905. From close-fertilized seed collected and sown in the autumn of 1906 were grown the following season, plants that had three distinct leaf forms: (1) the uncut leaf of V. papilionacea; (2) the 5-parted leaf of V. Stoneana with seg- ments much narrowed toward the base; (3) the 5-lobed leaf of the original plant. From six of these plants a third generation was grown in 1909, in which all from (1) and (2) were homo- Phyllous, and those from (3) heterophyllous, as in the brood obtained in 1907. From (1) a fourth generation was raised in 1910, all like the parent. Viola Stoneana x triloba hyb. nov. , Leaves 5-lobed; lower surface and petioles somewhat pubes- cent; capsules infertile; seeds buff; offspring in part glabrous, in Part quite pubescent. The original plant was collected at Ivy Hill Cemetery, Phila- delphia, in 1905, with the one last described. Four seedlings N ae The evolution of new forms in Viola through hybridization. Am. aturalist 44; 93%, Ap 1910. 94 BRAINERD: HYBRIDS OF THE PALMATA GROUP were grown in 1907: one quite glabrous, in this reverting to V. Stoneana; the other three more or less pubescent. From each of the four plants offspring were obtained in 1909. Those from the glabrous plant were also all glabrous; two of the pubescent plants bore both pubescent and glabrous offspring; the remaining pubescent plant bore nine offspring, all pubescent, thus indicating that in this instance the pubescence of the mother plant was a stable character. This happens to be exactly the relative number of these three forms of offspring required, on the average, by the laws of Mendel. Viola latiuscula X triloba hyb. nov. Leaves moderately 3-5-lobed, sparsely pubescent on the petioles and veins of the young leaves; capsules about 8 mm. long, maturing 10 or 12 brown seeds; progeny heterogeneous. For my acquaintance with this hybrid I am indebted to the discernment and diligence of Mr. B. H. Slavin of the Park Depart- ment of the City of Rochester, N. Y. On June 19, 1909, he sent me from Salamanca, N. Y., six odd-looking plants, all glabrous; four with leaves somewhat lobed, subcordate-ovate, blunt- pointed; two with leaves uncut. As they flowered and matured the following season, I detected certain marks of V. latiuscula: a crimson tinge in the early spring foliage, and a granular rough- ness along the upper edges of the petiole. At my request Mr. Slavin revisited the station for further collections July 6, 1910, and sent me in the autumn an excellent suite of the various forms to be seen in that colony. For a better apprehension of their relation to each other, I borrow some of the symbolism of Mendel. For brevity he uses letters instead of phrases, somewhat in this fashion: Let A=cut-leaved Let B = pubescent “a= with leaves uncut ** b= glabrous * Aa = with leaves somewhat uncut ** Bb = somewhat pubescent All of these six characters are found in the above described hybrid or in the parent species; in the offspring of the hybrid they should be redistributed in all possible combinations. It is evident that each one of the three characters in the first group may combine with each of the three in the second group, making in all nine different combinations. These are given in the following table, BRAINERD: HYBRIDS OF THE PALMATA GROUP 95 the asterisk after any form denoting its occurrence at the Sala- manca station. I B 1s Reversion to typical V. triloba. 2 4 b i New and stable form, glabrous V. triloba. 3 Bb * Cut-leaved form, hybrid as respects pubescence. 4 B ™ New and stable form, pubescent V. latiuscula. 5 ; b * Reversion to typical V. latiuscula. 6 Bb 7 B * Pubescent form, hybrid as respects lobation. 8 Aa) b * Glabrous form, hybrid as respects lobation. 9 Bb * Dihybrid, V. latiuscula X triloba. The one form lacking should be a somewhat pubescent plant with uncut leaves. The proof that we have here a colony of V. latiuscula X triloba will be convincing to one familiar with the behavior of hybrids. Three hybrids of V. hirsutula, one with each of our three cut- leaved species, call for a few brief comments. Viola hirsutula X triloba nom. nov. V. palmata X villosa Brainerd, Rhodora 8: 56. Mr 1906. Cf. House, H. D. Violets of the District of Columbia, Rhodora 8: 121. Jl1906. The former name of each parent species has proved to be untenable.* This beautiful and easily recognized hybrid is of frequent eccurrence from northern New Jersey to the mountains of North Carolina and eastern Tennessee. A most interesting colony, of a hundred or more plants, was found at Morristown, Tenn., on a tract of woodland recently cleared and worked to be made an addition to a cemetery. The plants were reverting in various Ways to the characters of one or the other of the original parents. Some were large in size, others small; some had lobed leaves, others not; most had both the silvery pubescence of V. hirsutula on the Upper surface of the leaf and the villous pubescence of V. triloba ©n the lower surface of the leaf, but occasionally one or the other form of pubescence was nearly or quite lacking. Not only from these, but from a plant sent me October 1907 from Orange, N. J., by Miss A. M. Ryan, I have raised unlike offspring, some with uncut leaves, some with leaves mostly lobed. In Mr. * See Rhodora 9: 96-98, Je 1907; and Bull. Torrey Club 37: 584-587. D 1910. 96 BRAINERD: HYBRIDS OF THE PALMATA GROUP Witmer Stone’s Violet Distribution no. 5107, colony 3, “V. balmata dilatata Ell.,” Sherwood, Philadelphia, May 17, 1903, is plainly this hybrid. So also is H. D. House 823, Glen Echo, May 25, 1905, Violets of the District of Columbia. The name on the label, “ V. villosa X palmata asartfolia’’ would indicate that Mr. House considered it V. hirsutula X sororia; but my specimen bears one lobed leaf. Viloa hirsutula < palmata hyb. nov. Plant small, cespitose; leaves all palmatifid, the incisions becoming shorter toward the base; the blades somewhat pubes- cent beneath, finely ciliate and bearing minute white hairs along the veins above; capsules nearly sterile. One plant only was found in an open woods near Plainfield, N. J., September 1906, with both parents growing near. This was transplanted to the Middlebury garden and later multiplied by division, but I have failed to obtain sufficient seeds for a sowing. However, the marks of its double parentage are pronounced. Viola hirsutula X Stoneana nom. nov. V. Stoneana X villosa House, Rhodora 8: 121. pl. 72. Jl 1906. The plants seem to be rare; Mr. House got it only from the type station, Hyattsville, Md. I collected a specimen at Ivy Hill Cemetery, Philadelphia, Sept. 6, 1905; and in April 1908 Dr. Theo. Holm kindly sent me a live plant from Brookland, D. C. From the latter plant I obtained in 1909 three offspring that differed widely from each other in the relative number of cut and uncut leaves, and in that the cut leaves of the several plants were quite unlike each other in the number and length of the lobes. In two of the ten hybrids discussed in this paper, both parents are cut-leaved species: V. palmata X triloba and V. Stoneana X triloba; in the remaining eight the leaves of one parent are cut, of the other uncut. In all cases the leaf of the first hybrid (Fi) has an intermediate form. This rule regarding hybrid leaf form holds in all observed cases in the genus Viola. The same rule prevails to a large extent as regards pubescence; but here there are also cases of more or less complete dominance, as in V. Stone- ana X triloba, where it is impracticable without an experimental test to distinguish among pubescent offspring which is stable BRAINERD: HYBRIDS OF THE PALMATA GROUP 97 and which unstable. Even in the character of seed color, or of capsule color, Mendelian dominance of brown over buff, or of purple over green, is usually somewhat imperfect; so that after some practice one can distinguish. fairly well between pure and hybrid dominants. Details of this behavior will be given in a further paper, on the hybrids of Viola pedatifida of the Middle West. MIDDLEBURY, VT. Explanation of plates 5-7 PLATE 5 # natural size Aa. Viola palmata X papilionacea Brainerd, transplanted from Plainfield, N. J., June 1906; ex horto, Middlebury, Vt., Sept. 6, 1909. A. Leaf of Viola palmata L., Yonkers, N. Y., Sept. 9, 1905. a. Leaf of Viola papilionacea Pursh, Plainfield, N. J. PLATE 6 2 natural size Three offspring in third generation of Viola palmata X papilionacea shown im PLATE 5, Aa; grown from close-fertilized seeds of one plant. Ex horto, Oct. 2, 1909. A. Reverting to V. palmata L. a. Reverting to V. papilionacea Pursh. Aa. Repeating hybrid leaf form PLATE 7 2 natural size 1. Leaf of V. palmata L., Orange, N. J. 2. Leaf of V. triloba Schwein., New Haven, Conn. - Two leaves, lower surface and upper, of V. palmata X aa — aa na Maryland Heights, Md., May 1908; ex horto, May 31, I 5-7. Three leaves of —* of hybrid in third generation, grown a from seen baer, seeds of one plant Studies on the Rocky Mountain flora—XXVI PER AXEL RYDBERG PINACEAE and JUNIPERACEAE In the New Manual of Botany of the Central Rocky Mountains no reference is made to Picea canadensis, although it has been col- lected in the Black Hills of South Dakota and Wyoming. Blankin- ship in his supplement to the Flora of Montana,* reports P. alba, which is the same, from four localities in Montana. This, however, I think is erroneous. All specimens from Alberta, British Columbia, and Montana, that I have seen determined as P. canadensis or P. alba, belong to P. albertiana S. Brown. Probably the specimens reported by Blankinship belong there also. Abies grandis is also omitted in the New Manual. This is not uncommon in Montana west of the continental divide. Perhaps that part of the state is not intended to be included in the range covered by the New Manual, as it includes only ‘‘most of Montana.’’ The species has been reported from the Yellowstone Park, but the reference is un- certain. Blankinship, loc. cit., also reports Juniperus virginiana from Montana and cites three localities. I-have no evidence that the determinations were correct nor have I seen any specimens from the state. What makes me more doubtful as to the correct- ness of the determination is that two of the localities are situated west of the continental divide, and at Bozeman, the third locality, I have myself collected during parts of three summers and have Not seen it, I doubt very much if Juniperus Knightii A. Nelson can be upheld as a species distinct from J. utahensis (Engelm.) Lemmon. The characters given, apparently do not hold. The leaves are Supposed to be 2-ranked in J. monosperma and J. utahensis and 3-ranked in J. Knightii. 1 know that in the first two they are th ?- and 3-ranked. I have not seen the type of J. Knightii, butin a specimen distributed under that name by Professor Nelson * Montana Agr. Coll. Sci. Stud. Bot. r: 39. 1905. 99 100 RypBERG: STUDIES ON THE ROCKY MOouNTAIN FLORA himself the leaves are both 2- and 3-ranked on different twigs of the same branch. The seeds in J. wtahensis are either obtuse or acutish at the apex, and these characters do not furnish any dis- tinction. Ihave spoken to Dr. J. A. Shafer, who helped Dr. N. L. Britton in preparing North American Trees, and he told me that he had come to exactly the same conclusion as I. __ The following two changes in the nomenclature seem to be advisable. / Hesperopeuce Mertensiana (Bong.) Rydb. comb. nov. Pinus Mertensiana Bong. Mem. Acad. Sci. Nat. St. Petersb. VI. 2: 163... 3832: Abies Mertensiana Lindl. & Gord. Journ. Hort. Soc. Lond. 5: 211. 1850. Abies Pattoniana Jeffrey; A. Murray, Rep. Oregon Exped.1. 1853- Tsuga Pattoniana Sénéc. Conif. 21. 1867. Hesperopeuce Pattoniana Lemmon, Rep. Calif. State Board Forestry 3: 126. 1890. Tsuga Mertensiana Sargent, Silva 12: 77. 1898. Not T. Merten- siana Carriére, 1867. I agree fully with Mr. Lemmon that this species should be removed from Tsuga. Both its cones and its leaves are more like those of a spruce than those of a hemlock, and the habit of the tree is different from both. Mr. Lemmon, however, did not adopt the oldest available specific name. ‘ Sabina horizontalis (Moench) Rydb. comb. nov. Juniperus horizontalis Moench, Meth. 699. 1794. Juniperus prostrata Pers. Syn. 2: 632. 1807. Juniperus Sabina procumbens Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 647. 1814. _ Sabina prostrata Antoine; Cupress. Gatt. 57. 1857-70. EPHEDRACEAE Marcus E. Jones* reduced Ephedra viridis Coville to a variety of E. nevadensis. I do not know exactly what E. viridis is, as I have not seen the type, but the Utah plant which Jones had in mind, does not seem to agree with the description. We have dupli- cates of some of the numbers cited by Jones, and these seem to be typical E. nevadensis. Se coe * Proc. Calif. Acad. II. 5: 726. 1895. RYDBERG: STUDIES ON THE Rocky MounTAIN FLORA 101 SPARGANIACEAE Sparganium simplex L. has been reported again and again from the Rocky Mountains, but all the specimens I have seen under that name belong either to S. longipedunculatum (Morong) Rydberg or to S. angustifolium Michx. SS. longipedunculatum resembles S. simplex much in habit but is usually more slender, and the leaves are not so triangular-keeled as in that species. The main difference is, however, in the shorter style and stigma. SS. simplex is very rare in the United States. I have seen specimens only from the State of Washington. It is otherwise found in British Columbia and along the St. Lawrence River in Ontario and Quebec. ZANNICHELLIACEAE Potamogeton perfoliatus is not found in the Rocky Mountain region. It is there represented by P. Richardsonianus. Notwith- standing the fact that N. Taylor includes the latter in the former, I am convinced that they are distinct. This opinion is based on field studies. My contentions are also supported by M. L. Fernald. I cannot find any specific distinctions between Ruppia curvi- carpa A. Nels. and R. maritima L. The length of the pedicels is merely a matter of age and other conditions; the typical R. maritima has strongly oblique fruit, gibbous at the base as de- scribed in R, curvicarpa; slender or stout, straight and curved Styles are found in the same individual even. Taylor, also, could find no distinctive characters. ALISMACEAE Alisma Plantago-aquatica L. is not found in America. In this European species the achenes have different beaks from those found in the North American species. The common species of the Rocky Mountain region should be known as A. brevipes Greene. Alisma Geyeri Torr. is also found in the regions. (See my Flora of Montana.) It has been collected later in Utah. Blankinship* described one new species and one new variety OF Segtiaria, S. paniculata Blank. is but a well developed S. * Loc. cit. 40. 102 RypBERG: STUDIES ON THE Rocky MOUNTAIN FLORA arifolia Nutt.,* and S. arifolia tenuior is but a depauperate form of the same. Both S. paniculata Blank. and S. arifolia Nutt. have to give way for the older name S. cuneata Sheldon,t which was described from the deep-water form of the same species. POACEAE Blankinship reported Panicum nitidum Lam. from Columbia Falls, Montana. This must be an error, for that species is known only from the eastern seaboard from southern Virginia to eastern Texas. Aristida fasciculata Hookeri of Blankinship’s list is the same as A. longiseta. Professor Nelson reports Aristida oligantha from Colorado. I have seen no specimens from that state and none from west of central Nebraska. Perhaps A. bromoides might have been mis- taken for it. The oldest available specific name for Eriocoma cuspidata is hymenotdes, which is therefore adopted, and its name and synonymy is as follows: Eriocoma hymenoides (R. & S.) Rydb. comb. nov. Stipa membranacea Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 728. 1814. Not S. membranacea L. 1753. Stipa hymenoides R. & S. Syst. 2: 339. 1817. Eriocoma cuspidata Nutt. Gen. 1: 40. 1818. Oryzopsis cuspidata Benth.; Vasey, Special Rep. U. S. Dept. Agr- O63: 23... 108%, The following species of Muhlenbergia should be added to the flora of the Rocky Mountain region: M. pauciflora Buckl. (M. neomexicana Vasey; M. Pringlei Scribn.), M. polycaulis Scribn., and M. curtifolia Scribn., which were collected by Professor A. O. Garrett and myself in southeastern Utah last summer. Alope- curus fulvus Smith is not found in America, except perhaps in Greenland. A. aristulatus Michx. is not the same, differing not only in the general habit, not being depressed- geniculate, but also in the different position of the awn of the floral glume. Alopecurus pallescens Piper has been collected in both Idaho and Montana. *J. G. Smith. Rep. Missouri Bot. Gard. 6: 32. 1894. f Bull. Torrey Club 20: 283. 1893. RYDBERG: STUDIES ON THE ROCKY MounrtraAIN FLORA 103 Professor Nelson, in the New Manual, includes Sporobolus vaginaefolius and Cinna arundinacea, which I think are erroneously reported for the region. : The following species of Calamagrostis have to be included in the Rocky Mountain flora: C. Vaseyi in Montana, C. rubescens and C. lucida in Wyoming. Professor Nelson reduced Avena americana to a synonym of A. Mortoniana. I think they are distinct, but if united, they should bear the name Avena Hookeriana, an older name for the former. Arrhenatherum elatius has been collected in Colorado, and Dan- thonia spicata is common in the Black Hills. Deschampsia pungens sp. nov. A densely tufted perennial; stem 3-4 dm. high, glabrous and shining; basal leaves numerous, the old subchartaceous sheaths from preceding season remaining, strongly striate, glabrous, often slightly tinged with purplish; ligules triangular-lanceolate, 4-5 mm. long: blades spreading, more or less arcuate, strongly involute, bluish green or in age straw-colored, strongly striate, minutely scabrous-pruinose, stiff and with a callous pungent point; stem leaves few; blades 2-5 cm. long, similar; panicle open, branches il age spreading; peduncle and its branches more or less purplish, glabrous or minutely scabrous; empty glumes subequal, 3.5-4.5 mm. long, lanceolate, acute, purple, with scarious margins; rachis long-hairy; floral glumes 3~3.5 mm. long, similar to the empty glumes; awn attached near the base, equaling or barely exceeding the floral glume, j This species is closely related to D. caespitosa but differs in the stiff, involute, pungent-pointed leaves and in the position of the dorsal awn of the floral glumes. This is attached near the base of the glume, while in D. caespitosa it is attached one fourth or one fifth the distance from the base. It grows near hot springs. ALBERTA: Along stream below warm sulphur springs, vicinity : a July 10, 1899, McCalla 2309 (type in herb. N. Y. Bot. ard.), Wyominc: Lower Geyser Basin, Yellowstone Park, August 4, 1897, Rydberg & Bessey 35090. Chloris brevispica Nash has been collected at Wray, Colorado, and Blepharidachne Kingii (S. Wats.) Hackel (Eremochloa Kingit 104 RypBERG: STUDIES ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA S. Wats.) in eastern Utah, Eragrostis lutescens Scribn. and E. hypnoides Nees in Idaho, E. secundiflora Presl in Colorado, and E. neomexicana Vasey in southern Utah. Briza maxima L. has be- come introduced in Colorado. . Poa Multnomae Piper and P. ampla Merrill have been collected in Montana since 1909. Poa flava L. is not a Poa at all, as shown by Professor A. S. Hitchcock, and the name to be used for P. serotina Ehrh. is P. triflora Gilib. Poa laxa Haenke is not found in the Rocky Mountains, and what has been masquerading under that name is P. alpicola Nash. Poa paddensis Piper is an older name for P. subpurpurea Rydb., both being based on P. purpuras- cens Vasey. In the New Manual no reason is given why P. Buckleyana Nash, published in 1895, should be used instead of P. Sandbergii Vasey of 1893. They maybe thesame. P. Buckleyana Nash was a substitute for the untenable P. tenuifolia Buckl., while P. Sandbergii was described independently. I have not seen Buckley’s type, but it is supposed to have been based upon the manuscript P. tenutfolia Nutt. Dr. A. Gray accused Buckley of having pilfered the species from Nuttall. There is in the her- barium of the New York Botanical Garden a specimen named by Nuttall P. tenuifolia, and this specimen belongs to P. Sandbergit. What has usually passed under the names P. tenutfolia and P. Buckleyana is different, and I think represents a distinct although closely related species. The grass common in Wyoming and Colo- rado belongs to this and not to the typical P. Sandbergiit, which ranges only west of the continental divide. Although Poa pseudopratensis Scribn. & Rydb. resembles the common bluegrass in habit it is entirely distinct from it and more closely related to P. arida Vasey. Like that species it lacks the cobweb at the base of the floral glumes altogether, while P. pratensis has the best developed cobweb of all our species. Like- wise P. phoenicea Rydb., also cited as a synonym under P. praten- sis in the New Manual, has no cobweb and belongs in another — section of the genus. I am inclined to think that P. phoenicea Rydb. is the same as the original P. Grayana Vasey, while P. Grayana of my Flora of Colorado is a large-flowered P. Patter- sonit or a closely related species. Poa crocata Michx. is the same as P. caesia strictior. In the RYDBERG: STUDIES ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA 105 Torrey Herbarium there are a few spikelets of P. crocata Michx., and I have seen the type of P. caesia strictior. The plant is the most common species that has been known under the name P. nemoralis in the Rockies. It is intermediate between P. interior Rydb. and P. rupicola Nash, in habit resembling more the latter, but the cobweb is present. In the New Manual of Botany of the Central Rocky Moun- tains, Poa Tracyi Vasey, P. flexuosa occidentalis Vasey, P. occiden- talis Rydb., and P. callichroa Rydb. are given as synonyms under P. nervosa (Hook.) Vasey. In P. callichroa the cobweb is present, and that species is related to P. arctica although much larger. In the rest the cobweb is wanting. The plant described by Professor Nelson is P. occidentalis (Vasey) Rydb. If P. Tracyi Vasey is the same I do not know, but P. nervosa (Hook.) Vasey is a different plant. A duplicate of the type isin the Torrey Herbarium. In this species the glumes are very thin and the nerves very prominent, Stronger than in any other species of Poa known to me. Poa californica, P. andina Nutt., and P. brevipaniculata S. & W. are given as synonyms under P. Fendleriana. Poa brevipaniculata is very hard to distinguish from P. Fendleriana and may well be reduced to synonomy. Poa californica, under which name P. Fendleriana has been masquerading and under which it is described in the old Coulter’s Manual, is an entirely different plant, related to P. nevadensis and P. Buckleyana and not found in the Rocky Mountain region. P. andina Nutt. is also entirely distinct. P. arida Vasey and P. pratericola Rydb. & Nash were based on P. andina Nutt. These two as well as P. juncifolia Scribn. are cited by Nelson as Synonyms under P. Sheldonit Vasey. P. arida and P. Sheldonii are closely related to each other but P. juncifolia 18 more closely related to P. laevigata. In Festuca the following species have been collected in the Rocky Mountains: F. pacifica in Utah and Idaho, F. reflexa in Uta » F. megalura in Idaho, F. ovina calligera Piper in Utah, P. tdahoensis Piper in Idaho, F. viridula Vasey in Idaho, and F. Syclada in Utah. Festuca Thurberi is one of the best species in the s€nus, characterized by its long acuminate ligules. It stands = the same relationship to F. campestris and F. scabrella, as Poa longiligula does to Poa Fendleriana and P. brevipaniculata. 106 RypDBERG: STUDIES ON THE Rocky MOUNTAIN FLORA Iregard the subgenus Hesperochloa of Festuca, proposed by Piper, as representing a distinct genus and here propose it as such. HESPEROCHLOA (Piper) Rydb. gen. nov. Festuca subgenus Hesperochloa Piper, Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 10: 10. 1906. Densely tufted dioecious perennial, occasionally stoloniferous. Inflorescence a narrow panicle. Spikelets turgid, 3-5-flowered; rachilla scabrous on the basal half. Empty glumes 2, broadly lanceolate, subscarious, shining, the lower 1-nerved, the upper 3-nerved. Floral glumes ovate, acuminate, rounded on the back, faintly nerved. Petals scabrous-ciliate on the keels. Styles obso- lete; stigmas hispidulous on all sides, not plumose; ovary deeply sulcate near the apex, sparsely hispidulous; grain beaked and bidentate at the apex. Hesperochloa Kingii (S. Wats.) Rydb. comb. nov. Poa (?) Kingit S. Wats. Bot. King Exped. 387. 1871. Festuca confinis Vasey, Bull. Torrey Club 11: 126. 1884. Festuca Kingit Scribn. U.S. Dept. Agr. Agrost. Bull. 5: 36. 1897: Not Festuca Kingiana (Endl.) Steud. 1855. Festuca Watsonu Nash, Britt. Man. 148. Igot. This was originally described as a doubtful Poa and afterwards transferred to Festuca because the floral glumes are rounded on the back. There are, however, certain characters in the stigmas and the grains that make it fit poorly in either genus. In both Poa and Festuca the stigmas are plumose, that is, the branches are spreading bilaterally, while in Hesperochloa the short bristlelike branches stand out in all directions, a condition rather rare among the grasses. Hordeum caespitosum Scribn. is found locally throughout the range, H. montanense was described from Montana, H. murinum and H. Aegiceras have been introduced and are locally established, especially in Utah. Sitanion Raf. is a very perplexing genus, and it is very doubtful if the many species proposed by J. G. Smith can be upheld. It is evident that S. longifolium and S. brevifolium are but local forms of one species, depending on the amount of moisture. As this species is the only one found anywhere near the type locality of RYDBERG: STUDIES ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA 107 S. elymoides Raf., I think that the latter name should supplant the other two. SS. lanceolatum J. G. Smith from Montana and S. marginatum Scribn. & Merrill from Wyoming are the two species of the range best differentiated and seem to connect the genus with Elymus. SS. insulare was described from north- eastern Utah, and S. ciliatum has been collected in Wyoming. ARACEAE This family is omitted altogether in the New Manual, although Acorus Calamus is recorded in my Flora of Colorado and Lysichiton camtschatcense (L.) Schott in my Flora of Montana. The former has also been collected in Montana by Butler. LEMNACEAE Lemna perpusilla Torr. is included by Nelson in his Manual with the remarks: “ Frequent; northern Wyoming to New York.” So far as I know this is wholly an eastern species. Specimens so labeled from the Rockies, which have come under my observation, are L. minor, L. minima, or L. cyclostasa, which all have been confused with it. COMMELINACEAE Professor Nelson admits two species of Tradescantia and gives the following key: Freely b hed; fil ts folded; y pub t in riblike li 1. T. laramiensis, Simple; filaments straight; ovary pubescent at the apex. 2. T. occidentalis. If these characters hold, as to separating the two species known to Professor N elson, the second one is not T. occidentalis, for the specimen designated by Dr. Britton as the type of Trades- cantia virginica occidentalis, viz., Rydberg 1380, from Thedford, Nebraska, has a branched stem and an ovary pubescent not only at the apex but almost to the base. It is not exactly like the type of T. laramiensis, however, for the lateral branches are shorter than the stem proper, the sepals are broader, the leaves broader, and the plant more glandular. In T. laramiensis the lateral branches about equal the stem, giving the plant a flat top. f these are specific characters, I do not know. If the two species of the New Manual are distinct, the second one should bear the Name T. universitatis Cockerell, for it was this form that Professor Cockerell described. 108 RypBERG: STUDIES ON THE Rocky MOUNTAIN FLORA Under the second species is given the following synonym and remark: ‘“(T. scopulorum Rose, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 5: 205. 1899, as to the specimens from Colorado and northward).”’ This would have been correct if the word “‘ mainly’ had been inserted, for I have seen at least one specimen from Colorado that I refer without hesitation to T. scopulorum.* The latter differs from the other species of the region by its glabrous or nearly glabrous sepals, its smaller petals, only 10 mm. long, and its subglobose capsule. There is also another species, which should have been included, viz., T. bracteata Small, the type of which was from the Black Hills. MELANTHACEAE Tofieldia occidentalis S. Wats. has been collected in Idaho; T. coccinea Richards. in the Canadian Rockies; Stenanthella occi- dentalis and Veratrum Eschscholtzianum in Montana and Idaho. To me both Zygadenus dilatatus Greene and Z. alpinus Blankin- ship seem to be but synonyms of Z. elegans Pursh or Anticlea ele- gans Rydb. Anticlea porrifolia (Greene) Rydberg (Zygadenus porri- folius Greene) was collected last summer in southeastern Utah. So also an undescribed species: ’ Anticlea vaginata sp. nov. Perennial, growing in big clumps; cormlike rootstock fully 2 cm. thick; stem 7-10 dm. high, at the base covered with numerous scarious sheaths; leaf blades linear, 3-7 dm. long, 6-10 mm. wide, with numerous veins; inflorescence paniculate, branched; lower bracts linear or subulate, 3-6 cm. long, green, the upper ones ovate, 5-10 mm. long, white; pedicels 5-10 mm. long, often recurved; petals and sepals white, elliptic, obtuse, 7-8 mm. long, usually 7-nerved, the former sometimes a little longer than the latter; filaments linear-subulate, broad at the base, white, slightly shorter than the sepals; anthers nearly round; styles slightly exceeding the perianth, curved. This differs from the other species of Anticlea in its habit of growing in big clumps, and in its numerous loose sheaths at the base of the stem. In the perianth segments it resembles A. colora- densis,and A. porrifolia in the few veins, the segments are smaller than in the former and broader than in the latter. It resembles * Garrett and myself collected it also in southeastern Utah last summer. RYDBERG: STUDIES ON THE RocKy MOUNTAIN FLORA 109 also A. porrifolia in the branched inflorescence but has shorter pedicels and broader leaves. A. vaginata grew in loose rich soil under overhanging canyon walls. Utau: Armstrong Canyon, near the Natural Bridges, August 4-6, 1911, Rydberg & Garrett 9407 (type in herb. N. Y. Bot. Gard.). Professor Nelson gives Zygadenus gramineus Rydb. as a synonym of Z. venenosus S. Wats. It is evidently Z. gramineus he described, although: some modification was made. Z. vene- nosus is not found in Wyoming, the most eastern stations known are in the Snake River Valley of western Idaho. It is charac- terized by the long-clawed petals and sepals and the thick gland. Professor Piper, some years ago, criticized me for redescribing Z. venenosus. I think he referred to Z. intermedius Rydb. After some arguments on both sides he said that he would look up Watson’s type. I do not know that he did, but evidently he came to the same conclusion as I, for in his Flora of Washington* he limited the range of Z. venenosus to “British Columbia to California” and hence excluded the Rockies. I have also been criticized for the same thing by Mr. M. E. Jones. Mr. Jones} remarked: “Part of his type of Zygadenus intermedius is my No. 2091 from Farmington, Utah. These specimens have no distinct sheath to any of the leaves, except the basal ones. . . . This is a fair sample of Rydberg’s accuracy in dealing with Zygadenus. .. .” Turning to my original paper, t one may see that J. H. Sandberg 10564 is expressly designated as the type and not Jones 2091, which I included in the species. I do not know what Mr. Jones’ Own specimens show, but there are two of Jones’ specimens from Farmington distributed under the number 2091 in the Columbia University herbarium and in these even the upper leaves show short sheaths. One leaf attached near the middle of the stem shows a sheath 1.5 cm. long. I do not think that the presence or absence of a sheath on the upper part is a specific character, but this as well as the citing of a wrong type shows that Mr. Jones 1S not more accurate than I am. __For my part, I think that Z. gramineus can not be upheld as a * Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 11: 198. 1906. t Contr. West. Bot. 12: 77. 26 Mr 1908. t Bull. Torrey Club 27: 536. 1900. 110 RvypBERG: STUDIES ON THE RocKyY MOUNTAIN FLORA species distinct from Z. intermedius, being a dry hill state of the same with smaller flowers and narrower leaves. Z. falcatus Rydb., which Nelson reduced to a synonym, I think is perfectly distinct and nearer related to Z. paniculatus. It is what has been known as Z. Nutiallii from Colorado. The latter is not found in the range and should have been excluded. I have here used the name Zygadenus, as the species were first described under that name. I have shown that this name belongs to Z. glaberrimus and that the plants here discussed should be known as Toxicoscordion. JUNCACEAE The following species of Juncus are found in the Rockies: Juncus uncialis Greene, J. Jonesii Rydb., J. Regeliit Buch., J. Tracyi Rydb., and J. mexicanus in Utah; J. columbianus Coville and J. Regeliti Buch. in Montana; and J. arizonicus in Colorado. Professor Nelson includes Colorado in the range of J. ensifolius Wikstr. I have seen no specimens of it from that state. The best character, beside the difference in the number of stamens, by which one can distinguish this from J. saximontanus, is that the scarious margin of the leaf sheaths in the latter ends in a small auricle, while in J. ensifolius the margin gradually diminishes and disappears in the blade. ALLIACEAE DIPTEROSTEMON gen. nov. Plants with fibrous-coated bulbs, few basal elongated narrow leaves and naked scapes. Flowers in subcapitate umbels; bracts 3-5, membranous, colored, usually purple; perianth funnelform or campanulate, purple; segments united about half their length; lobes elliptic, ascending; stamens six; filaments subulate, adnate to the tube, becoming distinct at the throat; those opposite the sepals naked; those ‘opposite the petals at the base with two lanceolate wings or lobes, surpassing the anthers; anthers basi- fixed; capsule ovate, 3-locular; cells many-seeded. . Some of the species formerly included in Brodiaea and lately in Dichelostemma differ from the rest enough, I think, to deserve generic rank. The type of Brodiaea is B. grandiflora Smith. This is the same as Hookera coronaria Salisb., published a few RYDBERG: STUDIES ON THE Rocky MowunrTAIN FLORA 111 months earlier. As the latter is the type of Hookera, Brodiaea becomes a pure synonym. Dr. Greene,* who was the first to segregate into genera the members of Brodiaea taken in the sense of Dr. Watson, retains both genera. Evidently he regarded Smith’s second species, Brodiaea congesta, as the type. This can scarcely be done, as B. grandiflora is not only the first species, but it is more extensively described and discussed. Greene himself afterwards discarded Brodiaea and adopted Dichelostemma, proposed by Kunth on Brodiaea congesta Smith. Alphonso Wood had extended Kunth’s genus to include also B. capitata Benth. and B. volubilis Baker (Stropholirion californicum Torr.). Wood was followed by Greene in including these species in the genus. Stropholirion has been generally recognized as a genus, even by S. Watson. The typical species of Dichelostemma, i. e., D. congesta (Smith) Kunth and its relative D. multiflora (Benth.) Heller, have only 3 stamens alternating with 3 staminodia and differ from the typical species of Hookera only in the rounded base of the perianth and the subcapitate inflorescence. If they are kept distinct then Seubertia should be regarded distinct from Triteleia. Brodiaea capitata has 6 fertile stamens with subulate filaments. At the base of each of the inner three there are two lanceolate lobes partly adnate to the perianth, forming together a crown of 6 instead of 3 members. To the new genus proposed here, belong: : ‘Dipterostemon capitatus (Benth.) Brodiaea capitata Benth. Pl. Hartw. 339. 1857. ~ Dipterostemon pauciflorus (Torr.) Brodiaea capitata pauciflora Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound. Surv. 218. ‘1859. Dipterostemon insularis (Greene) Brodiaea insularis Greene, Bull. Calif. Acad. Sci. 2: 134. 1887. “Dipterostemon pulchellus (Salisb.) Hookera pulchella Salisb. Parad. 2: pl. 117. 1808. NEw Yorr BOTANICAL GARDEN. * Bull. Calif. Acad. Sci. 2: 125-144. 1886. Sexual fusions and spore development of the flax rust FRED D. FRoMME (WITH PLATES 8 AND 9) The variations found in different species of rusts so far investi- gated as to their sexuality, have made evident the desirability of further investigating a large number of forms, if we are to arrive at a definite understanding of the sexual processes in the Uredineae in general. From this standpoint I have taken up the study of _ the flax rust, Melampsora Lini (Pers.) Desm. The caeoma type of aecidium has in all cases proved favorable for the study of sexual fusions. The flax rust is no exception in this respect, and _ the abundance of the fusion stages in my material leaves little to be desired. Dr. E. W. Olive suggested the problem to me, and the results here recorded were largely worked out under his direc- tion at Brookings, S. Dak. A summary of the literature prior to 1908 has been.given by Olive (08) and still more recently by Maire (11), so that the later Papers only will be discussed here. While the sexual nature of the fusions in the rusts may be regarded as definitely established, the mor Phological character of the two cells involved and the Phylogenetic significance of the process are still points of con- tention. Two more or less distinct types of fusion: have been Fecognized. (1) A “partial cell fusion’? where fertilization is effected by the migration of the nucleus of a vegetative cell into 4 special ‘‘fertile cell,”” as found by Blackman in Phragmidium violaceum. (2) A complete cell fusion between equal gametes, as figured by Christman in Phragmidium speciosum and suggested for Uromyces Caladii and Caeoma nitens. This type of fusion was later substantiated by Blackman in M elampsora Rostrupi, and by Olive in 7. riphragmium Ulmariae and Gymnoconia interstitialis (Cacoma nitens), Both of these processes Blackman considers as reduced types of fertilization that have supplanted a true ferti- lization, in which the spermatia functioned as male cells and 113 114 FROMME: SEXUAL FUSIONS IN FLAX RUST the ‘‘sterile cells’ above the ‘fertile’? or female cells as trich- ogynes. On this view the Uredineae are derived from the red algae. Christman considers the ‘‘fusion of equal gametes” as a true fertilization in which a ‘‘non-resting zygospore”’ is produced. He suggests that the nuclear migrations of Blackman may be pathological in nature like similar migrations observed by him in the teleutosorus of Puccinia Podophylli. The sterile cells are merely ‘‘buffers’’ and the spermatia may be degenerate gameto- phytic conidia. Christman has also found a fusion of equal cells in the formation of the primary uredospores in Phragmidium Poten- tillae-canadensis, thus showing the morphological equivalence be- tween the primary uredospores and aecidiospores. Olive, in his 1908 paper, described a further series of forms: Triphragmium Ulmariae, Gymnoconia interstitialis (Caeoma nitens), Phragmidium Potentillae-canadensis and the microform Puccinta transformans. He also studied nuclear divisions in three other species: Uromyces Scirpi, Uromyces Lalu, and Puccinia Cirsii- lanceolati. Triphragmium Ulmariae has a crustlike primary uredosorus very similar to that of Phragmidiuwm Potentillae- canadensis, studied by Christman. In this form Olive finds numerous cases of wide open cell fusions of the type described by Christman. The fusion pores, however, may be of varying diameters. In most cases they are broad, the intervening cell walls being entirely absorbed, but occasionally the pore is narrow so that the nucleus is constricted somewhat in passing. He found no cases, however, where the nucleus is drawn out in a fine thread in passing through an imperceptible pore as figured by Blackman. He further observed, that although the fusing cells may be placed side by side in the same plane, as Christman found them, one of the gametes is perhaps more often found to lie somewhat below the other. In such instances only the upper of the fusing cells appears to have cut off a sterile cell. When the two gametes are not in direct contact a very short conjugation tube may apparently be formed (fig. 26). In all cases figured in Tri- bhragmium, only one of the fusing cells enlarges and becomes the basal cell. This method of forming the basal cell is quite different from that described by Christman for Phragmidium Potentillae- canadensis, where the fusing cells combine to form the basal cell. FROMME: ZEXUAL FUSIONS IN FLAX RUST 115 The subsequent budding off of the primary uredospores in a fashion similar to that described by Christman confirms his evidence that the primary uredospores and aecidiospores are morphologically equivalent. Although Christman did not find the fusion stages in Caeoma nitens, his material being rather old, Olive figures two cases (fig. 35 and 36) for this form, where the fusion occurs between cells placed adjacent and parallel, similar to Christman’s figures of Phragmidium speciosum but without show- ing sterile cells. He also figures a third case where the nucleus of one cell is passing into a cell placed immediately above it but be- longing to a distinct hypha. This ashe points out is very similar in appearance to Blackman’s (’04) fig. 66 and 68. Fig. 34 and 36 were drawn from the same section and were but a short distance apart. This instance, in conjunction with his observations on Triphrag- mium, convince him that Blackman’s “nuclear migrations’’ and Christman’s “fusion of equal gametes”’ may occur in the same rust and in the same pustule. Sexual fusions may begin through a pore which is narrow at first so that the nucleus is constricted in Passing. Later this pore may broaden and the entire contents of the two cells fuse. He would distinguish between such cases and cases of undoubted pathological migrations such as he finds between the multinucleated cells of the aecidium of Puccinia Cirsit-lanceolati. In the typical microform, Puccinia transformans on Tecoma stans, fusion is shown in the teleutosorus between the end cells of two hyphae in one instance, while in another the end cell of one is fusing with the penultimate cell of the other. The fusions here are immediately followed by growth which results in teleutospores borne on several binucleated cells. The sporophyte 8eneration in this case consists, then, of only a few, three or four, cells. In Uromyces Scirpi and Puccinia Cirsui-lanceolati, as well as in some eight other species, he found one or more large multi- nucleated cells at the base of the young aecidium cups. He is inclined to interpret these as sporophytic cells in which nuclear division has Proceeded faster than cell division, due possibly to the stimulus to growth derived from the sexual act. He suggests © possibility that the solution of the problem as to the develop- ment of the aecidium cup with its peridium and apparent central- zed structure may be found in these multinucleated cells. Es- 116 FROMME: SEXUAL FUSIONS IN FLAX RUST pecially striking were the cases found in Puccinia Cirsii-lanceolatt. Fifteen nuclei in a single cell were figured in one instance. From his study of Triphragmium and other forms, Olive concludes that only one of the gametes ordinarily bears a sterile cell and that one gamete generally lies somewhat below the other. This leads him to believe that the two gametes differ somewhat in the time of their development. The first hyphae to form the upright layer under the epidermis do not fuse among themselves but cut off sterile cells and are fertilized by the tip cells of hyphae that push up later from below. Olive does not differentiate these cells as “fertile and vegetative,’’ as Blackman has done, but believes they are entirely equal in size and contents and differ only in time of development. He agrees with Christman that the sterile cells are merely “buffers” and cannot be considered phylogenetically as trichogynes. : In two shorter articles, published earlier in the same year (08), Olive calls attention to the similarity between the multinucleated cells, which he found at the base of a number of young aecidium cups, and the archicarps of De Bary, Massee, and Richards. He thinks it quite probable that the basal cells of the aecidium are the ultimate branches of these multinucleated cells. The cup type of aecidium was probably derived from the more simple caeoma type. He has found as many as six nuclei in a fusion cell of the caeoma type, due probably to nuclear division proceeding faster than cell division, and points out that a still further development of such a cell coupled with partial suppression of other neighboring cell- fusions, especially in a deep lying caeoma, might give rise to the cupshaped type of aecidium. Kurssanow (10) reinvestigated Puccinia Peckiana (Caeoma nitens of Christman and Gymnoconia interstitialis of Olive). He agrees with Christman in all essentials. The conjugation is between entirely similar gametes. Sterile cells are normally formed from both conjugate cells, but these have degenerated or have been lifted off by the rupture of the epidermis before the time of fusion. These are mere “buffer” cells and cannot be inter- preted as trichogynes. Kurssanow does not accept Olive’s attempt to harmonize the observations of Blackman and Christ- man. Either the two methods of conjugation are limited to the FROMME: SEXUAL FUSIONS IN FLAX RUST 117 different forms studied, or Blackman’s ‘‘partial cell fusions”’ must be regarded as pathological in nature. Kurssanow has also observed undoubted pathological migrations in his material aside from the normal conjugations. Maire (’11) has reviewed the numerous problems in the study of the Uredineae and given a résumé of our present knowledge of the cytology of the group. He regards the sexual fusions as well established for forms possessing an aecidium. In reexamining his preparations of Puccinia Bunii, an opsis form, he has been able to find the isogamous fusion of two cells to bring about the formation of the primary ‘“‘synkaryocyte” but is not able to see the stages clearly. He does not regard the question of the isog- amous or heterogamous nature of the fusion as of great impor- tance and thinks cases may be found of the union of sister cells or €ven confirmation of the method of forming a binucleated cell originally described by Sappin-Trouffy and later by Maire, in the microform, Puccinia Liliacearum. Maire holds that the present sexual fusions have replaced a primitive sexuality analogous to that in the red algae, in which the spermatia functioned as male cells. The interpretation of the sterile cell as a trichogyne he considers as extremely hypothetical. He holds that the Uredineae and the Basidiomycetes have a common origin, but the latter have perhaps lost all trace of sexuality. He favors the view that the primitive rust forms had spermatia and teleutospores only, and that the aecidiospores and uredospores have been intercalated in the life history to provide for rapid distribution. Olive, in a recent paper (11), has also discussed the character of the primitive rusts and the origin of heteroecism. He also holds to the theory that the more complex types were derived from the Simpler lepto- and microforms by a progressive development of the sporophyte. ‘This is substantiated by analogy with the higher Plants. The primitive forms were probably autoecious. The alternation of hosts was made possible by the production of aecidiospores which are invigorated by the stimulus derived from : gig act and therefore better able to make the transition to thet 8 than the uninucleated sporidia. This would mean (atti), of hosts of the gametophytic stage of the Tusts , of the heteroecious forms, were the hosts of the original 118 FROMME: SEXUAL FUSIONS IN FLAX RUST autoecious ancestors. The prevalence of heteroecious forms with pleophagous sporophytes and the fewness and evident close relationship of the hosts of the aecidial stages in these cases, as well as the multiplicity and remote relationship of the hosts of the sporophyte, support this conclusion. Melampsora Lini is quite abundant on cultivated flax, Linum usitatissimum, in the vicinity of Brookings, S. Dak. A con- siderable quantity of rusted flax straw was collected in the fall of gto and was exposed during the winter in a cloth bag suspended from a window. In the spring a small plot was sown to flax and the rusted straw scattered over the plot. This was watered frequently and numerous infections were obtained, the sori appearing when the young plants were about five inches high. These sori are quite small and it is difficult to distinguish spermo- gonia from aecidia. Small portions of the leaves and stems were fixed in Flemming’s medium fixing solution, imbedded, sectioned, and stained with Flemming’s triple stain and Bendas’ iron haema- toxylin. Sections of the uredo- and teleutosori were kindly fur nished me by Dr. Olive from material previously prepared by him. Melampsora Lini is an autoecious eu-form, i. e., the complete series of spore forms, spermatia, aecidia, uredo, and teleuto, are all borne upon the common host, flax. The aecidium is of the caeoma type, which has been found most favorable for the study of cell fusions, and the teleutospores show the nuclear fusions — very clearly. SPERMOGONIA These are rather inconspicuous in color and occur on both sides of the leaves and occasionally on the stems. They are produce only by infections with sporidia. They are typically flaskshaped, without ostiolar filaments and are placed subepidermally. Som& times the spermogonium is merely a diffuse layer of spermatio phores without a definite flasklike structure. Several of these spermogonia may occur in the same localized area but they ar | seldom confluent. Their frequent close association with the aecidia will be discussed in connection with the development ; the aecidium. The spermatiophores from which the spermatid are abstricted arise from large rectangular cells which are arran : in a regular series at the base of the spermogonium. The sper FROMME: SEXUAL FUSIONS IN FLAX RUST 119 matiophores differ from those described by Blackman in that they are divided into a number of uninucleated cells, usually four, each of which puts out a fingerlike process from its upper end on the tip of which a single spermatium is produced. See Fic. 1 and 2. The spermatiophores of Gymnosporangium clavariaeforme and Phragmidium violaceum, as described by Blackman, are single elongated, uninucleated cells. The single nucleus divides suc- cessively to form the nuclei for a number of spermatia which are abstricted from the elongated fingerlike tip of the spermatiophore. Fic. 4 shows two spermatia fully formed while a nucleus still remains in the base of each cell. This seems to indicate that two or more generations of sporidia are produced from the same cell of the spermatiophore. AECIDIUM The aecidium arises from a uninucleated mycelium, which in the vegetative condition cannot be distinguished in any way from that which produces spermogonia. It is confined chiefly to the intercellular spaces of the host. The nuclei at this stage are rather small but exhibit a clearly defined chromatin network and a definite nucleole. After a period of vegetative development the filaments grow up between the cells of the mesophyll and reach the epidermis. Here they branch laterally to form a weft of hyphae. The branches next push up vertically and form a sort of Palisade of large cells which contain very large nuclei and more compact cytoplasm than the ordinary vegetative cells. See FIG. 5. Each cell now divides somewhat unequally, producing a smaller cell above, which again divides so that two smaller cells are formed above a single larger cell. See FIG. 5. The larger cells are the future gametes and at this stage form a rather even dense layer below the two sterile cells. The shape of the sterile cells 1s determined by the pressure of the epidermis and that of the Surrounding cells. When they press directly against the epidermal cells they are flattened laterally and the upper cell conforms to the Outline of the overlying epidermal cell. At other points where Pressure is not so direct they may be somewhat elongated. , either case they soon become vacuolate and disappear usually . the time of sexual fusions. These are the “buffer” cells of ‘istman, and we see that they are here in two layers instead of a Tn 120 FROMME: SEXUAL FUSIONS IN FLAX RUST single layer as he found in Phragmidium speciosum. The entire sorus at this time is a group of vertically placed hyphal branches without pseudoperidium or paraphyses. It cannot be considered as a unit in any proper sense but rather as a collection of repro- ductive units. The development of the sorus proceeds in a more or less centrifugal fashion, the older branches being found at the center while the younger are at the outer borders of the group. The various stages in the degeneration of the sterile cells are well seen in passing from the outer borders toward the center. Christ- man’s interpretation of these sterile cells as ‘‘buffers’’ seems entirely adequate, as their function is evidently a protective one. They relieve the pressure of the epidermis on the underlying reproductive cells and then degenerate to provide room for the subsequent development of the latter. As noted, in all the forms so far investigated only one layer of sterile cells has been observed, while in Melampsora Lini two layers of sterile cells are normally produced. In his investigation of Melampsora Rostrupi, Black- man occasionally found a double layer of short crushed cells lying above the fused cells, but owing to the age of his material he did not note the method of their formation. In view of the facts above described it seems quite reasonable to assume that Blackman’s observation shows that a similar condition is found in M. Rostrupi. It is possible that all the Melampsoras develop their gametes at a deeper point in the sorus than the more super ficial caeomas of the Phragmidium type. The frequent intimate association between the spermogonia — and aecidia, referred to above, is an interesting feature of the flax rust. In rusts bearing both spermogonia and aecidia the former usually precedes the latter in time of development by 4 — period of several days or weeks. In this form, however, a marked — difference in time of development does not exist. In general the spermogonia appear somewhat earlier than the aecidia, but they _ are often found developing simultaneously and intimately associ ated. Spermogonia may bound the aecidium on either side % may even be included in it. It is very difficult to trace the origi? - of the mycelium from which the two sori arise on account of the — interweaving of the hyphae, but there is no sharp boundaty between the two and they cannot be distinguished in the veg’ FROMME: SEXUAL FUSIONS IN FLAX RUST 121 tative condition. It seems quite probable that they arise from common points and that branches from the same mycelium may form both kinds of sori. The aecidium and spermogonium are frequently separated only by the outer sterile layers of the sper- mogonium. Their development proceeds simultaneously, sper- matia and aecidiospores being formed at the same time and often found lying in the same cavity under the epidermis. Sometimes the spermatia are already present when the aecidium has just reached the stage of sexual fusions. One of the difficulties in / assuming that the spermatia are male cells has been the inaccessi- bility of the cells of the aecidium to fertilization by them and the production of the spermatia prior to the development of the aecidium. Here we have a case, however, where the two develop at the same time, and so near together that fertilization might easily be accomplished. The large vertical cells of the aecidium now begin to conjugate in pairs. This conjugation is brought about by an absorption of the intervening cell walls at the area of contact. The upper portions of the cells involved are usually in contact so that the absorption takes place in this region. See Fic. 7. The lower Portions of the cell walls are usually not absorbed and the fusion cells formed remain with a conspicuous two-legged base. At the time of fusion the cytoplasm of the gametes is quite dense and stains readily, consequently they stand out quite sharply differ- entiated from the vegetative cells below, which have lost most of their contents. They can readily be distinguished under the low Powers of the microscope without the aid of the oil immersion. Sometimes the tips of the gametes converge and the point of ©ontact and absorption is at the center, as in FIG. 8. The area absorbed may be of varying diameters, as Olive holds, but the Passage of a nucleus through an imperceptible pore has never been observed in the case of the true fertilizations. Certain cases of nuclear migrations which are apparently of an abnormal nature, will be referred to later. The fusing gametes do not always lie side by side at the same level in the sorus. They may meet at various angles, and frequently one of them lies somewhat below the other. See ric. 9. I do not believe, however, that in Melampsora Lini this indicates a difference in the time of develop- 122 FROMME: SEXUAL FUSIONS IN FLAX RUST ment of the gametes, as Olive finds for Triphragmium Ulmariae. In the early stages of the sorus the gametes are not always placed in an even parallel layer but may vary in elevation. The irregu- larities due to the loose indefinite nature of the caeoma quite fully account for the unequal position of the gametes. The presence or absence of sterile cells at the time of fusion, again does not seem a good criterion for determining the relative age of the two gametes. I have observed several cases where both gametes at the time of fusion still have two sterile cells intact. See FIG. 10. As I have pointed out, however, these sterile cells have usually disappeared at the time of fusion. The abundance of sexual fusions in Melampsora Lint is most striking. The sexual fusions figured by earlier students have been scattered and disconnected and apparently only occasionally found. In my material I have sections showing practically every pair of gametes in the sorus in some stage of fusion. These stages are so abundant that there can remain no doubt whatever that the binucleated condition in this form is always instituted by means of a cell fusion between entirely equivalent gametes. Fic. 11 shows a collection of “fusion cells’? that were especially well situated for drawing. A triple cell fusion is shown in the center of the group with three ordinary fusions. on either side. The “fusion cells’’ are rather old here, one or more aecidiospores having been produced in most cases, but the double ‘‘basal cells” still show the original fusions distinctly. Fic. 12 shows another series of cell fusions. The five pairs of gametes in this instance are of about the same age as those shown in FIG. 11. Younger pairs are shown in FIG. 13. The gametes on the left have just completed the fusion while those on the right have cut off the first aecidiospore mother cell. Fic. 14 shows a mature, binu- cleated aecidiospore with a chain of intercalary cells and young aecidiospores ending in a double cell fusion below. The process by which the chain of spores and intercalary cells are formed has been fully described and need not be taken up here. As previously mentioned, Olive has figured a somewhat differ- _ ent method of forming the “basal cell,” in Triphragmium Ulmariae, from that shown by Christman in Phragmidium Potentillae- canadensis and P. speciosum. As found by Christman, the “3 . FROMME: SEXUAL FUSIONS IN FLAX RUST 123 “basal cell”’ is formed by the equal enlargement of the two fused cells, and the aecidiospore mother cell lies directly over the fused cells. The cases figured by Olive, on the other hand, show that the nucleus of one gamete passes into the other, and the gamete which is now binucleated elongates and functions directly as the “basal cell.’” Cases of this nature also occur in Melampsora Lini. It will be seen in the fusion shown in FIG. 15 that the gamete on the right has elongated and become the ‘‘basal cell’? and has cut off the first aecidiospore mother cell. The nucleus of the gamete on the left lies in the opening between the two fused cells. A comparison of this figure with F1G. 13 and 14, which are cases of equal contribution to the “basal cell,”’ will illustrate the difference between these two methods. It is interesting to find both of these methods occurring here in the same rust. Reference has already been made to a triple cell fusion, shown in FIG. 11, which lies in the center of a group of ordinary cell fusions. There can be no question that the condition there shown has been brought about by the fusion of three gametes instead of two. Fic. 16 shows an early stage of a triple cell fusion. The intervening cell walls are absorbed just as in the case of a double cell fusion, and a “basal cell’’ is produced which contains the nuclei and cytoplasm of three gametes. Fic. 17 is a case of a triple cell fusion where the three-legged base is especially distinct. These triple fusions are of tively frequent occu in my material. Fic. 18 (PLATE 9) shows a triple fusion which presents a still further complexity. It will be seen from the figure that two adjoining cells in the same filament on the right have fused with ‘ single cell in another filament on the left. This has also resulted in * trinucleated ‘‘basal cell’’ but differs from the usual triple fusions in that two of the gametes come from the same filament. T have observed several other cases of this nature. It seems, then, that not only a single layer of gametes are produced, in this form, but occasionally another cell placed below the ordinary functional cells also has the capacity for effecting fertilization. The three nuclei thus associated in the same “‘basal cell” probably divide onjugately” to produce trinucleated aecidiospores. Fic. 19 OWS a trinucleated aecidiospore mother cell which has just been formed by the division of the trinucleated ‘‘basal cell” on which 124 FROMME: SEXUAL FUSIONS IN FLAX RUST it is borne. A later stage is shown in FIG. 20. The trinucleated spore at the top of the chain has cut off a small intercalary cell while the spore mother cell just below is as yet undivided. Fic. 21 shows a mature aecidiospore which contains three nuclei. Such spores are frequently found lying free in the cavity under the epidermis among the ordinary binucleated type. A mature aecidiospore containing six nuclei was also found. See FIG. 22. This condition might have been brought about by the division of three original nuclei without the formation of the intercalary cell. Cell fusions between four gametes are sometimes found along with the two- and three-celled types but are relatively infrequent. I have observed only three well-defined cases of this nature. Two of these cases are shown in FIG. 23 and 24. The four cells that have participated in the fusion can be seen distinctly, but the cell contents were stained so strongly that the nuclei could not be distinguished. Still more striking are the large multinucleated spore mother cells which are occasionally found in the aecidium. One of these, FIG. 25, contains eleven nuclei. The cell is being divided by an ingrowing cell wall near the center. The uneven number of nuclei is probably due to the sectioning, but it is impossible to locate it with certainty on the next section. Another of these large structures is shown in FIG. 26. The evident pairing of the eight chromatin masses indicates that a division of four nuclei is just being completed. The base of the cell is indistinct and I am not able to determine its origin. Fic. 27 shows a case of a completed division of a four-nucleated cell forming a distinctly four-nucleated aecidiospore and an intercalary cell in which the nuclei are less distinct but evidently four in number. It seems quite probable that the conditions shown in FIG. 26 and 27 have resulted from an original four-cell fusion. Attention has been called to Olive’s observation of large multinucleated cells at the base of certain young aecidium cups especially in Puccinia Cirsit- lanceolati. He was inclined to interpret these as sporophytic structures resulting from the greatly stimulated growth following sexual fusions. Whether these are really central organs from : which the aecidium develops, has not been established. There #® ~ FROMME: SEXUAL FUSIONS IN FLAX RUST 125 perhaps some similarity between them and the multinucleated cells that I have found. I have examined my material carefully to determine whether the binucleated condition is ever brought about by the migra- tion of the nucleus of one cell into an adjoining cell, as described by Blackman, and have found no such cases in the fertile layer of the aecidium, or such as could be considered true fertili- zations. Occasionally, however, in the vegetative mycelium below the fertile layer of the aecidium, I have found cases that are very similar in appearance to some of Blackman’s figures. One of these is illustrated in FIG. 28. The nucleus here is evidently passing through a very small pore in the walls between two adjoin- ing cells and is drawn out in a very fine thread in the passage. The two cells are small, contain but very little cytoplasm, and lie some distance below the surface of an old sorus which has already produced aecidiospores in the regular manner. Another case of migrations of nuclei is shown in FIG. 29. Two nuclei from neigh- boring vegetative cells are migrating into the same vegetative cell. It does not seem possible to connect any of these cases with the normal process of fertilization in any way, and the interpre- tation of Christman, Olive, and Kurssanow of similar phenomena as “pathological” seems most natural. UREDO The uredosori arise from a binucleated mycelium which results only from infections with aecidiospores. They are found on both Sides of the leaves and on the stems. The sori are indefinite in €xtent, without pseudoperidium or paraphyses except for a few Sterile, capitate filaments, which sometimes occur at the outer borders of the sorus and less frequently are interspersed among the spores within the sorus. The uredospores are borne upon long stalks which are made up of two or three elongated cells. See FIG. 30, They are large, ovate to elliptical in form, and contain two nuclei, as do all of the stalk cells upon which they are borne. The walls are thin and finely and evenly verrucose with low papillae and equatorial, rather indistinct germ pores. The sterile filaments, commonly called paraphyses, which are found among the spores, are long and extremely slender and terminate 126 FROMME: SEXUAL FUSIONS IN FLAX RUST in somewhat irregular knoblike cells, which are usually somewhat larger that the uredospores. The walls are somewhat thicker than those of the uredospores and perhaps a little smoother, although the older ones are roughened like the uredospores. Young paraphyses were found to contain two nuclei at the base of the apical knob. See Fic. 30. The stalks were undivided and very slender and contained but very little cytoplasm. The nuclei evidently degenerate very rapidly, as in the older filaments they have disappeared entirely. Of the cytoplasmic contents only a few shriveled threads remain. The nature of theée sterile filaments is perhaps not entirely clear, but the observation that they are binucleated when young suggests that they have a common origin with the functional uredospores. TELEUTO The teleutospores appear later in the season than the uredo- spores and are associated with the ripening of the flax. The sori are found on both sides of the leaves and more frequently on the stems. They are sometimes round and isolated but are more often con- fluent in long areas, which are reddish brown when young and become quite black when old. The spores are of the elongated one-celled type of the Melampsoras and are cemented together above in a firm, waxy layer. See FIG. 31. They are sessile on the short cubical cells at the base of the sorus, which lose their contents with the development of the teleutospores. The young teleutospores are binucleated but soon become uninucleated through a fusion of the two nuclei into one. Occasionally a secondary layer of teleutospores forms an overgrowth above the first. This is apparently brought about by the growing up of the mycelium around the borders of the primary layer of teleutospores to form a secondary layer of shorter teleutospores above the first. DIscussION The existence of sexuality in the rusts may be considered as well established for those forms that have the caeoma type of aecidium. The cup type of aecidium, however, needs much further study, though Christman’s figure for Uromyces Caladit shows that the fusions there are probably essentially similar to FROMME: SEXUAL FUSIONS IN FLAX RUST 127 those in the caeoma type, and Olive’s multinucleated cells may be correlated with the more definite form and structure of the cup. The double layer of sterile cells in Melampsora Lini may possibly be comparable to the pseudoparenchyma of an aecidium cup and indicate a transition between the more superficial caeoma and the deeper cup type of aecidium. The evidence seems to point to the conclusion that the short-cycled micro- and leptoforms are the more primitive and that such a form as the flax rust with its five spore forms is more highly specialized. Itisinteresting to note that the less differentiated caeoma type of aecidium can persist in these higher types of rusts. As to the relationships of the Uredineae with other fungi or algae, the preponderance of evidence at present seems to favor the view that the present sexual fusions are a substitute for a more primitive type in which the spermatia functioned as male cells. The existing sexual processes are certainly of a zygosporic character. The conjugation is betwen two entirely similar cells, which participate equally in the formation of a double cell from which a series of spores are produced. This is of course no proof that the primitive form of sexuality was zygosporic. Blackman, as previously stated, would derive the Uredineae from the red algae. While this connection is as yet doubtful, it is perhaps the most plausible view of the origin of the group. Although Blackman’s observation of a “partial cell fusion” by means of “nuclear migrations” in Phragmidium violaceum has never been directly disproved, the indirect evidence shown in the equal cell fusions that have been found in all other aecidia of the caeoma type, so far investigated, leads to the conclusion that this form is somewhat aberrant or that the true fertilization has not been observed. The further observations of ‘‘ pathological” migrations by other investigators and the existence of very similar Migrations between vegetative cells of Melampsora Lini, which cannot be regarded as true fertilizations, are striking facts. While the area of absorption between two gametes may be small at first and later broaden, as Olive has shown, there still remains a con- siderable difference between the passage of a nucleus as a fine thread through an extremely small pore, which cannot be seen before or after the passage, and the passage of a nucleus through 128 FROMME: SEXUAL FUSIONS IN FLAX RUST a rather small pore which later broadens to permit the entire contents of the two cells to fuse. The fusions of three and four cells, which are occasionally found in Melampsora Lini, are perhaps to be compared with cases of di- or polyspermy in animals. The first beginnings of triple cell fusions are of rather common occurrence in the group of the Conjugatae, but the complete fertile product of such a fusion is at least a rare occurrence. De Bary figures one case in Zygnema pectinatum of a completed conjugation between three cells, but the resulting zygospore has not rounded up, as do the zygospores formed by the fusion of two cells, and remains partially distributed in a horseshoe form between the three fused cells. As I have shown, the triple fusions in the flax rust are functional in the production of trinucleated aecidiospores. It would be very interesting to determine whether these spores in turn produce a mycelium with trinucleated cells. Blackman has also observed trinucleated ‘“‘basal cells,’’ aecidiospore mother cells, and aecidio- spores in Phragmidium violaceum but did not determine the manner in which this condition is brought about. He observed that the size of these nuclei is usually somewhat less than that of the normal paired nuclei, and suggests that one of the nuclei of a binucleated cell may have divided while the other remained in the resting condition. He also suggests that a migration of two nuclei into one cell would bring about a similar result. In the short-cycled form Puccinia Malvacearum, abnormal vegetative cells and teleutospores containing three nuclei were found by Blackman. Triple and even quadruple fusions are certainly to be reckoned with as widespread and fairly common phenomena in the sexual reproduction of the rusts. They show a certain elasticity in the relations of the gametes, which may be further evidence that the sexual process, as at present found, is secondary and highly modified from the primitive condition in the group. SUMMARY The spermatia of the flax rust are produced on septate branch- ing spermatiophores, which differ in this respect from the un- branched non-septate spermatiophores described by Blackman for Phragmidium violaceum and Gymnosporangium clavariaeforme. FROMME: SEXUAL FUSIONS IN FLAX RUST 129 This feature may furnish a further basis for use in the classi- fication of the Uredineae. The fusing cells in the aecidium are entirely similar and form a fairly even series at the base of the sorus. Two short sterile cells are normally formed above each gamete. Their function is evidently protective and they may correspond to the pseudo- parenchyma of young aecidium cups. Sexual fusions are very abundant in this form, and many pairs of gametes in various stages of union can be found side by side in the same preparation. Fusions of three and four cells have also been found in addition to the normal two-cell fusions and are perhaps to be regarded as further evidence that the sexual processes as found in the rusts are of a secondary character. Large multinucleated cells are also present in the same sorus with two-, three-, and four-cell fusions. COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY. LITERATURE CITED Blackman, V. H. On the fertilization, alternation of generations and general cytology of the Uredineae. Ann. Bot. 18: 323. 1904. Blackman, V. H., & Fraser, H.C.I. Further studies on the sexuality of the ieadiacan: Ann. Bot. 20: 35. 1906. Christman, A. H. Sexual reproduction in the rusts. Bot. Gaz. 39: 267. 1905. —— The nature and development of the primary uredospore. Trans. Wisconsin Acad. Sci. 15: 517. 1907. Kurssanow, L. Zur Sexualitit der Rostpilze. Zeits. Bot. 2:81. 1910. Maire, R. La biologie des Urédinales. Prog. R. Bot. 4: 109. 1911. Olive, E. W. Sexual cell fusions and vegetative nuclear divisions in the rusts. Ann. Bot. 22: 331. 1908. —— The relation of “conjugation”? and “ nuclear migration” in the rusts. The relationships of the aecidium-cup type of rust. Science II. 27: 213. 1908. Origin of heteroecism in the rusts. Phytopathology 1: 139. I9II. Taubenhaus, J. J. Acontribution to our knowledge of the morphology and life history of Puccinia Malvacearum. Phytopathology 1: 55: 1911. 130 FROMME: SEXUAL FUSIONS IN FLAX RUST Explanation of plates 8 and 9 PLATE 8 Fic. 1. A branching, septate spermatiophore bearing spermatia on the finger- like elongations of the cells. x I,500 Fic, 2. Another branched ipticuatinipbcve. The two upper cells have not as yet produced spermatia. The penultimate cell shows the beginning of the fingerlike outgrowth. X 1,500. A septate, unbranched spermatiophore. X 1,500. Fic. 3a. A spermatium. X 2,250 Fic. 4. A two-celled spermatiophore bearing spermatia. X 1,500 5. A portion of a young aecidium showing a single layer of baci cells, the Serngstags with two layers of short sterile cells above and vegetative mycelium . The upper seen cells show conformity to the outline of the ov verlying nce An early ge of fusion is shown between the second pair of gametes from the Peay X 1,00 IG. A young pair of gametes more highly magnified. Two short, crushed; sterile is are present above each gamete. X 1,500 Cell fusion between two equal and parallel gametes. The upper portions of the intervening cell walls have been absorbed. +500. Fic. 8. An early stage in the fusion of two gametes. The absorption is at the center of the two cells, as the tips are not in contact. X 1,000. Fic. 9. One of the gametes lies somewhat below the other. Fic. 10. Fusion between two gametes, both of which still have two sterile cells intact. XX 1,000 Fic. 11. A group of seven “fusion cells.” A triple cell fusion lies in the center of the group Win three double cell fusions on either side. One or more aecidiospores have been produced from most of the “fusion a ss 50 FIG; 23.0 (8 fing of five ‘‘fusion cells,’’ IG. I of younger ‘‘fusion cells.’’ ae gametes on the left have just Conipleted the hese while those on the right have cut off the primary aecidiospore mother cell. X 1,000. Fic, 14. A mature aecidiospore and a chain of intercalary and spore mother cells wiles have been cut off from the “basal cell” below. x 750. 15 ne of the gametes functions as the “basal cell.” The cell the right has euies after the fusion and has cut off the primary paver mother cell. X 1,000 Fic. 16. An early stage of a triple cell fusion. X 1,00 Fic. 17. A completed fusion between the tips of eee. pitts, X 1,000. PLATE 9 8. Another type of triple cell fusion. Two aba cells in the same ents have fused with a single cell on the left. 1,00 Fic. 19. A trinucleated spore mother cell borne on a trinucleated ‘basal cell,” which hes been formed by a triple cell fusion. he 1,000, Fic. 20. A trinucleated “ basal cell” whi i 1 tk 1 aecidiosr mother cell. The primary aecidiospore mother cell hee divided to form an aecidio- spore and intercalary cell. ,00 Fic. 21. A mature trinucléated aecidiospore. X 1,000. Fic. 22. A mature aecidiospore containing six nuclei. X 1 1500. FROMME: SEXUAL FUSIONS IN FLAX RUST 131 F A quadruple cell fusion. The “fusion cell’’ is stained so heavily that the nuclei are not distinguishable. x I,000 Fic. 24. Another quadruple cell fusion. X 1,00 Fic. 25. A e spore mother cell, of the 2eciium, containing eleven nuclei. A cell wall is being formed near the center of the cell. XX 1,000. FIG cell containing eight paired age masses indicating that a simultaneous deus of four nuclei is just being completed. X 1,500 Fic. 2 A four-nucleated aecidiospore and intercalary cell. Fic on Migration of a nucleus through the walls of two adjoining vegetative cells which lie below the fertile layer of an old aecidium [The nucleus is not as distinct in the plate as in he original drawing, and the cisposition of cytoplasm has been somewhat changed in the reproduction of the figure on the p Fic. 209. . es of two nuclei from two vegetative cells into a third vegeta- tive cell. XX 1,500. Fic. 30. A portion of an uredosorus. The binucleated ea oad are borne on long stalks made up of two or three binucleated cells which arise from binucleated mycelium. Sterile, capitate paraphyses are shown at the outer Guan of the group. The knoblike apical cell is somewhat irregular in outline and the stalk is non-septate and very slender. The young paraphyse on the right is binucleated and contains t of cytoplasm while the older one on the left has lost its contents. (Slightly diagrammatic.) Fic. 31. A portion of a teleutosorus showing the appressed layer of one-celled teleutospores, the tips of which are imbedded in a waxy substance. The spore on the right is binucleated while the others have become uninucleated through a fusion of the primary nuclei. x 750. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL-LITERATURE rials acs he aim of this Index is to include all current botanical literature written by Americans, published in America, or based upon American material 3 the word Amer- ica being used in the broadest sense. Reviews, and papers that relate exclusively to forestry, agriculture, horticulture, manufactured products of vegetable origin, or laboratory methods are not included, and no attempt is made to index the literature of bacteriology. An occasional exception is made in favor of some paper appearing in an American periodical which is devoted wholly to botany. Reprints are not mentioned unless they differ from the original in some important particular. If users of the Index will call the attention of the editor to errors or omissions, their kindness will be appreciated. This Index is reprinted monthly on cards, and furnished in this form to subscribers at the rate of one cent for each card, Selections of cards are not permitted ; each subscriber must take all cards published during the term of his subscription. Corre- Botanical Club, Abrams, L. R. A new Californian Ceanothus. Bot. Gaz. 53: 68. 17 Ja 1912. Ceanothus fresnensis Dudley sp. nov. Alexander, S. Outline key of the groups of the genus Helianthus in Michigan. Rep. Michigan Acad. Sci. 13: 191-198. f. 1-5. 1911. Alexander, S. A retrogressive metamorphosis artificially produced. Rep. Michigan Acad. Sci. £3: 198; Ott. Allen, R.F. Studies in spermatogenesis and apogamy in ferns. Trans. Wisconsin Acad. Sci. 17: I-56. pl: 1-6. O 1911. es, O. Two species of Habenaria from Cuba. Torreya 12: 11-13. 22 Ja 1912. Habenaria Brittonae sp. nov. Andrews, A. L. Notes on North American Sphagnum—II. Bryologist 15: 1-9. Ja 1912. Bailey, L. W. The fresh water diatoms and diatomaceous earths of New Brunswick, Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc. New Brunswick 6: 291-320. IOI, Bessey, E. A. Thé hammocks and everglades of southern Florida. Plant World 14: 268-276. f. 1, 2. [Ja 1912.] Bessey, E.A. Root-knot and its control. U.S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 217: I-89. pl. 1-3+f. 1-3. 21 N 10911. Birge, W. I. The anatomy and some biological aspects of the “ ball moss,” Tillandsia recurvata L. Bull. Univ. Texas 194: 1-24. pl. I-I0. 8 Au IQII. Blakeslee, A.F., & Jarvis,C.D. New England treesin winter. Storrs Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 69: 305-576. f. 1-8. Je 1911. [Illust.] D. L’Arnold Arboretum. Rev. Hort. 84: 28-32. f. 7-9. 16 Ja 1912, 133 134 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Briggs, L. J., & Shantz,H.L. The wilting coefficient and its indirect determination. Bot. Gaz. 53: 20-37. 17 Ja 1912. Britton, N. L. Studies of West Indian plants—IV. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 1-14. 10 F 10912. Includes descriptions of 20 new, species in Dendropanax (5), Cameraria (2), Aca- lypha (1), Actinostemon (1), Clusia (1), Maytenus (1), Portlandia (2), Rondeletia (1), Bidens (1), Mettenia (1), Clerodendron (1), Pseudocarpidium (1), Elaeagia (1), and Ginoria (1). Britton, N. L., & Rose, J. N. Undescribed species of Cuban cacti. Torreya 12: 13-16. 22 Ja 1912. Pereskia cubensis, Opuntia cubensis, Cephalocereus Brooksianus, Leptocereus Leoni, L. arboreus, Coryphantha cubensis, and Cactus Harlowii spp. nov. Brown, W. H. Soil and soil problems from standpoint of botanist. Rep. Michigan Acad. Sci. 13: 52-54. IQII. Chamberlain, C. J. Morphology of Ceratozamia. Bot. Gaz. 53: 1-19. pl. +f. 1-7. 17 Ja 1912. -Clinton, G. P. Report of the botanist for 1909 and 1910. Rep. Con- necticut Agr. Exp. Sta. 1909, 1910: 713-774. pl. 33-40. 1910. Includes ‘‘Notes on plant diseases of Connecticut”’ and ‘‘Oospores of potato blight, Phytophthora infestans.” Clute, W. N. Drymoglossum carnosum. Fern Bull. 19: 65-67. [Ja 1912.] [Illust.] Clute, W. N. The effect of habitat on Ophioglossum. Fern Bull. 19: 71, 72. Ua 19t2.] [Clute, W. N.] Pteridographia. Fern Bull. 19: 84-90. [Ja 1912.] Includes notes on (a) Pellaea gracilis on sandstone, (b) Trinomial fern names, (c) Sporting of polypody, (d) Fertilization in ferns, (e) Distribution of Schizaea, (f) Nephrolepisissimus, (g) A curious Panama fern, and (h) Nephrolepis muscosa. [Clute, W. N.] Rare forms of fernworts—XIX. Blechnum Spicant bipinnatum. Fern Bull. 19: 72-74. [Ja 1912.] [Illust.] Conklin, G. H. Brief notes on the distribution of Hepaticae. Bry- ologist 15: 11, 12. Ja 1912. Cook, O. F. Dimorphic leaves of cotton and allied plants in relation to heredity. U.S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 221: 1-59. pl. I-5+ j. 1-18. 22 N 1011: Costerus, J. C., & Smith, J. J. Studies in tropical teratology. Ann. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg 9?: 98-116. pl. r8-22. 1911. Coulter, J. M. The history of gymnosperms. Pop. Sci. Mo. 80: 197- _ 203. -F roi. Coulter, J. M., & Chamberlain, C. J. Morphology of gymnosperms. 1-458. f. 1-462. Chicago. O 1910. Davis, V. H. Weeds. [Ohio State] Agr. Coll. Extension Bull. 7: 3-13. N 1911. [Illust.] INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 135 Dodge,C.K. Results of the Mershon expedition to the Charity Islands, Lake Huron Plants. Rep. Michigan Acad. Sci. 13: 173-190. I9QII. Eames, A. J. Regarding Viola pedata, forma rosea. Rhodora 14: 22, 23. 9 Ja 1912. Fernald, M. L. Sclerolepis uniflora in Massachusetts. Rhodora 14: 23, 24. 9 Ja 1912. Fernald, M.L. A second station for Cyperus Grayii in Essex County, Rhodora 14: 22. 9 Ja 1912. Gates, F.C. Light as a factor inducing plant succession. Rep. Michi- gan Acad. Sci. 13: 201, 202. 1911. [Illust.] Glaziou, A.F.M. Liste des plantesdu Brésil central. Mém. Soc. Bot. France 3: 201-296. 22 F 1908; 3: 489-584. 6D ror. Gleason, H. A. An isolated prairie grove and its phytogeographical significance. Bot. Gaz. 53: 38-49. f. I, 2. 17 Ja 1912. Goddard, H. N. Soil fungi. A preliminary report of fungi found in agricultural soils, Rep. Michigan Acad. Sci. 13: 208-214. I9I1I. Graves, E. W. The hart’s-tongue in Tennessee. Fern Bull. 19: 70, 71. [Ja 1912.] Grossman, H. The occurrence of Zygorhynchus Moelleri in Michigan. Rep. Michigan Acad. Sci. 13: 204-207. pl. 1, 2. 1911. Groth, B. H. A. Cell-number in the fruit of the prairie berry. Rep. Bot. Dept. New Jersey Agr. Coll. Exp. Sta. 1910: 287-201. pl. 28, 29. IQII. Groth, B. H. A, Contribution to the study of circulation. Studies on the sweet potato (Ipomoea Batatas). Rep. Bot. Dept. New Jersey Agr. Coll. Exp. Sta. 190: 283-286. pl. 26, 27. 1911. Halsted, B. D., Groth, B. H. A., Owen, E. J., & Robinson, M. Report of the botanical department. Rep. New ae Soll Exp. om. TQIO: 221-295, bl. 1-33. 1911. Also indexed in Part under Groth, B. H. A., and Owen, E. J. Heald, F, D., & Wolf, F. A. A plant-disease survey in the vicinity of San Antonio, Texas. U. S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 226: 11-129. pl. 4-10-4+-f. 1, 2. 24 Ja 1912. Heller, A. A. The flora of the Ruby Mountains—III. ci simeti. vi 125-132. f. 24. 25 Ja 1912. >A. American medicinal leaves and herbs. U. S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 219: 1-56, Jf. 1-36. 8 D rot. ins, B. B. Is Neocosmospora vasinfecta (Atk.) Smith, the peri- thecial Stage of the fusarium which causes cowpea wilt? Rep. Biol. N. Carolina Exp. Sta. 32: 100-116. f. 1-16. 1909. 136 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Higgins, J. E., Hunn, C. J.,. & Holt, V.S. The avocado in Hawaii. Hawaii Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 25: 1-48. pl. 1-7+f. 1-13. 16 D 1911. Holden, R. Some features in the anatomy of the Sapindales. Bot. Gaz. 53: 50-58. pl. 2,3. 17 Ja1gi2. Hollick, A. Results of a preliminary study of the so-called Kenai flora of Alaska. Am. Jour. Sci. IV. 31: 327-330. Ap 1911. Jennings, H. S. ‘Genotype’ and “pure line.’’ Science II. 34: 841, 842. 15 DIog1l. Jewett, H. S. Hedwigia albicans (Web.) Lindb. on limestone. Bry- ologist 15: 10. Ja 1912 Kauffman, C. H. Unreported Michigan fungi for 1910, with outline keys of the common genera of Basidiomycetes and Ascomycetes. Rep. Michigan Acad. Sci. 13: 215-249. I9QII. Kelley, W. P. The assimilation of nitrogen by rice. Hawaii Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 24: 1-20. 16 Je 1911. Kennedy, P. B. Alpine plants—II. Muhlenbergia 7: 103, 104. f. 19. 9 D 1911;—III. Muhlenbergia 7: 111-113. f. 20. 30 D 1911;—IV. Muhlenbergia 7: 121-123. f. 22, 23. 25 Ja 1912. Kennedy, P. B. A new species of Phlox. Muhlenbergia 7: 109-111. pl. 8. 30D 1911. Phlox aciculifolia Kennedy. Kennedy, P. B. Studies in Trifolinm—VI. Muhlenbergia 7: 97-100. pl. 6,7. 9 D1o911. Includes Trifolium bolivianum sp. nov. Knowlton, C. H. Notes on the flora of Duxbury, Massachusetts. Rhodora 14: 18-22. 9 Ja 1912. Land, W. J. G. A protocorm of Ophioglossum. Bot. Gaz. 52: 47% 479. f. 1. 19 D 1911. Lipman, C.B. Toxic effects of ‘alkali salts” in soils on soil bacteria—l. Ammonification. Centralb. Bakt. Zweite Abt. 32: 58-64. f. I. 5 D tort. : Livingston, B. E. Light intensity and transpiration. Bot. Gaz. 52! 417-438. f..3:. 19 D 1011. Livingston, B. E., & Estabrook, A. H. Observations on the degree of stomatal movement in certain plants. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 15-22. 10 F 1912. Lloyd, F. E. Certain phases of the behavior of the stigma-lips it — Diplacus glutinosus Nutt. Plant World 14: 257-267. f.z. [Ja 195% 4 4 McCormick, F. A. Development of the zygospore of Rhizopus nigr — cans. Bot. Gaz. 53: 67, 68. 17 Ja 1912. 4 McDermid, C. C. The orchid flora of the vicinity of Battle Creek. Rep. Michigan Acad. Sci. 13: 202, 203. IQII. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 137 Margolin, L. Eucalyptus culture in Hawaii. Hawaii Board Agr. & Forest. Div. Forest. Bull. 1: 1-80, pl. I-I2. 1911. Maxon, W. R. Notes on American ferns—VIII. Fern Bull. 19: 67- 70. [Ja 1912.] Maxon, W. R. Notes on the North American species of Phanero- phiebia. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 23-28. 10.F 1912. axon, W. R. The relationship of Asplenium Andrewsii. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 16: 1-3. pl. 1, 2. 13 F 1912. Melhus, I. E. Experiments on spore germination and infection in certain species of Oomycetes. Univ. Wisconsin Agr. Exp. Sta. Research Bull. 15: 25-91. pl. I-10. Je 19K1. : Mell, C. D. A confusion of technical terms in the study of wood Structure. Forest. Quart. 9: 574-576. D 1911. Miiller, K. Zur Ausbreitungsgeschichte des amerikanischen Stachel- beermehltaus in Baden und einige Bemerkungen iiber den Eichen- blattmehltau. Zeits. Pflanzenkrankheiten 21: 449-454. 30 D 1911. Murrill, W. A. Collecting fungi on the Pacificcoast. Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 13: 1-14. bl. 85-90. Ja 1912. Newlon, L.M. Conditions which affect the branching of roots. Rep. Michigan Acad. Sci. 13: 200. I9QII. Norton, J.B. S., & White, T. H. Rose mildew. Maryland Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 156: 73-80, f. 1-6. S 1911. Osterhout, W. J. V. The permeability of protoplasm to ions and the theory of antagonism. Science II. 35: 112-115. 19 Ja 1912. Otis, C. H. Measuring the tr I of emersed water plants. Rep. Michigan Acad. Sci. 13: 250-253. f. z, 2. 1911. [Illust.] wen, E. J. Inheritance studies with beans. Rep. Bot. Dept. New Jersey Agr. Coll. Exp. Sta. 1910: 277-281. pl. 25. 1911. mteee, G. A. The influence of age and condition of the tree upon seed production in western yellow pine. U.S. Forest Serv. Circ. 196: 3-11. 13 Ja 1912. Radlkofer, L., & Rock, J. F. New and noteworthy Hawaiian plants. Hawaii Board Agr. & Forest. Div. Forest. Bot. Bull. 1: 1-14. pl. I-~6,. Storr. Four new species described. Richards, H. M. Botany in the college course. Educational Rev. 42° 375-387. N ror1. Shamel, AbD cA study of the improvement of citrus fruits through bud Selection.’ U. S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Circ. 77: 1-19. f. 1-5. 2 Je ort, Shull, es. Genotypes,” “ biotypes,” ‘‘ pure lines ’’ and ‘ clones.” Science II. 35: 27-29. 5 Ja 1912. 138 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Smith, E. F. On some resemblances of crown-gall to human cancer. Science II. 35: 161-172. 2 F 1912. Smith, R. E., & Smith, E.H. California plant diseases. Univ. Calif. Publ. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 218: 1039-1193. f. 1-102. Je 1911. Standley, P. C. A new leather flower from Illinois. Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 56%: 1-3. pl. r. 7 F 1912. Viorna Ridgwayi sp. nov. Standley, P. C. Three new plants from Alberta. Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 56%: 1-3. 19 D eataie pumila, Artemisia laevigata, Gaillardia bracteosa spp. nov., Svida pubescens Sieve F. L. The apple bitter rot. Rep. Biol. N. Carolina Exp. Sta. 32: 147. 1909. Stevens, F. L. A serious. lettuce disease. (Lettuce sclerotiniose.) N. Carolina Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 217: 7-21. f. 1-8. Jl 1911. Stevens, F. L., & Hall, J.G. A new figanthracnose. (Colletotrichose.) Rep. Biol. N. Carolina Exp. Sta. 32: 86-89. f. 49-51. 1909. Stevens, N.E. The morphology of the seed of buckwheat. Bot. Gaz. 53: 59-66. f. 1-8. 17 Ja 1912. Stone, G. E. Diseases of the tomato. Massachusetts Agr. Exp. Sta: Bull. 138: 3-32. f. 1-9. Je 1911. Sudworth, G. B., & Mell, C. D. Distinguishing characteristics of North American gumwoods, based on the anatomy of the secondary wood. U.S. Forest Serv. Bull. 103: 1-20. f. 1-9. 28 O 1911. Sudworth, G.B., & Mell,C. D. The identification of important North American oak woods, based on a study of the anatomy of the second- ary wood. U.S. Forest Serv. Bull. 102: 1-56. f. 1-48. 11 D 1911. Theissen, F. Polyporaceae austro-brasilienses imprimis rio grandenses. Denks. Akad. Wiss. Wien Math.-Nat. 83: 1-38. pl. 1-7-+f. 1-8: 19Il. if Wieland, G. R. A study of some American fossil cycads. Part VI. On the smaller flower-buds of Cycadeoidea. Am. Jour. Sci. IV. 33+ 73-91. f. 1-11. F 1912. Williams, R.S. Mnium flagellare Sull. and Lesq. in North America. Bryologist 15: 10. Ja 1912. Wolf, F. A. A disease of the cultivated fig, Ficus Carica L. Ant Myc. 9: 622-624. 1D ort. [lIllust.] Woolsey, T. S. Western yellow pine in Arizona and New Mexico. U. S. Forest Serv. Bull. 101: 1-64. pl. r-4+f. 1-12. 24 N 1911. BuLL. Torrey CLuB VOLUME 39, PLATE 5 VIOLA PALMATA X PAPILIONACEA AND LEAVES OF THE PARENT SPECIES BuL_. TORREY CLUB VOLUME 30, PLATE 6 THREE SEGREGATING OFFSPRING OF VIOLA PALMATA X PAPILIONACEA BuLL. TORREY CLUB VOLUME 30, PLATE 7 Leay ES OF VIOLA PALMATA XX TRILOBA AND OF ITS PARENTS AND ITS OFFSPRING VOLUME 39, PLATE 8 BuL_. ToRREY CLUB FROMME, ON FLAX RUST VOLUME 39, PLATE 9 Butt. Torrey CLus FROMME, ON FLAX RUST MEMOIRS OF THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB A series of technical papers on botanical subjects, published at irregular intervals. Price $3.00 a volume. Not offered in exchange. Vol. 1, No. 1; not furnished separately : : Bailey, Liberty Hyde. Studies of the types of various species of the genus Carex, Pages 1-85. 25 My 1880. 3 Vol. 1, _— 2; not furnished separately : Martindale, Isaac Comly. Marine alone of the New Jersey coast and adjacent waters of Seiten: Island. Page 87-1 24 Au 1889. Vol. 1, No. 3; price, 75 cents: Spruce, Richard. Hefaticae Bolivianae, in Andibus ae orientalis, annis 1885-6, ech sr ectae. Bess paar 20 Ja 1890. 1. 1, No. 4; price, 75 ce Sturtevant, Edward pans On seedless fruits. aH 141-187. _ 30 My 1890, 2, No. 1; not furnished separately : alsted, Byron Da a : Pesos food-materials in buds and surrounding parts. Pages 1-26, plates 7, 2. S 1890. cass 2, No, 2; price, 75 cen Vail, Anna Murr ay, & Hollick, Charles ur. sa to the botany of Virginia, Pages foie aes 3,4 23 D 1890. Vol. 2, No. 3; not soars edge A : Holm, Herman Theodor. Cobtthatiens to the knowledge of the eames of — 3 Some North American plants. Pages 58, hens a % Ap 1891 ke Vol. 2, No. 4; price, 75 ce : Wheelock, William Efner. The genus Paiygalai in mak America. Pages 109- , 152. 30D 18or. Vol. 3, No 1; not ftrnished separately: > Small, John Kunkel, & Heller, Amos Arthur. Flora of western North Carolina a and contiguous territory. Pages I-39. 20 F 1892. Bt bes ‘oO. 2; price, $2. ie | Morong, Thomas. iadactac-ol Nort Aidahex [with illustrations of all the = species], Pages Bis ioe oe 15 Mr 1893. Vol. 3, No. 3; not furnished a tely : : ies Henry Hurd. An enumeration of the plants collected in Bolivia by = ; ang. [Part 1.] " Pages 1- 67. 28 Ap 1893. oS Vol. 4, No. 1; not furnished separately : Underwood, d, Lucien M ; 1,3 1-91. 10 Je Felgen aes Index Hepaticarum. Peart. ography Smal, Vol. 4, No. 2; not furnished separately: eee John Kunkel, & Vall, Anna Murray. Report on the botanical explora. nfo, Juthwestern Virginia during the season of Pr892. Pages 93-201, r ples 75-$2. 18 N 1893-17 Ap 1894. | Rusby, Vol 4, No.3; pie, 50 cents | oe Bang, P. Hurd. Ane =o collected i in Dobie by igs = art 2. Pages 203-274. 10 ace Ap —aa Vol. 4, Mo. prc, cas? - sha Stockton. Arachis ke pein a _ Pages 275-296, plate ots lie 4, No. 5; price, 75 cents: at » Per Axel. Th North Ameri of Ph ats and. related = . as § St 1896. = — ie aa €, $3.00 ta: of Mitac: ae Spermstpiy ae ing withoa cultivation in nor . North America. Pages 1-377. aah D 189 Vol. 6, No.1; e, $1.25: — Henry An enumeration oF ie ats collected in Bolivia by Bane: Part 3. es 1-130. 17 N 1896. — Vol. 6, No. 2; not ee cael ‘Soak. Abel Joel. A revision of the North Am and Brach _ Pages 131-210, 30 Jl 1897. . geal Vol. 6, No. 3; price, 50 ce Hazen, Tracy The life history of Sphae Sails decutiess ( Haema * specs se Pages 211-246, igs oo He Se red). 8 Sake 1899. . 6 Ni Ice, 50 cen ‘Underwood, L sucien Marcus. A reiew tof the eners of ferns propess _ 1832. Pages 247-283. 1 D1 : Vol. 6, N 0. 5; price, 25 cents Notes on lichen Miseibetion in cha, upper Mississippt ‘a Pages 285-307. 1 D1 Vol. 7; price, $3.00 : Marshall Avery dee! Hejatice ‘and dnthocetotes of California. Bs bak , plates Gara 5 Aul e : Vol. 8, rig iy not furnished rarer Lloyd, Fran est. The c comparative embryology of ie Rubiaceae. Be 1-26, plates r-g. 26 Au 1899. Part Il, Pages 27-112, plates 1902. ba Vol. 8, No. 2; price, $1. vans, Alexander William, phigh 52 Fa of fg United States and Paes 115-183, fates 16-22. 15 F 3; ae 35 ie 75 cents : Britton, Beoraer . The life Vittaria lineata, Pas dies pie 253 3° Au 1902. rol. 9; S fies Salmon, Ernest Stanley. Amoeioek the Beviphas ceae. Pages ie 4 O 1900, No longer sold except in complete sets of the Memo rs : ae Vol. ate ees $3.00: , Edward Sandford. History of Pre-Clusian botany in its relent i-xii, BAT 22 N 1902. ie Dee Vol. 1. 12, No.1; price, $1.75 : Sea . p Dacia ‘The Noith American” Sordariaccar. bg, oe 1-134, pla Po ges ae No. 2; price, $1.75: : Ulothri and C) Chaetophoraceat of the United § s s20op0 20 ce) 1902. ‘ _ Vol. 12, No. 1; price, $1.50: of dew “Prodence and Andros (Bahama 1902. : ve To. 2 , $1.00: 3, Ro, j piles, SLD APRIL 1912 NO. BULLETIN = OF THE vy a. 3 ‘ : ‘: : Cpitor PHILIP DOWELL Associate Editors - Ey HERBERT MAULE RicHaRD: President EDWARD S. BURGESS, Pu.D. Vice- Presidents JOHN HENDLEY BARNHART, A.M., M.D. HERBERT M. RICHARDS, Sc.D. Secretary and Treasurer BERNAR O. Dept. of Botany, Columbia Univers New York City Meetings twice each month from October to May inclusive: the second Tues day at 8:00 P.M., at the American Museum of Natural History; the last Wednes at 3:30 PM,, i in the Museum sae of the New York Botanical Garden. ‘ PUBLICATIONS All pecieies and other business communications relating to the public: Club should be addressed to the ‘Treasurer, Bernard O. Dodge, lumbia ——, ae York pede a ‘sets. hse seuid ye pubticatiol a d to Phili p Dowell, Editor, Port Richmond, N. Y. ) SUBSCRIBERS : , ee _ Please examine the BULLETIN for March for missing or es. If your copy is defective please return it at once Tue New Era Printinc Co., Lancaster, x im exchange for a complete copy. Do not fail to gi and address. | . io oo *, Vol. 39 BULLETIN OF THE _—= APRIL 1912 Methods of culture and the morphology of the archicarp in i certain species of the Ascobolaceae BERNARD O. DODGE r (WITH PLATES 10-15) | INTRODUCTION The method of origin of the ascocarp in the Ascobolaceae has _« been an interesting subject of investigation since the days when We Bary and his contemporaries discovered the presence of spe- ot cially differentiated hyphae, ascogonia, etc., in young fruit bodies a of certain Ascomycetes. If the reports of those who have studied _ the origin of the ascocarp can be accepted, we have in this one 4 family of the Ascobolaceae a wide range of variation. In Ascodes- __ mis a cell of the mycelium gives rise to a group of spirally coiled © ascogonia (Claussen, 1905). A similar cluster of antheridia arises fom the same mycelium and each antheridium becomes twisted about an ascogonium. Fertilization is brought about through the fusion of the one-celled trichogyne with the antheridium. In Theledolus, according to Ramlow (1906), the mycelium gives rise to an ascogonium which is at first one-celled but which later becomes several-celled by the formation of cross walls. The single scus of the ascocarp arises from the penultimate cell of the asco- §onium. Between these two widely different methods of ascocarp formation others have been described which seem to furnish evi- dence of a gradual loss of sexuality and the assumption of an apogamous or parthenogenetic development. : I have undertaken a general investigation of several species of (The Buttetin for March 1912 (39: 85-138. pl. 5-0) was issued 18 Ap 1912.) 139 140 DopGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE the group, growing them as far as possible in pure cultures, thus making possible a more extended and comparative study of the method of the origin of the ascocarp in the endeavor to furnish further data for an understanding of the relationships existing within and between the various groups of the Ascomycetes. One obstacle in the way of a more thorough study of the life history of the species of this group has been the great difficulty en- countered in all attempts to germinate the ascospores and thus obtain pure cultures in artificial media. I have, therefore, given this phase of the question special attention in my work. REVIEW OF THE LITERATURE The literature relating to the question of sexuality in the Ascomycetes has been many times thoroughly reviewed in recent years. I need only refer to the careful and critical papers of Wager (1899), Dangeard (1903, 1907), Vuillemin (1907), Claussen (1907), and Guilliermond (1908, 1910). Data in the literature bearing on the germination of the spores and the comparative morphology of the different forms of ascogonia occurring in the different genera of the Ascobolaceae have not been so thoroughly summarized, and I shall attempt to bring together the available material in this line. Coemans (1862) claimed that the spores of all species of Ascobolus germinate readily on moist slides and produce a my- — celium not unlike that of other fungi. He considered remarkable _ the great facility with which this mycelium produced such quanti- ties of Penicillium- or Torula-like conidia. Woronin (1866), who was unable to germinate the spores of Ascobolus, questioned the correctness of the account given by — Coemans. He described the initial organ of Lasiobolus pulcher- 7 rimus as a vermiform body consisting of about ten or twelve large cells arising perpendicularly from a vegetative hypha and curving slightly to one side. The cells are rather dark colored, and if addition to the granular contents each cell has one or more vacuoles: As the vermiform body (scolecite) reaches maturity three or fouf — send out short sickle-shaped branches cut off from the pare? cells at the outer end are surrounded by several hyphae, which : hypha by septa, so that each branch consists of an oblong . DopGE: METHODs OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 141 borne on a short stalk. These branches are closely applied to the cells of the scolecite in such a way as to lead Woronin to believe that fertilization occurs at this time. He further found chlamydospores or resting spores on the mycelium connected with the ascocarp but no conidia or oidia. These thick-walled brownish spores are borne on curved stalks. They germinate after a resting period of several weeks. Boudier (1869) believed that the spores of the species of Ascobolus growing on dung germinate only after passing through the _ digestive canal of animals, and that the spores of species growing (A. viridis Boud.) shows the characteristic mycelium produced by this species. He asserts that in spite of all his work on this group he has never found their mycelia producing anything in the nature of conidia or chlamydospores. Janczewski ( 1871) is very positive in his refutation of Coemans’ Statement (1862) regarding the germination of Ascobolus spores without special treatment. He fed the ascocarps of A. furfuraceus to an animal, recovering the germinated spores from the faeces. He found that most of the epispore is removed by the digestive Processes, and that the spores thus treated germinate, sending Out one or more germ tubes at a short distance from each end of the spore. He also investigated the method of the formation of the ascocarp. The material for this purpose was obtained directly from the natural substratum. The ascogonium consists of eight or ten large cells formed as a “worm-like” branch of a vegetative hypha. A slender filament arising from near the base of the ascogonium branches several times and coils closely about the eres. These filamentous hyphae are the “ pollinodia.” After the ascogonium is well developed, the third cell from the outer ead of the archicarp is seen to be very much enlarged and gives "Se to ascogenous hyphae from its upper surface. Van Tieghem (1876) germinated the spores of Ascodesmis sGiioianes in dung decoctions and beerwort. Following their devel- pment in drop cultures he observed the formation of a T-shaped ithe Which branched several times by a false dichotomy. This Osette is the initial organ of the ascocarp. Occasionally a second 142 Dopce: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE branch arising near the first and similar to it, takes part in the for- mation of what he considered a compound or double ascocarp. Claussen (1905) has shown that this second branch is the stalk of a compound antheridium. Borzi (1878) found a “‘scolecite” present in the young asco- carps of Lasiobolus equinus (Ascophanus pees) Ascobolus im- mersus, and Rhyparobius sp. The mature ‘‘scolecite” of Lasio- bolus equinus consists of eight or ten cells which are differentiated into three distinct regions. The first eight cells form the stalk, which is usually bent a little to one side. The central portion con- sists of one large spherical cell borne on this stalk. The third region is merely a small projecting cell topping the ascogenous cell. The “‘pollinodium” is a filamentous hypha which grows up along the stalk of the ‘‘scolecite” and branches two or three times as it reaches the terminal portion, the branches coiling tightly about the end cell. Borzi considered the “ pollinodia” to be concerned with a process of fertilization and at this time believed sexual reproduction was common among the Ascomycetes. He further finds that L. equinus produces two kinds of asexual spores. The first kind is borne on slender, erect, septate stalks. They are thick- walled brownish resting spores which he calls chlamydospores. The second kind appears to be borne on rather thick brushlike branches of erect hyphae. The spores are pinched off from the tips of these branches as small hyaline conidium-like “ spermatia.” In Ascobolus immersus the eight-celled stalk bears a large spherical cell, which is also capped by. a small projecting cell. He finds two or three large cells in the young ascocarps of Rhyparobius sp. These cells are only the remains of the ‘‘scolecite.” He figures the asci as arising directly out of the larger cell. Zukal (1889) cultivated A. immersus by a series of transfers 0? sterilized dung, making the final transfers to a dung decoction where he was able to observe the various stages of growth under the microscope. He found two kinds of asexual spores with heavy brown walls. Branches composed of five or six cells arise from the older mycelial hyphae; the end cell rounds up and become? surrounded with a thick brown membrane. If the end cell be comes divided by a longitudinal wall in addition to two or three 2 transverse walls, a spore similar to those produced in Stemphyhum : DopGE : METHODs oF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 143 isformed. He describes the ascocarp as originating in a knot of ordinary mycelial hyphae without the appearance of sex organs oranascogonium. He denies the existence of the large ascogonium which Borzi found in this species. Zukal (1. c.) germinated the spores of Rhyparobius pachyascus in dung decoction and followed the development of the ascocarp in drop cultures. He strongly denies the presence of sex organs, but his figure of the initial organs might well be taken to represent oogonia and antheridia. One cell of the mycelium becomes slightly larger than the neighboring cells and sends out a large oval bud which is soon cut off from the parent cell by a septum. Two or three branches arise from the base of this large oval cell, and curving inward, become closely applied to its apex. He states that the mycelium of Rhyparobius Cookei gives rise to what he calls “ gemmae,”’ by intercalary swell- ings. He finds that spores of Ascophanus saccharinus germinate readily in Liebig’s meat extract. The ascocarp originates from a knot of hyphae which he calls a sclerotium. After about six days portions of the mycelial hyphae swell up into knots, which increase in size by a process of budding, forming a compact mass about 404 in diameter. These so-called sclerotia may develop directly into ascocarps or they may continue to increase in size up to 804, become reddish in color, and remain in this condition several weeks before developing an ascocarp. A second kind of sclerotium is more parenchymatous than the first and contains a large central cell. Other sclerotia about 200 in diameter are covered with hairlike appendages. These sclerotia are said to develop ascocarps if kept in moist chambers about six weeks. Brefeld (1901) grew Thelebolus stercoreus in dung decoctions. He figures a small coiled ascogonium of one or two turns. Rhy- Parobius albidus was the only other species of this family which he Was able to cultivate from ascospores. By using portions of the Mycelium of A scobolus denudatus he obtained good cultures of the Species. The mycelium produced great quantities of oidia. After oe when the Production of oidia had ceased, an abundant crop apothecia developed. He was able to trace the connection of - apothecia with the mycelium giving rise to the oidia. The oidia Hed own on sterilized horse dung, and apothecia were obtained. © = . . ° a dae €s not describe the manner in which the fruit body originates. 144. DopcE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE Harper (1896) describes the ascogonium of Ascobolus furfura- ceus as it appears from the time it is completely inclosed with in- vesting hyphae. In this stage the ascogonium consists of a coil of several large cells. Large pores are already formed in the trans- verse walls, thus bringing the contents of the cells of the row into direct connection. The ascogenous hyphae develop from the entire surface of the ascogenous cell. Miss Ternetz (1900) finds that ascospores of Ascophanus carneus germinate readily in dung decoctions or in dung decoction agar. Cultures kept in a dark room do not develop fruit. The ascogonium arises as a branch of the mycelium. The stalk con- sists of two to five cells, easily distinguished from the larger and more granular cells of the ascogonium. The coil makes one or two turns, including in this region six or eight cells, and ends in a septate filament which varies considerably in length. It usually contains two or three cells but it may continue to grow out and give rise to another ascogonium. She found no evidence of the existence of an antheridium. Massee and Salmon (1901, 1902) conducted a series of experi- ments on spore germination in species of Ascobolus. They found that the spores of Ascobolus albidus and A. perplexans would not germinate at 16° C. in dung decoction but did germinate at 27° C. A. albidus grown on dung in a closed tin box, shot the spores on the cover of the box, where they germinated and are said to have produced ascocarps. Spores taken from the ascocarps on the box cover were grown in a nutrient medium, and ascocarps were developed. They found that spores from these ascocarps would not germinate after passing through the alimentary canal of a guinea pig but did germinate at ordinary temperatures in tap water. They drew the very doubtful conclusion from this, that all dung-growing species of Ascobolus originally grew on earth where the spores would germinate easily at low temperatures. After one generation on the cover of the box and a second in af artificial medium made of plum jam and gelatin, Ascobolus albidus had reverted to its original terrestrial habit. Molliard (1903) believes that the presence of certain bacteria favors the production of ascocarps by Ascobolus. He germinated the spores of A. furfuraceus in some way which he does not describe, DopGE : METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 145 and obtained pure cultures on sterilized cow dung and on slices of carrot. A dense growth of white flocculose mycelium was pro- duced which gave rise to a great number of what he termed “arthrospores.’”’ In rare cases, after several weeks a few ascocarps appeared in some of the cultures. He discovered that the same bacteria that were present on the dung from which he obtained the ascospores for inoculation were also present in these particular cultures. Pure cultures of the Ascobolus mycelium and of this bacterium were then made, and he had only to introduce the bacteria into this Ascobolus culture in order to obtain an abundant supply of ascocarps. Otherwise he claims the Ascobolus remained sterile indefinitely. Barker (1904) describes the existence of sex organs in Rhy- parobius sp. but gives no figures. The ascogonium is a spirally coiled branch containing five or six nuclei. An antheridium con- taining several nuclei arises from the cell next to the one producing the ascogonium. The antheridium grows up and its tip becomes attached to the end of the ascogonium. Septa are now formed in both sex organs, cutting off cells which are uninucleated. The penultimate cell of the ascogonium is, however, binucleated. Claussen (1905) grew cultures of Ascobolus furfuraceus, in which he found chains of oidia produced on the mycelium. He traced a direct connection between the mycelium from a germinated asco- Spore and the oidia. He sowed these oidia and continued the cultures in this manner for a hundred generations without finding any ascocarps. He has also studied in especial detail the life history of Ascodesmis nigricans. This fungus is easily cultivated on artificial media. He finds that the rosette of ascogonia origi- nates as a result of the dichotomous branching of an outgrowth of a vegetative hypha. A short bud is put forth from a cell of the mycelium and immediately becomes T-shaped by division. Branching continues until several pairs of spirally coiled ascogonia are formed. Each ascogonium is now cut off from its stalk by @ septum and a one-celled trichogyne is cut off at the apex. The antheridia are produced on a branch which may arise from the next cell to that from which the ascogonial branch originates, or it ey come from cells of other hyphae in the vicinity. The an- theridial branch divides dichotomously and grows in among the 146 DopGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE ascogonia, one antheridium coiling spirally about each ascogonium. Fusion takes place between the trichogyne and the antheridium. According to Ramlow (1906) the mature ascogonium of Thelebo- lus stercoreus is a more or less spirally coiled body composed of five or six cells. Each cell is uninucleated except the penultimate cell, which contains two nuclei. The ascus is formed directly from the penultimate cell of the ascogonium. He was unable to find any organ corresponding to an antheridium. Occasionally two or three asci are found in one apothecium. This results from the inclusion of as many separate ascogonia within one apothecium. Overton (1906) finds that Thecotheus Pelletieri has a compound fruit body containing several ascogonia. Each ascogonium is composed of several multinucleated cells and resembles in form the ascogonium of Ascobolus. He is unable to find any opening be- tween the adjacent cells of the ascogonium. The ascogenous hyphae may arise from any or all the cells of the ascogonium. Dangeard (1907) has described observations on many of the species of Ascobolaceae and related Discomycetes. In what he regards as Ascophanus ochraceus he finds that the ascocarp origi- nates from a rosette of eight or ten ascogonia. These ascogonia resemble those of Pyronema although they are somewhat smaller. The ascogonium is prolonged into one or two elongated cells and these continue as a slender filament bending back and over the ascogonium. He claims that this outgrowth does not cor- respond to a trichogyne as no antheridium is present. The mature ascogonium of Ascobolus furfuraceus consists of about ten cells. It arises as a lateral branch from the mycelium and as growth proceeds is cut up into multinucleated cells. As it develops it becomes more or less coiled, forming an irregular spiral of one or two turns. He does not find the large pores in the transverse walls reported by Harper (1896), on the contrary he finds that the pores are just such as occur in the septa of the vegetative hyphae, too minute to allow of a bodily transfer of nuclei and cytoplasm. The asci are formed from the binucle- ated cells of the ascogenous hyphae. The method of forming the ascogonium in a species that he thinks may be Ascobolus glaber, differs widely from that of A. furfuraceus. The ascogonium has 4 stalk of twenty or thirty cells of much less diameter than the cells of DopGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 147 the parenthypha. The stalk grows along on the medium and forms the spiral coil at its extremity. Dangeard has not been able to follow what takes place in the tangled coil, except to find that its cells are multinucleated and are connected by minute pores. A species which he accidentally found in his cultures of Pyronema, did not mature. It showed an exceedingly large ascogonium with the three regions, which I shall discuss later, easily recog- nizable. Miss Fraser (1907) developed a method for germinating the spores of Lachnea stercorea. She believes that in nature the spores of this species probably pass through the body of the cow. An attempt was made to imitate normal digestion by placing the spores successively in saliva, artificially prepared gastric juice, pancreatic juice, and in a dung decoction. The spores were left in each medium several hours and the temperature main- tained at 38° C., the temperature of the cow. Germination eccurred after about two days. Further experiments showed that the two factors most essential for germination were heat and the alkalinity of the medium. Five successful experiments on germination by this method are recorded. Her figure of the germinated spore shows a germ tube issuing from each end. She was unable to obtain ascocarps, as all growth ceased soon after the germ tubes were formed. The mature ascogonium of Lachnea stercorea consists of a large oval cell at the end of a three- or four-celled stalk. A trichogyne grows out from one side of the ascogonium, and transverse septa are formed in the trichogyne, cutting off several cells. The tip of the trichogyne bends down- ward and becomes attached to a more or less irregular and indefi- nite antheridium, the origin of which could not be determined. According to Miss Fraser the septa. of the trichogyne are perma- nent structures, and functional sexuality does not exist. Iss Fraser’s method of spore germination was used by Miss Welsford (1907) in her studies of Ascobolus furfuraceus and by Utting (1909) working with Ascophanus carneus. They describe be 8ermination of a few spores but were unable to obtain arti- dey tttres Miss Welsford found thick-walled chlamydospores Oates ona mycelium supposed to be that of Ascobolus fur- »and Cutting observed the ‘“‘gemmae’”’ and ‘‘dense chains TABLE I Summary of results obtained by various investigators who have reported germinating the spores of certain species of the Ascobolaceae. Those marked (?) have given no figure of the germinated spores nor a description of the manner in which the spores germinated. Date Author Species Method Results . ?Coemans cobolus In water Mycelium producing many conidia Boudier pratiem cee (A. viridis Bo No further growth noted Janczewski — vfavaceus Animal digestion No further growth noted Van Tieghem 1 Brefeld Brefeld ?Ternetz Massee & Salmo ?Massee & Salmon ?Molliard ? Barker Ramlow ?Claussen Aa sronbil ?Cuttin gricans Ryporobin pachyascus as hana saccharinus Thelebolus stercoreus Thelebolus stercor eus Ascobolus furfuraceus Ascobolus furfuraceus Ascophanus carneus In drop — dung decoction Dung decocti Liebig’s Beef Extract In dung decoction In dung decoction ta an a ested carrot and dung In dung decoction In dung decoction ae decoction + NazCOs at 38° C. g decoction + NazCOs at 38° C. s Produced ‘‘gemmae’’ and ascocarps Zcibviciba : kinds of ‘“‘sclerotia’’ and asc bindand ek Produced ascocarps Produced ‘“‘gemmae’’ and ascocarps Produced ascocarps Produced ca and arthrospores Produced asco sti Produced ascocarp: Produced oidia. No further growt No further pakoaber So ascocarps h SPE AVAOVIOMODSY AO AWALTAD AO SGOHLAJY + 49d0qd DopDGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 149 of chlamydospores”’ noted by Miss Ternetz (1900) in connection with the mycelium of Ascophanus carneus. TABLE I does not include the names of several who have cultivated Ascodesmis from the germinated spores: Zukal (1885), Claussen (1905), Dangeard (1907), Bainier (1907). It is evident that the spores of Rhyparobius germinate readily in dung decoc- tion and those of Thelebolus stercoreus can be germinated with difficulty in the same medium. The only satisfactory evidence that spores of species of Ascobolus have been germinated in arti- ficial media is furnished by Boudier (A. carbonarius), Janczewski (A. furfuraceus), and Massee & Salmon (A.albidus). Janczewski’s method involved the process of the digestion of the spores by the animal and is not practicable for artificial culture work. Boudier germinated the spores of A. carbonarius but reported no further growth. Massee & Salmon report that they obtained fruits of Ascobolus artificially in cultures started by the germination of the ascospores. As previously noted, page 143, Brefeld obtained abundant growths of apothecia of A. denudatus from mycelium that also produced oidia. Zukal (1889) grew Ascobolus immersus by a series of transfers on sterilized dung. Dangeard (1907) reports growing several species of Ascobolus in artificial cultures but he does not describe his methods. Various terms are now in use to designate the initial organs of the ascocarp. -It is difficult to choose a term that shall include such simple fertile hyphae as exist in the Erysiphaceae, Monascus, and Pyronema and at the same time the complicated structures found in Aspergillus, in species of the Ascobolaceae, and in the lichens. The word archicarp will be used in this discussion when referring to the branch consisting wholly or in part of the oogonium en oh morphological equivalent, the oogonium being that organ Which produces the egg that is fertilized. In Sphaerotheca the oogonium is a uninucleated cell (Harper, 1896), in P yronema it is multinucleated (Harper, 1900). In oo carneus, according to Cutting (1909), there is a iar vegetative nuclei in each of four or five cells of the des oy but such variations, if they occur, do not necessarily € morphological equivalence of the organs in question. he trichogyne is an outgrowth of the oogonium and functions 150 DopcE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE as an organ to bring together in the oogonium the male and the female nuclei. The term ascogonium will be used in referring to the oogonium after fertilization. In such cases as Pyronema the oogonium after fertilization becomes the ascogonium. Such a use of terms is of course purely morphological and does not prejudge the question as to the existence of apogamy, reduced fertilization, etc. It is necessary only to mention the antheridium in the lichens, in Pyronema, and in Monascus, to call to mind the great variation which may occur in this organ, and it would perhaps be premature to attempt to substitute a single term in place of the wide variety of terms that have been proposed. MATERIAL AND METHODS The Ascobolaceae form a rather natural group as commonly regarded by systematists. The family as now generally recognized contains about two hundred described species, grouped under ten or twelve genera. The genus Ascobolus was established by Persoon (Gmel. Syst. Nat. 2: 1461. 1791) to include those Discomycetes in which the mature asci protrude from the fruit body. Several noteworthy monographs dealing with the species of this family have been published in Europe, and all morphological and cytological papers on the group have been based on Europeat material. A few species have been described from America but our knowledge of the group as it exists here is extremely limited. In my preliminary work to obtain suitable material for study I succeeded in growing on the natural substrata in damp chambers thirty-six species and a few additional forms which appear to be varieties. Cultures were carried on both at the New York Botanical Garden and at Columbia University where most of the artificial culture work was done. I am indebted to Professor C. C. Curtis for his liberality in the provision of apparatus and opportunities f° visit other regions for the purpose of collecting these fungi- ho fessor R. A. Harper’s criticisms and timely suggestions deserve an expression of sincere appreciation. Extensive field studies were carried on and the plants wef grown under natural as well as artificial conditions. In the field DoDGE : METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 151 studies of such species as Ascobolus viridis, A. pusillus, and A. carbonarius, all of which grow on the ground rather than on the excrement of animals, repeated visits to the same spots for three successive years were made and the condition of the species under various weather conditions was noted. Apothecia in all stages of growth were brought into the laboratory and their diagnostic characteristics were worked out in detail. For laboratory cultures on the natural substratum, earth and dung were brought in and placed in damp chambers of glass lined with filter paper. Some species are very minute, and the apothecia are frequently so few that their detection is a matter of difficulty. The Zeiss binocular with the horizontal arm is a very useful instrument for this work. With the higher powers, and a damp chamber pro- vided with a flat cover, it is possible to study the development of the plants, their heliotropic reactions, and the discharge of the spores under very normal conditions. The apothecia seem to develop best when the cultures are carried on in a well lighted room having a temperature of about we ay CC, Tn‘a dimly lighted or cold room there are usually marked changes in the coloration of the spores and fruit bodies. Ascophanus carneus when grown in bright sunlight will have a deep pink apothecium, but in a dimly lighted room the fruit body will be nearly colorless. The spores of A. Winteri that were allowed to develop in a closed vasculum were perfectly hyaline. When this species is grown in a cold room or is found in nature during cold rainy weather, the spores are much paler than usual. In order to determine whether certain species were limited in their cccurrence to a particular kind of dung, extensive studies were made of the species growing on dung from the New York Zoological Park. So far as could be learned, most of the species ‘are not thus limited. The following species have been grown on their natural sub- Strata in the laboratory. Their identity has been determined by careful study and comparison with exsiccati at the New York Botanical Garden: Ascobolus aerugineus Fries Ascobolus Ascobolus As cobolus Surfuraceus Pers. Ascobolus glaber Pers. carbonarius Karst. Ascobolus immersus Pers. - Ascobolus Leveillet Bouc. 152 DopGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE Ascobolus Leveillei var. americanus Cooke Ascodesmis nigricans v. Bee (Bou- & Ellis diera Claussenti P. Hen Ascobolus pusillus Boud. Boudiera sp. Ascobolus viridis Currey var. (?) Cubomia sp Ascobolus viridulus Phil. & Plow. Thecotheus Pelletieri (Crouan) Boud. Ascobolus Wintert Rehm Rhyparobius crustaceus (Fuckel) Rehm Ascophanus Aurora (Crouan) Boud. Rhyparobius pachyascus Zukal Ascophanus carneus (Pers.) Boud. Rhyparobius niveus (Fuckel) Rehm Ascophanus yates Boud. Rhyparobius sexdecimsporus (Crouan) Ascophanus glaucellus Rehm Sacc. Ascophanus PC (Crouan) Lasiobolus equinus (Miill.) Karst. Bo Saccobolus depauperatus (B. & Br.) Asrophowns Holmskjoldit Hansen Rehm Ascophanus lacteus (Cooke & Phil.) Phil. Saccobolus Kerverni (Crouan) Boud. ) Ascophanus corater onto (B. r.) Phil. Saccobolus neglectus Boud. Ascophanus minutiss Ss Boud. Saccobolus violaceus Boud Ascophanus ochraceus dein Boud. Thelebolus stercoreus Tode Of this list fourteen species have been grown more extensively and studied from the morphological standpoint as to the characters of their ascogonia, methods and conditions of spore germination, etc. Further studies are in progress, dealing with nuclear phe- nomena and methods of reproduction. The discussion of the identification of these species forms a part of another paper, which is now being prepared. I have found aceto-carmin useful for staining young ascogonia, although it is not permanent, and as a temporary stain it can not always be depended upon to differentiate between the nuclei and the granules of the cells. The nuclei are more easily differen- tiated in the young hyphae. A drop of the aceto-carmin mixture placed on a piece of agar containing the fungus before it is crushed under the cover glass, will stain the hyphae and ascogonia, if the slide is left for some time in a damp chamber where the stain does not dry out. The ascogonia, especially, swell under the action of the stain but this is no disadvantage when it is desired only to locate them. Material stained in toto with iron-hematoxylin can be crushed on the slide, perfectly dehydrated, and mounted in balsam without shrinkage. Such mounts are useful for showing germinated spores and the young mycelium. A still better method is to allow the spores to be shot upon a slide where they will stick securely enough to be carried through all the processes of heating, germination, fixation, etc. DopGE : METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 153 For the serial sections, Heidenhain’s iron-hematoxylin and Flemming’s triple stain were used. If longitudinal sections of hyphae were desired the blocks were cut parallel to the original upper surface of the culture medium. The ascogonia could also be located more easily in sections cut in this plane. The coils of the ascogonia do not appear to be oriented in any particular plane, and a section parallel to the upper surface of the agar is as favorable as any for their study. The nutrient medium most frequently used for artificial cul- tures was made by soaking 12-14 g. of agar over night in 500 c.c. of tap water and then adding to it 500 c.c. of filtered decoction of goose dung, obtained by allowing about 100 g. of the dung to remain in a liter of warm water for a few minutes. The mixture was heated in an autoclave at 120° C. for 30-40 minutes or in a steam sterilizer for a longer time. It was then filtered with a hot water filter and further sterilized for 30 minutes at 120° C., or intermittently for three days at 100° C. Another nutrient decoc- tion used with good results when a medium with little color was desired, was made by heating about 2 kg. of common garden soil man oven at 180° C. for an hour. A liter of a filtrate obtained from this soil while still warm was added to 12 g. of agar. The decoctions of goose dung were always strongly alkaline. During the sterilizing process the ammonia was largely driven off so that the medium was only very slightly alkaline to litmus. After the ascocarps had ripened on the medium, tests made with litmus gave sometimes an acid and sometimes an alkaline reaction, the one occurring as often as the other. The medium made with an extract of heated soil was very slightly acid. Petri dishes S~10 cm. in diameter and 1~2 cm. high, with as thin bottoms as could be obtained, were preferred as culture dishes on account of the method of observation employed. The plates were poured so that the medium was about 3 mm. deep and left to harden without disturbing, SPORE GERMINATION ave apgadg to obtaining artificial cultures of as large a the "Of species as possible, experiments were made to determine most favorable conditions for the germination of the spores. 154 DopceE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE A quantity of goose dung gathered in August I910, at the Zoological Park, was brought into the laboratory and _ placed in a tall battery jar completely lined with filter paper, and the jar was left uncovered to facilitate the partial drying of this freshly gathered material. It was left in this condition four or five days. The odor of ammonia, which had been very strong the first few days, became gradually less noticeable, but the bacterial decom- position appeared to be still going on rapidly. Examination showed, however, that the entire surface of the dung was covered with a dense aggregation of young fruits of Ascobolus Winteri Rehm. AscoBoOLUs WINTERI Rehm. Agar plates were prepared as described above, the nutrient being a decoction of goose dung. The effect of various tempera- tures, ranging from the body temperature of the birds downward, was first tested. For this purpose a copper germinating trough was used. This trough contained ten compartments covered with glass plates. It was heated by electricity so that the successive compartments were held at temperatures of 42°, 40°, 38°, 35°: 30°; 25°, 25°, and 24° C. respectively. Petri dishes containing the agaf inoculated with spores, were placed in these chambers and ex amined from time to time for 48 hours with negative results in all cases. The plates were then set aside at this time and eX amined for two or three days or until they became contaminated with bacteria and other fungi. In no case could any germinating spores be found, though the conditions as to degree of heat am time of exposure must have resembled those in the bird. This experiment was tried several times with minor variations. Some times a low percentage of sodium carbonate or variou binations of other salts were added to the decoction used in making up the medium. The spores could not be stimulated to growth under any of these conditions. Some of the damp chambers in which the fungus was growing stood on a laboratory table exposed to direct sunlight. In thesé cases spores were occasionally found that had germinated in the film of moisture that always gathers on the underside of slides placed over the dung to catch the spores. An attempt was made DopGE : METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 155 to transfer these germinated spores to the agar plates. When the spores were removed from the slide the germ tubes were either broken off or injured in some manner, but if the slides themselves were placed on the medium the mycelium would continue to grow and finally produce ascocarps. These cultures invariably became contaminated with foreign fungi. Small pieces of dung or filter paper upon which young ascocarps were growing, were next placed in the agar medium. Although many attempts were made to obtain cultures in this manner, not the slightest further growth of the mycelium was obtained. Several plates prepared in this manner were placed in a drying oven and heated slowly for 40 minutes. The temperature of the oven was thus gradually raised to 80° C. The plates were then withdrawn and allowed to stand in the laboratory at foom temperatures. After 24 hours it was found that the spores thrown out upon the medium from the mature ascocarps before the cultures had been heated, had germinated and the mycelium was growing vigorously. This experiment was re- peated with a number of plates, and unheated controls were main- tained at room temperatures. In all the plates that had been heated the spores germinated, while none of the spores in the controls did so. A series of experiments, some of which are tabulated below, Were made to test more fully the effect of heat on germination and to determine the approximate minimum, optimum, and maximum temperatures for spore germination. Controls at room temperatures were maintained in ninety cases. It will be seen from the table that about 80 per cent of the spores heated to 60°-70° C. germinated. In no case were the spores in the controls even swollen. The method as finally worked out may be described as follows: Spores for inoculation were obtained by laying glass slides °n corks over pieces of dung bearing ripe ascocarps. With the use of a Zeiss binocular, the spores were removed with a sterilized Platinum needle and stabbed into the medium about 1.5 cm. from the edge. If more than one plate was to be inoculated it was found necessary to moisten the spores by blowing the breath on the slide, since they dry out rapidly and adhere to the slide so firmly that their removal is impossible without destroying them. 156 DopGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE The species of Sordariaceae and Chaetomiaceae that usually grow in great abundance with species of Ascobolus, are for some reason not often present with A. Winteri on goose dung in this region. No spores of any other ascomycete were found on these slides. The precautions that are so necessary when pure cultures of other Ascobolus species are desired, are of little consequence when working with A. Winteri. The molds will be killed off, and the number of bacteria introduced with the spores will be much reduced by the heating process. Two ovens were used at different stages in my studies. One was a sheet-iron drying oven with an asbestos-lined shelf on which the cultures were placed. No oven of this type can be so arranged as to furnish the same degree of heat at all points on the shelf. By regulating a burner so that 20 minutes were required to raise the temperature of the oven to 75° C., as shown by a thermometer placed in one corner of the oven, and then removing the plates, good results were obtained. The plates were often left in the oven to cool, the door being opened, or the gas was turned off at 60° C. and the cultures allowed to cool in the closed oven. When this last method was employed, the spores themselves must have been maintained at temperatures between 50°-60° C. for at least 30 minutes. By substituting 4 burner that would raise the oven to 80° C. in five minutes, the per cent of germination was greatly reduced. The second oven was porcelain-lined and was found to be less satisfactory for these experiments, because the temperature of the inclosed air would quickly rise to 100° C. or more while the agar medium would still be cool. To determine the temperature t0 which this oven must be raised in order to bring about germination, eight cultures were stacked one on the other in three different tiers- It was found that with the oven heated to 100° C. the spores in the lowest plates of the three tiers were the only ones that germinated. The other plates were then reheated to 65° C. in the sheet-iron oven and most of them gave positive results. It is not necessary to mention the great number of variations with which these exper ments were performed. The size of the Petri dishes, depth of agar, and the position of the spores, are all factors which make it difficult to determine the exact temperature of the spore in each case where a solid medium is used. By quickly opening the ove? DopGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 157 and stirring the agar with a thermometer it was found that when this oven had been heated to 75° C. during a period of 20 minutes the agar in the Petri dishes was at about 60° C. When water was substituted in place of the agar the plates in the front row on the asbestos shelf were only at about 55° C. while those on the rear row were at 60°-65° C. The evidence obtained, however, shows conclusively that the application of heat is an effective stimulus to spore germination. The data for some thirty experiments, in which one hundred and ninety inoculations were made in as many plates, are summarized in TaBLE II. The per cent of germination was determined by noting approximately how many spores of given groups failed to grow. 99 per cent means that ungerminated spores could not be found, The plates in no. 20 and no. 21 were treated exactly alike but only ro per cent of the spores in the first (no. 20) germinated, while practically all the spores in the second (no. 21) did so. The spores from no. 20 were obtained from dung collected in the field during very cold rainy weather. The apothecia and spores were very much paler than is normally the case. The plates of no. 21 were inoculated with spores from apothecia developed from dung that had been gathered the previous year and stored in the laboratory. When an artificial culture has produced a number of ripe apothecia the spores may be seen lying all about on the surface and within the medium. These spores do not germinate even though the medium is well supplied with moisture. Three such cultures were heated to 60°, 65°, and 70° C. respectively. None of the spores in the medium germinated. It was not a case where the required nutrient was lacking, since many of the spores on the Covers of these same dishes germinated in the film of water after being heated. No second crop of this species ever appears in damp chamber cultures. It may be, however, that certain toxic sub- stances that inhibit germination are given off during the growth of the mycelium and apothecia. Spores from these same dishes Were used to inoculate controls containing fresh media, and in these controls germination was abundant. To determine the effect on germination when hard agar is used, a medium was made up with a much smaller percentage of TABLE II Results of experiments to show the effect of heat on the germination of the spores of Ascobolus Winteri on : ie] No. Date ( Maige | Medium, agar + Retoven’ | Noven'€: | Germinnion served | ermimiin (1910) iS) I Nov. 4, 4P.M I goose dung decoction 4 90° Nov, 5,8 P.M ts) a Control I goose dung decoction fo) Room o (Nov. 8) 62) 2 Nov. : 4, 47M I goose dung decoction a 90° Nov, 5,8 P.M 20 ae Control I g decoction oO Room o (Nov. 8) a 3 ov. s; Oo P.M 2 goose dung decoction 15 76° Nov. 6,3 P.M 50 = Control I se dung d tion fs) Room o (Nov. 8) oo 4 Nov. 12, 9P I goose dung decoction 15 76° o (Nov. 31) m 5 Nov. 12, 10 P.M I goose dung decoction 13 ag Bs Nov. 13, 9 A.M 5 is) 6 Nov. 12, 10 P.M I goose dung decoction 13 (i Nov. I 99 wn 7 Nov. 12, 10 P. I goose dung decoction 9 64° 0 (Nov. 25) (fe) 8 Nov. 12, 10:40 P.M I goose dung decoction 17 82° o (Nov. 25) g Nov, 13, 12 M. I goose dung Pcgitroas 5 75° o (Nov. 15) a 10 Nov. 14, 5 P.M. I goose dung decoction 15 47° o (Nov. 18) a Iz Nov. 15, 5 P.M. I goose pi oo 20 5° Nov. 17, 1 P.M. 95 4 I Nov. 15, 6P.M. I Reheated No. 9 10 82° Nov. 17 75 Se 13 Nov. 18, 4 P.M. Reheated No. ro 8 75° o (Nov. 30) iS (1911) } 14 May 28, 10 P.M. 18 15 70° May 29, 8 A.M. 90 = 15 May 29, 11 P.M. I N/100 Na2COs i3 70° May 30,9 A.M, 45 16 June 7, 11 P.M. 8 N/100 NazCOs 25 65° June 9,8 A.M. 90 eg 17 June 10, 5 P.M. 4 N/1t00 NazCOs 31 60° June 11, 8 A.M. 90 a) 18 June 11, 5 P.M. 5 N/100 NazCOs 35 60° June 12 80 S 19 May 28, 11 A.M. 28 N/10o NazCOs 30 65° May 29,9 A.M. 90 re) 20 Sept. 25, 11 P.M. 30 goose a one nchtgaag 15-20 60-75° Sept. 26 10 a 21 Oct. 3, 76: AM. ung a I5—20 60-75° Oct... 4 99 a 22 Nov. 12, 4P.M. 42° o (Nov. 15) Ss 23 Nov. 13, 11 A.M. 15 75° Nov. 14 909 -< 24 Nov. 13, 12 M. 30 90° o 25 Nov. 15, 5 P.M. 18 td Nov. 17, 8 A.M. 99 26 Nov. 19, 10 A.M. 20 Ge? Nov. 20 90 ‘ Dec. 17, 10 P.M. a5 70° Wes 90 1 AM, | qo? Dec. 21, 10 A.M. Rees 39: _F DopGE : METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 159 water. In this case no surface film of moisture was visible on the agar nor on the cover of the dish. Twelve plates were pre- pared and the spores heated in the usual manner. No spores germinated. Small pieces (about 5 mm. square) of another agar medium containing a good supply of moisture were inserted in _ the plates of hard agar. Spores were then stabbed into the pieces of soft agar and heated. Practically all of the spores germinated. The mycelium grew out on the hard agar and produced a large number of apothecia in about ten days. This demonstrates the possibility of growth and reproduction under conditions not favor- able for spore germination. ASCOBOLUS CARBONARIUS Karst. In my first experiments on the effects of heat on the germina- tion of the spores of this species, small pieces of the apothecia were placed in Petri dishes on goose dung agar prepared as above described and placed in the sterilizing oven, which was then slowly heated to a temperature of 65° C., the time required being 30 minutes. They were then removed from the oven and left at room temperature. The following morning, in the cultures that had been heated, hundreds of spores had germinated; not only ripe spores, but half grown, hyaline spores had germinated, sending out fully as long and vigorous germ tubes as the others. In the unheated control plates there was no evidence of germination. A medium was then made up with an extract of heated soil as a nutrient. Twenty plates of this agar medium were poured and imoculated with spores taken from the glass slides. Ten of these plates were heated to 65°—-75° C., the other ten were left at room temperatures. About 30 c.c. of the heated soil decoction was Poured into each of twenty more Petri dishes and ascospores sowed imthese. Ten of the dishes were heated to 65° C., and ten reserved unheated as controls. About 12 hours after, it was found that fully 90 per cent of the spores in both the liquid and the solid media that had been heated had germinated, while there was no germina- tion in the unheated controls. Many small hyaline spores had also germinated. Comparison showed that these were half grown “pores of A scobolus carbonarius which had failed to reach maturity before being expelled from the asci. Further attempts to induce 160 Dopce: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE the spores of this species to germinate at ordinary temperatures were unsuccessful. To determine the temperature used in such experiments more exactly, two Petri dishes, each containing about 50 c.c. of a decoction of heated soil, were heated in the oven after having been well inocu- lated with spores. The temperature of the decoction was deter-. mined by stirring with athermometer. The first reached 65° C. in ‘25 minutes, the second 60° C. in 19 minutes. So far as I was able to find, every spore in both dishes germinated. Another dish con- taining a like amount of the decoction without spores was heated in the oven for 30 minutes. At the end of this time the oven temperature was 80° C. The door was then opened and the tem- perature of the decoction proved to be 72° C. Spores were now put into this dish, the gas was turned off and the oven closed. After five minutes the temperature of the decoction was again determined as before. The temperature had dropped only two degrees. These spores were certainly exposed for five minutes to a temperature of 70°-72° C. Seven hours later all the spores had germinated. In another experiment a beaker containing a decoction of heated soil was heated in a hot water bath to a temperature of a 76° C. Spores were then introduced and the temperature main- tained at 75° C. for five minutes. Fully half the, spores germi- nated after six hours and only about one per cent had failed to germinate at the end of 24 hours. There is no doubt, however, that under certain conditions the spores of Ascobolus carbonarius may germinate without being exposed to such high temperatures. This is shown in the following experiment. A damp chamber containing a quantity of car bonaceous earth, upon which several ascocarps were growing, was exposed to direct sunlight for about two hours. Slides were placed above the ascocarps to catch the spores, and a few of these spores germinated in the film of water on the slide. A large number © the spores from these slides were wiped off into a heated soil decoc- tion and kept at room temperatures. The spores that had already germinated continued to grow, and in addition about 5-10 Pé& cent of the others germinated. It was found by further expeti- ments that liquid exposed to the sunlight under these conditions DopGE : METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 161 may reach a temperature of 50° C. in 30 minutes. This moder- ate rise in temperature has evidently a very stimulating effect on the spores, though the per cent of germination so achieved is not high. In the following table (TABLE III) I have brought together a summary of the results of my experiments on the effect of heat on the germination of the spores of Ascobolus carbonarius. The table shows that in the one hundred and twelve trials over go per cent of the spores germinated when heated in an oven for periods of from 15 to 40 minutes, the temperatures running up to but not exceeding 80°C. The highest per cent of germination was obtained by heating the oven up to from 70°-75° C. within the time limits specified. It is clear that the spores of this species very seldom germinate under cultural conditions unless heated to at least 50° C. for several minutes. Germination takes place equally well in such liquid media as tap water, decoctions of carbonaceous earth, decoctions of heated soil, and in dung decoc- tions; no difference in the percentage of germination is apparent when an agar medium made up with any of the decoctions just mentioned is employed, or when a peptone glucose agar or a malt agar is used. The percentage of germination is 90 per cent or over in all cases where the spores have been heated to 60°-75° C. for a few minutes. To obtain a more definite idea of the minimum, optimum, and maximum temperatures for the germination of spores of Ascobolus carbonarius two series of experiments were made. (a) About twenty Spores were placed in each of eleven test tubes half filled with a decoction of heated soil. A thermometer was used to stir the con- tents of the tubes while heating them separately in hot water baths. Each tube was heated for three minutes after its contents had been raised to the desired temperature, and was then cooled quickly by Placing it in a cold water bath. After 24 hours the contents of the tubes were poured into watch glasses and the per cent of germinated spores ascertained by actual count. Observations made at the end of three days and again at the end of seven days showed that there was no further germination after the first 24 hours. Tape IV shows the results of this set of experiments. (6) In the second series the spores were allowed to remain on TABLE III The effect of heat on the germination of the spores of Ascobolus carbonarius G9T No. Date No. of Medium Minutes heated Final temp Germination observed | Per cent of germi- y plates of oven, nation S : June 10 3 Goose dung agar 30 65° June 11 90+ = Control 4 Goose dung agar Room re) . 2 une II 7 Heated soil agar 31 60° June 12 99 . Control 7 Heated soil agar Room ra) = 2 June 11 3 Goose dung agar 30 69° June 12 90+ sa Control 3 Goose dung agar Room ta) is) 4 une 12, 11 A.M. I Heated soil decoction 20 70° June 12, 8 P.M. 99 iS} Control I Heated soil decoction Room (9) n ¥*5 June I J decoction 20 66° Ju 90 ro) T6 June 15, 10 A.M. I Heated soil decoction 25 65° June 15, 5 P.M. 99 y vi June 15, 10 A.M I Heated soil decoction 19 60° June 15, 5 P.M. 99 fol 8 June 21 2 Heated soil decoction 70° June 21, 11 P.M. 90+ qj Control I eated soil decoction Room 0 5 9 June I Heated soil decoction 30 80° June 22, to P.M. 09 co 10 Sept. 4 6 eated soil agar 15 70° Sept. 5 99 as Il Sept. 4 I Heated soil agar Room Sept. 5 0.5 12 Sept. 27 12 eated soil agar 40 100° ft) z 13 Sept. 28 6 Heated soil agar 35 go° Sept. 29 50 14 Sept. 28 12 ted soil agar 20 70° Sept. 29 90+ > 15 ot. 20 Heated soil agar 15 65° Oct. 8 90 5 16 Oct. -7 20 Unheated carbonaceous ‘o) earth decoction agar 20 70 Get... & 99 % 17 Oct. 16 2 iiss glucose agar 15 68° Oct. 21k 99 re 18 Oct. 10 2 Malt I5 68° Oot crt 99 ~ 19 Oct. 12 I5 Demonens n carbonaceou ie] earth boiled 5 min. ea 18 70° Ort; 37 99 by * The slide containing the spores used for no. 4 control was heated to 66° C. in the oven as sey y In no. 6 and 7 the temperature of the decoction was determined by stirring with a thermomet ‘The per cent of germination was determined approximately by observing the number of ungerminated spores in given groups. a ee eee ee oe mee DopGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 163 the glass slides on which they had been caught from the apothecia, and each slide was immersed in a beaker of the decoction of heated soil, which had been raised to the required temperature. In this manner the time of exposure was in every case five minutes. At the end of this time the slide was removed and placed in a Petri dish containing a decoction of heated soil. A fresh decoction and clean beaker were used in each case. As these slides were covered with hundreds of spores, the percentage of germination was determined by counting the spores visible in the field of the microscope and an average taken of ten countings. TABLE IV ‘ Experiment to show the maximum, optimum, and minimum Pee for the germination of the spores of Ascobolus ade when heated 3 m No. of s No. of spores E Temperature, C ge atiaaed | not germ: stat nated Per cent germinated 95° 0 16 0 93° I 38 2+ go° 2 27 o+ 83° 8 13 40 — 80° 9 Io 50+ hi 22 o 100 oi 7 o 100 eg 20 § 80 55° II 10 50+ 45 I ey | 5 3s” fa) 28 ° ——ao 0 19 0 TABLE V Experiment to show the maximum, optimum, and minimum temperatures for the germination of spores of Ascobolus States when heated 5 min. Temperature, C. Per cent germinated re 2 a ee er 0 EEE OREN Te amine mig pn ae I so ER I ae Pak ead ae a ena eS 30 Rye ec nee a a ee en a a 52 5 9 PS ee Nol ee ee eg Re a: 90 We ey ee, as ae es 99 er a ee 99 We ert s ee A el ea 84 Wn a ee 60 Reig ee ee a as 37 he 3 / : Both series of experiments give the same general result. When e Spores are heated for three minutes we find that only five per 164 DopnceE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE cent of those raised to 45° C. germinated. All spores heated to 65°- 75°C. germinated. Between 75° and 80° there wasa rapid falling off and at 93° C. only one spore of the thirty-nine germinated. There was also a marked difference in the time required for germination to begin. Inthe cultures heated to 65°-90° C. the mycelium had al- ready grown several millimeters when examined 24 hours later; the only spore germinated at 45° had just begun to send out the germ tubes at this time. When the time during which the spores were heated was lengthened to five minutes, the maximum temperature was lowered to 90° C. and the optimum was limited to 65°-70° C. ASCOBOLUS VIRIDIS Curr. var. ? Liquid decoctions were made from unheated soil gathered in” the habitat of the fungus; other decoctions were made from this soil heated to 180° C. for one hour, and from alkaline soil from North Dakota both heated and unheated. Agar media were pre- pared with each of the above decoctions. At least fifty different plates were inoculated and subjected to various degrees of heat ranging from — 5° C. for 24-48 hours, to 25°-75° C. for much shorter periods. Germination was obtained only in drop cultures made in a decoction of heated soil from the locality where the plants grew. Of the thousands of spores in Petri dishes containing this same liquid, none germinated. The spores germinated in the drop cultures could not be induced to continue their growth om the agar media. Fic. 2 and 3 show the manner in which the epispore breaks up as the spore germinates. ASCOBOLUS IMMERSUS Pers. The method by which the spores of A. immersus were getmi nated is the same as was used with the preceding species. The results of my experiments are given in TABLE VI. THECOTHEUS PELLETIERI (Crouan) Boud. The methods by which this fungus may be obtained in cultures on the natural substratum have been well described by Overto? (1906). The large size of the spores and the fact that all of the thirty-tW° usually lie together on the slide arranged to catch them as they aa ejected, make it possible to remove them without much dangef introducing the spores of other species. The agar medium was made TABLE VI The effect of heat on the germination of the spores of Ascobolus immersus Pers. No. Date noe be ‘ Medium, agar + Time nahn von e * Germination observed Per oa ba (1910) I N 8 I goose dung decoction 20 min 76° Nov. 30 a5 2 Deeg 3 goose dung decoction 20 min ane Dec. 3 +20 | Dec. I 4 goose dung de io 17 min 750 Dec: = 3 100 4 Dex. 3 I g dung decoction 30 min 80° fo) fe) 5 Dec. 19, 11 A.M. I abe oe decoction 30 min 65° Dec. 19, 9 P.M. 100 6 Dec. 19, 9:30 P.M. I g decoction 30 min 60° Dec. 20, 9 A.M. 7 Dec. 21 I aeet g ‘ea decoction + NazCO; (N/50) 15 min Ee 0 oO 8 Dec. 21 I heated soil decoction I5 min os” Dec: 22 75 9 Dec. 21 ; dung decoctio 20 min 80° Dec. 22 roo tio Dec. 23 I heated soil decoction 12 hrs —5° o oO II Dec. 23 I dung decoction 12 hrs —5° te) to) (1911) 12 Apr. 19 3 goose dung decoction 20 min Yh iad Apr. 20 80 13 May 5 8 goose dung decoction 25 min wee May 8 15 14 May 8 4 goose dung decoction 20 min te May 9 50 * Left the plates in the oven to cool. Two inoculated plates set outside the window during freezing weather for 12 hours were then maintained at room temperatures for 10 days without showing any signs of germination. As the table shows, in nearly every case where the plates had been heated for 15—20 minutes ed a large percentage of the spores germinat At the end of one hour the temperature of the oven was still 55° AVAOVIOMONOSY AO AYNLIND AO SGOHLFJ aoaoq 9T 166 DopGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE up with varying strengths of decoctions of dung and of heated soil, and the percentage of agar used was changed to get media of different degrees of hardness. The spores germinated fairly well after being heated 20 minutes, the final temperature of the oven being 70° C. They appear to germinate as well in the heated soil agar medium as in the dung decoction agar. A germ pore is present, as has been shown by Overton (loc. cit. f. 75). Germ tubes are usually put out at both ends of the spore at points only slightly to one side of the ends (FIG. 1). Four pure cultures of this species were allowed to grow for six weeks. The mycelium branched pro- fusely in every direction and grew slowly and irregularly. Its appearance was such as to suggest that the nutrient medium was unsuitable for its normal development. After being subjected to daily examinations they became contaminated and were dis- carded. The following table shows the results obtained from twenty- six plates inoculated and heated to 65°-75° C., the time ranging from 7 to 25 minutes. The low average per cent of germination (40 per cent) is accounted for by the fact that eight plates were overheated. TABLE VII Spore germination in Thecotheus Pelletieri * di . : Positive Date Popa soar eames Time to daak of nba results, IgIr of plates RACES heat oven oven, C. | germinated} per cent Apr. I Goose d. 73 x pie *Apr. 4 8 Horse d. 20 min 65—70° 6 75 Apr. 6 8 Goose d 20 min 70 3 37 Apr. 13 I Horse d. 7 min 70° ve) . tApr. 19 8 Goose d. 25 min. 45° I AscosBoLus LEVEILLEI Boud. Damp chamber cultures on horse dung produced such a large number of mature ascocarps that the spores could be caught directly by inverting an uncovered plate over the dung for 28 instant. In the first experiment three scattered clusters of spore? were caught on the medium. The plate was heated to 68° C- * Plates were left to cool in the oven with the door closed. The temperatut of the oven one hour after beginning the heating process was 55° C. Tt The porcelain-lined oven was used. The eight plates were stacked one above the other. Spores in the bottom plate, the one most heated, germinated. DopGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 167 the oven. Two spores germinated (FIG. 27). The mycelium of this form is more delicate than that of the other species I have studied. AscopoLus LEVEILLEI var. AMERICANUS Cooke & Ellis. N. A. F. no. 1096. Iwas unable to germinate the spores in cultures run parallel with those of A. Winteri. Five inoculated plates of horse dung decoction agar heated to 65°-76° C. likewise gave negative results. ASCOBOLUS XYLOPHILUS Seaver. This species was collected by F. J. Seaver in Colorado during the summer of 1911. It is one of the few species of Ascobolus that are said to grow on wood. An agar medium containing a decoction of heated soil was used. Eight plates were inoculated with small Pieces of the dried ascocarps and heated to 55°-70° C. Only two germinated spores were found (FIG. 15). Small amounts of sodium carbonate were added to the medium, previously heated to only 55° C. and then reheated up to 70° C., with negative results. Another medium was made up with a decoction of decayed wood but this did not prove any more effective. THELEBOLUS sSTERCOREUS Tode. After two days, delicate growths of mycelium appeared in two cultures, described above, at several different points where the moculation with the ascocarps of A. xylophilus had been made. No germifiated spores of Ascobolus could be found at these points, but after eight days an abundant crop of the apothecia of Thelebolus Slercoreus appeared on this mycelium. The apothecia were ar- ranged in characteristic zones as figured by Ramlow (1906). The material in one plate was killed and imbedded for sectioning. The other plate continued to produce ascocarps for two months, re- maining Practically a pure culture of Thelebolus. Massee & Salmon (1902) and others have already pointed out that this species oc- “sionally produces more than one ascus in an ascocarp. Such abnormalities as the production of the large spherical ascus directly from a cell of the ascogonium at a time before any of the enveloping — become visible, were also observed. Ramlow (loc. cit.) eee at the spores germinated at ordinary temperatures. The stances under which the species appeared in my cultures 168 DopcE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE show that the spores will grow after being heated to 55°-60° C. for about Io minutes. SACCOBOLUS NEGLECTUS Boud. The spores germinate readily after being heated to 60°-70° C. during a period of 15 minutes. Commonly one spore of the eight in the spore mass swells to a great size and sends out two or more germ tubes a little to one side of the ends (FIG. 6, 7). In their natural condition the spores are only slightly roughened, but after the swelling which precedes germination the spore wall is cracked in all directions and assumes a roughly warted appearance. In my experiments seldom more than four spores of the group of eight germinated. The mycelium develops in an agar medium contain- ing a decoction of dung or heated soil and fruits well after about 10 days. ASCOBOLUS FURFURACEUS Pers. The ascospores which were used in the cultures of this species were secured from an isolated ascocarp of a typically furfuraceous form. A small quantity of sodium carbonate (1:500) was intro- duced into a plate of heated soil agar and the latter was agai? sterilized a few minutes at 90°-100°C. The plates were inoculated and the oven heated for 20 minutes, rising to a temperature of 65° C. The spores germinated very readily under these condi- tions (FIG. 29). LASIOBOLUS EQUINUS (Miill.) Karst. ‘ Mature ascocarps were crushed out: in horse dung decoctio? agar and heated 15-17 minutes to 65°-68° C. A large number of spores in this plate germinated, but the culture soon became CO taminated with bacteria and other fungi and developed no ane carps. ASCOBOLUS GLABER Pers. Several forms of this species have been described. The used in my work was not colored. The colorless A. albidus, which Massee & Salmon (1902) consider a variety of this species ig not, on the evidence of their description and figures of the germr nated spores, the same that I have used. The irregular ridges of the epispore are shown in FIG. 26,a. I used a horse dung decoctio® agar in the one experiment tried. The plate was heated for 7. DopGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 169 minutes in the oven, and the oven temperature reached 70° C. Many of the spores germinated within 24 hours. The germ tubes were well developed and the hyphae formed later were not dis- tinguishable from the hyphae of A. immersus. Two views of a germinated spore are shown in FIG. 16, 26. TABLE VIII Time to Final saa tes seise: Date aie Medium, agar +4- noe temp. of we cesrcams' minutes) ven, C. (1910) Ascobolus Leveillei var mericanus Nov. 6 I j|horse dung decoction| 10 76° —_—— Ascobolus (1911) Leveillei var. A apex seige Det. .8 4 |horse dung decoction| 15 65° waneaeere ye Leveillei Apr. 7 I jhorse dung decoction) 17 68° Apr. 8 wen May 5 I |horse dung decoction| 20 70° | May 6 ee (1910) equinus Nov. 28 2 horse dung decoction| 20 80° —- A eae Nov. 29 I jhorse dung decoction} 11 75° Nov. 30 us Aili. Nov. 15 | 1 J|horsedungdecoction| 15 ypc — Ascophanus Nov. 7 I {horse dung decoction| 10 70° — iru Dec. 20 I |horse dung decoction} 18 69° | Dec. 21 Ascophanus (1911) Picea Sept. 29 3 jgoose dungdecoction| 15 74° Sept. 30 a é Peels ecg Sept. 29 9 |goosedung decoction} 15 74° =| Sept. 30 ‘ : (ead Dec. 21 3 |N/too NasCO3;+ Ascobolus wood decoction 20 | 60-70° | Dec. 23 x . Pa ora Dec. 19 5 |heated soil decoction! 11 gs” oe as Dec. 21 3. |heated soil decoction Thelebolus +N/50 NasCOs 17 65° | Dee. a3 Ster Saccobotue” Dec. 21 2 |heated soil decoction} 20 60° | Dec. 23 Seca Dec. 24 I |heated soil decoction) 16 65° Dec. 25 ne Saban Dec. 24 I |horse dung decoction| 16 65° | Dec. 25 neglect Saeco Dec. 25 I jhorse dung decoction; 20 41° Dec. 26 neglect | A «d Dec. 30 I jgoosedungdecoction| 16 44° | Dec. 31 Nigric, Ascodesmis Nov. 1 / 15 |goosedungdecoction|) 0 | Room | Nov. 2 Niors eee | | Nov. 2| 2 WORSEN ee Batu,” bee 170 DopGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE TABLE VIII gives the data obtained in germination experiments with the several species just described. The percentage of germination was not recorded. ASCODESMIS NIGRICANS Van Tieghem. (Boudiera Claussenit P. Henn.) This species appeared in a damp chamber culture of Gym- noascus ruber and Ascobolus viridulus on dog dung, April 2, 1910. Several germinated spores were found on the slides used to catch the spores of the Ascobolus. The same fungus appeared on human excrement the following September, and a year later still another crop was found growing on goose dung. The spores germinate at room temperatures equally well in dung decoction agar and ina — medium made up with decoction of heated soil. Some of the — plates were heated to 45°-50° C. for 10 minutes without killing , the spores. The mycelium grows rapidly and ascogonia and antheridia appear the second day. As many as ten concentric zones of fruits are formed in some plates. In this condition it | resembles the culture of Thelebolus stercoreus described by Ramlow — (1906), except that the zones of ascocarps are wider than the sterile spaces between adjacent zones. These two species are the only ones of the Ascobolaceae I have grown artificially that show such | concentric zones. ; The species of Discomycetes, Detonia trachycarpa, Lachnes melaloma, and Plicaria violacea were frequently found on carbon® — ceous earth along with Ascobolus carbonarius. Spores of these species did not germinate when heated to 65° C. ina heated soil decoction agar. Ascobolus pusillus (FIG. 8) is another species fre- | quently found on old burned places. I tried two inoculations with spores of this species. The plates were heated to 65 None of the spores of A. pusillus germinated while practically : all of the spores of A. carbonarius did. : As is well known, the spores of Pilobolus germinate in 4 duns decoction at normal room temperatures. 1 found that they wold : also germinate in a dung decoction agar when heated. : method killed off many of the bacteria and spores of other fungl 2 making it possible to get a fairly pure culture. 3 If one considers the evidence which has been given above of the : conditions under which the spores of fourteen species have Leis ; DopGE : METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 171 germinated, it will be seen that the artificial application of heat in certain cases is an effective substitute for whatever stimulus acts under natural conditions to induce germination. We may now turn to the results obtained by the study of the development of the apothecia in certain of the species named above. ASCOBOLUS CARBONARIUS Karsten, Fungi Fenniae exs. 463. 1866. In 1866 Karsten issued as no. 463 of the Fungi Fenniae this species of Ascobolus, accompanied by a description which stated that the ascocarp was sessile, greenish, later brownish, and fur- furaceous on the exterior. The spores were described as oblong- ellipsoid and purplish black. A formal description was published later (1870). This gave the spore measurements and added that they were reticulately sculptured and violaceous-fuscous in color. The habitat given for the species was on earth among pieces of charcoal. The identity of the species under this name seems to have been entirely lost sight of until the appearance of Seaver's paper on the Iowa Discomycetes (1910). Seaver concludes from a study of no. 463 Fungi Fenniae that the species commonly known as A, atrofuscus Phil. & Plow. is the same species. It has long been known that A. carbonicola Boud. (1877) and A. viridis Boud. (1869) are synonyms of A. atrofuscus. Durand (1902) has discussed the synonymy of A. atrofuscus and includes Phae- opeziza Nuttallii E. & E., N. A. F. no. 2908, among the synonyms. After having examined F. F. exs. no. 463, Phil. Elv. Brit. no. 47, E. & E., N. A. F. no. 2908, Fungi Galliae exs. no. 3935, and com- Pared the spore markings and measurements with Boudier’s figures and descriptions of A. viridis Boud. (1869, pl. 5. f. 10), I am convinced that our common species growing on burned Places js identical with Karsten’s A. carbonarius. Boudier has called our attention to a very characteristic abnormality which °ccurs in the formation of the outer layer of the spore wall. Such Spores as he has figured (loc. cit., pl. 5, iv, fig. 10) can be found in all the exsiccati specimens referred to above, and in any collection brought in from this vicinity. Fic. 11 was drawn from a spore taken from Fungi Galliae no. 3935 (A. atrofuscus). One reason for the confusion as to the species is found in Karsten’s description of the spore markings. The surface is 172 DopnGe: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE at first covered with coarse warts and can not well be described as reticulated until the spore walls have dried out and cracked around the borders of the warts. In this condition the spores are reticulated, the reticulations, however, are formed by the cracking of the epispore. The only other species growing on burned places likely to be confused with A. carbonarius is A. pusillus Boud. (1877). A. carbonarius may be found from May until November growing where quantities of wood have been burned. Places burned in the autumn are favorable for the growth of this species during May and June. As noted above, Boudier (1869) has given us a correct figure of a germinated spore of this species under the name A. viridis. Sometimes several germ tubes will arise from the middle of a spore instead of from near the end. The epispore is cracked in all directions, the smaller cracks running in between the warts and two or three larger cracks extending down to the endospore (FIG. 9, a). The germinated spore becomes an integral part of the vege- tative mycelium as was noted by De Bary (1884) for many Ascomycetes. Fic. 30 shows that the spore becomes a multi- nucleated cell, limited by the transverse septa formed beyond the points where the germ tubes emerged. Immature spores which germinated are shown in FIG. 31,0. When the spores are germinated in a decoction of heated soil, and the mycelium is allowed to grow for two or three days if this liquid, there frequently appear at intervals along the course of the hyphae, swellings or sporelike bodies (FIG. 9, b, d). Such a body is first formed at the end of a hypha but immediately sends out another hypha from the opposite side so that it appears to have been formed as an intercalary swelling. They are probably merely vesicles such as are very commonly found in artificial cultures of all sorts of fungi. About the third or fourth day one may look for the first 4P- pearance of a large number of spherical hyaline bodies arising at the extremities of straight narrow stalks, which are branches of the ordinary hyphae. They are borne singly, and as they are thin-walled and plainly function as spores they may be call conidia. These conidia are perfectly smooth and about 10 # in DopGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 173 diameter. They may be asexual spores designed to spread the species more extensively over the burned area, or they may possibly be blown by the wind and then germinate under suitable conditions in regions far removed from the parent mycelium. The conidiophore is slightly smaller at the end bearing the conidium (FIG. 9, c). One septum cuts off the conidium from its stalk and a second septum usually occurs at about the middle of the stalk. I am unable to state how these conidia are oriented when this species grows under normal conditions on carbona- ceous earth. In artificial cultures on agar media and in liquid extract of heated soil they show little tendency to rise above the surface of the medium. They may be formed along the bottom of the Petri dish, within the medium itself, or may extend out above the surface. A milk-white fluffy mass of mycelium always appears around the edge of the dish in cultures on agar. This mycelium is especially productive of the conidia. The conidia found on the surface of the medium are more or less pear-shaped and are bunched together on rather short threadlike stalks. Very rarely one finds a larger form bluntly pear-shaped and borne on an excep- Honally long stalk (F1c. 45). It is not uncommon to see conidia with bladderlike outgrowths at the end or at one side (FIG. 10, 46, 48). In cultures several days old many of the conidia are entirely empty. This may have been due to a lack of sufficient Nourishment or to some unknown pathological condition of the Culture, The method of the origin of the ascocarp in this species is unique among the Discomycetes so far studied. The process hvolves certain perplexing complications which occur at various asi and we can come to a better understanding of what I believe to be the normal course of events by first describing what co a medial well-marked stage of development such as is na a. ¥ - 33- Thesame letters are used throughout the descrip- cae = ier and later stages to designate particular parts of ‘the (a) PParatusin this species. F1c. 33 showsa spherical conidium x cell Zong at the end of a rather stout stalk (6) which arises from its stalk @ mycelial hypha. A septum cuts off the conidium from - The conidium has sent out a tube (d) nearly equal in i 174. DopGe: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE diameter to that of the conidium itself. There is a slight con- striction at the point of emergence. The germ tube grows straight out for a distance of 50-90 u and then forms a coil (f) of two to four turns. The cells of this coil all have the same diameter, each being three or four times as long as it is thick. The entire asco- gonium at this stage consists of twenty to forty cells arranged in a loose irregular spiral tapering gradually toward the tip. The distal cell (g) of the stalk coil bends sharply and connects with the first cell (k) of the ascogonium by a large pore which is distinctly visible. The cell () is somewhat spherical and its diameter is much greater than that of the stalk cells. The distal cell (J) of the ascogonium grows out to form a cell (k) whose length is two or three timesitsdiameter. This and the ten to twenty cells next beyond it form an organ (1) which it seems to me must be con- sidered asatrichogyne. This trichogyne is more or less irregularly coiled and gradually tapers toward the end, which has coiled itself tightly about the upper part of a somewhat elongated conidium m). The stalk (m) of this conidium is much longer and more slender than the stalk of the conidium (a). From the conidiophore (0) there arises a stout hypha, which sweeps out in an even curve, extending the entire length of the ascogonial coil. It sends out branches at intervals (p), which may anastomose with investing hyphae by H-shaped connections (g), and some branches come to lie in the region of the end cell (7) of the ascogonium. Other investing hyphae arise from the cells of the stalk coil. The stalk coil does not taper in either direction, and the sharp contrast in the shape, size, and contents between the cells d and h ane between the cells j and & enables us to distinguish with °e tainty the limits of the three regions of the system, viz., the stalk, ascogonium, and trichogyne. The cells of these regions differ markedly in their behavior in fixing and staining. The cells of the stalk coil are dense and finely granular, are moderately darkened by osmic acid, and deeply and evenly stained by acet” carmin and safranin. The ascogonial cells have more coarsely granular and vacuolar contents. The cells of the trichogyne 4 nearly hyaline, are not blackened by osmic acid, and do not staip readily. The connection between the tip of the trichogyne and the o- DopGE : METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 175 conidium is very close. Whether fusion takes place can not be determined from the preparations as studied in glycerin jelly. There can be no question, however, as to the specific attraction between the trichogyne and the conidium, and I shall call it the antheridial conidium. We may now note some variations from this type of develop- ment. FiG. 36 shows an archicarp in which the stalk is evenly coiled in a sort of snail-shell form. The conidium giving rise to the coil is concealed below but the stalk of the conidium is evi- dently at b. The ascogonium has made only one or two turns before growing far out in the medium. The outer portion has coiled upon itself and either come to an end at j or continued as a hyaline filament (2) which has come in contact with a mycelial hypha. This figure was drawn from the first fruit of this species that I had seen, and before the existence of the long transparent trichogyne was known. Since investing hyphae were being formed about the ascogonium, fertilization had evidently already taken place and the trichogyne, being dead, would scarcely have been visible without staining. FIG. 34 shows an archicarp that has failed to develop further, probably Owing to some injury received when an adjacent portion of the medium was removed. The first part of the stalk coil could not be found, and the remaining cells are entirely empty. The other regions, however, are very plainly marked, especially the connection between the stalk coil and the first cell of the ascogonium. - The end of th trichogyne is plainly coiled around an antheridial conidium. ° tis ids . germinate in liquid extract of heated soil and form archicar Soll ey I have never been able to find the complete of etal a liquid medium. Occasionally one finds such cases that af development in cultures on agar media. Fic. 42 shows alter the stalk coil has been formed, it may take on a th. Vegetative grow 2 176 DopcE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE It is not always possible to trace the connection between the trichogyne and the antheridial conidium. In some cases the end of the trichogyne was quite plainly visible but the connection with the conidium could not be found. FIG. 35 represents a vigorously growing young ascocarp. The trichogyne (J) is very close to the long-stalked conidium (m). Fic. 40 shows a type in which the whole system is closely twisted into a tangled mass of hyphae, yet the trichogyne (/) is plainly seen coiled about a conidium (at m). We have seen that the ascocarp originates as the result of the _ germination of a female conidium, the formation of a stalk coil, ascogonial coil, and a trichogyne. Whether fertilization regularly takes place by the fusion of the trichogyne with the second conidium is a question that can be determined only after further investigation. In all the cultures containing ascocarps may be found a struc: ture that at first sight might be taken for the stalk coil of the archicarp. It is, however, quite different in that it originates 48 a branch from a mycelial hypha, and after making a loose irregular coil of two or three turns sends off branches from various cells. It very frequently produces conidia either on short stalks arising from its cells (FIG. 48) or at the tip end of the coil (FIG. 47). Such coils have not been found in cultures not producing ascocarps, but are very common wherever fruits are being formed. They may be rudimentary archicarps. One marked feature in connection with the formation of the vegetative portion of the ascocarp, is the presence of the hypha referred to above (FIG. 33, 35, 42) as arising from the stalk of the conidium that produces the archicarp. This hypha may apparently in some cases, grow out of the conidium itself (FIG. 37) 44) or from the posterior cells of the stalk of the oogonium (FIG. 41) In either case it curves sharply over and extends along the coils of the ascogonium, coming to an end in the region of the tricho- gyne. This hypha and the stalk coil are still plainly visible in all young ascocarps, even after they have. become comparative) — well developed. No fusion was observed between this hypha and the trichogyne, although its structure and location might lead one to suspect that its function was not merely vegetative- DopGE : METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 177 The growth of the apothecium proceeds slowly and several days elapse before ascogenous hyphae can be found. In the mean- time a fringe of hyphae, the familiar secondary mycelium, grows out from the apothecium and penetrates the substratum in all directions. When this species is cultivated on carbonaceous earth in the laboratory, the base of the apothecium is clothed with a collar of light greenish yellow mycelium. If the young apothecia are removed from the artificial medium and carefully crushed under the cover glass, the cells giving rise to the ascogenous hyphae may slip out and become exposed to View (FIG. 38). Staining with a drop of aceto-carmin serves to differentiate the paraphyses and the ascogenous system from the other tissues of the ascocarp. About three cells of the ascogonium hearest its stalk coil have become very much enlarged so that they are nearly spherical. The method of the formation of the ascoge- nous hyphae should be noted. Primary ascogenous hyphae first 8row out from the second cell as stout spikelike growths, which are unbranched and consist of four or five cells each. When full- 8town they are somewhat irregularly bent in the region of their ups. This is no doubt due to the obstructions they meet, other- Wise they are perfectly straight (1G. 30). Secondary ascogenous hyphae arise from the ends of each of these primary hyphae and branch a few times to produce the ordinary hook-shaped tips. The ascus arises from the penultimate cell while the ultimate cell may continue its growth and produce another ascus, or if this does not occur it bends sharply downward and becomes closely applied to the antepenultimate cell and possibly fuses withit. At the time when these primary ascogenous hyphae have attained about half their full growth, the next cell of the ascogonium, which _ somewhat smaller than the one just described, begins to give "se to similar outgrowths, except that the basal cells may be some- What Swollen (ric, 39, 7). It is difficult to obtain both stages at “ eupa consequently this cannot be said at present to bea * spa The swelling may have been due to the action of ea ‘age used In staining. The characteristic staining of buce. — and their close connection with these stalklike out- hic abi certain cells of the ascogonium may indicate a ‘onship than is now held to exist. 178 DopGce: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE The ascocarps ripen slowly in the artificial media and reach maturity in 20-30 days after the spores have germinated. The largest ones grown artificially were 4-5 mm. in diameter. Spores from these have been used to obtain a second generation and do not appear to germinate without being heated. Ascocarps grown on the natural substratum in the laboratory require slightly less time to reach maturity and are usually larger than those grown artificially. ASCOPHANUS CARNEUS Pers. The cultures used in the studies of the origin of the apothecium of this species were obtained by transplanting small pieces of filter paper bearing the ascocarps to dung agar, where the mycelium grew rapidly and formed ascocarps sufficiently isolated to be transferred. In the first cultures large numbers of Zukal’s sclerotia (1889), the gemmae of Ternetz (1900), and the chlamy- dospores of Cutting (1909) appeared. After several such transfers no such bodies were found. Nine pure cultures of a rough-spored variety, A. sarcobius Boud., from Bermuda, have not developed these chlamydospores. The ascospores of this variety are suffi- ciently large and well marked to enable one to remove them from the slide on which they are caught, with some degree of assurance that the spores of other species are not introduced into the medium at thesame time. Three cultures containing the common smooth- spored form, all contain the ‘‘chlamydospores.” Ternetz’s careful investigation would indicate that the production of these bodies is characteristic of this species. Their non-appearance in certain cultures might be due to the nature of the medium used or to light and heat conditions. Or this may be good evidence that A. sarcobius is a very distinct species and not a variety of A. carneus as I at first assumed. Miss Ternetz’s figures of the ascogonium agree with those I found in cultures obtained by transfer. The stalk (FIG. 17, a) is composed of about five to eight hyaline cells. The ascogonium is differentiated as a region of five or six large granular, and slightly colored cells. The ascogonium forms @ loose coil of one or two turns (FIG. 17, b) and gives rise toa tricho- gyne which consists of five to seven narrow, non-granular cells. This organ is usually coiled tightly around over the body of the ascogonium but may sometimes be seen extending straight out DopGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 179 into the medium. When this occurs, one frequently finds that it gives rise to a slender branch at about the fourth”cell. This side branch (FIG. 17, d) may in some cases curve over and come in contact with a hypha arising from the first cell of the stalk of the ascogonium, but I am unable to state at present whether this is a constant feature in the process of development. None of the cultures from the germinated spores has produced ascocarps. Ternetz has proved that Ascophanus carneus does not produce fruit when kept in darkness. My cultures were placed in a very dimly lighted room and this may account for their failure to pro- duce ascocarps. Under the same conditions, however, Ascobolus Winteri fruited abundantly. AscopoLus WINTERI Rehm: Rabenhorst, Krypt.-Fl. 1%: 1124. 1896. The identification of this species was a matter of some difficulty. In some features it resembles Ascobolus brunneus Cooke, A. Stictoideus Speg., A. amoenus Oud., A. Leveillei (Cur.) Boud., and ‘A. Leveillei var. americanus Cooke & Ellis. The spores from apothecia grown in a vasculum are smooth, hyaline, and about 30” length. They appear to be perfectly mature. The asci project from the ascocarp, and the spores are shot upward several centi- meters. Such spores might be those of an Ascophanus. Spores in the asci from cultures in the light are pale amethyst colored. It is Possible to so place this species with reference to the light that hyaline spores will be thrown off from apothecia on one edge of the substratum and well colored spores from the other. The Spores are delicately warted; the warts being arranged in short broken lines give it a somewhat reticulated appearance, a char- acteristic of the spore of A. brunneus according to Rehm (1896). A few narrow cleftlike furrows in the epispore are visible (FIG. 12). ba @pparent clefts resemble those peculiar to the spores of A. pe om ; (Fic. 20). ne young apothecia may appear to be thas 3 a. greenish, or cinereous, but this color is probably only Sg the substratum showing through. _The apothecia are Pe Shenae and colorless. Ch. A. stictoideus Speg. The ecies Could not be identified with the descriptions of any known I ee ; . : n the Massee collection is a specimen accompanied with 180 DopcE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE colored illustrations. The specimen is on goose dung and had been identified by Massee as A. glaber. His figure of the spores, and the spores themselves, agree with those in no. 211 Rehm Ascom. exs. (A. Leveillei) and with the spores of our species. Massee’s specimen can not be A. glaber, because the purple spore markings of that species consist of ridges and not cracks. As is well known, Rehm afterwards decided (1896) that his A. Leveillet is a new species, which he calls A. Winteri. As noted, I was unable to identify this specimen from Rehm’s description, but the agree- ment of my material with no. 211 Rehm Ascom. exs. is perfectly convincing. Our species has been found on goose dung from néveral different localities in this vicinity but not on any other substratum. No other species of Ascobolus has been found with it, although abund- ant growths of Ascophanus carneus sometimes follow after a week. An epidemic of cholera destroyed the geese at the Zoological Park in the summer of 1911. There were many other kinds of fowl around the same ponds after the epidemic but the fungus was not found on their dung. It was necessary to obtain material from other localities. It would appear that we have in this case one species, at least, that is closely confined to a particular kind of substratum. The time that intervenes between spore germination and the formation of the initial organs of the apothecium, seems to depend mainly on two factors, viz., the nature of the medium and the point at which the inoculation has been made. If a weak decoc- tion of dung or of heated soil is used in making up the agar medium a correspondingly longer time must elapse. If the inoculation is made at about 2 cm. from the edge of a Petri dish 10 cm. in diam- eter, the first apothecia will be found at a point between the germinated spores and the nearest edge of the dish. They havé often appeared in this region in less than 48 hours after the spores germinated. On the other side, the mycelium will spread out fanlike and reach the edge in 4-6 days. Curiously enough, as @ usual thing, no apothecia are formed until the growth of the mycelium is interrupted by the edge of the Petri dish; then they begin to appear in patches around the border. Later on, densé clusters may spring up at any point in the medium. Other regions DopcE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 18] may remain entirely free from apothecia. When spores are sown at two points on opposite sides of the plate rather close to its edge, the hyphae from either region will not cross over into the territory of the other, but the apothecia are formed in an irregular line just back of the tips of the hyphae, parallel to a neutral zone between the two mycelia. (TExtT FIG. I.) 3 2 Fic. 1. Shows the growth of the mycelium and formation of the apothecia of Ascobolus Winteri in a culture inoculated at two points on opposite sides of the plate. Pio. A large number of apothecia are formed in the region at c, where a colony of bacteria has developed. The behavior of the vegetative hyphae with reference to bacterial colonies present in the cultures, also shows some interest- Mg peculiarities. In some cases the mycelial hyphae would run through and Over the bacterial colonies and mingle with them. Tn other cases the growth of the hyphae was checked at some dis- tance from the bacterial colony, apparently owing to the emanation of toxic substances from it. A sterile zone one centimeter wide Was sometimes left between the hyphae and the bacteria. Bordering this zone a dense aggregation of apothecia would form. TEXT FIG. 2.) No circular concentric zones of fruit bodies were formed in this €s. Any factor tending to limit the vegetative growth of the Mycelium serves to bring about the formation of apothecia. The manner in which the mycelium made its way in a hard medium deserves notice. Ordinarily the mycelium grows along 182 DopGEeE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE the bottom, within the medium itself or on the surface. Whena very hard agar is used, as described under spore germination, the mycelium from the germinated spores divides into two portions, one growing on the surface, the other along the very bottom. On focusing down through the medium the two planes of growth are seen to be very sharply defined. The older mycelium does not show the planes of separation as does the mycelium formed during the first few days. Another interesting feature in this connection is the vertical distribution of the ascocarps. In some cases all of the ascogonia were formed deep down in the medium and in direct contact with the bottom of the dish. Again they would form on the very surface of the medium or be distributed irregularly as regards depth. The amount of light and its direction, the tem- perature of the room, and the depth of the medium in the dish are apparently the determining factors in this respect. The apothecium takes its origin in a well marked archicarp, which arises as a branch of a mycelial hypha and immediately bends sharply on itself. As growth proceeds its diameter increases to such an extent that it can be readily distinguished from ordinary vegetative branches (FIG. 50). A septum is formed a few microns from the parent hypha, and the distal part (FIG. 51) begins to curve at the tipand to form a spiral (FIG. 52) which ultimately consists of two or three complete turns (FIG. 53). This spiral may be formed on the same side of the hypha where it originated, or the branch may curve over or under the hypha and form the spiral on the opposite side. The coil continues to grow and thicken and soon becomes septate. Its tip becomes somewhat long and tapering; and on analogy with the carpogonia of the lichens may be regarded as a trichogyne. We can distinguish three regions in this initial organ (FIG. 54): the stalk (a) consisting of two or three cells; these, however, are not sharply distinguished from (b) one of the two or three larger central cells, which later becomes the ascogenous ~ cells. The remaining outer portion of the spiral (c), which I shall call the trichogyne, is made up of three or four cells which gradu- ally decrease in diameter and end rather abruptly (FIG. 53): At this time the cells of the coil are not inclosed by investing hyphae A great many archicarps can be found in the stage of development shown in FIG. 53, and this may indicate that a short resting period DopGE : METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 188 occurs at this time. I have not found that the archicarps are produced more abundantly during any particular hour of the day. From the first stalk cell a hypha (d) now arises which apparently grows very rapidly, keeping close to the coil (FIG. 54). Similar branches (e) then emerge from the second or even the third cell and these appear to be the first enveloping hyphae. At this stage the tip of the trichogyne may sometimes be seen to be entirely free but lying close to the next adjacent turn of the coil. Develop- ment from this stage on takes place so rapidly that it is difficult to follow the process. By crushing small portions of agar con- taining ascogonia under the cover glass and staining with aceto- carmin or methylene blue, stages were found in which the tip of the trichogyne had actually applied itself to the branch from the lowest cell and perhaps fused with it. In several cases observed the point of contact is some distance back of the tip of this branch. It is quite possible that there is a fertilization at this stage and that the branch arising from one of the stalk cells is an antheridium. FIG. 55 shows the point of contact still farther from the tip than is ordinarily the case. When this cell was first examined no indica- tion of a fusion could be made out, but when the cover glass was Pressed down on the agar the spiral was partly untwisted and the @pparently fused cells were exposed to view. Fic. 54 shows another similar fusion. Many archicarps fail to produce apothecia. In these the spiral Ss More open and makes only one or two complete turns before a long tapering trichogyne is formed. The central cells are fewer im number, and the stout hyphae arising from the two or three stalk cells appear very early and extend straight out into the medium instead of up over the coil towards the trichogyne. The tricho- Syne tapers gradually into a slender tip (FIG. 57, c), or it may be Set off sharply from the larger cells by a very sudden narrowing (FIG. 56). Such forms as these are very conspicuous and should hie able for study. Although many attempts have been made W their development, no case was found in which the tricho- 4 cogs in contact with a hypha from the basal cells. As noted, tigi ik ese cases observed developed apothecia or continued sen to he to any great extent. In one case the trichogyne ves © apparently fused with branches from neighboring 184 Dopce: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE hyphae, and the branches from the basal cells were observed to fuse with similar vegetative hyphae. Fic. 57 shows such a fusion which resulted in no further development. Their failure to develop normally may possibly have been due to the treatment to which the plants were subjected in studying the cultures, which may have resulted in slight drying or even mechanical injury. Still in some cases archicarps were observed at about two-hour intervals continuously for two or three days, which showed but little further growth, while all about in the same cultures other coils were continuing their development and apothecia were being ripened. It seems quite possible that the failure of these archi- carps to develop was due to failure of the trichogyne to effect a fusion with an antheridium, though the explanation of this failure is not clear. ASCOBOLUS IMMERSUS Pers. This species is widely distributed and very well known. The spores, which are about 60 X 304, are entirely smooth with the exception of a few narrow clefts in the epispore (FIG. 20). FIG. 21 represents a spore germinating at four different points. The germ pores are distinctly visible at this stage. FIG. 22 and 23 show two germinated spores from the same group of eight. The hyphae shown in FIG. 23 were well fixed with a weak Flemming’s fluid. The cytoplasm has a finely granular structure. The cytoplasm of the large hyphae (FIG. 22) is very coarsely reticu- lated and vacuolar. As the germ tube issues from the pore, it enlarges suddenly, giving rise to a hypha slightly thicker than the hyphae produced by some spores. These coarse hyphae can readily be distinguished in cultures on agar media. I have not learned that they differ functionally from the smaller and more common sort. The mycelium grows vigorously in heated soil agar but Pro duces very few fruits. The most abundant crops were obtained on a goose dung decoction to which sodium carbonate (1:500) had been added. It will be seen by referring to FIG. 24 that the archicarp is larger and contains more cells that the archicarp of 4 Winteri. The structures shown in this figure are somewhat dis- proportionally swollen by the aceto-carmin stain, especially the DopGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 185 parent vegetative hyphae. The archicarp consists of about twenty cells, of which we may say four to six belong to the stalk, about eight to the ascogonial region, and the remaining cells to the trichogyne. A large number of archicarps were stained in toto with aceto-carmin and iron-hematoxylin. Ina majority of these preparations there were three or four cells of the archicarp that took but little stain. All the other cells contained several nuclei while only an occasional nucleus could be found in the region of these hyaline cells (FIG. 25). I have seen no cultures that appear to be more vigorous that this one, and as there were many apothecia in all stages of development present, I can not believe this was a pathological condition. If such were the case it was pretty generally distributed in the culture. In this species as in all others I have studied, the spiral nature of the coil is much altered as the ascocarp is developed. The investing hyphae push in between the turns and straighten out the coil so that sections of the apothecium show a wormlike y. The young apothecia are covered with a secondary mycelium which spreads out in all directions, even directly upward to the Surface of the medium when the apothecium is completely im- bedded. The time required for the production of the mature fruit seems to be much longer in these artificial cultures than is the case with plants developing on the natural substratum. Ascogo.us FURFURACEUs Pers. The manner in which the spores germinate (FIG. 29) does not differ materially from that described for other species. Nine days after the germination, the cultures contained hundreds of archi- carps and young ascocarps. The light greenish color was present at a very early stage. Molliard (1903) and Claussen (1905) found sreat numbers of oidia were produced on the mycelium. As has been poted above, the former was unable to obtain ascocarps ee the introduction of bacteria. Claussen grew the myce- frets S Oidia for one hundred generations without obtaining cultures am very certain that no oidia were produced in these a ’ NOY were there any chlamydospores such as Welsford 997) has described. These asexual spores may possibly be 186 DopcGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE produced under different cultural conditions from those maintained in my experiments.* The archicarp is very similar to that of A. Wintert and A. immersus. The three regions, stalk, ascogonium, and tricho- gyne, are not as distinctly differentiated as in the archicarp of Ascophanus carneus. The archicarp arises from the mycelium and forms a spiral coil of three or four complete turns. Fic. 28 is reconstructed from stained microtome sections. The few in- vesting hyphae arising from the stalk cells and growing up near the trichogyne, are not included in the drawing. The stalk is quite well marked, consisting of about four short cells. The com- plete archicarp consists of about twenty cells. GENERAL DISCUSSION It is probably true that many species of the Ascobolaceae are distributed by animals that have eaten food upon which the spores have been ejected. It has been shown by Janczewski, Massee, and others, that animal digestion may be an effective stimulus to germination, or at least that the spores are not kill by this treatment. It is well known that the spores of T° helebolus, Ascodesmis, and species of Rhyparobius will germinate in dung decoctions or even in tap water without special treatment. Copro- philous fungi such as Pilobolus, Gymnoascus, and Coprinus get mi- nate at ordinary temperatures; and it has not been proved that 7 the species of Ascobolus, which have been thought to germinate — only after being digested by animals, may not germinate readi at ordinary temperatures after a sufficient resting period. During a resting period of several weeks or months the possibly necessary chemical changes leading up to germination might be effected by — natural agencies, such as the products of bacterial decomposition in the substratum, alternation of heat and cold, changes in condition of moisture, etc. My experiments show that occasionally the spores of a species will grow under conditions that are not, however, favor : able for a general germination. These exceptional cases mY c. count for the many contradictory statements that have been BY : * Oidia have been found in several later cultures, presumably of A- furfuracets a though they remained sterile and I have been unable to determine their identity with certainty. DopGE: METHODs OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 187 regarding the germination of the spores of certain species of the Ascobolaceae, and any experiments on germination should take into account this apparent variability in the tendency of the spores to germinate under given conditions. None the less it is clear from my experiments that the spores of Ascobolus in general will not germinate in culture media at ordinary temperatures. It has been recognized by many investigators that exposure to rather high temperatures favors the germination of spores as well as the germination of seeds. It is also well known that tem- peratures of 50°-60° C. do not kill the spores of certain species of fungi. I have been unable to find any account of germination effected at temperatures of 50°-60° C. when much lower tempera- tures would not have proved even more satisfactory. As the experiments here described have shown, the spores of certain species of A scobolus, Ascophanus, Thecotheus, and Lasiobolus could be made to germinate abundantly by heating them to 50°-70° C. for a short time. The method of artificial culture that I have employed differs from others mainly in this fact, that I have sub- jected the spores to high temperatures for short periods as a means of inducing germination when longer exposures at lower temperatures were not effective. It may be that high tempera- se bring about chemical changes analogous to the changes that might be produced at low temperatures during longer periods. It 1S a striking fact that half-grown spores of Ascobolus carbonarius germinated readily after being heated to 60°-70° C. I have made a few experiments on non-coprophilous Discomy- — which, however, were too limited to show whether the ie Process was especially effective in connection with dung- Srowing fungi only. My experiments with Ascobolus suggest that pres unusual treatments may be effective in stimulating ger- sation in the case of forms that have hitherto proved entirely rsistant. It is especially interesting to note that heating not only avors germination but at the same time kills off other fungi which rurally Stow along with the Ascobolus on the dung. Still certain Species of the Sordariaceae germinate at ordinary tem- Peratures in dung decoctions and many of these are not killed at €r temperatures; in fact, some of them appear also to these high be stimulated by the process. 188 Dopce: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE It will be of interest to determine whether there are tempera- ture optima for spore germination in different groups of fungi, and also whether these optima correspond to those for enzyme action on fats and other reserve materials found in spores and seeds. Melhus (1911), working with the spores of certain Oomycetes, has shown that the optimum temperature for the germination of spores of Cystopus is below that of the ordinary room and that the spores can be germinated abundantly and after being exposed to temperatures of 1°-5°C.for 24 hours. Itis not easy to understand, why low temperatures should be effective in the case of the Oomy- cetes and high temperatures in the Ascobolaceae. The teleuto- spores of the rusts can be made to germinate much earlier if artifi- cially subjected to low temperatures. Experiments which I have tried with Ascobolus, however, seem to indicate that freezing temperatures are not generally effective. I have been able to germinate spores of several species of the Ascobolaceae in an extract of heated soil made slightly acid, and have noted a few spores germinating in a film of water on the cover of the Petri dish containing the apothecia. My experiments show that the acidity or alkalinity of a medium, within certain limits, or the amount of nutrient present, are entirely secondary factors and of minor importance in connection with spore germination, though, of course, these factors are highly important for the growth of the mycelium and the production of fruit bodies. As I have | described above, the growth of the mycelium and the apothecia is apparently accompanied by the formation of certain toxins in the medium, which have an inhibitory effect on spore germina- tion and on the growth of the mycelium from another region of the culture. This might seem to be opposed to Ferguson's obset- vation (1902) that the spores of Agaricus can be made to germinal by placing small portions of the mycelium in the medium with - spores. The statements are, however, not necessarily antagon™ — tic. The presence of an actively growing mycelium of the mus? room might hinder germination. Janczewski (1871) has pointed out the weakness of 4 chat acterization of the Ascobolaceae on the basis of the project?” of the asci above the surface of the hymenium. He finds that the — asci of many species of the Pezizaceae likewise project above the | DopcGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 189 surface and that such a character is quantitative rather than qualitative. He suggests that it is only by a more thorough knowledge of the initial organs of the ascocarp that a satisfactory classification of the Ascomycetes can be obtained. Such a basis for classification would require a vast amount of iny tig itis known that forms now widely separated have quite similar initial organs, and that in species now placed in the same genus these organs may be quite unlike. The archicarp of A scobolus carbonarius, with its long trichogyne conjugating with a conidium, is very suggestive of the conditions in the lichens. The trichogyne of the lichens, however, grows upwards through the tissues of the thallus until its tip becomes slightly protruded above the surface. The spermatia which are extruded from the spermogonia, are then in some way brought into contact with the tip of the trichogyne. It is probably true that many of the conidia arising from the mycelium of Asco- bolus carbonarius are asexual spores, but it is quite as clear that some of them are functionally equivalent to the spermatia of the lichens. The presence of only a limited number of male cells, and these permanently attached to their stalks, would favor the development of a trichogyne with a tendency to grow outward in @ very irregular fashion, thereby increasing their chances of reaching a male cell. In this similarity of the male cells to the ordinary vegetative reproductive cells we may have a step toward Such @ condition as is present in the rusts, where the sexual fusions occur between equal hyphal cells, and the spermatia have become functionless. On the basis of these facts I am inclined to favor the view that the Ascomycetes have originated from the red algae through forms the lichens, perhaps forms that have given rise to the lichens. Trichogynes and spermatia are found only in red algae and scomycetes, and the fungal element of the lichens represents — the essential features of each group. This would not ee naitate accepting the view that the apothecium is the most ri type of the ascocarp. The differences between the a the apothecium are not very fundamental; the : rom the one to the other is easily conceived, and is i... : 2 dicated in the species of the lichens in which the fruit body is a Pyrenocarp, ’ since 190 DopcGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE There are also forms in which the thallus is very poorly de- veloped. Some species resemble quite closely species of Humaria and Ascobolus which grow on the ground among mosses and algae. An investigation of these forms may lead to the discovery of initial organs, which will even more convincingly establish the rela- tionship between the Discomycetes and the discomycetous lichens. I have shown that Ascobolus carbonarius, with its long trich- ogyne coming to wind about an antheridial conidium, is suggestive of a relationship between this species and the lichens. The development of the archicarp directly from a female conidium may be an adaptive feature correlated with the commonly occurring failure of the rudimentary coils (described p. 175) to develop ascocarps. No other ascomycete is known in which the archi- carp originates directly from the germination of a conidium. I believe, however, that further investigation will show that this habit is not confined to this one species alone. When it is cor sidered that only a few species of the Discomycetes have been cultivated artificially in such a way as to enable the investigator to follow the development of the apothecium directly from the mycelium, it is not surprising that our knowledge in this connection is very limited. The multicellular trichogyne of Lachnea stercorea indicates phylogenetic relationship between this species and Ascobolus — carbonarius. Miss Fraser was unable to trace the origin of the antheridium with which this trichogyne fuses. There is an undoubted tendency to the disappearance of the trichogyne in the Ascomycetes, though this does not necess* rily mean a disappearance of sexual reproduction. We can trace the reduction of a trichogyne through well graded stages. Wel developed septate trichogynes are also found in Ascophanws carneus, A. ochraceus, Ascobolus immersus, and A. Wintert. me the last two species the trichogyne is not always distinctly dif- ferentiated from the ascogonium. Spirally coiled ar chicarp® tapering gradually toward the tip, are known in such forms 4 Aspergillus, Sordaria, Hypocopra, and Saccobolus. Ao In Pyronema the archicarp has become reduced to such 4% : extent that septa are no longer found in the trichogyn® The antheridium has come to be developed sufficiently ne at 4 DoDGE : METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 191 oogonium to enable a one-celled trichogyne to bring the sexual nuclei together. The reduction of the trichogyne has gone on still further in Ascodesmis. Humaria granulata is one of the best known forms in which a trichogyne is no longer developed. I am inclined to believe that Dangeard’s species Ascobolus mirabilis is really A. viridis Boud., as he suggests it may be. I have given my reasons for considering this latter species as identical with A. carbonarius Karst. Dangeard found his species in one of his old cultures of Pyronema and assumed that it was introduced along with some carbonaceous earth upon which the Pyronema was growing. This habitat on carbonaceous earth is very characteristic of A. carbonarius. Dangeard found few apothecia in his cultures, a feature I have noted in my cul- tures of A. carbonarius. The structure of the archicarp, or as much of it as he saw, agrees in general with the central portion of that organ as I find it in A. carbonarius. The stalk cells are very similar, and the three or four enormous cells concerned in the production of the ascogenous hyphae are essentially like the same cells as I have described them. In a few cases he saw a few hyaline cells extending out beyond these larger cells, as do the empty cells of the distal end of the ascogonium in my forms. Dangeard noted how easily the ascogenous cells can be squeezed out of a young apothecium, and the appearance of the ascogenous hyphae growing out of the ascogenous cell was such as to attract his attention. He has also noted that septa are formed in these ascogenous hyphae as they grow out from the ascogenous cell, so that when they are mature they are straight, club-shaped structures consisting of three or four cells. These are plainly the organs that I have called primary ascogenous hyphae. His Sure of a young apothecium, as seen from above, agrees also with oo What he has taken to be the remains of the opinion md archicarp lying outside of the main fruit body, is in my a Owever, the distal end of the archicarp from which the baa < sal I find as above described, that this long wind- e eis the ascogonium becomes invested with hyphae quite ; ntly of the portion that is to give rise to the main is Wiehe Tt is only in the older stages that the whole system Y inclosed to form an oval mass. The very transparent 192 PDopGE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE trichogyne might easily escape his attention. He shows the archi- carp arising directly from the mycelium as a branch of an ordinary hypha and found no cases in which it arises from a conidium. Both methods of origin occur beyond question. He makes no mention of asexual spores and describes the vegetative hyphae as being rather coarse and larger than the hyphae of A. furfuraceus. This is not always true for the hyphae of A. carbonarius. His description of the pores between the cells of the ascogonium does not agree with my observations on A. carbonarius, but he has not correctly described the pores as they exist in A. furfuraceus. If his species is not really A. carbonarius it is certainly interesting that there is another species so similar in many respects, growing on carbonaceous earth. SUMMARY 1. The ascospores of many coprophilous species of the Asco- bolaceae, which rarely germinate in artificial media under ordi- nary conditions, can readily be made to germinate by subjecting them to high temperatures, 50°—70° C., for five to ten minutes. In the case of Ascobolus carbonarius, which is terrestrial, many spores will still germinate when heated to 80° C. for five minutes. The heating process favors pure cultures, since the spores of many fungi are killed at these high temperatures. | 2. Heating the spores appears to hasten the ripening processes: — half-grown spores of A. carbonarius can be germinated in this manner. 3. Germination occurs about eight hours after the spores have been heated. The epispore becomes cracked in all directions, and two or more germ tubesare put out at short distances from the ends of the spore. 4. The acidity or alkalinity of a medium is not an important factor in determining germination. The number of apothecia pro” duced may depend upon the reaction of the nutrient medium. 5. The mycelium of A. carbonarius produces a large number conidia, some of which give rise directly to the archicarp- coil, the ascogonium, and the trichogyne. The tip of the tricho gyne sometimes becomes coiled about an antheridial conidium: Archicarps may also arise from the mycelium. DopGE : METHODs OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 193 6. The archicarps of Ascophanus carneus, Ascobolus immersus, A. furfuraceus, and A. Winteri arise directly from the mycelium; they are spirally coiled organs of which the peripheral cells rep- resent a more or less strongly developed trichogyne. The tricho- gyne frequently becomes attached to a hypha growing out at the base of the archicarp. 7. The general character of the archicarps described and the presence of septate trichogynes, support the view that the lichens tepresent primitive forms of the Ascomycetes. OLUMBIA UNIVERSITY. Explanation of plates 10-15 The magnifications are given in connection with each figure. In some cases the surface markings of the spores are not shown in the figure. PLATE I0 ig. I. a, germinated spore of Thecotheus Pelletieri, unstained. 275. 6, germinated spore of Thecotheus Pelletieri, showing germination from only one germ pore, stained in toto. X425. Fic. 2, 3. germinated spores of Ascobolus viridis var. 450. Fic. 4. a, immature spore of A. viridis var. X800. 6, mature spore of A. viridis var, 800 Fic. 5. Very large spore of A. viridis Curr. from no. 196 Phil. Elv. Brit. 800. Fic. 6. Germinated spore of Saccobolus neglectus, showing the manner in which the epispore has been broken away during germination. 450. Fic. 7. Group of eight spores of Saccobolus neglectus, in which one spore has serminated and a second spore (a) has swollen preparatory to germination. 450. Fic. 8; Spores of Ascobolus pusillus Boud. 00, 1G. 9. Ascobolus carbonarius: a, germinated spore; b, swollen vesicle on the hypha; c, conidium; X275; d, another vesicle stained with aceto-car carmin; X450. Fic. 10, Conidium of A. carbon narius, showing swollen protuberance. 250. Fic. rr, Spore of A. carbonarius, showing the ends capped with a thickening of the epispore. 800 Fic. 12, Spores of Ascobolus Winteri. X 700. Fic. 13. Germinated spores of A. Winteri. x Fic. 14. Mycelium and germinated spore of A. Winter X725 FIG. 35. Two spores of — neo one ee germinated. X450. ? Fic, 16. Germin ated spore . g in which the Pispore becomes cracked due to ee X400. Hi ai d, hypha in contact with the ‘icreas: 250. . 18. Germinated spore of A. carne 8 ia T9 Germinated spores of Ascophanus sarcobius. X380 - 20 194. DopcE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE Fic. 21. Germinated spore of A. immersus. X250 Fic. 22, 23. Germinated spores and mycelium of A immersus. 650. Fic. 24. Archicarp of A. immersus, stained in toto with aceto-carmin: a, stalk cells; b, ascogonium; ¢, trichogyne torn from the hypha (d). 630. chicarp of A. immersus stained with aceto-carmin, showing four a SOE empty cells. 630. Fic. 26. Spores of Ascobolus glaber: a shows the characteristic markings of a mature spore; J, eereiantet spore. ><900 . 27. Germinated spores of adiiniies Leveillet. 650. Fic. 28. aus of Ascobolus furfuraceus: a, stalk cells; b, ascogonium; c, trichogyne. 50. Fic. 29. Spores of A. furfuraceus: a, b, ungerminated spores; ¢, d, germinated spores. 360 PLATE 12 Ascobolus carbonarius The lettering for each figure is the same as given for FIG. 33. Fic. 30. Section of a germinated spore of A. carbon arius. 650. Fic. 31. Germinated spore of A. carbonarius: a, optical section of a mature spore; 6, immature spores which germinated. 0. Fic. 32. a, section of a conidium of A. POE b, sections of germinated female conidia. 650. : Fic. 33. Mature archicarp: a, conidium giving rise to the stalk coil; b, conidio- phore; ¢, hypha arising from conidiophore; d, first cell of stalk coil (f); g, last cell ot stalk coil giving rise to the ascogonium (h); j, last cell of ascogonium; k, first cell of trichogyne (J); m, male conidium or antheridium (?); n, stalk of antheridial conidium. 400. Fic. 34. Archicarp in a pathological condition. 400 Fic. 35. Archicarp in which the trichogyne (J) does not Sil about the conidium (m), which is entirely pn Ris: Fic. 36. Archi ae the characteristic trichogyne was not seem; : may be the trichogyne. me . Fic. 37. Archicarp in Bre the trichogyne lies beneath; m, a conidium near Yy. ‘ Fic. 38. Cells of the ascogonium giving rise to primary ascogenous hyphae: X 400. 4: Peet nee ae ‘ oer ae ascogenous hyphae Wildl pi iliicss y Fic. 39. o, Fe A00, PLATE 13 Ascobolus carbonarius Lettering as in FIG. 33. FIG. Mature archicarp showing the trichogyne (J) coiled twice conidium (m). 300. Fic. 41. Archicarp becoming invested with hyphae: a trichogyne is l, the remaining portion being concealed beneath the ascogonium. 300 has Fic. 42. The conidium (a) has germinated, giving rise to the stalk coil | which begun vegetative growth; b, the conidiophore; c, hypha arising from the conidiopho about the visible at FIG. 43. a, germinated conidium with short thick stalk (6). 30% DopGE : METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 195 I Archicarp showing hyphae arising from the conidium (a) and from cells of the stalk coil (d); 7, the last cell of the ascogonium giving rise to the trichogyne not shown in the figure. 300 PLATE 14 Ascobolus carbonarius Fic. 45. Large pear-shaped conidium giving ‘rise to slender hyphae. 265. Fic. 46. Conidium with a swollen tip. 265. IG. 47. Coiled hyphae arising from the mycelium: s, the stalk of the coil; t, a conidium on the end of the coil. 200. IG, Two coils arising from the same mycelial hypha: s, the stalks of the coils; t, conidia arising from the coils; z, inflated conidia not connected with the coils. X 200. Fic. 49. Coil arising from the mycelial hypha at s. 200. PLATE I5 Ascobolus Winteri Fic. 50. Archicarp arising from the mycelium; the septum has not yet formed. Fic. 51. One-celled stage of the archicarp. 675. Fic. 52. Archicarp composed of four cells, immature. 675. Fic. 53. Young archicarp showing hyphae (e) arising from the stalk cells. Fic. 54. Mature archicarp: a, stalk cells; b, ascogonium; ¢, trichogyne; d, antheridium (?). 4 Fic. 55. Mat I h i the trichogyne (c) ) and hypha (d) somewhat distorted by the pressure of the cover glass; connection distinctly visible. 900. Fic. 56, 57. Archicarps which have taken on a vegetative growth, the tricho- nab (c) of FIG. 57 fusing with a mycelial hypha, and the hypha (d) from the stalk cell using with a branch from another hypha. 675. BIBLIOGRAPHY Bainier, G. Mycothéque de l’école de pharmacie—XX. Bull. Soc. Myc. France 23: 132-140. 1907. Barker, P, T. B. Further observations on the ascocarp of Rhyparobius. Rep. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci. 825-826. Cambridge, 1904. Vv. #H., & Fraser, H. C. I. On the sexuality and develop- ment of the ascocarp in Humaria granulata. Proc. Roy. Soc. London B. 77: 354-368. 1906. Borzi, A. Studii sulla sessualitd degli Ascomiceti. Nuovo Giorn. Bot. Ital. 10: 43-78. 1878, vos Nuovi studii sulla sessualita degli Ascomiceti. Messina, PP. 6. 1883. &t, E. Mémoire sur les Ascobolés. Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. V. 10: 191-268. 1860, 196 DopcE: METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE De quelques espéces nouvelles de champignons. Bull. Soc. Bot. France 24: 307-312. pl. 4. 1877. Brefeld, O. Untersuchungen aus dem Gesammtgebiete der Mykologie 9, 10: 113, 337-339. 1891. Brown, W. H. The development of the ascocarp of Leotia. Bot. Gaz. 50: 443-459. I9I0. Coemans,E. Spicilége mycologique.—I. Notice sur les Ascobolus de la flore belge. Bull. Soc. Roy. Bot. Belgique 1: 76-91. 1862. Claussen, P. Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Ascomyceten. Bou- diera. Bot. Zeit. 63: 1-28. 1905. —_—_—____. Uber neuere Arbeiten zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Ascomyceten. Ber. Deuts. Bot. Ges. 24: (1 1)-(38). 1907. ———. Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der Ascomyceten. Pyro- nema confluens. Zeits. Bot. 4: 1-64. 1912. Cutting, E. M. On the sexuality and development of the ascocarp in Ascophanus carneus Pers. Ann. Bot. 23: 399-417. 1909. Dangeard, P. A. Recherches sur le développement du périthéce chez les ascomycétes. Le Botaniste 9: 1-303. 1903. . Recherches sur le développement du_périthéce chez les ascomycétes. Le Botaniste 10: 1-385. 1907 Durand, E. J. Studies in North American Discomycetes. —II. Some new or noteworthy species from central and western New York. Bull. Torrey Club 29: 458-465. 1902. Ferguson, M.C. A preliminary study of the germination of the spores of Agaricus campestris and other basidiomycetous fungi. U. S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 16: 1-43. pl. 1-3. 1902. Fraser, H. C. I. On the sexuality and development of the ascocarp in Lachnea stercorea. Ann. Bot. 21: 349-360. 1907. Guilliermond, A. La question de la sexualité chez les ascomycetes Rev. Gén. Bot. 20: 1-62. 1908. —_—_———.. La sexualité chez les champignons. Bull. Sci. France et Belgique VII. 44: 109-196. 1910. Harder, R. Uber das Verhalten von Basidiomyceten und Ascomyceten in Mischkulturen. Nat. Zeits. Forst.- u. Landwirtschaft IgII- 5-38. I9II. - Harper, R. A. Uber das Verhalten der Kerne bei der Fruchtentwic lung einiger Ascomyceten. Jahrb. Wiss. Bot. 29: 655-685. 18 ————. Sexual reproduction in Pyronema confluens and the morphology of the ascocarp. Ann. Bot. 14: 321-400. 1900. Sexual reproduction and the organization of the nucleus in certain mildews. Publ. Carnegie Inst. Washington 37° ioe 1905. DopGE : METHODS OF CULTURE OF ASCOBOLACEAE 197 _Janczewski, E. Morphologische Untersuchungen iiber Ascobolus fur- furaceus. Bot. Zeit..29: 257-262; 271-278. pl. 4. 1871. Karsten, P.A. Monographia Ascobolorum Fenniae. 1870. Massee, G., & Salmon, E. S. Researches on coprophilous fungi. Ann. Bot. 15: 313-357. 1901. —————._ Researches on coprophilous fungi—II. Ann. Bot. 16: 57-94. 1902. Molliard, M. Sur une condition qui favorise la production des péri- théces chez les Ascobolus. Bull. Soc. Myc. France 19: 150-152. 1903. Melhus, I. E. Experiments on spore germination and infection in certain species of Oomycetes. Univ. Wisconsin Agr. Exp. Sta. Research Bull. 15: 25-91. 1911. Overton, J.B. The morphology of the ascocarp and spore formation in the many-spored asci of Thecotheus Pelletieri. Bot. Gaz. 42: ~ 450-492. 1906. Tode. Bot. Zeit. 64: 85-99. 1906. Rehm, H. Rabenhorst’s Kryptogamen -Flora. Pilze 3:1-1275. 1896. Seaver, F. J. Iowa Discomycetes. Bull. Lab. Nat. Hist. State Univ. Iowa 6: 41-219. I9I10. Ternetz, C. Protoplasmabewegung und Fruchtkérperbildung bei Ascophanus carneus Pers. Jahrb. Wiss. Bot. 25: 273-309. 1900. Van Tieghem, P. Sur le développement du fruit des Ascodesmis. Bull. Soc. Bot. France 23: 271-279. 1876. Vuillemin, P. Les bases actuelles de la systématique en mycologie. Prog. Rei Bot. 2: 1-170. 1907. Wager,H. The sexuality of the fungi. Ann. Bot. 13: 575-597. 1899. Welsford, E. J. Fertilization in Ascobolus furfuraceus. New Phytol- ogist 6: 156-161. 1907. mae Woronin, M. Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte des Ascobolus pulcher- remus Cr, und einiger Pezizen. DeBary & Woronin, Beitr. Morph. u. Physiol. Pilze 2: 1-11, 1866. oo . * “SPhaeria Lemaneae, Sordaria coprophila, S. fimiseda, Arthrobotrys oligospora. DeBary & Woronin, Beitr. Morph. u. Physiol. Pilze 3: 1-36. 1870. ual, H. Mycologische Untersuchungen. Denk. Kais. Akad. Wiss. Wien 51: 21-36, 1886 Re rani en eae me Entwickelungsgeschichtliche Untersuchungen aus dem Gebiete der Ascomyceten. Denk. Kais, Akad. Wiss. Wien (Math. at.) 98: 1-84. 1889 The lichens of the Linnean Herbarium with remarks on -Acharian material R. HEBER Howe, Jr. Through the kindness of Dr. B. Daydon Jackson, general secretary of the Linnean Society of London, I had the opportunity from February 12 to 20, 1912, to study the lichens (314 sheets, fide Jackson) of the Linnean Herbarium now preserved in Bur- lington House, London, England. I have made a critical study only of those species which now fall under the family Usneaceae (plus p. Filamentosi of Linn.), but am listing here all species that can in any sense be considered represented by types. In 1886 Dr. E. Wainio examined the herbarium and published a list of the species (Revisio Lich. in herb. Linn, asservatorum. Meddel. Soc. pro Fauna et Flora Fenn. 14:I-Io. 1886). He made no attempt, however, to select types, and I have found a number of important sheets he failed to record, e. g., L. nivalis: 3 specimens. Moreover, he did not have the great advantage of Dr. Jackson’s* exhaustive study of the Linnean Herbarium, Linneana, and the handwritings of con- temporaneous botanists. Dr. Wainio’s determinations and mine (in the Usneaceae) agree in the main, and where we differ I have had the kind aid and collaboration of Miss Annie Lorrain Smith, of the British Museum of Natural History, e. g., “1 folio... A. chalybeiformis Wain.” = A. jubata. __ The sheets referring to Species Plantarum (1753) fall naturally ito four classes. First, those that have the Sp. Plant. number; the €quivalent name in Linnaeus’ handwriting; plus the number of his Fl. Suec. (1745). These specimens (in the Usneaceae) repre- Sent reliable types, based evidently on Dillenius’ Historia Mus- hes (1741) and diagnostically described by Linnaeus in Sp. ~int., with correct references to Dillenius’ figures, e. g., L. floridus. * Jackson, . ¥ 3 : ey MS. list Linn. Herb. 1755?, I-39 [1907]; e Proc. Linn. Soc. 89-126. T Crombie, Jour. Linn. 17: 554-556. 1880. 199 200 Howe: LICHENS OF THE LINNEAN HERBARIUM Second, those that have the Sp. Plant. number; the equivalent name in Linnaeus’ handwriting; but without a Fl. Suec. number, e. g.,L.vulpinus. These are for the most part authentic types, yet in some cases they do not agree entirely with Dillenius,* Linnaeus’ own descriptions, nor the conception of early post-Linnean authors, e. g., L. barbatus. Third, those without Sp. Plant. number; with names in Linnaeus’ handwriting; and no Fl. Suec. number, e. g., L. chalybeiformis. Fourth, those that have a seemingly erroneous Sp. Plant. number and name but an evidently authentic Fl. Suec. number correctly referring to Dillenius and diagnostically de- scribed by Linnaeus, e. g., L. plicatus. The remaining sheets, of which there are a large number (95), again fall into three classes. First, those that are named in Linneus’ handwriting and are types of later species, which he described in Fl. Suec. 2 ed., 1755; SP: Plant. 2 ed., 1763; Syst. Nat., 12 ed., 1767; and Mantissae 1 and 2, 1767 and 1771, e.¢., L. chrysophthalmus. Second, those that were named by Linnaeus’ son (Linn. fil.) in the latter’s handwriting and represent types of his, published in Suppl. Pl. 1781, e- g., L. capensis. Third, those that were evidently added by the pur- chaser of the Linnean Herbarium, J. E. Smith, including species of J. Dickson, Swartz, Ehrhart, and other later workers, few if any of which constitute types. The figure accompanying this article is of the two leaves of the MS. catalogue of the Linnean Herbarium giving the lichens in his handwriting ‘‘ presumably compiled in the year 1755.’ The dot in front of the name indicated “‘such [plants] as were in the Herba- rium.’’ These accord well with the plants at present preserve in the herbarium, as a comparison will show. (I have placed dots in the printed list.) In a future paper on the Usneaceae ! shall publish photographs of all the Usneaceae types. Below is given the list of specimens that can be considered a$ authentic types printed in heavier types. In italics are placed thos€ having less verifying data, which, however, can be properly co considered types. All these are listed because they bear published Linnean names. Numbers in brackets were not given om the sheets, and the numbers following the names refer to Fl. Suec- Names underlined appear in Linn. fil. handwriting. The modern ang. eee Eng , * Through the kindness of Dr. S. H. Vines, of the Botanic Gardens, Oxford: : Th the Dillenian t f to which will be made in a later pape Howe : LICHENS OF THE LINNEAN HERBARIUM 201 species conception in’ the family Usneaceae is given after each species. SPECIES PLANTARUM E752 wt [t.] scriptus 4. i ese ° hol ven @il. carpineus 21. 0 948 @[22.] fahlunensis [23.] sty. @2 ari 30y, oe (tenuissimus) = aculeatum (Schreb, feces @ 31. divaite 958 = Cetraria nivalis (L.) Ach. sdeae: pulmonarius 960 ‘ Stri 9 070 aS Juniperinas (os 7] r * Two final | t This num ieting, tIn Linn. aris ° 30. gay 959 = Cetraria islandica €tters not on label. ber is on a duplicate sheet no. 40, also, but the specimen is Physcia [55.] poly Aridi: [62.] digi [64.] a. @ 65. rangiferinus 980 @ 66. uncialis 979 [67.] subulatus @ 68. paschalis 982 @ 69. fragilis 9 @70. Roccella 72 —— = Usnea articulata (L.) Hoff. ® 73. ein 986 = Alectoria jubata (L.) Ach, @ 74. [75-] @ 76. N @77. @ 78. @ 80. lanatus a] pubescens = Alectoria pubescens ee - Howe, Jr. chalybeiformis = = Alectoria chaly- beiformis (L.) S. F. page — [984] (a composite) us = Letharia sethiae (L.) floridas = Usnea florida (L.) Web. ED. FLORA SUECICA 1755 2 [2 102.] saccatus ED. SPECIES PLANTARUM 1763 2 [34.] leucomelos I2 ED. SYSTEMA NATURAE 1767 — [—.] divaricatus = Letharia divaricata (L.) Hue. Eee sa 4.] Usnea = Ramalina r MANTISSA 1767 usneoides MANTISSA 1771 .] crocata ] chrysophthalmas 32 Koeg. histes chrysophthalmus Page Mo Serre VEGETABILIUM—Murray 1774 SUPPLEMENTUM PLANT. 1781 [—.] capensis = Pelosckistes, ' feria Ss capensis Nyl SFL ei Personal note-correction an hf is inserted = aphthosus. sheet. * HO. on an at tached 7 ee L. plicatus in Fl, Sue Howe: LICHENS OF THE LINNEAN HERBARIUM F2e a lt at a. ff Oe Pee M carp ny +J2, Orca Lorem Al ia vated ; 7 6 holy bet 77 Ary Te weer. Linnean manuscript copy of lichens in Species Plantarum Howe: LICHENS oF THE LINNEAN HERBARIUM 203 At Burlington House I had also the opportunity to study a set of specimens which though probably not cotypes (perhaps in some cases topotypes) represent authentic Acharian material. These were mentioned by Dr. Asa Gray (Sill. Amer. Jour. Sci. and Arts ' 40: 8. 1841) as follows: ‘Here we find the cryptogamic collec- tions of Acharius, containing the authentic specimens described in his works on the Lichens, ....” On examining these I find them named by Acharius but without localities, and I therefore conclude that the specimens at Helsingfors (Universitetets Botaniska Institution, fide Dr. Fred. Elfving im litt.) where the localities (type) are given must constitute the true types. In De Candolle’s work (La Phytographie 391. 1880) we find the following: “Acharius, Herb. de l’'Univ. d’Helsingfors (Laséque, Mus. Deless. 344 [1845]). Une série authent. de ses esp. dans herb. de la Soc. Linn. de Londres (A. Gray, Amer. Journ., Oct. 1840)." Through the kindness of Dr. Jackson, and with the permission of the Council of the Linnean Society I am able to throw the following light on the acquisition of this material by the society. “Copy of Minutes of Linnean Society of London relating to the Lichens presented by E. Acharius SASS Snr hasheeceutusensdoens: — to Dr. Acharius, F.M.L.S., upon his sending to the ety a Collection of specimens of lichens describ* by him. of ere that a Cabinet be provided to contain the Collection t ichens presented to the Society by Professor Acharius: but ae greater expence be incurr’d on this Account than Five s. General Minutes, 7th March 1 809. dus a ection of Lichens from Sweden, describ’d in the Metho- “Council Min cre Presented from Dr. Acharius, F.M.LS. minutes, 17th November 1812 sented gad omy of the Society’s Transactions be pre- THorEay Museum or Concorp, Mass. NATURAL History, INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE (1911-1912) e aim of this Index is to include all current botanical literature written by Americans, published in America, or based upon American material ; the word Amer- ica being used in the broadest sense. Reviews, and papers that relate exclusively to forestry, agriculture, horticulture, n made in favor of some aper appearing in an American periodical which is devoted wholly to botany, Reprints are not mentioned unless they differ from the original in some important particular. If users of the Index will call the attention of the editor to errors or omissions, their kindness will be appreciated. This Index is reprinted monthly on cards, and furnished in this form to subscribers at the rate of one cent for each card, Selections of cards are not permitted ; each rre- Arthur, J.C. New names for gamopetalous plants. Torreya 12: 33, 34. 15 F 1912. Bailey, W.W. Some leafless trees. Am. Bot. 18: Q-11. F 1912. Bather, F. A. Misuse of the term “ genotype.’’ Science II. 35: 270. 16 F 1912. Berry, E. W. American Triassic Neocalamites. Bot. Gaz. 53: 174- 180. pl. 17 + f.1, 20F 1912. tenmiiller, W. The North American species of Dryophanta and their galls. Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist. 30: 343-369. pl. 12-17. I9QIt, Britton, N. L, The genus Hamelia Jacq. Torreya 12: 30-32. 15 F IQI2, Includes description of Hamelia scabrida sp. nov. Callier, A. Diagnoses formarum novarum generis Alnus. Repert. Sp. Nov. r0: 22 : = ee 229°237...31 D tort. Christens Alsophila Sp. Nov. ro: 213, 214. 5 D 1g11. »E. Plants not recorded in the Ohio list from Cuyahoga and Lake Counties. Ohio Nat. 12: 471. 16 F 1912. 205 206 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Claassen, E. Plants recognized on a dumping ground at the foot of Ninth Street, Cleveland, Ohio. Ohio Nat. 12: 475, 476. 16 F 1912. Clark, H. L. Biotypes and phylogeny. Am. Nat. 46: 139-150. F 1912. Cockerell, T. D.A. Fossil flowers and fruits—II. Torreya 12: 32, 33. tS Shae $e Que he Robinia mesozoica sp. nov. described. Conklin, E.G. Problems of evolution and present methods of attacking them. Am. Nat. 46: 121-128. Mr 1912. Davenport, C. B. Light thrown by the experimental study of heredity upon the factors and methods of evolution. Am. Nat. 46: 129-138. F 1912. Davidson, A. Botanizing in Ingo County. Bull. S. Calif. Acad. Sci. II: 15-17. Ja 1912. Dobbin, F. Evergreens in winter. Am. Bot. 18: 7-9. F 1912 Eastham, J. W. The Myxomycetes or slime-moulds of the Ottawa dis- trict; a preliminary list. Ottawa Nat. 25: 157-163. 12 F 1912. Eichlam, F. Mitteilungen aus Zentral-Amerika. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 4-11. 15 Ja I912. Elmer, A. D. E, Additional species of Elaeocarpus. Leaflets Philip. Bot. 4: 1171-1190. 15 N abe Includes descriptions of 14 new spec Elmer, A. D. E. New sdk ctihaceni Leaflets Philip. Bot. 4: 119I~ 1230. 29 N I1g1I. Includes 38 new species in Creochiton (1), Dissochaeta (1), Melastoma (1), M mecylon (6), Astronia (6), and Medinilla (23). Fernald, M. L., & Wiegand, K. M. A new variety of Juncus balticus. Rhodora 14: 35, 36. 1 F 1912. Fox, C. P. Another Ohio grown rubber. Ohio Nat. 12: 469-470. 16 F 1912. Fullmer, E. L. Additions made to the Cedar Point flora during the summer of 1911. Ohio Nat. 12: 473. 16 F 1912. Fullmer, E.L. A preliminary list of the Myxomycetes of Cedar Point. Ohio Nat. 12: 472. 16 F 1912. Gordon, M. Ray tracheids in Sequoia sempervirens. New Phytol. 12° 1-7. f. 1-7. Ja 1912. Griffiths, D. The grama grasses: Bouteloua and related genera. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 14: 343-428 + i-xi. pl. 67-83 +f. 17 63. 24 F 1912. Includes Bouteloua Sonorae and B. eludens spp. nov Griggs, R.F. The development and cytology at Rhodochytrium. Gaz. 53: 127-173. pl. 11-16. 20 F 1912. Bot. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 207 Hackel, E. Gramineae novae—VIII. Repert. Sp. Nov. ro: 165-174. 5 D rort. Hasselbring, H. Types of Cuban tobacco. Bot. Gaz. 53: 113-126. pl. 4-10. 20 F 1912. Hedgcock, G. G. Winter-killing and smelter-injury in the forests of Montana. Torreya 12: 25-30: 15 F 191g. Heese, E. Uber gut wachsende und leicht bliihende Arten von Kak- teen. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 1-3. 15 Ja 1912. Hubbard, F. T. Some panicums of Essex County, Massachusetts. Rhodora 14: 36-40. 1 F 1912. Johnston, J.R. The history and cause of the coconut bud-rot. U. S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 228: 5-175. pl. 1-14 +f. I-10. 5 F 1912. : : Kennedy, G. G. Quercus imbricaria Michx. in Massachusetts. Rho- dora 14: 34, 35. -1-F 1912. Linnell, M.B. The mallows of Ohio. Ohio Nat. 12: 465-468. 16 F 1912. we tt2. 7. t-8 20 F I9I2. Petersen, H. E. Ceramium studies—I and II. Bot. Tidssk. 31: 97- 120. pl. 1-5 + f. 1-6, IOI. | Petrak, F. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der mexikanischen und zentral- amerikanischen Cirsien, Bot. Tidssk. 31: 57-72. I9II. ier, H. New or noteworthy plants from Colombia and Central America—3. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 13: 431-466 + i-viii. pl. 75-96 + f. 57-91. 5 Ja 1912. ‘ Includes descriptions of new species in Olmedia (2), Perebea (1), Naucleopsis (1), erculia (1), Clusia (1), Rheedia (3), Sideroxylon (2), Dipholis (1), and Mimusops (1). R Glimpses of the Great American Desert. Pop. Sci. Mo. _ 80: 209-235. f. I-17, Mr IQII. »L. Mamillaria melanocentra Pos. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 3. 15 Ja 1912, a Ascomycetes exs. fasc. 49. Ann. Myc. 10: 54-59. 1 F 1912. S @ new species in Patellea from California. md Tumamoca, a new genus of Cucurbitaceae. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb, 16. 21. pl. 17. 13 F 1912. R ne J. q., & Standley, P. C. Report on a collection of plants from - Pinacate region of Sonora. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 16: 5-20. Pl. 3-16 ey, Sg 13 F ror2, 208 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Rosenvinge, L. K. Remarks on the hyaline unicellular hairs of the Florideae. Biol. Arbejder Tilegende Eug. Warming 203-216. f. I- o2. YOR. Schlechter, R. Orchidaceae novae et criticae. Repert. Sp. Nov. 10: 248-254. 31 D 1911. Schaffner, J. H. The diurnal nodding of the wild carrot and other plants. Ohio Nat. 12: 474, 475. 16 F 1912. Sinnott, E. W. The pond flora of Cape Cod. Rhodora 14: 25-34 15 TOT? Smith, C. P. Notes from northern Utah—IV. Muhlenbergia 7: 136 178... #5 F 1912. Stockberger, W. W. \ literary note on Mendel’s law. Am. Nat. 46: 151-157. F 1912. Stone, W. The plants of southern New Jersey with special reference to the flora of the pine barrens and geographic distribution of the species. Ann. Rep. New Jersey State Museum 1910: 25-828. pl. 1-129 +f. 1-5 + map. [26 Ja 1912.] Sydow, H. & P. Novae fungorum species—VII. Ann. Myc. 10: 77- 85. 1F 1912. [Illust.] Includes Coryneum megaspermum Syd. sp. nov. from Colorado. Theissen, F. Fragmenta brasilica IV nebst Bemerkungen iiber einige andere Asterina-Arten. Ann. Myc. 10: 1-32. I F 1912. [Illust.] [Vaupel, F.] Zu unserer Abbildung. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 4. 15 15 Ja 1912. Williams, R. S. New or interesting mosses from Panama. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 36:.23, 24... 13 F 1912. Dicranoloma meteorioides, Leucodon macrosporus, and Cyclodictyon Maxoni SPP nov. Wolf, F. A. The brown leaf spot of colt’s foot, Tussilago Farfara |. Ann. Myc. 10: 65-67. 1 F 1912. [Illust.] Wolf, F. A. Spore formation in Podospora anserina (Rabh.) Winter. Ann. Myc. 10: 60-64. 1 F 1912. [Illust.] VOLUME 39, PLATE 10 Butt. Torrey CiLus Doner a < 3 a 2 pay -) & af Zh — abe Griffiths, Da David. The North American = ordariaceae. Pages 1-134)" Pisa 1901. eek ok Vol. 11, No. Se price, $1.7 4 ote Hazen, Tracy Elliot. The Dipbicacias ‘and Chactophoracea of 7 seuaunacae Die ape: 20 O 1902. e fosthrop, eee ee \ haweeras No. $1.50: ye Alice Rich. Flora of bide on and Andros “( "Pager 1-098, Hee 1-19 + map. ss ha . = bshs 12, No. 3; a 75 cents : Bile, Studies : ces Pages “195-268 "Yol. 4, No. ge price, $1.25: nt A study of the La ctariat 26 My 1 14, No. 2; sn 75 = es Calif MAY 1912 BULLETIN OF THE €ditor PHILIP DOWELL Associate Editors MARSHALL. AR CLARK =——is—<—ts*si‘is*‘*ERBERT MALE RICHARDS NORMAN: TAYLOR THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB Pr Z Perea EDWARD S. BURGESS, Pu.D. “ et, Vice- Presidents ; = on JOHN HENDLEY BARNHART, A.M., M.D. HERBERT M. RICHARDS, Sc.D. ; Secretary and Treasurer ppg te BERNARD O. DODGE, Pu. B. Dept. of ome Columbia University New York City ; MEETINGS : pages twice each month from October to May inclusive: the second Tuesday, Te at 8:00 P.M., at the American Museum of Natural History; the last Wedaesiae = at 3:30 P.M., in the Museum Building of the New York Botanical Garden. PUBLICATIONS : “al Seah kasd other business communications relating to the pub i of the Club should be addressed to the ae Bernard O. De mee ; ans Columbia University, New York C : Bulletin. Monthly, Beenie 1870. Price, $3.00 a year; single numbers ; peal: Of former volumes, only 24-38 can be sappticd 3 ome ; certain num of other volumes are Sallie, but the entire stock of some number “reserved for the completion of sets. Manuscripts sae ea publication : Baveerix should be addressed to Philip Dowell, ames ree gees Nw’ - a. M thly, estab’ Gsiablished gor. Price, bie as Fue Mass tended for publication i in TORREYA should be — to Norman cee -entral Museum, Eastern Parkwa ay, Brooklyn N.Y. Memoirs. Oceasional, established, dnc eS last me of cover. ) oat cover may ie had gratis.” fe gover: is was ort ee ol. 39 BULLETIN ae TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB HEPATICAE OF PUERTO RICO XI. DIPLASIOLEJEUNEA ALEXANDER W. EvANs ‘ (WITH PLATES 16 AND 17) In the tenth paper of this series* three genera of the Lejeuneae are discussed in which underleaves are entirely absent. In the genus Diplasiolejeunea the underleaves are duplicated; in other words an underleaf is developed for every lateral leaf, instead of for every pair of lateral leaves (PLATE 16, FIGURES land 10). The only other genus in which this peculiar condition is found is Colura, which contains some of the most remarkable species of the Lejeuneae, To explain the doubling of the underleaves in Colura, Goebel} advanced the theory that the leaves are not arranged in a , three-ranked spiral, as is usual in the leafy Hepaticae, but that # Postical segment is cut off from the apical cell after each lateral Segment. This being the case the leaves would be arranged in @ zigzag, and the imaginary line connecting their successive bases an not cross the antical surface of the stem at all. The _ €Xamination of growing points in Diplasiolejeunea brought out the fact that Goebel’s explanation would apply to this genus as : well 48 to Colura. It should be noted, however, that the duplica- . ton of the underleaves is not an absolutely constant feature. The Spee of a branch, for example (FIGURE 10), shows the ordinary : ‘sag arrangement, and the same thing is true of an antheridial throughout its entire length (PLATE 17, FIGURE 2). In the 2 pe beets for April (39 : 139-208, pl. 10-15) was issued 17 My 1912.] - Torrey Club 38: 251-286. pl. rz, 12. IQII ‘ Sanographie der Pflanzen 286 (footnote). 1898. 209 See ad ; are 210 Evans: HEPATICAE OF PUERTO RICO involucre, also, a single bracteole is present for the pair of bracts (PLATE 16, FIGURE I), just as in other genera of the Lejeuneae. It is evident, therefore, that the spiral arrangement of the leaves is the primitive one and that the zigzag arrangement represents a later development. In spite of its duplicated underleaves Diplasiolejeunea has many characters in common with Cololejeunea and Leptocolea, in which. no underleaves whatever are developed. In fact, the authors of the Synopsis Hepaticarum included in their subsection Duplicatae, which is one of the groups into which they divided their § Typicae of the genus Lejewnea, two species of Leptocolea as well as several species of Diplasiolejeunea. Gottsche afterwards grouped together all the Lejeuneae known to him in which the uriderleaves were duplicated, some of which naturally belong to the genus Colura.* Spruce, however, was the first to define Diplasiolejeunea in its present sense. He included it among the subgenera of Lejeunea,} but it was soon raised to generic rank by Schiffner. t The genus is widely distributed in tropical regions and contains about twelve species. The type species, D. pellucida (Meissn.) Schiffn., is abundant in America and is known also from Africa, the East Indies, and New Caledonia. Three of the other species are African, one is known from Tasmania only, and the others are American. Although the plants attain a fairly large size for members of the Lejeuneae they are delicate in texture and show little or no pigmentation. They grow on bark and on living leave and at least some of the species seem to be constant in their choice of a substratum. : The stems cling closely to the substratum and branch irregu- larly according to the usual Lejeunea or Radula type. The stems are at first scattered, but with the appearance of branches compact mats are gradually formed, the branches lying subparallel or divers” ing in a more or less radiate manner. The leaves are large usually loosely imbricated (PLATE 16, FIGURES I, 10, and 11). The lobes are attached by an exceedingly short and almost transvers€ Pie * Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. V. 1: 164. 1864. T Hep. Amaz. et And. 301. 1884. ¢ Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam. 13: 121. 1895. EvANS: HEPATICAE OF PUERTO RICO 211 line, very much as in Cololejeunea and its immediate allies. They spread widely from the axis and lie more or less appressed to the substratum, although in some species they are distinctly convex. They vary in outline from ovate to suborbicular, their apices are broad and rounded, their margins are entire or nearly so, and they tend to arch across the axis at the antical base. The cells of the lobes are plane or nearly so, and their walls are more or less thickened. In some species the thickening appears to be uniform, while in others trigones and intermediate thickenings are clearly visible. In all the Puerto Rico species ocelli are numerous and scattered throughout the lobe, very much as in the genus Stictole- jeunea. They are found also’ in the perianths but seem to be constantly absent from the lobules and underleaves. In D. pellucida the lobes are often margined by a band of hyaline cells, t these have not been observed in the other species. The lobule agrees in many respects with that of Cololejeunea. It is of a fairly large size, from one third to one half the length of the lobe, and is inflated throughout more or less of its extent. It broadens out abruptly from a narrow base and forms a distinctly arched keel with the lobe. The free margin is involute in its basal portion and sometimes for about half its length, the outer part being frequently appressed to the lobe. At some little dis- tance beyond the middle the apical tooth is situated and is sepa- rated from the end of the keel by a shallow sinus. The tooth is remarkably well developed and shows considerable variation in orm. It may, for example, be subulate and acuminate (FIGURES Tand 5) orit may broaden out from a stalklike base into a t-shaped Structure (FIGURES 10 and 13). The hyaline papilla is situated at the base of the tooth on the inner surface of the lobule. When a of the tooth is three cells wide the papilla is on the median a a the tooth is two or four cells wide it is situated on one ‘ the median wall, sometimes on the distal side and some- piigioas the proximal. In addition to the apical tooth the free Margin bears a second tooth, proximal to the apex; this tooth is shor : ter than the apical tooth and also different inform. Between “i Proxim, vie nal tooth and the base of the lobule one or more minute Culations may be distinguished in certain species. underleaves are sometimes distant and sometimes overlap 212 Evans: HEPATICAE OF PUERTO RICO more or less closely. They are deeply bifid with long and spread- ing divisions, which taper gradually to sharp or blunt apices (PLATE 16, FIGURE I; PLATE 17, FIGURES I and 2). Sometimes the divisions spread so widely that the upper margin of the underleaf is bounded by an approximately straight line. At the base a dis- tinct radicelliferous disc is usually developed (PLATE 16, FIGURE 6) and affords a firm anchorage to the substratum. The margin is practically entire although the cells in some species often project as indistinct crenulations. So far as known the inflorescence is either autoicous or dioicous and seems to be fairly constant for a given species. The arche- gonium is sometimes borne on a leading branch (FIGURE 1) and sometimes on a very short branch, in many cases a single leaf and a single underleaf being the only appendages present except the involucral leaves and the perianth (FIGURE 2). The female flower seems to be invariably subtended by a single innovation. The bracts are much smaller than the ordinary leaves and are sub- equally bifid (FIGURE 7), the lobule sometimes slightly exceeding the lobe in length (PLATE 16, FIGURE 17, on left). The single bracteole is free and more or less bifid, the divisions sometimes spreading widely and sometimes being suberect or connivent (PLATE 16, FIGURES I and 11). The perianthis sharply five-keeled, although more or less compressed, and becomes suddenly co? tracted at the apex into a short beak. The surface is apparently never roughened by teeth or projecting cells even along the keels. The antheridial spikes (PLATE 17, FIGURE 2) are much as in other Lejeuneae. They either occupy short branches or are terminal 0m longer branches and rarely show signs of proliferation. The bracts, which are rarely numerous, are usually diandrous. The sporo- phyte is essentially the same as in Cololejewnea and the other genera of the Lejeuneae. The only species of Diplasiolejeunea that has been recorded from Puerto Rico is the type species, D. pellucida. The material ; collected by the writer includes this species and also three othe one of which seems to be undescribed. In distinguishing ae species the lobules, the underleaves, the inflorescence, 4% gs : perichaetial bracts yield the best differential characters: ne - gemmiparous branches and the gemmae, which will be des? at the close of the paper, may likewise be of service. Evans: HEPATICAE OF PUERTO Rico 213 DIPLASIOLEJEUNEA PELLUCIDA (Meissn.) Schiffn. Jungermannia pellucida Meissn.: Sprengel in Linnaeus, Syst. Veg. ed. 16. 4?: 325. 1827. Lejeunea ocellulata Mont. & Nees, Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. II. 19: 264. 1843. Lejeunea pellucida Meissn. in G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. 393. 1845. Lejeunea albifolia Tayl. Lond. Jour. Bot. 5: 399. 1846. Lejeunea (Diplasio-Lejeunea) pellucida Spruce, Hep. Amaz. et And. 302. 1884. | Diplasiolejeunea pellucida Schiffn. in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam. 13: yar, 1895. Pale green or whitish, growing scattered or in depressed mats: m. in diameter, sparingly and irregularly pinnate, the branches (except the subfloral innovations) widely spreading, pressed to the substratum, broadly ovate, 0.85-1 mm. long, 0.7- 0.85 mm. wide, antical margin rounded at the base and extending eae wide, abruptly broadening from a narrow base, inflated ‘roughout, keel arched, free margin more or less involute, often nvolving the proximal tooth, apical tooth obliquely spreading, acute, mostly three to five cells long and three or four cells wide at the base terminal] ce a papilla mostly on the distal side of the apical tooth, Margin eran cells long; cells of lobe averaging about 12y at the walla re 7g ag in the middle, and 35 X 20u at the base, the interm ae sal less thickened but with vague trigones and occasional thin-walled, thickenings, hyaline marginal cells (when present) broad] ed: underleaves distant, rounded to cordate at the base, bifid td "carey about 0.085 mm. long and 0.4 mm. wide, deeply : fae nt Widely spreading acuminate divisions, the apical sinus from Baie shallow or even obsolete, margin entire or subcrenulate tae Y continuing the floral axis and often bearing another nee; bracts obliquely spreading, sharply complicate but 214 Evans: HEPATICAE OF PUERTO RICO not winged along the keel, shortly bifid (about one third), the lobe oblong, rounded, entire, 0.5 mm. long and 0.15 mm. wide, lobule nearly as large as the lobe, acute to acuminate, sparingly and irregularly denticulate; bracteole ovate, 0.35 mm. long, 0.15 mm. wide, bifid almost to the base with suberect or often connivent or overlapping acuminate divisions and a narrow sinus; perianth obovate, 0.95 mm. long, 0.5 mm. wide, rounded at the apex and with a very short beak: & inflorescence terminal on a leading branch or occupying a short branch, not proliferating; bracts imbricated, mostly in from three to ten pairs, diandrous, strongly inflated, shortly and subequally bifid with rounded divisions, the postical sometimes bluntly pointed, keel strongly arched; brac- teoles similar to the underleaves but much smaller and less deeply bifid with obliquely spreading acute divisions: capsule about 0.35 mm. in diameter; spores yellowish green, minutely verruculose, about 20u in short diameter; elaters about 12” wide, the wall irregularly thickened. (PLATE 16, FIGURES I-9. On living leaves. Puerto Rico, without definite localities, Schwanecke, Sintenis (27). Sprengel describes the type locality of Jungermannia pellucida in the following words, ‘‘ad filices Ind. Occid.” The writer has not been able to study any of the original material but bases his conception of the plant upon @ series of specimens determined by various authorities. The species occurs in two fairly distinct modifications, the second of which is described below as a new variety. The typical form may be recorded from the following additional localities in the Americal tropics: Cuba, Wright; Jamaica, Underwood, C. E. Cummings N.L. Britton, Evans; Costa Rica, Pittier; French Guiana, Lepr veMt, Perrottet; Brazil, Endlicher, Pabst, Spruce, Glaziou. Material from the various collections mentioned, much of which is in the Britis Museum, has been examined by the writer. The specimen oo lected by Leprieur, however, which represents the type of Lejeune) ocellulata, is in the Montagne herbarium at Paris. Of African specimens two have been studied, one collected in 1814 by Beauva® at ‘‘Oware,” and the other by Rodriguez on the island of Maur tius. Both agree with the American plant, so far as can © determined by the fragmentary material. The Beauvais aa mens, one of which is in the Kew herbarium, represent the type L. albifolia, and show a certain approach to the variety de a below. As has already been noted, D. pellucida has been rep? Evans: HEPATICAE OF PuERTO RICO 215 also from the East Indies and from New Caledonia, but no material from these regions has been available for study. Diplasiolejeunea pellucida malleiformis var. nov. respects agreeing closely with the type. (TEXT FIGURE I.) On leaves, rarely on bark. El Yunque, Evans (10, 120 in part, 127 in part). The variety may also be recorded from the following stations: John Crow Peak, Jamaica, Evans (135 in part); Grande Soufriére Hill, Dominica, Elliott (1815, 1816); Laudat, Dominica, Lloyd (324a in part); St. Vincent, Elliott (9, 22, 356). EI. Diplasiolejeunea pellucida malleiformis; El Yunque, Puerto Rico, Ficur Evans (ro), Apical teeth of lobules, X 300. : The t-shaped apical tooth of the lobule in this curious variety Is ws different from the pointed tooth in typical D. pellucida that a Specific separation seemed at first to be indicated. Unfortunately further study soon showed that this single difference was quite sien Ported by others, and also that the t-shaped tooth formed no tea feature, some of the specimens showing both t-shaped eaten pointed teeth. In the Beauvais specimens noted 2 2 none of the teeth are distinctly t-shaped, although some dail Pped by two cells placed side by side at right angles to the eg and the latter is occasionally two cells wide. The material m the Grande Soufriére, Dominica, is in the herbarium of the 216 Evans: HEPATICAE OF PUERTO RICO British Museum and was referred by Stephani to his D. armatiloba,* a species that requires further study. It was based] on sterile specimens from Guadeloupe and was regarded by Gottsche asa variety of D. pellucida. Unfortunately the type has not been accessible, but a specimen in the British Museum, collected by Elliott at Trois Pitons, Dominica (1754), and determined by Ste- phani, coincides closely with the original description. This plant has a dioicous inflorescence and is very much like the variety malleiformis, the apical tooth of the lobule being even more definitely t-shaped. The underleaves, however, have rounded or obtuse divisions, which spread obliquely. Diplasiolejeunea brachyclada sp. nov. Pale green or yellowish, scattered or in depressed mats: stems 0.1 mm. in diameter, sparingly and irregularly pinnate, the branches widely spreading, similar to the stem: leaves loosely imbri- cated, the lobe obliquely to widely spreading, not appressed to the substratum, plane or more or less squarrose in the antical portion, broadly ovate, 1.25-1.5 mm. long, I-1.1 mm. wide, when well developed, antical margin rounded at the base and extending across the axis, outwardly curved to the apex, postical margin straight or slightly curved, forming a very obtuse angle at the junction with the keel; lobule ovate, 0.7 mm. long, 0.3 mm. wide, inflated throughout, keel arched, free margin involute at least neat the base, apical tooth obliquely spreading, acute, truncate or t- shaped, mostly three or four cells long and two cells wide at the base, proximal tooth sometimes inflexed, shorter than the ap! tooth and acute, hyaline papilla distal in position; cells of lobe averaging about 12y at the margin, 27 X 18 in the middle, am 38 X 20u at the base, the walls thickened uniformly: underleavés distant, rounded to subcordate at the base, broadly cuneate, averaging about 0.17 mm. in length and 0.6 mm. in width, deeply n borne on a very short branch, a single leaf and a single unde being present in addition to the involucral leaves and perianth, the innovation usually simple and sterile, rarely bearing a secon female flower; bracts obliquely spreading, sharply complicate but not winged along the keel, bifid about one fourth, the lobule often a little longer than the lobe, the latter oblong, 0.5 mm. long, 0-1 mm. wide, rounded at the apex, entire or vaguely and sparing? * Hedwigia 35: 80. 1806. Evans: HEPATICAE OF PuERTO RICO 217 denticulate along the margin, lobule obtuse, sparingly denticulate; bracteole oblong-obovate, 0.5 mm. long, 0.3 mm. wide, bifid about one half with acute suberect divisions, entire or irregularly crenu- late from projecting cells; perianth oblong or oblong-ovate, 1.2 mm. long, 0.5 mm. wide, rounded to truncate at the apex and with avery short beak: inflorescence occupying a short branch, very rarely proliferating; bracts imbricated, in from two to four pairs, similar to those of D. pellucida; bracteoles also similar: mature Sporophyte not seen. (PLATE 16, FIGURES 10-18.) On bark of trees. Puerto Rico: El Yunque, Evans (24, 127 in part). Jamaica: Cinchona, Evans (138, 250 in part). No. 24 may be designated the type. This new species is closely related to D. pellucida but is at once distinguished by its larger size and by its autoicous inflores- cence. The leaves, furthermore, always lack the hyaline border, which is so frequent in D, pellucida, and are never closely appressed to the substratum: in fact, they are oftentimes distinctly squar- Tose in the antical region. In other respects they are much alike in the two species. The underleaves yield a few additional points of distinction. In D. pellucida the divisions are acuminate and Spread so widely that the upper margin of the underleaf is often scarcely indented in the middle. In D. brachyclada the divisions Spread obliquely and form a distinct angle where they come together. Their apices are acute, rather than acuminate, and a usually tipped with a single cell; even when tipped with two Superimposed cells they taper more abruptly than in D. pellucida. Apparently the female inflorescence in D. brachyclada is invariably Fé on an abbreviated branch, but the involucral leaves and Perlanths show no very striking peculiarities. The antheridial Spikes, also, show little tendency to vary in length. In D. pellucida th male and female branches are subject to marked variation in this respect, DIPLASIOLEyEUNEA UNIDENTATA (Lehm. & Lindenb.) Schiffn. Ji . ; ‘germannia unidentata Lehm. & Lindenb. in Lehmann, Pug. stoi 6:48. 1834. Jeunea unidentata Lehm. & Lindenb. in G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. Pay 1845. ie (Diplasio-Lejeunea) unidentata Steph. Hedwigia 29: 90. 218 Evans: HEPATICAE OF PUERTO RICO Diplasiolejeunea unidentata Schifin. Bot. Jahrb. 23: 583. 1897. Pale green or whitish, growing in compact depressed tufts: stems 0.14 mm. in diameter, prostrate, irregularly pinnate, the branches obliquely to widely spreading, similar to the stem but usually with smaller leaves: leaves imbricated, the lobe widely spreading, somewhat convex, broadly ovate to suborbicular, 1.2-1.4 mm. long, I-1.2 mm. wide, antical margin straight to rounded at the base, usually arching across the axis, strongly out- wardly curved to the apex, postical margin also curved, forming a very obtuse or rounded indentation at the junction with the keel; lobule obovate, 0.7 mm. long, 0.4 mm wide, inflated along the arched keel, more or less appressed to the lobe in the outer portion, free margin involute near the base but usually plane otherwise, apical tooth acute, obliquely spreading, mostly three to five cells long and two or three cells wide at the base, usually tipped with two superimposed cells, proximal tooth much shorter and often inconspicuous, acute to rounded, hyaline papilla mostly distal, sinus shallow, forming a distinct angle with the apic tooth; cells of lobe averaging 18u at the margin, 28 X 18m the middle and 32 X 18 at the base, more or less thickened and usually with distinct trigones and_ occasional intermediate thickenings: underleaves distant to subimbricated, broadly cuneate, 0.2 mm. long in the middle, 0.5-0.6 mm. wide, bifid about one half with obliquely spreading divisions, obtuse to rounded at the apex, sinus mostly acute, margin entire: inflorescence dioicous: @ inflorescence borne on a leading branch or on a more or less abbreviated branch, the innovation mostly simple and sterile; bracts obliquely spreading, sharply complicate and some- times very narrowly winged along the keel, bifid one third to one half, the lobe oblong, 0.6 mm. long, 0.25 mm. wide, rounded apex, entire, lobule similar in form, 0.5 mm. long, 0.22 mm. rounded to very obtuse at the apex, margin entire; bracteole ovate, 0.45 mm. long, 0.35 mm. wide, bifid about one third with acute suberect divisions and an entire margin; perianth as in D. pellucida I.3 mm. long, 0.75 mm. wide: o& inflorescence occupying a short branch, not proliferating; bracts mostly in from three ‘0 - pairs, similar to those of D. pellucida; bracteoles also similar: mature sporophyte not seen. (PLATE 17, FIGURES I-12.) On bark, rarely on leaves. El Yunque, Evans (2, 120 in par 145). The species is known to the writer from the ol additional localities: Mansfield, Jamaica, Evans (336); Sharfo Estate, Dominica, Elliott (1601); Martinique, Duss; 5t- Vincen! Herb. Hooker, the type station. wide, Evans: HEPATICAE OF PurrTo Rico 219 The present species and the following, D. Rudolphiana, have been so much confused that a brief account of their history may not be out of place. Jungermannia unidentata was originally described from a specimen in the Hooker herbarium, collected on the island of St. Vincent. A portion of this original material is pre- served at Kew, and although it is perfectly sterile it agrees so closely with the other plants cited above that there can be but little doubt that they represent the same species. A similar specimen from the Lehmann herbarium is in the Montagne herbarium at Paris. In 1845 Montagne reported D. unidentata from Cuba, his record being based on specimens collected by Ramon de la Sagra.* He also published figures of these specimens, and since his time D. unidentata has been listed from a number of localities in tropical and subtropical America, many of the deter- minations being apparently based on these figures. A careful study of Montagne’s specimens, however, has shown that the Cuban plant is not the same as the type specimen in the Hooker herbarium, and that some of the published records for the species are therefore incorrect, a fact which the writer has already noted elsewhere.t The Cuban plant, however, does not represent an undescribed species. It agrees closely with D. Rudolphiana, and the same thing is true of some of the other specimens that have been referred to D. unidentata. In the opinion of Spruce, t D. unidentata alent to be considered as a variety of D. pellucida, but there are many reasons for regard- ing them as distinct species, in spite of the fact that both are dioicous, D. unidentata is a more robust plant than D. pellucida, It grows normally on bark and not on leaves, it is much less Closely @ppressed to the substratum, its leaves always lack hyaline borders, and the leaf cells usually show distinct local thickenings im their walls. The underleaves, too, present a very different The divisions spread obliquely, forming a distinct being acuminate. In the involucre the bracteole is much less deeply lucida, and the lobes are consequently broader * : . Ramon de la Sagra, Hist. Fis. Pol. y Natur. Cuba 9: 478. pl. 19. f. 2. 1845. ‘iy Torrey Club 38: 207. 1or1r. Pp. Amaz. et And. 302. 1884. 220 Evans : HEPATICAE OF PUERTO RICO and less sharply pointed; the perianth, however, is essentially — the same. When compared with D. brachyclada, the dioicous inflorescence, the absence of t-shaped apical teeth on the lobules, the distinct local thickenings in the cell walls, and the blunter divisions of the underleaves will serve as distinguishing character- istics. DIPLASIOLEJEUNEA RUDOLPHIANA Steph. Lejeunea unidentata Mont. in Ramon de la Sagra, Hist. Fis. Pol. y Natur. Cuba 9: 478. pl. 19. f.2. 1845. Not Lehm. & Lindenb. Diplasiolejeunea Rudolphiana Steph. Hedwigia 35: 79. 1896. Yellowish or brownish green, growing in compact depressed tufts: stems 0.12 mm. in diameter, sparingly and irregularly pinnate, the branches widely spreading, similar to the stem but usually with smaller leaves: leaves imbricated, more or less convex, the lobe widely spreading, broadly ovate, 1.2-1.4 mm. long, I-1.2 mm. wide, antical margin rounded at the base, arching across the axis, strongly outwardly curved to the apex, postical margin likewise curved, forming a rounded indentation at the junction with the keel, margin entire or vaguely and sparingly crenulate from projecting cells; lobule obovate, 0.7 mm. long, 0.35 mm: wide, inflated in carinal region or throughout, keel arched, free margin involute near the base but usually plane elsewhere, apical tooth long and slender, subparallel with the axis or obliquely spreading, usually from six to eleven cells long and two ceHs wide at the base, proximal tooth shorter but sharp and distinct, often inflexed, usually tipped with a row of two or three cel S, hyaline papilla distal; cells of lobe averaging 15m at the margin 28 X 22y in the middle, and 37 X 25y at the base, walls slightly thickened showing small trigones and very rare intermediate thickenings: underleaves distant to subimbricated, broadly cuneate, 0.17-0.2 mm. long in the middle, 0.4-0.6 mm. wid ze bifid about one half with a rounded sinus and obliquely spreading divisions, mostly rounded at the apex but occasionally obtuse of subacute, margin as in the leaves: inflorescence autoicous: ? florescence borne on an elongated branch or on a Very branch, the innovation usually simple and sterile; bracts obliquely spreading, strongly complicate and very narrowly winged along the keel, bifid two thirds to three fourths, the lobe oblong-obovat® 0.4 mm. long, 0.17 mm. wide, rounded, margin vaguely cren™” from projecting cells, lobule oblong, 0.35 mm. long, 0.12 mm. wide, obtuse to subacute, margin as in the lobe; bracteole ovate, 0.35 mm. long, 0.25 mm. wide, bifid one fifth to one third with acute Evans: HEPATICAE OF PUERTO RICO mal to obtuse. suberect divisions, margin as in the bracts; perianth much as in D. pellucida, 1.3 mm. long, 0.5 mm. wide: o inflores- cence occupying a short branch, not proliferating; bracts mostly in from three to six pairs, similar to those of D. pellucida; brac- teoles also similar: mature sporophyte not seen. (PLATE 17, FIGURES 13-17.) On bark of trees. Near Cayey, 1900, Evans (96 in part, 102). The writer has examined specimens from the following additional localities: near Camp Longview, Florida, Small & Wilson (mixed with 2058); various stations on New Providence, Bahama Islands, Coker, E. G. Britton ;* Cuba, Ramon de la Sagra, Wright; near Port Margot, Hayti, Nash (1765); Troy, Jamaica, Evans (658); Para- maribo, Dutch Guiana, Kegel; Petropolis, Brazil, Rudolph, the type locality. The portion of the type that was studied is in the herbarium of the British Museum and agrees closely with the other specimens cited. Although the geographical distribution of D. Rudolphiana is by no means thoroughly known, it seems to be the dominant representative of the genus in the lowlands of tropical America. It is often associated with the presence of man and occasionally occurs at higher altitudes along roadsides and in plantations. In this respect it resembles the common Frullania squarrosa (R., Bl. N.) Dumort. It is closely related to D. unidentata but differs from it in two important particulars, its autoicous inflorescence and the remarkable development of the apical teeth of its lobules. € teeth form a very characteristic feature of the plant, even if Poorly developed branches sometimes fail to show them in a typical condition, When well developed the apical tooth attains alength of about ten cells and is two cells wide for at least half its extent. It occupies a position parallel with the axis, and this is due, sometimes at least, to a curve at the base. The portion of the lobule from which the tooth arises shows an almost straight edge, the tooth forming a distinct angle on each side. The base is Usually the two median cells. The proximal tooth, also, is un- 8 and distinct but is sometimes strongly inflexed and demonstrate. Between the proximal tooth and the * Bull. Torrey | Clu 222 Evans: HEPATICAE OF PUERTO RICO base one or two minute teeth, each consisting of a single projecting cell, can sometimes be distinguished. In cases where the apical tooth spreads obliquely, as in D. wnidentata, it shows the same complexity as when parallel with the axis. Aside from the pecu- liarities just noted D. Rudolphiana is much like D. unidentata, and almost the same differential characters will serve to separate it from D. pellucida and D. brachyclada. VEGETATIVE REPRODUCTION IN DIPLASIOLEJEUNEA The vegetative reproduction in Diplasiolejeunea is carried on by means of discoid gemmae, which bear a marked resemblance to those found in the genera Cololejeunea, Leptocolea, and A phano- lejeunea. These gemmae have been demonstrated in D. pellucida (including the variety malleiformis), in D. unidentata, and in D. Rudolphiana. They have not yet been observed in D. brachyclada, however, and it is therefore possible that they are associated with certain species and never produced by others. In D. pellucida the gemmae are borne on the lower surface of ordinary leaf lobes (TEXT FIGURE 2, A) and seem to be entirely absent from bracts and perianths. They occur on plants of either sex but tend to be more frequent on male individuals. In some cases the leaves on one side of a gemmiparous axis will develop gemmae much more abundantly than the leaves on the other side. Apparently the production of gemmae has no marked effect 0# the growth of the shoot, and the leaves upon which the gemmae are borne show no modifications. In D. unidentata and D. Rudol- phiana the gemmiparous branches are very different from those of D. pellucida and much more highly specialized. They show @ definite limitation in growth, and the gemmae are restricted t0 the youngest leaves that reach maturity, in most cases to the terminal pair of leaves (PLATE 17, FIGURES I and 3). These leaves differ considerably from normal leaves. Instead of being plane oF convex, when examined from above, they are distinctly concave in the apical portion; and instead of spreading widely from the axis they spread very slightly. They are also relatively narrow’ than normal leaves, although sometimes larger. The ™ ince tions in the lobule affect chiefly the apical tooth, which is dis tinctly shorter than on normal leaves (FIGURE 6) and tends to be Evans: HEPATICAE OF PuERTO RICO 223 nearer the outer extremity of the free margin. The hyaline papilla occupies the usual position but no proximal tooth is developed. The gemmae, which are produced in great abundance, are confined to the apical portion of the lobe, but are situated on the lower surface as in D. pellucida. The development of the gemmae is essentially the same as in Cololejeunea and its allies, so that only the most important features of the process need be mentioned. The establishment of the mother cell of the gemma, the division into quadrants, and the greater growth of the apical quadrants take place as described by Stevens for Cololejeunea Biddlecomiae (Aust.) Evans.* In the same way each apical quadrant proceeds to divide as a two-sided apical cell and cuts off two series of segments, the first division wall being parallel with the median wall of the gemma. The segmentation, however, is carried considerably further, the number of segments being usually from seven to ten. It will be remem- bered that five is the highest number of segments observed in Leptocolea. The gemma shown in TEXT FIGURE 2, B has ten F ee ey A espe e 2 tplasiolejeunea pellucida; Morce’s Gap, Jamaica, Evans (55). gem: mParous leaf, postical view, X 40. B. Gemma, X 300. C. Germinating Ma, Postical view X 40. ig on the left-hand side and nine on the right-hand side. . alle eauent divisions in the segments are largely by periclinal 8, as many as three such walls appearing in some of the older * Bull. —. Torrey Club 37: 366-360. f. r. 1910. 224 Evans : HEPATICAE OF PUERTO RICO segments. In the younger segments, however, there is often an anticlinal wall formed in the most external cell. So far as ob- served the basal quadrants always divide by a single periclinal wall. The attachment of the gemma is markedly excentric, and the separation takes place just as in Cololejeunea, a slightly project- ing stalk cell being left behind. The curious organs of attachment, noted in the genera Colole- jeunea, Leptocolea, and A phanolejeunea, are developed also in the gemmae of Diplasiolejeunea. In the vast majority of cases there are three such organs on each gemma. One arises from the outer most cell of one of the oldest segments on one side of the median wall, while the other two arise from the outermost cells of the second segments cut off from the apical quadrants. In a single instance a gemma with four organs of attachment was observed, one arising in each of the oldest segments. It will be noted that in contrast to Cololejeunea and its allies the basal quadrants play no part in the development of the organs of attachment. The mature gemma consists of an oval plate of cells broader than long. The margin is entire, and the apical cell in each half is clearly visible, being sometimes situated in a slight depression. The gemmae in D. pellucida, D. unidentata, and D. Rudolpmana are essentially alike. The germination follows the same course as in Cololejeuned, one of the apical cells of the gemma functioning directly aS the apical cell of the leafy shoot without the interpolation of a thalloid structure (TEXT FIGURE 2, C). The leaves at the base of the shoot are rudimentary and have no corresponding underleaves, but the characteristic features of the genus are very quickly acquired. In one case both apical cells had given rise to shoots, but one wae much better developed than the other. YALE UNIVERSITY. Evans: HEPATICAE OF PuERTO RICO 225 Explanation of plates 16 and 17 The figures were drawn by the writ prepared for publication by Mr. Stanley C. Ball. PLATE 16 Diplasiolejeunea pellucida (Meissn.) Schiffn. 1. Part ri a plant, showing a perianth borne on a leading branch, postical view, X 25. 2. Ashort branch bearing —— ae aeome serene ee mM 35. 3+ —— from _ en — vgs isecar line , Xx 265. 4. Cells from oacionn a Sebi 265). 5: pees of lobule, X 200. 6. Part of an underleaf, x 20 7, 8. Bract and bracteole from a single involucre, X 4 9. Transverse section io a perianth above the middle, X 35. The figures were all drawn from specimens collected by the writer at Morce’s Gap, Jamaica (55). Diplasiolejeunea brachyclada Evans. 10. Part of a plant showing two female inflorescences an nd a male spike, postical view, X 25. 11. Part of a plant with a perianth and an antheridial spike, postical view, X 25. 12. Cells from middle of lobe, X 265. 13. Apical portion of a lobule, X 200. 14. page tooth of another lobule, xX 200, 1 5. Apex of an ris division, X 200. 16-18. Bracts and bracteole from a single involucre, X 45. he figures were “ Sica from specimens til i the writer, FIG. 11 being ae the type specimen (24), and the others Tom no, PLATE 17 tridentata (Lehm. & Lindenb.) Schiffn. 1. Female branch with = innovation, the latter gemmiparous, postical view; X 25. 2. Part of a _ with two antheridial spikes, postical view, X 25. 3. Apical portion of a gemmip- *rous branch, postical view, X 25. 4. Cells from middle of lobe, X 265. 5. Apical Portion of a lobule, X 200. 6, Apical portion of the lobule of a gemmiparous leaf, fr Te 7 Apices of underleaf divisions, X 200. 10-12. Bracts and bracteole eee , X45. The figures were all drawn from specimens collected oF » II, and 12 being from no. 2, and the others from no. 145. iolejeunea haihiibiacs Steph. 13. Part of a leading axis, postical view, - Apical region of a lobule, X 200. 1 5-17. Bracts and bracteole from a he figures were all drawn from specimens collected by near Port Margot, Hayti (165). _Dipla tol p4. a aii he pam A taxonomic study of the Pteridophyta of the Hawaiian Islands— WINIFRED J. ROBINSON (WITH PLATES 18-20) The following paper is a partial result of the study of ferns and fern allies of the Pacific Islands, which was begun several years ago under the direction of the late Professor Lucien M. Underwood, whose design was to combine the regional taxonomic studies of a number of workers in a comprehensive report which should include ecological and morphological features as well. To the writer was assigned the taxonomic study of the Hawaiian fern flora. The Hawaiian Islands lie at the crossroads of the Pacific, latitude 18° 55/-22° 15’ north, longitude 154° 50’-160° 30’ west, more than two thousand miles from San Francisco and about the same distance from the nearest islands to the southwest. They are farther from the mainland than any other group of islands of the same extent; and while a geodetic map shows that they have arisen by volcanic action through a fissure in the earth’s Siena which extends from northwest to southeast, there is nothing . indicate that they were ever connected by a chain of islands with Japan, and there is very little in common in the floras of Japan and Hawaii. Hence their isolation must have been as complete through the ages as it is now. With the exception of “oral limestone along the shore and a little sandstone and sedi- Seem at rock, the soil is uniformly of basaltic origin. Kauai, 8eologically the oldest island of the group, about 2,000 m. high at its highest point, is most eroded and deserves its name of the 8arden island. Hawaii, with two snow-capped peaks, Mauna Kea — each nearly 5,000 m. high, and with its active be me : auea, is still in the making. The ridges are steep saat rg at narrow in all the islands. Asa Rule the northeast oc les ae wis and 1s covered with rain forest, while the southwest 1S arid because of the direction of the prevailing winds. 228 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS These winds together with the ocean currents make the tempera- ture of the Hawaiian Islands several degrees lower than that of the West Indies, which are in the same latitude. At sea level it ranges from 16° to 30° C., while at an elevation of 365 m. it is about 20° C. There are few wild plants in the islands that seem to owe their origin to northwest America, though a pine log of great size, evidently brought by the North Pacific Drift Current, has been known to reach the island of Maui. A correspondence between a number of South American and Hawaiian forms has been traced among flowering plants, but the affinities of the ferns seem to be with those of the islands to the southwest rather than with those of the mainland, while a large number of species are endemic. The extreme lightness of the spores makes their suspension in currents of air for long periods possible, and also may account for their transfer over great distances. In prehistoric times the journey of two thousand miles from the Society Islands was probably made several times in open boats, and since ferns were used in the religious rites of the islanders, some species may have been introduced in this way. The material for this study consisted of the collections im the herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden (indicated by C); that of the Royal Botanical Garden at Berlin, Germany (indicated by B), the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum at Honolulu, H. I, (indicated by BM), the National Herbarium at the Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D. C. (indicated by N), and the het barium of Vassar College, Poughkeepsie, New York (indicated by V). Ina few cases comparisons have been made at Kew throu the kindness of Mrs. N. L. Britton of the New York Botanical Garden (indicated by K). The writer spent seven weeks in the Hawaiian Islands, in the summer of 1909, in collecting ferns and observing ecological factors of their habitat. When Captain Cook made his last South Sea voyage in 17769 during which he discovered the Hawaiian Islands, he was accom: panied by David Nelson, who made collections of ferns and other plants, now preserved in the herbarium at Kew, th Linnean Society of London, and that of the British Landings were made upon Kauai and Nihau in January } ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN IsLANDS 229 but the men did not remain long enough to permit exploration at any considerable distance from the shore. In November 1778 Captain Cook returned and spent ten weeks in cruising about Maui and Hawaii, making frequent landings, hence it is probable that the greater portion of Nelson’s collection is from these islands. At Kew there are also preserved specimens from the collec- tions of Archibald Menzies, surgeon and _ naturalist upon Van- couver’s voyage of 1790-95. Some of his specimens have reached the herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden by exchange with Kew. Vancouver's policy in dealing with the natives was so just that he secured their confidence and his men were able to explore freely. He spent about four months upon the islands. In 1816-17 Albert Chamisso, while on the voyage of the Romanzoff, made collections of plants in Oahu and published his notes and descriptions of new species in Linnaea. His collections are at Berlin, in the herbarium of the Royal Botanical Gardens. In 1819 Charles Gaudichaud, botanist of the French Corvette "'Uranie under Captain Freycinet made collections upon the islands, and published his account of plants in Botanique du Voyage d’Uranie, in 1830 (1826 according to the title page). He returned to the Hawaiian Islands in 1826 as botanist on the Bonite, but the only record of his collections consists of a few plates with no adequate descriptions or notes as to localities where the plants were found, James Macrae, afterward superintendent of the Ceylon Botan- ical Gardens, made collections in the Pacific Islands and in South America between the years 1824 and 1826. His collections have = variously distributed by exchange and appear in herbaria reat Britain, the Continent, and America. Sd George T. Lay and Alexander Collie, the collectors ean: Beechey on the voyage of the Blosssom, secured the of the iy rom which Hooker and Arnott made their report ‘ raat of Captain Beechey’s Voyage, 1830-41. . 1°33 David Douglas, sent out by the London Horticultural ety, made valuable collections of Hawaiian ferns, which are Otay in the herbaria of Hooker, Bentham, and Lindley. intended wai his death in Hawaii by falling into a pit which was © entrap animals. 230 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS The United States Exploring Expedition under Captain Wilkes visited the Hawaiian Islands in 1840. Brackenridge, the botanist of the expedition, published his descriptions of ferns as a separate volume of the report of the expedition, but unfortunately the edition with the exception of about a dozen copies was destroyed by fire. A nearly complete set of his specimens is in the U.S. National Herbarium at Washington, D. C., and the collection is well represented at the New York Botanical Garden. Rev. J. Diell, seaman’s chaplain at Honolulu, aided Bracken- ridge materially in his collecting and also did much independently. On the Galathea Expedition, 1845-7, sent out from Denmark, Didrichsen was the botanist. The larger part of his collections are at Copenhagen; some specimens, however, have reached other herbaria by exchange. Between 1851 and 1855 Remy made collections for the Paris Museum, some of which may now be seen in the Gray Herbarium at Cambridge, Massachusetts. | In 1864 and 1865 Horace Mann with Dr. William T. Brigham, now Director of the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum at Honolulu, spent a year in botanizing over the five larger islands. With the aid of Professor Asa Gray, Mann made an enumeration of the plants found on the islands, which included one hundred and thirteen species of ferns. One set of these specimens is at the Museum in Honolulu and another at Cornell University, Ithaca, New York. Some of the numbers appear in other herbaria. Many residents in the islands have been interested in the fera flora and have made large collections. The Reverend John M. Lydgate, of Lihue, Kauai, civil engineer and botanist, as well a5 clergyman, published an enumeration of Hawaiian ferns in 1873; when in college at Oberlin. His later collections have been con tributed to Dr. W. Hillebrand’s herbarium, now in Berlin. Many of the specimens from Kauai in the Berlin herbarium wert” : lected by Mr. Valdemar Knudsen. The late D. D- Baldwin, one time professor at Punahou College, has made large collec tions upon Oahu and Maui. Rev. Edward Bishop was an ardent : collector also. In 1883 Edward Bailey published ‘Hawaiian Ferns, 4 gers sis,” a small manual, now out of print. It contained descrip® of six new species. RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 231 Dr. William Hillebrand spent twenty years in the Hawaiian Islands, during all of which time he was an enthusiastic botanist. A part of the manuscript of his Flora of the Hawaiian Islands was with the printer at the time of his death, in 1887, and the work was published the following year by his son, Dr. W. F. Hillebrand, now Chief Chemist, Bureau of Standards, Washington, D. C: The herbarium of Dr. William Hillebrand was bequeathed to the Royal Botanical Museum, at Berlin, Germany. The accuracy of his descriptions was shown by the comparison of his specimens with the diagnoses in his Flora. He included one hundred and fifty-five species and many varieties of pteridophytes. r. A. A. Heller, now of the College of Agriculture, Reno, Nevada, made a botanical exploration of Kauai and Oahu in 1895-6 under the auspices of the Minnesota State Geological Survey. The larger part of the collection is at the herbarium of the University of Minnesota, but duplicates have been distributed to several of the larger American institutions and to Kew. A complete set of his vascular cryptogams is at the New York Botanical Garden, as it was sent to Professor L. M. Underwood for determination. The report included one hundred and sixteen species, six of which were new. In the following summary of the taxonomic study of Hawaiian ferns, diagnoses of the larger groups and also of genera have been given with keys to species, but descriptions of species already published elsewhere have been omitted. The method in this study has been to examine the specimens as if they represented undescribed species, then to compare them With types so far as possible and with published descriptions. It has been attempted to give the name first used for the plant in Linnaeus’ Species Plantarum or the name first published subse- quent to 1753. The writer is indebted to Dr. N. L. Britton, Director of the New York Botanical Garden, for suggestions and criticism, to Mr. William R. Maxon of the U. S. National Herbarium, Smith- Sonian Institution, Washington, D. C., for the loan of material and helpful criticism, and to Dr. J. H. Barnhart, Librarian of © New York Botanical Garden, for suggestions and criticism 48 to form, also to Professor A. Engler, Director of the Royal 932 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS Botanical Gardens of Berlin, Germany, for permission to study the Hawaiian ferns in the herbarium of the Royal Museum. PTERIDOPHYTA Plants (sporophytes) with well-defined vascular tissue, which in the homosporous series produce spores that grow into gameto- phytes which may be monoecious or dioecious, and in the hetero- sporous series produce megaspores and microspores; of these the megaspores grow into gametophytes that bear female organs (archegonia), the microspores into gametophytes that bear male organs (antheridia). As the result of the union of the egg cell in the archegonium and a motile male cell (antherozoid) from an antheridium, the sporophyte, ordinarily considered the plant, develops. Reproduction by some form of budding occurs both in the gametophyte and the sporophyte stage of the life history of many species. Spores in capsules (sporocarps) borne upon the rhizome. 1. SALVINIALES. Spores borne upon some aerial member of the plant. Sporangia not borne in the axils of scalelike leaves. Vernation circinate. Sporangia separate. 4. FILICALES. porangia coalescent (synangia). 3. MARATTIALES. Vernation erect or inclined. 2, OPHIOGLOSSALES- Sporangia b in the axils of scalelike leaves; these either distant or forming pact strobili. &, LyYCOpopliALESs. 1. SALVINIALES Aquatic or subaquatic plants with horizontal, creeping Of floating stems, which bear sporocarps containing megaspores * microspores or both; leaves various. Plants floating; leaves with entire or 2-lobed blades folded in vernation. 1. SALVINIACEAE- gy Cae cus g ; or 2-4-foliate, circinate in vernation. 2. MARSILEACEAE- 1. SALVINIACEAE Small floating plants, with a more or less elongated, sometimes branching axis. Leaves apparently 2-ranked. Sporocarp® - o more borne upon a common peduncle; megaspores and micro" spores in separate sori. Azolla sp. recently introduced to prevent the bree mosquitoes in the ditches along the rice fields. ding of ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN IsLANDsS 233 2, MARSILEACEAE Perennial plants; leaves 2 or 4-foliate; sporocarps on peduncles which arise with the petioles of leaves or separately from the rootstock and bear megaspores and microspores in the same sorus. Type species:* Marsilea quadrifolia L. MaRSILEA VILLOSA Kaulf. Enum. 272. 1824 TYPE LocaLity: Oahu, Hawaiian Islands. DistRIBUTION: In taro patches, Hawaiian Islands. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaiian Islands, Chamisso B; Gau- dichaud B; Remy B. M. villosa is closely allied to M. vestita Hook. & Grev. from Oregon and California. Brackenridge referred the American plant to M. villosa, but the specimens examined indicate that the Hawaiian plant is a larger and less hairy species than that figured by Hooker and Greville (Ic. Fil. 159. 1829). All speci- mens in the Berlin herbarium are sterile; Remy’s specimen has narrower leaflets and a more compact rootstock than Chamisso’s. SPECIES INQUIRENDA Marsilea crenulata Desv. Reported by Hillebrand (Fl. Haw. Is. 651. 1888) as collected in Oahu and preserved in the Godet: Herbarium, This herbarium is unknown to Dr. W. T. Brigham, director of the Bishop Museum at Honolulu. No specimen was found by the writer in the Berlin herbarium. 2. OPHIOGLOSSALES Herbaceous, usually succulent plants consisting of a fleshy rootstock with fibrous or fleshy roots and one to several leaves, the latter €rect or pendent, non-articulate, simple, lobed, or com- Pound, the blade sessile or stalked; sporophyls simple or ternately compound, arising from the sterile leaf or from the rootstock. Sporangia formed each from a group of epidermal and subepi- dermal cells, dehiscing by a transverse slit. Prothallia subterra- ~ Mar : S ‘ si L. is Marsileg natans L. which is based upon Salvinia Mich. Nov. Pl. Gen. * 7729. Under the American code, therefore, the name Marsilea L. should be used for Saly (B inia (Micheli) Adans., while the present genus should be called Lemma » Juss.) Adans, 234 ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS nean, usually achlorophyllous and nourished by an endophytic fungus. OPHIOGLOSSACEAE Characters of the order. ms blade and sporophy! both ternately compound; veins free. 1. Botrychium. eaf blade simple, sporophyl a Gieenone on veins reticulate. Plants terrestrial; leaf blades petiolat 2. Ophioglossum. Plants epiphytic; leaf blades ae 3. Ophioderma. 1. BOTRYCHIUM Sw. Jour. Bot. Schrad. 18007: 110. 1801 Terrestrial plants; rootstock short, fleshy, erect; roots clus- tered, fleshy; sterile leaves 1-3-pinnately compound or decom- pound; veins free; sporophyls ternately compound; sporangia separate, spherical, sessile, pinnately arranged. Type species: Osmunda Lunaria L. BotRYCHIUM SUBBIFOLIATUM Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. 3!7- 1854 TYPE LocALity: Hawaii, District of Puna. DISTRIBUTION: On the ground in wet forests, Hawaiian Islands. ItLustrations: Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. pl. 44- 1854- PLATE 18. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, District of Puna, Wilkes Expedition (type) N; Oahu, Lydgate B; Kauai, Forbes 262 BM; Wawra 2061 C; Remy 62 B; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 114 8, tN The sterile leaf is always asymmetrical, one of the basal pinnae arising above the other. 2. OPHIOGLOSSUM L. Sp. Pl. 1062. 1753 Terrestrial plants; rootstock erect, less than I cm. in height: roots fleshy; leaves glabrous; leafstalk fleshy, not articulate; vel" anastomosing, with occasional free included veinlets; sporophy? pedunculate spike, arising from the base of the expanded blade’ sporangia in two rows, coalescent. Type species: Ophioglossum vulgatum L. OPHIOGLOssUM CoNCINNUM Brack. Fil. U.S. Expl. Exp. 315: 1854 jan TYPE LOCALITY: Sand hills, near Wailuku, Maui, Hawail Islands. ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN IsLANDS 2385 DisTRIBUTION: On ground, appearing after rains; often near the seashore or in soil that has been taken from the shore; Hawai- ian Islands. ILLUSTRATION: Brack. Fil. U.S. Expl. Exp. pl. 44. f. 1. 1854: SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Maui, Hillebrand B; Oahu, Forbes BM; Remy B; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 113 B, C. The point of divergence between the leaf and sporophyl is on the petiole in O. nudicaule Sw. (Syn. Fil. pl. 4. f. 2. 1806), while in O. concinnum Brack. it is at the base of the blade; the blade is ovate in O. nudicaule rather than elliptical as in O. concinnum, and there is no trace in the Hawaiian plant of the midrib men- tioned for O. ellipticum (Hook. & Grev. Ic. Fil. pl. 40. 1831). All these forms, however, are closely related. 3. OPHIODERMA (BI.) Endl. Gen. Pl. 66. 1836 Epiphytic plants; rootstock erect, less than 1 cm. high; roots fleshy; leaves not articulate, strap-shaped, sessile, fleshy, brittle; venation reticulate, without free included veinlets; sporophyl a two-ranked spike of coalescent sporangia, arising from the middle of the blade. Type species: Ophioglossum pendulum L. OPHIODERMA PENDULUM (L). Presl, Suppl. Tent. Pterid. 56. 1845 Ophioglossum pendulum L. Sp. Pl. ed. 2. 1518. 1763. TYPE LOCALITY: Amboina, Molucca Islands. DisTRIBUTION: On trees or fallen logs, at elevations of 600- 1,500 m.; Asia, Australia, Polynesia. ILLustrations: Hook. & Grev. Ic. Fil. pl. 19. 1831; Rumpf. Amb. pl. 37. a3. 274at, : ‘SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Robinson 212 V; Wilkes Expe- dition N; Maui, Lichtenthaler N; Robinson 304 V; 320 V; Oahu, sien! 2217 C, N; Robinson 8 V; 43 V; 111 V; 115 V; Safford 920 N; Kauai, Robinson 429 V; 443 V; Hawaiian Islands, Bald- es hig B, C; Miss Sessions C; ex Herb. John Donnell Smith 3. MARATTIALES abe herbaceous, consisting of a fleshy or tuberous rootstock, a. Y Toots, and cespitose, stipulate, bipinnate to tripinnate » Which are articulate upon the stem and circinate in 236 ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS vernation; veins free; sporangia developed from a group of epi- dermal and subepidermal cells, separate or coalescent, in the latter case forming boat-shaped or circular synangia. Prothallia green, thalloid, large. MARATTIACEAE Characters of the order. MARATTIA Sw. Prod. Fl. Ind. Occ. 128. 1788 Rootstock tuberous, starchy; leaf blades deltoid, dark green, thick, glabrous, bipinnate to tripinnate; stipules two, fleshy, at the base of the fleshy leafstalk; venation free; sporangia near the ends of the veins, coalescent, forming synangia upon a slightly elevated receptacle; these in some species subtended by a pseudo- indusium. Type species: Marattia alata Sw. Maratita Douctast (Pres!) Baker; Hook. & Baker, Syn. Fil. 441. 1868 Marattia alata Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. 102. 1832. Not M. alata Sw. 1788. Stibasia Douglasii Presl, Suppl. Tent. Pterid. 16. 1845. Gymnotheca Douglasii Moore, Ind. Fil. 121. 1857. TYPE LOCALITY: Hawaiian Islands. DistRIBUTION: In moist, shady localities, above 600 ™- elevation, Hawaiian Islands. ILLUSTRATION: Vriese, Mon. Marat. pl. 4. 24. 1853: SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Robinson 202 V; Maui, Robir- son 329 V; Oahu, Diell C; Kauai, Heller 2770 C, N; Lichtenthaler N; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 111 C, N; Wilkes Expedition C; Hitchcock C; ex Herb. Mt. Holyoke College C; ex Herb. Joha Donnell Smith N. The fleshy tubers taste somewhat like a turnip and are eate? either raw or baked by the native Hawaiians. 4, FILICALES Plants terrestrial or epiphytic (aquatic in Ceratopteridaceae)+ varying in habit from minute herbaceous forms to arbo ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 237 forms; sporangia developed from a single epidermal cell, mainly upon the under surface of the leaf, in clusters (sori) upon the veins, or within marginal indusia, or less commonly, scattered over the entire lower surface or upon non-foliose sporophyls. Indusia Various or wanting. Prothallia chlorophyllous, thalloid. Sporangia borne in a distichous spike; sterile leaves slen- der, grasslike. Sporangia associated in indusiate or non-indusiate sori or scattered over the lower surface of the leaf Leaves pseudo-dichotomous, usually with a bud be- I. SCHIZAEACEAE. tween the paired divisions, giving the appearance of indefinite growth; sori non-indusiate, small, circu- lar. 2. GLEICHENIACEAE. Leaves simple, pinnately divided, or ternately divided. ri valvate or tubular. Sori valvate, the outer valve formed by a coriaceous outgrowth from the margin of the leaf, dorsal upon the veins; plants boreous. Sori valvate or tubular, not coriaceous; ter- minal upon the veins; plants delicate, mostly epiphytic. Sori not valvate or tubular; indusium various or absent. 3. CYATHEACEAE, 4. HYMENOPHYLLACEAE. 5. POLYPODIACEAE. 1, SCHIZAEACEAE Plants of diverse form and habit, including xerophilous forms with simple leaves and climbing plants with lobed or divided leaves, Sporangia borne singly or in rows on more or less special- zed terminal segments, or upon the very slender non-foliose Pinnae, indusiate or non-indusiate; annulus subapical, distally Contracted; dehiscence longitudinal. Prothallia foliose or fila- mentous and branched. SCHIZAEA J. E. Smith, Mém. Acad. Turin §: 419. 1793 Rootstock short, upright, covered with dark-brown scales; leaves linear » gtasslike; sporophyl consisting of a long slender — and a digitate fertile portion folded upon the midrib; spo- Fangia borne in two rows upon each division. Type species: Schizaea dichotoma J. E. Smith. 938 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS ScHIZAEA ROBUSTA Baker; Hook. & Baker, Syn. Fil. ed. 2. 429. 1874 Tyre LocaLity: Hawaiian Islands. DistripuTion: At high elevations in marshes and occasionally in exposed localities, Hawaiian Islands. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Oahu, Forbes 1038 BM; Lichtenthaler N; Mann & Brigham 475 N; Wilkes Expedition N; Kauai, Heller 2246 C, N; Robinson 419 V; 452 V; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 115 C, N; Baldwin (ex Herb. Hillebrand) C; Baldwin (ex Herb. Mt. Holyoke College) C. This is the species wrongly referred by Brackenridge (Fil. U.S. Expl. Exp. 302. 1854) to S. australis Gaud., a plant from the Falkland Islands, described by Gaudichaud (Ann. Sci. Nat. 5:98. 1825). Heller (Minn. Bot. Stud. 1: 789. 1907) says: “The first specimens were collected at an elevation of perhaps 762 m., on Konahuanui, Oahu, on a little spot in clay formation. The plants were small and stunted. It was found on the opposite side of the valley on the slope of Waiolani, at the same elevation. Near the Wahiawa bog, on Kauai, large and beautiful specimens were obtained.” Mr. C. N. Forbes’ specimen (Forbes 1038 BM) collected at the extreme western ridge of Konahuanui, “a dry ridge in broad sunlight,” is small and stunted though it has de- veloped sporangia, while specimens from the Wahiawa bog above McBride’s mountain house (Robinson 419 V and 452 V) are large and fine. 2, GLEICHENIACEAE Terrestial, xerophilous plants, with erect or creeping roe stocks. Leaves non-articulate, distant or cespitose, mostly consisting of an erect or ascending primary leafstalk of indeter- minate growth, forking into one to several opposite divisions, these simple and determinate or one to several times dichotomous Sori dorsal or terminal upon the veins, non-indusiate; sporangi? sessile, subglobose to pyriform; annulus nearly complete, obliquely transverse; dehiscence vertical. . The family Gleicheniaceae is represented by several specie? e of the genus Dicranopteris, which form nearly impenetrabl ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN IsLANDs 239 thickets upon the mountain sides and sometimes in the valleys also. The attachment of the roots to the thin soil is very insecure and the man or beast that ventures to step upon the seemingly solid mass, where it has overgrown the trail in the mountains, may feel it give way, allowing him to slip far down the steep slope. Dicranopteris is known locally as stag-horn fern and is a pest in the cattle-raising districts, as stock refuse to graze upon it. DICRANOPTERIS Bernh. Neues Jour. Bot. Schrad. 1: 38. 1806 Rootstock creeping, much branching, 0.5-1 cm. in diameter; leafstalk 1-2 m. high, not articulated to the rootstock; rachis of indeterminate growth, bearing opposite lateral branches in acrop- etal succession, these simple or repeatedly forked; included buds sometimes developing axes similar to the primary; ultimate divisions pectinate, pinnate, or bipinnate; veins free; sori dorsal upon the veins, non-indusiate; sporangia sessile; annulus obliquely transverse, the dehiscence vertical. Type species: Polypodium pectinatum Thunb: Ultimate divisions bipinnate, the leafstalk not forked. innules sessile, the lower segments lobed and overlapping the rachis; leafstalk noticeably scaly. D. glauca. Pinnules stalked, the lower segments entire; leafstalk with few D. glabra. Ultimate divisions a pectinate, in pairs; the leafstalk once or several tim rked A pair of onalg diet d, equal or unequal pinnae borne at all except the ultimate forkings of the leafstalk; veins 2-5-forked; segments mostly emarginate, connected by wing along rachis; sori 5—12-sporangiate Segments densely tomentose when young, somewhat less so with age; texture rigid; emarginate character of pinnules constant; sori mostly 8-sporangiate or less. D. emarginata. Segments glabrous or near tly so; texture chartaceous; eMarginate character of pinnules not constant; sori usually 12-sporangiate D. linearis. Ty pinnae wanting; segments not emarginate, nearly or uite free; rachis scaly; veins mostly once forked; sori 2-5- Sporangiate, D. owhyhensis. Dickanopreris Ghauca (Thunb.) Underw. Bull. Torrey Club 34: . 249. 1907 sain glaucum Thunb.; Houtt. Nat. Hist. 14:177. 1783. “rensia glauca Sw. Sv. Vet.-Akad. Handl. Il. 2§:177. 1804. 240 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS Gleichenia longissima Blume, Enum. Pl. 250. 1828. Mertensia pinnata Kunze, Anal. Pterid. 6. 1837. Mertensia excelsa J. Sm. Lond. Jour. Bot. 2: 381. 1843. Gleichenia glauca Hook. Sp. Fil. 1:4. 1844. Hicriopteris speciosa Presl, Epim. 27. 1849. TYPE LOCALITY: Java. DisTRIBuTION: China, Japan, Malaysia, Tropical Australia, and Polynesia. ILLUSTRATION: Hook. Sp. Fil. pl. 3B. 1844. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Maui, Bailey C; Molokai, Hillebrand B; Oahu, Hillebrand B; Macrae B; Robinson sor V; 504 V; Kauai, Hiullebrand B, C. D. glauca is found in fruit somewhat rarely. Both the bipin- nate species are less common than D. linearis and grow at higher elevations. DICRANOPTERIS GLABRA (Brack.) Underw. Bull. Torrey Club 34: 249. 1907 Mertensia glabra Brack. Fil. U.S. Expl. Exp. 292. 1854- TYPE LOCALITY: Hawaiian Islands. DISTRIBUTION: Above 600 m. on wet mountain ote Hawaiian Islands. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Oahu, Hillebrand B; Robinson 55 V; Kauai, Forbes 107 BM; Heller 2613 C; Hawaiian Islands, & Herb. Eaton C Dicranopteris emarginata (Brack.) comb. nov. Mertensia emarginata Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. 297- 1854- TYPE LOCALITY: Hawaii. DISTRIBUTION: Open mountain ridges, Hawaiian Islands. ILLUsTRATIONS: Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. pl. 42-f 1854. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Oahu, Robinson 40 Islands, Hillebrand K; Wilkes Expedition C.; ex Herb. Ea Lindley C 1b. V; Hawaiiat ton Ci DICRANOPTERIS LINEARIS (Burm.) Underw. Bull. Tortey Club 34: 250. 1907 Polypodium lineare Burm. Fl. Ind. 235. 1768. Polypodium dichotomum Thunb. FI. Jap. 338. 1784: ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HawatlAN IsLANDs 241 Mertensia dichotoma Willd. Sv. Vet.-Akad. Handl. II. 25: 167. 1804. Dicranopteris dichotoma Bernh. Neues Jour. Schrad. 17: 38. 1806. Gleichenia linearis Clarke, Trans. Linn. Soc. II. 1: 428. 1880. TYPE LOCALITY: Java. DISTRIBUTION: Forming thickets at from 200-1,000 m. eleva- tion, tropical countries. ILLUsTRATIONS: Burm. Fl. Ind. pl. 07: f. 2. (1768s i numb. Fl. Jap. pl. 37. 1784. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Hillebrand B; Robinson 240 V; Maui, Bailey B, C; Robinson 316 V; Oahu, Didrichsen 3772 C; Forbes BM; Robinson 24 V; Kauai, Forbes 80 BM; Heller 2761 C; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 1 C; Wilkes Expedition C; ex Herb. Eaton C; ex Herb. Mt. Holyoke College C. Dicranopteris owhyhensis (Hook.) comb. nov. Gleichenia owhyhensis Hook. Sp. Fil. 1: 9. 1844. Mertensia hawaiiensis Brack. Fil. U.S. Expl. Exp. 295. 1854. Gleichenia hawatiensis Hilleb. F l. Haw. Is. 544. 1888. TYPE LocaLity: Byron Bay, Oahu, Hawaiian Islands. DistRIBUTION: At elevations of 1,500-2,000 m., rare; Hawai- lan Islands, SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Maui, Bailey C; Hillebrand B; Oahu, Baldwin 9B; Hillebrand B; Heller C; Kauai, Hillebrand B; Robin- 7m 407 V; 410 V; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 2 C; Macrae B, C. The name is derived from an early spelling of Oahu; the type Was collected upon this island by Macrae. 3. CYATHEACEAE Mainly arboreous plants of the humid elevated regions of the Topics; reotstock stout and erect or decumbent; leaves cespitose, oy twice or more pinnate, rarely simple, articulate or non- nt aoe leaf blades mostly one to several meters long; sori dusiate- orsal or terminal upon the veins, indusiate or non-in- ’ SPorangia usually numerous, ovoid, the annulus complete . i i . . ne Tan ad with or without a definite orifice; dehiscence hori- The family Cyatheaceae is represented in the Hawaiian flora 942 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS by a single genus, Cibotium, which forms a conspicuous part of the fern forest in the region of the active volcano Kilauea, on Hawaii, and appears above 600 m. elevation on the other islands, though, doubtless, its size is greatest in the forests below Kilauea, in Puna and Olaa. Three species are associated in this locality, and these apparently intergrade. Trunks of Cibotium have been used to make fences by placing them side by side like a palisade, and as they regenerate their crowns they make a most effective enclosure. On Mr. Snow's estate at Glenwood, 22 miles from Hilo, walks have been made of boards sawed from fern trunks, probably of C. Menziesit, which contain some boards 1 m. in width. On this estate and on the Hitchcock place adjoining, C. Menziesii growing in the open has attained a height of 16 m. or more. The wooly scales at the base of the leafstalks, known comr mercially as pulu, were used formerly to a considerable extent as stuffing for mattresses, and the pulu-gatherers were ruthless in their destruction of old trees to obtain this commodity. Now, however, pulu has fallen into disuse and is no longer exported. CIBOTIUM Kaulf. Jahrb. Pharm. 21: 53. 1820 Pinonia Gaud. Ann. Sci. Nat. 3: 507. 1824. Rootstock usually arborescent with numerous large, chafty scales at the apex; leafstalks not articulate; blades deltoid-ovate, bipinnate to quadripinnate, the pinnules stalked; sor! valvate capsules, consisting of a cuplike outgrowth from the margin ° the lobe of the pinnule and the indusium, which forms a lidlit covering. Sporangia stalked. The leaves of all Hawaiian species are tripinnate. Type species: Cibotium Chamissoi Kaulf. Caudex 4-8 m. high; leafstalk 3-4 m. long, covered with soft, brown scales atthe base, with black, hairlike scales above; blades 3-4 m. long; sinuses between the segments of the pinnules broad, shallow, often margined with sori; fertile veins : eal ah mostly simple, usually 7 or less to a segment. C. n 3 m. high, usually about 2 m. high; leafstalk clothed at the base with soft, brownish scales, upper portion naked; blades less than 3 m. long; sinuses between segments of pinnules narrow, acute; fertile veins simple or once forked. Lower surface of blade dull glaucous, for the most part strongly chamissth tomentulose; veins 6-8 to a segment, simple or forked. C. RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN IsLANDs 243 Lower surface of blad picuously glaucous, for the most part slightly tomentulose, becoming glabrous; veins 9-10 to a seg- ment, usually 1-2-forked. C. glaucum, CipoTiuM MeEnziestt Hook. Sp. Fil. 1: 84. 1844 Dicksonia Menziesii Hook. & Baker, Syn. Fil. 49. 1866. TYPE LOCALITY: Oahu, Hawaiian Islands. DisTRIBUTION: On ground at 600-1,250 m. elevation; usually found with lehue and other hardwood trees, in a damp forest; Hawaiian Islands. ILLUSTRA : Hook. Sp. Fil. 1: pl. 29c. 1844. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Molokai, Hillebrand B, C; Oahu, Beechey K, C; Forbes BM; Robinson 707 V; Kauai, Heller 2693 C; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 5 B,C, N; Wilkes Expedition C. The ohia-lehue (Metrosideros villosa Sm.) often succeeds Cibo- tium in the forest by germinating in the crown of the fern, sending down its roots along the moist trunk and finally shutting out the light entirely, so that in time the fern dies and the lehue is left with what is apparently a hollow and fissured trunk. Heller 2590 may be a cross between C. Menziesii and C. Chamissoi, in which more of the dominant characters belong to the former than to the latter. Cigotium Cuamissor Kaulf. Berl. Jahrb. Pharm. 21: 53. 1820 P inonia Splendens Gaud. Ann. Sci. Nat. 3: 507. 1824. Dicksonia Splendens Desv. Prod. 318. 1827. Cibotium pruinatum Mett. in Kuhn, Linnaea 36: 150. 1869. - TYPE Locauity: Oahu. : DistriBuTIon: On the wooded slopes of mountains, at eleva- ons of 600-1,200 m., Hawaiian Islands. lLLusrRations: Kaulf. Enum. pl. 1. f. 14. 1824; Hook. Ie. Pl. 17: pl. 1603. 1886. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Lichtenthaler N; Oahu, Beechey B; Bennett B; Chamisso B; Gaudichaud B; Heller 2898 C; Robin- Mopo. Saford 875 N; Kauai, Heller 2600 C, K; Knudsen 36 B; oe pe Hillebrand B, C; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin B; Gaudi- B,C; Lydgate B; Wilkes Expedition C, N. 244 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS C1BoTIUM GLAUCUM (J. E. Smith) Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. 108. 1841 Dicksonia glauca J. E. Smith, in Rees, Cyc. 11. 1819. TYPE LOCALITY: Hawaiian Islands. DISTRIBUTION: Somewhat rare, on moist, wooded mountain slopes and wet flats, at 300-900 m. elevation. ILLustTRATIONS: Hook. Sp. Fil. 1: pl. 29A. 1841; Bed. Ferns Brit. Ind. pl. 83. 1865. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Beratz B; Lydgate B; Robin- son 201 V; 207 V; Maui, Bailey C; Molokai, Hillebrand B; C; Oahu, Beechey C, K; Diell C, K; Baldwin N; Kauai, Forbes 34 BM; 356 BM; Heller 2818; Knudsen B; Lydgate B; Mann & Brigham 543 N; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin ga B; 4 Ci & Herb. Mt. Holyoke College C; ex Herb. John Donnell Smith N; Wilkes Expedition 1 C. 4. HYMENOPHYLLACEAE Delicate ferns, the leaf blades seldom more than one layer of cells in thickness except at the veins; found in very moist locali- ties, usually above 500 m. in elevation in the tropics. Rootstock slender, creeping or suberect; leaf blades much divided; sporangia sessile upon a filiform, usually elongated receptacle within an urn- shaped, tubular, or two-lipped marginal indusium, or protruding beyond it; annulus complete, transverse, opening vertically. Receptacle filiform, projecting beyond the indusium. 1. Trichomanes. Receptacle shorter than the indusium, or barely protruding. 2. Hymenophyllum 1. TRICHOMANES L. Sp. Pl. 1097. 1753 Rootstock slender, creeping, or suberect; leaves pinnatifid to tripinnate; veins free; sori terminal upon the veins; indusium tubular or urn-shaped, occasionally 2-lipped; sporangia sessile arranged spirally upon the receptacle, which usually projects from the margin of the leaf like a trichome. Type species: Trichomanes crispum L. * m. Stem erect; leafstalk and midrib fibrillose; plants mostly terrestrial. T. Bauerian : Stem creeping; plants mostly epiphytic, smooth « or nearly so. a. Leaf palmate or orbicular, less than 2 cm T.? arvult Leaf not palmate nor orbicular, more than 2 cm. high. E | : { : 4 . ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN IsLANDs 245 Leaf light green, less than 6 cm. high, lanceolate or oblong- lanceolate. . I. humile. Leaf dark green, more than 6 cm. high. Leaf deltoid. T. cyrtotheca. Leaf irregular in outline, usually narrowing below. _T. radicans. TRICHOMANES BAUERIANUM Endl. Prod. FI. Nort. 17. < 1833 Trichomanes apiifolium Presl, Hym. 16: 44. 1843. Trichomanes eminens Presl, Hym. 16: 44. 1843. Trichomanes myrioplazium Kunze, Bot. Zeit. 4: 477. 1846. Trichomanes metfolium Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. 259. 1854. TYPE LOCALITY unknown. DIstRIBUTION: On ground in wet forests; Polynesia. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Beratz B: Wilkes Expedition B, C; Molokai, Hillebrand B; Maui, Robinson 381 V; Oahu, Forbes BM; Macrae B: Robinson 507 V; Kauai, Heller 2179 B; 2741 B; Johnson B; Remy 51 B; Robinson 469 V. The bilabiate form of the indusium of T. Bauerianum Endl. gives the appearance of Hymenophyllum to the young leaves, but the projecting vein with its attached sporangia and the urn-shaped form of the mature sporangium place the species in the genus Trichomanes. TRICHOMANES PARVULUM Poir. in Lam. Encyc. 8: 33. 1808 Trichomanes stbthorpioides Gaud. Bory in Willd. Sp. Pl. 5: 498. I8Io Trichomanes bifolium Bl. Enum. Pl. 223. 1828. Trichomanes minutum Bl. Enum. Pl. 224. 1828. Trichomanes Saxifragoides Presl, Hym. 39. 1843. Gonocormus saxtfragoides v. d. Bosch, Hym. 9. 1861. TYPE Locatity unknown. Distrigution: Somewhat rare, on tree trunks in moist woods 1,000 m. elevation; Polynesia. USTRATION: Hook. Sp. Fil. r: 39. 1844. oo EXAMINED: Maui, Bailey C; Oahu, Forbes 1083 ee oe 53 V; 502 V; 509 V; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin ' 107 C; Hillebrand B; C; Wilkes Expedition C. Serta green fronds appressed upon the tree trunks or upon S where water is trickling over them, make a beautiful at ILL 246 ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS matted covering, which resembles a liverwort in general appear- ance. . TRICHOMANES HUMILE Forst. Prod. 84. 1786 Trichomanes minutulum Gaud. Freyc. Voy. Bot. 377. pl. 12. f. 2. 1827. Didymoglossum humile Presl, Hym. 23. 1843. Trichomanes Endlicherianum Presl, Abh. Béhm. Ges. 5: 333. 1848: Trichomanes Draytonianum Brack. Fil. U.S. Expl. Exp. 252. 1854. TYPE LOCALITY: Society Islands. DistRIBUTION: On tree trunks in moist woods; Polynesia, Java, Formosa, New Zealand, Australia. ILLustRATIONS: Presl, Epim. 10. pl. 54. 1849; v. d. Bosch, Hym. Java pl. rz. 1861; Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. #1. 36. 1854. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Maui, Bailey C; Oahu, Robinson 55 V; 99 V; Kauai, Heller 2556 C; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 108 C; Remy 83 B; Wilkes Expedition 9 B, C. TRICHOMANES CYRTOTHECA Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 636. 1888 TYPE LOCALITY: Kahana, Oahu. : DiIsTRIBUTION: Above 600 m. elevation; Hawaiian Islands, 10 wet woods. ILLUSTRATION: PLATE Ig. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Maui, Bailey C; Oahu, Hillebrand B; Robinson 107 V; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin B; Baldwin 106 C- The color and size of the leaves are similar in T. cyrtotheca and T. radicans and both grow in deep wet forests, but they may be distinguished by the deltoid form of the leaf blade, the curving of the sori, and the smaller size of the rootstock of the former and the irregular outline, blunt pinnae with sori subimmersed, thicker rhizome of the latter. I TRICHOMANES RADICANS Sw. Jour. Bot. Schrad. 1800°: 97: 180 Trichomanes speciosum Willd. Sp. Pl. 5: 514. 1810. Trichomanes davallioides Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. 3- 1827: Trichomanes sandvicense v. d. Bosch, Ned. Kr. Arch. 5°: 165- 1861- TYPE LOCALITY: West Indies. DistRiBuTION: Tropical countries, Ireland, Wales. ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN IsLANDs 247 ILLUSTRATION: PLATE 20. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Robinson 250 V; 270V; 200 V; Maui, Bailey C; Robinson 310 V; Oahu, Didrichsen C; Forbes 05 BM; Heller 2119 C; Macrae B; Robinson 76 V; 108 V; Kauai, Hillebrand B; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin roga B, C; Bennett B; Gaudichaud B; Lydgate B; Remy 52 B; Wilkes Expedition 12 B, C (cotype of T. sandvicense v. d. Bosch). Sir James E. Smith says ‘‘Few plants of any country have caused more enquiry or more diversity of opinion than this fern,” and the variations in the Hawaiian forms of this species might add much material for such discussion. 2. HYMENOPHYLLUM J. E. Smith, Mém. Acad. Turin 5: 418. 1793 Rootstock slender, creeping; leaves pinnatifid to bipinnatifid, glabrous or hairy; sori terminal upon the veins; indusium bi- labiate, formed by the division of the tissue of the margin of the leaf; receptacle seldom exserted. Type species : Hymenophyllum tunbridgense (L.) Sm. Stem upright; leaves tufted, lanceolate; leafstalk clothed with red- dish hairs. Stem creeping; leaves not tufted. , Leaves glabrous, the apexes usually curving downward. H, recurvum. Leaves hairy, the apexes vertical. Leaves rhomboid or obtuse-ovate, covered with reddish H. Baldwiniti. brown stellate hairs. H. obtusum. Leaves lanceolate, bearing simple hairs on margin and veins. H. lanceolatum. HYMENornyttum Batpwintt D. C. Eaton, Bull. Torrey Club 6: 293. 1879 TYPE Locatity: Oahu. Distrigution: On trees, above 800 m. elevation, in a lateral Valley of Nuuanu, which leads up to Konahuanui. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: ex Herb. D. C. Eaton (cotype) C; Baldwin 110 C; Baldwin V. HYMENOPHYLLUM RECURVUM Gaud. Voy. Freyc. Bot. 376. 1832 TYPE Locatiry: Maui, Hawaiian Islands. a eenoN: On trees above 600 m. elevation, Hawaiian Slands, . Q48 ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS ILLUSTRATION: Hook. Sp. Fil. 1: pl. 37. 1844. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Robinson 209 V; 215 V; Maui, Bailey C; Robinson 311 V; 317 V; 326 V; Oahu, Diell C; Heller 2603 C; 2620 C; Hillebrand C; Macrae B; Robinson 39 V; 508 V; Forbes BM; Kauai, Forbes 113 BM; Hillebrand 152 B; Robinson 835 V; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 102 C; Beechey C; Gaudichaud 195 B; Lindley C; Wilkes Expedition 15 B, C. Hymenophyllum recurvum is a very graceful fern, which forms a light green covering upon the tree trunks and wet rocks in deep, shady glens. HyMENOPHYLLUM optusuUM Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. 109. 1832 TYPE LOCALITY: Oahu. DIsTRIBUTION: On trees, in wet forests, Hawaiian Islands; also reported from New Guinea and Cape of Good Hope. ILLUSTRATION: Hook. Sp. Fil. 1: pl. 37D. 1844. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Molokai, Hillebrand B; Oahu, Heller 2229 C; 2910 C; Robinson 10 V; 37 V; 503 V; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 104 C; Wilkes Expedition C. HYMENOPHYLLUM LANCEOLATUM Gaud. Voy. Freyc. Bot. 109 1832 TYPE LOCALITY: Hawaiian Islands. DIsTRIBUTION: On tree trunks in Hawaiian Islands. ILLUSTRATION: Hook. Sp. Fil. pl. 34. 1844. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Robinson 273 V; 278 Vv; M Bailey C; Oahu, Heller 2256 C; 2705 C; Macrae B; Robinson 7° V; 04 V; 96 V; 125 V; Kauai, Robinson 404 V; 406 V; 830 Vi Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 103 C; Douglas B; Gaudichaud Bi Wilkes Expedition B; C. The fronds soon become bronze in color, partly from a hairiness of their surface, by which, as well as by their size, they are easily distinguished from H. recurvum. The following specimens are smaller than the others and beat only marginal hairs: Heller 2705, Robinson 302, 404, 406, 83 aui, . de | OR MEE re TP Been I eee eRe oe SMO rey rey A es NR ee ee INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE (1910-1912) e aim of this Index is to include all current botanical literature written by Americans, published in America, or based upon American material ; the word Amer- ica being used in the broadest sense. a wholly to botany. Reprints are not mentioned unless they differ from the original in some important particular. If users of the Index will call the attention of the editor o errors or omissions, their kindness will be appreciated. This Index is reprinted monthly on cards, and furnished in this form to subscribers at the rate of one cent for each card, Selections of cards are not permitted ; each subscriber must take all cards published during the term of his subscription, Corre- spondence relating to the card issue should be addressed to the Treasurer of the Torrey Botanical Club Allard, H. A. Preliminary observations concerning natural crossing in cotton. Proc. Am. Breed. Assoc. 6: 156-170. 1911. [Illust.] J. C. Cultures of Uredineae in 1911. Mycologia 4: 49-65. Mr 1912, Babcock, E. B. Walnut-oak hybrid experiments. Proc. Am. Breed. Assoc. 6: 138-140. 1911. Ball,C.R. The breedi 6: 192-202, IQII. Balls, W. L, Mendelian inheritance in hybrids of upland and Egyptian cotton. Proc. Am. Breed. Assoc. 6: 254-267. I9QII. » M. F, Variation of varieties of beans in their susceptibility to anthracnose, Phytopathology 1: 190-195. pl. 29. D 1911. Beckwith, i. Di Root and culm infections of wheat by soil fungi in : North Dakota. Phytopathology 1: 169-176. D 1911. Bi m ©. The ferns and flowering plants of Nantucket—IX. : Bull. Torrey Club 39: 69-80. 9 Mr 1912. mC: He A new locality for-Asplenium ebenoides. Am. Fern ‘ Jour. ro: 24,25. 29 F 1912. Tand, A. Andropus, eine neue Gattung der Hydrophyllaceae. Repert. Sp. Nov. ro: 281. 31 Ja 1912. 249 ng of grain sorghums. Proc. Am. Breed. Assoc. 250 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Brand, A. Die Hydrophyllaceen der Sierra Nevada. Univ. Calif. Publ. Bot. 4: 209-227. 9 Mr 1912. Includes descriptions of many new varieties. Brand,A. Namation, eine neue Gattung der Scrophulariaceae. Repert. Sp. Nov. 10: 280, 281. 31 Ja 1912. Briggs, L. J.. & Shantz,H.L. The wilting coefficient for different plants and its indirect determination. U.S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 230: 5-83. 3 F 1912. Britton, E. G. Leucodontopsis Cardot (Leucodoniopsis R. & C.). Bryologist 15: 26-28. f. 1-4. Mr 1912. Britton, E.G. Notes on the mosses of Jamaica. Bryologist 15: 28, 29. Mr 1912. Britton, N.L. Charles Finney Cox. Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 13: 21-23: F 1912. [Illust.] Brown, N. E. Cereus Silvestrii. Curt. Bot. Mag. IV. 8: pl. 8420. Mr 1912. A native of Argentine Republic. Brown, W. H. The relation between soil moisture content and the conditions of the aerial environment of plants at the time of wilting. Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ. 1912: 136-138. F 1912. Preliminary abstract. Bues, C. Apuntes sobre el triangulo formado por los rios Perene, Tulumayo y Pampa Hermosa. Bol. Soc. Geog. Lima 20: 451-459: 1910. [Map.] Buffum, B. C. Effect of environment on plant breeding. Proc. Am. Breed. Assoc. 6: 212-222. f. 1-8. I9gI1. Clements, F. E. Proposals for a system of tree breeding. Proc. Am Breed. Assoc. 6: 275-281. 1911. : Coker, W. C., & Hyman, O. W. Thraustotheca clavate. Mycologia 4 87-90. pl. 63. Mr 1912. Cook, M. T., & Taubenhaus, J. J. Trichoderma Kéningi the cau disease of sweet potatoes. Phytopathology 1: 184-189- pl. 271 D 19011. ; Copeland, E.B. Cyatheae species novae orientales. Philip. Jour. 5c 6: (Bot.) 359-364. D 1911. Includes descriptions of 13 new species. ‘cal Dachnowski, A. The relation of Ohio bog vegetation to the chemic nature of peat soils. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 53-62- 9 Mr mee Dallimore, W. Notes on trees suitable for experimental forestry: American conifers. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. 1912: 75-85- 1912. Darling, C. A. Key to the wild herbs flowering in the spring. Litas 12: 46-65. 12 Mr 1912. se of 4 28. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 251 Deane, W. Linum catharticum in Maine. Rhodora 14: 56. 5 Mr Dixon, H. N. Note on mosses growing unattached. Bryologist 15: at, 42.. Mr 1912. Dorsey, M. J. Variation in the floral structures of Vitis. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 37-52. pl. 1-3. 9 Mr 1912. Edgerton, C. W. Flower infection with cotton boll rots. Phyto- pathology 2: 23-27. pl. 2. F 1912. Emerson, R. A. Latent colors in corn. Proc. Am. Breed. Assoc. 6: 233-237. 1911. Evans, A.W. A new Frullania from Florida. Bryologist 15: 22-26. jf 1912. Frullania Rappii sp. nov. Fedde, F. Neue Arten aus der Verwandtschaft der Corydalis aurea Willd. von Nord-Amerika. Repert. Sp. Nov. 10: 311-315. 31 Ja 1912; Il. Repert. Sp. Nov. 10: 364-365. 20F 1912; III. Repert. Sp. Nov. 10: 379, 380. 15 Mr 1912. Includes descriptions of 8 new species. Felt, E. P. The identity of the better known midge galls. Ottawa Nat. 25: 164-167. F 1912; 181-188. Mr 1912. Fernald, M. L. Two rare Junci of eastern Massachusetts. Rhodora 14: 55, 56. 5 Mr 1912. Fink, B. Injury to Pinus Strobus caused by Cenangium abietis. Phy- topathology 1: 180-183. pl. 26. D 1911. Fletcher, E. F. Astragalus contortuplicatus on wool-waste. Rhodora 14:56. 5 Mr 1912. Flynn, N. F. A third station in Vermont for Cyperus Houghtonii. Rhodora 14: 40. 1 F 1912. Forbes, C. N. New Hawaiian plants—III. Occasional Papers, B. P. Bishop Mus. §$: 1-12. 1912. -[Illust.] Clermontia tuberculata, Cyanea undulata, Hibiscus Kahilii, Kadua fluviatilis, and Rollandia parvifolia spp. nov. Forbes, C. N. Preliminary observations concerning the plant invasion n some lava flows of Mauna Loa, Hawaii. Occasional Papers, B. P. Bishop Mus. 5: 15-23. 1912. Foster, A.S. Some botanical observations in the mountains of Wash- mgton. Plant World 14: 222-227. f. -3. S 1911. [Mr 1912.] er, C. S. Report of a trip to western Cuba in the fall of 1910. Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Record 1: 1-7. f. 1-5. Ja 1912. A. W. Suggestions for an undergraduate course in plant breeding. Proc. Am. Breed. Assoc. 6: 352-356. I911. Boe. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Gilbert, A. W. Suggestive laboratory exercises for a course in plant breeding. Am. Breed. Mag. 2: 196-212. f. 1-5. S IQII. Gorham, F. P. Some biochemical problems in bacteriology. Science II. 35: 357-362. 8 Mr 1912. Greene, E.L. Accessions to Apocynum. Leaflets 2: 165-189. 13 Mr Describes 42 new species in A pocynum. Greene, E. L. New species of Trautvetteria. Leaflets 2: 190-193. 13 Mr 1912. Includes descriptions of 6 new species. Greene, E. L. Some Erigeron segregates. Leaflets 2: 193-196. 13 Mr 1912, Grout, A. J. Mosses as a factor in land conservation. Bryologist 15: 37~ Mr- 1912. ; Giissow, H.T. Preliminary note on “ silver leaf ” disease of fruit trees. Phytopathology 1: 177-179. pl. 25. -L) Aght. » H. M. New and noteworthy Californian plants—I. Univ. Calif. Publ. Bot. 4: 195-208. 8 Mr 1912. [Illust.] Includes several new varieties and combinations. Halsted, B. D. Geometrical figures in plant breeding. Am. Breed. Mag. 2: 217-220. f. 1,2. § IQIt. Harding, H. A. The constancy of certain physiological characters in the classification of bacteria. N. Y, Agr. Exp. Sta. Tech. Bull. 13: 3-41. Je 1910. Harris, J. A. Observations on the physiology of seed development it Staphylea. Beih. Bot. Centralb. 28: 1-16. 25 Ja 1912. Hartley, C. P., Brown, E. B., Kyle, C. H., & Zook, L. L. Crossbreeding corn. U.S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 218: 5-72. 17 F 1912. Hartz, N., & Kruuse, C. The vegetation of Northeast Greenland 69° 25’ lat..N.—75° lat. N. Meddelelser om Grénland 30: 335-43" JOr-282 151. ; Hawkins, L.A. The effect of certain chlorides, singly and combined in pairs, on the activity of malt diastase. Johns Hopkins Univ. Cire. 1912: 144, 145. F 1912. (Preliminary abstract.) ; Heald, F. D. Notes on new or little-known plant diseases in North America for the year 1910. Phytopathology 2: 5-22. F 1912 Howe, R.H. Further notes on the North American distribution of the genus Usnea. Bryologist 15: 29, 30. Mr 1912. I Jessen, K. The structure and biology of arctic flowering plants’ Ranunculaceae. Meddelelser om Grénland 36: 335-440: f 56 1911, ge ae te som Oa ey ae gree Sa eae ne re aan INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 253 Johnson, D. S., & York, H. H. The relation of plants to tide levels. A study of the distribution of marine plants at Cold Spring Harbor. Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ. IgI2: 116. F 1912, Jones, W.R. The development of the vascular structure of Dianthera americana L. Johns Hopkins Univ. Cire. 1912: 141-143. F 1912, jones, W. R. The digestion of starch in germinating peas. Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ. I9I2: 139, 140. F 1912, (Preliminary ab- stract.) Jostmann, A. Pilocereus scoparius Pos. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 29, 30. 15 F 1912, Kirk, G. L, Solidago calcicola in Vermont. Rhodora 14: 54, 55. 5 Mr rorz2., Lewis, I. M. A black knot disease of Dianthera americana L. My- cologia 4: 66-70. pl. 58-61. Mr 1912. Bagniesiella Diantherae Sp. nov. described. Livingston, B. E. Paper atmometers for studies in evaporation and Plant transpiration, Plant World 14: 281-288. i. 2-9 19011. 2.] Livingston, B. E, The resistance offered by leaves to transpirational Water loss. Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ. 1912: 121-123. F 1912. (Preliminary abstract.) Livingston, B.E. A study of the relation between summer evaporation Intensity and centers of plant distribution in the United States. Plant World 14: 205-229. f. 1-3. S$ 1911. [Mr 1912.] Livingston, B. E., & Brown, W. H. Relation of the daily march of ‘ranspirafion to variations in the water content of foliage leaves. ohns Hopkins Univ. Circ. 1912: 131-133. F 1912. (Preliminary abstract.) vingston, B. E., & Esta brook, A. H. Observations on the degree of stomatal movement i n certain plants. Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ. : agra: 134,135. F 1912. (Preliminary abstract.) + & Shreve, F. The relation between climatic con- . nd plant distribution in the United States. Johns Hopkins niv. Circ. rgx2: 129, 130. F 1912, Lloyd, F, E. The association of tannin with an emulsion colloid in the acorn (Quercus laurifolia Michx.). Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ. 1912: 125-193. F ro12, yd, F. kB, Tannin-colloid combinations in the persimmon. Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ. 1912:-124. F 1912. Publ ®, R. A. Tolerance of Eucalyptus for alkali. Univ. Calif. - Agr. Exp. Sta, Bull. 225: 247-316. f. 1-17. O rott. ditions a 254 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Lutman, B. F. The covering power of the precipitation membranes of Bordeaux mixture. Phytopathology 2: 32-41. f. 1-6. F 1912. Macbride, T. H. Notes on Iowa saprophytes—I. Geaster minimus Schw. and its relations. Mycologia 4: 84-86. pl. 62. Mr 1912. Geaster juniperinus sp. nov. described. Maxon, W.R. A new fern from Panama. Am. Fern Jour. 2: 21, 22. 29 F 1912. Includes description of Dicranopteris Williamsii sp. nov. Maxon, W. R. A new name for a Hawaiian fern. Am. Fern Jour. 2: 19, 20. 29 F 1912. Polypodium Saffordii Maxon nom. nov Merrill, E. D. The Philippine species of Begonia. Philip. Jour. Sci. 6: (Bot.) 369-406. D 1o11. Includes descriptions of 33 new species. Metcalf, H., & Collins, J. F. The present known distribution of the chestnut bark disease. Science II. 35: 421. 15 Mr 1912. Meyer, R. Weiteres iiber Echinocactus myriostigma S.-D. und dessen Standortsvarietaten. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 18. 15 F 1912. Mitchell, G. F. The cultivation and manufacture of tea in the United States. U.S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 234: 5-40. pl. 1,2 +f.1-% 15 F 1912. Includes description and illustrations of the tea plant, Thea sinensis. Munson, T. V. Single-character vs. tout-ensemble breeding in grape Proc. Am. Breed. Assoc. 6: 183-188. 1911. Murrill, W. A. The Agaricaceae of tropical North America—V. My- cologia 4: 72-83. Mr 1912. Includes descriptions of 21 new species in Mycena (2), Pluteolus (1), Conocybe (1), Naucoria (12), Cortinarius (1), Inocybe (1), and Hebeloma (3). Murrill, W. A. The chestnut canker convention. Jour. N. Y- Bot. Gard. 13: 41-44. Mr 1912. Murrill, W. A. Polyporaceae and Boletaceae of the Pacific Coast. Mycologia 4: 91-100. Mr 1912. ‘ Includes descriptions of 12 new species in Coriolus (1), Sculiger (1), SPo™ pene (1), Tyromyces (5), Boletus (1), and Ceriomyces (3). Nash, G. V. The Letchworth Park arboretum. Jour. N. Y- a Gard. 13: 39-41. Mr 1912. Oliver, G. W. New methods of plant breeding. Proc. Assoc. 6: 11-20. f. 1-6. 1911. Ostenfeld, C. H., & Paulsen, O. Marine plankton from the ee Greenland Sea (W. of 6° W. long. and N. of 73° 30’ N. lat.) collect during the ‘“ Danmark Expedition”—IV. General remarks 0? microplankton. Meddelelser om Grénland 43: 321-336. de Am. Breed: | as Ce ee ee ee eee ok ee eee a INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 255 Owen, M. L. Frederick William Batchelder. Rhodora 14: 41-45. 5 Mr ro12. Palmer, T. C. Concerning Navicula socialis. Proc. Delaware Co. (Pa.) Inst. Sci. 6: 115-120. 15 Mr 1912. Paulsen, O. Marine plankton from the East-Greenland Sea (W. of 6° W. long. and N. of 73° 30’ lat.) collected during the “‘ Dan- mark Expedition” 1906-1908—III. Peridiniales. Meddelelserom Grénland 43: 303-318. f. F170 108%. Pember, F. T. The Colorado desert for ferns. Am. Fern Jour. 2: 12-15. 29 F 1g12. Phelps, 0. P. A plea for fern protection. Am. Fern JOar.. 2:32; 23, 29 F 1912. Piper, C. V. Agricultural varieties of the cowpea and immediately related species. U. S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 220: 5-160. bl. I-12. 29 F 1012, [Prain, D.] Brunfelsia undulata. Curt. Bot. Mag. IV. 8: pl. 8422. A plant from the West Indies. Quehl, L. Mamillaria Mainiae Kath. Brand. Monats. Kakteenk, 22: 19. 15 F 1912. [Illust.] Quehl, L. Mamillaria Scheeri Miihlenpf. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 20- 24. 15 F rgq2. Rabak, F. Wild volatile-oil plants and their economic importance: I—black sage: II—wild sage; I1I—swamp bay. U. S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull, 235: 5-37. f. 1-6. 30 Ja 1912. Ramona Stachyoides, Artemisia frigida, and Persea pubescens. in, W. H. Sclerotinia Panacis sp. nov. the cause of a root rot of Sinseng, Phytopathology 2: 28-31. pl. 3. F 1912. [Illust.] Reiche, K Ein Friihlingsausflug in das Kiistengebiet der Atacama (Chile). Bot. Jahrb. 4s: 340-353. f. 1-7. 21 F 1911. e mche, KE. Instrucciones para estudios fitogeograficos en México. An. Inst. Méd, Nac. Nextamalxochitl. An. Inst. Méd. Nac. 12: 12-14. bl. 1. 912 é Ranunculys Petiolaris, » K. Nicandra bhysalodes. An. Inst. Méd. Nac. 12: 16, 17. ae 314. 1912, binson, C. B. Philippine bryophytes and lichens. Bryologist 15: 32, 33. Mr ror, 256 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE [Presented at S.M.S. meeting, Washington, D. C., December 28, r911.] Rolfe, R. A. Stanhopea peruviana. Curt. Bot. Mag. IV. 8: pl. 8417. F 1912. Rosenstock, E. Filices costaricenses—II. Repert. Sp. Nov. 10: 274- 280. 31 Ja 1912. Eleven new species described. Rugg, H. G. Random notes on Bermuda ferns. Am. Fern Jour. 2: 16-18. 29 F 1912. Rydberg, P. A. List of plants collected on the Peary Arctic Expedition of 1905-1906 and 1908-1909 with a general description of the flora of northern Greenland and Ellesmere Land. Torreya If: 249-259. 12 Ja 1912; 12: 1-11. 22 Ja 1912. Includes description of Conioselinum pumilum Rose sp. Schaffner, J. H. A revised taxonomy of the grasses. Ohio Nat. 12: 490-493. Mr 1912. Schlechter, R. Die Polychondreae ( Neottiinae Pfitz.) und ihre system- atische Einteilung. Bot. Jahrb. 45: 375-410. 21 F 1911. Seaver, F. J. The genus Lamprospora, with descriptions of two new species. Mycologia 4: 45-48. pl. 57. Mr 1912. Lamprospora tuberculata and L. areolata spp. Seaver, F. J. Studies in pyrophilous fungi—IIL. The viability of the spores of Pyronema. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 63-67. pl. 4. 9 Mr 1912. Selby, A. D. A brief handbook of the diseases of cultivated plants in Ohio. Bull. Ohio Agr. Exp. Sta. 214: 307-456 + i-vii. f- 1-106. Mr 1910. Serner, O. Besprechung der Bliiten einiger neuerer PhyllocactuS Hybriden. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 24-26. 15 F 1912. Sherman, J. W. Morels in October in Massachusetts. Rhodora ™ 53, 54: 5 ir i082. Shreve, E. B. A calorimetric method for the determination of leaf temperatures. Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ. 1912: 146-148. es et Shreve, F. Establishment behavior of the palo verde. Plant World 14: 289-296. D tort. Parkinsonia microphylla. Shull, G. H. Hybridization methods in corn breeding. Prot ae Breed. Assoc. 6: 63-72. 1911. [Illust.] Sonneberg, W. Heredity and environment. Proc. Ag Breed. Asso 6: 380-384. 1911. Smith, E. F. Woronin. Phytopathology 2: 1-4. pl. F 19s Sprague, T. A. The genus Nautilocalyx. Kew Bull. Mae Inf. 1912: 85-90. 1912. BuLit. Torrey Cius VOLUME 39, PLATE 16 Ses 2es KSeee. OES: Lae EES PS Bos ‘a T Soc KA Rmedingatsss “9 DIPLASIOLEJEUNEA PELLUCIDA (Meissn.) Schiftn. pas DIPLASIOLEJEUNEA BRACHYCLADA Evans Buti. Torrery Cius VOLUME 39. PLATE U7 DIPLASIOLEJEUNEA RUDOLPHIANA Steph BuLL. ToRREY CLUB VOLUME 39, PLATE 18 4 i \ wa ed, r i BOTRYCHIUM SUBBIFOLIATUM Brack. BULL. T Pe CLuU é TORREY CLUB VOLUME 39, PLATE I9 HAWAIIAN FERNS EX HERB. D. 0. BALDWIN by AMER. MUS. NAT, HIST. 1200. TRICHOMANES CYRTOTHECA Hilleb. BULL. TORREY CLUB VOLUME 390, PLATE 20 : Thx fee TRICHOMANES RADICANS Sw. MEMOIRS OF THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB A series of technical papers on botanical subjects, published at irregular intervals. Price $3.00 a volume. Not offered in exchange. Vol. 1, 1; not furnished separately : Bailey, Liberty Hyde. Studies of the types of various species of the genus Carex. Pages1-85. 25 My 1889. . 1, No. 2; not furnished separately : Martindale, Isaac Coml miy. Marine algae of the New Jersey coast and adjacent — me Waters of Sates Island. Pages 87-111. 24 Au ee eee ee he ee ys Vv No. 3; price, 75 cents Zoho a Spruce, Richard. // epaticae Bolivianae, in Andibus “Boliviae orientalis, annis 1885-6, acl. H. H. Ee ae. Pages 113-140. a 1890. 5 al at ram ai *, 1. 1, No. 4; price, 75 cents Sturtevant, Edward Son On seedless fruits. ee. 141-187, 30 My 1890, : Vol. 2, No. 1; not furnished separately : % Halsted, B David. Réserve food-materials in buds and et parts. . Pages fz6, lie Z,2. 108 1890. 4 PD cece No. za price, 75 cents: Vail, Anna y, llick, Charles Arthur. Contributions to tebotany of Virginia. ae te plates coe? = D 1890. Vol. 2, No. 3; not furnished separately: — Holm, Herman Theodor. Contributions to the knowled of the germination of _ Some North American pails: Pages 57-108, plates 5-19. 15 Ap 1891. Vol. 2, No. 4; price, 75 cents aes Efmer. The genus Polyga/a in North America. nest 109— ie ees Wheelock, William 152. 30 D 18091. sees Vol. 3, No 1; not furnished separately ios and Skis tg unkel, & Heller, Amos Arthur. Flora ae western North Carolina Bar comigans territo ory. Pages I-39. 20 Fy 1892. Pe aay Vi No. a ; price, $2.00: “ane & Thomas. The Paiee ciencibe North a [with illustrations of 2 eer ses Pages 25 aga soe) 15 Mr 1893. : ey. 3, No. 3; not furnished separately sae as ‘ d. ae enumeration of the pleas: collected in Bolivia by st < ae I.] Pages 1-67. 28A PS es ek tua lected i = diye : ta 2. Pages 203-274. 10 Mr-17 “Ap 1895. ee feu # ss Weil. 4, No. 4; price, 50 cents oe Stockton Arachis Aypogaea E Pages 5396, pote arts : = TOR ‘ No. 5 5 price, 75 cents: Se ae ‘The N North American Apecrican species es of cect and tre geer 1. 5; price, $3.00: es: List of dg ert and x ps ies atphyta growing loa cultivation in nortl North America, Pages 1-377. 4 D 1893-31 D 18 ; Vol. 6, No.1; price, = 25: ¥ Rusby, Henry Hurd. An enumeration * ce plants collected in Bolivia M. Miguel ce: Bang. Part 3. Peart 130. 17 N rs oO. 2; not 2a ished separa Vol. 6, N tely : Grout, Abel Joel. A revision of the North American /sofheciaceaé and ee ; nae Pages 131-210. 30 Jl 1897. ee ae Riga ale ce, 50 cen Hazen, Tracy Elliot. e life history of oe ee lacustris (Heat pluvialis). Pages i plates 86, 87 eee ae Vol. 6, No. 4". rice, 50 ¢ inderwood, Lucien Marcus. A review of the ees of ferns. proposed ae 1832, Pages in 1 D 1899. : ee 1. 6, No. 3 price, 25 cents : < otes on on lichea sstibt tion in the upper Mission pa Fink, Bruce. N Pages 285-307. 1 D — 1. 7; price, e, $3.00 Howe, Marshall A Avery. the ante and yr i ae Se BROADHURST: STRUTHIOPTERIS IN NortH AMERICA 275 Unfortunately the fertile fronds are lacking; if these Tonduz plants do not belong with pteropus, they should nevertheless be separated from polypodioides. . Without the fertile fronds it is, of course, impossible to place them with certainty. Two incomplete specimens from Costa Rica (‘‘ Foréts du Roble, volcan Frazu,”’ Pittier & Durand 4132, and U. S. National Herba- rium no. 575238, without definite locality, Wercklé) and one from Nicaragua (Omotepec, C. Wright) suggest the Tonduz plants in the breadth and texture of the lamina and in the shape of the pinnae; they lack the winged stipes, however. 8. S. Spicant (L.) Weis, Pl. Crypt. Fl. Gott. 286. 1770. Osmunda Spicant L. Sp. Pl. 1066. 1753. Acrostichum Spicant Willd. Prod. F1. Berol. 289. 1787. Blechnum Spicant J. E.Sm. Mém. Acad. Turin §: 411. 1793. Onoclea Spicant Hoffm. Deutsch. Fl. 2: 12. 1795. Osmunda borealis Salisb. Prod. 402. 1796. Acrostichum lineatum Cav. Anal. Hist. Nat. 1: 106. 1799. Asplenium Spicant Bernh. Jour. Bot. Schrad. 17997: 309. 1800. Blechnum boreale Sw. Jour. Bot. Schrad. 18007: 75. 1801. Lomaria Spicant Desv. Ges. Nat. Fr. Berl. Mag. 5: 325. I8II. Lomaria crenata Presl, Rel. Haenk. 1: Sr, 1825. Blechnum doodioides Hook. FI. Bor.-Am. 2: 263. 1840. Spicanta borealis Presl, Epim. Bot. 114. 1851. Siruthiopteris doodioides var. Trev. Atti Ist. Ven. III. 14: 571. 1869. Plants terrestial. Rhizome more or less inclined, apparently short, 7 mm. to 2 cm. thick, the scales lanceolate, 5-10 mm. long, chestnut to maroon or brown, darker and thicker toward their Sterile fronds 20-70 cm. long, of two types: (1) clustered, » Spreading, coriaceous or rigid-herbaceous ones with very short stipes and close pinnae, and (2) from the center of those ee described, taller, more or less erect, herbaceous fronds with "adh Stipes, much longer pinnae, and wider sinuses; stipes clus- en eh a apex of the rhizome, 3-27 cm. long, somewhat or not at bon so Without vestigial pinnae, variously colored, reddieh pa Ls oy ip brown, or purplish chestnut, but not bicolored ; cm. long, 2-9 cm. wide, narrowly elliptical to linear, base. shorter pad gradually reduced at the base (type G), and gradually re- the b at the apex, the pinnae often opposite near the middle or fal ase of the frond; pinnae 36-80-jugate, oblong-linear to linear- fate, the apex rounded-acute, the base prominently dilated in 276 BROADHURST: STRUTHIOPTERIS IN NORTH AMERICA the larger, more open laminae, 1-5 cm. long, 4-10 mm. wide, often opposite, especially near the base; margins entire, irregularly revolute in some of the smaller, heavier fronds only; leaf tissue membranous to coriaceous as previously described, a few of the thinner ones somewhat punctate as in S. exaltata, without scales, except rarely a few minute fibrillose ones on the rachis; veins* neither raised nor grooved, the apices but slightly or not at all glandular, vein spaces 10-15 to I cm. Sporophyls 38-120 cm. long; stipes 11-60 cm. long, often marked for a short distance by vestigial pinnae, darker than the sterile; lamina 19-60 cm. long, 4-10 cm. wide, very gradually reduced at the base and at the apex; pinnae 40-50-jugate, 2.2-5 cm. long, 2-3 mm. ide, the apex acute, with or without a contracted sterile tip I-2 mm. long, the base decidedly dilated; indusium membranous, usually entire or subentire, sometimes irregularly broken, never becom- ing lacerate; sporangia dark brown. DIstTRIBUTION: Pacific coast from California to Alaska. SPECIMENS } INCLUDED: CALIFORNIA: Humboldt County, damp shady woods, Kellogg & Hartford 1175. OREGON: Nehalum, creek banks and dry woods, Kirkwood 110. WASHINGTON: Near Tacoma, shady ravines and springs, Flett 2030. BrrtisH COLUM BIA: Revelstoke, woods, altitude 1,600 ft., Shaw 835. Stevens Pass, altitude 1,150 m., Sandberg & Leiberg 774. ALASKA: Windham Bay, Culbertson 4936. WKetchikan, near stream leading from Ketchikan Falls, Broadhurst ror. Two fronds collected by Douglas in the interior of northwesterm America (exact locality not given) formed the type of Hooker s Blechnum doodioides; the half sterile, half fertile leaves, with their occasionally forked pinnae indicate an abnormal condition, and could not be considered as characterizing a valid species. Sim ilar abnormal forms are not uncommon in other species of genus. The veining of the fertile pinnae and the short, often unconnected sori suggest Woodwardia or Doodia. The costal a are characteristic of Blechnum, but there are no Blechnums in this region. Abnormal fronds in other species often show great YEE *The veins are normally once forked; but the crenata variety is often ge forked; if the margin is deeply crenate, one main vein may have two OF three i Another variation in the veining is found in Umbach 611 from es in mish, Washington, where an apparently normal S. Spicant has anastomosing ee the lower half of many of the pinnae; the veins form one row of areolae aloné midrib, and do not branch again before reaching the margin. 7) Coe + These specimens are all in the herbarium of the New York Botanical © Tile Fone Se elle tie italian eee a eee ad Pah Fae, aa Nes SR eat ee Ret pee) nee ernie ne ee BROADHURST: STRUTHIOPTERIS IN NortH AMERICA 277 ation in the width of the sterile part of the fertile pinnae. The plants described under Blechnum doodioides therefore without doubt represent abnormal forms of SS. Spicant, which Hooker* admits is ‘‘the only Lomarioid plant im so northern a latitude’’: the general shape, the cutting, and the dark stipes support this supposition. JL. crenata Pres] (type from Vancouver Island) is described as differing from SS. Spicant in being larger, and in having acute, crenate pinnae, the lower ones deflexed and ear- shaped. These characters are found in five sheets from Wash- ington and Oregon (Howell’s collections of 1876, 1879, and 1880 and in Flett’s no. 1928); Flett’s collecting note says: “this form is rare and seems to be confined to the largest plants in the dense, mossy woods.’ The name L. Spicant, var. serratus Wall. @Ppears on some of these sheets. No further record of this name has been found. 9. S. stolonifera (Mett.) Broadh. comb. nov. Blechnum stoloniferum Mett. in herb. Meissn.; Fourn. Mex. as 113. 1872. Lomaria stolonifera Fourn. Mex. Pl. 1: 114. 3877, Lomaria Gheisbreghtii Baker; Hook. & Baker, Syn. Fil. ed. 2. 481. 1874. Spicanta Ghiesbreghtii O. Kuntze, Rev. Pl. 2: 821. 1891. Blechnum stoloniferum C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 160. 1905. Blechnum Ghiesbreghtii C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 154. 1905. Plants _terrestrial. » I-4 mm. long, yellowish brown to tobacco S II-20 cm. long;f stipes clustered, 5 mm. usually slightly angulate, without vestigial pinnae, entl » the apex rounded or obtuse, but often appar- hea acute be More o Margins enti us, Toughish in drying, never smooth as in the iia. . n 18 cm. long, ie ON 2978 BROADHURST: STRUTHIOPTERIS IN NortH AMERICA thinner fronds of S. Spicant, very finely punctate much as in S. exaltata, without scales; veins indistinct, without conspicuous glandular apices, vein spaces 10-12 to I cm. Sporophyls taller, 25-28 cm. long; stipes slender, 9-13 cm. long, reddish brown to almost black, usually shining; lamina 7-16 cm. long, abruptly reduced at the base with slight indications of vestigial pinnae or gradually reduced with the lower pinnae sterile, the apex gradually or abruptly reduced; pinnae 12-19-jugate, 1-2 cm. long, 2-3 mm. wide, falcate, with an abrupt sterile tip I-2 mm. long, the base dilated; indusium delicate, entire; sporangia tobacco brown or darker. Type: Miiller 1491, no. 61 in Meissner herbarium (Y) from Orizaba, Mexico. DistriBuTION: Known from Mexico only. SPECIMENS INCLUDED: Mexico: State of Hidalgo, Trinidad, wet banks, Pringle 8752 (N). State of Hidalgo, Barranca, below Trinidad Iron Works, 5,700 ft., Pringle 13808 (N). Chiapas, Ghiesbreght 207 (Kew; College of Pharmacy, Columbia University). The type of L. Gheisbreghtii Bak., Ghiesbreght 207, cannot be distinguished from S. stolonifera, though Christensen in his Index Filicum considers it a valid species. One or more of the taller sterile fronds in the two type numbers seen have wider sinuses, giving the lamina a slightly more open appearance than the rest of the fronds of these or of the other specimens of S. stolonifera- The College of Pharmacy specimen of Ghiesbreght 207 has also @ short, undeveloped stoloniferous shoot. : S. stolonifera differs from S. Spicant in texture, never possessing the smooth almost transparent pinnae of the more delicate spec” mens nor the coriaceous texture of the smaller fronds of S. Spican. The lamina is much smaller, and the pinnae often lie so close together that the lamina usually appears lobed rather than fully pinnate; the pinnae are never linear, and as indicated in the key, are proportionately much broader than in S. Spicant. Three pot of S. stolonifera, now in the New York Botanical Garden ©” servatories, have the shorter sterile fronds arranged in a flatt rosette at the base, one of the taller sterile fronds at an angle ° about 30 degrees, and the fertile ones erect or almost s0- anes they resemble S. Spicant; it would be interesting to know if » Spicant is ever stoloniferous. (To be concluded) fe a eee ae ee ee eee Vegetative reproduction in the New England Frullaniae ANNIE LORENZ Very little emphasis has as yet been laid upon the occurrence of adventive branches, or propagula, in the genus Frullania, perhaps for the reason that such propagula, at least in the New England species examined by the writer, offer no taxonomic dis- tinctions, as do the gemmae in Metzgeria. In any case, but few references to such propagula can be found in the previous litera- ture. Dr. Evans (’97), in his monograph on the North American Frullaniae, while he makes no reference to such propagula in his introductory remarks, describes the upright flagellate branches of F. Bolanderi Aust. but does not ascribe to them any characters of vegetative reproduction. In comparing this species with F, eboracensis Gottsche, he says: ‘‘F. eboracensis occasionally pro- duces flagella-like branches, but they are always leafy, and are a rather unusual feature of the plant’; and in the description of F. eboracensis, ‘sometimes flagelliferous.”’ However, in his Hepaticae of Puerto Rico (’02—) he describes a Variety of adventive branches, propagula and gemmae, arising from different situations upon the plant. Of these, the propagula “rising from the modified leaves of Rectolejeunea flagelliformis vans and Cheilolejeunea decidua (Spruce) Evans bear the most aos to those of the species of Frullania which are discussed ow. While a sharp distinction can hardly be made between gemmae and adventive branches or propagula, a gemma, as a rule, grows ‘0 a specific size while still united to the parent plant and germi- nates after being shed. An adventive branch, on the other hand, Whether arising from a “Brutblatt” or from some other position Re the plant, begins as an irregular mass of cells and may develop @ branch with several leaves before becoming detached. Berggren (65) describes in careful detail the propagula upon 279 280 LorENZ: REPRODUCTION IN NEW ENGLAND FRULLANIAE the leaves and lobules of Frullania fragilifolia Tayl. and figures three lobules with shoots of different ages. Schostakowitsch (’94) treats of the adventive branches of F. dilatata (L.) Dum. and Porella platyphylla together, figuring a ‘“Vorkeim” of Porella which greatly resembles that of our Frullaniae. Pearson (’02) and Macvicar (’10) refer to the remarkable caducous leaves of Frullania fragilifolia but had not observed them to be Brutblatter, although they mention the shoots on the lobules. Cavers (’03) describes the vegetative reproduction in two European species of Frullania. In F. fragilifolia Tayl. the easily detached hooded lobules give rise to leafy shoots from their marginal cells. In F. dilatata (L.) Dum. “the outer surface of the perianth in this species bears numerous irregular outgrowths, each made up of from two to five or six cells. These outgrowths may be regarded as gemmae.”’ Warnstorf (’03) describes these structures in F. dilatata in somewhat more detail, as well eum thin-walled Keimkérner upon the leaves of &@ plants, and suggests that these two types of gemmae may serve to reproduce the ? and < plants respectively. Hans Buch (’11) merely refers to the Brutblatter of F. fragili- folia without any further description. Of the eleven species of Frullania at present report New England, seven belong to the subgenus Trachycolea, Homotropantha, two to Thyopsiella, and one to Diastoloba. Upon examination, adventive branches were found in three of the species of subgenus Trachycolea, viz., F. eboracensts Gottsche, F. Brittoniae Evans, and F. riparia Hampe; as well as in F. plana Sull., the representative of subgenus Homotropantha. Some scanty material of F. inflata Gottsche and F. saxicola Aust haba examined fruitlessly, but adventive branches could probably id demonstrated with a larger supply of material. In the subgenus Thyopsiella, material of F. Asagrayan@ eee from four different states was examined, with no traces of Brut: blatter. F. Tamarisci (L.) Dum., both Nova Scotian and ar material, gave similar negative results. The same wa* let the only Diastoloba, F. Selwyniana Pearson from Maine. Z F. eboracensis Gottsche easily leads all the New England spe* ed from one to LorENZ: REPRODUCTION IN NEW ENGLAND FRULLANIAE 281 in regard to the abundance and luxuriance of its means of vegeta- tive reproduction. As the adventive branches upon all species examined precisely resemble one another, only F. eboracensis will be considered in detail and figured. Material was examined from four states, and the Brutblatter were by far the most common upon the Connecticut plants, being observed but once each upon plants from Maine and from Waterville, N. H. These observa- tions and figures have been almost entirely taken from material growing upon Juniperus in the vicinity of Dr. Hooker’s Cabin, at Farmington, Conn. Branches with deciduous leaves are frequently produced upon both 9 and # plants. These may be considered as Brutblatter, as their method of separation is schizolytic, leaving behind one row of cells and the stylus. If a branch is moistened and handled with extreme care, the Brutblatter can be seen in position, but they are excessively fragile. hether or not the production of Brutblatter is induced by drought, the cause has evidently no connection with the time of year, as plants collected in January and May from neighboring stations bore equally good Brutblatter. While Brutblatter are €qually common upon 2 and ¢ plants, the writer has not yet observed any upon plants with mature capsules, although thick- walled cells are occasional upon perichaetial bracts as well as ai underleaves, Neither were they observed upon perigonial racts, B two oo 1. Frullania eboracensis. A, leaf with rhizoids, X40. B, leaf with ts, X40. C, leaf with seventeen cell masses, X40. The leaves themselves often develop rhizoids, by the projection and lengthening of marginal cells, thus being prepared to get a old wherever the leaves happen to be shed. (Fic. 1, A.) The gemmalike masses of cells are developed from the margin 982 LORENZ: REPRODUCTION IN NEW ENGLAND FRULLANIAE or from the row or two of cells just within. A single favorable leaf may have eight or ten marginal cells in various stages of division, making quite a border, besides one or two entire shoots with more or less developed leaves. (Fic. 1, B.) The largest number of cell masses counted by the writer upon any one leaf is seventeen, but these were not all marginal. (Fic. 1, C.) A marginal cell first becomes more or less pigmented with red- brown, or rather, with burnt sienna mixed with a very little carmin lake and just a touch of black, so that it is strikingly con- trasted with the clear green of the rest of the leaf; or if upon red # plants, the color becomes still deeper and richer. The cell wall thickens, and the cell expands and projects beyond the margin to some extent. (F1G.2,A.) It first divides by a wall perpendicular to the margin, making two approximately hemispherical cells. These divide next in a plane about in line with the margin, but this is not a continuous line, so that the four resulting cells are the URE 2. A, margin of leaf with cells in various stages of division: note se cell that has been compressed by its neighbors; 250. B, further developed mass, showing triangular apical cell in center, 250. not all of quite the same size. They in turn divide in a plane about parallel to the leaf surface. One of the outer cells cuts out 4 three-sided pyramidal apical cell (1c. 2, B), and the leafy shoot arises directly from this, without having first become detach from the leaf and while the leaf is still growing upon the plant- The lobules bear, with equal frequency, cell masses and shoots either upon the top of the hood or about its mouth. (FIG. 3 A, B.) A few hoods had shoots so well developed that several of the upper leaves had hoods of their own. (Fic. 3, C-) The first leaves on the shoots are mere rudiments, bute: a ceeding leaves are increasingly developed, and underleaves 5007 | LoRENZ: REPRODUCTION IN NEW ENGLAND FRULLANIAE 283 appear. (Fic. 3, D). The largest shoots have quite the aspect of normal branches. (Fic. 3, £.) On some fresh material from Farmington, growing on young elm trees in a bog, the cell structure of the leaves differed in being thinner-walled, with less conspicuous trigones and almost no inter- mediate thickenings. This condition approaches that of F. Bo- landert Aust. of the Pacific coast, which besides its characteristic upright flagellate shoots has Brutblatter exactly like those first described for F. eboracensis. FicurE 3. A-C, hoods with shoots in different stages; D, E, leaves with well developed shoots, In F. riparia Hampe from North Pownal, Vermont, the Bruchblatter were not caducous, and the cell masses as a rule Were not marginal but arose from cells about two rows back from the margin. F. Brittoniae Evans, which is very close to the European F. dilatata, in some material from Waterville, N. H., bore cell masses and shoots upon leaves likewise not caducous. The adventive branches in F. plana Sull. are borne, not upon the oldest and more or less dirt-encrusted portions of the plant, but upon the growth of the past season. These leaves also were not caducous, neither did they produce rhizoids. The adventive branches closely resemble those of F. eboracensis, except that they are of a rather dark green instead of being pigmented with red-brown According to these observations, the production of Brutblatter . 284 LorENz: REPRODUCTION IN NEW ENGLAND FRULLANIAE is more frequent in the dioicous rather than in the autoicous species of Frullania. F. eboracensis, F. Brittoniae, and F. riparia are all dioicous, as is F. Bolanderi; while F. plana, although autoicous, is usually sterile. All the European species of Frudlania, with the exception of the recently described F. cleistostoma Schiffner & Wollny, are dioicous. The writer would express her thanks to Dr. A. W. Evans for his kind assistance; and would be glad to examine any further propag- ula-bearing material of Frullania, other than F. eboracensis. HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT. BIBLIOGRAPHY Berggren, S. Iakttagelser 6fver mossornas kénldsa fortplantning genom groddknoppar och med dem analoga bildningar. 1-33. Pt 1-4. Lund, 1865. Buch, Hans. Uber die Brutorgane der Lebermoose. Helsingfors, 1911. Cavers, F. On asexual reproduction and regeneration in Hepaticae. New Phytol. 2: 121-133, 155-165. 1903. Evans, A. W. A revision of the North American species of Frullania, a genus of Hepaticae. Trans. Conn. Acad. 10: I-39. pl. I-15. 1897. Evans, A. W. Hepaticae of Puerto Rico—I. Leptolejeunea. er Torrey Club. 29: 496. 1902; II. Drepanolejeunea. Bull. Tor Club 30: 19. 1903; IV. Odontolelejeunea, Cyclolejeunea and a nolejeunea. Bull. Torrey Club 31: 183. 1904; V. Ceratolejeuned. Bull. Torrey Club 32: 273. 1905; VI. Cheilolejeunea, we Cystolejeunea, Pycnolejeunea. Bull. Torrey Club 33: Be X. Cololejeunea, Leptocolea, Aphanolejeunea. Bull. Torrey ‘Clubs 251. I9QII. Macvicar, S. M. Distribution of Hepaticae in Scotland. Trans. Bot. Soc. of Edinburgh 25: 1-336. 1910. Pearson, W.H. Hepaticae of the British Isles. 23-35. 199?: Schostakowitsch, W, Ueber die Reproductions- und Regeneration erscheinungen bei den Lebermoosen. Flora 79: 350-354 18 Warnstorf, C. Kryptogamenflora der Mark Brandenburg ?: 273-279 Leipzig, 1903. New ferns from Tropical America MARGARET SLOSSON (WITH PLATE 23) The discovery of the two plants which are the subject of this paper, adds another species to the already vast genus of Poly- podium and one to the meager genus of Loxsomopsis. The first of these two plants was brought recently from Cuba, by Dr, J. A. Shafer, and belongs to the well-known group of Polypodium usually designated as the P. trifurcatum group. The second is taken from a large and fine collection of ferns made in Bolivia by Mr.R.S, Williams during 1901 and 1902. Thiscollection contains a number of species still to be described. The genus Loxsomopsis has been known until now by two species only, found in Costa Rica and Ecuador, respectively. It is one of the most peculiar and striking in the American tropical fern flora. Its most notable characteristic, the minute erect or de- flexed, cup-shaped or pitcher-shaped sori, with their extruding columellar receptacles beset with sporangia, suggesting minute lily bells on the margins of the leaves, can be seen from the ac- companying illustration of the species here described. This plant, apparently the largest and most conspicuous so far dis- Covered in the genus, may be known as: Loxsomopsis notabilis sp. nov. oo creeping, 3 to 5 mm. in diameter, thickly clothed with cells of the scale uniserial above its turgid base, the scale some- times noticeably articulated; fronds borne on top of the rhizome, Pinas Scattered, up to 2.5 m. high, up to about 80 cm. broad, va oid, bi-subtripinnate; stipe up to about 1.2 m. long, 13:10 3 dothed weinindand purplish ebeneous to castaneous, a temp oe idbecacs. bas scales similar to those of the pon yauiba : ~~ stramineous : ve; primary rachis costadeois an sa ee bitin = narrowly elate toward the epoca ay . OF aduste - stramineous; pinnae opposite oF subopposite, » Mostly remote, spreading more or less obliquely, often 286 SLtossoN: NEW FERNS FROM TROPICAL AMERICA arcuate, at least when dried, somewhat asymmetrical, acuminate, the apices serrate to subentire, giving rise gradually to the pin- nules; basal pinnae either the broadest, 7 to 25 cm. broad, or equal to the next above, broadly ovate or ovate-lanceolate, median pin- nae ovate-lanceolate or lanceolate, upper pinnae lanceolate; pinnules adnate-decurrent, the inner in the inner pinnae mostly lanceolate, obtuse or acute segments, the larger of which are coarsely and obliquely lobed or toothed; smaller pinnules con- tiguous and similar to the larger segments; both basal pinnules reduced and sometimes the next pair somewhat so, the basiscopic basal pinnule the shortest, 1.7 cm. or less long, in the upper of median pinnae often merely a toothed auricle and then adnate to the primary rachis; upper surface bright olive green, glabrous, lower surface paler, glaucous, and sparingly furnished with ml- nute flexuose flattened articulated hairs, especially on the veins, costae, and rachises; texture chartaceous; venation prominent, pit nate, veins catadromous; sori terminal on lateral teeth of the lobes or segments, erect or deflexed, each apical on a simple veil, or the upper branch of a once forked vein or a spur produced from the upper side of the latter branch; ‘ndusia sessile, calyciform, rarely urceolate, entire; receptacle somewhat’ exserted; sporang? intermixed with simple articulated paraphyses; spores fuscous, tetrahedral, convex on the upper side, verrucose. Type in the Underwood Fern Herbarium at the Le Botanical Garden, collected in wooded ravines, near Apolo, Bolivia, South America, July 25, 1902, R. S. Wilhams 1303. From L. costaricensis Christ* and L. Lehmantt Hieronymus! as described, L. notabilis differs chiefly in the following char- acteristics, From L. costaricensis, in the bright olive green upper surface and glaucous under surface of the lamina, in the es spicuous reduction of the principal pinnae at the base on bo sides, and in the verrucose spores. L. costaricensis is descti as having the upper surface of the lamina dark green, the _ surface not glaucous, the basal acroscopic pinnules the en 9 pinnules of the principal pinnae, and the spores smooth, From a Lehmanii, L. notabilis differs in the much greater size of the! in the color, blackish or purplish castaneous t the rhizome, stipes, and their scales, in the shape of it “— New York * Bull. Boiss. II. 4: 399. pl. 2. 1904. + Bot. Jahrb. 34: 435. 1904. SLOssON: NEW FERNS FROM TROPICAL AMERICA 287 pinnae, and usually in the shape of the indusia, which for the most part are merely deeply cup-shaped. L. Lehmanii is described as having leaves 35 cm. or less long, stipes fuscescent, scales of the stipes and rhizome fuscous-ferrugineous, lower pinnae obliquely elongate-deltoid, and indusia urceolate. Polypodium insidiosum sp. nov. Rhizome erect or oblique, about 1.5 cm. or less long, about 3 mm, or more in diameter, the crown thickly clothed with yellowish brown lanceolate or oblong-lanceolate scales 1 to 3 mm, long, having minute, rarely jointed, processes on their margins; stipe dull brownish or blackish, slender, wiry, terete, often arcuate, at obtuse, at base acutely cuneate and very shortly decurrent, entire, repand, or somewhat sinuate, glandular-pubescent, glabrescent; the margin and lower surface, especially about the sporangia, sparingly furnished with short brown spreading hairs, a few some- times on the upper surface also; midvein flexuose, mostly con- bl sori apical or dorsal on the innermost branches or on short spurs of these, irregularly I- to 3-serial, orbicular or oval, 1 to 2 mm, broad, Superficial; sporangia glabrous; spores finely papillose. Type in the Underwood Fern Herbarium at the New York Bo- tanical Garden, collected on mossy tree trunks near Camp La Gloria, a mining camp south of Sierra Moa, Province of Oriente, Cuba, at an altitude of about 762 meters, December 24-30, 1910, J. A. Shafer 8043, This plant strongly suggests a small mock Polypodium tri- oon It is much smaller than that species, fruiting when h na 3:5 cm. high, and appears to have a somewhat different abit. : When dried, the fronds are rigid and very brittle, and the ae, are more or less arcuate; the fronds thus point in various directions, but are not bent abruptly at the base of the lamina, as ia to be the case in P. trifurcatum. The laminae when lobed cithes « deeply so than is usual in the latter plant and are often play Or merely subentire. RK Botanica. GARDEN. 288 Stosson: NEW FERNS FROM TROPICAL AMERI 16. 4-8. sie sae J. As Shafer 8043, Cuba; 4 — pe showing leaf variation; 7, section of leaf, enlarg ed, sh scale Three new species of Opuntia, with a discussion of the identity of Opuntia Lindheimeri BERNARD MACKENSEN For some years the writer has been studying the opuntias growing in the country about San Antonio, Texas. Among the large, more or less erect forms he has recognized several species described by Dr. David Griffiths in recent years, but of the re- maining large forms he has not been able to discover a record anywhere. Among the latter he naturally expected to recognize Opuntia Lindheimeri, but careful examination revealed the fact that no single form agrees with Dr. Engelmann’s description of that species and with the specimens and notes ascribed to it in the herbarium of the Missouri Botanical Garden; nor has he been able to find such a form at New Braunfels, the type locality of that species. Of the presumably new species mentioned, three are described below. A certain other species occurs here, characterized by robustness, its height sometimes exceeding two meters, and by its white to yellow spines (resembling bone), etc. Perhaps this species approaches the description of O. Lindheimeri more nearly than any other occurring in this region. The two, however, differ in length of bristles, length and color of spines, shape and character of fruit, and size and character of seed. The fruit Preserved in the type material of O. Lindheimeri, and the sketch of it accompanying them, show that organ to be very slender. None of the larger opuntias of the type locality have such a fruit, so far as the writer has been able to determine, but the low species Opuntia macrorhiza and O. leptocarpa bear fruit of that form. Some of the type material was taken from plants grown in St. — and for that reason is probably not normal, as the opuntias very readily modified by changed conditions. This fact, nig aa with the unsatisfactory condition of a part of the material, “ases the difficulty of establishing the identity of Opuntia 289 290 MACKENSEN: THREE NEW SPECIES OF OPUNTIA Lindheimeri. ‘The seeds in the type material agree with those of O. macrorhiza. The writer had long suspected that this species is a composite one, but after his examination of the material and accompanying notes and drawing in the herbarium of the Missouri Botanical Garden he has become firmly convinced that such is the case. There is another fact which supports this view: Lind- heimer, in his notes accompanying the specimens of opuntias, uses the expressions ‘“‘kleine Opuntia’ and ‘‘grosse Opuntia,” which seems to indicate that he regarded all the small flat-jointed opuntias of his region as one species and all the large (more or less erect) ones as another, just as at present most of the inhab- itants of that region distinguish but two species, if indeed they recognize more than one. It would seem that in the composition of O. Lindheimeri the tall form mentioned contributed the size and habit, O. texana the spines, and O. macrorhiza the fruit. All these species occur at New Braunfels. The writer has thought best to let the tall form, of which he has deposited specimens under the number 619757 in the U.S. National Herbarium, stand for O. Lindheimer. The species described below are closely related, but each, it will be seen, differs from any one of the others in several characters. The descriptions were drawn from plants growing in their native habitat at San Antonio, Texas, where the species are common, and the type material was collected in the same locality. Opuntia convexa sp. nov. Plants from somewhat fleshy terete roots, sometimes attail® ing a height of over 1 meter and a breadth of 2 to 3 meters, W! low to gth of 15 mm.; spines light brown to reddish below (soon fading t© gray ish), but the greater portion of spine pale yellow, strat curved, much flattened, mostly twisted, rather stout, 1 I to 4.5 cm. long, or sometimes longer, I to 5 to an areo €; MACKENSEN: THREE NEW SPECIES OF OPUNTIA 291 the older joints sometimes more, very numerous on joints formed in droughty seasons, erect or spreading, on old joints reflexed; flowers opening yellow and turning salmon pink, 7 to 8 cm. broad and long; petals relatively thick, obovate, cuspidate, about 3 cm. broad, 4 to 5 cm. long; stigma green, 7- to 9-lobed, surpassing the stamens; fruit obovate in outline, often broadly so, 3.5 to 4.cm. broad, 4.5 to 5.5 cm. long, dark purplish red without, purple within, the umbilicus convex, the taste nauseous; seeds subor- bicular, nearly or quite 4 mm. in diameter, buff, with more or less gray on the flat sides. The plant flowers in April and May and ripens its fruit, which is often proliferous, in August. This species is probably the commonest of the various large- jointed prickly pears growing about San Antonio. The type is no. 619756 in the U.S. National Herbarium. Opuntia Griffithsiana sp. nov. Plants from somewhat fleshy terete roots, sometimes attaining a height of 8 and a breadth of 12 dm., with erect, ascending, and Prostrate stems, forming a rather dense growth; joints obovate to oval (often broadly so) or circular, thin, 1.5 to 2.5 or sometimes 3dm. long, the younger pale glaucous, the oldest dirty yellow to grayish, and scurfy; leaves subulate, from very short to 10 mm. in length; areoles bearing formidable bristles and short wool, and on the younger joints usually armed with spines, except below; bristles bright reddish brown when young, dirty yellow to brown when older, attaining on old joints a length of 12 mm.; spines brownish ted to brown below (often to the middle), pale yellow or dirty white above, faded in age, straight or sometimes curved, somewhat flattened, mostly twisted, rather slender, unequal, I to 4.5 cm. long, or sometimes longer, I to 5 to an areole, or on Pad we joints sometimes more, very numerous on joints formed Pate ip seasons, erect or spreading, or on old joints reflexed ; : 's light yellow, turning darker (reddish) in center, 7 to 9 cm. ‘eae 8 to 10 cm. long; petals obovate to cuneate, often narrowly the ‘S Ae 4 +m. broad, 4.5 to 5 cm. long, sometimes emarginate, | eae ending In a minute point; stigma green, usually 7- or 8- ' Surpassing the stamens; fruit oblong-obovate to obovate, ids 4 cm. wide, 5 to 8 cm. long, dark purplish red without, the bili Purple and pale green, with a nauseous taste, the large um- pes Plant flowers in April and May and ripens its fruits, which not proliferous, from August till winter. 292 MACKENSEN: THREE NEW SPECIES OF OPUNTIA The type is no. 619758 in the U.S. National Herbarium. The species is named for Dr. David Griffiths, of the U. S. Department of Agriculture. Opuntia reflexa sp. nov. Plants from somewhat fleshy terete roots, attaining a height of over I meter and breadth of over 2 meters, with erect, ascending, and often long prostrate branches; joints obovate to oval, often broadly so, the apex often obtuse or acutish, 1.5 to 3 dm. long, or sometimes longer, the younger gray-glaucous green, the older yellowish or bluish green, and finally dirty yellow or grayish, and scurfy; leaves subulate, from very short to 10 mm. in length; areoles remote, filled with bristles and short wool, unarmed or bearing I or 2 or sometimes 3, and on the older joints often a greater number of spines; bristles, when young, yellow to reddish brown, when older pale dirty yellow, often mottled with brown, on old joints widely spreading and attaining a length of I5 mm.; spines, when young, pale yellow, often mottled with brown or red, when older yellowish white, mostly tinged with red at base, much flattened, mostly twisted, usually very slender, unequal, from very short to 5 or sometimes 7 cm. long, usually much or wholly reflexed; flowers opening yellow and soon turning orange, 8 to 10 cm. broad, 8 to 9 cm. long; petals obovate, cuspr date, 3.5 to 4 cm. broad, 5.5 to 6 cm. long, often some of them reflexed; stigma green, usually 7- or 8-lobed, equaling or slightly surpassing the stamens; fruit obovate in outline, about 4 broad and 5 to 6 cm. long, dark purplish red without, pine within, the umbilicus istilly centrally depressed; seeds su orbicular to reniform with a prominent raphe, about 3 mm. long, grayish. Flowering in April and May. The fruit ripens in Augus September and is unpalatable and non-proliferous. The type is no. 619754 in the U. S. National Herbarium. SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS. t and Ee aE EAE SSP RTT Re os Sm Sd |, SAE eee RE ee oe INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE (1909-1912) manufactured products of vegetable origin, or laboratory methods are not included, and no attempt is made to index the literature of bacteriology. An occasional exception is made in favor of some paper appearing in an American periodical which is devoted e some important particular. If users of the Index will call the attention of the editor 'o errors or omissions, their kindness will be appreciated. This Index is reprinted monthly on cards, and furnished in this form to subscribers at the rate of one cent for each card, Selections of cards are not permitted ; each subscriber must take all cards published during the term of his subscription, Corre- spondence relating to the card issue should be addressed to the Treasurer of the Torrey tanical Club, Arthur, J. C. Aecidiaceae (continuatio). N. Am. Fl. 7: 161-187) 211-268. 15 Ap 1912. The part on Gymnos porangium, pp. 188-211, contributed by F. D. Kern. : J. H. Honorary members of the Torrey Club. Torreya 12: 99,91. 17 Ap 1912. ett, J. T. Development and sexuality of some species of Olpidiopsis (Cornu) Fischer. Ann. Bot. 26: 209-238. pl. 23-26. Ja 1912. Berry, E, W. Some ancestors of the persimmon. Plant World 15: 1S-21.f. 1-7. Ja 1912. Bliss, M. C, A contribution to the life-history of Viola. Ann. Bot. 26: 135-163. bl. 17-19. Ja 1912. etd, E. Violet hybrids between species of the palmata group. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 85-97. pl. 5-7. 18 Ap 1912. ; L. J., & Shantz, H. L. The relative wilting coefficient for different plants. Bot. Gaz. 53: 229-235. 15 Mr 1912. Ooks, C., & Black,C.A. Apple fruit spot and quince blotch. Phyto- Pathology 4: 63-72. pl. 4,5. Ap 1912. Bunzel, H. H. The measurement of the oxidase content of plant ees. U. S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 238: 5-40. pl. 1, 2 +f. 79. 9 Mr orp, 293 294 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Clute, W. N. The male fern. Fern Bull. 19: 97-102. [Ap 1912] [Illust.] [Clute, W. N.] Pteridographia. Fern Bull. 19: 119-124. [Ap 1912.] Includes notes on, (a) Ferns for the house; (b) Black spleenwort in America; (c) Crested ferns; (d) Crested marginal shield fern; (e) Living ferns found fossil. [Clute, W. N.] Rare forms of fernworts—XX. The forms of ebony spleenwort. Fern Bull. 19: 115-117. [Ap 1912.] [lIllust.] Cockayne, L. Some noteworthy New Zealand ferns. Plant World 15: 49-59. f. 1-3. Mr 1912. Cockerell, T. D. A. The Colorado Tradescantia. Torreya 12: 89. 17 Ap 1912. Cockerell, T. D. A. The red sunflower. Pop. Sci. Mo. 80: 373-382. Ap 1912. [Illust.] , Cogniaux, A. Orchidaceae—II. [In Ex herbario Hassleriano: Novi- tates paraguarienses. XIV.] Repert. Sp. Nov. 10: 343, 344. 20 F 1912. Collins, F.S. The botanical and other papers of the Wilkes exploring expedition. Rhodora 14: 57-68. 8 Ap 19gI2. . Collins, F. S. The green algae of North America, supplementary paper. Tufts College Stud. 3: 69-109. pl. 1, 2. Ap 1912. Includes several new species, varieties, and combinations. Collins, F. S. The marine algae of Casco Bay. Proc. Portland Soc. Nat. Hist. 2: 257-282. 1911. Cook, O. F. Phenotypes, genotypes, and gens. Science II. 35: 654° 656. 26 Ap 1912. Coulter, J. M. Modern aspects of paleobotany—IlI. paleobotany to botany. 1. Phylogeny and taxonomy. Am, ha 46: 215-225. Ap 1912. Dachnowski, A. The successions of vegetation in Ohio lakes and peat si deposits. Plant World 15: 25-39. F 1912. an Dowell, C. P. Our forest trees. Proc. Staten I. Assoc. 3+ 144-147- 15 F 1912. oe Dowell, P. Additions to the flora of Staten Island. Proc. Staten Assoc. 3: 156-162. 25 Ap 1912. Dowell, P. Notes on some Staten Island ferns. Proc. Staten I. : 3: 163-168. . 25 Ap 1912. ee Dox, A. W. Enzyme studies of lower fungi. Plant World 15: 4% F 1912. ee vy. East, E. M. A study of hybrids between Nicotiana Bigeloott and ‘quadrivalvis. Bot. Gaz. 53: 243-248. f. 1-4. 15 Mr 19% ‘for’ Emerson, R. A. Production of a white bean lacking the Pe Ly Gee SE A Pc re aan eS Te VIG 22h) can eT The relations of 5 ie Nate INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 295 total pigmentation—a prophecy fulfilled. Proc. Am. Breed. Assoc. 6: 396, 397. 1911. Evans, A.W. Branching in the leafy Hepaticae. Ann. Bot. 26: I-37. J22-36. Ja 1912. Fedde, F. Neue Arten aus der Verwandtschaft der Corydalis aurea Willd. von Nord-Amerika—II. Repert. Sp. Nov. 10: 364, 365. 20 F 1912. Fernald, M.L. An early collection of Salix balsamifera. Rhodora 14: 69,70. 8 Ap 1912. Fernald, M.L. Salix serissima in southern Connecticut. Rhodora 14: 80. 8 Ap 1912. Ferguson, M. C. Susan Maria Hallowell. Bot. Gaz. 53: 345-347. 15 Ap 1912. [Illust.] Forbes, C. N. New Hawaiian plants—III. Occas. Papers Bishop Mus. 5: 4-83: 1972. Includes descriptions and plates of 5 new species. Forbes, C. N. Preliminary observations concerning the plant invasion on some of the lava flows of Mauna Loa, Hawaii. Occas. Papers Bishop Mus. 5: 15-23. 1912. €,F.D. Sexual fusions and spore development of the flax rust. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 113-131. pl. 8, 9. 18 Ap 1912. Fyles, F. A Swamp. Ottawa Nat. 26: 17-19. Ap 1912. Gager, C. S, The Brooklyn Botanic Garden. Pop. Sci. Mo. 80: 339- 345. f. 1-8. Ap 1912. Garman, H. The catalpas and their allies. Kentucky State Univ. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull, 164: 203-223. f. 1-18. 15 F 1912. Gates, F.C, The vegetation of the beach area in northeastern Illinois and southeastern Wisconsin. Bull. Illinois State Lab. Nat. Hist. 9: 755-370. pl. 37-56. Mr 1912. ates, R.R. An onagraceous stem without internodes. New Phytol. a2 99-53. Pl. 2, 3. 29 F 1912. 8, W. J. The chestnut bark disease. W. Virginia Univ. Agr. % Exp. Sta. Bull. 137: 209-225. f. 1-12. Mr 1912. ot le, E. L. Certain cruciferous types. Leaflets 2: 219-221. II ~ Ap i912, se Planodes virginicum, Polyctenium glabellum, and P. bisulcatum gen. et spp. nov. Greene, E, L. Miscellaneous specific types—V. Leaflets 2: 225-228. Tt Ap tora, Clematis altheifolia, Polycodium Langloisii, P. oliganthum, Machaeranthera Gr. ecio Mesadenia, and S. fodinarum spp. nov. a E.L. New species of Chaenactis. Leaflets 2: 221-225. I1 P 1912, Bight new Species described. 296 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Greene, E. L. Some Erigeron segregates. Leaflets 2: 197-219. II Ap 1912. Continued from Leaflets 2: 196. 13 Mr 1912. Greene, F. C. The fern flora of Indiana. Fern Bull. 19: 102-115. [Ap 1912.] [IIlust.] Griffiths, D. The thornless prickly pears. U. S. Dept. Agr. Farm. Bull. 483: 5-20. f. 1-4. 8 Mr 1912. Grossenbacher, J. G. Crown-rot, arsenical poisoning, and winter- injury. N. Y. Agr. Exp. Sta. Tech. Bull. 12: 369-411. pl. 1-8. D 1909. Grossenbacher, J. G. A Mycosphaerella wilt of melons. N.. Y. Agr. Exp. Sta. Tech. Bull. 9: 195-229. pl. 1-6. F 1909. Groth, B. H. A. The sweet potato. Contr. Bot. Lab. Univ. Penn- sylvania 4: 1-104. pl. I-54. I911. Giissow, H. T. Report of the Dominion botanist. Rep. Exp. Farms (Canada) 1911: 237-274. pl. g-11 +f. 1, 2. 1912. Harris, J. A. The influence of the seed upon the size of the fruit in Staphylea—I. Bot. Gaz. 53: 204-218. f. I-4. 15 Mr 1912. Hassler, E. Rutaceae. [In Ex herbario Hassleriano: Novitates para- guarienses. XIV.] Repert. Sp. Nov. 10: 344-347. 20 F 1912. Hassler, E. Scrophulariaceae. [In Ex herbario Hassleriano: Novi- tates paraguarienses. XIV.] Repert. Sp. Nov. 10: 348. 20 F 1912. Hassler, E. Simarubaceae. [In Ex herbario Hassleriano: Novitates paraguarienses. XIV.] Repert. Sp. Nov. 10: 347, 348. 20 F 1912. Hedgcock, G. G. Notes on some diseases of trees in our national forests—II. Phytopathology 2: 73-80. Ap 1912. Higgins, J. E. Report of the horticulturist. Ann. Rep. Hawaii Exp. Sta. 1911: 25-42. pl. 1-5. 9 Ap 1912. Includes results of investigations on avocado and papaya. Holden, R. Reduction and reversion in the North American Salicales- Ann. Bot. 26: 165-173. pl. 20, 21. Ja 1912. Hollick, A. Modern aspects of paleobotany—ll. Relation of paleo- botany to botany. -3. Ecology. Am. Nat, 46: 239-243: 4B 19th Hollick, A. Some features of the Dismal Svan: of Virginia. Jour N. Y. Bot. Gard. 13: 53-56. pl. 91, 92. Ap 19 ; Hollinshead, M.H. Notes on the seedlings of paacian communis L Contr. Bot. Lab. Univ. Pennsylvania 3: 275-287- Pl. 45 mest Janchen, E. Neuere Vorstellungen iiber die Phylogenie: der Pte nee phyten. Mitteil. Naturw. Ver. Univ. Wien 9: 33-51, 60-1 of The relations Jeffrey, E.C. Modern aspects of paleobotany—II. Nat. 46: 225-29 paleobotany to botany. 2. Morphology. Am. Ap 1912. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 297 Kelley, W. P. The function and distribution of manganese in plants and soils. Hawaii Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 26: 5-56. 8 Ap 1912. Kern, F.D. Gymnosporangium. N. Am. Fl.7: 188-211. 15 Ap 1912. Knowlton, C. H. and others. Field excursions of the New England Botanical Club. Rhodora 14: 71-76. 8 Ap 1912. Knowlton, F. H. Modern aspects of paleobotany—I. The relations of paleobotany to geology. Am. Nat. 46: 207-215. Ap 1912. Knowlton, F. H., Coulter, J. M., Jeffrey, E. C., & Hollick, A. Modern aspects of paleobotany. Am. Nat. 46: 207-243. Ap 1912. Also indexed separately under each author. Lewis, C.E. Inoculation experiments with fungi associated with apple leaf spot and canker. Phytopathology 2: 49-62. Ap 1912. Lewis, I.F. Alternation of generations in certain Florideae. Bot. Gaz. 53: 236-242. 15 Mr 1912. Lewis, I. M. Pistillody in Argemone platyceras Link and Otto. Tor- Teya 12: 85-88. f. 1, 2. 17 Ap 1912. Lipman, C.B. Toxic effects of “ alkali salts” in soils on soil bacteria. Il. Nitrification. Centralb. Bakt. Zweite Abt. 5a: 405-4135 f. 7, 2. 2 Mr 1912. Livingston, B. E., & Brown, W. H. Relation of the daily march of transpiration to variations in the water content of foliage leaves. Bot. Gaz. 53: 309-330. 15 Ap 1912. Lloyd, C. G. Synopsis of the genus Hexagona. 1-46. f. 276-330. Cincinnati, O. Je roto. [Illust.] Lloyd, C. G. Synopsis of the sections Microporus, Tabacinus, and Funales of the genus Polystictus. 47-70. f. 336-3506. Cincinnati, 0. Au toro. [Illust.] Lloyd, C. G. Synopsis of the section Ovinus of Polyporus. 71-94. f. 496-509. O tort. [Illust.] Loyd, C. G. Synopsis of the stipitate polyporoids. 95-208. f. 395- 590. Mr i912. [Illust.] Loyd, F. E. The relation of transpiration and stomatal movements to the water-content of the leaves in Fouquieria splendens. Plant World 15; e-t4: f. 7. Ja 1912. » ©. Some results of recent field work in the Cape May peninsula. Bartonia 4: 14-19. Mr 1912. Dougal, D. T. The water-balance of desert plants. Ann. Bot. 40: 71-93. pl. 6-ro. Ja 1912. P J.-M. New species of Nepenthes. Contr. Bot. Lab. Univ. 7 onaaeal : 207-210. pl. r, 2. 1911. 8 Merrilliana and N - truncata spp. nov. 298 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Mackenzie, M. . Phyto-phenology in its application to the plants of the Philadelphia neighborhood. Contr. Bot. Lab. Univ. Pennsylvania 3: 288-427. pl. 6,7. 1911. Meyer, R. Echinopsis obrepanda K. Sch. und Echinopsis Fiebrigtt Giirke. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 33-37. 15 Mr 1912. Meyer, R. Uber Echinocactus pilosus Gal. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 37-42. 15 Mr 1912. [Illust.] Mitchell, G. F. The cultivation and manufacture of tea in the United States. U.S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 234: 5-40. pl. 1, 2 +f. I-9. 15 F 1912. Includes description of tea plant, Thea sinensis. Morris, E. L. An apparently new record for Rubus Chamaemorus Linnaeus. Torreya 12: 88. 17 Ap 1912. Nash, G. V. The succulent plant collections. Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 13: 56-58. Ap 1912. Nelson, A. Contributions from the Rocky Mountain Herbarium. X. New plants from Idaho. Bot. Gaz. 53: 219-228. 15 Mr 1912. Includes descriptions of 14 new specie Pfeiffer, W.M. The morphology of Leitneria floridana. Bot. Gaz. 53: 189-203. pl. 18-20. 15 Mr 1912. Piper, C. V. Agricultural varieties of the cowpea and ieamediately related species. U.S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 229: 5-160. pl. I-12. 29) 1612. Vigna unguiculata. Pollard, C. L. Conservation, the national issue. Proc. Staten T. Assoc. 3: 128-143.:>15 F 1982. Pretz, H. W. Some noteworthy plants of Lehigh County, Pa. ll tonia 4: 6-10. Mr 1912. Reed, G. M. Infection experiments with the powdery mildew * wheat. Phytopathology 2: 81-87. Ap 1912 Rivas, D. Bacteria and other fungi in relation to the soil. Contr. Bot. Lab. Univ. Pennsylvania 3: 243-274. I9II. Rydberg, P. A. Epipactis vs. Peramium. Torreya 12: 89, 9% a Ap I912.- Rydberg, P. A. Phytogeography and its relation to taxonomy and other branches of science. Torreya 12: 73-85. 17 AP ight | Sands, W. N. An account of the return of vegetation and the reviva of agriculture in the area devastated by the Soufriére of St. Vincent in 1902-3. West Ind. Bull. 12: 22-33. 15 Ja 1912. [Illust st] Schneider, A. Pharmacal plants and their culture. California State Board Forest. Bull. 2: 3-175. 1912. \ INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 299 Scott, C. A. The hardy catalpa. Kansas State Agr. Col. Exp. Sta. Cire. 20: 1-19. [1912.] [Illust.] Catalpa speciosa. Shear,C.L. The chestnut bark fungus, Diaporthe parasitica. Phyto- pathology 2: 88, 89. Ap 1912. Snow, J. W. Two epiphytic algae: a correction. Bot. Gaz. 53: 347. 15 Ap 1912. Spaulding, P., & Field,E.C. Two dangerous imported plant diseases. U.S. Dept. Agr. Farm. Bull. 489: 5-29. f. 1-3. 9 Ap 1912. Peridermium Strobi Klebahn and Chrysophlyctis endobiotica Schilb. Spillman, W. J. Application of the principles of heredity to the im- provement of plants and animals. Proc. Am. Breed. Assoc. 6: 397-419. 1911, Spillman, W. J. A theory of Mendelian phenomena. Proc. Am. Breed. Assoc. 6: 78-90. I9QII. Stevens, N. E. Observations on heterostylous plants. Bot. Gaz. 53: 277-308. pl. 21-23. 15 Ap 1912. Steward, J. R. Variability of the maize plant. Proc. Am. Breed. Assoc. 6: 245-252. 1911. : Stewart, A. Expedition of the California Academy of Sciences to the Galapagos Islands 1905-1906—V. Notes on the botany of Cocos Island. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci. 1: 375-404. pl. 31-34. 19 Ja 1912. Stone, W. Abama americana (Ker) Morong. Bartonia 4: 1-5. Mr 1912. [Illust.] tout, A.B. A sclerotium disease of blue joint and other grasses. Univ. Wisconsin Agr. Exp. Sta. Research Bull. 18: 207-253. f..1-&. [Mr 1912,] Stover, => G. The Agaricaceae of Ohio. A preliminary report with keys to the genera and species. Proc. Ohio State Acad. Sci. 5: 462-577. Mr 1912. Taubenhaus, J. J. A study of some Gloeosporiums and their relation to a sweet pea disease. Phytopathology 1: 196-202. pl. 30 +f. I- ae D torr, ' > Fragments brasilica V _ nebst Besprechung einiger Pitcher Microthyriaceen. Ann. Myc. 10: AOg 704 * SSD O12, ; FF Hymenomycetes riograndenses. Broteria 10: 5-28. fl. ™4. Ap toro, 7 &., & Allin, A. E. Do the Abictinese extend to the Sou Bot. Gaz. 53: 339-344. pl. 26 +f. ees 15 Ap 300 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Thompson, W. P. Ray tracheids in Abies. Bot. Gaz. 53: 331-338. pl. 24, 25. 15 Ap 1912. Trelease, W. The agaves of Lower California. Ann. Rep. Missouri Bot. Gard. 22: 37-65. pl. 18-72. 14 F 1912. Trelease, W. Revision of the agaves of the group Applanatae. Ann. Rep. Missouri Bot. Gard. 22: 85-97. pl. 73-99. 14 F 1912. Ulrich, E. B. Leaf movements in the family Oxalidaceae. Contr. Bot. Lab. Univ. Pennsylvania 3: 211-242. pl. 3 +f. I-5. 1911. Waldron, L. R. Large and small seed experiment. Am. Breed. Assoc. 6: 204-212. I911. Weingart, W. Cereus Purpusii Weingart. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 26-29. 15 F 1912. [Illust.] Weingart, W. Pilocereus scoparius Pos. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 45. 15 Mr 1912. Wester, P. J. The mango. Philip. Bur. Agr. Bull. 18: 1-60. pl. 1-9. Westgate, J. M., & Vinall, H. N. Sweet clover. U. S. Dept. Agr. Farm. Bull. 485: 5-39. f. 1-16. 12 Mr 1912. Williams, R. S. The genus Clastobrywm Doz. and Molk. in America. Bryologist 15: 31. Mr 1912. Wilson, P. Botanical exploration in Cuba. Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 13: 23-25. I9t2. Peltostigma lel eoides. Wilson, P. The flowering of the Jamaica candle-wood tree. Yoel: Coued. 35: 28. 36:0: P1972; Wolf, F.A. Gummosis. Plant World 15: 60-66. Mr 1912. j Wolf, F. A. Some fungous diseases of the prickly pear, Opuntia Lind- heimeri Engelm. Ann. Myc. 10: 113-134. pl. 1-3 +f. 1-8. 1 AP 1912. Wright, C. H. Flora of the Falkland Islands. Jour. Linn. Soc. Bot. 39: 313-339. I911. York, H.H. The development of the flower, embryo sac, and embry? of Dendrophthora opuntioides and D. gracile(is]. Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ. 1912: 149-152. F 1912. Zahlbruckner, A. Schedae ad ‘‘ Kryptogamas exsiccatas.” Naturhist. Hofmus. 24: 269-292. 1910; 25: 223-252: 19th Includes notes on several species from America. Jour. N. Ann. BULL. TORREY CLUB VOLUME 30, PLATE 21 STRUTHIOPTERIS JAMAICENSIS Broadh. ™ ¥, (A scale 10 cm. long is shown on each sheet.) BULL. TORREY CLUB VOLUME 30, PLATE 22 STRUTHIOPTERIS MAXONII Broadh. %. BuLL, TORREY CLUB VOLUME 39, PLATE 23 7) 3 Re et WYaMrh tete toon enmaen | SLOSSON: NEW FERNS FROM TROPICAL AMERICA MEMOIRS OF THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB A series of technical papers on botanical subjects, published at irregular intervals. Price $3.00 a volume. Not offered in exchange. 1. 1, No. 1; not furnished separately : Bailey, Liberty Hyde. Studies of the types of various species 7f the =“ Carex. Pages 1-85. 25 My 1889 Vol. 1, No. 2; not furnished separately : Martindale, Isaac Comly. Marine oo of the ped J coast and adjacent waters of Staten Island. Pages $7-1 24 Au Vo No. 3; price, 75 cents Spruce, Richard. Hz ain Bolivianae in Andibus ‘Boliviae orientalis, annis — 1885-6, acl. H. H. lectae. Pages 113-140. a 1890. : 1, No. 4; price, 75 cents: : Sturtevant, Edward eis On seedless fruits. Pages 141-187. 30 My 1890. Vol. 2, No. 1; not furnished separatel ye Halsted, Byron David. Hesecee food-materials in buds and surrounding parts. Pages 1-26, plates r, 2. 10 S 1890. st 1. 7 gh 2; price, 75 cents: _ ne Mumay, & arles Boog Contributions to the botany of Pages Si yas ce ae Vol. 2, No. 3; not AES separate =e ‘ te to the know mri of the Sarena of some North American plants. Pages 57-108, plates 5-19. 15 — Vol. 2, No. : rice, 75 cents Wheelock, William Efner. The genus Pabjieta in North America. Pages 109- 152. 30D 3801, oa Aaoos Arthur. Flora of western North Carolina ae erritory. Lene 20 F 1892. Vol 3, No. 2; price, $2.00: = The Nau of North frre [with i illustrations of at the pe es] Pa Pages — 2m Ss 20-74. 15 Mri a oes 3, No, 3; not sens separa in tely : : 2 Saag An enumeration of the plants collected in Bolivia by Miguel oe 8 [Part1.] Pages 1 -67. 28 Ap 1893. : Vol. 4, No. 1; not furnished separately: > : ae a mt - a teas ex Hepaticarum. Part L | Bibliography. ae Vol. 4, No. 2; not furnished separately : ae oe & oe Anna Murray. Report on the hotest aioe Virginia ne the season of 1892, Pages 95-00%, 7 T 1893-17 Ap 1894. = Mer 4, No. 3; price, 50 cents Mise < Pay, sas Hurd. ameration of the e plants ath ert in Bolivia. by M Etec art 2. ag sera 10 Mr-17 Ap 1895. Peak 4, No. 4; price, 50 cents 5 hae Stockton, sey ets hypogaea L. °°: 1874. This species should be transferred from Aériplex to / ndolepts, as sepals are present in the pistillate flowers. ‘ Eurotia subspinosa sp. nov. A dioecious shrub, 6-10 dm. high; branches ascending oF spreading, becoming more or less spinescent, finely grayish stellate- tomentose but without longer hairs; leaves linear OF oblong, obtuse, entire, 1-3 cm. long, or the secondary ones only 5 mm. long and comparatively broader, with revolute margins; flower clusters axillary, those of the staminate plant crowded and forming simp leafy spikes; fruiting bracts lanceolate, about 6 mm. long; horns usually about 2 mm. long. This species is more decidedly shrubby than E. lanata (Pursh) Mog. and evidently always dioecious, has ascending oF spreading branches, which become spinescent, lacks the long hairs inter” mixed with the stellate pubescence characteristic of F- a and has usually longer horns. In E. Janata the branches are erect, and the plant is shrubby only at the base. The predominantly RYDBERG: STUDIES ON THE Rocky MOUNTAIN FLORA 313 staminate plant has a few pistillate flowers borne on the lower part of the branches. The predominantly pistillate plant has often a few staminate clusters above but is sometimes wholly pistillate. EH. subspinosa grows on rocky hills in the desert regions, Utau: Rocky summits, St. George, May 15, 1903, Goodding 810 (type, in herb..N. Y. Bot. Garden); 1874, C. C. Parry 725; 1875, E. Palmer; April 9, 1880, M. E. Jones 1642; Virgin River, 1844, Fremont 440. Arizona: Fort Verde, October 11, 1887, E. A. Mearns 188; Holbrook, August 10, 1897, Myrtle Zuck; Total Wreck Mine, 1903, Thornber 60; Rincon Mountains, October 7, 1900, D. Griffiths 1781. Nevapa: Thousand Spring Valley, September 1868, S. Watson 990 (in part); Muddy Valley, Lincoln County, May 6, 1906, Kennedy & Goodding. CALIFORNIA: Mohave Desert, April 1905, Mrs. C. DeKalb; Radsburg, April 14, A. A. Heller 7705; Red Hill, west of Bishop, May 14, A. A. Heller 8253. Sonora: Genaga di San Bernardino, 1855, Schott. ‘ Dondia calceoliformis (Hook.) Rydb. comb. nov. Chenopodium calceoliformis Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am. 2: 126. 1838. This, I think, deserves specific rank. It is characterized from D, depressa (Pursh) Britton and D. erecta (S. Wats.) A. Nels. by its broad and short, ovate or ovate-lanceolate bracts over 2 mm. id wide. AMARANTHACEAE ‘ Amaranthus pubescens (Uline & Bray) Rydb. comb. nov. Amaranthus graecizans pubescens Uline & Bray, Bot. Gaz. 19: 317. 1894. : This probably deserves specific rank. It has been collected in Colorado, Amaranthus carneus Greene and A. californicus S. Wats. should be added to the region. The former has been collected in Montana, and both in Idaho. 314 RypDBERG: STUDIES ON THE RocKy MOUNTAIN FLORA PORTULACACEAE “Limnia utahensis sp. nov. Annual; stem 2-15 cm. long; basal leaves petioled; blades spatulate to linear, I-3 cm. long, 2-6 mm. wide; stem leaves connate, forming an oblique, 2-lobed disk, 1-2 cm. broad; inflo- rescence very short, corymbiform; fruiting sepals ovate, acute, 2-3 mm. long, about equalling the pedicels; seeds about 1.5 mm. in diameter, minutely muricate. This species resembles in habit L. depressa (A. Gray) Rydb. and L. spathulata (Dougl.) Heller but differs from the former in the long and narrow blades of the basal leaves and more connate stem leaves, from the latter in the large and broad stem leaves, and from both in the large seeds. Uran: St. George, 1877, Palmer 56 (type, in herb. Columbia University) ; 1874, C. C. Parry 23 and 24. I have not seen the type of Montia Viae A. Nels.,* but from the description and specimens named by Professor Nelson I judge it is the same as Limnia depressa (Robinson) Rydb.} published a few months earlier. Coulter and Nelson report Calyptridium rosewm S. Wats. from western Wyoming, but I think this must be a mistake. Pr Professor A. O. Garrett and myself collected Talinum brachy- podum S. Wats. in southeastern Utah. Miss A. Eastwood has reported it from the same region. ALSINACEAE -Cerastium thermale sp. nov. Cerastium arvense fuegianum Hollick & Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 14: 50. 1887. Not Hook. 1854. Cerastium fuegianum A. Nels.; Coult. & Nels. New Man. Bot. Rocky Mts. 184. 1899. * Bot. Gaz. 42: 48. 1906. + Bull. Torrey Club 33: 139. 1906. Ni aioe eee, ii RYDBERG: STUDIES ON THE RocKy MounTAIN FLORA 315 margined; petals about 5 mm. long; capsule about 6 mm. long, slightly curved near the upper end. This is Cerastium arvense fuegianum Hollick & Britton, but not that of Hooker. It differs from C. strictum L., its nearest relative, in the low, depressed stem, yellowish herbage, thicker and smaller leaves, the lower of which are often obtuse, and the smaller more condensed flowers. It grows on geyser formations in the Yellow- stone National Park, at an altitude of about 2,000 m. Wyominc: Lower Geyser Basin, Aug. 4, 1897, Rydberg & Bessey 4025 (type, in herb. N. Y. Bot. Garden); Aug. 11, 1872, J. M. Coulter. Alsine Palmeri sp. nov. A cespitose perennial: stems several, spreading, 5 cm. high or less, glabrous; leaves ovate or ovate-lanceolate, 2-5 mm. long, fleshy, acute; cyme 3~7-flowered; bracts lanceolate, green; sepals a 2.5-3 mm. long, acute; petals about equalling the Sepals, The type was named Stellaria borealis by Dr. Watson but is evidently not closely related to it. A. Palmeri has the thick leaves of A. Edwardsii (R. Br.) Rydb., but the midribs are not prominent, the flowers smaller, the sepals decidedly acute, and the petals only about equalling the sepals in length. TAH: Beaver Valley, 1877, E. Palmer 54 (type, in herb. Columbia University). “ Alsine alpestris (Fries) Rydb. comb. nov. Stellaria alpestris Fries, Mant. 1: 10. 1832. “Alsine strictiflora Rydb. nom. nov. Stellaria stricta Richards. Frankl. Jour. ed. 2. App. 15. 1823. Not Alsine stricta Wahlenb. 1812. This is the Stellaria longipes of most western reports and of Coulter & Nelson’s New Manual. It has a short pod and acute “Pals, while the original Stellaria longipes Goldie has the pods twice as long as the obtuse sepals. If I am not mistaken the-latter * the same as Stellaria valida Goodding. p a “Alsine subvestita (Greene) Rydb. comb. nov. tellaris Subvestita Greene, Ottawa Nat. 15: 42. 1901. 316 RYDBERG: STUDIES ON THE RocKy MOUNTAIN FLORA ’ Arenaria cephaloidea sp. nov. Somewhat cespitose perennial; stem strict, 2-4 dm. high, glabrous; leaves glabrous, erect, filiform-subulate, 3-10 cm. long; flowers in dense headlike cymes; bracts lanceolate, often I em. long, scarious except the thick midrib, scabrous-ciliolate; sepals similar or somewhat broader, 4-5 mm. long; petals oblong, about half longer than the sepals. This is related to A. congesta Nutt. but differs in its narrower bracts, which are wholly scarious, except the midrib, and scabrous- ciliolate on the margins; also in its larger flowers, stricter stem, and less cespitose base. WASHINGTON: Spokane, Sept. 10, 1902, O. Kreager 617 (type, in herb. N. Y. Bot. Garden); Clark Springs, July 17, 1902, Kreager 100; Loon Lake, July 20, 1897, J. B. Winston; Spokane County, June 27, 1884, Suksdorf. Ipano: Lake Coeur d’Alene, June and July 1892, G. B. Aiton; Little Potlatch River, June 2, 1892, Sandberg, MacDougal & Heller | 478. , Arenaria lithophila Rydb. comb. nov. Arenaria subcongesta lithophila Rydb. Mem. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 1: 148. 1900. This, I think, deserves specific rank. Some of the specimens recorded as A, subcongesta (S. Wats.) Rydb. should also be referred to it. | ‘Alsinopsis dawsonensis (Britt.) Rydb. comb. nov. Arenaria dawsonensis Britt. Bull. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 2: 169. oo This species has been collected in the Black Hills of Sout Dakota. * Alsinopsis pusilla (S. Wats.) Rydb. comb. nov. Arenaria pusilla S. Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 17: 367. 1882. This species has been collected in Idaho. ~ Arenaria laxiflora nom. nov. Arenaria Fendleri diffusa Porter, Syn. Fl. Colo. 13- A, diffusa Ell. 1818. RYDBERG: STUDIES ON THE Rocky MOUNTAIN FLORA 317 Ammodenia oblongifolia (T. & G.) Rydb. comb. nov. Arenaria peploides major Hook. F\. Bor.-Am. 1: 102. 1831. Honckenya oblongifolia T. & G. Fl. N. Am. 1: 176. 1838. Arenaria sitchensis Dietr. Syn. Pl. 2: 1565. 1840. B. T. Butler has collected in Montana what seems to be Are- naria laricifolia L. At least it is the same plant as the one col- lected by Turner on the Porcupine River, Alaska, on the strength of which A. laricifolia is included in the American flora. Sagina occidentalis S. Wats. has been collected in Idaho by Leiberg. CARYOPHYLLACEAE WAHLBERGELLA Fries, Bot. Not. 1843: 143. 1843 The treatment of the Silenoid genera of this family has been very different in this country and in Europe. S. Watson and B. L. Robinson admitted only two genera, Silene and Lychnis, while Pax* admitted beside Silene the genera Lychnis, Melan- dryum, and Viscaria, and Williamst admitted Lychnis, Coronaria, Viscaria, Eudianthe, and Melandrium. The only distinction given by Watson and Robinson is the number of styles, in Silene 3, in Lychnis 5, but Robinson admits that in some species of Szlene the styles are sometimes 4 or 5. The number of styles is therefore not a very reliable character. Continental authors usually dif- ferentiate Silene from Melandrium (by Americans included in Lychnis) by the partially septate capsule of the former. According to Robinson this character is unreliable in our American species. Perhaps the species included in Silene without septum should be “moved to Melandrium or to Eudianthe. As these. doubtful Species are not found in the Rockies, I shall give no opinion on them here. It is evident that the genus Lychnis as treated in America ‘Ss an unnatural and composite group. Williams’ treatment is Perhaps the most logical. Pax included our native American Pecies of Lychnis in Melandrium but divided the genus in three subgenera. One of these subgenera corresponds to Eudianthe ~ Only 3 styles. -The other two subgenera correspond to the original species of Mf. elandrium and the genus Wahlbergella of Fries, * Ye & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenf. 3: 1b: 70, 73- 1889. Our. Bot. 31: £70, 171." 1803; 318 RypBERG: STUDIES ON THE RocKy MOUNTAIN FLORA respectively. The typical species of Lychnis have 5-valved capsules with entire valves. In the typical species of Melandrium the valves are 2-cleft at the apex. In Wahlbergella the valves are also more or less notched. In that respect the species belong rather to Melandrium than to Lychnis. But the typical species of Melan- drium are dioecious plants with ample long-exserted petals and of a different habit from that of our native species. These all have hermaphrodite flowers with very small and inconspicuous or even no petals. In my opinion the genus Wahlbergella should be taken up for our native species usually included in Lychnis. Lychnis Drummondii (Hook.) S. Wats. is somewhat different in habit and fruit and was referred to Elisanthe by Ruprecht, but I think it can well be included in Wahlbergella. Of course L. striata Rydb. is closely related to it and should be referred to the same genus, whatever disposition of it is made. The species of Wahlbergella in America are as follows: ‘ Wahlbergella Drummondii (Hook.) Rydb. comb. nov. Silene Drummondii Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1: 89. 1830. Elisanthe Drummondii Rupr. Fl. Cauc. 1: 200. 1869. Lychnis Drummondii S. Wats. Bot. King Exp. 37. 1871. ‘ Wahlbergella striata Rydb. comb. nov. Lychnis striata Rydb. Bull, Torrey Club. 31: 408. 1904. WAHLBERGELLA TRIFLORA (Vahl) Fries, Summa Veg. Scand. 155- 1845 Lychnis triflora R. Br. Ross. Voy. App. CXLII (hyponym). 1819. Melandrium triflorum Vahl, in Liebm. Fl. Dan. 14°: 5. 1843: ’ Wahlbergella Taylorae (Robinson) Rydb. comb. nov. Lychnis Taylorae Robinson, Proc. Am. Acad. 28: 150. 1893. WAHLBERGELLA AFFINts (Vahl) Fries, Bot. Not. 1843: 143- 1543 Lychnis afinis Vahl, in Fries, Nov. Mant. 3: 36. 1842: Melandrium affine Vahl, in Liebm. Fl. Dan. 14: 5. 1843: ' Wahlbergella montana (S. Wats.) Rydb. comb. nov. Lychnis montana S. Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 12: 247. 1877: RYDBERG: STUDIES ON THE Rocky MounrTAIN FLORA 319 ’ Wahlbergella Kingii (S. Wats.) Rydb. comb. nov. Lychnis Kingti S. Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 12: 247. 1877. ‘Wahlbergella attenuata (Farr) Rydb. comb. nov. Lychnis attenuata Farr, Contr. Bot. Lab. Univ. Pa. 2: 419. 1904. - Wahlbergella Parryi (S. Wats.) Rydb. comb. nov. Lychnis Parryi S, Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 12: 248. 1877. WAHLBERGELLA APETALA (L.) Fries, Summa Veg. Scand. 155. 1845 Lychnis apetala L. Sp. Pl. 1: 437. 1753. Melandryum apetalum Fenzl; in Ledeb. Fl. Ross. 1: 326. 1842. Wahlbergella uniflora F ries, Bot. Not. 1843: 143. 1843. RANUNCULACEAE * Ranunculus rivularis sp. nov. Ranunculus repens S. Wats. Bot. King Exp.g. 1871. A perennial with a fascicle of fibrous roots; stem hirsute, pro- ducing long stolons sometimes over I m. long, rooting at the nodes and there producing plantlets; leaves ternate, 5-15 cm. wide, divisions petiolate, ovate, usually truncate or subcordate at the base, 3-cleft and coarsely toothed; petals rounded-obovate, about 4 mm. long, scarcely equalling the sepals; head of fruit globose; achenes glabrous, beaks about one third their length. ; The type was determined as R. repens L. by Dr. Watson, but 'S Not so closely related to that species as to R. Macounti Britton. It was probably on account of the creeping and rooting habit that it was referred to the former. The small petals should at a glance have revealed the error, for in R. repens the petals are large and rounded, much exceeding the sepals. R. Macounii is Secasionally decumbent but not rooting, and the outline of the leaflets or divisions is different and the beak about one half as long as the body of the achenes. My own specimens from Kimball, reg had stems over 1 m. long. It grows on wet river NkKs, Nevapa: Huntington Valley, August 1868, S. Watson 27 type, in herb. Columbia University). Arizona: Clark Valley, August 1883, Rusby. EBRASKA: Kimball, August 12, 1891, Rydberg 7. TEXas: 1851, Wright 839. 320 RyDBERG: STUDIES ON THE RocKy MOUNTAIN FLORA Thalictrum columbianum sp. nov. A plant resembling 7. venulosum Trelease in habit; stem 3-5 dm. high; leaves 2—4 times ternate, petioled except the uppermost; leaflets rather crowded, thick, and veiny, 1-2 cm. long, cuneate to nearly orbicular, 3-lobed and deeply toothed; inflorescence narrow; achenes oblong- or ovate-lanceolate, somewhat flattened, 455 mm. long, 1.5-2 mm. wide; veins strong, but not corky, and with broad and shallow grooves between. The western specimens referred to T. venulosum by Dr. W. Trelease belong to this species, which differs mainly in the structure of the achenes, these approaching those of 7. megacarpum Torr. WASHINGTON: Loomiston, August 1897, Elmer 509 (type, in herb. N. Y. Bot. Garden); Yakima County, 1892, Henderson 2376. IpaHo: Pend d’Oreille River, 1861, Lyall; Lake Waha, July 1896, A. A. & E. Gertrude Heller 3361; De Lamar, July 7, 1892, Miss Mulford. : OREGON: 1886, Cusick 1337. ‘ Delphinium Leonardi sp. nov. A perennial with a tuberous root; stem 2-5 dm. high, viscid- pubescent, especially above; blades of the basal leaves 4-5 cm. wide, dissected into oblong, obtuse divisions, more or less viscid- pubescent; upper leaves with linear, acute divisions; lower pedicels 4-8 cm. long, ascending; sepals dark blue, oblong, obtuse or the upper acute; spur about 2 cm. long, slightly s-curved; upper petals whitish, veined with blue, emarginate; lower petals blue, with short lobes; follicles over 2 cm. long, curved, viscid-pubes- cent or in age glabrate; seeds dark brown, wing-margined. It grows on river banks and beaches at an altitude of 1,800~ 2,400 m. It is related to D. bicolor Nutt. but differs in its longer spur, which is half longer than the obtuse instead of acute lateral sepals. Utau: Garfield, May 30, 1884, Leonard 205 (type, in _ N. Y. Bot. Garden); City Creek Canyon, April 21 and May 17) 1883, Leonard 32 and 24. ‘ Delphinium coelestinum sp. nov. A perennial with a short rootstock and strong woody Hehe stem 3-5 dm. high, glabrous or slightly pubescent paige leaves long-petioled ; blades about 3. cm. broad, sparingly pu * RYDBERG: STUDIES ON THE Rocky MOounrtTaAIN FLORA 321 divided to the base into 3-5 narrowly cuneate divisions, these again cleft into linear-oblong, obtuse, mucronate lobes; sepals , light blue, slightly pubescent outside, oblong, obtusish, about 1 cm. long; spur about 1 cm. long, usually somewhat curved ; jipper petals 8 mm. long, yellowish white, slightly lobed; lower petals light blue, with obtusish, wavy lobes; follicles 8-ro mm. long, slightly puberulent, nearly straight. NY: This species is related to D&scaposum but differs in its more leafy stem and in the more deeply dissected basal leaves with Narrower segments. It grows in arid places. Uran: Southern Utah, 1877, Palmer 11 (type, in herb. Columbia University). ARIZONA: 1876, Palmer 3. ’Delphinium xylorrhizum sp. nov. A perennial with a stout woody root, related to D. scaposum but not at all scapiform; stem 2-3 dm. high, glabrous; leaves petioled, glabrous, fleshy; blades of the basal ones divided into 3-5 broadly cuneate divisions, these cleft and lobed with ovate or rounded lobes; stem leaves with linear-oblong lobes; sepals dark blue, oval, obtuse, pubescent outside; spur stout, about 15 mm. ong; upper petals yellowish, about 7 mm. long, slightly cleft, with obtuse lobes: lower petals blue, with sinuate, obtuse lobes; follicles canescent-strigose. __ This species differs from D. scaposum Greene in its leafy stem and its Strigose follicles. It grows on clayey hillsides. Montana: Lima, July 1, 1895, Shear 3429 (type, in herb. N.Y. Bot. Garden). -Delphinium Helleri sp. nov. A Perennial with a short rootstock and fleshy roots; stem about 3 dm, high, viscid-pubescent throughout, few-leaved; leaf blades 35 cm. broad; the lower dissected into linear, obtuse divisions, more or | Calyx; sepals dark blue, more or less pubescent, oval, about 15 mm. long; spur 2-2.5 cm. long, straight and attenuate; upper Petals blue, tinged with yellow only on the lower edge, entire or * ghtly cleft, lower petals blue, with acute, crenate lobes; follicles viscid-pubescent, nearly straight, 2 cm. long. 322 RYDBERG: STUDIES ON THE Rocky MOUNTAIN FLORA This is related to D. bicolor, but the upper petals are dark blue and the spur is much longer. IpAHO: Lewiston, April 1896, A. A. & E. Gertrude Heller 2951 (type, in herb. Columbia University) ; region of Coeur d’Alene Mountains, June 24, 1895, Letberg 1031. » Delphinium viscidum sp. nov. Perennial with a woody root; stem about 3 dm. high, grayish strigose below, densely glandular-viscid above; leaf blades 5-7 cm. broad, densely grayish strigose, dissected into narrowly linear lobes; inflorescence branched; sepals dark blue, 12-15 mm. long, oblong, acute; spur 10-12 mm. long, somewhat s-curved; upper petals yellowish, tinged with blue, obtuse, entire; lower petals dark blue, with obtuse, sinuate lobes; follicles densely stri- gose. This species is related to D. multiflorum and D. reticulatum, but the leaves are finely dissected as in D. Geyeri and D. scopulorum. Wyominc: Near Tie Siding, July 6, 1896, Osterhout (type, in herb. N. Y. Bot. Garden) ; Evanston, August 1878, Harry Edwards. BRASSICACEAE ‘ Lepidium hirsutum nom. nov. Lepidium intermedium v. pubescens Greene, Bot. Gaz. 6: 157- 1880. Not L. pubescens Desv. 1814. Lepidium medium pubescens Robinson, Syn. Fl. 11: 127. 1895- Lepidium virginicum subsp. texanum v. pubescens Thell. Mitt. Univ. Ziirich 28: 230. 1906. : Physaria lanata (A. Nels.) Rydb. comb. nov. Physaria didymocarpa lanata A. Nels. Bull. Torrey Club 31: 241: 1904. This, I think, deserves specific rank, but P. grandiflora Blankin- ship is nothing but the typical P. didymocarpa. ‘ Radicula trachycarpa (A. Gray) Rydb. comb. nov. Nasturtium trachycarpum A, Gray, Bull. U. S. Geol. & Geog. Surv. 2: 233. 1876. RYDBERG: STUDIES ON THE Rocky MOouNTAIN FLORA 323 CHEIRINIA Link, Enum. Hort. Berol. 2: 170. 1822 The type of the genus Erysimum (Tourn.) L. is E. officinale L., usually known under the name Sisymbrium officinale Scop. If the genus which has usually passed under the name Erysimum is regarded as distinct from Chetranthus, it must be known under another name. The oldest available name is Cheirinia, with Erysimum cheiranthoides as the type. As I regard the Rocky mountain species well distinct generically from the wallflower of Europe, I adopt Cheirinia as the name for the genus. CHEIRINIA CHEIRANTHOIDES (L.) Link, Enum. Hort. Berol. 2: 170... 3627 Erysimum cheiranthoides L. Sp. Pl. 668, 2 F764. Cheiranthus cheiranthoides Heller, Cat. N. Am. Pl. 4. 18098. ’ Cheirinia syrticola (Sheld.) Rydb. comb. nov. Erysimum syrticolum Sheld. Bull. Torrey Club 20: 285. 1893. Cheiranthus syrticola Greene, Pittonia 3: 136. 1896. ’ Cheirinia inconspicua (S. Wats.) Rydb. comb. nov. Erysimum parviflorum Nutt. in T. & G. Fl. N. Am. 1: 95. 1838. Not E. parviflorum Pers. 1807. Erysimum asperum inconspicuum S., Wats. Bot. King Exp. 24. 1871, Erysimum inconspicuum MacMillan, Metasp. Minn. Valley 268. 1892, Cheiranthus inconspicuus Greene, Pittonia 3: 134. 1896. “ Cheirinia arida (A. Nels.) Rydb. comb. nov. Cheiranthus aridus A. Nels. Bull. Torrey Club 26: 351. — 899. ~ Cheirinia aspera (Nutt.) Rydb. comb. nov. Cheiranthus asper Nutt. Gen. N. Am. Pl. 2: 69. 1818. Erysimum asperum DC. Syst. 2: 505. 1821. ’Cheirinia elata (Nutt.) Rydb. comb. nov. Erysimum elatum Nutt. in T. & G. Fl. N. Am. 1: 95. 1838. Cheiranthus elatus Greene, Pittonia 3: 135. 1896. 324 RypBERG: STUDIES ON THE Rocky MOUNTAIN FLORA Cheirinia asperrima (Greene) Rydb. comb. nov, Cheiranthus asperrimus Greene, Pittonia 3: 133. 1896. - Cheirinia oblanceolata Rydb. comb. nov. Erysimum oblanceolatum Rydb. Bull. Torrey Club 31: 557. 1904. » Cheirinia Bakeri (Greene) Rydb. comb. nov. Cheiranthus aridus Greene, Pittonia 4: 198. 1900. Not C. aridus A. Nels. 1899. Cheiranthus Bakeri Greene, Pittonia 4: 235. 1901. Erysimum Bakeri Rydb. Bull. Torrey Club 33: 141. 1906. Cheirinia argillosa (Greene) Rydb. comb. nov. Cheiranthus argillosus Greene, Pittonia 3: 136. 1896. Erysimum argillosum Rydb. Bull. Torrey Club 33: 141. 1906. - Cheirinia nivalis (Greene) Rydb. comb. nov. Cheiranthus nivalis Greene, Pittonia 3: 137. 1896. Erysimum nivale Rydb. Bull. Torrey Club 31: 558. 1904.’ / Cheirinia radicata Rydb. comb. nov. Erysimum radicatum Rydb. Bull. Torrey Club 31: 558. 1994 ’ Cheirinia Wheeleri (Rothr.) Rydb. comb. nov. Erysimum Wheeleri Rothr. Rep. U.S. Geog. & Geol. Surv. 6: O- 1878. Cheiranthus Wheeleri Greene, Pittonia 3: 135. 18 Erysimum asperum alpestre Cockerell, Bull. iii can 18: 168. 1891. Erysimum alpestre Rydb. Bull. Torrey Club 28: 277- 19°F ’ Cheirinia amoena (Greene) Rydb. comb. nov. Cheiranthus nivalis amoenus Greene, Pittonia 3: 137- 1896. Erysimum amoenum Rydb. Bull. Torrey Club 33: 143- 1906. Cheirinia Pallasii (Pursh) Rydb. comb. nov. Cheiranthus Pallasii Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 436. 1814- Cheiranthus pygmaeus Adams, Mém. Soc. Nat. Mose. 5+ 1817. RYDBERG: STUDIES ON THE ROcKy MOUNTAIN FLORA 325 Hesperis pygmaeus Hook. F1. Bor.-Am. 1: 60. 1830. Erysimum pygmaeum J. Gay, Erysim. Nov. 4. 1842. ’ Cheirinia brachycarpa sp. nov. Biennial; stem 3-6 dm. high, from a taproot, grayish canescent, somewhat striate; leaves all linear-spatulate or oblanceolate, 5-10 cm. long, sparingly canescent; the lower petioled and often mi- nutely denticulate, the upper ones mostly entire; sepals oblong, about I cm. long, yellowish green; petals nearly 2 cm. long; claw long and slender; blades rounded-obovate, about 7 mm. wide, bright yellow; fruiting pedicels about 8 mm. long, strongly ascend- io pods erect, 4-6 cm. long, 2.5 mm. thick; beak about 1 mm. ong. This species resembles C. oblanceolata, but the pod is much thicker and shorter and the flowers larger. It differs from C. aspera in its ascending, not divergent, and shorter pod. It grows on dry hillsides at an altitude of 2,500-3,000 m. Urau: Abajo Mountains, August 17-20, 1911, Rydberg & Garrett 9713 (type, in herb. N. Y. Bot. Garden, flowers and young fruit) ; 9765 (well-developed fruit); Cottonwood Canyon, June 27 and July 1, 1905, Rydberg & Carlton 6333 and 6570. ’ Sophia leptostylis sp. nov. Annual; stem 3-6 dm. high, rather simple below, sparingly Stellate-pubescent or glabrous; leaves 3-10 cm. long, obovate in outline, twice pinnatifid, with oblong divisions, sparingly stellate- pubescent; the uppermost reduced and with narrower lobes; flowers numerous; sepals elliptic, yellow, I-1.5 mm. long; petals Sie gaan a little surpassing the sepals; pedicels in fruit 5-8 mm. ng, spreading-ascending; pods about 5 mm. long, tapering to each end, near y erect, somewhat curved; styles 0.5-0.7 mm. long; seeds more or less in two rows. This resembles somewhat .S. procera, especially in the form of the pods, but the inflorescence is more open and the pedicels more “preading. It grows at an altitude of 2,000-3,000 m. Utan: Big Cottonwood Canyon, July 4, 1905, Rydberg © Carl- ‘on 6629 (type, in herb. N. Y. Bot. Garden); also June 29, 6498, oe duly 8, 6806; Big Cottonwood Canyon, June 1905, Garrett 1301; near Milford, June 22, 1905, Rydberg & Carlton 6283; moun- 'ains north of Bullion Creek, near Marysvale, July 23, Rydberg & 326 RyDBERG: STUDIES ON THE ROCKY MOUNTAIN FLORA Carlton 6283; Fish Lake, August 2, 1909, Garrett 2578; Elk Moun- tains, August 8, 1911, Rydberg & Garrett 9552; Head of Dry Wash, August II, 1911, 9628; Mount Ellen, July 25, 1894, M. E. Jones 56842; Logan Canyon, June 28, 1910, C. P. Smith 2226. Arabis MacDougalii sp. nov. Perennial; stem 4-6 dm. high, simple below, densely stellate- pubescent; basal leaves narrowly oblanceolate, 2-4 cm. long, entire or denticulate, densely stellate-pubescent; stem leaves linear or linear-lanceolate, sagittate at the base; sepals oblong, stellate-pubescent; petals white, oblanceolate, 5-6 mm. long; pedicels in fruit reflexed, 5-10 mm. long; pods finely stellate- pubescent, reflexed, 4-5 cm. long, 1.5 mm. wide; seeds in one row. This species is related to A. subpinnatifida but differs in its smaller white petals and its entire leaves. Montana: Old Sentinel, near’ Missoula, June 12, 1901, Mac- Dougal 191 (type, in herb. N. Y. Bot. Garden). Nevapa: King Canyon, Ormsby County, June 4, 1902, C. F. Baker 986 (referred here doubtfully). v Arabis brevisiliqua sp. nov. Biennial; stems 3-4 dm. high, sparingly stellate-pubescent below, otherwise glabrous; basal leaves narrowly oblanceolate, 1-2 cm. long, finely stellate-pubescent; stem leaves linear, sagittate at the base, glabrous: sepals scarious-margined, 3 mm. oe glabrous or nearly so; petals purplish, about 6 mm. long; ge’ in fruit 3-5 mm. long, recurved pods 2-3 cm. long, 2 mm, wide, glabrous; seeds in two rows. This species resembles A. lignifera A. Nels., but the pod is see shorter, less than 3 cm. long, with the seeds in two rows, the sepals are glabrous instead of stellate-pubescent. “ Britis Cotumsia: Skagit Valley, July 6, 1905, J. M. rie 70825 (type, in herb. N. Y. Bot. Garden); near internatlo boundary, between Kettle and Columbia rivers, July 16, 19° J. M. Macoun 63400. “a ALBERTA: Trail to Lake O’Hara, August 8, 1904, John aS 64517 in part. Parrya platycarpa sp. nov. Parrya macrocarpa S. Wats. Bot. King Exp. 14. 1871. macrocarpa R. Br. 1821. Not P. RYDBERG: STUDIES ON THE RocKy MOUNTAIN FLORA 327 Perennial with a stout caudex; leaves basal, runcinate, more or less glandular-hirsutulous, thick, 6-8 cm. long, oblanceolate in outline; scape I1-1.5 dm. long, glandular-hirsutulous; sepals ob- long, 8 mm. long, saccate at the base; petals 15-18 mm. long, purplish; claws long, exceeding the sepals; blades obovate; fruit- ing pedicels 8-15 mm. long, ascending; pod erect, glandular-his- pidulous, 3-4 cm. long, 6-7 mm. wide, acute at both ends, slightly eid between the seeds, these broadly winged, 3-4 mm. wide. This is characterized by its deeply lobed leaves, the hispidulous pubescence, the broad hispidulous pod, and the longer narrow petals with slender claws. Urtan: Uintah Mountains, August 1869, S. Watson 54 (type, in herb. Columbia University); also August 1889 and Aug. II, 1890, M. E. Jones. ’ Smelowskia lobata sp. nov. densely cespitose perennial; earlier basal leaves cuneate or oblanceolate, merely lobed, with oblong divisions or even some of the earliest entire; the rest of the leaves pinnatifid, densely white Stellate-floccose; stem 1 dm. high or less; sepals densely villous, 3 mm. long, ovate, acute; petals white, clawed; blades rounded-obovate; pod glabrous, about 5-6 mm. long, oblanceolate, tapering at the base; style very short. This species has the pubescence of .S. ovata, but the pod is taper- ing at the base. It has whiter and longer pubescence than 5. americana, and the pod is much shorter. It differs from both in the shape of the earlier leaves. ALBERTA: Northern Rocky Mountains, Bourgeau, Palliser Expedition (type, in herb, Columbia University). Montana: Midvale, June 28 and July. 9, 1903, Umbach 206 and 325. Mackenzig: Richardson (Franklin’s Journey). “Draba pectinata (S. Wats.) Rydb. comb. nov. Draba slacialis bectinata S. Wats. Proc. Am. Acad. 23: 260. 1888. “Oot been confused with D. andina Nutt. and D. densiflora _. out it is easily distinguished by the leaves. They are re ag stellate-pubescent, merely strongly ciliate on the margins With an incurved tip. In the other two species the leaves 328 RyDBERG: STUDIES ON THE Rocky MOouNTAIN FLORA are densely stellate-pubescent and their tips not incurved but spreading. The pods of D. andina and D. pectinata are nearly the same, but that of D. densiflora is larger and more elongated. Nelson, in the New Manual of the. Central Rocky Mountain Region, cited Draba uber A. Nels., D. aureformis Rydb., and D, decumbens Rydb. as synonyms of D. luteola Greene. The spe- cies he described under that name is evidently D. aurea Vahl, of which D. uber apparently is a synonym. D. luteola and D. aureformis, on the contrary, are closely related to D. surculifera A. Nels. but have light yellow flowers. A “ conservative” botanist would unite the three. D. decumbens Rydb. is not closely related to either. Very likely Professor Nelson had not seen a specimen of the last named. Fortunately, Draba lapilutea A. Nels. and D. i a 2 A. Nels. become synonyms of D. praealta Greene. Dygba defle Greene has erroneously become D. reflexa in the New Manual. New York BotanicaL GARDEN. Discoid gemmae in Radula RUTH WILLISTON Discoid gemmae, borne on the margins or surface of the leaves or on the thallus, have been reported in the following twelve genera of the Jungermanniales: Metzgeria, Radula, Porella, Mets- geriopsis, Colurolejeunea, Diplasiolejeunea, Cololejeunea, Lepto- colea, Aphanolejeunea, Lejeunea, Cyclolejeunea, and Frullania. (See Evans, ’o4, ’10, and 11.) It is probable, however, that they occur in others. In Radula they are definitely known in only seven species, although the genus, according to Stephani (‘10), contains 220 species in all. In two species, R. Hedingert and R. iibodensis, the development of the gemmae has been carefully studied by Goebel (87). A third species, R. complanata, was investigated by Cavers ('03) and later by Stevens (’10). In R. ccida gemmae were observed by Gottsche (’63), in R. Lind- bergiana by Jack (’81), in R. protensa by Schiffner (’93), and he R. subtropica by the writer; but no details about the gemmae in these four species have as yet been published. The present Paper will be largely devoted to the gemmae of R. flaccida and R. Protensa, although the other species will be included in the dis- Cussion, RADULA FLACCIDA . This species was first described from Mexico in 1847 by Lindenberg and Gottsche (Syn. Hepat. 726). It has since been found widely distributed throughout the West Indies and the low- lands of tropical America. The material used in this study was collected by Dr. A. W. Evans at Bath, Jamaica (no. 332). R. tda is a dioecious species with a prostrate stem. It is epiphyl- lous. The gemmae are disklike bodies, one cell thick, attached to the dorsal margins of the leaves. They are the largest and most highly differentiated gemmae known in the genus, averaging ie Maturity o.5 mm. in diameter, while the leaves themselves measure only 0,8 mm. in length. The cells nearest the center of the se€mmae are the largest, averaging 0.02 mm. in diameter. 329 330 WILLISTON: DISCOID GEMMAE IN RADULA Toward the periphery they decrease gradually in size, those at the very edge averaging about 0.01 mm. Gemmae occur in this species on leaves of vegetative branches (FIG. 3), on male bracts (FIG. 1), on the margins of old perianths (ric. 2), and on other gemmae (FIG. 4). Gemmae occurring on leaves or bracts were most numerous along the acroscopic margins, and in no case were gem- mae found on the lobules of the leaves. There is apparently some relation between the stage of development of a vegetative branch and its capacity to produce gemmae, for the gemmae are rarely 4 3 Ficures 1~4, Radula flaccida. 1, male bracts and prolifera’ branch bearing gemmae, X266. 2, old perianth bearing gemmae, vegetative leaf with gemmae, X 266. 4, small gemmae growing on the mae mature gemma, X66. tion of antheridial 66. 3 normal of a nd found on young plants. The fact that gemmae are never fou on the youngest leaves indicates, however, that their — does not absolutely limit the growth of the shoot. When branch produces gemmae at all, they generally occur 0” ean of the leaves. A leaf may produce gemmae singly or 17 aie In the latter case two or three gemmae are usually found ogee” WILLISTON: DIsSCOID GEMMAE IN RADULA 331 though groups of seven or eight may occur. In instances where more than one are produced on a single leaf, usually only one matures, and the others either become abortive or delay their development until the first one is shed. In the development of the gemmae the sequence of cell division can be traced accurately only in the earlier stages, as with the increasing complexity of the gemmae the order of cell formation becomes somewhat variable. _ The formation of a gemma begins by the enlargement of a single marginal cell and its protrusion beyond its neighbors. This cell begins at once to secrete a trans- parent gelatinous substance. A similar secretion was noted in the early stages of R. complanata by Stevens (’10, p. 369), who suggests that the presence of this gelatinous substance may be taken as a rough indication of the region of most rapid growth. As this cell increases in size and pushes farther beyond the margin of the leaf, it takes on a knoblike shape (FIG. 5), and finally the end of the knob is cut off by a wall parallel to the margin of the leaf (FIG. 6). The inner of the two cells thus formed is the stalk cell, the outer the mother cell of the gemma. The stalk cell undergoes no division but increases slightly in size. The outer cell, however, soon divides by a median wall at right angles to the first. Each of the resulting cells then divides by a transverse wall. The original mother cell is now separated into quadrants (FIG. 7). The two outer quadrants are triangular in shape and generally begin at once to function as two-sided apical cells, cutting off seg- ments first on the side toward the median line then on the side toward the lower quadrant, and so on until three or four segments ids been formed (FIG. 8, 9, 10, 11, 12). The earlier segments divide first by periclinal walls and later by anticlinal walls, so that by the time the last segment is cut off by the apical cell the first may have divided into as many as six or eight cells. The 4Pical cells both cease to function after a short time; and instead of Cutting off segments in the normal way each divides by a Periclinal wall followed by an anticlinal wall in the peripheral cet, thus giving rise to three cells. The establishment of the apical cells is not always simultaneous on the two sides of a single gemma. The original triangular Wadrant on one side or both may cut off an extra cell parallel 3B2 WILLIsTON: DiIscoID GEMMAE IN RADULA to the median wall before the apical cell becomes established, In case the two apical cells of a single gemma behave differently, there is an asymmetrical development of the gemma. If one apical cell becomes established before the other, it usually but not always ceases to function before the other; so that it is common to find a gemma with one apical cell cutting off a segment in the normal way while the other has already divided by a periclinal AT} BY 12 18 1h FIGURES 5~14, Radula flaccida. Gemmae in various stages of seers from single cell Stage to the mature form. 5—7 show the gelatinous substance ger early divisions, X400. 8~—12 show th pical cells a, X 400. 14, mature Co funnellike elevation and basal cells, X66. wall (Fic. 17). The same condition was observed in F: . blanata by Stevens (10, p. 370). This irregularity in the man . of establishment of the apical cell makes it possible to phi three types of gemmae: those in which the original apical ee rants begin immediately to function as apical cells (FIG. 9 a i those in which the apical quadrants cut off cells parallel wit WILLISTON: DISCOID GEMMAE IN RADULA 333 median wall before beginning to function as apical cells (FIG. 15), and those in which the establishment of the two apical cells is not simultaneous (FIG. 16). In any case the shape and size of the two sides of the gemma are not noticeably affected (FIG. 16 and 17). The two lower quadrants of the gemma mother cell do not produce apical cells but divide by longitudinal walls followed by transverse walls. After the apical cells in the upper half of the gemma cease to function, the whole gemma increases in size by the same method of cell division, followed by the inner or lower half from 18 : : p pe 28 Ue & 24 of oe 15-26, Radula flaccida, Gemmae with irregularities in the formation medi apical cells. 15, gemma which has cut off a segment on each side toward a an line before the apical cell has begun to function, X400. 16, gemma in which median line, and ceased to function. The apical cell on the right was m the outer half of the original triangular quadrant and is still functioning ma in which the apical cell on the left has ceased to function, while that on th ig Cutting off segments, 533. 18 and 19 show the method of the develop- tharet 17, gem Tight ig develop m the sequence of cell division, X 400. 24, dorsal view of later stage in ieW, devant the leafy shoot, x533. 25 and 26 show the leafy shoot, ventral in dextrorse and sinistrorse spirals, X 800. . 334 WILLISTON: DIscoID GEMMAE IN RADULA the beginning, each cell dividing by longitudinal walls followed by transverse walls; but as the gemma grows older the order of cell division is reversed, and the transverse walls are formed first and the longitudinal later. In R, Hedingeri Goebel reports (’87, p. 52) that there are no apical cells whatever, and the gemma mother cell divides by a series of longitudinal walls between which transverse walls are formed. Soon after the apical cells cease to function, the gemma begins to change its position and shape. Up to this time it has been a flat circular body protruding by the stalk cell beyond the margin of the leaf. Now the six or eight basal cells which attach the 28 FIGURES 27-209, Radula flaccida. 27, gemma at maturity, ventral view, — the large marginal cells and the basal cells, X66. 28, germinating gemma showing one leafy shoot more advanced than the others, X266. 29, germinating ants later stage, with a well-developed leafy shoot, * 266. gemma to the stalk begin to grow, especially in length, and curve upwards so that they stand at right angles to the leaf. As = change in position takes place the cells adjacent to the large basa cells begin to divide and grow very rapidly, and to curve outward in such a way that the gemma again becomes parallel with the leaf surface but raised above it by a funnel-shaped tube. A oo time before the gemma is mature several large cells becom® differentiated at intervals along the margin (FIG. 27). These soe in number from three to eight, but there are usually five. ae one arises through the enlargement of one of the peripheral & alls while the adjoining peripheral cells divide by periclinal w WILLISTON: Discomp GEMMAE IN RADULA 335 (FIG. 18 and 19). If the growth and division of the neighboring cells are very rapid, the large cell may appear in a temporary depression, but it soon increases in size so that the mature gemma shows no marginal indentations (FIG. 23), After the large cells are fully differentiated, the gemma is shed. Shedding takes place by means of a splitting between the stalk cell and the long basal cells (Fic. 16). This splitting is probably caused by a gelatinization of the walls in this region. The stalk cell does not come off with the gemma, as it does in R. complanata, but remains a part of the leaf, as in the two species studied by Goebel (’87, f.61). Cell divisions are now at an end until germina- tion takes place, but the gemma may increase slightly in size by the enlargement of its individual cells. When mature it is a slightly concave disk with a { unnellike outgrowth near the center and with the six large basal cells often adhering to the edge of the funnel, All the germinating gemmae in this material were found on the lower surface of the leaves on which the plants were growing. It Seemed remarkable that the spaces on the upper surface of the leaves were entirely free from isolated gemmae or young plants. After a gemma comes to rest with its concave side down, the first step in germination is the formatién of rhizoids to anchor the young plant. These are developed from the cells near the peri- Phery where the tissue comes in contact with the substratum. The rhizoids consist of short prolongations of the cells, with ir- regular lobes at the apex. According to Goebel (87, p. 53, f- 66) the similar thizoids in R. Hedingeri probably secrete a gelatinous Substance by means of which they adhere to the substratum. When the gemma is firmly anchored, the five large peripheral cells (FIG. 19) begin to divide (FIG. 20-23). The first wall 'S always Periclinal, and the inner cell thus formed gives rise to the young shoot. The outer cell, as well as the neighboring cells, Proceeds to divide and form a tissue which protrudes beyond the "Bin of the gemma (FIG. 20). This thalluslike body protects the tiny shoot coming out on the ventral side of the concave gemma, The sequence of divisions in the inner cell of the original Peripheral cell is very complicated and difficult to follow; but 4 tetrahedral apical cell is soon formed, the divisions of which cor- 336 WILLISTON: DISCOID GEMMAE IN RADULA respond to those described by Leitgeb (’79) for the vegetative shoots of R. complanata, the cell cutting off segments on three sides only. The fourth face, which does not cut off segments, is the free one of the apical cell and lies toward the apex of the branch. Each segment cut off by a lateral face divides into two cells, an external cell and an internal cell. The external cell gives rise to the two lobes of the leaf and the cortical cells of the stem, while the internal cell by further division forms the axial cells of the stem. The segments cut off by the ventral face never form leaves but give rise to cells of the stem only. The three faces of the apical cell cut off their segments in spiral sequence, but the spiral may be either dextrorse or sinistrorse (FIG. 25 and 26). RADULA PROTENSA Lindenberg first described R. protensa from Java in 1848 : (Meissner, p. 462). It is a tropical species native to Asia and various islands of the Pacific. The material used in this study was collected by Lamberto Loria in New Guinea (no. 114). &. protensa agrees with R. flaccida in being epiphyllous and prostrate. The gemmae are smaller than in R. flaccida, averaging only 0.2 mm. in diameter at time of shedding. It is possible, however, that the gemmae examined@had not attained their full size, 2 spite of the fact that cell division had apparently ceased. In this species gemmae occur on vegetative branches and on male bracts. Schiffner (’93, p. 249) reports them also on the margins of old perianths. They are most commonly found scattered over the ventral surface of the leaves or along the margins and stand at right angles to the surface. They usually appear in groups, 4 single leaf sometimes bearing fifty or more in various stages of development. As in R. flaccida the development of the gemma begins by es protrusion of an ordinary leaf cell. This cell, however, unlike that of R. flaccida, may occur in the surface of the leaf or in the margin. It also becomes covered with a much heavier covering of gelatinous material than is found in R. flaccida. The Or. half of the cell is then cut off by a transverse wall. This — forms the stalk cell, which does not project beyond the surface 0 the leaf, and the gemma mother cell, which soon divides into WILLISTON: DISCOID GEMMAE IN RADULA 337 quadrants. The early walls are very delicate and scarcely show through the surrounding gelatinous layer. As the gemma increases in size it breaks through this sheath, which remains clinging to the base like a collar (FIG. 30). In the further development of the gemma the two apical quadrants function for a time as two-sided apical cells. As described for R. flaccida, the stage at which the apical cell becomes established and the stage at which it ceases to function vary. There is no curving or change in position in this gemma as is noted in R. flaccida; and at the time of shedding, the gemma is a circular body, one cell thick, slightly concave, but without any funnel-shaped outgrowth similar to that of R. flaccida Ficures 30-37, Radula protensa. Stages in development of gemma from the Wo-celled stage until the apical cell ceases to function, X 400. 30-32 show the stalk cell and the gelatinous sheath. (Fic. 14). Shedding takes place by means of a splitting of the wall between the stalk cell and the basal cells. The stalk cell femains as a part of the leaf. The form of the gemma when shed is almost identical with that of the mature gemma of R. Hedingert. Soon after shedding, the basal cells begin to elongate. On account of lack of germinating material it was impossible to trace the further development of the gemma. However, a few gemmae were found in which the marginal cells halfway between the basal cells and the apex, on one side or the other, were dividing and growing, “Pparently beginning to form a thalluslike outgrowth. So far as Could be determined, there were no enlarged cells functioning as 338 WILLISTON: DISCOID GEMMAE IN RADULA differentiated peripheral growing points, and no gemmae were found in which the leafy shoot had begun to appear. Several young plants showed thalloid fragments clinging to them, but it was impossible to determine in any of these cases whether the fragment was a part of the gemma itself, as in R. flaccida, or part of a thallus such as is formed in R. Hedingert. RADULA LINDBERGIANA AND RADULA SUBTROPICA R. Lindbergiana, a species native to Europe, Asia, and Algeria, first described by Gottsche in 1864, and R. subtropica, native to Brazil, and described by Stephani in 1910, were also studied. In these the gemmae were essentially the same as those of R. com- planata as figured by Stevens (’10, p. 370). COMPARISON OF SPECIES Gemmae in the genus Radula may be arranged in two groups according to their complexity. The first group contains the simplest types and has representatives in three species, R. com- blanata, R. Lindbergiana, and R. subtropica. The gemmae in this group occur on the margins of leaves and are very irregular in size and shape when mature. This irregularity is due to the variation in the number and activity of the apical cells and their method of development. These gemmae may be more than one cell thick. Germination in this group has not yet been described. The second group contains the more complex types and has representatives in four species, R. protensa, R. Hedingeri, R. tiibodensis, and R. flaccida. These gemmae occur not only on the margins but also on the surface of leaves and follow a more regular course of development, the mature gemmae in a given species being uniform in shape and size. In R. flaccida and & protensa apical cells are present, but R. Hedingeri and R. tjibodens’, while developing after a fixed plan, do not, according to Goebel ('87, p. 62), possess any apical cells. All the gemmae belonging to this group are only one cell thick. Germination in this group may be divided into two categories. In the gemmae of R. Hedew: gert, and R. tyibodensis, as described by Goebel, the procedure 1s a follows: The circular gemma develops at some point on the margin a thalluslike body as large as the gemma itself. One of the marginal cells of this thalloid outgrowth in turn gives rise to the leafy shoot, but by the continued growth of the tissue adjoum"s WILLISTON: DISCOID GEMMAE IN RADULA 339 this marginal cell the shoot later appears to arise from the central part of the thallus. The second type of procedure is seen in the germinating gemmae of R. flaccida. In this species from five to eight differentiated peripheral growing points immediately give rise to the apical cell of the shoot. The formation of a thallus- like body preliminary to this stage seems to be suppressed. The growth of the outer peripheral cell and its adjoining cells in R. flaccida to form a thallus, corresponds to the growth of the thallus in R. Hedingeri after the differentiation of the apical cell of the shoot. R. protensa probably belongs to the first category and germinates according to the procedure followed by R. Hedingeri. BOTANICAL LABORATORY, YALE UNIVERSITY. LITERATURE CITED Cavers, F. On asexual reproduction and regeneration in Hepaticae. New Phytol. 2: 121-133; 155-165. 1903. Evans, A.W. Hepaticae of Puerto Rico—IV. Odontolejewnea, Cyclole- jeunea, and Prionolejeunea. Bull. Torrey Club 31: 183-226. pl. 8- 12. 1904 ; Evans, A. W. Vegetative reproduction in Metzgeria. Ann. Bot. 29: 271-303. I910. Evans, A. W. Hepaticae of Puerto Rico—X. Cololejeunea, Lepto- colea, and Aphanolejeunea. Bull. Torrey Club 38: 251-286. pl. 11, ea.) 39%. Goebel, K. Ueber epiphytische Farne und Muscineen. Ann. Jard. Buitenzorg 7: I-73. pl. 1-9. 1887. €, C. M., Lindenberg, J. B. G., & Nees ab Esenbeck, C. G. Synopsis Hepaticarum. Hamburg, 1844-47. ttische, C. M. De mexikaniske Levermosser. Copenhagen, 1863. Jack, J.B. Die europdischen' Radula-Arten. Flora 64: 353-362; 385- oe. 7-8. 1881. Leitgeb, H. Beitrage zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der Pflanzenorgane. LV. Wachsthumsgeschichte von Radula complanata. Sitz. Ber. : Akad. Wiss. Wien 63: 13-60. pl. 11-14. 1879. Meissner, K. F. Hepaticae javanicae, a Zollingero collectae. Bot. Zeit. 6: 462-463. 1848. er, V. Ueber exotische Hepaticae. Nova Acta 60: 219-316. bl. 6-10, 1893 F. Species Hepaticarum. 1910. Stevens, N. E, Discoid gemmae in the leafy hepatics of New England. Bull, Torrey Club 37: 365-373. 1910. Notes on the genus Widdringtonites EpwarpD W. BERRY (WITH PLATES 24, 25) It is the fashion among a large proportion of botanical students either to ignore or actually to deride botanical determinations based upon the remains of the foliage of fossil plants. While this is perhaps justified in some instances by the sanguine determina- tions of some paleobotanists, particularly those who might with Propriety be referred to as the ‘fathers’ of this as yet young science (such men as Unger, Heer, and Ettingshausen), the real importance of their work is generally underestimated. The careful description and illustration of a fossil flora is of immense importance even if seventy-five per cent of the identifica- Hons are wrong, and for the following reasons: For the purpose of correlating distant geological formations fossils are theoretically almost as useful unnamed as named, or at least they would be if there were some medium for intellectual exchange that did not require names, To illustrate their value to the botanist I will take the case of A who describes the flora of the Cretaceous or Tertiary of Bohemia, misidentifying half of his species. B studies the Cretaceous or weeny flora of Greenland and finds a number of specimens like S types. Several of B’s specimens are better preserved, or are *epresented by more material, or have attached fruits or seeds, thus enabling B to correct some of A’s wrong determinations. C ipa the Cretaceous or Tertiary flora of America or Asia and A’s 2 eens corrects or substantiates beyond cavil some of Original - determinations. Thus in time we come to know A's hyl ora and are enabled to make many deductions regarding see climate, and distribution, which would be entirely te % if A had waited until he had his species represented by » “Tuits, and seeds, which would probably have been never. ave assumed that foliage remains are not capable of un- 342 BERRY: NOTES ON THE GENUS WIDDRINGTONITES equivocal identification but this is far from being the case in most instances. I did not start, however, to write a plea for paleo- botanists, but with the purpose of describing some rather excep- tional coniferous materia! from the Upper Cretaceous of this country, which serves to substantiate a generic determination made years ago by that most sagacious and illustrious of paleo- botanists, the late Professor Oswald Heer. The genus Widdringtonites was established in 1847 by End- licher* with Thuites gramineus Sternberg from the Tertiary of Perutz, Bohemia, as the type. This he named Widdringtonites Ungeri, including in its synonymy Juniperites baccifera Unger, Thuia graminea Brongniart, and Muscites Stolzii Sternberg. Three additional species were listed, one from the Cretaceous, one from the Wealden, and one from the Lias. His characterization of the genus was as follows: ‘‘Folia spiraliter inserta, pleraque squamaeformia adpressa. Strobilus globosus, valvatus.” There are perhaps a score of species, ranging in age from the Triassic to the Miocene, that are referred to this genus at the present time. It has been commonly used for foliar specimens that resembled the living forms but lacked the certainty furnished by associated cones. These are known, however, in a large number of species, many of which, especially those of Tertiary age, are now often referred directly to the genus Widdringion® Named originally for its resemblance to the living speci® F Widdringtonia of southern Africa and Madagascar, it is t be noted that in the latest treatment of the modern Cupressineae, “4 Eichler in Engler and Prantl’s Die Natiirlichen Pflanzenfamilien (1889), Widdringtonia is made a subgenus of Callitris Ventenat the latter being divided into four subgenera as follows: Octoclins F. v. Miiller (Frenela Bentham) with eight scales to the cone ge single species inhabiting Australia; Hexaclinis (Frenela Mir i with six scales to the cone, 3 large and 3 small, and. nine spe ; of Australia and New Caledonia; Pachylepis Brongniart yi tonia Endlicher) with thick woody cones of four subequal S@ and having three or four species of South Africa and Me Eucallitris Brongniart (Tetraclinis) with four scales to the 0° and a single species of northern Africa. aa * Endlicher, Synopsis Coniferarum 271. 1847. Berry: NOTES ON THE GENUS WIDDRINGTONITES 343 However admirable this arrangement may be when only the living species are considered, it will not answer for the fossil forms, and paleobotanists quite rightly maintain the various genera Frenelites, Frenelopsis, Widdringtonia, Widdringtonites, Callitris, etc., ranging in age from the older Mesozoic through the Tertiary and abundantly fortified by fruiting specimens. Fossil fruits of still other species and perhaps genera occur in the late Tertiary formations of Australia, the weight of the evidence showing that this type was considerably more varied in the past, the existing 2% SS 165 te Wi bila , Freneda \ re Ww : Actr 9 Fitzroya Fitzroya a J = Fig, 1, ; Sketch map of the world showing the segregation of the existing Cine obinge and the Mesozoic occurrences of Frenelopsis and Widdringtonites. indicate Fy enelopsis and crosses indicate Widdringtonites. : i i . * . he being isolated remnants of a once almost worldwide distribu- The accompanying sketch map of the world partially indicates the form Seen mi eee the numerous Cenozoic records. It will be Western G iddringtonites is recorded in North America from or southward to Alabama and Frenelopsis from to Texas. Abroad both types occur abundantly in 344 Berry: Nores ON THE GENUS WIDDRINGTONITES central and western Europe. Like so many other types of plants which were widespread in Mesozoic time, they became more and more restricted in their range during the Tertiary, until today they are not found at all in the western hemisphere and are confined to the limited areas indicated on the accompanying sketch map (FIG. 1). If we refer only to the Cretaceous forms of Widdringtonites there are four species in the Neocomian, one in the Barremian, one in the Albian, three in the Cenomanian, and one in the Senonian. Widdringtonites subtilis was described from the Atane (Upper Cretaceous) beds of Greenland by Professor Heer* in 1874. His material was, however, extremely limited. Subsequently, similar remains were found in considerable abundance in the Raritan formation of New Jersey,t and still more recently Hollickt has recorded them from Marthas Vineyard and Block Island (Mag- othy formation). The writer has found it in the Magothy formation of Maryland§ and in the Middendorf beds of South Carolina.||_ It may also be questioned if some of the coniferous material described by Velenovsky from the Bohemian Upper Cretaceous under other names should not be compared with the present form. The material from the Tuscaloosa formation of western Ala- bama, which furnishes the basis for the following notes, is abundant, being especially common at the locality known as the Snow Place Tuscaloosa County; and it enables a considerable addition to be made to the knowledge of this species, which may be described a follows: Foliage more or less dimorphic, very variable in this wei Leaves, especially those on the young twigs, arranged in a crowd spiral, small and pointed; the inner surface comparatively frat bounded laterally by sharp, somewhat thickened: angular eds the outer side broad, full, and rounded. The young louver crowded and relatively short, broad, and appressed, the short! curved pointed tips giving them the appearance of being Foul” § Berry, Johns Hopkins Univ. Circ. New series 7: 81. 1997: | Berry, Bull. Torrey Club 38: 421. 1911. Berry: NOTES ON THE GENUS WIDDRINGTONITES 345 apically (see FIG. 1 and 2). These leaves are not so short and broad as they appear in FIG. 1, 3, 4, 5, since in these specimens the entire leaf substance, except the cuticularized epidermis, has disappeared, and they are much flattened. The older leaves usually become elongated proximad and somewhat spreading and falcate distad, with a considerable decurrent base as shown in FG. 2. The leaves on twigs of the year are about 1.5 mm. in length while those on old twigs are about 2 to 3 mm. in length. Along their lateral angles the former bear minute spines, which increase in size and length distad (FIG. 3, 3a). The epidermal cells are small, about 0.025 to 0.0333 mm. in diameter, the longest diameter approximately parallel with the axis of the leaf, more or less regularly rectangular in outline except at the angles of the leaf and in the vicinity of the stomata, and they have very thick yellowish walls. The stomata are about 0.0333 mm. in diameter and show two thick, generally almost closed, nearly white, blunt- ended guard cells, without fixed orientation with respect to the different pairs or the major axis of the leaf. They appear to lie just beneath the surface of the epidermis. The guard cells are surrounded by a ring of five or six accessory epidermal cells, which are smaller than the regular epidermal cells, nearly uniform in size, and with their inner walls thinner than their outer. These appear to be on the same level as the ordinary epidermal cells. The Stomata are sparsely scattered over the major portion of the leaf but are usually absent or but sparingly represented in the distal half of the leaf. They are somewhat massed toward the base on the sides of the leaf j .., © Position of the stomata on the leaf shown in FIG. 5 is Ph in the enlarged drawing which forms FIG. 5a. The degree : Spreading Or appression of the leaves varies from specimen to version; due, I suppose, in some measure to the conditions attending fossilization, A form with uniformly slender and “Preading leaves is common at Shirley’s Mill, Fayette County, Alabama, . In his discussion of this species Professor Newberry mentions a — about one cm. in diameter as included in the Raritan nee from New Jersey. I have not seen this specimen, but I ound a number of poorly preserved detached cones among 346 Berry: NOTES ON THE GENUS WIDDRINGTONITES the abundant remains of this species in the Upper Cretaceous beds of South Carolina. A number of specimens from the Tusca- loosa formation have these cones attached to the characteristic twigs of this species (PLATE 24, FIG. 2). These cones are terminal, roughly spheroidal in outline, and apparently consist of four thick scales with wide blunt tips and somewhat extended bases. They are 7 to 9 mm. in length and 4 or 5 mm. in diameter and are closely comparable to the cones from the Cretaceous of eastern Europe ascribed to Widdringtonites Reichii by both Velenovsky* and Krasser.t One of the best preserved of these attached cones from Alabama is shown enlarged ten times in FIG. 2a. So far as I know, the only previous description of stomatal or epidermal characters in fossil species of the genus Widdringtonites refers to species preserved in the Baltic amber, which is of Tertiary age and some millions of years younger than the species just described. One of these species, Wéiddringtonites oblongifolius Goeppert and Menge, is extremely close to the Cretaceous species Widdringtonites subtilis Heer not only in its general facies but 1 the details of its epidermal characters. As described recently by Caspary,t the chief difference is the more elongated leaf bases, a feature that is always of extreme variability in this genus, and even within the limits of a single species, as is well shown by the specimens of Widdringtonites subtilis, which are figured in the present connection. re Although so little has been published that refers to Widdrins- tonites, several authors have described the somewhat similar epidermal characters in the allied extinct genus Frenelops's- Thus Zeiller§ described these features for the type of the . genus, Frenelopsis Hoheneggeri Schenk, in 1882, and Velenortt described the very similar Frenelopsis bohemica in 1888. i y the present writer described ]_ these features in Frenelopsis 0” it 1885} * Velenovsky, Gym. Bohm. Kreidef. 27. pl. 8. f. 4-6; pl. 10. f. Ir 1% u Sitz. K. Bohm. Gesell. Wiss. 1886: 639 (6). pl. 1. f. 14-16. 1887. 7 t Krasser, Beitr. Paliont. Ost.-Ung. u. Orients 10: 126. pl. 14 (4) f. 6 r Jo 8, 7.6. > 1Rob. t Caspary, R. Abh. K. Preuss. Geol. Landesanstalt. Neue F olge, Heit * 1906: 66. pl. 9. f. 52~53c (see especially f. 53a, 6, c). § Zeiller, Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. VI. 13: 231. pl. Il. botanique 274. fig. 106 1900. || Velenovsky, Sitz. K. Bohm. Gesell. Wiss. 1888: 590. f. 1-3» 7 {| Berry, Bot. Gaz. 50; 305-309. f. I, 2. I910. 1882; Elements de Paleo 1888. Berry: NOTES ON THE GENUS WIDDRINGTONITES 347 sissima Fontaine, a Lower Cretaceous species of eastern North America. In all of these three species the epidermal cells are small, more or less rectangular, and thick-walled, as they are in Widdring- tonites subtilis. The stomata consist of a ring of from four to six radially arranged and more or less elevated guard cells. These cells are represented in Widdringtonites subtilis by the ring of accessory epidermal cells shown in FIG. 6, which occupy the same level as the rest of the epidermis, while lying below this level are the two stout guard cells, Frenelopsis ramosissima differs from the other two species of Frenelopsis previously mentioned in having certain of the epidermal cells spined, and Widdringtonites subtilis Heer curiously resembles Frenelopsis ramosissima in that the epidermal cells along the lateral angles of the leaf have more or less developed small spines, which Merease in length and size distad, as shown in FIG. 3a and 5a. A consideration of the sum of the known characters in the genera Widdringtonites and Frenelopsis leads to the conclusion that they are surely related. The combination of similar foliage, similar four-valved cones; similar epidermal and stomatal features in Widdringtonites and Widdringtonia render certain the reference of the Upper Cretaceous species Widdringtonites subtilis Heer to what repre- sented the modern subfamily Cupressineae during the Cretaceous. Jouns Hopkins UNIversity, BALTIMorE, Mp. and 348 BERRY: NOTES ON THE GENUS WIDDRINGTONITES Explanation of plates 24, 25 PLATE 24 : Fic. 1. From a photograph of a specimen from the Tuscaloosa formation at Big Gully, Snow Place, ib sai ey — ae size. FIG. 2 locality showing a number er sp of poorly preserved attached cones. : Fic. 2a. One of the cones from the specimen shown in FIG. 2, enlarged ten times. PLATE 25 1G. I. From a photograph of a small terminal twig which was much flattened during aes pepe — time Fic. : e os = 4 tn the elongation of the pai on ihe, older seid, esleasied five tiles Fic. 3. op getty bag of a oe rica te the indistinct outlines of the epi- dermal cells and the sp e distal margins, enlarged ten times. 3a. elke of the distal it a the preceding specimen showing spines, enlarged 50 times FIG. 4, 5. Nlincilitiriata ie of two additional leaves, enlarged ten times. Fic. 5a. Drawing in outlin ne is the specimen shown in FIG. 5, to location of the stomata, enlarged 50 cells, Fic. 6. Drawing of one of nay gcc and the adjacent epidermal enlarged 205 times. [Illust.] : Howe, R. H. Oropogon loxensis and its North American distribution. Mycologia 4: 152-156. f. 1, 2. My 1912 Howe, R. H. Some lichens from Muncuchct Island, Massachusetts. Rhodora 14: 88-90. 1 My 1912. : lishiba, E. Mosses common to North America and Japan. Bryologis! 15: 39-41. My 1g12. Edited by J. M. Holzinger. Jennings, O.E. Some rare Ohio plants from Ashtabula Couatys 0 Torreya 12: 107-110. f. 1. My 1912 » ©. H. Mushrooms. Nat. Send, Rev. 8: 172-181. f. 1-4 My 1912 Discusses in Cae style certain edible and poisonous fung 1. 9: Kennedy, P. B. Alpine plants—V. Muhlenbergia 7: 139-156 vil 15 F 1912;—VI. Muhlenbergia 8: 18, 19. f. I. 29 F gyre, $: ee 8: 25, 26.f. 2. 30 Mr 1912;—VIII. Muhlenberg! © 46, 47. f. 3. 25 Ap 1912. Knowlton, C. H., and others. Reports on the flora of th district—XIII. Rhodora 13; 248-251. 19 D 1911; ico dora 14: 76-78. 8 Ap 1912. hio. e Boston Rho- INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 353 Kiikenthal, G. Cyperaceae-caricoideae. Pflanzenreich 4”: 1-824. f. I-128. 1909. Livingston, B. E. The choosing of a problem for research in plant physiology. Plant World 15: 73-82. Ap 1912. ivingston, B. E. Present problems in soil physics as related to plant activities. Am. Nat. 46: 294-301. My 1012. Macbride, T. H. “The passing of the slime-moulds.” Science II. 35: 741-743. 10 My 1og12. Macfarlane, J. M. Nepenthaceae. Pflanzenreich 4'": 1-92. f. I-19. 1908 908. Macfarlane, J. M. Sarraceniaceae. Pflanzenreich 4': 1-38. f. I-11. Varietéten. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 42-44. 15 Mr 1912; 22: 57- 60. 15 Ap 1912. Meyer, R. Weiteres iiber Echinocactus myriostigma S.-D. und seine Standortsvarietiten. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 49. 15 Ap 1912. fore, C.L. Some Nova Scotian aquatic fungi. Trans. Nova Scotia Inst. Sei. 12: 217-238. 18 Mr 1912. Nichols, G, E. Notes on Connecticut mosses—III. Rhodora 14: 45°52. 5 Mr to12. Nicholson, W. E, The genus Claopodium in Europe. Bryologist 15: 41-44. My 1912. Noter, R. de. Notes sur les A gave, Dasylirion, Bonapartea et Beschor- merta. Rev. Hort. Belge et Etrangére 38: 33-35. 15 Ja 1912; 9,97. 15 Mr 1912; 144-146. 1 My 1912. Osterhout, G.E. New plants from Colorado. Muhlenbergia 8: 44, 45. 25 Ap 1912, C : : “ORswellia concinna sp. nov. and Gnaphalium decurrens glandulosum var. nov. OS aking snow. Am. Bot. 18: 33-35. My 1912. R. Further notes regarding selection index numbers. Am. Nat. Prete $02-307._ My 1912. *r, N. E. Abnormalities in prothallia of Pteris longifolia. Bot. Reprat, 83: 435-438. f. I-4. 15 My 1912. Ids, E. g, Relations of parasitic fungi to their host plants—I. 354 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Studies of parasitized leaf tissue. Bot. Gaz. 53: 365-395. f. I-9. 15 My I912. Riddle, L. W. An enumeration of lichens collected by Clara Eaton Read in Jamaica—I. Mycologia 4: 125-140. y 1912. I14 species and includes 11 new species in Biatora (3), Buellia (1), Catillarie (1), et (2), Bilimbia (3), and Erioderma (1). Rigg, G. B. Notes on the ecology and economic importance of Nereo- cystis Luetkeana. Plant World 15: 83-92. f. 1-8. Ap ban Robinson, C. B. Philippine Urticaceae—II. Philip. Jour. Sc. 6: (Bot.) 299-314. S 1911. Includes descriptions of 6 new species. S ’ Rolfe, R. A. The evolution of the Orchidaceae. Orchid Rev. 19: 68, 69. Mr 1911; 289-292. O 1911. we Rolfe, R. A. Schomburgkia Lueddemani. Curt. Bot. Mag: IV. 8: pl. 8427. Ap 1912. An orchid from Venezuela. Safford, W. E. Notes of a naturalist afloat—II. Am. Fern eae 1-12. pl. r. 29 F 1912. [lIllust.];—III. Am. Fern Jour. 2: 334 pl. 2, 3. 11 My 1912. Schaffner, J.H. Key to the fruits of the genera of trees of the northern United States. Ohio Nat. 12: 506-512. Ap 1912. cs Schaffner, J. H. The North American lycopods without terminé cones. Ohio Nat. 12: 497-499. f. 1-4. Ap 1912 P Schlechter, R. Orchidaceae novae et criticae_XXVI. Repert. A Nov. 10: 291-296. 31 Ja 1912; Decas XXVII-XXVIII. a6 Sp. Nov. 10: 352-363. 20 F 1912; Decas XIX-XX. oy es Sp. Nov. 10: 385-397. 15 Mr 1912; Decas XXI-XXIII. Repe Sp. Nov. 10: 445-461. 10 Ap 1912. Og Seaver, F. J. The genus Lasiosphaeria. Mycologia 4: Slt a: 8 66,67. My 1912. raced a yi ie species and figures. Lasiosphaeria multiseptata and L. jamoi- censis spp. nov. are also described. herff, E. E. The vegetation of Skokie Marsh, with specia py to subterranean organs and their interrelations. Bot. Gaz. 53° 435. f. I-10. 15 My 1912 6. Skan, S. A. Calceolaria Forgetii. Curt. Bot. Mag. IV. 8: pl. 843 My 1912. A plant from Peru. L Smith, C. P. Studies in the genus Erythrocoma Greene— bergia 8: 1-11. pl. 1-3. 29 F 1912. ‘: Spaulding, P. Notes upon tree diseases in the eastern states. logia 4: 148-151. My 1912. ] reference Mubhlen- Myce INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 355 Among these diseases are the chestnut blight, Lophodermium nervisequum, Perider- mium fructigenum, Myxosporium acerinum, and Phoma piciena. Spillman, W. J. The present status of the genetics problem. Science IT. 35: 757-767. 17 My 1912. Sturgis, W.C. A guide to the botanical literature of the Myxomvycetes from 1875 to 1912. Colorado Col. Publ. Sci. 12: 385-433. 1 Je 1912. Swingle, W. T. Observations sur quelques espéces indo-chinoises des genres Afalantia et Glycosmis. Not. Syst. 2: 158-160. 20D 1911; 161-163. f. 7. 25 Mr 1912. Taylor, N. Our native shrubs and what may be done with them. Garden Mag. 15: 166-168. Ap 1912. Taylor, N. Some modern trends in ecology. Torreya 12: I110-II7. My 1912. Theissen, F. Zur Revision der Gattung Dimerosporium. Beih. Bot. Centralb. 29: 45-73. 12 Ap 1912. Includes several American species. Thornber, J. J. Botany. Ann. Rep. Univ. Arizona Agr. Exp. Sta. Thornber, J. J. Native cacti as emergency forage plants. Univ. Arizona Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 67: 457-519. 20D 1911. Includes notes on cultural work, a key to the species, etc. » 0.1. Purity and germination of agricultural and vegetable seeds sold in North Carolina. North Carolina Dept. Agr. Bull. 94; 5-78. $1. 7-8 + f. 1, 2. O 1011. : Tullsen, H. Some Dakota wild flowers. Am. Bot. 18: 1-7. F 1912; 35-39. My 1g12. [Illust.] Vaupel, [F.] Echinocactus nidulans Quehl. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 50. 15 Ap 1912. [Illust.] Vaupel, F. Fiinf neue, von J. N. Rose beschriebene Opuntien. Monats. _Kakteenk. 22: 60-62. 15 Ap 1912. — H.de. Oenothera nanella, healthy and diseased. Science I. 35. . ‘93, 754. 10 My 1912. 7, R.A. Letter to the members of the American Fern Society. oo Jour. 2: 58-62. 11 My 10912. P hag J. Conservation ideals in the improvement of plants. °P: Sci. Mo. 80: 578-586. Je 1912. 2 W. Cereus platygonus Otto. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 50- 36. 15 Ap 1912. Influence of crossing in increasing the yield of the > t ee, ON. Y, Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 346: 57-76. Mr 1912. 356 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Wester, P. J. The mango. Philip. Bur. Agr. Bull. 18: 6-60. pl. 1-9. I9II. Wester, P. J. Roselle, its cultivation and uses. Philip. Agr. Rev. 5: 123. pl. 1-3 +f. 1. Mr 1912. Hibiscus Sabdariffa L. Winslow, E. J. Some hybrid ferns in Connecticut. Am. Fern Jour. 2: 63. 11 My 1912. Whetzel, H. H., & Rosenbaum, J. The diseases of ginseng and their control. U.S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 250: 7-44. pl. 1-12 +f. 1-5. 30 Ap 1912. Wright, C. H. Agave protuberans. Curt. Bot. Mag. IV. 8: pl. 8429. A p 1912. A plant from Mexico. BuLL. ToRREY CLUB VOLUME 39, PLATE 24 BERRY : WIDDRINGTONITES MEMOIRS OF THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB : A series of technical papers on botanical subjects, published at irregular intervals. Price $3.00 a volume. Not offered in exchange. Vol. 1, No.1; not furnished separately : Bailey, Liberty Hyde. Studies of the types of various species of the genus Carex. Pages 1-85. 25 My 1880. t= Be. 2; not furnished separately : Martindale, Isaac Co Baty arine alse of the New Jersey coast and adjacent waters of Staten Island. PS 87-11 24 Au oe Vo No. 3; price, 75 cents : Spruce, Richard. epaticae Bolivianae, in Andibus ‘Boliviae orientalis, annis se 1885-6, a cl. H. H. Rusby lectae. Pages 113-140. a 1890. Vol. 1, No. 4; price, 75 cents Sturtevant, Edward ~ On seedless fruits. ace 141-187. 30 My 1890, Vol. 2, No. 1; not furnished separ ately : Halsted, Byron David. pose food-materials in buds and surrounding parts. Pages 1-26, plates 1, 2. 10S 1890 oe No. 2; price, 75 cents: Vail, Anna M lick, Charles Arthur. Contributions to the botany of Virginia, ona me pis 3) 4. 23 D 1890. Vol. 2, No. 3; not furnished separately : Holm, Herman Theodor. Contributions to the koowiatee: of th iene St some North American plants. Pages 57-108, plates 5-19. 15 a I Vol. 2, No. 4; price, 75 cents: is ey te Wheelock, William Efner. The genus Polyga/a in North America. sion 109~ e 152. 30D 18or. oo ol. = No 1; not furnished separately : Seal Jobs Kune ‘eller, Amos Arthur. Flora of western North Carolina contiguous territo tory. leah I-39. 20 F 1892. Vol 3, No. 2; price, $2.00: Age Morong, ‘Thom The NVaiadaceae of North America [with illustrations of all the pam 3 ai Pages 1-65, plates 20-74. 15 Mr 1893. : ep 1. 3, No. 3; not furnished separately : ie by, Henry Hurd. An ee of the plants collected in Bolivia = — ae [Part FE = Pag Vol. 4, mae 1; not furnished separa arate me eon Lucien Marcus. Index aici te 3g Part I, Me J ce EGE 10 Je 1893. ase ee : i. : No. 2; not pais apomemae ete ea : ois. ae Viv nia durin he season ae see “Pegs 93-30%; plates : sts a. re a = Bas Vol. 4, No. 3; Price, 50 cents : Bony Borg Bt PON. Be eae, Wo, ee Ne PY ga g Part 2. silleg 203-274. I0 Mr-17 “Ap 1895. . Vol. 4, No. 4; price, 50 cents ot peat Arachis: hypogaca “Ly od 275-206, pte - Liebmann’s name spectabilis is reduced to a synonym of S. Se ‘ i ana. Liebmann’s own sheets of spectabilis (U. S. Nationa Museum no. 591311 and 591312) do not have the shining ci mentioned in his description of L. spectabilis. Otherwise, exceP Lieb- . . ns imens for their smaller size, they seem to be very like the larger spect included in S. Schiedeana. * Not the same as von Tiirckheim 353 under S. costaricensis. ie a Lomaria longifolia Kaulf. 1824; since transferred to Stenochlaena; S. sorbifolia, according to Christensen. BROADHURST: STRUTHIOPTERIS IN NORTH AMERICA 373 Christensen makes these three names (Schiedeana, longifolia, and spectabilis) synonyms of Lomaria ornifolia* Presl. Presl published L. Schiedeana five years after L. ornifolia; in comparing them he described ornifolia, thought to be from Peru, as differing in having obliquely cordate bases: Schiedeana he elsewhere described as having elliptical-obtuse, not subcordate, bases. There seems therefore no reason for adopting S. ornifolia as the specific name for these plants which possess rounded to almost tapering bases. Fée’s L. acrodonta has apparently an abnormal fertile frond; not having access to the type, Schaffner 102, 1854, I see no valid reason for separating it from S. Schiedeana, especially as the description contains contradictory statements as to size. In the Rovirosa specimen included in 5S. Schiedeana, the fertile frond has in two Places a pair of fertile pinnae instead of the usual single pinna. Such abnormality has not been noticed in any other species of Struthiopteris.+ 18. S. sessilifolia (Klotzsch) Broadh. comb, nov. Lomaria sesstlifolia_ Klotzsch; Christ, Bull. Boiss. IL. 4: 1092. 1904. Blechnum sessilifolia{um] C. Chr. Ind. Bil. 159. 1905. Plantst terrestrial. Rhizome (not seen). Sterile fronds 1.5 m. jong: Stipes 50-82 cm. long, angulate, dull brownish, the scales Roe ate, I.5-2 cm. long, 2-4 mm. broad, dull brownish, ragged according to Christ, reddish straw-colored, very soft, and thread- Ke); lamina 96 cm. long, 29 cm. wide, oblong, not at all or but t , pie SPPosite, the rachis grayish brown, with dull brownish, Seta 58- re oe or less appressed, and deciduous scales; pinnae >” 70-jugate, linear-oblong, mostly falcate, the apex attenuate, 'S, 13-15 cm. long, 20 mm. wide; margins irregularly + leaf tissue herbaceous (much rolled in the poorly oe Cotype seen), not araneous below, the costal scales Site or’ ovate-lanceolate, light brown, rather numerous; * Rel, Haenk, 3: 5I. 182s, : di 8 eng under S. violacea of spurlike growths at the bases of the fertile Species of Struthiopteris, p. 380. t Thi ‘eae Ra escription is chiefly from the U. S. National Museum cotype of L. 374 BROADHURST: STRUTHIOPTERIS IN NORTH AMERICA veins slightly grooved above, appearing below as distinct, fine lines slightly but not definitely raised, the vein spaces 10-13 to 1 cm., the vein apices often marked by delicate, irregular, decidu- ous, scalelike growths. Sporophyls at least 100 cm. long; stipe over 22 cm. long (complete stipe not seen); lamina 80 cm. long; pinnae about 60-jugate, 12-15 cm. long, 3-4 mm. wide, the apex with a sterile tip 2-4 mm. long, the base distinctly cordate and petioled, the petioles bearing throughout glandular swellings at the upper side where they join the rachis;* sporangia dark brown; indusium not very heavy, irregularly but quite fully lacerate, apparently quite persistent. Cotype in the U. S. National Museum, no. 472015, 472016, collected “Sommet. du Volcan de Poas,” 2,644 m., Costa Rica, Tonduz 10710, November 1896. If not distinct, this could well be considered a mainland form of S. lineata. It differs as indicated in the key, and also in having many more pinnae. The only island specimens of 5. lineata having more than 40 pinnae are the peculiar ones from Santo Domingo which were mentioned under S. lineata as quite different from the rest of that species; they, however, do»not resemble this plant collected by Tonduz, as they are much heavier in texture al have much narrower laminae. 19. S. Shaferi Broadh. sp. nov. Plants terrestrial. Rhizome evidently large, the scales 1.5-2 cm. long, tufted, rigidly.erect, linear, broader at the base, often abruptly so, yellowish brown with a definite dark brown eee Sterile fronds 32-42 cm. long; stipes 3-10 cm. long, somewhat angulate, straw-colored to brownish, th on the rhizome, shorter, loosely arranged or disappe age; lamina 16-35 cm. long, 14-18 cm. wide, oblong elliptical (young oblanceolate), abruptly reduced at ns ie long, 10-15 mm. wide (through the dilation or auricle), to the acuminate, entire, the base broadly dilated and fully ene rachis in the upper pinnae, in the lower ones narrowed se below the expansion or auricle on the lower side of the pin Free pe Each petiole has therefore a peculiar shouldered appearance, sterile pinnae have the same glandular expansion of the a BROADHURST: STRUTHIOPTERIS IN NorRTH AMERICA 375 barely petioled; margins incompletely and very narrowly revolute, entire,* not cartilaginous, finely glandular with stalked glands ;t leaf tissue coriaceous, gray-green or sometimes when dried yellow- ish brown, much as in 5S. Werckleana, the costal scales smaller or lacking; veins not raised, indistinct, not swollen at their apices, the vein spaces 15 or 16 to I cm. Sporophyls 67 cm. long;t stipes 18 cm. long; lamina 47 cm. long, abruptly reduced at the base, not reduced at the apex; pinnae 19-jugate, with a sterile apex I-2 mm. long, the base decurrently adnate in the upper pinnae, sessile in the lower ones and rounded to cordate, 9.5-11 cm. long, 2-3 mm. wide; sporangia brownish yellow; indusium cartilaginous, fully and regularly lacerate to the base, the sides of the lacerations concavely hollowed, the edges finely fimbriate. [PLATE 27.] Type in the New York Botanical Garden herbarium, collected at Camp La Gloria, south of Sierra Moa, Oriente, Cuba, J. A. Shafer 8106, Dec. 24-30, 1910. 20. S. striata (Sw.) Broadh. comb. nov. Onoclea striata Sw. Syn. Fil. 304; 422. 1806. Lomaria striata Willd. Sp. Pl. §: o6r. 2856. Lomaria Ryani Kaulf. Enum. Fil. 155. 1824. j Lomaria brasiliensis Raddi (?), Pl. Bras. 1: 50. pl. 72, 72 bis. 1825, Lomaria tuberculata J. Sm.§ Cat. Kew Ferns. 1856. i capense Diels (in part), in E. & P. Nat. Pfl. 14: 249. Blechnum striatum C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 160. 1905. Plants terrestrial. Rhizome at least 2.5 cm.,thick, the scales ath nn ng, 2-4 mm. wide, varying from. dark fawn to burnt : T. Sterile fronds 35-125 cm. long; stipes 15-74 cm. long, istered, angulate, usually light-colored, dull to shining, the Scales lighter, otherwise as on the rhizome, very deciduous, fewer pets Ones among them than in S. lineata or none at all, the * i . " this Paap entire; not even subserrately margined by the swollen vein apices. In Bade affords a marked contrast to all the petioled species previously of t Numerous, tiny, stalked glands are found on the revolute margin. Nothing the kind has bee han any other seen (collected in 1911), and this fact may account U iana, to : is most nearly related, do not possess similar glands. : lowing measurements refer to the single fertile trond seen. tding to Smith himself; Cat. Ferns Br. Gard. 4o. 376 BROADHURST: STRUTHIOPTERIS IN NORTH AMERICA position of the fallen ones marked by points as in S. lineata; lamina 22-71 cm. long, 12-35 cm. wide, broadly lanceolate to broadly oblong (broadly ovate or elliptical in the smaller plants), not at all or slightly reduced at the base (type A, without vestigial pinnae), usually reduced gradually at the apex, not reduced in the smaller forms; pinnae 7—20-jugate, lanceolate to lance-oblong, straight or slightly curved in the outer half or near their apex (falcate in some of the smaller fronds only), 8-20 cm. long, 1.8-3 cm. wide, tapering gradually, if slightly, to the abruptly acuminate, serrate apex, the lower pinnae petioled, the base decidedly cordate; margins revolute; leaf tissue rigid-herbaceous to coriaceous,* the costae scaly, fibrillose, or naked, the under surface delicately but often fully araneous on the raised veins; veins distinct, definitely raised below, the vein spaces 12-16 to I cm. Sporophyls 40-175 cm. long; stipes 24-118 cm. long; lamina 48-64 cm. long (16-23 in the smaller forms), reduced at the apex, but slightly reduced at the base; pinnae 15-27-jugate (7-15 in the smaller forms) with a sterile tip 5-10 mm. long which is often serrate, the lower petioled and cordate at the base,'7-18 cm. long, 3-6 mm. wide; often whitish-knobbed at the vein ends as in 5. vivipara; sporangia yellowish brown to dark brown; indusium irregularly lacerate, often to the base. TYPE Locality: Martinique,'St. Kitts (St. Christopher). : DISTRIBUTION: St. Kitts, Montserrat, Guadeloupe, Dominic Martinique, St. Vincent, and Grenada. ; _ SPECIMENS INCLUDED: St. Kitts: Forest slopes of Mt. Misery, Britton & Cowell 511. GUADELOUPE: (Definite locality not given)» altitude 700-900 m., Duss 4353 (N, no. 524250; Y): DomINich: Laudat, Lloyd 190 (small form, Y). MARTINIQUE: “Bois de la montagne,” Pelée, altitude 600—-1,000 m., Duss 1555 (N, a 524242, 524243; Y). GRENADA: Sherring 137 (small eee ‘ n bo In this asin SS. lineata there are large and small forms: age these species the field notes are too scanty to help explain differences. Small forms have been seen from Guadeloupe, _ Dominica, Martinique, and Grenada. The Elliott and ns Sherring specimens from Grenada have broadly elliptic to almost square laminae, with curved lower pinnae: Snes p ” t. * Markedly coriaceous in but one plant from St. Vincent (‘Souffritres — in lava, Eggers 6011 N), which differs also in having crowded eens cS” which are deeply cordate; the wide fertile pinnae are somewhat abnorma!, cordate, sterile bases. (See also footnote under S. violacea, P- 380.) BROADHURST: STRUTHIOPTERIS IN NortH AMERICA 377 specimens are not at all reduced at the apex of the lamina; the other smaller forms are but slightly reduced at the apex. Kaulfuss described L. Ryani from Montserrat Island, saying he had seen only young specimens. Despite the reddish woolly character of both surfaces, it probably belongs with striata, from which he separates it because of oblong, smooth tubercles on the rachis at the base of the petioles; the lower, bipinnatifid, fertile pinnae suggest that he had an abnormal frond.* Raddi describes his L. brasiliensis as intermediate between lineata and striata. In the shape of the blade and in the small number of pinnae it Seems nearer the smaller .S. striata plants. 21. S. Underwoodiana Broadh. nom. nov. Lomaria Boryana of American authors, not of Swartz. Blechnum tubulare Diels (in part), in E. & P. Nat. Pf. 1}: 249. 1899, Plants terrestrial. Rhizome ‘a pronounced trunk,} though mostly underground,” the scales 3-3-5 cm. long, linear, rigid, erect, shining, dark brown with a light margin, the whole appearing Position of the fallen ones marked by fine points as in S. rufa; amina 58-70 cm. long, 25-32 cm. wide, oblong or broadly elliptical, abruptly reduced at the base (the lower pinnae 4-8 cm. long, type With vestigial pinnae), but little reduced toward the apex, the Wer ones free in at least half the lamina, the bases never auricled, Tounded Wi ; : at ak . . a margins entire, not revolute; leaf tissue rigid-herbaceous, the; : as _ Possible that the bipinnatifid character may refer to such an abnormality ‘hat ment ++} L 1 Ce jt © ne s 1 - but iS} i toned under S, Schiedeana; the £ : Pecies with a bipinnatifid sterile frond. 0’Professor Underwood; Jenman says it is one or more feet high. L Neate thought that Jenman had modified this statement to include New eBay whic has a caudex 2-3 feet high. A plant now growing at the 1903, has (J ‘anical Garden, which was brought back by Professor Underwood in anuary 1912) a densely scaly crown 3 cm. high and about 3 cm. broad. 378 BROADHURST: STRUTHIOPTERIS IN NORTH AMERICA smooth to shining below; costae* flattened on the under side, naked or with reduced scales, the surface never araneous; veins not raised below, the vein spaces 10-14 to I cm. Sporophyls (in the only complete one seen) 110 cm. long; stipes 30-40 cm. long, marked at least part way by vestigial pinnae; lamina about 67 cm. long, abruptly reduced at the base, somewhat reduced at the apex; pinnae about 30-jugate, 16-30 cm. long, 3-4 mm. wide, heavy, the upper ones decurrent on the lower side, the lower with occasional basal protuberances;{ sporangia dark brown; indu- sium quite regularly lacerate, and occasionally so to the base. {PLATE 28. This illustration includes a tracing from one of Jen- man’s unnumbered specimens, showing the usual reduction of the basal pinnae in the sterile lamina.] Type in the New York Botanical Garden herbarium, collected at New Haven Gap, Jamaica, altitude 5,500 feet, L. M. Underwood 985, February 4, 1903. . SPECIMENS INCLUDED: Jamarca: Base of John Crow Peak, altitude 5,000-5,500 ft., Underwood 2431 (Y). ““ Morse’s Gap,” Harris 7598 (Y). This species has long been confused with the species Boryana (Onoclea Boryana Sw.), originally described from Africa. 1ne original illustrationt shows a very different plant with fewer, short, elliptical, distant pinnae; the original description mentions a arboreous stem, four feet high, and ovate-oblong pinnae which are obtuse and 5-10 cm. long. Even the descriptions of this species by American authors have been influenced by those of the African Boryana; e. g., Jenman describes the Jamaican plant as having an arboreous trunk. It has therefore been necessary to describe the Jamaican species, giving it a new name, S- Underwoodiana, for Professor L. M. Underwood, who collected : +30: in this * In the other species the costae are definitely raised on the lower side; the shining costae look as if smoothed o- ironed down. + See the footnote under S. violacea, p. 380. A small plant, probably S. Underwoodiana, was brought to the N 2 ical Garden conservatories by Professor F. S. Earle from Jamaica 19 si ee cm about nine years but never seemed vigorous. In rg1r it had a rhizome i y- re Ww pinnae suggested S. Shaferi; the laminae were less reduced at the a Shaferi, and the pinnae could hardly be called auricled on the lower side. BROADHURST: STRUTHIOPTERIS IN NORTH AMERICA 379 the plant in Jamaica. The stem description given above is quoted from a letter by Professor Underwood. He brought back a speci- men of the rhizome, but it could not be found during the writing of this paper. He mentioned it as growing ‘‘on the summit of the higher ridges, above 5,000 feet, and not common.” 22. S. varians (Fourn.) Broadh. comb. nov. Lomaria varians Fourn. Mex. Pl. 1: 113. 1872. Blechnum varians C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 161. 1905. Plants terrestrial. Rhizome (not seen). Sterile fronds 60-90 cm. long; stipes 12 cm. or more (incomplete in the cotype at the New York Botanical Garden), apparently not angulate, maroon, the scales yellowish, early deciduous, narrowly triangular to linear, mixed with fibrillose ones; lamina 48-50 cm. long, 25-28 cm. wide, oblong, the base not reduced (type A, without vestigial pinnae), but slightly or not reduced at the apex, the terminal pinna ‘most as long as the lateral ones,* the rachis soon becoming naked; pinnae 15-20-jugate, straight, long-lanceolate to narrowly oblong, € apex serrate, rather abruptly long-acuminate, the base sub- equally rounded, free throughout, petioled, 19 cm. long, 2 cm. wide; margins cartilaginous, irregularly erose-crispate and not revolute; leaf tissue rigid-herbaceous, smooth; veins not raised, the vein *Paces 15-18 to r cm. Sporophyls,t the stipes 15 cm. long, the base densely chaffy with long scales,” pinnae 25-jugate, with a Sterile apex. : Type: Bourgeau 1826; Herb. von Heurck, no. 1420, Mexico, Vallée de Cordoba,” February 4, 1866 (Y). Distrisution: Known from the type locality only. 23. S. violacea (Fée) Broadh. comb. nov. Lomaria violacea Fée, Mém. Foug. 11: 11. pl. 5. 1866. Blechnum violaceum C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 161. 1905. Plants terrestrial. Rhizome 2-4 cm. thick (seen only in small *Pecimens), the scales short (5 mm. or less) umber or brown- br oa Sterile fronds of two types, (1) short and ovate or ¢ + ~Oidly lanceolate, and (2) larger and oblong, 18-100 cm. long;t es x a Abnormal in the New York Botanical Garden type number; not reduced, how- “as type number seen either at Kew or Geneva. % wee in Fournier’s incomplete description. They are lacking in the New Ah tanical Garden sheets, mens sd “ays the length may reach 100 cm.; he figures one of the “smaller” speci- ch measures 118 cm.; no scale is given, however. 380 BROADHURST: STRUTHIOPTERIS IN NORTH AMERICA stipes 4-50 cm. long, clustered, somewhat angulate, the color varying from black and reddish black to dark violet, shining where naked, the younger, at least, having scales which are seemingly viscid and which dry as straight or hooked projections (appressed in one large specimen); lamina 13-44 cm. long, 7-25 cm. wide, abruptly reduced at the base (type A, without vestigial pinnae), gradually reduced at the apex, the rachis soon becoming naked and shining; pinnae 12-50-jugate, oblong and lanceolate to nar- rowly oblong, often opposite below, 4-10 cm. long, 8-16 mm. wide, the apex acute,* obtuse or only apparently so in the thicker forms with rolled pinnae, the bases subcordate to cordate or unequally cordate, but 1-4 of the upper pinnae adnate, the rest free, and the lower petioled; margins usually ~evolute,t the pinnae themselves rolled in the heavier forms; leaf tissue coriaceous in the smaller forms, membranous to rigid-herbaceous in the larger ones, costae more or less scaly, under surface smooth ;{ veins raised below, sunken above in the coriaceous plants, the vein spaces 14-16 tol cm. Sporophyls 40-85 cm. long, but taller than the sterile in all complete specimens seen; lamina 20-37 cm. long; pinnae 11-25 jugate, 4-5 mm. wide, the apex obtuse or with a sterile tp 37 mm. long, the bases cordate, the lower pinnae distinctly petioled with spurlike protuberances;§ the margins of the very dark an heavy pinnae often with whitish spots corresponding to the vein apices; sporangia very dark brown; indusium irregularly lacerate. * Fée says ‘“‘tunc obtusiusculis, tunc acuminatis.” Only the smaller specimens seen show the blunt tips. + Irregularly so and serrate in a young, membranous plant from Lloyd 315. t Slightly araneous below in Duss 3710. § All the fertile fronds of S. violacea bear curious spurlike protuber the axils of most of the lower pinnae. They are plainly discernible to _ and usually. 2-5 mm. long. milar spurs are found with some of the dati ee in a few of the petioled species: S. vivipara, S. Christii (very small), S. chiriquan? (apparently brittle and deciduous), S. Schiedeana (few, but interesting in nc sae with the twin pinnae seen in one specimen), S. striata (in the pecu iar volcanic _ men from St. Vincent only, and as flattish glandular areas), and in S. Un Zane Fertile fronds of S. danaeacea and S. varians were not accessible after this ee was noted. It does not occur in any of the non-petioled species. (It is hate! go fertile lamina of U. S. National Herbarium no. 575235, but there are wee of te: 4 oe ee Wee | rs *y “ : f oe ag 3 rather Dominica, ances in or near naked eye large, and distinct black glossy gland exactly resembling except in mon scale insect. Were it more constant,” he adds, “I would conside : species.’’ No other reference to similar growths on the rachis, either fertil Sais tuk ce 1; tl wires 1 Panama plant included in S. chiriquana occasional, elongated, glandular areas on the sterile rachis. shows BROADHURST: STRUTHIOPTERIS IN NoRTH AMERICA 381 Type: Fée, Mém. Foug. 11: pl. 5. 1866; from Guadeloupe. DISTRIBUTION: Known from Guadeloupe, Dominica, and Mar- tinique. SPECIMENS INCLUDED: GUADELOUPE: Duss 4165 (Y), Duss 3710 (Y). Dominica: Laudat, Lloyd 315 (Y, N). MAartTINIQUE: Montagne Pelée, Duss 4163 (Y). This species shows great variation in size, texture, and in the length and apices of the pinnae; most of the smaller coriaceous ones bear legends indicating that they are from high altitudes and the sides of volcanoes. Parallel information is wanting, however, for the larger specimens. The colored stipes and the heavy, lacerate, whitish-dotted fertile pinnae are apparently common to all mature specimens. Fée describes the sterile stipes as bearing short, remote spines, which are not present on our specimens or in his figure; the numerous projections figured on it resemble the dried, viscid scales described above. 24. Struthiopteris vivipara Broadh. sp. nov. Plants terrestrial. Rhizome 3 cm. thick in the fragment seen, the scales very few, 2-2.5 cm. long, 4-6 mm. broad, brown umber, More or less plicate. Sterile fronds 85-90 cm. long; stipes 24-25 cm. long, angulate, vestigial pinnae present throughout, shining mahogany, the scales light brownish yellow, deciduous, shapeless and wholly appressed to the stipe, their attachment indicated as in S. lineata; lamina 64-66 cm. long, 28-30 cm. wide, oblong, abruptly reduced at the base (type A, with vestigial pinnae), not reduced at the apex, the terminal pinna 12-15 cm. long, viviparous at or very near the apex of the rachis; pinnae 15-16-jugate, oblong- lanceolate but broadest at the cordate base, straight or occasionally bid slightly curved near the apex, the apex acute, never long- ‘cuminate, the base cordate and free throughout, mostly sessile and the rachis covered by the bases of the pinnae, the lower pinnae Petioled, 15 cm. long, 3—-3.5 cm. wide; margins serrate, slightly ne mot at all revolute; leaf tissue rigid-herbaceous, the costae Much like the stipe but also finely chaffy or fibrillose, the lower “hey of the pinnae decidedly and finely araneous over the once 382 BROADHURST: STRUTHIOPTERIS IN NORTH AMERICA jugate, 15-17 cm. long, the terminal pinna 11-16 cm. long, 5-7 mm. wide, heavy, sometimes with a sterile apex 2-5 mm. long, the base cordate, petioled (lower 5 mm.), occasionally with spur- like protuberances ;* the margins of the pinnae have whitish glands marking many of. the vein apices as in S. violacea; sporangia very dark brown; indusium narrow, early deciduous, brittle, and very irregularly lacerate. [PLATE 29.] Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 575810, 575811, and in the New York Botanical Garden, collected on moist banks on the trail in the vicinity of La Palma, Costa Rica, altitude 1,450-1,550 m., William R. Maxon 435, May 6-8, 1906. The type of S. Christii is from Costa Rica, but S. vivipara is evidently a very different plant. The following differences be- tween the specimen mentioned under S. Christi (from Christ's herbarium) and 5S. vivipara may be noted: S. vivipara is oblong in shape and not reduced at the tip, the single specimen of S. Christit is ovate-lanceolate and gradually reduced at the tip; in 5. vivipara the stipe and rachis are almost scurfy in appearance, owing » the fine, amorphous character of the wholly appressed scales; 1 Christ’s sheet the scales are mainly definite, at least I cm. long, and appressed only at their bases, the stipes looking much like very scaly S. lineata stipes. The viviparous character may not prove constant, but it appears in each of the five fronds seen. 25. S. Werckleana (Christ) Broadh. comb. nov. Lomaria Werckleana Christ, Bull. Boiss. II. 4: 1091. 1904: Blechnum Werckleanum C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 161. 1995. Plants terrestrial. Rhizome apparently subarboreous, iis scales linear, 2.5-3 cm. long, shining, rigid, erect, with a dar : center, tobacco brown to umber. Sterile fronds 115-14 cm. eo stipest 58 cm. long, but slightly angulate, usually marked to ae base with vestigial pinnae, the scales like those of the rhizome smaller and soon deciduous; lamina 83-110 cm. long, 15-25 an wide, narrowly oblong, the base abruptly reduced (type Ay We ‘ “spangled by scales’? which are narrow, fibrillose, m . : . chis; with hoary ones, forming fine, webbed masses on EE - seem * See footnote under S. violacea, p. 380. fronds seen: PORT ie Ser tee ee +} ts of the only complete ge from n specimens two sterile fronds and one fertile one; they are Wercklé’s ow Christ’s herbarium. BROADHURST: STRUTHIOPTERIS IN NORTH AMERICA 3883 pinnae 35-50-jugate, narrowly oblong, the apex abruptly acumi- nate, slightly curved, not serrate, the base cuneate to somewhat rounded, petioled in all the lower ones, 12-15 cm. long, 13-17 mm. wide; margins entire, not revolute; leaf tissue coriaceous, yellow- ‘ish below when dried; lower surface deciduously araneous with yellowish fibrillose scales, the costae also with fibrillose scales; veins not prominent yet distinct, the vein spaces 18-20 to I cm. Sporophyls 143 cm. long; stipes 66 cm. long; lamina abruptly reduced at the base; somewhat reduced at the apex; pinnae 40- 50-jugate, 22-26 cm. long, 3-4 mm. wide, curved or twisted, heavy, very much reflexed in drying, the sterile (ventral) surface not visible; sporangia brownish yellow; indusium delicate, fawn to light tan, quite regularly lacerate to the base, the margin finely fimbriate. Type: Wercklé 1609, from Costa Rica. DiIsTRIBUTION: Known from Costa Rica only. SPECIMENS INCLUDED: Several sheets without collection num- .ber from Costa Rica collected by Wercklé, now in the U. 5S. National Museum (no. 575241, 575242, and 575243) and in the New York Botanical Garden. This species is conspicuously different from any other species, both the sterile and the fertile fronds. Among the several char- acters given in the description the white or hoary, fibrillose scales of the rachis are perhaps the most peculiar, while the long, curved, fertile pinnae, very much lighter in color (sporangia and indusia) than in any other North American species, are the most striking. Many foreign species have been incorrectly attributed to North America; e. g.,even American writers have included in their local flora Lomaria attenuata Willd., L. procera Spreng., and L. Schom- burgkii Klotzsch. “The tonguelike tips and bases of the pinnatifid leaves of attenuata Willd. differentiate it from S. polypodioides with Which it has been conf used. Under Lomaria procera, Sprengel cites Osmunda procera Forst. The name was first used for a New Zealand *Pecies with remote or distant pinnae, which were ovate-oblong in shape. An early picture in Labillardiére gives two forms of pinnae, neither of which resembles S. lineata or S. striata with which it is ity confused. A fragment of the type of L. Schom- ~ as such characteristic pinnae that it should not be made "62 with any North American species; under it, however, stensen places the species L. rufa Spreng. and L. Ryani Kaulf. There is much need of more material from Central America; 384 BROADHURST: STRUTHIOPTERIS IN NORTH AMERICA except a few specimens from Guatemala there is very little from the region between Costa Rica and Mexico. Seven of the above twenty-five species have Costa Rica or Panama as type locality; for none of these, however, have we a sufficient number of speci- mens to be sure that our descriptions indicate the variation that might reasonably be expected. Much that we have is worth little because of its fragmentary condition; several of the specimens given under INQUIRENDAE are from this region. The collections recently made by J. A. Shafer indicate that Cuba offers similar rewards and difficulties. INQUIRENDAE* 1. One sheet from Costa Rica, Pittier 1921, ‘‘Foréts du Barba, versant Pacifique,” 2,500-2,700 m., 1890 (N), with broad elliptical pinnae a little like S. rufa in shape, but differing in size, coloring, and in the serrate margin with definitely marked vein apices. A young specimen, U.S. National Museum no. 834094 (“Volcan de Poas, Alfaro, San José,” Costa Rica, altitude 2,300 m., 1902), may belong with this. 2. One sheet from Costa Rica collected by J. J. Cooper, U: 5. National Museum no. 154303, November 1886; the slender, fertile pinnae are 25-28 cm. long, and the sori are continued on the dilated, non-petioled, decurrent bases of the pinnae. No petioled species has such fertile fronds. 3. One sheet from Costa Rica collected by Wercklé 1901-1905; (the specimen is an unnumbered one from Christ’s herbarium and bears the name Lomaria procera, below which is written Lyst.): The fibrillose midribs and rachis separate it from S. costaricensts, S. lineata, and S. striata, to which it is nearest. The fertile leal is lacking, though I strongly suspect it is the one mounted with the sterile frond on the U. S. National Museum sheet no. 575259: 4. One sheet (part of a sterile leaf) from Costa Rica, collected by Wercklé, U. S. National Museum no. 575249; is wrongly labeled B. Werckleana; it differs from the description and Christ $ , other specimens in texture, color, proportion, the margin, the ag of the pinnae, and in size. A pinna was sent to Christ, but scussed in * This section includes only the unplaced material not already di connection with the various species. BROADHURST: STRUTHIOPTERIS IN NorRTH AMERICA 385 found the material too incomplete to name satisfactorily. With this might be placed another fragment (one pinna) from Costa Rica, Hoffman 36. 5. Two sheets from Guatemala, Cook & Griggs 161 and 578, near the Finca Sepacuite, Alta Verapaz (N); the long terminal pinnae suggest the smaller forms of S. Schiedeana, but they are heavier in texture and the bases of the pinnae are subcordate to cordate. 6. Two sheets (fragments) from St. Vincent, H. H. & G. W. Smith 1023 (Y). Their coloring, their flattened, shining costae, which resemble those of SS. Underwoodiana, and their falcate pinnae distinguish them from S. striata, which they otherwise sug- gest. They are not at all like the deeply cordate, coriaceous specimen from St. Vincent discussed under S. striata. TEACHERS COLLEGE, i CoLuMBIA UNIVERSITY. * Contributions to the Mesozoic flora of the Atlantic coastal plain— Vill. Texas* Epwarp W. BERRY (WITH PLATES 30-32) The following annotated list of fossil plants is based on a small collection from the Woodbine formation, made at Arthurs Bluff on the Red River in Lamar County, Texas, by Doctors T. W. Stanton and L. W. Stephenson in 1911 for the U. S. Geological Survey. The presence of fossil plants in the Cretaceous strata of Lamar ‘County has been known for half a century as is shown by a letter from Dr. B. F. Shumard, dated Oct. 2, 1860, read before the Academy of Science of St. Louis at its session of Nov. 5, 1860, and quoted on page 140 of the printed Transactions.t Dr. B. F. Shumard, at that time state geologist of Texas, states that his brother Dr. G. G. Shumard discovered numerous dicotyledonous leaves resembling the modern leaves of Salix, Ilex, Laurus, etc., in the Cretaceous yellowish sandstones of Lamar County near the Red River. These were undoubtedly from the locality now known as Arthurs Bluff, which has furnished the subsequent collections. Dr. Shumard further states that these plants were sent to Leo Lesquereux for determination, but if sent they were apparently lost in transit.t en R. T. Hill took up the study of the Texas Cretaceous, new collections were made between 1880 and 1885 at Arthurs Bluff and at Denison, the latter a locality originally discovered by Dr. Shumard. These collections were, according to Hill, sent to the U.S. National Museum and lost in storage. Finally in Hill’s sreat work on the Texas Cretaceous§ Dr. F. H. Knowlton furnished “report on collections of fossil plants from the Woodbine formation * Published with the permission of the Director of the U. S. Geological Survey. t Trans, Acad. Sci. St. Louis 2: 140. 1868. + Lesquereux, Cretaceous Flora, U. S. Geol. Surv. Terr. 6: 11. 1874. U. he o, Geography and Geology of the Black and Grand Prairies, Ann. Rep. » Seol. Sury, 217: 314-318. pl. 30. 387 - 388 BERRY: MESOZOIC FLORA OF ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN at Arthurs Bluff, Lamar County; Woodbine, Cooke County; and Denison, Grayson County. The largest of these collections is the one from Arthurs Bluff, which was made in 1894 by Dr. T. Wayland Vaughan. The plants are preserved in a fragmentary state in a yellowish sandy clay or loose sandstone. Dr. Knowlton identified the following species from this locality: Aralia Wellingtoniana Vaughanii Knowlton _Phyllites rhomboideus Lesq. Benzoin venustum (Lesq.) Knowlton Platanus primaeva Lesq. Diospyros primaeva Heer Sapindus aes Heer? : Ficus glascoeana Lesq.? Salix deleta Lesq Liriodendron pinnatifidum Lesq.? Viburnum robustum Lesq. Myrica longa (Heer) Heer The collection from Woodbine in Cooke County was made by G. H. Ragsdale and is reported as containing: Andromeda Pfafiana Heer Diospyros primaeva Heer Cinnamomum ellipsoideum Sap. & Mar. Eugenia primaeva Lesq. Cinnamomum sp.? Phyllites aristolochiaeformis Lesq.? The collection ae Denison, Grayson County, was made by T. V. Munson from two outcrops in that town, Munson Hill, from which Dr. Knowlton is unable to identify any forms speci- fically, and Rhamey Hill, from which the following are recorded: Cinnamomum Heerii Lesq. Magnolia Boulayana Lesa. Diospyros Steenstrupi Heer Magnolia speciosa Heer Inga cretacea Lesq. Populus sp.? 1 Laurus proteaefolia Lesq. - Salix sp.? Liquidambar integrifolium Lesq. Confining any comments to the collection studied by th we may note that out of a total of 27 species, three species all one variety of which are new, seventeen are forms either described or recorded from the Dakota group. It is greatly to be regretted that no very precise stratigraphic significance can be attached to any particular units of the Dakota group flora, since the Dakota group materials have been recognized over a very wide area ina more or less unscientific way and no careful stratigraphic-palee botanic work has ever been carried out. Since the Woodbine formation of northeastern Texas gu doubtedly represents deposits laid down during a part of vans group time, they should naturally contain this large, Dak ay groupelement. If we judge by the range of the Woodbine spe e writer BERRY: MESOZOIC FLORA OF ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN 389 that occur in the Cretaceous of the Atlantic coastal plain as shown in the appended table, the Woodbine represents an earlier rather than a later part of the Dakota interval. Eleven Woodbine species are found in the lower Raritan, eleven in the upper Raritan, eleven in the Magothy, and fifteen in the lower Tuscaloosa of western Alabama. From extensive studies of this large lower Tuscaloosa flora it seems probable that its basal portion represents the time equivalent of the uppermost Raritan, and there are sixteen species from these two horizons represented in the Woodbine collection. The small representation in the upper Tuscaloosa is without chronologic significance, since it merely reflects our present lack of knowledge of the constituents of this upper Tusca- loosa flora. The presence of only five of these species in the Black Creek-Middendorf beds of the Carolinas, while it probably indicates that the latter are in the main younger than the Wood- bine,* would be more impressive if all five were not extremely abundant and wide-ranging forms, all being present in either the lower Raritan or the lower Tuscaloosa. Only two species are found in the lower Eutaw, the older character of the Woodbine flora being particularly emphasized by the absence of the char- acteristic symnosperms, such as Araucaria bladenensis Berry, Araucaria Jeffreyi Berry, Sequoia, Cunninghamites, Tumion, the two species of Androvettia, etc. In fact, the Woodbine flora is remarkable by reason of the almost total absence of gymnosperms, onty two forms, Brachyphyllum macrocarpum formosum and Podozamites lanceolatus, being represented in the present collection, and none being recorded in the previous collections studied by Knowlton, Our knowledge of the Woodbine flora is much too limited for ee Positive conclusions regarding the botanical or physical con- ditions that attended its development; and larger collections are much to be desired, since the small collections studied by the fad by: Dr. Knowlton indicate the presence in these beds mi lar 8€ and varied, even if fragmentarily preserved, flora. This, "0 Collected and studied, may be expected to show the relation — pn ae) ema GEN Eb Ug Nee pov fefeniosnaomgrip pe Sale atin ae ai P on : on me bP itn val. x pes bagreceewle | yee Rae ae Brochy phylum ce op Weta var. | | | x |x x Se VOL SL eis carne sere a eae LONE Meee a le eee eae Cinnamomsm membranaceum (Lesq.) Hol- | Tales Webs pi eG hose denesli ie S| 3 foes ee pe Cornophyllum vetustum Newb.........-++ Jones pod et ee ck e “x a Eucalyptus Geinitzi (Heer) Heer......... Ce ae a £8 gh ees x x | Xb Ficus daphn ote a (ier) Bey hess Se Se ae es waa Ea ud Pe de Re G ea Pat oe CIO bss xteees x ‘ae Lau rus pluton RO Oleh ER a Fe OS om x woe ie: x x . Liriodendron werdlium NOWDs 5c ucos bp Sepa e Lee? Mm leroy x : 2 Gphoita speciosa bert eee CK hie Pe x : J alapoonne Falta (Les, RA Pee SC 1M fees eee . Myrica emarginata Heer............+-+- a x |. M | epee ‘Oreodaphne ‘oe emus Sp. HOVi. 2400005 . ptt Pe eee GES RT ve Palaeocassia laurinea Lesq...........++++ x Jeoeefens! es x ecient aomeeye lanceolatus (L. & H.) Braun..| X |--+-|-+-° | x c coat ee ee Populus harkeriana Lesq...........+++++ | oa aie Bae i Bel Pines tone peeks saenea ees! 2 MH ieeteiee ch te Rhus nae tng SP NOG ces. e es Legrules efor es faa es Kobe’ S “io aria ef re eee | | Xba 5 pee Ca Sterculia hawt is bea? ah gy SS he ae ae aR, PR Leyte e hia 1 icstoriles papyraceus Newb........--+- F, el Re ee ee | e es ame POORSTUM LOS.) ce cose Ss PR ie ieee Zizyphus lamarensis sp. nov.........-+-- Ce ee shes x Heaues bet eee BERRY: MESOZOIC FLORA OF ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN 391 increase in mean annual temperatures in proceeding southward from the latitude of Greenland. Conditions comparable to those of Woodbine time occur in those areas where the tropical flora extends many degrees farther than its normal range to the north or south of the equator, becom- ing more or less mixed with temperate elements to form the flora typical of temperate rain forests like that of New Zealand, so often cited. The extension of the Upper Cretaceous flora south- ward across the present torrid zone indicates less torrid conditions during the Cretaceous than in the present day tropical belt, so that it will be extremely difficult, even if it ever becomes possible, to discriminate between subtropical and warm temperate Cre- taceous climates, and to assert with any confidence that the imaginary line separating the two shall be placed in the South Atlantic or Middle Atlantic states or still farther to the northward. The appended table shows the range in the United States of the species discussed in the following notes: GY MNOSPERMAE PODOZAMITES LANCEOLATUs (L. & H.) F. Braun Zamia lanceolata Lind. & Hutton, Foss. Fl. 3: 121. pl. 194. 1836. Podozamites lanceolatus F. Braun, in Miinster, Beitr. Petref. 2°: 33. 1843. This form, described originally from the English Oolite, has a very wide recorded geological and geographical range. A large humber of Jurassic varieties have been described, and indistin- guishable forms occur in both the Lower and Upper Cretaceous of : th America and Europe. In the Upper Cretaceous it occurs in the Raritan formation from Long Island to Maryland and in the Cenomanian of Bohemia, as well as in the Dakota group of Kansas, While it is almost inconceivable that these similar detached leaflets from such various horizons represent a single botanical “Pecies, no criteria other than the unsafe one of stratigraphic Pesition are available for their discrimination. The Arthurs Bluff collection contains a single perfect and typical leaflet, and whether 7 18 Specifically identical with all of the other forms referred to ‘species or not, it is of great interest in showing the presence of a 8ymnosperm of this type in the Woodbine flora. 392 Berry: MESOZOIC FLORA OF ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN Brachyphyllum macrocarpum formosum var. nov. Brachyphyllum macrocarpum Berry, Bull. Torrey Club 37: 183. 1910; 38: 420. 1911. (Not Newberry, 1896.) DESCRIPTION: Slender elongated twigs, pinnately branched, covered with medium-sized, crowded, appressed leaves, spirally arranged. Leaves bluntly pointed, relatively smooth, thick. (PLATE 30.) In the consideration of the various specimens that have been referred to Brachyphyllum macrocarpum Newberry, a very con- siderable variation within certain fixed limits is at once obvious. This variation is usually one of size, the more slender specimens being at the same time more elongated and smoother. This has been frequently noted by the writer and is commented upon in print by Dr. F. H. Knowlton,* who in discussing the later forms (from Wyoming) suggests that the species on the verge of extinc- tion became smaller in its proportions. In studying the material from the South Atlantic and Gull States a constant difference in size was noticed by the writer. This may reflect a slight difference in climatic conditions, and all of the forms may be interpreted as the variations of a single species, in fact, one of Newberry’s figures{ of a Raritan specimen is approximately the same size as the forms from the Montana group of the West and is associated with the normal, stout, club- shaped type. That the variety has no particular stratigraphic significance is indicated by its abundance at a horizon as old * the basal Tuscaloosa formation in Alabama and its presence the Woodbine formation. In general, however, it occurs at later and more southern horizons than the type. This might be cribed to the fact that only the slender and more elongated ter minal twigs are preserved at these localities; but such an sgneit tion is regarded as improbable, since the same reasoning shoul hold good for the areas where only the thicker twigs have been found. The remains are usually much macerated and broken, is eminently true of the three specimens from Arthurs Bluff. See : the warrant for describing them as a new variety is furnished by T and this e * Knowlton, Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 163. 29. pl. 4. f. 5,6. 1909 ap + Newberry, Mon. U. S. Geol. Surv. 26: 51. pl. 7. f. 1-7. 1896 pied BERRY: MESOZOIC FLORA OF ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN 393 discovery of a large and rather complete specimen in the Magothy formation of Maryland. The latter shows the terminal part of two approximately parallel and curved twigs, about I2 cm. in length, united proximad. These in their thickest portion are only 6mm. in diameter. At intervals of from 3 mm. to 5 mm., sub- opposite lateral branches are given off in a pinnate manner. These are relatively much elongated, curved, and slender, averag- ing about 4 cm. in length by 2 mm. in diameter, bluntly pointed and not tapering to any appreciable extent. These have been infrequently observed to fork pseudo-dichotomously, and at times they give off toward their distal ends tiny lateral branchlets less than a centimeter in length and about one millimeter in diameter. The general proportions are thus decidedly different from the Parent type. The leaves are slightly smaller and smoother and somewhat more elongated in their relative proportions, at the same time lacking the apical papillae and the convergent striae. The new variety is much more graceful than the type in appear- ance, and in its general aspect suggests the Lower Cretaceous genus Arthrotaxopsis. The most closely allied form appears to be one from the Albian of Portugal, described by Saporta* as Brachyphyllum obesiforme elongatum. There is also considerable resemblance to Brachyphyllum crassicaule Fontaine of the Patapsco formation in Maryland and Virginia. Remains of this new variety are associated with the type in Maryland; they are abundant throughout the Tuscaloosa of Alabama, ranging upward into the : | part of the Eutaw formation in both Alabama and western Tgia, MYRICALES (?) MyYRICA EMARGINATA Heer Myrica emarginata Heer, Fl. Foss. Arct. 62: 66. pl. 4. f.2. 1882. —Lesquereux, Mon. U. S. Geol. Surv. 17: 67. pl. 12. f. 1: 1892.—Newberry, Mon. U.S. Geol. Surv. 26: 62. pl. 41. f. 10, ioe 1896.—Berry, Bull. N. J. Geol. Surv. 3: 104. pl. 10. f. 5. QII. a hg obovate in outline, widest at the rounded-truncate and €ss emarginate apex. Margins entire, narrowing to the €. Midrib medium stout, inclined to be somewhat * Saporta, FI. Foss. Portugal 176. pl. 31. f. 14. 1894. ¢ 394 Berry: MESOZOIC FLORA OF ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN flexuous. Secondaries about five thin subopposite pairs, diverging from the midrib at angles of about 45 degrees, camptodrome. A single but entirely typical leaf of this species is contained in the collection. It is identical with the remains of this species as they occur in the basal part of the Tuscaloosa formation in Alabama and in the Dakota sandstone of Kansas. It is relatively wider and more robust than the type material from the Atane beds of Greenland, being intermediate in character between the type material and that referred to this species from the Raritan formation of New Jersey. Its reference to the genus Myrica is entirely problematical. SALICALES POPULUS HARKERIANA Lesq. Populus harkeriana Lesq. Fl. Dakota Group 44. pl. 46. f.4- 1892. —Hollick, Mon. U. S. Geol. Surv. 50: 49. pl. 7. f. 31. 1907: This species was described by Lesquereux from the Dakota group at Fort Harker, Kansas, and was subsequently recorded by Hollick from the Cretaceous material (Raritan or Magothy) in the terminal moraine near Tottenville, Staten Island. The Arthurs Bluff collection contains a single specimen and its counter- part showing half of a large typical leaf of this species. There's also an undeterminable species of the Populus type in the collec- tion. URTICALES FICUS DAPHNOGENOIDES (Heer) Berry Proteoides daphnogenoides Heer, Phyll. Crét. Nebr. 17- pl. 4. f.9 Io. 1866. Ficus daphnogenoides Berry, Bull. Torrey Club 32: 327- pF 1905. This species was described originally from the Dakota group of Nebraska by Heer. It is a widespread and common aart Cretaceous form ranging from Marthas Vineyard to Alabama . the Atlantic coastal plain and from Northwest Territory Kansas and Nebraska in the western interior. It is abundan in the lower part of the Tuscaloosa formation in wester ae The Arthurs Bluff collection contains three fragmentary specimen showing the characteristic attenuated tip of this spect€> ree Figs are apparently much less abundant in the Woodbine BERRY: MESOZOIC FLORA OF ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN 395 in the Tuscaloosa formation on the eastern shore of the Cretaceous Mississippi embayment. RANALES MAGNOLIA SPECIOSA Heer Magnolia speciosa Heer, Neue Denks. Schw. Gesell. 23: 20. pl. 6. f.1; pl.9.f.2; pl. 10.f.1. 1869.—Knowlton, Ann. Rep. U.S. Geol. Surv. 217: 318. 1901. A single small leaf of this species is contained in the collections from Arthurs Bluff. Magnolia speciosa was described by Heer from the Cenomanian of Moravia, and subsequently it has been found to have a wide range in North America, being recorded from the Dakota group and from the Raritan and Magothy formations. along the Atlantic coast. In Alabama it is confined to the lower part of the Tuscaloosa formation, where it is abundant. It was reported by Knowlton (loc. cit.) in 1901 in a small collection from the Woodbine formation at Rhamey Hill, Denison, Texas, made by T. V. Munson of Denison. LIRIODENDRON QUERCIFOLIUM Newberry Liriodendron quercifolium Newb. Bull. Torrey Club 14: 6. pl. 62. f. 1. 1887; FI. Amboy Clays 81. pl. 51. f. 1-6. 1896.—Berry, pull, N. J. Geol. Surv. £) 3482 Wetec d.. 10th. This species was described a quarter of a century ago by Newberry from the middle Raritan of Woodbridge, N. J., to which locality it has been hitherto confined. It is a very characteristic leaf with a broadly emarginate summit and three or four pointed laterally directed lobes on each side, separated by relatively narrow “inuses. The venation is of the Liriodendron type with strong secondaries, While the present determination is based upon a single in- Complete specimen, it is undoubtedly a fragment of this species and is about as complete, as well as similar in outline and size, - Newberry’s Jig. 2. It shows the two upper lateral lobes of one Side of a leaf, separated by a sharp, not deep sinus, separated from a larger but similar basal lateral lobe by a deeper and broader Sinus, and js absolutely characteristic. Knowlton (loc. cit.) has recorded Liriodendron pinnatifidum “q-, doubtfully, and Liriodendron Snowii Lesq., positively, from Le 396 Berry: MESOZOIC FLORA OF ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN Arthurs Bluff, but neither of these species is represented in the present collection. Both are characteristic forms and so different that there is no possibility of confusing them with the species just discussed. ROSALES . PALAEOCASSIA LAURINEA Lesq. Palaeocassia laurinea Lesq. Fl. Dakota Group 147. pl. 64. f. 12. 1892. This species was described from the Dakota group of Kansas, to which it has been hitherto confined. As interpreted by Les- quereux, its describer, the remains represented leaflets of a Cassia- like plant, although so far as I know, all have been found detached, ‘the only basis for considering them leaflets rather than leaves being ‘their slight inequilateral form. A single entire leaf is contained in the collection from Arthurs Bluff. It is identical with the type material from Kansas in size, outline, and venation, with the exception that it is slightly wider (2-5 mm.) with a consequently somewhat fuller and more rounded base. It has recently been detected in the lower Tuscaloosa of Alabama. COLUTEA PRIMORDIALIS Heer Colutea primordialis Heer, Fl. Foss. Arct. 6°: 99. pl. 27-f- 7-1 pl. 43.f. 7,8. 1882. This well-marked little species was described from the Atane beds of Greenland. It occurs in strata at least as old as the upper Raritan in New Jersey and is present in both the Dakota and Magothy floras. The collection from Arthurs Bluff contains a single complete and in every way typical leaf of this species. SAPINDALES .SAPINDUS MorrIsoNni Lesquereux Sapindus Morrisoni Lesq.; Heer, Fl. Foss. Arct. 6°: 96- pl. 40.f. 2 pl. at. f. 3; pl. 43. f. 1a, b; pl. 44. f.7, 8. 1882.—Knowltom, Ann. Rep. U.S. Geol. Surv. 217: 317. 1901. eds of This species was described by Heer from the Atane be . west Greenland and identified with the manuscript SP© a up the same name which Lesquereux had given toa Dakota sr BERRY: MESOZOIC FLORA OF ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN 397 plant from Morrison, Colorado. It is a common Dakota group form occurring also in the Raritan, Tuscaloosa, and Magothy formations of the Atlantic coastal plain. Fragmentary speci- mens occur in the collection from Arthurs Bluff, where it was also recorded by Knowlton in 1901 (loc. cts Rhus redditiformis sp. nov. DESCRIPTION: Leaves compound, probably trifoliate. Leaflets petiolate, ovate in outline, with bluntly pointed tips, cuneate bases, and entire or undulate margins forming occasional distal shallow broadly rounded lobules separated by broad shallow sinuses. Terminal leaflet nearly equilateral, about 14 larger than the lateral leaflets, about 4 cm. in length by 2 cm. in maximum width, which is about midway between the apex and the base; Petiolule 5 mm. long; midrib stout, prominent; secondaries thin, 5 or 6 alternate pairs, branching from the midrib at angles of about 50°, curving slightly upward, anastomosing close to the entire margin. Lateral leaflets inequilateral, the outer limb of the lamina being slightly wider and fuller than the inner limb; petioles shorter than that of the terminal leaflet, 2-3 mm. in length, diverging from the latter at angles of about 70°; in outline and nation similar to the terminal leaflet, but smaller and showing a tendency to develop slight irregularities in the margin, especially toward their tips. (PLATE 31, FIG. 2.) This Species is obviously new and is named from its rather striking resemblance to the European early Tertiary species Rhus reddila Saporta* from Aix in southeastern France. Several Cre- taceous species of Rhus have been described from horizons as old as the Woodbine, the Dakota group of Kansas furnishing three well-marked species with pinnate leaves, one of which Rhus Uddent “duereuxf is reported by Ward from the so-called Cheyenne Sandstone at Belvidere, Kansas. A small toothed species has €n described by Velenovskyt from the Cenomanian sandstone of Bohemia as Rhus cretacea, although this name was already in se for a very different Cretaceous species described by Heer§ from the Senonian of Quedlinburg in Saxony and recorded by Hollick|| “om the Upper Cretaceous of Long Island. The Woodbine 1 saPorta, Etudes 1: 124. pl. 13. f. 2, a, b. 1862. onde Mon. U. S. Geol. Surv. 47: Ick. OL 47. fF. 2. 1892. tn nevsky, Fl. Béhm. Kreidef. 4: + Ol. 4. ¥. P-¥s: 188s. i . de Quedlinburg 14. pl. 3. f. rr. 1872. ollick, Mon. U, s. Geol. Surv. 50: 87. pl. 33. f. 2. 1907. 398 Berry: MESOZOIC FLORA OF ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN species is readily distinguishable from all of the foregoing and adds a well-marked and probably trifoliate Cretaceous form to this genus, which is so largely developed during Tertiary times. In the existing flora Rhus is a prominent element with upwards of 150 species, which are for the most part natives of warm temperate and tropical regions. A modern species with almost identical foliage is Rhus villosa L., a south African form. OccURRENCE: Woodbine formation, Arthurs Bluff, Red River, Lamar County, Texas. CoLLection: U.S. National Museum. Zizyphus lamarensis sp. nov. DEscRIPTION: Leaves elliptical in outline, 4.5 cm. to 5 cm. i length by 3 cm. in maximum width about midway between the apex and the base, slightly nearer the latter; base full and rounded; lateral margins full and rounded; apex rounded, slightly less full than the base; margin with regular but shallow crenate teeth becoming less prominent toward the base. Midrib slender but prominent, straight. Lateral primaries one on each side, diverging from the midrib at its extreme base at an acute angle (about 10 ), two or three alternate thin pairs in the apical region, camptodromé; secondaries from the lateral primaries five or six in number, outside, curved, camptodrome; the lowest secondary 1s a and branches at the most acute angle (about 10°) and from thé extreme base, each successively ‘higher secondary subtending 4 slightly larger angle and following a somewhat shorter pus Internal tertiaries more or less percurrent, marginal ones simula to the secondaries from the primaries in their arrangement @ course, thin and camptodrome. (PLATE 31, FIG. I.) This handsome species of an undoubted Zizyphus 18 BN - tunately represented by very scant material. It is entirely distim : from any described Cretaceous species and is much closer to variou Tertiary and still existing forms. It has recently been detect in the lower Tuscaloosa of Alabama. s is unfor- RHAMNALES RHAMNUS TENAX Lesquereux Rhamnus tenax Lesq. Am. Jour. Sci. 46: 101. 1868; Group 170. pl. 38. f. 6. 1892. Fl. Dakota BERRY: MESOZOIC FLORA OF ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN 399 This species was described many years ago by Lesquereux from the Dakota sandstone of southern Kansas and subsequently reported by Bartsch from the same horizon in Iowa. It is abun- dant in the lower Tuscaloosa of western Alabama, and a single characteristic specimen is contained in the Arthurs Bluff collection. MALVALES STERCULIA LUGUBRIS Lesquereux? Sterculia lugubris Lesq. Cret. and Tert. FI. 81. pl. 6. f. 1-3. 1883. This species is apparently represented at Arthurs Bluff by the single specimen figured, which agrees very well with the Dakota group forms of Sterculia lugubris. It is queried since it may represent a slender almost parallel-margined form of Aralia Wellingtoniana Vaughanii Knowlton, which is so common at this locality. (PLATE 31, FIG. x, THY MELEALES BENZOIN VENUSTUM (Lesq.) Knowlton Lindera venusta Lesq. Fl. Dakota Group 95. pl. 16. f. 1,2. 1892. Benzoin venustum (Lesq.) Knowlton, Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 152: 47. 1898; Ann. Rep. U. S. Geol. Surv. 21: 317. Pl. 39. f, 2. Igor, This is a trilobate Dakota group species, described originally from Kansas and identified by Knowlton in 1901, in a collection made at Arthurs Bluff by T. W. Vaughan. The present collection contains two fragmentary specimens. Which I have little hesitancy in referring to this species, especially as it has already been reported from this locality. MALAPOENNA FALCIFOLIA (Lesq.) Knowlton? Litsea Jalcifolia Lesq. Fl. Dakota Group 97. pl. 11. f. 5. 1892. Malapoenna falcifolia (Lesq.) Knowlton, Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 182: 142, 189 b This species was described from the Dakota group of Kansas Nd Lesquereux and recorded by the writer from the Magothy mh age in New Jersey. The Arthurs Bluff collection contains ® Single Specimen of the lower half of a leaf which is doubtfully ‘ntified as this species. It is clearly distinguishable from 400 Berry: MESOZOIC FLORA OF ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN Malapoenna horrellensis Berry,* of the Black Creek formation in North Carolina, by its suprabasilar primaries and cuneate base but may possibly be a fragment of Cinnamomum Newberryi Berry.t Oreodaphne alabamensis sp nov. DEscRIPTION: Leaves of large size, ovate in general outline, ranging from 13 cm. to 20 cm. in length, and from 4.75 cm. to7 cm. in maximum width, which is at a point about midway between the apex and the base. From the point of greatest width the margins curve, both distad and proximad, in a very full curve, narrowing rather abruptly to the acuminate tip and also to the more or less decurrent base. Midrib stout, curved. Lateral primaries opposite, one on each side, branching from the midrib at an acute angle a considerable distance above its base, rather straight in their course, thinner than the midrib. Above the primaries there is an interval, and then about six pairs of thin, curved, approximately parallel, camptodrome secondaries branch from the midrib at acute angles. The lateral primaries give 0 on the outside numerous regularly spaced and approximately parallel curved camptodrome secondaries, the latter feature serving to distinguish this species from other fossil species of this genus, and from Cinnamomum, Cocculus, or other genera with somewhat similar leaves with which it might be compared. Texture corla- ceous. (PLATE 32.) This fine large species is represented at Arthurs Blufi by fragmentary but characteristic specimens. The foregoing de- scription and the figure are drawn from abundant and pao oe material collected by the writer from the lower Tuscaloosa 4 western Alabama. It shows considerable variation in - some in outline, the latter dependent on whether the leaf is wides nearer to or farther from the base. In the latter case the ve - part is more fully rounded and abruptly contracted to the * nate tip, while the base is more gradually narrowed and fi : : cuneate rather than decurrent. In the former peed the md d portion is more gradually narrowed and the base 1s ful rounded abruptly, decurring to the petiole. This species is markedly different from previously ‘cal fossil forms but may be matched by several modern OTE American species of Oreodaphne. The genus Oreodaphné 0° Sinha Sik Tonite ae tid described * Berry, Bull. Torrey Club 37: 198. pl. 24. f. 1-9. 1910. Tt Berry, loc. cit. 38: 423.- 1OTt. BERRY: MESOZOIC FLORA OF ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN 401 which is exclusively American in the existing flora, is made a sub- genus of Ocotea Aublet by Pax in Engler and Prantl’s Die Natiir- lichen Pflanzenfamilien. The latter genus, which for paleo- botanical purposes may be considered as composite, has about two hundred modern species, occurring chiefly in the American tropics and ranging from southern Florida to Brazil and Peru, but with some representation (subgenus Mespilodaphne Nees) in the Canary Islands, South Africa, Madagascar, and the Mascarene Islands. The single existing American species reaching the United States, whose habit and environment may be taken as typical for the whole genus, is found in Florida, southward from capes Canaveral and Romano along the shores and islands with the exception of some of the western keys, making its best growth in the rich, moist, hammock lands near the coast. CINNAMOMUM MEMBRANACEUM (Lesq.) Hollick Paliurus membranaceus Lesq. Am. Jour. Sci. 46: 101. 1868. Cinnamomum membranaceum Hollick, Mon. U.S. Geol. Surv. 50: 75: pl. 29. f. 5, 6. 1907. Two leaves of this species, identical with Hollick’s fig. 6, except that one js slightly smaller, were found at Arthurs Bluff. The Previous occurrences are the Dakota group and Glen Cove, Long Island (Raritan or Magothy formations). LAURUS PLUTONIA Heer Laurus plutonia Heer, Fl. Foss. Arct. 67: hh. 20. J. 30, O74; bl. 20. f. 3a, 4-5; bl. 28. f. 10, 11; pl. 42. f. 4b. 1882. This species was described by Heer from the Atane beds of West Greenland and a large number of somewhat variable and fragmentary specimens were figured. Subsequently it was re- Coded from a very large number of Cretaceous plant beds, so thatits range, both geographical and geological, is rather extensive. A number of these records are not entirely above suspicion, and S appears to be especially true of the forms from the Cenomanian of Bohemia identified by Velenovsky. “rus plutonia is rare in the Raritan, the writer having found tt only near the top of that formation. It is abundant in the 402 Berry: MESOZOIC FLORA OF ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN overlying Magothy formation from New Jersey to Maryland. In the southern coastal plain it occurs in the Middendorf beds of ‘South Carolina and ranged from the base of the Tuscaloosa formation upward into the Eutaw formation in the Alabama area. A single complete and characteristic leaf and several fragments are contained in the Arthurs Bluff collections. LAUROPHYLLUM MINUS Newberry Laurophyllum minus Newb. Fl. Amboy Clays 86. pl. 16. f. 7-9: 1896. This species was described from the Raritan formation of New Jersey and found by the writer in the upper part of that formation only. In the absence of venation characters in both the type and later collected material its identification is always more or less uncertain; and it may represent a variety of Laurus plutonia Heer -or some of the forms that have been referred to Myrica longa Heer, although in general it is wider than the latter and more elon- gated and less symmetrical than the former. A single specimen Is present in the collection from Arthurs Bluff. MYRTALES Eucatyptus Gernitzi (Heer) Heer Eucalyptus Geinitzi Heer, Fl. Foss. Arct. 6: 93- pl. 19. f- 16 pl. 4- de 15.7 ROO. : This widespread and characteristic Upper Cretaceous species is found from the base of the Raritan formation of New ersey upward into the Black Creek and Middendorf beds of the Caro- linas. The type locality is the Cenomanian of Moravia, ele has also been recorded from the Atane beds of west Greenlan! and from the Dakota group of the West. In the Alabama af taceous it has been collected from only the lower part of ‘Tuscaloosa formation. A single characteristic leaf is present in the collections Arthurs Bluff. from UMBELLALES ARALIA WELLINGTONIANA Lesq. emend. : Aralia Wellingtoniana Lesq. Fl. Dakota Group 131. (in part) pl ve f. I. 1892 (not pl. 22. f. 2, 3, which are referred to Ar Berry: MEsozoIc FLORA OF ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN 403 Saportana).—Newberry, Fl. Amboy Clays 114. pl. 26. f. 1. 1896.—Berry, Bull. N. J. Geol. Surv. 3: 202. pl. 25. f. 7. 1911 (not Smith, Geol. Coastal Plain Ala. 348. 1894). This handsome species is characterized by its describer as being palmately 3- to 5-lobed, but it certainly significant that all of the forms from the Raritan formation are invariably 3-lobed and thatthe 5-lobed forms from the Dakota sandstone which Lesquereux referred to this species are indistinguishable from his species Aralia Saportana, which occurs at the same horizon and, in part at least, at the same locality. This is the most abundant form collected at Arthurs Bluff, there being fifteen specimens in the one small collection, several nearly complete leaves being present. These are all trilobate with toothed margins and agree exactly with the Raritan leaves of this species and with the trilobate leaves from the Dakota sand- stone like the one figured by Lesquereux on I. 21. fig. I. In the light of our present knowledge Aralia Wellingtoniana may be recharacterized in the following terms: Leaves variable in size, 10-20 cm. in length by 8 to 15 cm. in maximum width from tip to tip of the lateral lobes, average size about 15 cm. in length by 11 cm. in width; coriaceous, palmately deeply trilobate, with a rapidly narrowed and more or less extended decurrent base; lobes long, lanceolate, widest in the middle and natrowing below, somewhat abruptly acuminate, the median slightly the longest, diverging at an angle of about 30°, separated Y sinuses extending more than halfway to the base, narrowly Foun ed; margins entire below and for varying distances upward, passing gradually into dentate-serrate teeth, one to each secondary °F sometimes less in number, prominent in some specimens where they are more or less extended and directed upward, separated by wide Shallow sinuses. Primaries stout, suprabasilar, the median slightly larger than the laterals. Secondaries numerous, thin, regular, subparallel, ascending, since the angle of their aaa from the primaries averages about 33°, but slightly ai in their course, ultimately craspedodrome in distal parts ‘tr where the margin is toothed, and. camptodrome in the ae half of the leaf, where the margin is entire. Areolation 'stinct, reticulate, of quadragonal or polygonal meshes. The tenia — are relatively shorter and broader, with less ex- bes and more open and less deep sinuses. The present species may be distinguished from Aralia cotton- 404 Berry: Mesozoic FLORA OF ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN dalensis Berry of the Tuscaloosa formation, with which it was confused by Ward (in Smith, Geol. Coastal Plain Ala. 348. 1894), by the shorter more conical lobes of the latter, its broadly rounded base and more crenate marginal teeth. Aralia Saportana as here restricted to the 5- or 6-lobed forms is very close to Aralia Wellingtoniana and may be regarded as an offshoot from it. The fact that the two are associated in the Dakota group only and not in New Jersey or Texas rather contro- verts regarding them as the variants of a single species; and suggests that at least geographic varieties are represented, par- ticularly as the trilobate form is so abundant at Arthurs Bluff that it is hard to conceive of trees with 5-lobed leaves growing in the vicinity whose foliage failed to be preserved. Furthermore, as the writer correlates the deposits, both the New Jersey Raritan and the Texas Woodbine at Arthurs Bluff are older than the Dakota sandstone in that area in Kansas from which Lesquereux described the 5-lobed forms, so that there is every reason for regarding Aralia Saportana as the direct descendant of Aralia Wellingtoniana. The present species is also very similar to Aralia decurrens Velenovksy* from the Cenomanian of Bohemia, which, however has relatively narrower and more elongated lobes, with coarser teeth and deeper sinuses. In reporting on a collection made by Vaughan at Arthurs Bluff and now in the U. S. National Museum, Knowltont mentions Aralia Wellingtoniana Vaughanii var. nov. as the most abundant form observed. This variety was distinguished from the type by its trilobate form, more slender lobes and entire margins. This variety is not contained in the present collection. CORNOPHYLLUM vETUSTUM Newberry Cornophyllum vetustum Newb. Fl. Amboy Clays 119. Pl. 19 f. 10- 1896.—Berry, Bull. N. J. Geol. Surv. 3: 196. 191! 4 This species has heretofore been known only in the wet? a middle Raritan beds in the New Jersey area, although it is preset in undescribed collections from +. * Velenovsky, FI. Béhm. Kreidef. 3: 11. pl. 4. f. 5 1884. t Knowlton, in Hill, Ann. Rep. U. S. Geol. Surv. oe 317. Ee BERRY: MESOZOIC FLORA OF ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN 405 the writer near Glen Allen, Ala. It is very similar to species of Cornus described from the Dakota group, the Atane beds of west Greenland, and the Magothy formation of Maryland. It is represented in the collection from Arthurs Bluff by one good specimen. VIBURNUM ROBUSTUM Lesq.? Viburnum robustum Lesq. Fl. Dakota Group 120. pl. 20. f. 4-6. 1892.—Knowlton, Ann. Rep. U.S. Geol. Surv. 217: 317. 1901. Knowlton records a single nearly perfect leaf of this Dakota 8toup species from Arthurs Bluff. The same species is repre- sented by fragments in the present collection. ERICALES (?) ANDROMEDA NOVAE-CAESAREAE Hollick Andromeda Novae-caesareae Hollick in Newb. Fl. Amboy Clays 121. pl. 42. f. 9-12, 28-31. 1896. This well marked species, which appears in the upper Raritan formation of New Jersey and is so abundant at somewhat later horizons in the coastal plain southward as far as Alabama, is represented by three complete leaves in the collections from Arthurs Bluff. These Texas leaves are of the type with a rounded 4pex so Common in the Black Creek beds of North Carolina. While the species is found in both the Black Creek beds of North Carolina and in the Middendorf beds of South Carolina, both horizons considerably younger than the Raritan, it appears to be confined to the basal part of the Tuscaloosa formation in Western Alabama. ANDROMEDA Snowt Lesquereux a Snowtii Lesq. Fl. Dakota Group 117. pl. 17. f. 16. Idg2. This Dakota group species, previously recorded from Kansas, fepresented by a single specimen from Arthurs Bluff. It re- sembles the lanceolate leaves of the preceding species but is oader with less numerous and much less ascending secondaries. is INCERTAE SEDIS a TRICALYCITES PAPYRACEUS Hollick : on Papyraceus Hollick, Bull. Torrey Club 21: 63. pl. 180. 8. 1894, 406 Berry: MESOZOIC FLORA OF ATLANTIC COASTAL PLAIN This very characteristic tri-alate fossil is abundant in the middle and upper Raritan formation of New Jersey. It occurs sparingly in the overlying Magothy formation and is very common in the lower part of the Tuscaloosa formation in western Alabama. It is abundant at Arthurs Bluff, the present collection containing | eight typical specimens, some of them complete. They are in exact agreement with the Tuscaloosa forms and demonstrate what is discussed at length in my manuscript of the Tuscaloosa flora that the approximately parallel longitudinal venation of the wings is really a more or less forked and anastomosing venation, thus allying these fossils in a remote: way with such modern genera as Vatica of the Dipterocarpaceae. Jouns Hopkins UNIVERSITY, BALTIMORE, Mp. Explanation of plates 30-32 PLATE 30 Brachyphyllum macrocarpum formosum Berry var. noy., Sullivans Cove, Mary- d. PLATE 31 Fic. 1. Zizyphus lamarensis Berry sp. nov., Arthurs Bluff, Texas. Fic. 2. Rhus redditiformis Berry sp. nov., Arthurs Bluff, Texas. Fic. 3. Sterculia lugubris Lesquereux, Arthurs Bluff, Texas. PLATE 32 Oreodaphne alabamgnsis Berry sp. nov., Cottondale, Ala. Mitosis in living cells CHESTER ARTHUR DARLING Practically all of the work done on the phenomena of cell division has been done with material that has been fixed, imbedded in paraffin, sectioned, and finally stained; this method has been subjected to various criticisms and it has been maintained that figures observed in the fixed and stained cells are artifacts, stages that do not exist in nature. Although these criticisms have been squarely met in many cases, undoubtedly much valuable data might be obtained by devoting more time to the study of the living cell, Very favorable material for studying cells in the living condition has been found in the young anthers of some of the maples. Twigs of the red maple, Acer rubrum, with flower buds were gathered on February 10 before any swelling of the buds had taken place. Twigs about 6-10 inches long were brought into the laboratory, Placed in a glass of water and kept near the window, the water was changed every day or two and the base of the stem often cut afresh. To examine the pollen mother cells the bud scales were removed and the young flowers placed on a slide and mounted in water; if the anthers are long enough it is best to cut them cross- Wise with a sharp knife; by pressing down on the cover glass the mass of spore mother cells are forced out of the anther and are then readily observed. In the case of the red maple the mother cells _8an to divide on February 17, one week from the time they were Picked from the tree, whereas those left on the tree did not divide Until one week later; the advantage of bringing them into the labor, atory is that one may examine them every day and so deter- mine in what Stage of growth or division the cells may be. I was able to observe the chromosomes in the equatorial plate, and in Polar View was able to count as many as 40, fixed and stained material showing practically the same number. An advantage in es cell at this stage is that the chromosomes are placed equally distant from each other and not drawn close together 408 DARLING: MITOSIS IN LIVING CELLS as is often the case when fixed and stained. The spindle was clearly marked and the spindle fibers distinguishable; anaphase and telophase stages could be readily observed; in fact practically all of the division figures to be found in fixed and stained material were observed in these living cells. The spireme is rather thin in this form, so that it could not be detected in the living cell; the nucleo- lus with a budlike attachment was plainly seen. The cytoplasm in Acer rubrum is not so dense as to obstruct or confuse the view of the nucleus as it is in some forms. Various stages in the division of the daughter nuclei were as clearly seen as were those of the mother cell; these daughter nuclei divide very soon after the first division of the mother cell, without the formation of the new cell wall. Within twenty-four hours after the first cells were seen to have begun division practically all of the mother cells in the material had formed the four distinct spores, showing that these stages go on rapidly. Attempts were made to induce the cells to complete t sions by placing them in sugar solutions of various strengths from 2 per cent to 15 per cent, but in no case did a cell continue to divide after being forced out of the anther. : Twigs of the silver maple, Acer saccharinum, were brought into the laboratory on the same dates as those of the red maple; although the cytoplasm is denser and although the division figures were not so clearly marked, yet practically all of the stages observed in i red maple were seen in the pollen mother cells of this spectes- In the Norway maple, Acer platanoides, the division of the pollen mother cells takes place much later in the season. On March . twigs were brought into the laboratory, and on March 23 te mother cells divided. Various division figures were observed ™ this species together with a very conspicuous budlike process si the large nucleolus. The cytoplasm in this species is more a and more granular than that in Acer rubrum, so that the chrom somes and spindle fibers were not so clearly seen. spore mother cells does not force out of the anther U are nearly ready to divide, usually within a day oF ee m the in the red maple the tapetal cells become detached sin endothecium of the anther at least two weeks before division: ce In the European larch, Larix decidua, I have observ heir divi- DARLING: MIrTosIs IN LIVING CELLS 409 pollen mother cells in stages of division, although the presence of numerous starch grains and of granules in the cytoplasm often obscures the definiteness of the figures. Because of the simplicity of the means any one interested in seeing the chromosomes, nucleoli, and stages in the division of the living cell may do so with an ordinary compound microscope with a 1/6in. objective. The only difficulties that may arise are: to obtain the flower buds before division of the pollen mother cells has taken place, which may be four weeks or more before the flowers open, as was the case in the maples this year; the other difficulty may be in the density of the cytoplasm, but this varies with different species and with different anthers of the same species. These few observations are recorded to emphasize the fact that many of the phenomena presented in fixed and stained mate- rial can easily be verified as existing in the living cell. CoLuMBIA UNIVERSITY. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE (1912) © The aim of this Index is to include all current botanical literature written by Americans, published in America, or based upon American material ; the word Amer- ica being used in the broadest sense. manufactured products of vegetable origin, or laboratory methods are not included, and *P wholly to botany, Reprints are not mentioned unless they differ from the original in Some important particular. If users of the Index will call the attention of the editor to-errors or omissions, their kindness will be appreciated. This Index is reprinted monthly on cards, and furnished in this form to subscribers at the rate of one cent for each card, Selections of cards are not permitted ; each subscriber must take all cards published during the term of his subscription, Corre- Spondence relating to the card issue should be addressed to the Treasurer of the Torrey Botanical Club, merica. Blake, S. F, The forms of Peltandra virginica. Rhodora 14: 102-106. bl. 94. 14 Je 1912. Bragg, L. M, The museum herbaria. Bull. Charleston Mus. 8: 43-49. My 1912. Brown, P. E, Some bacteriological effects of liming. Centralb. Bakt. Zweite Abt. 34: 148-172. 15 My 1912. en, E. Alphabetical list of lichens collected in several counties of northern Ohio. Ohio Nat. 12: 543-548. 7 Je 1912. he hundred and twenty-eight species listed. WE W.C. The plant life of Hartaville, S.C. Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 27: 169-205. pl. 1-15. 16 F 1912. East, E. M. Inheritance of color in the aleurone cells of maize. Am. Nat. 46: 363-365, Je 1912. st EL M., & Hayes, H.K. Heterozygosis in evolution and in plant breeding. U, §, Dept. Agr. Plant. Ind. Bull. 243: 7-58. pl. 1-8. 5 Je 1912, Evans, A. W. Hepaticae of Puerto Rico—XI. Diplasiolejeunea. . Bull Torrey Club 39: 209-225. pl. 16,17 +f. 1, 2. 8 Je 1912. wll J. H. The cytology of Laboulbenia chaetophora and L. Gyrin- ‘dorum. Ann. Bot. 26- 325-355. pl. 37-40. Ap 1912. 411 412 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Fawcett, W., & Rendle, A.B. New plants from Jamaica, Jour. Bot, 50: 177-182. pl. 518. Je 1912. New species are described in Peperomia (1) and Pilea (9). Fedde, F. Corydalis Allenii, eine neue Art aus der Verwandtschaft der Corydalis Scouleri, von Washington. Repert. Sp. Nov. 10: 478, 479. 5 My tg12. Fedde, F. Neue Arten aus der Verwandtschaft der Connie aurea Willd., von Nord-Amerika—V. Repert. Sp. Nov. 10: 479, 480. 5 My 1912 Corydalis macrorrhiza sp. nov. is also described. Fernald, M. L., & Wiegand, K. M. A blunt-spiked variety of Carex scoparia. Rhodora 14: 115-116. pl. 94. 14 Je 1912 Fraser, C.G. Induced hermaphrodism in Acer Negundo L. Torreya So: t2i-174. f. 3, 11 Je 1912 Frothingham, E. H. Second- Rens hardwoods in Connecticut. U. S. Forest Serv. Bull. 96: 9-70. pl. 1-6 + f. 1-3. 8 My 1912. [Illust.] Graebener, L. Kleinia pendula DC. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 69. 15 My 1912. [Illust.] Griffon, E., & Maublanc, A. Les Microsphaera des chénes. Soc. Myc. France 28: 88-104. pl. 3-5. 15 Ap 1912. Discusses certain American species. Groth, B. H. A. The F:2 heredity of size, shape, and number i fruits. New Jersey Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 242: 3-39- Pl. 3: 1912. Hall, H. M., & ee C: C. A Yosemite flora, invent sau Francisco. 8 A ““A descriptive account a. ferns and flowering plants, of the Yosemite National Park.” Harper, R. A. Some current conceptions of the germ plasm. : IT. 35: 909-923. 14 Je 1912. ‘a Harris, J. A. A first study of the influence of the starvation of t ascendants upon the characteristics of the descendants—l. ues Nat. 46: 313-343. Je 1912. = Hayes, H. K. Correlation and inheritance in Nicotiana Tabacum Connecticut Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 171: 3-45- Pl. I-3- My #9 7. Heimerl, A. Zur Kenntnis der Nyctaginaceen- -Gattung Oken Verh. Zool:-Bot. Gesells. Wien 62: 461-467: fc.) 2 26 BA Heller, A.A. The we of the Ruby Mountains—V. Mublenbergia™ 49-58. pl. 5 +f. 4 31 My 1912 Includes Castilleja ae sp. nov. and Si phonella ge Bull. n tomato 30 Mr including the trees cience n. nov. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 413 Hill, A.W. A visit to the West Indies. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. IQI2: 166-189. My 1912. Contains some information relating to the fungi and other plants of these islands. Hitchcock, A. S. Gramineae. In Jepson, W. L., A flora of Cali- fornia. 82-189. 30 Ap 1912. Includes keys to the tribes, genera, and species; one new species each in Aristida, Agrostis, Poa, and Glyceria; Notholcus Nash, gen. nov. Howe, M. A. The building of “coral”’ reefs. Science II. 35: 837- 842. 31 My i912. Jepson, W. L. A flora of California. 65-192. 30 Ap 1912. Gnetaceae to Cyperaceae. The part on Gramineae contributed by A. S. Hitchcock. Johnson, R. H. The Malthusian principle and natural selection. Am. Nat. 46: 372-376. Je 1912. Kellerman, M. A method of preserving type specimens. Jour. Washington Acad. Sci. 2: 222, 223. 4 My 1912. Klugh, A. B. The algae of a marshy pond. Rhodora 14: 113-115. 14 Je 1912. Koehne, E. Eine neue Einteilung der Kirschen, Prunus, Subgen. Cerasus. Wiss. Beilage Jahresb. Falk-Realgym. Berlin 1912: I-19: 1912. : Macnamara, C. Poison ivy. Ottawa Nat. 26: 34-37. 27 My 1912. Malte, M. O. Variation in plant life, its biological significance and practical value. Ottawa Nat. 26: 26-28. 27 My 1912. A synopsis of a lecture delivered before the Ottawa Field Naturalists’ Club. Massee, G. Fungi exotici—XIII. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. 1912: 189- 191. Includes Entypa gigaspora Massee from Trinidad. Maxon, W. R. Studies of tropical American ferns—No. 3. Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 16: 25-62. pl. 18-34. 19 Je 1912. Meyer, R. Ueber Echinopsis multiplex Zucc. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 72-76. 15 My 1912. Phillips, F. J. & Mulford, W. Utah juniper in ceutral Arizona. U.S. Forest Serv. Circ. 197: 3-19. pl. 1,2 +f.1. 8 Je 1912. : Includes notes on injuries to the trees by Pyropolyporus texanus, Gymnosporan- sum gracilens, and G. Nelsoni. maley, F. Mendelian proportions aud the increase of recessives. Am. Nat. 46: 344-351. Je 1912. ord, S. J. Tier-like structure of some woods. Hardwood Record R 34: 38, 39. 10 Je 1912. [Illust.] eed, H. S., Cooley, J. S., & Rogers, J. T. Foliage diseases of the apple. Virginia Polytech. Inst. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 195: 3-23. J, 2-13, F 1912. 414 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Rehder, A. Rhododendron carolinianum, a new ‘rhododendron from North Carolina. Rhodora 14: 97-102. 14 Je 1912 Robinson, W. J. A taxonomic study of the Pteridophyta of the Hawaiian Islands—I. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 227-248. pl. 18-20. 8 Je 1912. Sackett, W. G. Bakteriologische Untersuchungen tiber die Stickstoff- bindung in gewissen Bodenarten von Colorado. Centralb. Bakt. Zweite Abt. 34: 81-115. f. 1-5. 15 My 1912. Schlechter, R. Orchidaceue novae et criticae. Decas XXXIV. Re- an ig Nov. 10: 480-486. 5 My 1912. Includes new species in Spiranthes (2), Cranichis (1), Oreorchis (1), Lepanthes (1), ppeargies (3), and Campylocentrum (1) from Central America Setchell, W. A. Algae novae et minus cognitae, I. Day. Calif. Pub. Bot. 4: 229-268. pl. 25-31. 29 My 1912 Describes aby ote gy sae Ae ncaa: & + ecdiend Besa papillaeformis Setchell, 0 plumosa Setchell, gen. et spp. nov.; Fauchea Fryeana Setchell, Dudresnaya bermudensis Sache teams prtiies Setchell, and Weeksia Fryeana Scull, ok nov. Stewart, R., & Greaves, J. E. The production and movemeat of nitric nitrogen in soil. Centralb. Bakt. Zweite Abt. 34: 115-147. f: 1% 15 My 1912. Taylor, N. Perennials for the shady nook. Gard. Mag. 15: 308-310. Je Lae Nearly fifty plants that will flower without full sunshine.” Trelease, W. The classification of the black oaks. Soc. 51: 167-171. pl. 10-13. Je 1912 Urbina, M. Los Amates de jaipis ies 6 Baek mexicanas. La Naturaleza III. (Revista Cien.) 1: 32-53. 19 Urbina, M. Notas acerca de los Copales de Herninde las Burse- raceas mexicanas. La Naturaleza III. 1: 13-31. 19 Vallida, M. M. Una vida ennoblecida por el a y ae cumplimiento del deber. La Naturaleza Lil. 2: XLI-XLVI portrait. 1912. Biographical notice of Dr. Manuel Urbina y Altemirano, Vaupel, F. Sieben neue Kakteen aus Kuba. Monats- 65-67. 15 My 1ror12. A translation of the descriptions of the seven species descr! Rose in Torreya 12: 13-16. Vaupel, F. Aus meiner Sammlung. Monats. Kakteenk. 22 Proc. Am. Phil. with bibliography: Kakteenk. 22: ibed by Britton and : 69-71. Monats. Kakteenk. 22 ‘Vaupel, [F.] Echinocereus de Laetii Giirke. 72. 15 My i912. [Illust.] BULL. TORREY CLUB VOLUME 39, FLATE 26 UNITED STATES NATIONAS MuRcUM STRUTHIOPTERIS CHIRIQUANA Broach. x \. (A scale 10 cm. long is shown on the sheet to the left.) BULL. TORREY CLUB VOLUME 39, PLATE 27 THE NEW YORE GOTANICal GanoeH THe MEW (ORK RoTaNiCd, GamoEN BASLCHRTION OB Leora EAORaica OF Clee wo F706 ae V/06 <4 8 dant, Corseeron Detnwenn A669, 10 4A aren Couneres Orctwwen 26-90 1s STRUTHIOPTERIS SHAFERI Broadh. xX 4, (A scale 10 cm. long is shown on each sheet.) BULL. TORREY CLUB VCLUME 39, PLATE 28 STRUTHIOPTERIS UNDERWOODIANA Broadh. STRUTHIOPTERIS RUFA (Spreng.) Broadh, (Reduced to 14 of the actual size. A scale to cm. long is shown on each sheet.) BULL. TORREY CLUB VOLUME 30, PLATE 29 Ab, thal flue Irecet ben thd ww thatail . STRUTHIOPTERIS VIVIPARA Broadh, yy. A scale 10 cm. long is shown on each sheet.) BULL. TORREY CLUB VOLUME 39, PLATE 30 BRACHYPHYLLUM VOLUME 39, PLATE 31 BULL. TORREY CLUB and STERCULIA ZIZYFHUS, RHUS, BuLL. TORREY CLUB VOLUME 39, PLATE 32 Cy ff] OREODAPHNE MEMOIRS OF THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB A series of technical papers on per subjects, published at irregular intervals. h Price $3.00 a volume. Not offered in exc ange. Vol. 1, No. 1; not furnished separately : Bailey, Liberty Hyde. Studies of the types of various species of the genus Carex. Pages 1-85. 25 My 1889. 1. 1, No. 2; not furnished separately : Martindale, Isaa ec Marine algae of the os TORY coast and adjacent waters of Staten Island. ’ Pages 87-111. 24 Au Vo 1. 1, No. 3; price, 2 cents Spruce, Richard. efaticae Boliviana ae, in Andibus ‘Boliviae orientalis, annis 1885-6, acl. H. H. Rusby lectae, Pages 113-140. BE 1890. Vol. 1, No. 4; price, 75 ¢ Sturtevant, Edward Lewis. On seedless fruits. Pa 141-187. 30 My 1890, ol. 2, No. 1;_ not furnished separately : Halsted, Byron David. Ruatrse food- earalalieay in buds and surrounding parts. Pages 1-26, plates 1, 2. 10S 1890, Vol. 2, No. 2; price, 75 cents: ‘ Vail, Anna Murray, & Hollick, Charles Arthur. Contributions to thre botany of Virginia, Pages 27-56, plates 3, g. 23 D 1890. Vol. 2, No. 3; not furnished separately : : Holm, H or. Contributions to- the knowledge of the germination of - Some North American plants. Pages <7--108, plates ee 15 Ap 1891. Vol. 2, No. 4; price, 75 cents: Bed kee Wheelock, William Efner. The genus Polyga/a in atk America. Pages 109- 152. 30D 1801. Pepi 3, No 1; not furnished separately = John K & He eller, Amos Arthur. Flora of western North Carolina ded costtguces torn territory. Pages 1-39. 20 F 1892. oe Phi ake 2; price, $2.00 Morong, Thomas. Naiadaceae of North — [with illustrations of all ‘the _ “speces}. Peek Pages Fa a 20-74. 15 Mr 1893 : Vol. 3, No. 3; not furnished kepusicie! a6 Bag ny Hurd An enumeration of the plants collected in Shiva by Miguel = [Part 1) Pages 1-67. 28 Ap 1893. - Vol. 4, No. 1; not furnished se separately 25 Daas Lucien Tilbsioten: Index Hepaticarum.. Part < Boggy. Pages : I-91. 10 Je 1893. o ‘Sms Vol. 4, No. 2; rot furnished sagt s : : ren Sonne iar & Bd nay Anna Murray. the botanical explora. _ zeny” is ge during ihe season ot Pio. halts 201, es) p 1894. - » ‘ Rusby, oa bot price, 50 cents | os f y, Henry H Hurd. An enumera of the plants | celled in Bolivia by Miguel Part 2. Pages 203-274. ‘ro ° Minty Ap 105: . Pet, Vol. 4, No. 4; price, 50 cents : a aie Stockton. deck: Aapogaca L. Pag 275-296, pes ots Vol. 4, No. 5; iuice, 75 cette: ta, Pe axa. The North Ai merican haiees Piya nd te pn ede Ey S06. : Vol. 5; price, $3.00: foe uist of Pteridophyta and ance gua growing without cultivation in) North America. Pages I-3 4 D 1893-31 DI Ses ny f No. 1; price, $1.25: Rusby, Henry H An Acmigaenpe of the plants collected in Roieie by Bang. Part 3. ane 1-130. 17 N 1896. Vol. 6, No. 2; not furnished separately : eae ‘out, Abel Joel. A revision of the North American /sothectaceae and Breit Pages 131-210. 30 Jl 1897. We ia 1. 6, No.3 ee ; a Hazen, Tr life history of Spha pele ake ( nae me pluvealis). Pages 21-346, plates 86, "87 -olered }. 8 Je 1899. ae = 1. 6, No. 4; price, 50 cen Le eee x hoa A review of the genera st ferns ie). op 1899. : | Onderwood, Lucien M. 1832. Pages 247-283. 1 Dt ‘ “Vol. 6, No. 5; price, 25 cents : Fink, Bruce. Notes on lichen he ae in the upper sik ve Z Pages 285-307. D 1899. ‘ Vol. 7; price, $3. How The Hepatic and poe of f Califia. Soe ae plates sara 3 Au 18 oe 8, No. 1; not cope pee | cis Ernes “The comparative emb’ gy of the Rubiac : eet I-26, sa Ee ‘26 Au 1899. sic — dusts 27-112, 1902. i ae Vol. 8, No. 2; price, $1. Evans, Alexander William. The pate Pa the United States an Pages 113-183, plate 16-22. 15 F 1902. ~ . Tol. 8, No. oe sy 75 pa 9% se i Britton, Elizabeth Gertru , Alex | Vittaria lineata, Pages 185-211, plate om pT. 30 0 Au ‘Au 1902. =o . 9; price, $3.00 Rabe, Emest Stanley. A monograph of the Erysiphaceae. oo he sa O 1900. No longer as oe in co sie ete sets of the ea Sat ie xs price, $1 «75: os auth De Davia. ‘The North American Sordariaceat, i Vol. 11, No. 2; price, $1.75 + the Tracy Elliot. ‘The (Wothricaccae and Chaetophoraceae of t hc, sa 135-250, plates 20-42. 20 O 1902. oa : 1; price, $1.50: Spe 12, No. Alice Rich. Flora of New Paadacice and Andros e “fe 82 ae a AN map. 10D 1902. Vol. No. 2; pri ce, ce, $1.00: “of 12, A contribution to a revision = Sere 14, No. 2; price, 7 cents + aS ervations ¢ on the Cal lifornia ters. ‘ rJer9 sian SEPTEMBER 1912 BULLETIN ee OF THE €ditor PHILIP DOWELL -Wittiam Evans Cee ce aoc Doce wees pote eter = Se - : President EDWARD S&S. BURGESS, Pu.D. Ey Cee % Vice- Presidents JOHN HENDLEY BARNHART, A.M., M. D. HERBERT as RICHARDS, Sc.D. 5 eee and Treasurer BERNARD O. DODGE, Pu.D. Dept. of i Columbia arty’ ew York City MEETINGS Meetings twice bck month from October to May inclusive: the second at 8:00 P.M., at the American Museum of Natural History; the last Wednesda te 3: 30 P. M., i in 1g Museum Building of the New York Botanical mee a PUBLICATIONS All oS and other business communications pane to ! _ of the Club should be addressed to the Treasur Bernard O Botany, Columbia University, New York City. : i ‘Bulletin. Monthly, established 1870. Price, $5.00 « year; - cents. Of former volumes, only 24-38 can be supplied separatel certain ete é iten: : aiscil 7 Buuetin should be addressed to Philip Dowell, Editor, Port Richmond, N _ Torreya. Monthly, established rgo1. Price, $1.00 a year. tended for Publication i in TORREYA —_ be addressed | to i an Central M oye ‘ Proaloary € so Anthophyta and Pedi s |New York City, 1888, Price, $1.00 ‘Reprints. Contribut f 1 ublication order reprints, if desired, when they return galley “root to the eit reprints without covermay be had gratis. If cover is wanted, of copies ne — they may be ordered at the following rates from , Pemcaster, ha the SS paying ier. see his BULLETIN OF THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB ee ee SEPTEMBER 1g12 The ferns and flowering plants of Nantucket — X 4 EUGENE P. BICKNELL a GERANIACEAE _ GERANIUM MACULATUM L. Common, but so retiring an inhabitant of dense thickets as to _ be little noticeable. Like other spring-flowering plants on Nan- a tucket it comes into bloom much later than at more inland points in the same general latitude. In fresh flower May 30, 1910; just in bloom June 5, 1911; last flowers June 22, 1910. GERANIUM RoBERTIANUM L. This fragile plant of rocky woods and ravines is one of the Surprises of Nantucket, where it has somehow found its way ard hides under the cedars on Coatue, a narrow arm of sand, some five miles in length, which protects the harbor from Nantucket Long ago it was detected there by Mr. Dame—Mrs. Owen's record runs ‘‘ Under red cedars near the head of the harbor.”’ ft Probably occurs throughout the extent of Coatue, since I met _ With it near Second Point, Sept. 7, 1904, scattered here and there among the cedars and completely screened from view in the recesses beneath their low spreading branches. It remains well established there, where I observed it in full ower July 13, 1912. A Single plant was seen in the town, growing under a porch Liberty Street, in 1909, and again June 16, 1910, then in full is ial Bs ee RANIUM CAROLINIANUM L. Occasional as a weed in disturbed or once cultivated ground, — BULLETIN for August 1912 (39:357- 414. pl. 26-32) was issued 16 Au r912.] 415 416 BICKNELL: FERNS AND FLOWERING PLANTS OF NANTUCKET sometimes abounding but readily giving way and disappearing before conditions only slightly changed from those that enabled it to thrive. Mrs. Owen has told us that it was once found in abundance by Mr. Dame in a field near Sachacha, and Mr. Floyd has given me the following records: Gibbs Pond, 1901, and Mono- moy, 1904, Mrs. Nellie F. Flynn; Pocomo, 1907, Mrs. Mabel P. Robinson. I did not myself meet with it until September 1907, a single tuft of basal leaves where soil had been upturned on the plains east of Miacomet Pond. Here the next year, on June 17, were a few plants in flower and fruit. On June 2, 1909, unusually widespreading plants in full flower were scattered through a once cultivated field at Shimmo Valley farm, where a year later not a plant was to be found. On June 4, 1911, a solitary plant just in flower was met with west of the town and an abundant growth in full flower June 10 in an old field at Quidnet. It seems to be spreading on the island and getting to be more common. *GERANIUM PUSILLUM L. Now not uncommon in waste ground in and near the town but evidently a newcomer within recent years. It appears to have been found first on Nantucket by Mrs. Flynn, Feat Street, 1904,” fide F. G. Floyd, who also collected it in Hillers Lane in 1906. I first met with it the same year, on Aug. 11; a flower and fruit in waste ground west of the town, where also it was flowering Sept. 20, 1907, but had disappeared the follow year. In 1909 it was abundant and in full flower June 6 ina fiel west of the town and was also found a mile to the south. In June 1910, it was abundant and of unusually large size in 4 lot on Pleasant Street and was seen for the first time at eance growing by a fisherman’s cottage below the bluff. In ight it - appeared in a lawn on the Cliff Road. It occurs also in see town on Marthas Vineyard, where I observed it on @ lawn, $ in flower Oct. 10, I91T. *GERANIUM MOLLE L. North A single cluster in a weedy place off Centre Street, near 2 be Street, June 3, 1911, showing its first open flower. eadow : Sea Cliff Inn, 1897, Mrs. Mabel P. Robinson, fi BICKNELL: FERNS AND FLOWERING PLANTS OF NANTUCKET 417 ERODIUM CICUTARIUM (L.) L’Her. Mrs. Owen has recorded single plants found many years ago on three occasions in the town, one in 1850 and one in 1851. No recent collector seems to have met with it. OXALIDACEAE OXALIs sTRIcTA L. Common in fields and open places in all quarters of the island, often thriving along sandy shores; especially common on sandy levels about the south shore ponds. Just in flower May 30, 1909; June 7, 1908; in full flower June 3, 1911; flowering during the summer and through September; capsules full size June 18, 1908. For so delicate a plant this species is remarkably tenacious of life under hard conditions and accommodates itself as well to sterile and stony situations as to the rich soils of gardens and cultivated grounds. These adjustments are not without rather wide variations in habit and characters by which the species is marked off into several noteworthy forms. Heavy soils produce pale green canescent plants of large size, sometimes having a spread of 2.5 dm., and bearing large flowers and capsules. A greatly reduced form of brighter green color and with smaller flowers and capsules belongs to hard or gravelly soils; it is of con- tracted habit, often forming close mats only 5-10 cm. wide and ting very small crowded leaves and prostrate or even procum- bent and rooting stems. Another variety if, indeed, it be not of more moment, which I have met with only in the streets of the town, is of a dull green color, the comparatively few and large leaves pur plish tinged or even deep purple throughout; the leaflets, often Strongly declined, are more strongly ciliate than in the fommoner forms and their lower surface less distinctly cellular- alveolate under a lens; the flowers are large, having rather broad and blunt sepals, which become 7 mm. long, and the dried corollas ‘re often upborne on the apex of the capsule; the slender styles are twice the length of those found in associated forms of the Plant and are much less spreading. “OXALts CYMOSA Small. _ Seen only in the town, where it is frequent by streetsides and old yards, appearing as if introduced. It develops much later 418 BICKNELL: FERNS AND FLOWERING PLANTS OF NANTUCKET than Oxalis stricta and may be seen with its earliest leaves only beginning to unfold when the other is in full bloom. First leaves appearing June 6, 1909; first flowers June 16, 1911; June 18, 1908; June 21, 1910; flowering through September. LINACEAE LINUM USITATISSIMUM L. Casual and transient. It grew sparingly in an old field in 1899, but I have seen it since on Nantucket only in waste ground at Surfside, July 9, 1912, the most forward buds showing blue tips. It is included in Mrs. Owen’s catalogue, and Mr. Floyd's notes report it as having been collected by Miss Nina K. Goddard, in 1895, and by Mrs. Mary A. Albertson. LINUM VIRGINIANUM L. Not uncommon on the eastern side of the island from ise to Tom Never’s Pond, especially at outlying points about Saul’s Hills, growing in dry sandy soil. Elsewhere it was met with only at a single station in Trot’s Hills. The young plants ot be detected early in June and in some seasons are but a few inches high late in the month. The fruit is mature by the end of August, although flowering may continue until after the middle of Sep- tember. *LINUM STRIATUM Walt. Border of Waqutuquaib Pond, Sept. 9, 1904, 4 small ee of well-fruited plants still bearing a few flowers. This is one © the rather numerous group of Nantucket plants that have been found only at a single station. *Linum (Cathartolinum) intercursum sp. nov. oe Perennial, erect, slender, $8triate-angled, 1.5-3 dn. © por or dm. high, branched at the top, the branches 1-8 cm. long, oS erectly ascending, simple or sparsely corymbose; leaves vied and pale green, erect or ascending, oval-oblong to narrowly 00° ; ide, the lowermost oblanceolate, acute, 7-18 cm. long, 1.5-5 mm. ve ae at the : 3 ndulat- three-nerved, 1.5-2.5 mm. long, the inner minutely gla ‘ ciliolate; corolla yellow, spreading 8-12 long; capsule greenish purple, ovoid-conic, * soe ; : s cusp! high, acute, 1.5-2 mm. long, readily dehiscent, the carpel date; false septa long-ciliate; seeds 1.5 mm. long. BICKNELL: FERNS AND FLOWERING PLANTS OF. NANTUCKET 419 East Massachusetts to southern New Jersey, Georgia, and Alabama. Type from Nantucket, Sept. 11, 1899, in Herb. N. Y. Botanical Garden. Flowers on Nantucket from July (July 8, 1912) until well into September. This is the small, yellow-flowered Linum that is a characteristic plant of Nantucket, where it is scattered widely over the moorland and commons and is sometimes found about cranberry bogs in lower grounds. It was first collected by me in 1899 on the supposi- tion that it was the then little known Linum medium (Planch.) Britton. Subsequently it proved to be not uncommon on Marthas Vineyard and on Long Island, where it is one of the noteworthy plants of the Hempstead Plains. Early Nantucket specimens sub- mitted to Dr. J. K. Small were referred to Linum floridanum (Planch.) Trelease, which had not then been found north of South Carolina, and in the North American Flora the range of that species was extended north to Massachusetts. This disposition of the plant was also adopted in the seventh edition of Gray’s Manual. I have seen much of this Linwm since it was first collected and have learned in the field how distinct it is from Linum medium, and now a review of herbarium material leads me here to propose it as distinct from Linum floridanum also. If we examine a well-fruited Specimen of the latter, say Curtiss’ “North American Plants,” NO. 412, or his ‘‘Second Distribution,” no. 6850, we find that the Conspicuous yellow bony capsules are ovoid-subglobose to ovoid- oblong, 2.5-3.5 mm. high and rounded or even subtruncate at the top. In size and form as well as in color they are thus in marked Contrast to the greenish purple conic and acute thinner-walled ‘apsule of the more northern plant. They are also much more tardily dehiscent, the carpels not cuspidate and with non-ciliate *€pta; also, the false septum is more complete and the seeds, of a More reddish color, are one third larger. Linum floridanum is a taller and paler green plant than Linum intercursum, its leaves thicker and more rigid, narrower and more attenuate, and sharply cuspidate with pale hardened points; the flowers appear to be larger and the rootlets are fewer and less delicately fibrous. The leaves and the capsules of Linum floridanum conform closely to those of Linum medium. Linum intercursum in its angled branches and acute Capsule with cilia-bearing septa, shows an approach to 420 BICKNELL: FERNS AND FLOWERING PLANTS OF NANTUCKET characters of Linum sulcatum Riddell, and its bracteal leaves some- times show a submarginal thickening that recalls the trinerved leaves of that species. Linum sulcatum has been attributed to Nantucket, and I suppose there is no doubt at all that this species was mistaken for it. In addition to numerous specimens collected on Nantucket, Marthas Vineyard, and Long Island the following collections may be cited: Georgia, Cobb County, dry woods, elevation 1,020 ft., July 12, 1900, Roland M. Harper 213. Alabama, Clay County, Sept. 24, 1897, F. S. Earle 947; Coosa County, Sept. 29, 1897, F. S. Earle 1035. These specimens are the only ones I have seen from south of New Jersey, where I collected the plant at Wildwood, Cape May County, May 31, 1897, just in flower, and where Mr. Norman Taylor has more recently collected it at New Brunswick, Middlesex County, and also in Monmouth County. The purport of the evidence would seem to be that Linum intercursum is a plant of the coastal plain from. Massachusetts to New Jersey, extending southwestward in the hilly country into Alabama, while Linum floridanum is a coastwise species of the southern states, passing inland at low elevations and ranging from North Carolina to Mississippi. The most northern specimens I have seen of the latter are from Craven County, North Caro- lina, collected at Newbern, Aug. 1, 1898, Thos. H. Kearney, Jr., 1978. Apparently it is a plant of wet pine barrens and low grounds, whereas Linum intercursum inhabits preferably dry sandy places. SIMARUBACEAE *AILANTHUS GLANDULOSA Desf. : In 1899 this tree had become established at several places the neighborhood of the town. It has not since greatly increased its foothold and though slowly spreading scarcely strays away from places where it was originally planted. It is also spontaneous se Siasconset. It comes into leaf later in the season perhaps than any other Nantucket tree. As late as June 7, 1911, it appear nearly naked, showing only small tufts of coppery red leaves at the tips of the branchlets. BICKNELL: FERNS AND FLOWERING PLANTS OF NANTUCKET 421 POLYGALACEAE POLYGALA CRUCIATA L. One of the commonest plants of sandy open bogs, often abundant in sphagnum about the borders of ponds. In full flower in August and September. POLYGALA VERTICILLATA L. Dryish sandy places in low grounds, scarce. Little Neck; roadside at Eatfire; Coskaty. In full flower at the middle of September. POLYGALA VIRIDESCENS L. . Low grounds, rare. Roadside along Trot’s Swamp, Aug. 16, 1906, in full flower; near Bache’s Harbor, in full flower, Sept. 17, 1907. This species is given in Mrs. Owen's catalogue without mention of any locality. POLYGALA POLYGAMA Walt. One of the characteristic plants of the island, widely dissemi- nated over the moorland and commons and flowering from the middle of June until the middle of September. White flowers are het rare. Flower buds showing pink June 10, 1911, June 11, 1908; first flowers June 15, 1908, June 15, 1910; Tuckernuck, June 17, IQIr, EUPHORBIACEAE EvPHorBIA POLYGONIFOLIA L. In white sand along the beaches and back among the dunes; common. Plants very small but recognizable June 25, 1910; just flower July 13, 1912; in full flower through September. EvPHorBra MACULATA L, Not uncommon about the shores of Miacomet Pond; met with elsewhere only at a few stations not far from the town. Just in er July 2, 1912. In full flower through September. EvPHoRBrA PreEsiit Guss. ) Reported by Mrs. Owen as having been found by Judge Churchill and Mr. Deane by the railroad track near the town— to ay @ casual introduction only, since no one else seems ever ve met with it. 422 BICKNELL: FERNS AND FLOWERING PLANTS OF NANTUCKET EuPHORBIA CyPARIssIAs L. Fence borders and about farmhouses and abandoned grounds. Just in flower May 30, 1909; in full flower June 3, I91I, June 15, 1910; passing out of bloom later in the month. No set fruit observed. CALLITRICHACEAE CALLITRICHE HETEROPHYLLA Pursh. Common in brooks, pools, and springy places or on drying mud where the water has receded. Mature fruit June 3, I9II, Sept. 5, 1904. EMPETRACEAE CorEMA Conrapil Torrey. Locally abundant in the southeast quarter of the island, ex- tending from north of the third milestone on the state road to Siasconset, within a quarter of a mile of the shore and into the South Pasture. This general area extends in a northwest and southeast direction south of Saul’s Hills for a distance of about four miles and is two miles or more in greatest breadth. It is a territory of level or gently rolling plains and open barrens of scrub oak and affords conditions that manifestly meet well the needs of this very local species. Where most abundant it grows in widespread profusion, covering the ground with a o heathlike carpet for rods together, perhaps even acres, OF when i evera more interrupted growth forming firm cushionlike masses °° yards across. Here and there it has extended its growth thickly along old wagon trails on the moors, which have opened a way a it through the dense carpeting of bearberry with which its mor" lively green makes striking contrast. Parts of these long unu ri roadways have thus been almost completely obliterated, the : wagon ruts once deeply scored in the sandy soil being marked sad by shallow parallel grooves along the dense masses of this wees tive compact shrub cushioned up between them. Le . myself met with it outside of the general area indicated gi near Tawpaushas Swamp, about two miles from the town, “™ Owen, however, mentions what may be still another smraesy ‘‘Road from town to Polpis,’’ her authority being Miss ate 1867. It is still abundant in low places bordering Tom NEVE BICKNELL: FERNS AND FLOWERING PLANTS OF NANTUCKET 423 Swamp, just as it there grew long ago as reported to Mrs. Owen by Mr. Dame. Extensive growths of this plant are undoubtedly destroyed from time to time by fires which pass over the moors. I have noticed wide areas so devastated where the railroad traverses its general habitat, the fires having been started by sparks from passing trains. Green fruit June 13, 1908; fruit mature and readily falling June 24, 1910; scarcely mature July 2, 1912. ANACARDIACEAE RHUS COPALLINA L. Common, mainly on the eastern side of the island. Leaves only beginning to unfold June 7, 1911; in full flower Sept. 15, 1907. *Ruus urrta (L.) Sudworth. It may be open to doubt whether the staghorn sumac is native to Nantucket. A scattered growth has long occupied a field along an old cemetery south of the town, and a few rather ill-favored shrubs grow along a field border by the Surfside road in the suburbs, where they were first seen in 1899. But there is no certainty that these are of native origin, since the species has n used as an ornamental shrub in several yards in the town and also about a distant farmhouse in Squam. Better evidence that it belongs to the island’s natural flora is afforded by a strong colony of full tree stature along a steep bank between Union and Orange streets, Although now pent in in the midtown and forming Part of the back yards of buildings that abut on either street, this bank must have once formed a prominent bluff corresponding to the “Cliff” on the north side of the town. The evident age of these sumacs and their position on the side of the bluff allow Strong presumption that they are a relic of its native vegetation. The larger trees are certainly not less than twenty-two feet in height, and one measured in 1909 was twenty-eight inches in “rcumference one foot above the base. This sumac occurs on arthas Vineyard on a bank at Tashmoo Pond, where it is clearly tive, Raus GLapra |. Frequent in dry ground about the borders of thickets in the northeastern section of the island from Shawkemo to Pocomo, 424 BICKNELL: FERNS AND FLOWERING PLANTS OF NANTUCKET Squam, and Sachacha. Elsewhere seen only among the Miacomet Pines, a few small plants, 1909, and west of Reed Pond, a single sprout, 1908. Close panicles of green buds July 11, 1912. On Nantucket this sumac is not ordinarily over two to four feet high, only exceptionally reaching a stature of five or six feet, and it is often the merest dwarf. The smallest fruiting plant seen was only six inches high, including a fruiting panicle 24 inches long and 14 inches thick. The largest fruiting panicle observed was 334 inches long by 21% inches thick. Much variation in the leaves is shown even among plants of the same colony. The more common type of leaflet is lanceolate, sharply serrate, and the color of the upper surface rather a dull green. Side by side with plants so characterized occur others having much broader, subentire leaflets, dark shining green above and unusually whitened beneath. TOXICODENDRON VERNIX (L.) Shafer. Frequent, or rather common, in bogs throughout. Leaves beginning to appear June 1, 1909; leaves very small and un- developed June 10, 1911. TOXICODENDRON VULGARE Mill. Abundant and of wide variation, quite probably including more than one species. Dr. E. L. Greene, who has kindly looked over my series of specimens, is rather definitely of this opinion, but points out to me that no pronouncement should be made i the absence of mature fruit. My collections, all made in June, beat panicles of buds or freshly opened flowers and clusters bi the weathered fruit left over from the year before and having little or nothing remaining of the pericarp. The most abundant form on Nantucket is the common erect shrubby plant of low grounds, with ovate, often subcordate, shining leaflets, more OF less rusty pubescent on the veins beneath, and globose or depressed pie pubescent fruit. Very similar but taller and sometimes high- climbing forms have thinner, less shining leaves, often cuneate : the base, and differ further in their more diffuse inflorescence an rather larger flowers. A form with essentially similar inflorescence keeps to the ground in pine groves, running among the eapls pine needles and putting up short erect branchlets from its ph ey CEES SR ae oes ee aaah BICKNELL: FERNS AND FLOWERING PLANTS OF NANTUCKET 425 cumbent stems. All of these forms have essentially entire leaflets, but a low-climbing form found on Coskaty has thin leaflets mostly cuneate at the base and coarsely dentate. Most distinct of all is a plant of compact and clustered small foliage and prostrate and rooting stems, which thrives in the driest and most exposed reaches of pure white sand. By comparison in the field with freer-growing larger-leaved forms this showed marked differences in the inflorescence, which was sparser and much more contracted, even congested, with considerably smaller flowers, the anthers especially being less than half the size, by actual measurement 9.50.75 mm. as against 1.5-1.75 mm. The small fruit is densely pubescent. ILICACEAE ILEX opaca Ait. Twenty-four years ago Mrs. Owen wrote that the holly was becoming rare on Nantucket, having been cut for firewood, but that it still grew in swamps at the eastern end of the island. It is indeed regrettably rare at the present day, and I have met with it only in secluded spots in Beechwood, and a single tree farther west, in Polpis. At the main Beechwood locality there was still i 1910 a scattered growth of strong trees, the largest 10-15 feet in height, with trunks of 10-12 inches in circumference. The Polpis tree, in 1900, was about 10 feet high, the trunk 14 inches around, one foot above the base. In J uly 1912 it was found that most of the fine trees in Beech- Wood had been severely mutilated, presumably for Christmas decorations, the entire tops of most of them having been cut away. ILEX GLABRA (L.) A. Gray. A characteristic shrub of the eastern and the western sides of the island, ornamenting low thickets or fringing the borders of ee With its masses of dark lustrous green. It is one of the few ‘Pecies of Nantucket which is common on both sides of the island but “5 almost wanting in the intervening territory, in which I have wen tat only a few stations: Pout Ponds, Tawpaushas Swamp, “mmo Ponds, a single cluster, and a small patch among pines on the Surfside road—an unusual situation. It is common at “ng Pond, at the western end of the island, and especially so 426 BICKNELL: FERNS AND FLOWERING PLANTS OF NANTUCKET about ponds and bogs in Polpis, on the eastern side, and occurs in Saul’s Hills, in Squam, and about the borders of Tom Never’s Swamp. Small flower buds June 10, 1908; first flowers July 2, 1912, generally in full blossom July 6; green fruit at the middle of September 1899. ILEX BRONXENS!S Britton. Wet thickets and low grounds, either strongly typical or varying toward the next. The most pronounced examples, collected in Shawkemo, bore broadly obovate or obovate-oblong leaves 2.5-5 em. wide and 5-8 cm. in length of blade. First flowers July 4, 1912. As here understood, this is our common northern winterberry, which is replaced southward by true Ilex verticillata (L.) A. Gray (I. verticillata var. padifolia Watson, Prinos padifolius Willd.). The latter, although common near New York City and frequent on Long Island, appears not to extend eastward beyond southern New England. *Tlex fastigiata sp. (?) nov. -s but A closely much branched shrub similar to I/ex bronxensts 0” A er and on the veins beneath, very numerous, much smaller, nee Lahn more attenuate than those of J. bronxensis, dark green am to oblong-lanceolate or oblong, tapering to base and apex, abruptly attenuate or short-caudate, commonly teeth almost spinescent, the margins undulate-revo pending flowers on slender pedicels 1.5-4 mm. long, the corolla ‘ : it com- 5-8 mm.; calyx lobes ciliate, mostly obtuse or rounded qe in monly smaller, more clustered, and deeper red in oe I. bronxensis. n clustered are Ordinarily it § eet high, it e 18, Common on Nantucket in low grounds, ofte wet thickets, and not infrequent in dry barrens. from five to eight feet in height but becomes fifteen f stems seventeen inches in basal girth. Nearly in flower Jun BICKNELL: FERNS AND FLOWERING PLANTS OF NANTUCKET 427 1908; first flowers July 1, 1912, everywhere in full flower July to. The fruit remains green as late as the middle of September, maturing later in that month and in October. Type from near Long Pond, July 10, 1912, in full flower, in Herb. N. Y. Botanical Garden. In color of bark and form of leaf this winterberry often calls to mind Jlex verticillata (L.) A. Gray rather than I. bronxensis, notwithstanding its nearer relationship with the latter. Like each of them it has a parallel thin-leaved shade form and a broader- leaved cyclophylla form. This well-arisen scion of J. bronxensis largely replaces that species on Nantucket and to a less extent supplants it on Mar- thas Vineyard, but I have never seen it on Long Island. In its authentic pattern it bears a contrast to I. bronxensis that is alto- gether striking in plants so nearly related. Not any doubt need be entertained that it is no mere casual variation of that species. It is too well declared in the Nantucket flora to have had other cause than some broadly operating influence that has drawn it Strongly away from the ordinary mainland type, albeit without having effected a wholly secure detachment. Connecting forms denote well enough its immediate parent, yet everywhere among such confusing intermediates it reports its own individual claim and bears a regional and insular stamp that may well be approved by a name. It is perhaps of no importance at all to classification Whether this name be of trinomial or of binomial structure. The Status of a plant once understood, it neither adds to nor detracts from the taxonomic facts it stands for, whether it be called by a tame made up of two factors or of three. The really important question would seem rather to be, how far a third symbol may needlessly encumber speech and writing and err still further in °verweighting nomenclature by leading straightway, and logically, . the Polynomial. Here assuredly has taken its source that Fevived polynomialism already upon us which proceeds unmindful that a name is not a classification; and this notwithstanding that the efficient binomial ever perfectly denotes its object, whether in in of distinction small or great, provided only that it be worthy to aga at all. Its function is nominative, not classificatory. It * opposed to the false precision of the multiple name now fast 428 BICKNELL: FERNS AND FLOWERING PLANTS OF NANTUCKET falling into incoherency in its pursuit of impossible distinctions— varieties, large type varieties, small type varieties, states, condi- tions, and forms. Held to its simple appellative function, the binomial should presently come upon a fair stability undisturbed by those problems of definition and relationship that, because they must continue to trouble our classifications, need not greatly disturb the names of the things we seek to classify. Effect of asparagin on absorption and growth in wheat* J. J. SKINNER AND J. H. BEATTIE (WITH PLATE 33) For the past few years a survey of the organic matter of the soil from the standpoint of biochemistry, has been under way in the Laboratory of Soil Fertility Investigations. As many as 25 different organic compounds have been isolated and identified. The definite recognition of these compounds has led to a fuller understanding of the chemistry of the organic Matter of soils and of the biological changes taking place therein. The compounds isolated cover a wide range of chemical substances of biological origin. They are represented by the hydrocarbons, Consisting of carbon and hydrogen only; by the acids, fats, resins, alcohols, esters, waxes, consisting of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen; as well as by a large group of nitrogenous compounds, which Consist of carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, and nitrogen. The nitrogenous soil constituents isolated are creatinin,t with the Probability that creatin also exists, hypoxanthin, xanthin, guanin, adenin, cholin, histidin, arginin,t nucleic acid,$ and Picolin carboxylic acid.|| A number of these have been studied a5 regard to their effect on plant growth. Some of the soil con- stituents have been found to be harmful as for instance, picolin * Contribution from the Laboratory of Soil Fertility Investigations. | Published Y Permission of the Secretary of Agriculture. t rey, Edmund C. The isolation of creatinine from soils. Jour. Amer. hem. Soc. 34:99. 1912; also U. S. Dept. Agr. Bur. Soils Bull. 83': 11-22. 1912. t Schreiner, O., and Shorey, Edmund C. Chemical nature of soil organic : S. Dept. Agr. Bur. Soils Bull. 74: 34-36. 1910; The presence of arginine ney histidine in soils. Jour. Biol. Chem. 8: 381. 1910; Pyrimidine derivatives and - Jour. Biol. Chem. 8: 385. 1910. § Shorey, Edmund C. Nucleic acid in soils. Science II. 35: 390. 1912; Bio- M. a: 104. rorr, | Schreiner, O., and Shorey, Edmund C. The isolation of picoline carboxylic Feng soils wag its relation to soil fertility. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 30: 1295. Sole Ban ‘solation of harmful organic substances from soil. U.S. Dept. Agr. Bur. * 53: I-53. 1909. | acid 429 430 SKINNER AND BEATTIE: EFFECT OF ASPARAGIN ON WHEAT carboxylic acid|| and dihydroxystearic acid,* while others are beneficial to growth. Creatinin, one of the nitrogenous soil constituents, has a beneficial effect on growth.t An extended study has been reported on, with this compound. Plants grown in solution cultures containing only potash and phosphate show greatly increased growth when creatinin is added. When large amounts of nitrate are present in the culture solutions, creatinin produced no appreciable effect on the growth. Plants growing in nitrate cultures, whether low or high in nitrate, showed a greatly di- minished absorption of this ingredient when creatinin was present, whereas the removal of potash and phosphate was practically normal. It seems that creatinin was absorbed by the plants, replacing the effect of nitrates. Creatin, nucleic acid,{ hypoxan- thin, and xanthin are also beneficial and have a similar action. Many observations have been made with nitrogenous com- pounds not yet isolated from soils, although allied to the com- pounds which have been found to exist in soils. In this connection asparagin has been studied. : Asparagin is a water-soluble form of organic material which 1s relatively abundant in plants. It was first found in the young shoots of asparagus and subsequently in a large number of other plants representing many different families. A number of investigators have worked with asparagin. Baessler§ found it to be beneficial to maize, Prianischnikoft and Lebedeff|| secured beneficial results, working with oats; Hansteen stearic * Schreiner, O., and Shorey, Edmund C. The isolation of peer gS - acid from soils. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 30: 1599. 1908. Schreiner, O., _ iiss 50:1 : Some effects of a harmful pou soil constituent. Bot. Gaz. U.S. Dept. Agr. Bur. Soils Bull. 1-98. I9gT10. } Skinner, J. J. Effects of essiie on growth and absorption. Agr. Bur. Soils Bull. 833: 33-41. I91I; — effect of creatinine on growth. Bot. Gaz. 54: 152-163. f. 1. 16 Au t Schreiner, O., and Skinner, J. J. The action x u. S. Dept: and creatine ne acid and its decomposi- tion products on soils and plants. Science II. 35: 390- vz Landw. Ver Baessler, P. Assimilation des Asparagins durch Pi ‘prone Stat. 33: 231. 1887. en of some || Prianischnikoff, D., and Lebedeff, A. N. Assimilation of the “ Abst: compounds in Scie ea Tzv. Moscow Selskokhar Inst. 3: 5° 1897; Exp. Sta. Rec. 9: 907- * Hansteen, - pak een i den grénne phaner Selsk. Skrifter No. 3. 1898; Uber Eiweissynthese in griinen Phanerogame® Bot. 33: 417. 1§99. id. e plante ogam' Pp Jahrb. SKINNER AND BEATTIE: EFFECT OF ASPARAGIN ON WHEAT 401 found it was beneficial to Lemna; Brown* found it beneficial to the barley embryo; Nakamura? secured beneficial results, working with the barley plant, and also found it beneficial to onions; and Molliard f secured beneficial results with radish. All of these tests were made in water cultures. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS In studying the effect of asparagin on growth, wheat seedlings were grown in aqueous culture solutions containing the nutrient salts, calcium acid phosphate, sodium nitrate, and potassium sul- phate. Some of the cultures contained each of the salts singly, others were composed of a mixture of two salts, sodium nitrate and calcium acid phosphate, sodium nitrate and potassium sul- phate, and calcium acid phosphate and potassium sulphate. Still other solutions had all three constituents in various proportions. Inall there were 66 different cultures of nutrient solutions. The scheme of the experiment and manner of preparing the nutrient cultures was similar to that described in Bulletin 70 of the Bureau of Soils and other publications.§ The concentration of all these solu- ons was 80 parts per million of the fertilizer ingredients, PsO;, NHs, and KO. In cultures containing only one nutrient salt, for in- Stance calcium acid phosphate, the concentration was 80 parts per million of P,O;. If two salts were present, for instance calcium acid Phosphate and sodium nitrate, the concentration was 80 Parts per million of P,Q; + NHs. If all three salts were present the concentration was 80 parts per million of P2O; + NH: + K,0. The ratios of these concentrations varied in 10 per cent stages, mak- “8 inall 66 different cultures. Distilled water treated with carbon Was used in preparing the culture solutions. The culture solutions — acaba as On the culture of excised embryos of barley on nutrient solu- 1906, taining nitrogen in different forms. Trans. Guinness Research Lab. 1: 288. nay a ura, T. Relative value of asparagin as a nutrient for phanerogams. Agr. Tokyo 2: 465. 1894. "ee M. Recherches sur l'utilisation par les plantes supérieures de ca organiques azotées. Bull. Soc. Bot. France IV. 10: 541. 1910. Some effects of a harmful organic soil con- he - Dept. Agr. Bur. Soils Bull. 70: 1-98. 1910; Bot. Gaz. 50: 161. Gaz. 50: npg’ nitrate and potassium on absorption and growth. Bot. ee To. ore a. ns fe) p f=] fom mn x i | f=) 8 cae 432 SKINNER AND BEATTIE: EFFECT OF ASPARAGIN ON WHEAT were contained in wide-mouth bottles holding 250 c.c., and 10 wheat plants were grown in each. The wheat plants when used for the experiment were about 2 cm. high; they had been pre- viously germinated on aluminum disks floated upon the surface of a tank of water. When large enough to use in the experiment, seedlings of uniform size were selected for the test. The culture solutions were changed every three days, four changes being made during the course of the experiment. The solutions were analyzed for nitrates immediately after each change. The phosphate and potash were determined in a composite of the four changes. By this means the effect of asparagin upon the absorption of nutrients by the seedlings could be studied during the course of the experi- ment. EFFECT OF ASPARAGIN ON GROWTH Two sets of cultures were prepared: to one set were added merely the nutrient salts; to a similar set 50 parts pet million of asparagin were added in each culture, in addition to the nutrient salts. The wheat seedlings grew in the culture solutions from November 13 to November 25. When the plants had grown for several days it was noticeable that the asparagin cultures were better developed, these seedlings having broader leaves and longer and better developed roots: This was more pronounced in some of the fertilizer mixtures that in others. The beneficial effect became more decided as the experiment progressed. The weight of the plants taken at the end of the experiment shows the beneficial effect produced es a asparagin. The total green weight of the 66 cultures on. asparagin was 148.2 grams against 134.9 grams for the 66 contro cultures, an increase of 9 per cent, as an average of all the aspar gin cultures. EFFECT OF ASPARAGIN ON GROWTH IN CULTURES CONTAINING XO NITRATE The effect of the asparagin was more marked in the pe ap containing potash and phosphate than in those which er potash, phosphate, and nitrate. The green weight of the ¢ i composed of potash and phosphate with and without as SKINNER AND BEATTIE: EFFECT OF ASPARAGIN ON WHEAT 433 taken at the termination of the experiment, are given in TABLE I. The first column gives the number of the culture; the second, third, and fourth the amount of the fertilizer ingredient in the culture solution. Calcium acid phosphate, sodium nitrate, and potassium sulphate were the nutrient salts used.. The fifth column gives the green weight of the plant without asparagin, and the sixth column the green weight with 50 parts per million of asparagin in the solution. TABLE I EFFECT OF ASPARAGIN ON GROWTH IN CULTURE SOLUTIONS CONTAINING NO NITRATE Fertilizer ingredients in culture solution Green weight of cultures Ree. rc Ot eee ee eae soe P20;, parts per | NHs, parts per | KO, parts per | Without a: pare With 50 p- p.m. mhillion million million | gin, grams asparagin, gms. Seer ec } ER 56 ) oO 80 Pi eRe 1.832 46 8 re) 72 | 1.368 1.644 37 16 te) 64 1.382 1.742 hd 24 Ie 56 1.119 1.825 oad 32 cs) 48 1.393 2.145 16 40 oO 40 1.223 2.199 II | 48 re) 32 I.167 1.932 7 56 oO 24 1.243 2.199 4 64 0 16 1.313 1.909 3 72 (9) 8 I.311 1.775 I 80 oO ° 0.811 0.975 All of the cultures with asparagin present show a marked in- ‘rease in weight. Culture no. 37 containing 16 parts per million of Phosphate and 64 parts per million of potash gave 1.382 grams sreen weight without asparagin and 1.742 grams with asparagin; culture no. 16, which contained 40 parts per million both of phos- phate and of potash gave 1.223 grams weight without asparagin and 2.199 grams with asparagin. Culture no. 4, composed of 64 parts Per million Phosphate and 16 parts per million potash, gave 1.313 sams green weight without asparagin and 1.909 with asparagin. The total weight of the 11 cultures without asparagin was 13.714 sams against 20.478 grams with asparagin, thus showing an in- ‘Tease of 47 per cent as an average effect in the various cultures Without Nitrate. This series of cultures is reproduced in PLATE 33. “ultures marked with the same number, for instance 56 and 564, | ve the same Proportion of potash and phosphate. Cultures ; “aked with the number alone contain no asparagin, the cultures | with me letter A have 50 parts per million of asparagin. The —“Mposition of the culture solution is given in TABLE I. It will 434 SKINNER AND BEATTIE: EFFECT OF ASPARAGIN ON WHEAT be seen that each culture containing asparagin, no matter what the proportion of phosphate and potash may be, is larger than the culture growing in a similar solution without the asparagin. EFFECT OF ASPARAGIN IN CULTURES CONTAINING NITRATE In TABLE II are given the green weights obtained in the series of cultures, all of which contain the uniform amount of 8 parts per million NH; as nitrate, with varying amounts of potash and TABLE II EFFECT OF ASPARAGIN ON GROWTH IN CULTURE SOLUTIONS CONTAINING 8 PARTS PER MILLION ache AS NITRATE “Coen eee: of cultures Fertilizer it Ingresicnts { in culture 9c actution pom ts nue oheeue pe Shits ‘seis ook. —|- hout aspar With so p. p- m- ‘a! ut aspara- | 205 parts per | NH, parts per | KaO, parts Per | gin, grams | asparagin fn, ee 57 o 8 72 | 1.880 1,830 47 8 8 64 | 1.912 2.275 38 16 8 56 | wee 2.184 30 24 8 48 | 2.444 2.580 23 32 8 40 2.027 2.665 17 40 8 32 ee 2.433 12 48 8 24 1.961 2.545 8 56 8 16 | 2093 2.4) 3 72 8 o |. 1.a65...1, 5 ao phosphate. The effect of asparagin is still noticeable in these green weight figures, as it was while the plants were growing, but the additional effect is much less marked than in the absence of nitrate as shown in TABLE I. The total growth in this series with- TABLE III EFFECT OF ASPARAGIN ON GROWTH IN CULTURE SOLUTION PER MILLION NHs3 AS NITRATE ee S CONTAINING 16 PARTS Fertilizer ingredients in culture solution Si wii weight of at Culture no. et With 50 p- oni - arts r Without aspara- ¥e nee pee ee ee eee ee _ sin, grams spre 58 ° 16 64 1.905 oth 48 8 16 56 erie 2.255 39 16 16 48 #549 2.795 31 24 16 40 2.518 2.660 24 32 16 32 2.289 2.506 18 40 16 24 2.633 | 9.545 13 48 16 16 2.256 | 2.245 9 56 16 8 te 6 64 16 ba Oa 1 ee SKINNER AND BEATTIE: EFFECT OF ASPARAGIN ON WHEAT 435 out asparagin was 19.298 grams against 22.075 grams with aspara- gin, an additional increase of 14 per cent due to asparagin. When no nitrate was present this additional effect of the asparagin was 47 per cent. In TABLE III the green weight for the series of cultures con- taining 16 parts per million NH; as nitrate, is given. Without the asparagin the total weight of these cultures is 19.917 grams; with asparagin it is 21.253 grams, or only an increase of 7 per cent. The additional effect of asparagin was still less in the 24 parts per million NH3 cultures, and with the higher amounts of nitrate this eflect became even uncertain. The effect of asparagin was much more pronounced in those fertilizer combinations that contained no nitrate and those low in nitrate. From this it appears that asparagin, like creatinin, treatin, hypoxanthin, xanthin, and a number of other nitrogenous ‘ompounds, can replace the effect of nitrate in producing plant growth. INFLUENCE OF ASPARAGIN ON ABSORPTION OF FERTILIZER SALTS The foregoing discussion shows clearly the influence of asparagin °n growth and its effect in cultures containing no nitrate. There femains to be discussed the removal of nutrients from the solution during the growth of the plant. As already mentioned, the ab- Sorption of nutrients was determined by making an analysis for iitrate at the termination of every three-day change, and of the Phosphate and potassium on a composite of the solution from the our changes. It is thus possible to compare the results obtained under the controlled conditions, without the asparagin and under the Conditions where 50 parts per million of asparagin were present i the solution. The total phosphate, potash, and nitrate removed from the tures was 1,109.6 milligrams for the normal and 1,117 milli- sams for the cultures containing asparagin. The examination of the results, when considered for the three constituents separately *S given below, shows that the phosphate and potash absorption Were somewhat greater in the asparagin cultures, as is demanded by the larger growth, whereas the nitrate removal is considerably than in the normal cultures. 486 SKINNER AND BEATTIE: EFFECT OF ASPARAGIN ON WHEAT The amount of phosphate stated as P.O; removed from the solutions during the experiment was 201.2 milligrams for the normal cultures and 326 milligrams for the cultures containing asparagin, a difference of 124.8 milligrams in favor of the asparagin cultures. The amount of potash stated as K,O removed from the solu- tions was 471.2 milligrams for the normal cultures and 485.6 milligrams for the asparagin cultures. As with the phosphate the asparagin cultures removed slightly more potash than the normal cultures, 14.4 milligrams. The amount of nitrate removed during the course of the experi- ment was 437.2 milligrams by the normal and 305.4 milligrams for the asparagin cultures. The asparagin cultures, though making a larger growth, used 131.8 milligrams less nitrate. It seems that the plants absorb and use asparagin whether nitrate be present or not, the effect on growth being much more marked in the limiting case where no nitrate was present, and that in the other cases the compounds replaced the effect of nitrate. The culture work was throughout under strict chemical con- trol, so as to establish as definitely as possible that the effects om the plants noted were produced by the absorption of the compou as such. Nitrite, nitrate, and ammonia were tested for @ found to be absent, or, in the case of ammonia, present in traces only. Although neither nitrate, nitrite, nor ammonia was found, the plants, nevertheless, grew remarkably well, and the only conclusion justified by this experimental evidence is that a compound is directly absorbed and assimilated. With the strict chemical control exercised, all possibility of any extended actio® by bacterial or other external biological agencies seems exc oe If such effects were produced in these experiments, they ce ; only minor significance in the results obtained. Bacteria an $ ; 2 . nd lant experiments on so large a scale, involving over 4 thousa he in a single test. Moreover, it may even appear question whether absolute sterility, as being too artificial a condition 0 ae determination of the effect of soil constituents 0M plants, W° be desirable. SKINNER AND BEATTIE: EFFECT OF ASPARAGIN ON WHEAT 437 It would seem that chemical control under as normal conditions as a cultural experiment will allow, is better than conducting the experiment under the artificial condition of sterility, which, after all, is made only so that biochemical changes may be excluded. In these experiments the bottles were sterilized before being used in making culture solutions for the various changes, the pans and other apparatus used in germinating the seed were sterilized from time to time, and corks used for the cultures were always clean and sterilized before use. Although all of these precautions were taken, it was of course not possible to exclude some micro- organisms in such work, as the solutions were exposed from time to time to the air. There was no excessive microorganic life noticeable. While bacteria and other micrcorganisms were present in the solutions to a slight extent, it can hardly be said that their influence could have been large; that is, such influence as they had was probably so slight as to be negligible so far as the general and larger tendencies which are shown to exist are con- cerned. While the effect of the asparagin decreased with increasing nitrate so far as additional effect on growth is concerned, it had nevertheless a conserving effect upon the amount of nitrate left in the solution during the time the plants were growing, as is shown by the analysis of the solution. It appears, therefore, that the plant can utilize this nitrogenous compound for plant syn- thesis. BurEav oF Sorts Wisemcron. D.C. Explanation of plate 33 Wheat as growing in culture solutions with and without asparagin, and oe S proportions of potash and phosphate but no nitrate. Cultures with the Ne z following the sie contain asparagin. A contribution to the life history of Uvularia sessilifolia ISABEL ALDEN (WITH PLATES 34, 35) INTRODUCTION That the seasonal development of any plant, especially with reference to the unfavorable winter season, should be of interest and of some significance is undoubted. Such a study has been begun here with Uvularia sessilifolia and includes field observa- tions as to growth of rhizome and aerial shoot as well as a more detailed study of the development of the megasporangium and microsporangium. The chronological development of these latter organs has received some attention, but the actual number of cases is meager, and what the significance of the history of these organs of reproduction may prove to be can be shown only after a considerable number of plants, particularly of related genera, have been studied. The variations thus far brought to light show the need of an even wider range of investigations in this line than at first would seem necessary. The plants that have been thus Studied so far show a wide range of variation. Symplocarpus foetidus (Duggar!) showed the nuclei of the definitive archesporium in a resting condition about October first, with the divisions of the pollen mother cells taking place the first warm days of April. In Trillium (Smith?) the microspores were found in the mother cell stage in April together with the four potential megaspores. In Hepatica (Chamberlain®), however, the early spring, that is while the ground was still frozen, showed pollen grains fully formed and the embryo sac ready for fertilization. The same investigator‘ Claimed that Salix passed the winter in the microspore mother cell Stage with no megaspore defined till after the renewal of growth in the spring. This condition of the microsporangium has been challenged, for Salix fragilis (Moore®) showed the cells of the anther stil] homogeneous without differentiation of tissue in vember. Perhaps Corylus and Alnus’ gave the most extreme 439 440 ALpEN: LIFE HISTORY OF UVULARIA SESSILIFOLIA condition, for here the midwinter catkins showed pollen grains in which the tube nucleus and generative nucleus were distinct. At first thought it would seem that that point which marks the end of the sporophyte generation would mark the end of the growing season. This has been made a generalization.’ Cham- berlain® suggests further that since the mother cell stage appears as a common halting place for the winter, this may be the condition most capable of withstanding the unfavorableness of winter. However, even the few instances given above show enough variety to lead one to suspect that perhaps the mother cell stage in winter is not to be found in a high enough majority of cases to warrant such an interpretation. The particular plant taken for this study, Uvularia sessilifolia, is one in which neither microspore nor mega- spore passes the winter in that turning point of sporophyte and gametophyte phases. The study is but a preliminary one and intended largely to indicate the time at which the various stages in the life history are to be sought. A cytological study of the stages here given is in progress. COLLECTING AND METHODS The buds of the rhizome of Uvularia sessilifolia were taken at intervals during the year as given below in detail. In the earlier stages the tips of the rhizome were put directly into the fixing agent, while in the later material from one to several of the bud scales were first removed. In the spring material the bud was dissected and the flower alone fixed. The fixing fluid used was chrom-acetic acid; time, twenty-four hours. The ma- terial was then washed and run through successive grades of alcohol, beginning with 15 per cent and changing the final absolute alcohol once. The infiltration was with cedar oil, 33 P& cent cedar oil and absolute alcohol, 66 per cent cedar oil and absolute alcohol, and two changes of pure cedar oil. The paraffin se gradually introduced into the cedar oil and the material finally imbedded in pure paraffin melting at 54° C. cut about 7 mm. thick and mounted serially. toxylin was used in staining, as only the general stages we Delafield’s hem@ re sought: ALDEN: LIFE HISTORY OF UVULARIA SESSILIFOLIA 441 FIELD OBSERVATIONS Uvularia sessilifolia grows in rather close colonies, a fact corre- lated, of course, with the rhizome habit. The season’s elongation of the rhizome appears first about the middle of April as a tiny pro- tuberance at the base of the spring’s leafy shoot. This quickly pushes out, elongating so rapidly that by the first of May the length of the new growth is one half to one inch. The growth continues very rapidly so that by the first of June the increase is from two to four inches. This is apparently almost the limit of increase. The bud at the end is at this time but slightly larger in diameter than the rhizome itself. No attempt has been made in this study to get at the contents of the buds borne at the base of the flowering and the non-flowering branches. The tip end becomes curved upward slightly and is usually at depths varying from one to three inches below the surface of the ground. The size of the bud increases mostly during the latter part of August and the month of September. From October through to March the size is practically the same. With the renewal of growth in the spring, however, the portion just back of the bud again elongates rapidly and the buds increase greatly in diameter and length so that they appear above ground about the middle of April, those containing flowers being about one fourth of an inch in diameter. The flowers appear the first week of May. An interesting and probably very significant fact is noticed in connection with those plants having flowers. In all the plants observed the flowering plant is seen to branch once, the flower being borne at the first or second node of one of the branches. Conversely, no plant was found branched that did not blossom. This reminds one of similar occurrences in Erythronium and in P. odophyllum, where the flowering plant bears in every instance two leaves, the non-flowering ones a single leaf. DEVELOPMENT OF THE MICROSPORANGIUM The development of the microsporangium is the usual one throughout, as will be seen in the stages here given. The first Stage which I obtained for the microsporangium is that seen August 8, in which the inner whorl of stamens shows the differentiation of the hypodermal cell with beginnings of divisions into primary 442 ALpEN: LIFE HISTORY OF UVULARIA SESSILIFOLIA wall and primary sporogenous cell, FIG. 1, while the outer whorl of stamens has advanced to show several divisions of the primitive sporogenous cells as well as of the wall cells, F1G. 2. The general four-lobed appearance of the younger set is seen by reference to FIG. 3, and the comparative advance of the outer whorl noted in FIG. 4. (The crowding of the stamens is particularly noticeable at this time, which would account for the irregularity of outline in FIG. 4.) This earlier development of the outer set of stamens is noted in the history of the development until at the time of tetrad formation, the two are very nearly synchronous. The stages of the individual cells throughout any single anther are practically simultaneous. The differentiation of the hypodermal cell is the usual one, namely, the increased size and denser cytoplasm, FIG. 5. The number of primary archesporial cells may be from three to six, FIG. 1,2. In the young sporogenous cells the chromatic material is apparently very abundant, irregularly distributed in the fine linin mesh with prominent knots at the crossings. Two nucleoli are noted as of frequent occurrence, a condition that persists up to the mother cell stage, ric. 5. The tapetal cells were not differentiated at this stage. The primary wall cells divide to form five layers, the ues outermost making up the permanent wall of the sporangium, FIG. 6, the innermost functioning as tapetum, while the inter- vening one breaks down at the time of maturity of the microspore mother cells. The tapetal jacket cells round off with the spore genous mass, and at the time just preceding synapsis are usually elongated, the nuclei all in the end next the sporogenous USSiS FIG. 7. The nuclei of the tapetum are apparently at this ume about to disorganize, staining diffusely and appearing as oy masses. The mature spore mother cells, seen about th September, have so increased in size that the prominent 1¥ k is now the size of the original hypodermal cell. The linin netyyr of the nucleus is finer and the chromatin more evenly distributed, although still prominently knotted, than in the primitive sporo- genous cells. The nucleolus (frequently two appear) - sae? nent. By the latter part of September the spore mother cells the outer whorl of stamens show synapsis. e middle of cleus ALDEN: LIFE HISTORY OF UVULARIA SESSILIFOLIA 443 The material collected October 21, 1910, and that collected October 27, 1909, show the formation of tetrads, the phases varying from the equatorial plate stage of the heterotypic division to the complete organization of the four daughter nuclei. The usual large thick chromosomes that characterize the reducing division are seen. At the end of this division a resting nucleus is formed in each of the daughter cells, but no wall separates the two. The homoeotypic division, however, is not long delayed, as in the same anther all these stages may be found including the completed tetrads. The spores round off and increase in size; it is at this point that the approach of winter is met. With the renewal of growth in the spring the pollen grains found in early March show the outer and inner walls differentiated and apparently mature in size. In this early spring condition the nucleolus is prominent, and the linin mesh fine and close with small chromatic granules. The divi- sion of the pollen grain nucleus into tube and generative nuclei is noted in the late April material, in which the generative nucleus appears not fully organized but showing traces of the spireme condition, and the tube nucleus is characterized by a large nucleolus but poorly organized reticulum, FIG. 8. The genera- tive nucleus is rich in chromatic material staining deeply, and the tube nucleus has but little. I have not found the division of the generative nucleus, which evidently takes place after the shedding of the pollen. DEVELOPMENT OF THE MEGASPORANGIUM Turning to the study of the megasporangium, we find that its development is as tardy as that of the microsporangium is early. t the time when the archesporium of the microsporangium is formed, the ovary is a homogeneous mass. In September the Carpelary cavities have appeared, and in each a pair of nucelli are protruding. The number of these cell masses destined to develop the megasporangia varies from two to three pairs for €ach cavity. In general each of a pair is on the same plane. In October and evens late as December the uniformity of the nucellar tissue is unchanged, and very little change in size is noted, FIG. 9 and io, In early March the outline of the nucellus is such as to 444. ALDEN: LIFE HISTORY OF UVULARIA SESSILIFOLIA suggest an enlarging hypodermal cell at the side next the carpel wall, ric. 11. The cells of the hypodermal layer, however, do not show the characteristics of the usual archesporial tissue, for the cells are only slightly enlarged, the cytoplasm not dense, and the chromatic network not prominent. Moreover, more than one of the hypodermal cells show a slight increase in size, perhaps indicating the archesporial potentiality of several hypodermal cells, FIG. 12. This is indicative of a primitive condition. A single cell, however, increases more rapidly than the others, getting a start over the others, for in the material of March 14 this greater increase is noted in the cell destined to develop the embryo sac, FIG. 13. By the first of April this enlarging cell has become quite promi- nent, giving the cell mass a decidedly one-sided appearance. The nucleus is large but still with inconspicuous reticulum. This cell continues to increase in size, FIG. 14, and toward the end of April projects strongly, and the inner integument has begun to develop. The nucleus at this stage shows synapsis, indicating that the hypodermal cell does not divide to cut off a primary wall cell but functions directly as the megaspore mother cell, FIG. 15- Five days later, April 30, the turning of the ovule, which was slight on April 25, is now almost complete and the ovule typically anatropous. The integuments have grown rapidly and almost surround the embryo sac. Owing to the twisting of the ovule at this time, it has been found difficult to obtain a longitudinal section of the developing mother cell. However, in material collected May 7 the division of the mother cell, which was !? synapsis one week earlier, is complete, and two cells, which may be called megaspores, are seen. Vesque’ has stated that each develops an embryo sac to the four-nucleate stage. SUMMARY 1. The archesporium of the microsporangium, from 3 to 6 hypodermal cells, becomes differentiated of August. : 2. The hypodermal cells divide at this time forming the ee mary sporogenous and the primary parietal cells. ne 3. The primary parietal cells divide several times, giving S€ to the permanent wall of the sporangium and to the tapetum. consisting of the first ALDEN: LIFE HISTORY OF UVULARIA SESSILIFOLIA 445 4. The primary sporogenous cells give rise to several micro- spore mother cells which are found mature in the middle of September. 5. The divisions of the microspore mother cells take place in October and show the usual tetrads. The winter is thus passed with microspores fully formed. 6. In the latter part of April the microspore divides to form the generative and the tube nuclei. The division of the former probably occurs after the shedding of the pollen. 7. The archesporium of the megasporangium is not differ- entiated till early March and consists of a single hypodermal cell, the adjacent cells showing gradations in size and characteristics of potential archesporial cells. 8. The archesporium does not divide to form a primary wall cell and primary sporogenous cell but functions directly as the megaspore mother cell. It reaches maturity about the middle of pril. 9. The reduction division of the megaspore mother cell takes place the last week of April. . 10. Two megaspores are found about one week later. CotumBia University. LITERATURE CITED 1. Duggar, B. M. Studies in the development of the pollen grain in Symplocarpus foetidus and Peltandra undulata. Bot. Gazette 29: bl. 1, 2. 1900 2. Smith, Arma. Abortive flower buds of Trillium. Bot. Gazette 22: 402-403. 18096. . Chamberlain, C. J. Winter characters of certain sporangia. Bot. Gazette 25: 124-128. pl. 11. 1898. . Chamberlain, C. J. Contribution to the life history of Salix. Bot. Gazette 23: 147-179. pl. 12,18. 1897. - Moore, Emmeline. The study of winter buds with reference to their growth and leaf content. Bull. Torrey Club 36: 117-145. bl. 9-11. 27 Mr 1909. - Coulter, J. M., & Chamberlain, C. J. Morphology of angio- Sperms. 1909. Vesque, J. Développement du sac embryonnaire des Phanerogames angiospermes. Ann. Sci. Nat. Bot. VI. 6: 237-285. pl. 11-16. Ww te un [mal ~ 446 AtpEN: LIFE HISTORY OF UVULARIA SESSILIFOLIA 1878; 8: 261-390. 1879; Compt. Rend. 88: 1359-1361. 1879; Bot. Zeit. 377: 505-509. 1879. The last reference is taken indirectly through Coulter and Chamberlain, Mor- phology of angiosperms. Explanation of plates 34, 35 Uvularia sessilifolia All drawings have been made with the aid of a Bausch and Lomb microscope and camera lucida PLATE 34 Fic. 1. Portion of cross section of anther of inner stamen of flower on August 8. (X 310.) H, hypodermal cell. D, hypodermal cell dividing into primary spo- rogenous and primary wall cell. Three hypodermal cells apparently give rise to archesporium. Fic Portion of cross section of anther of outer stamen of flower on August 8. (X 310.) D, derivatives of ae wall cell. P, primitive archesporium. Five hypodermal cells ‘gee tly divid IG. ne of cross section ee inner anther of flower on August 8. (X 70.) FIG. 4. tices of cross section of outer anther of flower on August 8. (% 79.) Fic. 5. Single hypodermal cell of anther on August 8. (X 720.) Note two nucleoli. Fic. 6. Portion of cross section of anther on September 21. (X 70.) W, wall cells, 3 layers. M, middle layer, disappearing. 7, tapetum. S, microspore mother cells (% 310) S, micro- Portion of cross section of anther, September 27. er cells. Fic. : spore mother cell. T, tapetum cells elongated, nuclei close to spore moth M, middle layer disorganized. , 1G. 8. Cross section of pollen grain, April 25. (X nucleus. TJ, tube nucleus: note the prominent nucleolus and IG. 9. Outline of portion of cross section of ovary showing two nuce (X 70, material somewhat shrunken. 0.) G, generative 72 poor reticulum. lli, Oct. 21- PLATE 35 Fic. 10. Outline of portion of cross section of ovary showing two nucelli, (X 70, material somewhat shrunken Fic. 11. Outline of pee of cross section of ovary swelling at one side, Mar. : Fic. 12. Portion of Lag section of nucellus, showing enlarging hyPo dermal the Mar. 3. (X 310.) M, probable megaspore mother ce hte Fic. 13. Portion of longitudinal section of nucellus, showing me; cell enlarging, Mar. 14 3 Fic. 14. Portion of longitudinal section of nucellus showing megas cell, April tac, CX Fro, 7 Fic. 15. Portion ge longitudinal section of nucellus, showing nucleus a go spore mother cell in synapsis and origin of inner integument, Apel as Dec. 8. showing nucellus with slight gaspore mother pore mother INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE (1912) The aim of this Index is to include all current botanical literature written by Americans, published in America, or based upon American material ; the word Amer- ica being used in the broadest sense Reviews, and papers that eluts pega to forestry, agriculture, horticulture, manufactured products of vegetable origin, aboratory methods are not included, and no atternpt i is made to index the literature of bacteriology. An occasional exception is made in favor of some paper appearing in an American periodical which is devoted wholly to botany. Reprints are not mentioned unless they differ from the original in some important particular. If users of the Index will call the attention of the editor to errors or omissions, their kindness will be appreciated. This Index is reprinted monthly on cards, and furnished in this form to subscribers at the rate of one cent for each card, Selections of cards are not permitted ; each subscriber must take all cards published during the term of his subscription. Corre- spondence relating to the card issue should be addressed to the Treasurer of the Torrey Botanical Club > Abbott, C.C. Ten years’ diggingsin Lenapé Land. pp. 1-191. 1912. Contains notes on plants used for making paints, etc €s,O. Notes on Philippine orchids with descriptions of new species, IV. Philip. Jour. Sci. 7: (Bot.) 1-27. Ap 1912. Includes 27 new species in Habenaria (4), Tropidia (1), Oberonia (4), Phaius (1), Calanthe (2), Eulo phia (1), Dendrobium (5), Phreatia (4), Eria (1), Bulbophyllum (2), and Dendrochilum (2). er, A. Ein kleiner Beitrag zur Nomenklatur einiger Opuntien. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 89-91. 15 Je 1912. erry, E. W. Correlation of the Virginia coastal plain formations. Virginia Geol. Surv. Bull. 4: I9I-199. I912. »E.W. Notes on the genus Widdringtonites. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 341-348. pl. 24, 25 + f. 1. 23 Jl 1912. Bitter, G. Solana nova vel minus cognita. I. Repert. Sp. Nov. 10: 529-565. 10 Je 1912; II. Repert. Sp. Nov. 11: 1-17. 1 Jl 1912. Include Many new species and varieties from Mexico and South America. A. E. Introduced plants new to Connecticut. Rhodora 14: 163, 164. 20 Jl 1912. ie, W.T. A precision auxanometer. Bot. Gaz. 53: 504-509. f. I, 2 17 Je 1912, aa e S. Plantae Mexicanae Purpusianae, IV. Univ. Calif. 4: 269-281. 26 Je 1912. sala asl of 30 new species. 4 448 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Britton, E. G. Thoughtless destruction of Jack in the pulpit. Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 13: 68, 69. pl. 94. Je 1912. Britton, E. G. Wild plants needing protection. I. ‘‘ Jack in the pulpit ” [Arisaema triphyllum (L.) Torr.]. Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 13: 67, 68. pl. 93. Je 1912. Britton, N. L. Further botanical exploration in Cuba. Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 13: 69-76. Je 1912. Britton, N. L. The preservation of our native plants. Craftsman 22: 377-386. Jl 1912. [Illust.] Digest of a lecture given at the New York Botanical Garden. Broadhurst, J. A biometrical study of milk streptococci. Jour. Infect. Dis. 10: 272-284. My 1912. Broadhurst, J. The genus Struthiopteris and its representatives in North America—I. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 257-278. pl. 21, 22 10 Jl 1912. ‘3 Includes Siruthiopteris jamaicensis and S. Maxoni spp. nov. Brown, W.H. The mechanism of curvature in the pulvini of Mimosa pudica. Philip. Jour. Sci. 7: (Bot.) 37-40. Ap 1912. Brush, W. D. The formation of mechanical tissue in the tendrils of Passiflora caerulea as influenced by tension and contact. Bot. Gaz. 53: 453-477. f. 1-3. 17 Je 1912. Burns, G. E. Distribution of xerophytes. Bull. Vermont Bot. Club ¥: 21. «My tore, Cameron, F. K., and others. A preliminary report on the fertili sources of the United States. 62d Congress, 2d Session, Sen. Doc. 190: 15-290. pl. 1-19 + maps o-18, Washington. 1912. o the marine algae zer re- Contains considerable botanical information relating t North America. Also indexed in part under separate authors. Cannon, W. A. Some features of the root-systems of the d Pop. Sci. Mo. 81: 90-99. Jl 1912. [Illust.] Clark, W. B., & Miller, B. L. The physiography and geology ef ‘ Virginia Geol. Surv. BW ® esert plants. { the coastal plain province of Virginia. 13-274. pl. 1-19. 1912. : F tion on the Includes information relating to fossil plants of the region. See Lower Cretaceous (pp. 191-199) contributed by E. W. Berry. pak ae Clements, F. E. Some impressions and reflections. New Phyto! 177-179. 24 Je 1912. 7-179. 24 Je 19 e oak. Jour Coker, W. C. The seedlings of the live oak and whit Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 28: 34-41. pl. 2, 3- My 191% INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 449 Copeland, E. B. The genus Thayeria. Philip. Jour. Sci. 7: (Bot.) 41-43. pl. 1. Ap 1912. Crandall, W. C. The kelps of the southern Californian coast. 62d Congress, 2d Session, Sen. Doc. 190: 209-213. I912. Darling, C. A. Key to the wild and cultivated trees in autumn. Torreya 12: 155-164. 11 Jl 1912. Darling, N. Additions to Hartland flora in 1911. Bull. Vermont Bot. Club 7: 13, 14. My 1912. ing, N. Two distinct forms of Erythronium americanum. Bull. Vermont Bot. Club 7222.) 3OL9. Davis, B. M. Genetical studies on Oenothera. III. Further hybrids of Oenothera biennis and O. grandiflora that resemble O. Lamarckiana. Am. Nat. 46: 377-427. f. 1-15. Jl 1912. eutsch, H. A study of Targionia hypophyila. Bot. Gaz. 53: 492- 503. f. 1-13. 17 Je 1912. Dodge, B. O. Artificial cultures of Ascobolus and Aleuria. Myco- logia 4: 218-222. pl. 72, 73. -Jl19t2. Notes on cultures of Aleuria umbrina Boud. and Ascobolus magnificus sp. nov. Dutton, D. L. Lichen flora of Vermont. Bull. Vermont Bot. Club 7: 23-25. My 1912. Dutton, D. L. Rare plants from Brandon and vicinity. Bull. Vermont Bot. Club 7: 15, 16. My 1912. Eggleston, W. W. Plants to be looked for in Vermont. Bull. Ver- mont Bot. Club 7: 17-20. My 1912. eston, W.W. Reminiscences of Cyrus G. Pringle. Bull. Vermont Bot. Club 7: g—ry. My 1912. Elmer, a0, ¥. Two score of new plants. Leaflets Philip. Bot. 4: 475-1520. 20 Ap 1912. Fairchild, D. Plant introduction for the plant breeder. Yearbook Pa U.S. Dept. Agr, IQII: 411-422. pl. 43-48 + f. 13. [Jl] 1912. : iencan H. S. The cause of stem-rot of citrus fruits (Phomopsis Citri n, sp.). Phytopathology 2: 109-113. pl. 8,9. Je 1912. i - B. Cultutes of heteroecious rusts. Mycologia 4: 175- 193. Jl 1912. The following life histories are worked out for the first time: Necium Farlowii tes Pucciniastyum minimum (Schw.) Arth., Melampsoropsis Pyrolae (DC.) Arth., eS Spartinae Farl,, Melampsora arctica Rostr., and M. (Medusae Thiim.?). "lynn, N. F, Additions to flora of Burlington and vicinity. Bull. pement Bot. Club 7: 16, 17. My 1012. -F. Intensive botanizing. (Abstract.) Bull. Vermont Bot. Club 7: 21. My 1912. D 450 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Fuller, G. D. Soil moisture in the cottonwood dune association of Lake Michigan. Bot. Gaz. 53: 512-514. f. 1. 17 Je 1912. Glager], C.S. Conference on outside cooperation with public schools. Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Record. 1: 70-72. Jl 1912. Gager, C. S. Phipps Hall of Botany, Pittsburgh. Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Record 1: 67-70. Jl 1912. Giddings, N. J. A practical and reliable apparatus for culture work at low temperatures. Phytopathology 2: 106-108. pl. 7. Je 1912. Gleason, H. A., & Gates, F.C. A comparison of the rates of evapora- tion in certain associations in central Illinois. Bot. Gaz. 53: 478- 401. f. 1-6. 17 Je 1912. Gloyer, W. O. Apple blister canker and methods of treatment. Ohio Agr. Exp. Sta. Circ. 125: 149-161. 20 My 1912. Graebener, L. Die Frucht von Cereus triangularis Haw. Monats. Kakteenk. 22:95. 15 Je 1912. : Graves, A. H. The large leaf spot of chestnut and oak. Mycologia 4: 170-174. pl. 69 +f. 7. Jl 1912. The leaf spot is caused by Monochaetia Desmazierti Sacc. Greenman, J. M. Some plants of western America. Bot. Gaz. 53: 510-512. 17 Je 1912. Includes Castilleja schizotricha and Senecio Websteri spp. nov- Guernsey, J. Notes on the marine algae of Laguna Beach. Ann. Rep. Laguna Marine Lab. 1: 195-218. f. 105-139. My 1912. Hackel, E. Gramineae novae, IX. Repert. Sp. Nov. #1: 1 Jl 1912. Includes 12 new species from Bolivia. Hamet, R. Beschreibung eines neuen Sedums aus Adolphi). Notizbl. Kénigl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 5: 277: 1912. Harper, R. M. The diverse habitats of the eastern red cedar interpretation. Torreya 12: 145-154. I! Jl 1912. Harter, L. L., & Field, E.C. Diaporthe, the ascogenous for potato dry rot. Phytopathology 2: 121-124. f. I-4- jes Includes Diaporthe Batatatis sp. nov. 18-30. Mexiko (5. 278. 27 Je and their m of sweet barium Heimerl, A. Die Nyctaginaceen und Phytolaccaceen ~ sea Hassler. Verh. Zool.-Bot. Ges. 62: 1-17. f. 1-3- ¥° . s Hassler Includes Pisonia paraguayensis, Seguieria securigera, and Achatocarp¥ anus spp. nov. from South America. Hewitt, J. L. Rice blight. Arkansas Agr. Exp. 5t- 459. I912. Horne, W.T., Parker, W.B., & Daines, L.L. The meth of the olive knot disease. Phytopathology 2: 101-105: 1912. Bull. 110: 47° od of spreading pl. 6 3° INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 451 Howard, B. J. Decomposition and its microscopical detection in some food products. Yearbook U. S. Dept. Agr. 1911: 297-308. pl. T5-19. 1912. Contains information relating to certain molds and bacteria. Humphreys, E. W. Some very old figs. Guide to Nature 4: 302. f. 1-4. Ja 1912. Hutchinson, J. Sapium cladogyne, a new species from British Guiana. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. 1912: 223, 224. Je 1912. Johnston, E. C. Brief notes on the kelps of Alaska. 62d Congress, 2d Session, Sen. Doc. 190: 214-216. 1912. Jostmann, A. Die Rebutsche Sammlung. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 85, 86. 15 Je 1912. Kearney, T. H., & Shantz, H. L. The water economy of dry-land crops. Yearbook U.S. Dept. Agr. 1911: 351-362. 1912. Kent, E.C. The measles fern. Bull. Vermont Bot. Club 7: 20, My 1912. Kirk,G.L. Rutland County flora. Bull. Vermont Bot. Club 7: 14, 15. My 1912. Krause, K. Zwei neue Phoradendron aus Costa Rica. Notizbl. K6nigl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 6: 264, 265. 27 Je 1912. Phoradendron quinquenervium, and P. Biolleyi spp. nov. Lorenz, A. Vegetative reproduction in the New England Frullaniae. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 279-284. f. 1-3. 10 Jl 1912. McFarland, F. M. The kelps of the central Californian coast. 62d Congress, 2d Session, Sen. Doc. 190: 194-208. 1912. Mackensen, B. Three new species of Opuntia, with a discussion of the identity of Opuntia Lindheimeri. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 289-292. 10 Jl 1912. Includes Opuntia convexa, O. reflexa, and O. Griffithsiana spp. nov. ¢Murran,S.M. A new internal Sterigmatocystis rot of pomegranates. - Phytopathology 2: 32%, 126. fe. 19:2. Matthew, G.F. Were there climatic zones in Devonian time? Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada III. §: 125-153. 1912. Meyer, R. Kleine Mitteilungen und Fingerzeige. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 94. 15 Je 1912. Note on Echinopsis Bridgesii S.-D. er, G. S., & Standley, P. C. The North American species of Nymphaea. Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 16: 63-108. pl. 35-47 + f. 2- 40. 6 Jl 1912. Includes 8 new species; and an introductory note by J. N. Rose. Ontgomery, E.G. Competition in cereals. Nebraska Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 127: 3-22. f. r-7. 8 My 1912. 452 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Montgomery, E. G. Wheat breeding experiments. Nebraska Agr. Exp. Sta..Bull..125: 5-16. f. 1-7. 15 Mr 1912, Montgomery, E. G., & Kiesselbach, T. A. Studies in water require- ments of corn. Nebraska Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 128: 3-15. f. I-3. Murrill, W. A. The Agaricaceae of the Pacific Coast—I. Mycologia 4: 205-217. Jf ror. Includes 13 new species in Hydrocybe (3), Hygrophorus (3), Armillaria (1), - atgyaeati (2), Geopetalum (3), and Crepidopus (1). W. A. Illustrations of fungi—XI. Mycologia 4: 163-169. pl. 68. Jl 1912. Suillellus er (Schaeff.) Murrill, Collybidium dryophilum (Bull.) Murrill, Flammula carbonaria (Fries) Quél., Anthurus borealis Burt., Mycena vexans (Peck) c., Omphalopsis bac eiias (Batsch) Earle, and Naucoria subvelosa praedecurrens, Russula stricta, and Marasmius magnisporus spp. nov. are illustrated and described Nash, G. V. The banana house. Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 13: 78-80. Je 1912. Orton, C. R. Correlation between certain species of Puccinia and Uromyces. Mycologia 4: 194-204. pl. 70, 71. Jl 1912. Includes Puccinia uniporula sp. nov. Pember, F. T. Rare plants near Vermont. Bull. Vermont Bot. Club °° 22, 23... My 1012 Petersen, N. F. Flora of Nebraska. 1-217. Lincoln. 1912. ‘A list of the conifers and flowering plants of the state with keys for their de- termination.” Pilger, R. Neue Arten von Plantago, Sektion Cleiosantha und bis Decne. Notizbl. Kénigl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 5: 259-263. 1912. Ten new species of Plantago from South American states Quehl, L. Die Bliite der Pelecyphora pectinata K. Sch. Monats- Kakteenk. 22: 86. 15 Je 1912. Quehl, [L.] Mam. recurvata Engelm. 15 Je 1912. Reed, A. L. Plants found near Brattleboro. Bull. Vermont Bot. Club wr i7. My to12. Rigg, G. B. Ecological and economic notes on Puget 62d Congress, 2d Session, Sen. Doc. 190: 179-193- 1912. Bull Rogers, M. E. The everlastings of Hartland. (Abstract.) ci Vermont Bot. Club 7: 28. My 1912. Rooney, B. M. Plants rare in St. Johnsbury. Club 7: 17. My 1912 Rugg, H. G. Vermont, the fern lover’s paradise. Novori- 27 Je Monats. Kakteenk. (22: 95. Sound kelps- Bull. Vermont Bot Am. Fern Jour INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 453 2: 83-93. 3 Au 1912; (Abstract) Bull. Vermont Bot. Club emt FE 12. My 1912. Saccardo, P. A. Notae mycologicae Series XIV. Ann. Myc. 10: 310-322. 10 Je 1912. “1. Fungi ex Gallia, Abyssinia, Japonia, Mexico, Canada, Amer. bor. et. centr.”’ Includes 15 new species of fungi from America. Schulz, O. E. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Gattung Clibadium. Bot. Jahrb. 46: 613-628. 1912. Includes 3 new species from South America. Setchell, W. A. The kelps of the United States and Alaska. 62d Congress, 2d Session, Sen. Doc. 190: 130-178. 1912. Sherff, E.E. A new variety of Rudbeckia subtomentosa. Rhodora 14: 164. 20 Jl 1912. Shull, G. H. Inheritance of the heptandra-form of Digitalis purpurea L. Zeits. Induk. Abstammungs- und Vererbungslehre 6: 257-267. Pe. 15, 36. Je 1912. Slosson, M. New ferns from tropical America. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 285-288. pl. 23. 10 Jl 1912. Includes Loxsomopsis notabilis and Polypodium insidiosum spp. nov. Smith, E. F., Brown, N. A., & McCulloch, L. The structure and development of crown gall: a plant cancer. U.S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 255: 11-60. pl. 1-109 +f.1, 2. 29 Je 1912. Standley, P. C. Wootonella, a new genus of Carduaceae. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 25: 119, 120. 29 Je 1912. Stevens, N. E. Wood rots of the hardy catalpa. Phytopathology 2: TI4-119. pl. ro. Je 1912. Straw, C. E. New Stowe plants. Bull. Vermont Bot. Club 7: 14. My 1912. Stuchlik, J. Zur Synonymik der Gattung Gomphrena. Repert. Sp. Nov. 11: 36-41. 1 Jl 1912. Taubenhaus, J. J. Present knowledge of sweet pea diseases and their control. Florists’ Exchange 34: 108-110. 20 Jl 1912. [Illust.] aylor,N. Effect of the past winter on shrubs and trees in the garden Brooklyn Bot. Gard. Record 3: 72-74. Jl 1912. issen, F. Die Gattung Clypeolella v. Hohn. Centralb. Bakt. Zweite Abt. 34: 229-235. 22 Je 1912. Includes Clypeolella Ricini Rac., C. Solani Theiss., and C. opus Theiss. spp. nov. » FF. Cereus nudiflorus Engelm. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 94 15 Je 1912, F. Cereus vagans Kath. Brand. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 93. 15 Je 1912, 454 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Vaupel, F. Echinocactus pilosus Gal. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 86. 15 Je 1912. [Illust.] Webber, H. J. The production of new and improved varieties of timothy. Cornell Univ. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 313: 339-381. pl. I-10. Ap 1912. Weingart, W. Echinocereus Weinbergii spec. nov. Monats. Kakteenk. ga: 84, 84. - 15 Je 1912. Wheeler, L. A. Rare plants of West River Valley. (Abstract.) Bull. Vermont Bot. Club 7: 13. My 1912. White, D. Age of the Worcester phyllite. Jour. Washington Acad. Sci. 2: 114-118. 4 Mr 1912. Also contains notes on fossil plants. White, D. The characters of the fossil plant Gigantopteris Schenk and its occurrence in North America. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 41: 493- 516. pl. 43-49. 8 F 1912. ; Wiegand, K. M. The genus Amelanchier in eastern North America. Rhodora 14: 117-161. pl. 95, 96. 20 Jl 1912. Includes Amelanchier humilis, A. stolonifera, and A. laevis. Wilcox, E. M., & Link, G.K.K. A new form of pure culture chamber. Phytopathology 2: 120. f. 7. Je 1912. Williston, R. Discoid gemmae in Radula. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 329- 346. f..2-37. 10 Ji 1913. Winslow, E. J. Opportunities in Essex County. Bull. Vermon Club 7: 14. My 1912. Woodward, R. W. New Vermont plants. Bull. Vermont Bot. Club 7: 27. My 1613. Wooton, E. O., & Standley, P.C. The grasses and grass-like plants of New Mexico: New Mexico Col. Agrand M. A. Agc. Bde Ste eee 81: 3-176. 1912. [Illust.] Wright, C. H. Lycium pallidum. Curt. Bot. Mag. IV. 8: p!. 8440: Je 1912. A plant from southern United States and northern Mexico. Young, W. Y. Notes on the botany of medicinal plants. Pharm. 84: 256-262. Je 1912. é Zeh, W. Neue Arten der Gattung Liagora. Notizbl. Kénigl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 5: 268-273. 27 Je 1912. Includes Liagora californica, L. rosacea, and L. Pilgeriana, t Bot. Am. Jour. from America. BULL. TORREY CLUB VOLUME 39, PLATE 33 EFFECT OF ASPARAGIN ON WHEAT PLANTS BuLL. TORREY CLUB VOLUME 30, PLATE 34 ALDEN: UVULARIA SESSILIFOLIA BULL. TORREY J CLUB : VOLUME 39, PLATE 35 ALDEN : UVULARIA SESSILIFOLIA MEMOIRS OF THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB A series of technical papers on botanical subjects, published at irregular intervals. Price $3.00 a volume. Not offered in exchange. Vol. 1, No. 1; not furnished separately : Bailey, Liberty Hyde. Studies of the types of various species of the genus Carex. Pages 1-85. 25 My 1880. Vol. 1, No. 2; not furnished — ely: Martindale, Isaac Comly. Marine Ne of the New Jersey coast and adjacent waters of Staten: Island. " Pages 87-111. 24 Au ‘ieee No. 3; price, 75 cents Spruce, Richard. cadens Bolivianae, in Andibus “Boliviae orientalis, annis 1885-6, acl. H. H. 2 lectae. Pages 113-140. et 1890. 1. 1, No. 4; price, 75 cents Sturtevant, Edward oak On seedless fruits. bees oe 30 My 1890, Sie 1. 2, No. 1; not foinished separately Halsted, Byron David. Reserve food-materials in buds = surrounding parts. Pages I-26 a 7, 2. 105 1890 Vol. 2, No. a3 price, 75 cents: Vail, Anna Murray, & Hollick, Charles Arthur. Contributions to the botany of — Pages 27-56, plates 3, 4. 23 D 1890. Vol. 2, No. 3; not furnished separate Holm, Herm an Theodor. Contributions to the SEY i the germination of some North A American plants. Pages 57-108, places auld 15 Ap 1891. Vol. 2, No. 4; price, 75 cents Wheelock, William Efner. The genus Polyga/a in North America. Pages 109- 152. 30D 1801. Vol. 3, No 1; not furnished separately : Small, John Kunkel, & Heller, Amos — Flora of western North Carolina and oes Sea territory. Pages I-39. 20F ga Vol 3, No. 2; price, $2. orong, Thomas. The Naiadaceae of North Ashelich “Teil illustrations of all the Species]. Pages te ems 20-74. 893. 3, No. 3; not furnished separately sby, Henry Hurd. An enumeration - the plants ony in Bolivia by Miguel Bang. [Part 1. 7 toa [-67. 28 Ap 1893. 4, No. 1; not See se aderwood, Lucien cine ae Index Hepaticarum. a A Capiiiod aoe, Pages OL t0Je 1893. Vol. 4, No. 2; — furnished aR le all, John + seman & Vail, Anna Murray. Report on the botanical cial : Hon of southweste: ee Sane nie season of 1892. Pages 93-201, ete : ie 18 N teal p 1894. a eit Aion ; price, 50 cen ue 2 ni Soy, dion Hurd. An enumerition-of the plants SA in Bolivia by Mig on : ang Part 2. Pages 203-274. to Mr-17 Ap 1895. : ‘ Vol. 4, No. 4; price, 50 cents: oe Aon Stockton. Arachis hypogaea L. P Sn ae ae pe < aps Ss c eee |: VoL 4, No. 5; price; 75 cents Hen z te st North American species “ Piya and a genera, : ~374. 15 S 1896. : oe Vol. 5} price, $3.00 Feccgpt 0 Preridophyts = Spermatophyta seein withont éulttea tite in’ North A 1893-31 D 1894. i - Bes .1; price, $1.25: n enumeration of the plants collected in Bolivia by 3 130. 17,N 1806. Sts if Rusby, Henry Hur See ggg ih Part 3. ae oe 2; not furnished separately : s - Vol. 6, No. Sh, ‘Grout, A 1. A revision of Hie North American /sotheciaceae and Brac Cee Pages Pe 30 Jl 189 Vol. 6, No. 3; pric ice, 50 cen : Hazen, Tracy Elliot. life history of Sphae oe Jocestras ( Hae: _ pluvialis). Pages 211— ne plates 8, 7 (colored ee s ae 1899. ol. 6, No. 4; price, 50 ce ccs. Lucien Marcus. A review of the pe of ferns proposed 1832. Pages 247-283. 1 D 1899. . oe Vol. 6, No. 5; price, 25 cen ag Fink, Bruce. Notes on lichen aidtebation in a upper Missi v Pages mis thogss 1 D 1899. : Vol. 7; price, $3.00 Howe, M Marshall Avery. see bic and aiince ae of Cation 1-208 ae pak 5 Au aos ee 8, nae ea, t furnished separately ; est. The c comparative embryology of the & Rubia eg neg go r-4. 26 Au 1899. ‘Par t Il. Pages ar, pla x 15 sk 8, No. 2; pric Vol. e, $1.0 bekk siceienee William. The 7 vege of thee United | Stale sand OY Pages 113-183, 2 prs +6-22- 15. F Vol. 8, No. 3; prices 9 3 cents : ee : Britton, Elizabeth Ger & Taylor, Alexandrina. The life ‘Vittaria lineata. Pages 185-211, plate 23- oe 3° Au 1902. — Pint 9; price, $3.00 Stanley. ph of th Erysiphoceas Pages No longer jes sate in complete of the Mer ol. 10; price » $3.00 peer ‘ raga Hist tory of Pre-Clusian botany in vere ns : Vol. a Me orks pict; BE Davia. The North - “American RS r ae ace : ol. 11, No. 2; price, SE7gr a ‘Bilt, The Ulothricaceae and Chaet tophoraceae of te plate. met we oN Tol. 12, No. 1; price, $1.50: : ra of New “Prondence and Andros ex. 10 D coe eee ee! 2, e, $I. ara James. x ei to a ‘revision of the Vol. ere No. 1; price, ons. A study of | the ‘Lactoriae ei Vol. 14, - Observations on the ‘California vine d OCTOBER 1912 : NO. 10 ~~ BULLETIN OF THE €ditor PHILIP DOWELL Associate Editors MARSHALL Avery Howe Dunsar Cirark — HERBERT MAULE RICHARDS — DER WILLIAM EVANS NORMAN TAYLOR CONTENTS Eee ae of changea ee in Spirogyra elongata (Plate 30) F. i PICKETT 509 . TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE... THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB President EDWARD S. BURGESS, Pu.D. Wess, Vice- Presidents JOHN HENDLEY BARNHART, A.M., M.D. HERBERT M. RICHARDS, Sc.D. Secretary and Treasurer .. BERNARD O. DODGE, Pu.D. Dept. of preted Columbia University w York'City MEETINGS A Meetings twice each month from October to May inclusive : the second Pers at 8:00 P.M., at the American Museum of Natural History; the last Wedn at 3:30 P.M., in the Museum Building of the New York Botanical ] Garden PUBLICATIONS All subscriptions and other business communications relating to the sei: of the Club should be addressed to the Treasurer, Bernard O. Dodge DePe! of Botany, Columbia University, New York City Bulletin. Monthly, established 1870. Price, $3.00 a year; sinele numbers 3° ey cents. Of former volumes, only 24-38 can be supplied separately ; YS of other volumes are available, but the entire stock of some num reserved for the completion of sets. Manuscripts intended ‘ie publication in the _. BULLETIN should be addressed to Philip Dowell, Editor, Port Richmond, N.Y. | _— Porreya. Monthly, established rg01. Price, $1.00 a year. a tended for publication in TorREyA should be addressed to Norman Talon ‘Central Museum, Eastern Parkway, Brooklyn, N. Y. : Memoirs. Occasional, established 1889. (See last pages of cover. si a ophyta within 100 miles ex "Preliminary Catalogue of Anthophyta and Pterid New York City, — Price, $1.00 c. —; Pe J reprints without Set was be had gratis. If cover is callback _ copies are wanted, they may be ordered at the following rates : Sates Co., a Pa., the contributor paying for all his a .. ae 2pp_ 4p | = Spp r2pp _ , 16PP Be copes 875 $1.05. $xgo ~ BRO RE “ §ecopics 0. si 20 1.70 ano) 2 ee yoosmpeee< (VAG SSS ee aod copies Sage. 2.35 2.90 3-75 « Covers: 25 for 75 cents, additional covers 1 cent each, bere re - cents each per 100, Vol. 39 No. 10 : BULLETIN OF THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB se a OCTOBER 1g12 Protoplasmic streaming in Mucor F. M. ANDREWS INTRODUCTION During the years 1903 and 1904 Alfred Schriéter* carried out _4series of experiments in the botanical institute at Leipzig under Pfeffer’s direction on the subject entitled Uber Protoplasma- Strémung bei Mucorineen. The subject of Schréter’s study was were light; temperature; injury, as the severing of a hypha or a Sporangium; pressure, as upon a cover glass; influence of nutrient Media; osmotic substances, especially of different concentration; and transpiration. In making the above study Schréter also desired to test the accuracy and application of the work of Ternetzt the fungi he investigated. Some of Schréter’s experiments and pA a ae however, do Not seem to be altogether above criticism, and I have found some of his results and statements to be incorrect, as the following pages will show, _ Accordingly, during my recent study in Pfeffer’s laboratory I a reinvestigation of the various experiments of Schréter in to ascertain to what extent they were defective. I have "© extended the investigations of Schrdter in some places and ave given special attention to those experiments he performed Which do not seem to be entirely conclusive. +s ; ter, Alfred. Flora gs: I-30. 05. emt. Charlotte. Jahrb. Wiss. Bot. 35: 273-309. 1900. BULLETIN for September 1912 (39: 415-454. pl. 33-35) was issued 9 S 1912.] 455 456 ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor As to the historical account of the study of protoplasmic movements in the fungi it may be said that this has been given in sufficient detail by Schréter* and will only be mentioned here as reference makes necessary. Also Arthurf has made several references to brief accounts of protoplasmic movements in fungal hyphae. It will be seen by referring to the literature mentioned in this paper that the work of Woronin{ appeared 31 years before the paper of Arthur. Since then a number of contributions on the subject of protoplasmic movements in the fungi have appeared, but the amount of study which this subject has received is very small in comparison with the attention that has been paid to such movements in the cells of other plants. And furthermore we find that protoplasmic movements in the fungi have been known for only about 45 years,{ whereas in other plants such movement was observed 137 years ago, when Corti saw it, in 1774, as stated by Pfeffer.§ PLANT MATERIAL USED In these investigations I have used Mucor stolonifer, Mucor Mucedo, and Phycomyces nitens. Of these three Mucor stolonifer and M. Mucedo were used in all my experiments. I found it in- convenient to use Phycomyces nitens, since as is well known the spores of this fungus seem to live for only a few months. I have been able at different times to keep some of the spores of P. natens for as much as three months, but even then the majority of the spores with which I began to experiment refused to germinate. Therefore, in these experiments, while some spores germinat after a month or more, the uncertainty of their growth cau = not to use them so extensively as I did the other two forms above named. At all events it would be an interesting study and well worth investigating to ascertain, if possible, the reason for this short period of life that is shown by the spores of P. mitens. It 1s stated by Pfeffer|| that the spores of most molds often live from one to three years. I have yet on hand the spores of Mucor stolon'- * Schréter, Alfred. Flora g5:1. 1905 t+ Arthur, J.C. Annals of Botany 2: 491. 1897. t Woronin, M., cited by Ternetz in Jahrb. Wiss. Bot. 35: 274- 190 § Pfeffer, W. Plant Physiology (Eng. Transl.) 3: 289. 1995- || Pfeffer, W. Plant Physiology 2: 328. 1905. 0. ne a ee ee ee es) a ee a ae ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN MucoR 457 fer and some of M. Mucedo that have kept for two years, and most of them still grow quite as well as the spores of these plants that are only a few days old. They have been preserved in a dry condi- tion on bread, on which they grew in wide-mouthed bottles closed with cotton. This is also a very convenient way in which one may preserve the spores of those plants it is desired to grow—when first it is ascertained that the culture sealed in the bottle is a pure one. One may then by means of a sterilized needle or forceps easily remove a few spores to the desired culture media and in this way by a great saving of time and labor obtain pure cultures for study. Schréter* used Phycomyces nitens and Mucor stolonifer for his study; Arthur} used Rhizopus nigricans; de Vries,t Phy- comyces nitens; Ternetz,§ Ascophanus carneus; and Woronin,]|| Ascobolus pulcherrimus. Of the three forms that I used, viz: Mucor stolonifer, M. Mucedo, and to some extent Phycomyces nitens, I found M. Mucedo also to be easily obtainable and as well adapted to the investigations of this paper as M. stolonifer. In addition, then, to my work on the other two forms my experiments with Mucor Mucedo, made to confirm or disprove Schréter’s results, will also show whether or not the phenomena he and Ternetz describe are observable in still another fungus to the same extent as he mentions for M. stolonifer. APPARATUS AND METHOD A description of the methods used in working out this paper fan not all be described in one place, but the methods used in the various experiments can be materially shortened by describing and figuring at the outset a few of the principal pieces of apparatus used, to which reference may be made in the study where they were employed. For this purpose FIG. 1 is an illustration of the *Pparatus used. In some of the earlier experiments the apparatus in FIG. I was used in a somewhat more simplified form, but t De Vries, H. Bot. Zeit. 44: 1-6. 1885. § Ternetz, loc. cit. 273-309. ll Ternetz, loc. cit. 273-3009. | Schroter, loc, cit. 10-20. 458 ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor as the work progressed, some additions to it were found neces- sary for the sake of certainty of results and convenience. Fic. 1 was used especially for obtaining the hydrogen in a pure form. As here arranged, the gas generator A is to the left. The generator contained the purest zinc made. The sulphuric acid mixture used was composed of one part concentrated sulphuric acid diluted with nine parts of water,* and on its surface was poured a thick layer of liquid paraffin. The generator connects with the four-way stop- cock B by means of which the stream of hydrogen may be sent to either of the U-tubes Cor C’. Or the stopcock may be so arranged that the generator A is cut off from the rest of the apparatus and air drawn through B’. Of the U-tubes shown C and C’ contain a concentrated solution of potassium hydrate, and in addition the arms of the U-tube are in each case nearly filled with pumice stone that has been saturated with the same solution. Hydrogen passed slowly through a tube arranged in this way will be freed from any hydrochloric acid, sulphur dioxid, or hydrogen sulphid that it may contain when prepared by the action of sulphuric acid on zinc.t| The U-tubes D and D’ contain silver nitrate for removing any traces of arsenic which may be present according to the equation: 6AgNO; + AsH; + 3H.O = 6Ag + HAsO; + 6HNOs. The U-tubes E and E’ contain potassium permanganate for the removal of organic substances and are connected with F and containing pyrogallol and concentrated potassium hydroxid for freeing the gas from any trace of oxygen.{ It will be seen by the * Andrews, F.M. Annals of Botany 19:523. 1905. ‘‘If, as sometimes — ° ; apid evolution 0 the sulp d does not attack the zinc readily, so as to cause ar : hydrogen, this may be brought about by the addition of a small quantity of plaice tetrachloride or copper sulphate to the sulphuric acid.” drews, loc. cit. 523, where a similar but briefer metho for another set of experiments is discussed. t Hempel, W. Methods of gas analysis. Eng. Transl. 149. the following formula for making an alkalin solution of pyrogallol and rapid absorbent for oxygen. “‘s grams pyrogallol dissolved in 15 ccm. of water, 120 grams potassium hydroxide dissolved in 80 ccm. of water. “The absorptions do not take place well,” says Hempel, “under 15° be used "” experiments, except those of temperature were above 15° the method 5 uring the and ‘A solution prepared as above stated gives off no carbon monoxide 4 absorption.” d of washing hydroge® 1902. This gives which is a good SNES See ty Ri ne al ee Re rR en a Ro mE er er oie Fic. t. t Apparatus for controlling the temperature and purifying the gases used. Yoon, NI ONINVAALS DINSVIdOLOUG :SMAXINY 69h 460 ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor figure that a three-way stopcock is inserted between F and G and also one between the U-tubes F’ and G’. This arrangement makes it possible to attach a tube at LZ or L’, and without dis- connecting or disturbing the apparatus to quickly draw off samples of the gas at these points and to ascertain if the chemicals in the various U-tubes are removing any objectionable substance from the gas and letting it pass through pure. The tests showed the hydrogen to be absolutely pure in the samples taken in this way. The tubes G and H and the bottle J contain pure water and pieces of wet filter paper to moisten the gas. Unless this is done the air which enters the gas chamber U’ will soon cause the drops of water, or other medium in which the plants are growing, to evaporate. The U-tubes G and H and the bottle J with the water they contain also act as a check valve to prevent a backward flow of any gas used. I used the bottle J instead of a third U-tube, so that a curved tube, 7, might be inserted in it with a narrow opening of known size to assist in estimating the rapidity of flow of the gas. It will be seen that C’, D’, E’, and F’ contain the same sub- stances as C, D, E, and F, but experience has shown that it is the better plan to use two sets, and that it avoids a possible early deterioration of any of the chemicals which might occur before the experiments were completed, if only one set were used. The U-tubes G’, H’, and J’ contain concentrated glycerin, and the arms of the tubes are loosely filled with pieces of filter paper saturated with the same solution to dry the air or gas drawn through these tubes. From either of the two rows of U-tubes above mentioned the gas may be drawn through O’ in two ways. It may 8° either through Z to the gas chamber U’, containing the plants under investigation, or through the stopcock P, then through R to the gas chamber U’. By the first way only gas of the temperature 0 passed through U’. But by passing the gas through R it may be warmed to any temperature in R by wa water in R’ as desired before sending it to the gas chamber. ; ; lied by more convenient way is to have the gas lamp X contro an accurate thermoregulator, or a still better method is to place f the room is P and then A ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor 461 the vessel R’, containing R, in a small well-regulated thermostat. Unless the generator A is very large it is rarely the case that a gas generated by it would be forced through the apparatus shown in FIG. 1. In order to make this possible an aspirator, W, is also attached and the flow controlled by astopcock, W’. An aspirator may be graduated to estimate the outflow and gas drawn through, or the stopcock W’ may be adjusted by means of a meter used on the outflow stopcock as shown by Detmer.* If strong suction is not required a constant flow of any gas through the gas chamber U’ may be obtained by the use of a float- ing siphon shown by Fic. 1a taken from the work of N. W. Lord.+ The figure shown here is about } the size of the apparatus I con- structed for this work. It can not be used with the apparatus shown by FIG. 1. but can be employed when the gas has to pass through only a shallow liquid, or if gas only is to be drawn through. Its value lies in the constancy of the flow of gas it will cause, while other ap- Paratus used for this purpose must be continually watched and regu- lated to insure accurate results. In some cases a suction pump, such as are attachable to water pipes, is an advantage to use. Wherever Possible, and this was generally the fase, all glass connections were made by having the tubes fused together in one continuous piece. (FIG. 1.) This made leak- age impossible, which with hydrogen is very difficult to prevent under ordinary circumstances. The other connections, as for *xample with the generator, U-tubes, and the gas chamber, were made by means of rubber stoppers and sealing wax according to Fic. 1a. Floating siphon used to draw through a constant stream of gas. *Detmer, W. Pflanzenphysiologische Praktikum 821. 1905. tLord, N. w. Notes on metallurgical analysis 181. 1903. 462 ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor another efficient method I have used.* In some of my experi- ments, not shown in FIG. 1, I made connections between glass tubes in the following way, which were absolutely proof against leakage. The method may be illustrated by the accompanying diagram, : F FIG. 2. Tubes of somewhat different but con- venient sizes were used. The inner surface of ee A from C to D and the outer surface of B over eee the same distance were covered with paraffin and then these parts submerged in hydrofluoric acid. This etched the unparaffined surfaces of the tubes and allowed a more perfect and firmer © cisaud u grip of the sealing wax used in making the con- nection. The hydrofluoric acid was always care- B---=-4 fully removed by washing and then drying the tubes before using the sealing wax. Or the tubes may be fastened gas-tight together by means of FIG. 2. Method Htharge and removed, when desired, by nitric of making glass tube acid as was done by Pfeffer.t One tube, A, had connections by on its inner end, at C, a few layers of compact area: oF Gifelaey filter paper so as to make it fit B tightly. Ne finely powdered sealing wax was then sif ted in be- tween A and B from C to D. Then, on gently heating the tubes from C to D in a flame the powdered sealing wax was carefully melted, and when it was cooled there was produced an absolutely tight connection. When it was desired to disconnect the tubes joined by sealing wax, the joint was gently heated to soften the wax, when the tubes were easily drawn apart. The joints made as above described were perfectly tight even when tested in water by a pressure of about one half an atmosphere. The U-tubes can be so arranged as to be totally under water as shown by Ewart.t 2 A more simple and convenient way is to test the various joints by means of the large, short glass tube shown in FIG. 3. Each en of the large glass tube is closed by a split cork to hold the apparatus * Andrews, loc. cit. 523. T Pfeffer, W. Osmotische Untersuchungen 7, 12. 1877. + Ewart, A. J. Protoplasmic streaming in plants 41. 1902. ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN MUCOR 463 on the tubes and make it water-tight. In case there should be vertical joints the same scheme as shown by Fic. 3 could again be used, if the lower end is closed by a split cork as before and the opening D closed by a rectangular piece of rubber or cork. Any leakage in a joint so surrounded with water would, of course, be easily detected, while the apparatus has the advantage of being quickly and easily changed from one connection to another. n some cases metal gas chambers of the Engelmann type were used for the investigations, but in some others, where hydro- gen especially was not used, the ring form of gas chamber was a. ¢ 2 cA id -—“«e : i — “a: SN gq Fic. 3. Method of testing for leaks in glass tube connections under water. employed. These were fastened to the slide with sealing wax or paraffin. A still better way is to use the glass ring form of gas chamber having a continuous glass base of its own. In those cases where it was not necessary to pass gas of any kind over the specimens under investigation, simply glass rings Were used and these were cemented to the slide by sealing wax fr paraffin as above described. The cover glass to which the medium containing the specimens hung was made gas-tight by cementing it to the gas chamber, of whatever form used, by means of vaselin or a mixture composed of vaselin and wax as indi- fated by Pfeffer.* In some cases, as mentioned by Pfeffer, shellac of the proper thickness may be used to advantage especially ™ experiments requiring some considerable time. The gas chamber and apparatus were always thoroughly freed from any gas foreign 0 the investigation before beginning the experiments. * Pfeffer, W. Plant Physiology 3: 239. 1905. 464 ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN MucoR EXPERIMENTAL PART The investigations were begun by a series of experiments to ascertain what culture media were best for the growth of these fungi. The specimens of Mucor stolonifer and M. Mucedo were grown in various nutrient media, which require a word of explana- tion here. Some of the spores of Mucor Mucedo, M. stolonifer, and Phycomyces nitens were observed to germinate very well in a 5 per cent solution of pure cane sugar. Other concentrations of the cane sugar solutions were used, but the 5 per cent solutions gave excellent results and under favorable conditions of temperature etc. a rapid growth resulted. In some experiments they grew quite well for a time in water, but this did not suffice for the conditions which the experiments of this study made necessary. Also a favorable medium was formed for the growth of the fungi in a tolerably concentrated solution of plum juice obtained in a suitable condition by filtering first through a thin layer of cheese- cloth and then through filter paper. A solution made from horse manure caused a good growth, but it was inferior in this respect to sugar or plum solution, as was also a solution made by adding a little glycerin to pure water. Another good medium for the growth of these fungi is bouillon made as follows: 50 grams lean beef, 100 c.c. water. Let this stand from one to two hours at 50° C., then filter through cheesecloth. If less than 100 c.c. filter through add water to make that volume. Add 1 gram dry peptone and 0-5 gram of common salt, then boil, neutralize, clear, and filter. In some experiments gelatin was used, made as follows: 50 grams lean beef, gelatin 10 grams, dry peptone I gram, salt 0.5 gram. Heat, neutralize, clear, and filter. Agar-agar was also used. It was made by adding 15 gram : of finely chopped agar-agar to the bouillon solution above sani tioned. A concentrated solution of very saccharin grape 1 was also a good medium for fungal growth. ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN MUCOR 465 Schréter also used several of the media I have just mentioned, but they differ in some respects as to the various ingredients and concentrations. I did not have good success in my experiments with citric acid on the fungi studied and abandoned it entirely after a few experiments. With the exception of the water and citric acid solutions I obtained good growths of large actively streaming fungi. The protoplasm sometimes moved as rapidly as from 2 to 4 mm. per minute, and it often maintained this move- ment to and from the apex for hours under the artificial conditions to be mentioned later, or as long as the observation lasted, which was frequently continued from morning till evening and recom- menced the following day. : Some specimens of Mucor stolonifer and M. Mucedo were kept growing in a weak solution of grape juice and still others in a dilute solution of plum juice for five days. The streaming was apparent during all this time whenever the plants were placed under artificial conditions. In this culture medium the hyphae were small and the growth weak. They were grown in a hanging drop solution of the substances above referred to on a cover glass, and this was cemented to a glass ring cell by means of the wax mixture previously mentioned. The glass ring cell was cemented to the slide with soft paraffin. pletely submerged no streaming occurred, but as in the preceding experiment, as soon as the filaments emerged from the cover glass into the warm dry air an active streaming of the protoplasm com- menced. In other experiments the fungal filaments were caused to grow from under the cover glass directly into a drop of water: When the water outside the cover glass was removed, streaming began immediately and was slow or rapid according as the amount of surface of the fungal filaments thus exposed to the dry air was small or large. The movements thus induced to the point where transpiration was occurring continued visible for a long time, oF until practically all the movable part of the protoplasm bias crowded as nearly as possible into the transpiring parts. en this occurred the vacuoles, which before were more oF less elongated parallel to the long axis of the filaments, were now S° crowae together and were so strongly compressed that their long wo was generally transverse to the filament. When water was agaltl placed on any filament or filaments outside the cover glass from which it had been removed, a streaming movement immediately began away from the point at which such addition wa c This return movement continued, by this absorption, until equi ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor 473 librium was again practically established. Or if other parts were then exposed to the air the direction of motion was to them. In all cases excessive and prolonged transpiration in the ways indi- cated must be avoided to prevent a fatal termination. If this be done and care used, the number of times the protoplasm may be caused to stream to a transpiring part or away from what was a transpiring part, is unlimited. These experiments show, therefore, that transpiration causes streaming under the conditions here mentioned. The dependence of protoplasmic movement on transpiration in the cases here referred to was further proved by growing the spores of the fungi mentioned, on the under side of a cover glass of an ordinary metal or glass gas chamber. Under these condi- tions, when saturated air was drawn through, the protoplasm did hot stream in those filaments protruding into the saturated air. When, however, air that was nearly saturated was drawn through, slow streaming began. When very dry air was drawn through the gas chamber after the filaments had been in saturated air, stream- ing instantly began with great rapidity; and if this dry air was drawn through very long, the filaments were soon dried out and the exposed parts killed. The streaming finally stopped in those filaments in which it had been caused by dry air. When this occurred streaming was again produced by admitting air that is somewhat drier than that used to induce streaming before, if one does not delay too long before admitting the air. If after the use of the several degrees of dryness of dry air to induce streaming one readmits moist air in different degrees of humidity, streaming tom the exposed parts of the filaments takes place for a time with a velocity in accordance with the humidity of the surround- ing air. This movement continues till equilibrium is established, the time for which, however, will vary. The return streaming movement is slower and continues longer if the air is only partly made moist than if the air is saturated. THE INFLUENCE OF HYDROGEN In the filaments of Mucor Mucedo and M. stolonifer, grown as above described, hydrogen stopped the movement of the pro- ‘oplasm in 20 minutes in moist air. Schrdter gives about 5 474 ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN MUCOR minutes as the time required, but this seems a little too short a time in view of the average of 20 minutes which I found from experimentation with a large number of fresh plants. After streaming had been stopped by hydrogen it began again in one minute after fresh air had been readmitted. This experiment was repeated many times on the same filaments, always with the same effect. The streaming had in each case again become visible, but the effects had not entirely disappeared, as it responded less - quickly after many trials. Fresh specimens of Mucor stolonifer and M. Mucedo were not affected so soon by hydrogen passed through in moderately dry air as in saturated air. For example, it required pure hydrogen, as shown by many experiments, on the average 54 minutes to stop the streaming of the protoplasm in this plant in dry air. Also a somewhat longer time as compared to those in moist hydrogen was required for recovery. After streaming had been stopped in dry hydrogen, 5 minutes instead of 1 minute were required for recommencement of streaming after fresh air had been drawn through. The protoplasmic streaming of fresh specimens of Mucor stolont- fer and M. Mucedo was again stopped by a stream of saturat hydrogen in 20 minutes. When this experiment was performed the streaming was at first toward the base. Then, when dry hydrogen was passed over the specimen, the streaming began to the tip and continued for one-half minute. Again, moist hydrogen was admitted and streaming began to the base, stopping in 15 seconds. Then dry hydrogen was passed through and streaming began to the tip, ceasing in 10 seconds. This experiment was repeated ten times with the dry and moist currents of hydroge®, alternating them each time, always with the same result that streaming was reinduced each time. The moist hydrogen was easily obtained by causing it to pass through G, H, and I before entering U’, FIG. I. In another series of trials like the preceding, b specimen, the length of time the protoplasm streame moist or to the dry hydrogen, respectively, is shown by ing experiment, TABLE III: ut on another d from the the follow- Ce ee a a ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN MuCoR 475 TABLE III Trials Streamed to the Still Streamed from the moist dry hydrogen . hydrogen I 2 minutes fast I minute fast 2 3 minute fast 5 seconds slow 3 23 seconds slow 3 seconds slow 4 I minute very fast Io seconds slow 5 5 seconds still, starts with jerk 6 5 seconds very fast 2 minutes very slow 7 3 seconds still, starts with jerk 8 20 seconds fast 14 seconds slow 9 I2 seconds fast 9 seconds slow 19 5 seconds fast 3 seconds slow Totals | 275 seconds 224 seconds eo It will be seen from the above figures that the time of flow in either direction varied greatly. The greatest amount of time, as well as the greatest velocity of streaming, was to the dry hydrogen. Inonly the first trial with moist hydrogen did the streaming appear fast. The totals of time above given and also the velocities observed are much less, as a rule, than where dry and moist air Were used. The specimens used in the above experiment were replaced in fresh air and put away for 24 hours, at the end of which time they were living and streamed as actively as before. The air used in the experiment just mentioned was made perfectly dry by passing it over pure glycerin (FIG. 1). Other experiments, however, were performed in which weaker solutions of glycerin Were used. It is sufficient to mention here one instance in which 3° per cent glycerin was used. The streaming to the dry hydrogen i this case was much slower, as expected, and continued for 7 minutes, which is a much longer time than the total of the same umber of trials as in the previous experiment. As has been shown above, transpiration may be practically Suppressed and streaming stopped or prevented by a saturated ‘rin 20 minutes. When saturated hydrogen is passed through under Precisely the same conditions, the streaming stops in less "me than in saturated air alone. This was shown by causing “tturated air to be drawn over the filaments of Mucor stolonifer and M, Mucedo, which stopped streaming in 45 minutes by pre- Venting transpiration. When, however, saturated pure hydrogen 476 ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor was drawn over the specimens the streaming of the protoplasm stopped in 20 minutes. This is the average time of many experi- ments of this kind with both saturated air and saturated hydrogen. As there was a difference shown by these separately, it was thought that a difference could be proved when they were used successively onthe same specimen. Accordingly, pure saturated hydrogen was used again on a fresh specimen and the streaming stopped in about 20 minutes as before. Just as soon as streaming ceased, saturated air was drawn through and immediately a slow streaming of the protoplasm began and continued for 8 minutes. This and other experiments indicate that when the streaming of the protoplasm is controlled or influenced by transpiration this may be partly caused, as in this experiment, by physiological action. This agrees with Schréter’s opinion concerning transpiration in these fungi. When spores were sown in small drops of the solution of the different liquid nutrient media and a rapid growth occurred so that numerous long and rapidly transpiring filaments projected into only moder- ately dry air, the streaming of the protoplasm produced by transpl- ration continued often for several hours. This finally resulted, as Schréter states, in a concentration of the various liquid nutrient media to an extent that streaming to the transpiring or formerly transpiring tips finally ceased. If the small drops of liquid nutrient media be again diluted, streaming in the former direction will occur; and this experiment may be repeated a good many times with the same specimen, and always with the same result if due care is observed. . TR . 4 at In these experiments on transpiration the air or hydrogen th ‘ . re was drawn over the specimens was warmed (in R, FIG. 1) ee coming in contact with the plants under investigation. ser periment, sul cases when hydrogen was employed in the ex Suit r bacteria were used in order to ascertain that no oxygen was P to interfere with the results. A series of experiments was next tried to transpiration of different strengths of glycerin, ; bination with other reagents. The glycerin mixtures did not in a case come in direct contact with the nutrient media in which fungi experimented with grew and also did not touch etsy The fungal filament when these projected from the culture media. show the effect also glycerin in com- ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor 477 spores of the fungi were grown in hanging drop cultures over the glycerin solutions in the ordinary glass ring gas chambers. When good growing and streaming specimens were obtained they were placed, in the first of these experiments, over a 50 per cent solution of glycerin for 15 hours. This was much longer than it had been intended to allow the experiment to continue, and at the end of that time, as was expected, the specimens were all killed by being completely dried up and collapsed beyond easy recognition. This takes place in the filaments of the fungi here studied in a much shorter time, as mentioned, than 15 hours; for when the experi- ment was repeated, with 50 per cent glycerin, it was found that the fungi were desiccated to a point beyond vital recovery in 47 minutes. In a third experiment of this strength of glycerin it was found that when a specimen of each of Mucor stolonifer and M. Mucedo, which were growing in a saturated air, were changed to a cell over a 50 per cent solution of glycerin, all streaming of the protoplasm stopped in 15 minutes. When the specimen was first placed over the glycerin solution the streaming, which to begin with was absent, began almost instantly and continued for a few minutes with great speed to the exposed portions of the filaments from which the water was being rapidly removed by vigorous transpiration. As the air became drier the streaming which at first was so rapid became in a short time slower and slower, as the water was re- moved from the filaments, and in a little longer time, as stated, stopped in 15 minutes. When the specimen was then changed back over a cell containing pure water or one through which Saturated air was passed, the streaming recommenced in 5 minutes onthe average. This recovery of the st ing under these restored Conditions was at first slow but in a few minutes increased in velocity from the tips or exposed portions which had formerly transpired rapidly. The increase in velocity of streaming continued till the filaments were again about turgid or equilibrium was established, When it finally ceased, as it did when they were in the saturated air before being placed over the glycerin. This experiment can be fepeated many times with the same active specimen if care is taken Rot to allow desiccation to progress too far. When the transpira- tion has been excessive for some time, the filaments are often 478 ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor more or less collapsed or their diameter somewhat reduced after the loss of a considerable quantity of water. Even when all streaming has ceased and collapse of the filaments has then oc- curred to a quite noticeable degree, they may recover their normal dimensions and streaming recommence if they are surrounded with moist air from which the water is reabsorbed by the filament. In one experiment, when this collapse occurred in 22 minutes in air dried by 50 per cent glycerin, recovery in saturated air took place in 52 minutes and streaming reoccurred. Collapse and cessation of streaming can easily be produced over 50 per cent glycerin solution in considerably less time than it is possible to restore the filaments fully to the normal condition. As was to be expected, when the solutions of glycerin employed were made weaker, the effect on streaming as the result of weaker transpiration was less pronounced. For example, when Mucor stolonifer and M. Mucedo were placed over a 20 per cent solution of glycerin the streaming stopped in one hour. During all this time the streaming was, as in the 50 per cent glycerin, to the tips exposed to the air that was being dried by the glycerin. The streaming was not so rapid as over the 50 per cent glycerin. After replacing the specimen in saturated air streaming recom- menced and regained its normal velocity much sooner than when left an equal time over 50 per cent glycerin. Frequently all that is necessary to produce streaming in such fungal filaments which apparently are inactive, is to cause transpiration by drying the air around them with glycerin and as a rule only slightly. The effects of still weaker solutions of glycerin will be seen by the following experiments. When the fungi were placed over a 10 per cent solu- tion of glycerin the transpiration was so diminished that streamims continued for 3 hours to the portions exposed. When they were placed over a 714 per cent solution slow streaming was to be see? to the transpiring parts for 5 hours. When they were placed over a 5 per cent solution of glycerin the streaming was stl visible 8 hours after the experiment was started, and the filaments were not perceptibly dried up. The transpiration was very slow and streaming was always to the exposed parts. In several of the experiments, where the spores were grown under the cover glass, bubbles of air of different sizes were also ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor 479 present. In those cases where a good many spores were grown under the same cover glass some of the filaments or their branches just entered or passed entirely through some of the air bubbles. In these, however, the air was saturated and no streaming oc- curred. Even when they had just grown into the bubble no streaming was seen. When the position of a saturated bubble under the cover glass was shifted so that it was placed over a fila- ment or a part of a filament that had previously been entirely sub- merged, no streaming of the protoplasm began. This shifting can be easily done by very slight pressure on the cover glass when it is nearly swimming in the solution which submerges the filaments. If this pressure is properly applied, a bubble which is a little distance from a filament can be caused to flow over it. At the Same time, since the cover glass does not rest directly on the filaments, the pressure is not sufficient in this case to cause any injury, as the experiments showed. If, however, a dry air bubble is gently brought under the cover glass directly in contact with the filaments by means of a glass capillary tube, streaming will be induced immediately and will continue for a time. A con- venient way of growing the filaments so as to prevent them from from being affected by pressure in moving a bubble around under the cover glass is to make a cell of a layer of filter paper and fill it with the solution and a few air bubbles. For the use of the capillary tube here mentioned the filter paper cell should be cut away on two sides to freely admit the tube. At first I forced air bubbles under the cover glass through a very fine capillary tube by means of an automobile pump. By the use of the auto- mobile pump directly connected it was difficult to regulate the °w and constancy of the air bubbles. To overcome this diffi- culty the air was forced directly into an ordinary autoclave, A, aS an air receiver, by the pump B and from this was conducted through the capillary glass tube to the specimen. A mercury Manometer, C, was connected with the apparatus to show the pres- sé more accurately than the autoclave gauge would do. From to } of an atmosphere was necessary to force the air quickly through the capillary glass tube D, according to the size used (Fic, 2a). By care, with this method a number of bubbles or a Stream of them may be forced in, and their number and size con- 480 ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN MUCOR trolled by the dimensions of the glass capillary tube, which is often of importance. Small bubbles may in this way be brought to only a part of a long filament and the effect studied. A stream of small bubbles generally quickly ran together when they touched a filament near one another. It was possible by this means to expose for a time to dry air, only one side of a filament that had previously been completely submerged. The streaming, which occurred due to the bubble of dry air forced’ in through the glass capillary, was slight if only a small part of the filament was touched or covered. If a number of bubbles were let in, so that a larger part of the filament’s surface was exposed to dry air, the stream- ing was somewhat faster, and it continued to increase according to the amount of surface thus suddenly exposed to the dry air. In these experiments the streaming was never so fast and did not continue so long as in the experiments where the fungal hyphae were exposed to moist and then dry air in a gas chamber. The streaming was always to the part exposed to the dry air where transpiration was taking place. When the filament was resub- merged, streaming occurred for a time away from the part that had been exposed to dry air, but it was never so rapid as it was to the tip when this part wasindry air. These experiments are also a confirmation of all those investigations in which it was prov _ that in a saturated air in a gas chamber streaming which ha begun ceased, and when dry air was let in began again. What is practically the same is that streaming may be induced by forcing warm dry air by means of a glass capillary tube gently among the fungal filaments in a hanging drop, if it be continued long enough and if the stream of bubbles be rapid. The streaming was in the latter experiment slower than in the preceding exper ment. Some of the bubbles were caught in the mesh of fungal filaments and held; and in these cases where they touched and remained in contact with the filaments streaming was 0U to that point, but after a few seconds or minutes it ceased. The method of using a capillary glass tube was not at first so easily manipulated, and many trials and the loss of a good many specimens resulted before it was successful to my entire satisfaction. ; ; iration Some other specimens for these experiments on transpira ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor cael 481 Q Apparatus for applying bubbles to the specimens under the cover glass. Fic, 2a. 482 ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor were grown in a 10 per cent solution of gelatin. Under favorable conditions this medium produced large actively streaming speci- mens. The various fungi behaved in this 10 per cent solution of gelatin in the same way when subjected to artificial conditions to produce or suppress transpiration, as they did in the solution of cane sugar. For example, when the streaming of Mucor Mucedo and WM. stolonifer had been stopped in a saturated air and the plant was then placed over a 20 per cent solution of glycerin, the streaming began and moved rapidly to the exposed tips at first but gradually became slower and then stopped in 50 minutes. This was the average time required under such conditions, which will be seen to be a somewhat shorter time than when the fila- ments grown in a cane sugar solution were placed over a 20 per cent solution of glycerin. It was probably partly due to the lack of easily available water in the glycerin medium so that transpiration could not continue so long. When the spores were grown in a gas chamber and saturated air drawn through, the streaming ceased, but began again when dry air was pas through the cell. The velocity of streaming was dependent on the dryness of the air as prepared in the apparatus shown in FIG. I. iS Weed tente Goa: rie WRG o3 a eam se ae aoe ey mes Fic. 4. Part of a filament of Mucor stolonifer partially collapsed by excessive tran- spiration. XX 400. In all the experiments, when transpiration had proceeded too far the protoplasm was drawn wholly or partly away from the cell wall and gave the appearance shown by FIG. 4. In such cases as in FIG. 4, if moist air was readmitted, the protoplasm in a short time resumed its natural position and streaming recommenced. EXPERIMENTS WITH ETHYL ETHER When the same specimen as used above, whose protoplasm stopped in 50 minutes over 20 per cent glycerin, was laid over a cell containing 20 per cent glycerin to which a 4 pet cent solution of ether had been added, streaming began again, more ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor 483 slowly at first; then placed over the 20 per cent glycerin alone its streaming continued slowly for 15 minutes to the tip. When this specimen was again placed over pure water streaming began very rapidly from the tip and continued so for to minutes, but again it moved to the tip when the air was slightly dried. The 4 per cent solution of ethyl ether used in this experiment was still further weakened to 1% per cent when it was added to the 20 per cent glycerin. The same experiment was carried out over a full 14 per cent ether. As above mentioned a temporary awaken- ing of the protoplasmic activity occurred. Schréter* states that a 4 per cent solution of ether in a glycerin solution will stop streaming, but he does not state the concentration of the glycerin or the time required. This I also found to be true as above stated, but he has evidently overlooked the fact that a very weak solution of ethyl ether in dilute glycerin may cause a temporary recom- mencement of streaming if the ether is immediately applied. In either case it shows that transpiration is not purely mechanical but that certain physiological factors enter into the process. The above experiment is not easy to perform, owing to the liability of the protoplasm to lose too much water before the ether may be Properly caused to act upon it. A reawakening of protoplasmic activity resulting in earlier or increased growth has been shown for other plants by Johannsen.t While this is true of small amounts of ether, by increasing the dose to a certain concentration not only a mere awakening of activity was caused but a more rapid growth.t In these experiments with a weak solution of ether on the fungal filaments a great many groups of the fungi Were grown on a glass plate which fitted a large glass cell tightly. An apparatus like FIG. 5 is convenient to use to quickly draw into a cell a solution of glycerin and ether. By opening the stop- Cock A and applying suction at C the 20 per cent glycerin is drawn out, and then by turning the three-way stopcock A again and opening B the desired glycerin and ether mixture in D is drawn into E under the specimens at F. Strong solutions of ether in glycerin caused an unfavorable * Schréter, loc, cit. 20. + Johannsen, W. Das Aether—Verfahren beim Friihtreiben 61. . 1906. t Johannsen, loc. cit. 61. 484 ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN MuUCOR effect. For example, when the specimens were placed over a 20 per cent solution of glycerin plus a 1 per cent of ethyl ether, stream- ing did not recommence as in the preceding experiments. When a new and actively streaming specimen was placed over the mix- ture, streaming ceased in 24 minutes. The protoplasm streamed Fic. 5. Apparatus for drawing a solution into the gas chamber. fast at first over this solution but became gradually slower till it stopped. The specimens were not killed, for when they were placed over water or saturated air drawn through the cell, streaming began again. The movement was at first to the base then to the tip of the filaments again when the air was only slightly dried. The time required for a recommencement of streaming under these conditions varied according to the state of desiccation; but on the average, where streaming had just ceased, it began again in moist air in about 3 minutes. The movement was at first from the tip, where absorption was occurring, and then to the tip again when the air of the room, which was slightly drier than that of the cell, was admitted. EFFECT OF OSMOSIS For the study of the effect of osmosis on protopla ing in fungal filaments the spores of Mucor Mucedo and were grown in water at a constant temperature on a g The cover glass was supported by bits of a cover glass to rest on the spores or filaments and to admit a capillary tube: smic stream- M. stolonifer lass slide. so as not ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor 485 A small capillary tube which had been filled with a 5 per cent solution of cane sugar was then carefully inserted under the cover glass and so placed that its open end was near one of the fungal filaments. In 10 minutes the sugar solution had diffused out in the water and come in contact with the filaments, and the protoplasm began to stream very fast to the point by the open end of the capillary tube. Sometimes the induced streaming was slow and then suddenly became more rapid. The capillary tube offered a convenient method of enabling one to bring the sugar solution to any desired part of a filament and thus study the behavior at certain places. No perceptible difference could be detected in this way between the base and apex of filaments capable of active streaming. At whatever part of an active filament the capillary tube containing the 5 per cent solution of cane sugar was applied streaming to that point was always induced and in a very short time. As was to be expected, weaker solutions of the cane sugar required more time and produced slower streaming while more Concentrated ones caused more rapid streaming in less time. This method of using the glass capillary tube is not quite so simple as it may seem, as certain mechanical difficulties are experienced, especially when it was used with objectives of sufficient power to see the streaming distinctly. A somewhat similar experiment in principle is one in which streaming almost immediately began in the filaments when a drop of sugar solution was brought to the edge of the cover glass. Here, however, the movement stopped sooner than when the solution Was applied at one place by means of a capillary tube, since it diffused all around the filaments and the water was more quickly and uniformly withdrawn. I can confirm the experiment of Schréter* in which he found that a sugar solution added to one side of the cover glass caused Streaming in that direction, and I found that it continued from ? to 1714 minutes according to concentration and the condition of the filaments. This is the time for both Mucor Mucedo and M. Stolonifer. Also, I have found that the excessive loss of water bya Sugar solution results in a great decrease in the size of the * “4 . Schréter, loc. cit. 21, 22. 486 ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor filaments and in some instances a breaking of them, allowing the contents more or less completely to escape. By adding the sugar solution first to one end and then to the other, of a filament or a mass of them, and washing away the sugar after each application before reapplying it to the opposite end, the protoplasm may be made to stream to the sugar at each new application. If the sugar solution is applied to one side, movement occurs in that direction and then stops as above mentioned. If then the sugar solution is washed away with pure water, the part of the filament toward which streaming occurs will take up water, and streaming will take place away from this part for a time, or until equilibrium has been established. After stoppage in this way, the addition of even a weak solution of sugar at the part toward which streaming Was moving causes it to recommence in this direction. The following experiment will show the effect of sugar and give an idea of the number of times streaming may be induced and the duration of each period of streaming. To do this a glass slide was supported at each end on a glass block in a petri dish, the latter to hold the liquids that ran from the slide. The spores of Mucor Mucedo and M. stolonifer were grown in a very small drop of gelatin. Two wet strips of filter paper were so arranged that the edge of each just touched the edge of the cover glass and their ends hung down some distance into the petri dish. On one of the strips of filter paper was placed a lump of cane sugar, which was renewed as fast as necessary. As soon as the sugar was moistened and the solution passed under the cover glass, streaming to the sugar began at once. When streaming ceased, drops of water were added to the other strip of filter paper, which washed wer the sugar solution, causing streaming in the reverse direction. The velocity of streaming in this experiment, especially toward the sugar solution formed in this case by the dissolving lump, varied. This was due to the unequal solubility of the sugar under the conditions here presented, which caused the solution to host in concentration. At other times the sugar solution did not ire or pass under the cover glass with equal rapidity, owing tot ; fact that it was impossible more than approximately to a the amount of water supplied to or removed from the specimen. : : ; d the The number of times this experiment was performed an ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor 487 duration of streaming in each case is shown by the following TABLE IV: TABLE IV Trials| Streamed to | segs etd Still State of Temperature sugar when added vacuoles I 7 min. — compressed ga” C. 2 oe 11} min. compressed 24° C. 3 6 min. compressed age Cy 4 ro min. compressec aa 5 | 10} min. mpr 24° C. 6 3 min. compressed Pe gi Ome 7 17} min, — compressed 24° C 8 4 min, compressed 24° C, 9 124 min, compressed 24° C. To 2 min. compressed 4° Cy It 6 min. ae compressed 24°'G. 12 — _—— still 4 sec.; starts} compressed | 24° C. with jerk to sugar]. solution 13 8 min. — compressed a 14 pace 14 min. compressed Cw agg Oe very slowly 15 9} min. mpressed 24° C, 16 a 12 min. compressed a4? Cy 17 7 min, compressed Fgh 18 — 16 min. compressed 24°-G. slow . 19 5 min, —_— compressed 24° C, ee rae ee — still 8 min.; starts| compressed 24° G.. with jerk to water as 2} min. —— compressed 24° C. “bd eg 63 min. compressed 24° C. 23 I min. imei compressed 24°C. 24 cay 20 min. compressed 24°C. SS —__! 923 min. 99 min. The experiment, as will be noted, was continued about three hours. The streaming was always faster to the sugar than to the Water. Even an incomplete return of the protoplasm to the Water before cessation of movement required a longer time than a Complete transfer of all movable contents to the sugar, as is shown by the total time required for streaming in either direction. As will be seen, the total time the protoplasm was observed to move to the sugar during about 3 hours of constant observation was 92% minutes, while the movement to the water for all the different times amounted to 99 minutes, or a difference of 614 minutes. To this, as stated above, must be taken into consideration that the Streaming to the sugar solution was much faster than to the water. 488 ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor On two occasions, as will be observed by referring to TABLE Iv, the streaming stopped once for 4 and at another time for 8 seconds to the sugar and to the water, respectively, and in starting did so with a jerk. After the 3 hours of experimentation with the fungal filaments in the above mentioned manner the specimen was put away for 24 hours at the optimum temperature to see if this treatment had had any detrimental effect. It was again observed at the end of this time and found to be in a perfect condition, and it again responded to the reagents which produced streaming as readily as when the experiment was at first begun. This experi- ment is similar to the one performed by Schréter* with a sugar solution and water, which I have also repeated and can confirm. The streaming may also be caused to recommence when it has been stopped by cold. Specimens of Mucor Mucedo, M. stolonifer, and Phycomyces nitens grown in 10 per cent gelatin ceased to show streaming when suddenly transferred from a temperature of 24° to 9° C. When a 5 per cent solution of cane sugar was added, streaming began again in 15 seconds, but as is to be ex- pected, not so rapidly as in specimens that were kept at optimum temperatures. The same specimens were then subjected to a temperature of 5° C. after washing out the sugar with water; and in this case too streaming was induced by a 5 per cent solution of cane sugar, but a longer time was required. The streaming was feeble and was not seen until one minute after the sugar Was applied. The direction of motion was to the sugar solution, which was applied first to one end and then the other with previous washing with water before each new application. It is not neces sary to use as high a concentration of sugar (10 per cent) as mentioned by Schréter.t A higher concentration of sugat than 5 per cent will start streaming in less time and more rapidly than mentioned above. No matter what concentration of sugat solu- tion was used, the protoplasm did not flow as freely or as rapidly as when the plants were growing under the most favorable circum stances. The most favorable results are obtained if the sug solution is applied immediately after streaming has been stopped by cold. ee * Schriter, loc. cit. 21, 22. + Schroter, loc. cit. 21. ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor 489 It has been shown that chloroform may stop streaming if used in a strong solution, but if used in a very dilute solution it may accelerate streaming or even cause it to begin.* The same is true of ether as regards the fungi used for this investigation. The solu- tion of ether used to cause streaming to begin must be very dilute and the protoplasm be in a condition to stream. I have not experimented with chloroform on the fungi mentioned in this paper. Specimens of Mucor Mucedo and M. stolonifer were grown in 10 per cent gelatin, and then a solution of % per cent ethyl ether was added. The streaming ceased in a few seconds after the ether was applied but began again slowly in 15 minutes. This Same experiment was tried on other specimens of these same fungi with the same results. A quantity of the 1 per cent ethyl ether solution was also placed in the bottom of the glass cell below the specimens. As soon as it was found that streaming ceased for some time after the direct application of 14 per cent ether, a 4 per cent solution of cane sugar was added immediately to the specimens whose streaming had just ceased due to the ether. Streaming began again in three seconds, and all movement was to the parts of the filaments with which the sugar solution came incontact. When the sugar solution was washed away and water added, the streaming began but in the reverse direction. Another series of the same fungi were grown as in the preceding €xperiment, but this time a ly per cent solution of ethyl ether was added directly to the specimens growing in 10 per cent gelatin. The protoplasm stopped streaming almost as soon as the ether was applied. The specimens were not killed by the addition of ether of the above strength, for when the ether was replaced with water the Streaming recommenced and after a time regained its normal Velocity. If a 4 per cent solution of cane sugar was applied immediately to the specimens that had just ceased to stream due to the 14 per cent ether, streaming began in from 10 to 15 *Hauptfleisch, P. Untersuchungen iiber die Strémung des Protoplasmas in behduteten Zellen, Jahrb. Wiss, Bot. 24: 220. 1892; Ewart, A. J. Protoplasmic og ing in plants 87. 1902; Pfeffer, W. Plant Physiology 3: 319. 1905; Josing, : eaib. Wiss. Bot. 36: 210. ; : Ewart, loc. cit. 86; Josing, loc. cit. 210. 490 ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor seconds. The specimens for these experiments were grown at the optimum temperature and treated in exactly the same way except that in the last case the strength of the ether was greater. The amount of time, however, required for the resumption of streaming in the last case was much increased. If the cane sugar was weak- ened, as was done in this case by using only a 3 per cent solution, the streaming began again in about 25 seconds. When the ether was washed away from the still protoplasm with water, streaming began as before. When specimens prepared as the above were covered with a 2 per cent solution of cane sugar, streaming recommenced in about one minute on the average but was less active than in the stronger solution of sugar. A 5 per cent solution of sugar caused streaming to commence in 30 seconds, and a 10 per cent solution of cane sugar caused a recommencement of streaming under the above conditions, almost instantly and very actively in all cases, to the sugar. When the specimens are placed in a % per cent solution of ether, streaming stops immediately, but it can be caused to te commence by adding a sugar solution if this be applied at once. A 5 per cent solution of sugar caused streaming to commence in 30 seconds. The time, however, will vary according to the strength of the solution, as shown above, and the length of time the ether has acted. In respect to the water solutions (14 per cent ether) above mentioned I can confirm the experiments of Schroter.* A saturated solution of ethyl ether was added directly to the filaments, and streaming ceased instantly. No acceleration of the streaming occurred before it stopped. When the ether was ommence. washed away at once with water streaming did not rec A 1/20 per cent solution of ethyl ether directly applied " the fungal filaments causes streaming to begin in them when they are in a condition for such activity. This movement continued for about the usual time, and when finally the dilute ether was washed away with water the streaming continued. This was lg of any filaments whether they were branched or not. Lee. oe * Schroter, loc. cit. 21. ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN MuCoR 491 an exact per cent is not required is to place on the under side of the cover glass a small grain of sugar, close to the water in which the spores of the fungi have produced filaments. The sugar will adhere to the moist surface of the glass. A thick ring of vaselin may be put on the edge of the glass ring cell, which prevents the cover glass from coming directly in contact with the glass cell and admits of a fine platinum wire being introduced between them without admitting air. When the streaming has ceased for any reason or become retarded, the particles of sugar may be shoved into the liquid containing the fungal filaments by means of the Platinum wire and its effect observed immediately through the microscope. We have in this arrangement not such a change as might bring about streaming by the drier air of the room entering the glass cell when the filaments are growing. Streaming would, as shown before, occur by transpiration, if in the experiment here mentioned the filaments protruded beyond the edge of the drop. In such a case it would be difficult to determine how much of the accelerated or induced streaming is due to transpiration and how much to osmosis. In the method here outlined, however, the factor of transpiration is excluded and osmosis alone is responsible for the result. All the experiments tried in this way resulted, as *xpected, in streaming being induced or accelerated, and they thus ‘onfirmed the previous and similar ones of this paper. In like Manner the result was confirmatory of and useful in the experi- ments just performed with ether. Where the streaming had been Stopped by the addition of ether in any of the stronger solutions mentioned, it could always be awakened and caused to continue rom 1 to 15 minutes, according to the strength of the ether, its time of action, and the quantity of sugar. The sugar was placed on the cover glass at the same time the ether was added to the Specimen, INJURY Frequently injuries of various kinds, if not too severe, cause Protoplasmic streaming in many plants.* Generally a rather Serious injury is necessary to stop the protoplasmic movements Amanently. Ternetzt found in Ascophanus carneus that by * Pfeffer, W. Plant Physiology 2: 816-820 and literature there quoted. 1905. t Ternetz, loc. cit. 282. 492 ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor cutting an actively streaming part in two streaming ceased and did not recommence. My experiments as regards injury have been performed on both Mucor stolonifer and M. Mucedo, and in both plants I obtained the same results. Schroter used Mucor stolonifer and Phycomyces nitens. I can confirm his results on M. stolonifer, but I was not successful in preserving P. nitens for this study. When the filaments of actively growing specimens had their tips removed, a temporary increase in streaming was observed, due to the outflow of some of the contents and a relief of the pres- sure. This streaming could be traced back for a considerable distance among the filaments of the injured specimen. The streaming caused by such injury soon ceased. The specimens were then put away for 24 hours under favorable conditions and afterwards observed. They were found not to have been killed and were still in a living and streaming condition. By separating the filaments of the fungi into two parts the specimens were not killed. They were observed after 18 hours and were found, Schréter states,* to have healed the wound. All of them were living, and streaming was either directly observable or was produced by the addition of a sugar solution. A light pressure on the cover glass is sufficient to stop streaming temporarily and this, as Schréter states, will recommence when the pressure is relieved. The time of recovery of the streaming will depend on the amount of injury imparted and varies from an immediate recommencement to one delayed a few seconds. eh sure is, however carefully applied, too severe to excite streaming in these fungi or to accelerate that which may be present. A momentary acceleration may seem in some cases to be produced, but this is simply due to a partial compression of the filaments. When thisis relieved the streaming will continue as before. INFLUENCE OF LIGHT It has been known for a long time, as mentioned by ao that light may cause streaming. Also Ewart} makes referen * Schriter, loc. cit. 17. + Pfeffer, W. Plant physiology 3: 318. 1905. t Ewart, loc. cit. 71. ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor 493 to this same point. Schréter has shown that light may cause or accelerate streaming, and I can confirm his observations on Mucor stolonifer, which he used, and also on M. Mucedo. These remarks refer to light of moderate intensity, for the light may be too strong for streaming to occur. My experiments were carried out partly in daylight and dark- ness alternated and partly in gas light. In the first case the investigations were made by means of the freezing-apparatus of Molisch. With this arrangement the specimens could easily be kept at the desired temperature by means of warm or cold water siphoned in and out and the observation be carried on directly in the laboratory under the influence of light or dark. On heating the apparatus to the optimum temperature the specimens were kept first in the dark for two hours, when the protoplasm ceased to move. On admitting light a slow streaming began in five minutes and after a time became as rapid as the streaming of the control specimen. This experiment was repeated several times with the same specimen and always with the same result. When the temperature of the specimens was lowered from the optimum to 17° C. and then to 14° C., and the experiment repeated other- Wise the same, the streaming became slower and slower on each new admission of light. Also, when the temperature was raised above the optimum but slightly (28° C.), the streaming on admit- ting light showed a rapid decrease in velocity. Too great heat or too intense light can readily, especially the former, make the Protoplasm non-responsive. If, however, these are not con- tinued too long the protoplasm of these fungi will recover in from one-fourth to one hour and stream as actively as before. In the experiments made with the gas light an ordinary Wels- bach burner was used and the investigations carried out in daylight and darkness repeated. The same results were obtained. In both of these series of experiments the specimens were preserved for 24 hours to see if in all cases they would become normal as com- Pared to the controls for activity of streaming. At the end of this time both the specimens experimented on and the controls were normal and equally active. 494 ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor ' ‘TEMPERATURE It has been shown by Hofmeister* and others long ago that a sudden change in temperature may excite streaming. More recently these observations have been confirmed by Hauptfleisch,{ Ewart,{ and others, for various plants. The same is referred to by Pfeffer,§ and Hérmann|| observed the same result. The literature on this subject as regards the higher plants is too voluminous to enter into fully here, so that the above brief references must suffice. As regards the fungi I can confirm the statements of Schriterf that temperature also has much to do with the ability of Mucor stolonifer to show streaming. Phycomyces nitens 1 have not studied in this respect. I have also found, as in the higher plants and as Schréter did for Mucor stolonifer, that a sudden change of temperature may produce streaming in those specimens of this fungus that were in a condition for such movement. The same I have found is true of M. Mucedo. This is the-case whether the temperature is raised or lowered suddenly, but with the precaution that the change be not too great or continued too long. I can not, however, agree altogether with Schréter** that the optimum temperature for streaming in Mucor stolonifer is 26° C. and for Phycomyces nitens 28° C. My studies have shown that the optimum temperature for streaming in M. stolonifer and M. Mucedo each ranges from 23° to 26° C. and for P. nitens from 26° to 29° C. These temperatures, as given by Schréter, seem to be too sharply drawn, for as stated I have found a difference of a few degrees Centigrade. I did not attempt to ascertain what effect the age of the hyphae had on the optimum temperature for streaming, if any exists, as is probable. Ewart} has pointed out for some of the higher plants that it is almost impossible to eee tain the required temperature exactly or within a degree, owns to various factors which enter into the problem and which are not * Hofmeister, W. Lehre von der Pflanzenzelle 53, 54. 1867. + Hauptfleisch, P. Jahrb. Wiss. Bot. 24: 210. 1892. t Ewart, loc. cit. 66 and literature there quoted. § Pfeffer, W. Plant Physiology 3: 316 and literature there quoted. 1905- || Hérmann, G. Studien iiber die Protoplasmastrémung bei den Characeen 4% 1898. {| Schréter, loc. cit. 56. ** Schriter, loc. cit. 15. Tt Ewart, loc. cit. 60. ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN MucoR 495 controllable by the experimenter. Nor-can I agree to Schréter’s* idea that streaming can be induced only in branched hyphae. I have caused streaming to occur in the filaments of Mucor stolonifer and M. Mucedo when unbranched as in FIG. 6, 7, and 8, when they were put under the optimum conditions of temperature, etc. Also, as stated heretofore, I have induced streaming in such un- branched filaments by osmosis and transpiration. The filaments of M. stolonifer are not always filled with granular protoplasm before branching, as Schréter seems to think. In those cases where this is not the case streaming may easily occur. I performed some of my experiments of this kind in room tempera- ture varying from 16° to 19° C., where fairly rapid streaming occurred, but it was noticeably slower than at the optimum temperature. As also mentioned above, a sudden change almost immediately caused streaming. When a specimen whose protoplasm was still, but in a condition to stream, was suddenly cooled from 23° to 16° C. streaming was induced, or if heated from 16° to 19° C. or from 23° to 26° C. streaming was generally produced. The movements of the protoplasm in the hyphae of several filamentous fungi have been described by Arthur, Ternetz,t and Schriter.§ In Mucor stolonifer and M. Mucedo, both of which I have studied, the streaming shows no difference, so that my re- marks on this point apply equally well to both. Fic. 9 shows a Portion of one filament of M. stolonifer grown in a sugar solution. It was found that the rate of growth of these fungi, their size, and branching frequently varied greatly although grown under the same conditions. The streaming also showed a great difference as to velocity. Sometimes it was so slow as to be scarcely dis- cernible, as for example when osmosis or transpiration was very feeble. On the other hand, streaming was fast or very rapid according as some factor such as those just mentioned was active. n those filaments that had attained some length numerous vacuoles were generally present, and these varied greatly in size Cin a teas 496 ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN MUCOR FG. 4x4 Fic. 6, 7, 8. Unbranched young filaments of Mucor stolon ifer. G.9. Branched filament of Mucor stolonifer showing streaming an pate at the point of branching. The direction of streaming is in all cases shown by the arrows. d division of ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor 497 and shape, due mostly to the streaming back and forth. This caused some of the vacuoles to be separated into several or some- times many smaller ones and in other cases caused small ones to fuse into one or more vacuoles. The division of vacuoles, especially the larger ones, was well shown in those instances where a stream of protoplasm (FIG. 9) divided on coming to a branch. Then, frequently about one half or often only a small part would go into the branch. Whether the streaming is slow or fast the vacuoles are always carried along with the whole mass. They are convex on the end toward which the flow is directed and concave on the opposite end. This shows that a relief of pressure exists in the direction of streaming. Some- times the streaming stops very suddenly with a jerk and when starting frequently does so in the same way, although the factors producing streaming are active. This kind of sudden cessation of motion generally lasts for from one to a few seconds, when stream- ing is resumed at the normal rate. It is caused, as careful observa- tion will show, by a mass of temporarily impermeable protoplasm suddenly entirely plugging up the cavity of the filament at some point. As soon, however, as more water is removed, as for example by osmosis, transpiration, or some other factor, the pressure is gradually relieved and the obstruction suddenly gives way, allow- ing a recommencement of streaming so suddenly as to cause the protoplasm to appear as if jerked forward. Unless the obstruction is removed the filament beyond that point frequently collapses, due to excessive transpiration or other factor. Sometimes the velocity would vary for no apparent reason, as is known to be the case in other plants. At times when no streaming was visible an extremely thin layer of protoplasm between the large vacuoles and the ectoplasm could be seen to be in motion. Part of the time it moved in the Same direction as the streaming had moved and sometimes in the reverse direction. I was unable to see it moving in the opposite direction to the streaming protoplasm. I can therefore not agree With Schréter* on this point but find, as stated by Ternetz for Ascophanus carneus, that during streaming all of the moving proto- plasm of Mucor stolonifer and M. Mucedo goes only in one direction. * Schréter, loc. cit. 30. 498 ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor It is hardly possible, even if a reverse movement did take place along the wall during the streaming, that it would be sufficiently active to account for the return of the protoplasm. The streaming occurs first in one direction, and when the factor that has caused this subsides or is overcome, it streams back in the opposite direction. Streaming may be easily induced in Mucor and be caused to continue in first one direction and then the other without apparent harm to the plant for an indefinite time. This and other facts tend to show that it is not a “pathogenic” state of affairs as Keller* seems to think. The streaming may be of use in the long cells of these fungal filaments, as de Vriest suggests, to transfer substances. This, however, would not hold true for small cells as Ewartt has shown, for in such cases diffusion would distribute substances more rapidly than streaming. SUMMARY The foregoing experiments have proved the following points, most of which confirm Schréter’s work, but some show his work in a few places to be incorrect: 1. The kind of nutrient media is of great importance for the proper growth of these fungi. 2. Streaming is caused in many cases by transpiration, and streaming is strong or weak according to the intensity of the transpiration. 3. Streaming is also caused in many cases by osmosis, as by the use of sugar. The streaming is always to the sugar. The rapidity of streaming depends on the concentration of the sugar solution. ‘ 4. During streaming caused by osmosis there is no periph- eral streaming or movement in the opposite direction, as stated and figured by Schréter. This also confirms the statement of Ternetz. 5. Injury, as stated by Schréter, does not produce or accelerate * Keller, J., cited from Pfeffer, loc. cit. 2: 818. 1905. ft De Vries, Bot. Zeit. 45: 1. . 40. t Ewart, A. J. On the ascent of sap in trees. Phil. Trans. Royal Soc 1905, quoted from Pfeffer, Phys. Pl. (Eng. Transl.) 3: 359. 1905. ANDREWS: PROTOPLASMIC STREAMING IN Mucor 499 streaming, but has a tendency to decrease any streaming that may be present. When the filament is cut into two pieces, only an outflow occurs. This may, in time, heal and streaming be re- sumed. 6. Light may cause and accelerate streaming when alternated with darkness in those fungal filaments that are in a condition for streaming. 7. A sudden change of temperature of several degrees will cause streaming in these fungi. 8. Contrary to Schroéter’s opinion, streaming may occur or be caused in unbranched as well as branched filaments. My thanks are due Professor W. Pfeffer for placing at my dis- posal the facilities of his laboratory for this investigation and also for his constant interest and kind assistance. INDIANA UNIVERSITY, BLOOMINGTON, IND. Desmos the proper generic name for the so-called Unonas of the d World WILLIAM EDWIN SAFFORD In connection with his work on the American Annonaceae* the author has had occasion to look into the question of the types of the genera of this family. To his surprise he found that the genus Unona, based upon an American type by the younger Linnaeus (who is quoted by all botanists as author of the genus), is declared to be exclusively Asiatic. The various American plants assigned to this genus by Dunal in his admirable monograph of the Annonaceae have all been relegated to other genera; and the recently described Unona panamensis and U. bibracteata of Dr. B. L. Robinson are undoubtedly species of Unonopsis.t Concern- ing Unona discreta modern botanists are silent. The original description t of this species, the type of the genus, is as follows: “discreta. UNONA. eyricoboom. Surinam. Habitat in Surinamo. C. G. Dalber Arbor ramis virgatis, angustis, flexilibus. Folia bifaria, alterna, petiolata, ligustrina, glabra, integerrima, digitalia. Petioli brevissimi. Pedicelli baccarum intra corollam, umbellati. Flos Annonae, sed Fructus diversus, purpureus, sapidus, aromaticus, qui distinguit genus uti in Theobroma & Am- broma. “* Annotatio”’ a3 - . 47° 2 Unona, Annona, Xylopia floris charactere simillimae, potius Gynandris associandae, cum stamina germini insideant. In the above description the form of the carpels is not indi- <<. aloe m mee eemaa P Sek Jour. Washington Acad. Sci. 1: 118-120. S 191. : t Fries, Robt. E. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der siid-amerikanischen Anonaceen, gl. Sv. et.-Akad. Handl. 345: 26. 1900. t Linn. ¢, Suppl. 270. 1781. 501 502 SAFFORD: SO-CALLED UNONAS OF THE OLD WORLD cated, though they are described as stipitate and aromatic and borne in umbellike clusters on the receptacle (intra corollam). The name Unona was taken up by Vahl,* who imagined that a certain East Indian plant was congeneric with Linnaeus’s type. He redescribes Unona discreta without mentioning its type locality, but in his description he deviates somewhat from the original in characterizing the leaves as sericeous beneath, 11% inches long, much attenuated, narrow, willowlike (salicina), and scarcely petioled. He does not describe the fruit nor indicate the number of seeds. He does, however, describe a second species, and he figures its fruit, which is elongate and moniliform or constricted between the seeds. The figure of the fruit of this species, Unona discolor Vahl, led to Dunal’s subsequent error of describing the carpels of U. discreta Linn. f. as moniliform, for which he had no warrant. Dunal (Monographie de la famille des Anonacées I10. 1817) cites first Vahl and then Linnaeus f. He follows Vahl in describing the leaves of U. discreta as sericeous beneath; and for his description of the fruit he refers to Gaertner’s figure of an Asiatic plant, Uvaria monilifera, which was considered as a possible synonym of the Surinam Unona discreta, but which in all prob- ability is to be referred to Unona discolor Vahl. The latter plant, as we shall see, is regarded as a synonym of Desmos chinensts Loureiro (1790). The limits of the genus Unona as treated by Dunal are very ill-defined. This was inevitable in many instances on account of the scant material at his disposal, in which fruits were ie lacking. In the genus Unona he included plants of several distinct genera. His Unona uncinata is the fragrant Artabotrys odoratts- sima of India and Ceylon, the ripe carpels of which are not at al moniliform; his Unona nitidissima is an Australian plant belonging to the genus Polyalthia; his Unona crassipetala, a Guiana plant a which he did not see the fruit, is undoubtedly a species of Guatteria, his Unona violacea is a species of Sapranthus closely allied sd S. nicaraguensis Seem.; his Unona penduliflora is the spicy ens" caztli of the Mexicans (Cymbopetalum penduliflorum Baill.) ; “38 his Unona acutiflora and U. xylopioides, from South Americ are both synonyms of St. Hilaire’s X- ylopig rons * Symb. Bot. 2: 63. 1791. SAFFORD: SO-CALLED UNONAS OF THE OLD WorLp 503 Hooker and Thomson, in their Flora Indica (1853), described a genus of Annonaceae which they called Unona, taking Linnaeus’s name and ascribing the genus to him. Their genus, however, did not include his type, nor indeed any American species. In their revision of the Annonaceae they did most admirable work, arranging the genera according to the natural affinities of the plants and grouping them into tribes in the most logical manner. In their choice of generic names, however, they were most arbi- tary. The genus which they called Melodorum, for instance, excludes the previously established type of Loureiro’s genus Melodorwm (1790). Their genus was based upon a section of plants which Dunal had called Melodorum and in which he erroneously had included Loureiro’s Melodorum, together with Blume’s division Melodorae of the genus Uvaria (Fl. Jav. 1828). They had seen Melodorum fruticosum, the type of Loureiro’s genus, in the British Museum, and purposely excluded it from their genus of the same name. They had not ascertained its generic affinities, since they did not examine its flower; but they gave the comforting assurance that Loureiro’s two species of Melodorum “will probably both be found to belong to well-known genera”; and they explain their use of the name Melodorum for a distinct genus by saying: ‘At all events his [Loureiro’s] descrip- tions are not sufficient to identify the species nor to distinguish the genus; * it would therefore, we think, be manifestly unjust to Dunal and Blume not to retain their name.” In the same way the genus which they called Unona excludes all erican species, even the type of the younger Linnaeus’s genus Unona, though they cite Linnaeus as the author of the genus Which they call Unona. This they state is “entirely an Asiatic snus” (Hook, f. & Thoms. Fl. Ind. 131. 1855), and it has Continued to be regarded as such by subsequent writers, all of Whom cite Linnaeus f. as authority, and the type of the genus as Unona discreta, an American tree. This tree we know to be endemic the Dutch colony of Surinam, and we further know that it has slender, Virgate branches, privetlike, or willowlike, two-ranked, ‘hort-petioled leaves, Annonaceous flowers, and aromatic purplish Sbitate carpels radiating from the receptacles. It is not difficult * . This Statement applies also to some of Linnaeus’s types. . 504 SAFFORD: SO-CALLED UNONAS OF THE OLD WORLD with these indications to determine the identity of the type. It is either Xylopia frutescens Aubl. or X. salicifolia Dunal, more likely the former, both of which are commonly called peyrico, pegriko, or pegreko-boom in Surinam and are undoubtedly congeneric with Xylopia muricata, the type of the genus Xylopia as estab- lished by Linnaeus.* This being the case, the genus Unona falls, becoming a synonym of the genus Xylopia, and it is necessary to designate by a valid name the Asiatic genus which Hooker and Thomson called Unona. The earliest name for this genus is that of Loureiro:} Desmos, signifying a chain, and given to it on account of the fruits chained together in nodes. Two species were described by Loureiro, Desmos cochinchinensis, the type of the genus, which Dunal after- wards renamed Unona Desmos, and Desmos chinensis, which Vahl described the following year under the name Unona discolor. If we recognize the validity of Loureiro’s genus but widen his definition so as to comprehend in it the species of Hooker and Thomson’s genus Unona,{ certain changes in nomenclature become necessary. The following is a description of the genus. DESMOS Loureiro Sepals 3. Petals 6, in 2 series, valvate, nearly equal, flat, some cases 3, from the suppression of the inner series. Stamens numerous, tetragonal-oblong or cuneate, the connective above the dorsal oblong or linear-oblong pollen sacs in nee globose or truncate hoodlike process. Torus slightly 1aye" n truncate, flat, or somewhat concave at the apex, glabrous betwee ; Carpels indefinite; * Syst. Nat. 2: 1250. toed. 1759. { Flora Cochinchinensis 1: 352. 1790. t From this genus I have found it necessary to remove Thoms. (= U. Brandesana Pierre), owing to the peculiar form of the of its stamens, which like that of the genus Canangium is produc point and not swollen and obtuse or flattened as in Desmos. doubtedly congeneric with Canangium odoratum (Lamb.) King. llows: Unona latifolia Hook. f. & connective This plant oy Its synonymy is as Canangium Brandesanum (Pierre) Safford comb. nov. Unona Brandesana Pierre, Fl. Forest. Cochinch. pl. 19. 18803 Monosgt Hook. f. & Thoms. Fl. Brit. Ind. 1: 60. 1872, not Unona latifolia Dunal, yc. f. & Anon. 115. 1817, which is Uvaria latifolia Blume (Melodorum latifolium eis Thoms. Fl. Ind. 116. 1855) Unona latifolia SAFFORD: SO-CALLED UNONAS OF THE OLD WoRLD 505 ovaries usually strigose-pilose. Ovules usually 1-seriate, forming a single column, sometimes subbiseriate. Style ovoid or oblong, recurved, with a longitudinal groove along its inner surface. Ripe carpels indefinite, either elongate and constricted between the seeds, or baccate and spheroid. In restoring the generic name Desmos to its proper place the author retains the sectional division of the genus as proposed by Hooker and Thomson, changing the name of Section I, from Desmos to Eudesmos, and adopting the name Dasymaschalon in its original form for Section II. Both of these sections were used in Hooker’s Flora of British India (1872), but a third section, Pseudo-Unona, was discarded in that work. In Sir George King’s monumental work on The Anonaceae of British India (1893) he retains the first two sections under their original names but sub- stitutes the name Stenopetalon for Section III., in which he places Unona stenopetala, U. crinita, and U. desmantha of Hooker together with U. Wrayi, described and figured by Hemsley in Hooker’s Icones pl. 1553. This section is undoubtedly composed of a heterogeneous group of plants and will have to be revised. Some of the species included in it differ so radically from the generic type, especially in the form of their ovaries and styles, that they must eventually be removed from the genus. Thus U. desmantha and U. Wrayi have nodding hairy swollen styles like those of the genus Polyalthia. The ovoid ovary of U. stenopetala terminates in an erect acute style, while the truncate ovary of U. crinita, as originally described and as figured by King, has a punctate stigma. In the following review of the genus I have been much aided by the figures in Sir George King’s Anonaceae of British India, above referred to, and especially by the citations of the author, which have facilitated reference to all the original authorities cited below DESMOS Lour. Fl. Cochinch. 1: 352. 1790. — Unona Hook. f. & Thoms. Fl. Ind. 130. 1855; not Unona Linn. f. Suppl. 270. 1781. ‘‘Nomen (Aeopos, catena) ob fructus in nodos conca- tenatos.”’ Type: Desmos cochinchinensis Lour. SEcTion I. Eupesmos.—Petals 6. Ripe carpels constricted be- tween the seeds. Type: Desmos cochinchinensis Lour. 506 SAFFORD: SO-CALLED UNONAS OF THE OLD WORLD 1. D. COCHINCHINENSIS Loureiro, Fl. Cochinch. 1: 352. 1790. Unona cochinchinensis DC. Prodr. 1: 91. 1824. Unona Desmos Dunal, Monogr. Anon. 112. 1817; Hook. f. & Thoms. Fl. Ind. 134. 1855; Hook. f. Fl. Brit. Ind. 1: 59. 1872; King, Anon. Brit. Ind. 55. pl. 73. 1893. 2. D. CHINENSIS Loureiro, Fl. Cochinch. 1: 352. 1790. Unona discolor Vahl, Symb. 2: 63. pl. 36. 1791; Dunal, Monogr. Anon. 111. 1817; DC. Prodr. 1: 91. 1824; Roxb. Fl. Ind. 2: 669. 1824; Hook. f. & Thoms. Fl. Ind. 132. 1855; Hook. f. Fl. Brit. Ind. 1: 59. 1872; King, Anon. Brit. Ind. 56. pl. 74. 1893. . D. elegans (Thwaites) comb. nov. Unona elegans Thw. Enum. 398. 1864; Hook. f. Fl. Brit. Ind. 1: 58. 1872; King, Anon. Brit. Ind. 53. a me 1893. D. zeylanicus (Hook. f. & Thoms.) comb. n Unona zeylanica Hook. f. & Thoms. FI. me 132. 1855; Hook. f. Fl. Brit. Ind. 1: 58. 1872; King, Anon. Brit. Ind. 54- pl. 70. 1893. D. Dunalii (Wall.) comb. nov. Unona Dunalii Wall. Cat. 6425. 1852; Hook. f. Fl. Brit. Ind. 1: 58. 1872; King, Anon. Brit. Ind. 54. pl. 70. 1893- D. pannosus (Dalz.) comb. nov. Unona pannosa Dalz. in Hook. Kew Journ. Bot. 3: 207- 1851; Hook. f. & Thoms. Fl. Ind. 135. 1855; Hook. f{, Fl. Brit. Ind. 1: 58..1872; King. Anon. Brit. Ind. 55. pl. 72. 1893- . D. viridiflorus (Beddome) comb. n Unona viridiflora Bedd. Icon. Pl. tad. Or. 34. pl. 158: 1874; Hook. f. Fl. Brit. Ind. 1: 60. 1872; King, Anon. Brit. Ind. 56. pl. 75. 1893. . D. dumosus (Roxb.) comb. nov. inont dumosa Roxb. Fi. Ind. 2: 670. 1824.5 Wall Uae A 1832; Hook. f. & Thoms. Fl. Ind. 131. 1855; Hook. f ee Brit. Ind. 1: 59. 1872; King, Anon. Brit. Ind. 57: pl. 79 1893. D. Lawii (Hook. & Thoms.) comb. n f Unona Lawii Hook. f. & Thoms. FI. i. 132. 1855; Hook. ' FL Bet. Ind. 2: $6. 1872: King, Anon Bat Seay pl. 77A. 1893. w bs a S ~I oO ¢ SAFFORD: SO-CALLED UNONAS OF THE OLD WoRLD 507 10. D. praecox (Hook. f. & Thoms.) comb. nov. Unona praecox Hook. f. & Thoms. FI. Ind. 136. 1855; Hook. f. Fl. Brit. Ind. 1: 60. 1872; King, Anon. Brit. Ind. 58. pl. oo: 1893. Section II. DasyMAsCHALON Hook. f. & Thoms.—Petals 4,. in one series, the inner series lacking; ripe carpels constricted between the seeds. Type: Desmos longiflorus. 11. D. longiflorus (Roxb.) comb. nov. Unona longiflora Roxb. FI. Ind. 2: 668. 1824; Wall. Cat. 6419. 1852; Hook. f. & Thoms. Fl. Ind. 134. 1855; Hook. f. FI. Brit. Ind. 1: 61. 1872; Kurz, For. Fl. Burm. 1: 35. 1877; King, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 612: 46. 1892; Anon. Br. Ind. 58. pl. 80. 1893. 12. D. dasymaschalus (Blume) comb. nov. Unona dasymaschala Blume, Fl. Jav. Anon. 55. pl. 27. 1828; A. DC. Mém. Anon. 28. 1832; Wall. Cat. 6421. 1832; Hook. f. & Thoms. Fl. Ind. 135. 1855; Kurz, For. Fl. Burm. 1: 36. 1877; Hook. f. Fl. Brit. Ind. 1: 61. 1872; Scheffer, Obs. Phyt. Anon. 6, Nat. Tijdschr. Ned. Ind. 31: 6. 1870; King, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 612: 47. 1892; Anon. Brit. Ind. 59. pl. 82. 1893. SECTION III. SreENopETALON.—Petals 6; ripe carpels baccate, not constricted between the seeds. Type: Desmos stenopetalus (Hook. f. & Thoms.). : 13. D. stenopetalus (Hook. f. & Thoms.) comb. nov. Unona stenopetala Hook. f. & Thoms. Fl. Ind. 136. 1855; Hook. f. & Thoms. Fl. Brit. Ind. 1: 60. 1872; Miq. FI. Ind. Batav. 12: 43. 1832; Kurz, For. Fl. Burm. 1: 35. 1877; King, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 612: 40. 1892; Anon. Brit. Ind. 61. pl. 85. 1893. 14. D. crinitus (Hook. f. & Thoms.) comb. nov. Unona crinita Hook. f. & Thoms. Fl. Brit. Ind. 1: 61. 1872; King, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 612: 48. 1892; Anon. Brit. Ind. 61. pl. 84. 1893. 15. D. Wrayi (Hemsl.) comb. nov. Unona Wrayi Hemsl. in Hook. Ic. Pl. III. 6: pl. 1553. 1887; 508 SAFFORD: SO-CALLED UNONAS OF THE OLD WORLD King, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 61°: 47. 1892; Anon. Brit. Ind. 60. pl. 82. 1893. 16. D. desmanthus (Hook. f. and Thoms.) comb. nov. Unona desmantha Hook. f. & Thoms. in Hook. f. Fl. Brit. Ind. 1: 61. 1782; King, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. 612: 48. 1892; Anon. Brit. Ind. 60. pl. 83. 1893. WASHINGTON, D. C. A case of changed polarity in Spirogyra elongata F. L. PIcKEItT (WITH PLATE 36) On June 19, last, the writer was examining some filaments of Spirogyra elongata (Berk.) Kg., taken from a ditch running through Indiana University campus, and found the holdfast structure shown in PLATE 36, FIG. 1. This structure seemed to be growing rapidly, as a camera-lucida drawing was quickly made. Three hours later a second sketch was made (FIG. 2), showing consider- able development. | The slide was carefully kept in a light moist chamber for ten days. The water on the slide harbored a number of animal- cules,—rotifers, phacus, ameba, etc.—which with the algae seemed to keep up a life balance. Rapid growth and division of cells in the filaments, as well as the many bubbles of oxygen produced when the light was strong, showed that conditions were quite favorable for algal growth, Most of the filaments were held in More or less sharp curves by the cover glass, but some were quite Straight and free from stress (FIG. 7 and 8). The cells of Clado- phora were old and well covered with diatoms and particles of flint. The slide was frequently examined and several branchlike structures were found. The first one found remained as shown FIG, 2, but another was seen in process of development (FIG. 3 and 4). In every case where attachment had occurred, the Spirogyra was fastened to a thread of Cladophora. The structures shown in FIG. I-6 are outgrowths near the end of a filament, near a dead cell or at a point of physical stress, and are probably holdfasts. In such cases the change in polarity Own is probably due to the abnormal stress, as suggested by Plefler (Pfeffer-Ewart 2: 1 59. 1900). A structure similar to these was found in a chance examination of S. communis by Prof. P.M. Andrews in November 1904. His hitherto unpublished 509 510 PICKETT: CHANGED POLARITY IN SPIROGYRA ELONGATA sketch is shown in TEXT FIG. 1. This too was evidently a holdfast, although it is not now known to what the filament was attached. Fic. 1. Spirogyra communis, X 425, as observed and drawn by Professor F M. Andrews, Nov. 1, 1904 Entirely different from the cases given above are those shown in FIG. 7 and 8 (PLATE 36). When it is taken into consideration that these two filaments were normal, rapidly growing vegetative filaments, and that no indication of fruiting activity could be found in the whole collection under consideration, the change of polarity here shown seems very unusual. There is no suggestion, either in form or in the proximity of other filaments, of these branches being holdfasts. So far as the writer can find, such forms have not been found in nature or under conditions of controlled experiment. The drawings were made with an Abbe camera lucida and Leitz obj. 6 and oc. 4. INDIANA UNIVERSITY, BLOOMINGTON, IND. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE (1896-1911) m of this Index is to include all current botanical literature written by Americans, published in America, or based upon American material ; the word Amer- ica being used in the broadest sen Reviews, and papers that alee exclusively to forestry, agriculture, horticulture, manufactured products of vegetable origin, or laboratory methods are not included, and ho attempt is made to index the literature of bacteriology. An occasional exception is made in favor of some paper appearing in an American periodical which is devoted wholly to botany. Re eprints are not mentioned unless they differ from the original in some important particular. If users of the ex will call the attention of the editor to errors or omissions, their kindness will be appreciated. This Index is reprinted monthly on cards, and furnished in this form to subscribers at the rate of one cent for each card, Selections of cards are not permitted ; each subscriber must take all cards published during the term of his Sita orre- spondence relating to the card issue should be addressed to the Treasurer of the Torrey tanical Club. Anderson, F. M. The Neocene deposits of Kern River, California, and the Temblor Basin. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci. IV. 3: 73-146. pl. 2-13. 9 N tort. Arthur, J.C. The history and scope of plant pathology. Cong. Art. & Sci. Universal Expo. St. Louis 5: [1-16]. 1904. Reprinted with separate pagination. Arthur, J. C., & Johnson, A. G. The loose smut of oats and stinking smut of wheat and their prevention. Purdue Univ. Agr. Exp. Sta. Circ. 22: 1-15. f. 1-9. Mr 1910. Berringer, M. Theclub mosses of Pictou County. Bull. Pictou Acad. Sci. Assoc. 1: 50.. 1909. Berry, E. W. The age of the type exposures of the Lafayette formation. Jour. Geol. 19: 249-256. f. 1-5. My 1911. Contains mention of fossil plants. Berry,E.W. An Engelhardtia from the American Eocene. Am. Jour. Sci. IV. 31: 491-496. Ji, Be . FET Berry, E. W. The evidence of the flora regarding the age of the Raritan formation. Jour. Geol. 18: 252-258. My 1910. » E. W. A revision of the fossil ferns from the Potomac group which have been referred to the genera Cladophlebis and Thyrso- pieris. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 41: 307-332. 60 1911. 511 512 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Berry, E. W. A revision of the fossil plants of the genus Nagetiopsis of Fontaine. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 38: 185-195. f. 1, 2. 6 Je 1910. Berry, E. W. A revision of several genera of gymnospermous plants from the Potomac group in Maryland and Virginia. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 40: 289-318. 8 My I9gII. Bessey, C. E. The phyla, classes, and orders of plants. Trans. Am. Micros. Soc. 29: 85-96. D I9gI0. Beutenmiiller, W. The insect-galls of the vicinity of New York City. Am. Mus. Jour. 4: 1-38. O 1904. [Illust.] Bérgesen, F. Freshwater algae from the ‘“‘ Danmark-expedition” to northeast Greenland. (N. of 76° N. Lat.) Meddelelser om Grén- land 43: 71-90. f. I-5. 1910. Boutwell, J. M. The Calaveras skull. U.S. Geol. Surv. Professional Paper 73: 54-57. I91I. Includes notes on Tertiary fossil plants. Brand, C. J. The acclimatization of an alfalfa variety in Minnesota. Science II. 28: 891, 892. 18 D 1908. Britton, N.L. Darwin and botany. Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 19: 28-33: 31 Jl 1909. Brues, C. T. & B. B. The grasses of Milwaukee County, Wisconsin. Trans. Wisconsin Acad. Sci. 17: 57-76. pl. 7-9. N 1911. Buchanan, R. E. The bacterioids of Bacillus radicicola. Centralb. Bakt. Zweite Abt. 23: 59-91. f. 1-8. 8 Ap 1909. Buchanan, R.E. The gum produced by Bacillus radicicola. Centralb. Bakt. Zweite Abt. 22: 371-396. 14 Ja 1909. Carpenter, F.A. Photographing “‘red snow” in natural colors. Trans. San Diego Soc. Nat. Hist. 1: 108-111. 27 N 1911. [Illust.] Includes a bibliography of Sphaerella nivalis. Cook, M. T. Notes on teratology in tropical plants. Rep. Central Exp. Sta. Cuba 2: 140-142. 1909. Cook, M.T. Some insect galls of Cuba. Rep. Central Exp. Sta. Cuba 2: 143-146. pl. 37-44. 1909. ; Davis, B. M. Cytological studies on Oenothera. Il. The hae ce divisions of Oenothera biennis. Ann. Bot. 24: 631-651. Pl. 5% js: O 1910. ; - 2-6. Dearness, J. On Fundy’s shore. Ontario Nat. Sct. Bull. 6: 3 1910. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 513 Douglas, B. W. Some economic insects and plant diseases of Indiana. 1-28. Indianapolis. 1907. Edgerton, C. W. The red rot of sugar cane. A report of progress. Bull. Louisiana Agr. Exp. Sta. 133: 3-18. pl. 4. D 1911. Colletotrichum falcatum. Fairman, C. E. Fungi Lyndonvillenses novi vel minus cogniti. Ann. Myc. 8: 322-332. 1910. [Illust.] Farwell,O.A. The sleepy grass of New Mexico. A histological study. Merck’s Rep. N. Y. 20: 271-273. f. 1-8. O 1911. Stipa Vaseyi. Fawcett, H. S. Scaly bark or nail-head rust of Citrus. Bull. Univ. Florida Agr. Exp. Sta. 106: 3-41. f. 10-29. Je 1911. Focke, W.O. Rubi novi Americae australis et centralis. I. Repert. Sp. Nov. 9: 235-237. 5 Mr 1911. Franceschi, F. Bamboosin California. [1-7.] Santa Barbara. 1908. [Fraser, W. P.| The Erysiphaceae of Pictou County. Bull. Pictou Acad. Sci. Assoc. 1: 51-58. 1909. Fretz,C. D. Flora of Bucks County, Pennsylvania. Flora and Fauna of Bucks County 6-54. Sellersville. [1906.] Gager, C.S. Effects of the rays of radium on plants. Mem. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 4: i-viii + 1-278. pl. 1-14 + f. 1-73. 2 D 1908. Gardner, N. L. Variations in nuclear extrusion among the Fucaceae. Univ. Calif. Publ. Bot. 4: 121-136. pl. 16, 17. 26 Au 1916. Gates,R.R. The material basis of Mendelian phenomena. Am, Nat. 44: 203-213. Ap I9gto. Grossenbacher, J. G., & Duggar, B. M. A contribution to the life- history, parasitism, and biology of Botryosphaeria Ribis. N. Y. Agr. Exp. Sta, Tech. Bull. 18: 115-190. pl, 1-12. Jl 1911. Harper, R. M. Preliminary report on the peat deposits of Florida. Third Ann, Rep. Florida State Geol. Surv. 1910: 205-375. pl. 16- 28 + f. 17-30. 1910. Harper, R. M. Unfolding of the ‘wire grass.” Savannah Morning News. No. 15,598. 16 Ap 1911. Pages not given. Harris, J. A. Correlation in the inflorescence of Sanguinaria. Biol. Centralb. 30: 629-633. 1 O 1910. ([Illust.] Harris, J. A. The importance of investigations of seedling stages. Science II, 22: 184-186. 11 Au 1905. artis, J. A. The influence of the Apidae upon the geographical 514 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE distribution of certain floral types. Canadian Entomologist 37: 353-356. O 1905; 373-380. N 1905; 393-398. D 1905. Harris, J. A. The selective elimination of organs. Science II. 32 I-10. 140 1910. Heald, F. D. The phylogeny of bacteria. Trans. Am. Micros. Soc. 27: 63-74. pl. 4. Mr 1907. House, H. D. Check-list of the woody plants of western North Caro- lina. [Pp. 12.] Ap 1910. Printed without pagination. Howe, R.H. Physcia villosa from North America. Bot. Gaz. 49: 320. Ap 1910. Hutt, W. N. Pecans. North Carolina Dept. Agr. Bul!. 156: 5-46. f. 1-18 Storr. [Illust.] Jack, J.G. Bemerkungen iiber neu eingefiihrte Baume und Straucher. Mitteil. Deuts. Dend. Gesells. 18: 281-288. 1909. [IIlust.] Jensen, C. Hepaticae and Sphagnaceae from northeast Greenland. Meddelelser om Grénland 43: 163-168. 1910. Kelley, H. A. Some American medical botanists. Jour. Am. Med. Assoc. 57: 1-20. Jl 1911. Knowlton, F.H. Biologic principles of paleogeography. Pop. Sci. Mo. 76: 601-603. Je 1910. Knowlton, F. H. Flora of the auriferous gravels of California. U. S. Geol. Surv. Professional Paper 73: 57-64. I9QII. Knowlton, F. H. Further data on the stratigraphic position of the Lance formation (“‘ceratops beds’’). Jour. Geol. 19: 358-376. Je I9II. Relates to fossil botany. Knowlton, F. H. The Jurassic age of the “Jurassic flora of Oregon.” Am. Jour. Sci. IV. 30: 33-64. Jl 1910. Koehne, E. Uber Prunus demissa (Nutt.) Dietr. Mitteil. Deuts. Dend. Gesells. 20: 231-236. 1911. Lacerda, J. B. de. De variis plantis veneniferis florae brasiliensis. Arkiv. Mus. Nat. Rio de Janeiro 15: 1-137. pl. 1-9. 1909 Learn, C.D. Some parasitic Polyporaceae. Proc. lowa Acad. Sci. 16: 23-29. pl. 1-3 +f. 17, 2. 1910. Lindgren, W. The tertiary gravels of the Sierra Nevada of California. U. S. Geol. Surv. Professional Paper 73: 1-226. pl. 1-28. 19il F here Includes papers on fossil plants by J. M. Boutwell and F. H. Knowlton indexed separately. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 515 Lloyd, C. G. Mycological notes 32: 413-424. F 1909. [IIlust.] MacDougal, D. T. Across Papagueria. Bull. Am. Geog. Soc. 40: I-21. f. I-5. 1908. Mell, C. D. Notes on the identification of tropical wood. 1-3. [1910.] Merrill, E. D. The Malayan, Australasian and Polynesian elements in the Philippine flora. Ann. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg II. Suppl. 3: 277-306. 1909. Moyer, L. R. The prairie flora of southwestern Minnesota. Bull. Minnesota Acad. Sci. 4: 357-378. 1910. Mussells, H. H., & Parker, E. T. Notes on the Erysiphaceae and Perisporiaceae of Pictou. Bull. Pictou Acad. Sci. Assoc. 1: 48, 49. 1909. Olsson-Seffer, P. La agricultura en varios paises tropicales y sub- tropicales 1-49. Mexico. 1910. [Illust.] Pammel, L. H., & Fogel, E.D. The underground organs of a few weeds. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 16: 31-40. pl. 1-5. 1910. Pammel, L. H., & King, C. M. Notes on factors in fungus diseases of plants, with records of occurrences of plant diseases at Ames for a period of twenty-five years. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 16: 41-97. 1907. [IIlust.] Peirce, G. J. Civilization and vegetation. Pop. Sci. Mo. 79: 328- 336. O 1911. Porsild, M. P. List of vascular plants from the south coast of the Nugsuaq Peninsula in west Greenland. Meddelelser om Grénland 43: 239-248. I9g10. Porsild, M. P. The plant-life of Hare Island off the coast of west Greenland. Meddelelser om Grinland 43: 251-274.f. I-10. 1910. Raines, M. A. Preservation of the wild flowers. Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 11: 178-183. Jl 1910. Rankin, W. H. Black rot of ginseng roots. Special Crops II. 8: 208- 210. f. 1-3. N 19009. Reddick, D. The black rot disease of grapes. Bull. Cornell Univ. Agr. Exp. Sta. 293: 289-364. pl. 1-3 +f. 131-146. Mr Igtl. paeits, A.“ Lonicerac generis species varietatesque asiaticae novae vel recentius alio loco ab auctore descriptae. Repert. Sp. Nov. 6: 269- 6. 1909 516 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Rehm, H. Ascomycetes Exs. Fasc. 44. Ann. Myc. 7: 399-405. 10N 1909. Includes several species from Brazil. Rehm, H. Ascomycetes Exs. Fasc. 46. Ann. Myc. 8: 298-304. 15 Je IQIO. Includes several American species. Robinson, C. B. Philippine contact-poisonous plants. Bull. Manila Med. Soc. 3: 5,6. Ja 191. Rorer, J. B. Bud-rot of coconut palm. Bull. Dept. Agr. Trinidad 9: [3-5.] Ap 1910. Rorer, J. B. The green muscardine of froghoppers. Proc. Agr. Soc. Trinidad 10: 467-482. pl. r. 10 D 1910. Discusses a disease of sugar cane caused by Metarrhizium Anisopliae Sorokin. Rorer, J. B. Pod-rot, canker, and chupon-wilt of cacao caused by Phytophthora sp. Bull. Dept. Agr. Trinidad 65: 1-42. pl. 9-17- Jl 1910. Rorer, J. B. The relation of black-rot of cacao pods to the canker of cacao trees. Bull. Dept. Agr. Trinidad 9: Ap 1910. A reprint without pagination. Rorer, J. B. The witch broom disease of cacao in Surinam. Bull. Dept. Agr. Trinidad 9: [3-8.] Ap 1910. Rosenvinge, L. K. On the marine algae from northeast Greenland (N. of 76° N. Lat.) collected by the “Danmark-Expedition.” Meddel- elser om Grénland 43: 93-133. f. I-9. 1910. Safford, W.E. The genus Annona: the derivation of its name and its taxonomic subdivisions. Jour. Washington Acad. Sci. 1: 118-120. ey FOTt; Schneider, A. Coca leaves. Western Druggist (1-15). f, I-5f 1898. ; Schuette, J. H. Contribution on wild and cultivated roses of Wisconsin and bordering states. Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci. 46: 278, 279: 1897. : Setchell, W. A. Some unreported Alaskan Sphagna, together with - summary of the cryptogamic work of the University of Californié botanical expedition to Alaska in 1899. Univ. Calif. Pub. Bot. 2° 309-315. 27S 1907. Shaw, C.H. A principle of elementary laboratory teaching for culture students, Science II. 28: 349-351. 11 5 1908. | | Smith, E. F. Observations on a hitherto unreported bacterial disease D INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 517 the cause of which enters the plant through ordinary stomata. Science II. 17: 456, 457. 20 Mr 1903. Smith, E. F. Some observations on the biology of the olive-tubercle organism. Centralb. Bakt. Zweite Abt. 15: 198-200. 1905. [Illust.] Smith, E. F. Ursache der Cobb’schen Krankheit des Zuckerrohrs. Centralb. Bakt. Zweite Abt. 13: 729-736. 1904. Smith, E. F., & Townsend, C. O. Ein Pflanzentumor bakteriellen Ursprungs, Centralb. Bakt. Zweite Abt. 20: 89-91. 1907. Stanton, T. W. Fox Hills sandstone and Lance formation (‘‘ceratops beds”) in South Dakota, North Dakota and eastern Wyoming. Am. Jour. Sci. IV. 30: 172-188. S 1910. Includes notes on fossil plants found in these formations. Stone, G. E. Fungus diseases common to cucumbers, tomatoes, and lettuce under glass. 3-8. 31 Mr 1900. A lecture delivered before the Massachusetts Horticultural Society. Stone, G. E. Vegetable physiology in agricultural colleges. Proc. Ann. Conv. Assoc. Am. Agr. Coll. 1896. Taylor, W. A. Promising new fruits. Yearbook U. S. Dept. Agr. IQIO: 425-436. pl. 33-40. I9I1I. Teller, E. E. A synopsis of the type specimens of fossils from the Palaeozoic formations of Wisconsin. Bull. Wisconsin Nat. Hist. Soc. 9: 170-271. O 19It. Theissen, F. Hypoxylon annulatum und sein Formenkreis. Ann. Myc. 6: 536-538. 31 D 1908. Transeau, E. N. An experimental microcosm. School Sci. & Math. II: 263, 264. 1911. Trelease, W. Observations on Furcraea. Ann. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg II. Suppl. 3: 905-916. pl. 35-48. 1910. Trelease, W., & Ludewig, H. J. El Zapupe. 1-29. Mexico. 1909. Illust.] Ulrich, E. O. Fossils and age of the Yakutat formation. Harriman Alaska Expedition 4: 125-146. pl. 11-21. Date not given. Urban, I. Zur Pflanzengeographie Portoricos. Symb. Antill. 4: 675- 689. 16S 1911. Also reprinted with separate pagination. Van Hall-de Jonge, A. E. Bladziekte in de Hevea’s. Dept. Land- bouw Suriname Bull. 24: 1-5. pl. 2, 2. Ap 1910. Notes on a leaf disease probably caused by a Pestalozsia or Phyllosticta. 518 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Wieland, G. R. Cycadean monoecism. Am. Jour. Sci. IV. 8: 164. Au 1899. Wieland,G.R. A study of some American fossil cycads. PartI. The male flower of Cycadeoidea. Am. Jour. Sci. IV. 7: 219-226. f. I, 2+ pl. 2-4. Mr 1899; Part II]. The leaf structure of Cycadeoidea. Am. Jour. Sci. IV. 7: 305-308. pl. 7. Ap 1899; Part III. The female fructification of Cycadeoidea. Am. Jour. Sci. IV. 7: 383-391. f. 1-8 + pl. 7-10. My 1899. Wilcox, E. M., & Stone, R. E. Directions for the control of Nebraska plant diseases. Ann. Rep. Nebraska Agr. Exp. Sta. 22: 25-63. IF 1909. Wilson, G.W. The Polyporaceae of Fayette, lowa. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 16: 19-22. 1910. Whetzel, H.H. Fiber rot or rust of ginseng roots. Special Crops 146, 147. Au 1909. Whetzel, H. H. End rot or fiber rot of seedlings. Special Crops 143-145. f. 1, 2. Au 1909. Wylie, R.B. The flora of Iowa Rock. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. 16: 99- 1or. 1910. [Illust.] The flora of a small rocky island in Puget Sound, Washington. BuLL. Torrey CLuB VOLUME 39, PLATE 36 SPIROGYRA ELONGATA (X 350) MEMOIRS OF THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB A series of technical papers on botanical subjects, published at irregular intervals. Price $3.00 a volume. Not offered in exchange. Vol. 1, 1; not furnished separately: Bailey, Liberty Hyde. Studies of the types of various species of the genus Carex. Pages 1-85. sos My 1889. 1. 1, No. 2; not furnished separately : Martindale, Isaac Mee mily. Marine = of the ime Drei. coast and adjacent waters of Soa Island. Pages 87-111. 24 Au Vol. 1, No. 3; price, a cents Spruce, Richard. Hefaticae Bolivianae, in Andibus ‘Polvine orientalis, annis 1835_ 6. al, HH. — lectae. Page is : — 890 i 1. 1, No. 4; price, 75 ¢ Sturtevant, Edward pos On seedless faite. fec 141-187. 30 My 1890, oo ol. 2, No. 1; not furnished separately : : Halsted, Byron David. Reserve food-materials in buds and surrounding parts. Pages 1-26, po 7, 2. 10,8 1890. : B ol. 2, No. 2; price, 75 cents: Vail, Anna Murray, & Hollick, Charles ur. Contributions to the botany of _ Virginia. Pages yee Waits 31 4 23 D 1890. Vol. 2, No. 3; not furnished separately : Holm, Herman Theodor. Contributions to the kno owledge of the germination of some North American sli Pages 57-108, plates eis 15 Ap I8g1. Vol. 2, No. 4; price, 75 ¢ Wheelock, William Bfner. The genus Patron in aoe America. "Pages T09- 152. 30D r8or ‘Vol 1. 3, No 1; not furnished separately : Small, John Kunkel, & Heller, Amos Arthur. Flora of western North Catclies and contiguous territory. Pages 1-39. 20 F 1892. , Vol 3, No. 2; price, $2.00 Moron, 7 Naiadaceae of North America [with illustrations of all the . Species]. a nae. plates 20-74. 15 Mr 1893 Vol. 3, No. 3; not foils oe separately : | Rusby, H An enumeration of a plants collected in Bolivia by Mica : hg “(hart tS ae 1-67. 28A 3: Vol. 4, No. 1; not furnished separa i Underwood, Lucien Marcus. Index Hefaticarum. tie L, “Bibtiography: Pages I-91. Io Je 1893. Vol. 4, No. 2; not furnished elie: poe Small, John Kunkel, & Vail, Anna Murray. Report on the botanical ex epics eo _ tion of southwestern Vi eats during the season of 1892. Pages en Hote 75-82. 18N ae Ap 1894. : : ¢, 4, No.3 + price, 50 cen’ aa oy, Henry Hurd. A enumeration of the oe tei in Bolivia by Miguel - ‘Bang. Part 2. Pages 2 oes 10 Mr-17 A os : 4, No. 4; price, so aes Anna s sisenson spre kh sti is “Pages 215-256, plates sats x 5 Je 1895 Calerde ieee 5; price, 75 cents: ; “berg, Per Axel. North American speci ct Pips a etl go Peee 297-374. 15 $1 1896, } price, $3.00 List of of Pacridophyte Pag Stermaopa growing witha cultivation in northe a ca. 4D sy 3-31 D 1894 ; ea . No. 1; price, $1.25: Rusby, euro “An encmeration of the anata collected in Bolivia ee Mignd = Bang. Part 3. ae 1-130. N 1896. > 2 Vol. 6, No. 2; - Heh asore separates x Grout, A’ Joel. A revision of the North Amer d Brachythei, Pages Sears 1 1897. 3 Then gh iene Vol. 6, No. 3; price, 50 cen i Hazen, Tracy Billiot. The life history ‘of Sphae pis Secaire ( Haematococcus pluvialis). Pages 21 pe plates 86, b7 (colored J ae 1899. = 6, No. 4; price, 50 st Ee nderwood, Lucien shares "A review of the ooh of ferns proposed roto 1832. Pages oe ise 1D 189 x Vol. 6, No. ; price, 25 cents Notes on lichen loan in fie upper Mississippi - Valley. 1 D 1899. : Fink, Bruce. _ Pages 285-307. 5 Vol. 7 €, $3.00 : Howe, Marshall Avery. a data ‘and asioirde of California. — sent plates oe 5 Aul a Vol. 8, a. << not furnished separately < ie "eau de cis Emest. The comparative embryology of the Rubiaceae. Part | 308 ars plates 1-4. 26 Au 1899. Part II, Pages 27-112, pene I ~ 1. 8, No. 2; price, $1.0 ; nder William, The Z teas of i United States and Stiga RTT plates 16-22. 15 F 1 a Vol. 8, _ a ice 75 cents: | drina. — Vitarie lineata, Pages 185-211, ra 23-31. 30 Au 1902. ie a Pda is price, aap pom Ernest Stanley. monograph of th esibtucene Pages p % — 401900. No Dee Pe except in eonip lee se sets of the Memoirs. Wor 10; price, $3.00: ae8 Edward Sandford. History of Pre-Clusian botany in its relation sang eMPages ea 1-447. 22 N 1902. eee Vol. 11, No. 1; price, $1 75: 3 The North American Sordariaceae. Pages 1-134y. : arn Ig0l. thdg 11, No. 2; price, $1 75: : eg rl e Ulothricaceae and rei tase of the U ite ieee 135-250, Se prea a Boge 2001 Vol. 12, No. ce, $1.50 Northrop, A lice Rich. of New “Prondence and Kocibh re Is Pages i ae plates 1-19 rage map. 10 D 1902. ol. 12, ec 2; price, $1.00: : A contributi ion’ to a revision of the North _ Vol, 12, No. 3; price, 75 cents ies in plant regen neration. ries rsa cones cat cents = “Vol. 14, Wo. 2 = rvations. nia vine disease. on phe Califor , 39 NOVEMBER 1912 NO. BULLETIN OF THE €ditor PHILIP DOWELL Associate €ditors MARSHALL AverY Howe ST DUNBAR CLARK | HERBERT MAULE RICHARDS ALEXANDER WILLIAM EvANS =——sCNORMAN TAYLOR ~ | CONTENTS a crtaly evening primrose ( Ocnothera Lamarckiana Seringe) a form of z Oenothera grandiflora Solander? (Plates 37-39) President EDWARDS. BURGESS, Px.D Vice- Presidents JOHN HENDLEY BARNHART, A.M., M.D HERBERT M. RICHARDS, Sc.D. Secretary and T; 7 BERNARD O. DODGE, P Dept. of vie Columbia Galvesniy w York City MEETINGS of Natural fiaerh ; the last Wee ‘at 2 30 P. M., 3 in n the Museam Bullaing of the New York ee 3 Garden. ee en PUBLICATIONS. All sbseriptons ant ater business communications relating. to > the: -" Monthly, established "870, ae eee a “year; Jan 24-38 ca be supplied pagers ; certain “estaised 190%. ra i. 00 a ie | be iment a to sony ‘ay Vol. 39 No. 11 BULLETIN OF THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB NOVEMBER 1og12 Was Lamarck’s evening primrose (Oenothera Lamarckiana Seringe) a form of Oenothera grandiflora Solander ? BRADLEY Moore Davis (WITH PLATES 37-39) This paper will present evidence which in the writer’s opinion _ Clearly indicates that the Oenothera grown in the gardens of the Muséum d’Histoire Naturelle at Paris about 1796, described by . _ Lamarck (?1798) under the name A enothera g d renamed _ by Seringe (1828) Oenothera Lamarckiana, was a fui of Oenothera _ grandiflora Solander (1789), introduced into England in 1778 from Wabama. If this identification is correct it follows that the name _ Oenothera Lamarckiana Seringe becomes a synonym of Oenothera _ grandiflora Solander (O. grandiflora “ Aiton”’). % The evidence in the light of recent studies shows that Professor : De Vries made an incorrect determination of the material of his _ farlier, The material of De Vries’s cultures is very different from _ this plant and can only be allowed to keep the name Lamarckiana ' when written ‘“‘ Oenothera Lamarckiana De Vries” it is not Oenothera _ Lamarckiana Seringe. aly attention was first directed to this matter on seeing in the tium of the New York Botanical Garden tracings of La- marck’ s plant, the type of Oenothera Lamarckiana Seringe, which is Preserved in Lamarck’s herbarium at the Muséum d'Histoire Naturelle, The resemblance of these tracings to the material of a totlera grandiflora Solander from Alabama, now assembled in [The Buttetin for October 1912 (39: 455-518. pl. 36) was issued 2 N r912.] 519 520 Davis: LAMARCK’S EVENING PRIMROSE my own collections and at the New York Botanical Garden, was unmistakable. Miss Alice Eastwood, who kindly looked up various matters for me during her recent trip abroad, examined last winter in Paris this sheet which stands for the type of Oenothera Lamarckiana Seringe and reported to me her belief that it is identical with O. grandiflora Solander. As a result of this report I obtained through the courtesy of M. Francois Gagnepain negatives of this and other herbarium sheets at the Muséum d’Histoire, Naturelle bearing upon the problem. M. Gagnepain further has most kindly answered a number of specific enquiries concerning the history of the specimens and certain characters of the plants not shown in the photographs. The following descriptions of these herbarium sheets are then in part from the photographs here published and in part from the notes of Miss Eastwood and M. Gagnepain, to whom I am greatly indebted. The three sheets, to be described, were examined by Professor De Vries, who has given his interpretation (1901) in footnotes to Die Mutationstheorie, Vol. I, pp. 316,317. De Vries believed that the first two sheets agreed with his cultures of Lamarckiana. The specimens on the third sheet he referred to Oenothera grandiflora Aiton (O. suaveolens Desfontaines) = O. grandiflora Solander. The conclusions of the present paper are (1) that the first sheet (PLATE 37), the type of Oenothera Lamarckiana Seringe, shows 4 remarkably well preserved and characteristic specimen of Oenothera grandiflora Solander, (2) that the specimen on the second sheet (PLATE 38) is neither O. grandiflora Solander nor “0. Lamarckiana De Vries” but a plant that is close to certain forms of O. bienmts, and (3) that the two plants on the third sheet (PLATE 39): obviously stunted in growth, are so imperfect that an opinion of their identity can hardly be more thana guess. Our interest in this herbarium material centers upon the first two sheets. OF SHEET 1. LAMARCK’S PLANT, WHICH STANDS AS THE TYPE Oenothera Lamarckiana Seringe This specimen (PLATE 37) is in the herbarium of Lamare ks acquired by the Muséum d'Histoire Naturelle in 1886. ape sheet bears in the handwriting of Lamarck: “Oenothera - iis [grandiflora] . . . nova spec. flores magni lutei, odore grato, cau Davis: LAMARCK’S EVENING PRIMROSE 521 3 pedalis.’” The spelling of the word Oenothera is not clear; it might be interpreted “‘ Onothera”’ or possibly “‘ Aenothera.”” This note designating a new species, grandiflora, in the handwriting of Lamarck establishes the specimen as what we would now designate as the type of his species Aenothera grandiflora described in the En- cyclopédie Méthodique Botanique 4: 554. ?1798. Thisdescription agrees with the specimen. It seems unlikely that we shall ever know the exact date at which the description was published. Authors usually give it as 1797, but Sherborn and Woodward (1906), from evidence presented by extraneous matter bound in with certain copies of the volume concerned, place the year as ’1798. I can find no evidence that Poiret wrote the description, as was believed by De Vries, but he is known to have written later volumes of the encyclopedia. Seringe in his diagnosis of Oenothera Lamarckiana (De Can- dolle, Prodromus 3: 47. 1828) gives O. grandiflora Lamarck as a synonym together with the comment that the species is not the grandiflora of Aiton. This was of course his reason for renam- ing the plant. The diagnosis of Seringe, as will appear later, is virtually a copy of a portion of Lamarck’s description. The following is the description of the species written by Lamarck in the Encyclopédie Méthodique Botanique; it should be noted that the abbreviation (V.S.) at the end of the diagnosis shows that the description was based on dried material. “12. Onograire a grandes fleurs. Anothera grandiflora (n). 4tnothera foliis integerrimis, ovato-lanceolatis; petalis integris, capsulis glabris. “Cette espéce paroit se rapprocher, par son port, de l’eno- thera longiflora; mais elle en différe par plusieurs caractéres frappans, sur-tout par ses tiges rameuses, ses pétales entiers, ses fruits lisses & courts. “Ses tiges s’élévent 4 trois ou quatre pieds de hauteur. Elles sont cylindriques, munies de quelques poils rares, d’un Touge brun, divisées en rameaux nombreux, étalées. Les feuilles sont vertes, alternes, ovales, lancéolées, lisses & glabres des deux cOtés, trés-entiéres; les feuilles du bas sont pétiolées & munies de quelques dents a peine sensibles. Celles qui accompagnent les fleurs sont plus étroites, plus aigués & sessiles. ‘Les fleurs sont terminales, & forment, par leur disposition, une panicule étalée; elles sont axillaires, solitaires, mais trés- 522 Davis: LAMARCK’S EVENING PRIMROSE rapprochées. Le calice est jaune, muni d’un tube un peu plus long que la corolle, qui se divise en quatre folioles lancéolées, élargies 4 leur base, aigués a leur sommet, terminées par un filet court, sétacé. La corolle est jaune, composée de quatre pétales ovales, trés-grands, entiers, arrondis, presque aussi longs que le tube calicinal, retrécis 4 leur base en forme de coin. Les anthéres sont longues, linéaires. Le fruit est une capsule courte, cylindrique, glabre, tronquée, légérement quad- rangulaire, n’ayant qu’environ le tiers de longueur du tube calicinal. Cette espéce est originaire de 1’Amérique septen- trionale. On la cultive au jardin du Muséum d'Histoire naturelle. (V.S.)”’ An interesting point has been brought to my notice by Mr. H. H. Bartlett. Poiret has this note in the Encyclopédie Métho- dique Botanique, Suppl. 4: 141. 1816: “T’Oenothera grandiflora, no. 11, est la méme plante que celle d’Aiton, Hort. Kew., 2, pas: 2.” The designation ‘no. 11” instead of ‘no, 12”’ must have been a slip of the pen on Poiret’s part. Although Poiret was correct in considering O. grandiflora Lamarck as a synonym of 0. grandiflora Solander, he could not have had a clear conception of this plant since he kept O. suaveolens Desfontaines, which is also a synonym, as a distinct species. We will give also the short diagnosis by Seringe (1828) of Oenothera Lamarckiana for comparison with the longer description of Lamarck. “OE. Lamarckiana (Ser. mss.) caule ramoso, foliis wnteger- rimis ovato-lanceolatis, petalis integris magnis, capsulis glabris cylindrico-tetragonis brevibus. @ in America sept. OE grandiflora Lam. dict. 4. p. 554. *non Ait. Fl. flavi.” ; I have italicized phrases that are the same as those in the brief introduction in the description of Lamarck, showing that Seringe had little or nothing to add to the original description. Certain points should be noted in these descriptions of Lamarck and Seringe before we compare Lamarck’s plant (PLATE 37). the one hand with O. grandiflora Solander and on the other with the material of De Vries’s cultures (““O. Lamarckiana De Vries”). The ed, for description of the petals as entire must not be emphasiz , while there may not be in these species a conspicuous notch at tip of the petals there is usually at least a shallow indenta character is not one easily determined in dried specim tion; the ens ali Davis: LAMARCK’S EVENING PRIMROSE §23 presents so much variation as to have no taxonomic value. The leaves of these species are not strictly entire but serrulate, the teeth being small and in dried material inconspicuous: the teeth are, however, shown on some of the leaves on Lamarck’s plant (PLATE 37). The glabrous fruits agree best with the seed capsules of grandiflora, which are almost smooth, while those of De Vries’s Lamarckiana are decidedly puberulent and pilose. Mature cap- sules are not shown on the specimen of Lamarck’s plant, and no importance can be attached to their description as short. The teddish brown stem with occasional hairs agrees with grandiflora; there is no mention of numerous hairs arising from red papillae, a striking characteristic of the plants in the cultures of De Vries. The description of the leaves as glabrous is not strictly true either of grandiflora or of De Vries’s Lamarckiana, both having a minute pubescence, which is more evident in the latter form. Mr. Bart- lett has called my attention to the word ‘“‘sétacé” in Lamarck’s description of the sepal tips; this has been translated by De Vries (1901, Pp. 317) as ‘‘dicke.’’ The French is, however, from the late Latin word ““setaceus,’’ derived from “seta,” a stiff hair or bristle- The meaning is, then, exactly the opposite of that given by De Vries and refers to the much attenuated sepal tips, as shown in PLATE 37, a striking characteristic of grandiflora; the sepal tips of De Vries’s Lamarckiana are in contrast much shorter and thicker. It is surprising how little information is contained in the descriptions of Lamarck and Seringe that is of value in a com- Parison of Lamarck’s original plant with O. grandiflora Solander and “O. Lamarckiana De Vries.” The most important points in the writer’s opinion are the description of the attenuated sepal tips and the absence of all reference to the remarkable stem Coloration which is characteristic of the material of De Vries’s cultures. De Vries’s Lamarckiana invariably, so far as I am aware, Presents a green stem punctate with red papillae from which long airs arise among a short glandular pubescence. This is not noted by Lamarck, who describes the stem in agreement with Srandiflora as reddish brown with occasional hairs. € may now take up the consideration of the herbarium sheet of Lamarck’s plant (PLATE 37) preserved in the herbarium of the 524 Davis: LAMARCK’S EVENING PRIMROSE Muséum d’Histoire Naturelle. First, however, it should be noted that Buchet (1912) in a recent paper gives his opinion that this sheet agrees with Oenothera suaveolens Desfontaines, which he recognizes as synonymous with Oenothera grandiflora Solander, an older name. Buchet also regards the sheet shown on PLATE 38 from the collection of Abbé Pourret as the same form as Lamarck’s plant and identifies it also with O. suaveolens. On this point I cannot agree, since, as will be shown later, the specimen of Abbé Pourret has important characters that distinguish it both from Lamarck’s plant (O. suaveolens Desfontaines = O. grandiflora Solander) and from the material in the cultures of De Vries. In the following account of the sheet which stands for the type of Oenothera Lamarckiana Seringe, are included not only the characters shown by the photograph (PLATE 37) but also others of equal or perhaps greater importance from the notes of Miss Eastwood and M. Gagnepain. In order to obtain direct com- parisons with respect to the pubescence I f urnished M. Gagnepain with specimens of stems and buds from both grandiflora and the Lamarckiana of De Vries’s cultures, asking him to compare the specimens with Lamarck’s plant but not informing him of their source. 1. STEM AND FOLIAGE. The specimen of Lamarck’ (PLATE 37) exhibits the rather dense branching characteristic of certain forms of grandiflora in sharp contrast to the long sparsely branched stems of De Vries’s Lamarckiana. The stem, according to M. Gagnepain, does not have long hairs from red papillae, as sf so characteristic of De Vries’s Lamarckiana; the pubescence short and the stem subglabrous. The leaves are broadly elliptical or lanceolate with serrulate margins and with short but distinct petioles as in grandiflora; they are not sessile or almost sessile nof so broad as are the leaves of the Lamarckiana of De Vries. This herbarium sheet may be readily matched in the form of the branching and in the foliage by numerous specimens of gn collected in Alabama; it represents neither the broader- ait ‘ ; narrower-leaved forms in the range of variation in this species bu is nearest to the intermediate condition. 2. INFLORESCENCE. The inflorescence does close spike with broad-based, sessile bracts, which s plant . not present the are so character Davis: LAMARCK’S EVENING PRIMROSE 525 istic of the younger flowering shoots of De Vries’s Lamarckiana. On the contrary the bracts are narrow and short-petioled and the inflorescence is more open, in agreement with grandiflora. 3. Bups. The buds are not stout as in the Lamarckiana of De Vries and the sepal tips are much more attenuate, a distinctive character of grandiflora. The form of the buds is exactly as in grandiflora, and this character is one of the most important points of agreement with this species. The pubescence on the sepals, as described by M. Gagnepain, is short; there are not present the numerous long hairs from papillae, which are characteristic of De Vries’s Lamarckiana. : 4. FLowers. The flowers have the very long and delicate hypanthium characteristic of grandiflora. Miss Eastwood reports that the petals in a bud dissected by her are entire. This is a character typical of neither grandiflora nor the Lamarckiana of De Vries, but as stated before, the petals of these forms vary so greatly in the degree of their indentation that the character has little if any taxonomic value. The length of the petals, between 3 and 4 cm.., is that of grandiflora and also of certain forms of De Vries’s Lamarckiana. The style extends beyond the tips of the anthers so that the lobes of the stigma (s, in PLATE 37) are above the latter and could not be pollinated in the bud. In these respects the flower agrees with both grandiflora and the large-flowered types of Lamarckiana in De Vries’s cultures. 5. CapsuLEs. There are apparently no mature capsules on the specimen, so direct comparisons are impossible. Since the size and form of a capsule depends upon the development of the ovules, i. e. upon whether or not the stigma has been fully polli- nated, it is unsafe to accept statements of size unless there is evidence that sufficient material has been examined. Lamarck’s statement that the capsules are short was probably based on immature or partially pollinated capsules. His description of the capsules as glabrous points to grandiflora; as stated before, the capsules of De Vries’s Lamarckiana are decidedly puberulent and Pilose. The characters of Oenothera grandiflora, which appear on the herbarium sheet of Lamarck’s plant, and those of the Lamarckiana of De Vries’s cultures may be more readily contrasted in the following statement. 526 Davis: LAMARCK’S EVENING PRIMROSE O. grandiflora Solander AND LAMARCK’S Flowering stems generally with numer- ous approximate branches. green above, reddish brown below, the papillae at the base of long hairs colored like the stem. O. Lamarckiana FROM THE CULTURES OF IES Flowering stems sparsely branched or not at all. The papillae at the base of the long hairs colored red so that the green stem appears punctate with red dots. Leaves of upper foliage lanceolate, rarely broad, with distinct petioles. Inflorescence more open, with narrow, petioled bracts. Buds not stout, with much attenuated sepal tips. Sepals puberulent, some- times sparsely pilose. Flowers with a long delicate hypan- thium. Petals 3-3.5 cm. long. Stig- ma lobes above the tips of the anthers. Leaves of upper foliage ovate-lanceolate, sessile or almost sessile. Inflorescence more close, with sessile bracts broad at the base. Buds stout, with shorter sepal tips. Pubescence of sepals a heavy puber- etals in some races 4—-4.5 cm. long, in others 2.5-3 cm. long. Stigma lobes in the large-flowered types above the tips of the anthers, in the smaller- flowered forms at about the level of of the anther tips. There is another sheet in the herbarium of the Muséum d’His- toire Naturelle which is without a name but bears in the hand- writing of Lamarck: “‘d’Amérique sept. Tige rameuse, haute de 3.44 pieds.” Both M. Gagnepain and Miss Eastwood report that this sheet is similar to that of Lamarck’s plant which we have described above and shown on PLATE 37. The history of the sheet is apparently not known and I have no evidence that it can sately be associated with the specimen upon which Lamarck undoubtedly based his description. Nevertheless, this sheet may be closely related to or even a duplicate of the specimen that served as the type for the descriptions of Lamarck and Seringe. In summary it may be said that the specimen, which we must _consider the type of Oenothera Lamarckiana Seringe, presents n° characters in clear form that are not those of O. grandiflora Solander. In not one of the contrasted characters discussed above does the specimen agree with the Lamarckiana of De Vries § cultures. The only points in which De Vries’s Lamarckiana may be said to resemble this specimen are the size of the petals and the position of the stigma, which in the large-flowered forms of Lamarckiana is above the tips of the anthers; these are characters which grandiflora and De Vries’s Lamarckiana have in commot Davis: LAMARCK’S EVENING PRIMROSE 527 It is exceedingly fortunate that the plant which serves as the type of Oenothera Lamarckiana Seringe should have come down to us so well preserved that there is scarcely a doubt of its identity with Oenothera grandiflora Solander, introduced into England in 1778. SHEET 2. A SPECIMEN OF Oenothera FROM THE COLLECTION OF ABBE POURRET This specimen (PLATE 38) is of interest for the reason that De Vries (1901, footnote to p. 317) believed that it as well as Lamarck’s plant agreed with the material of his cultures (‘‘Oenothera Lamarcki- ana De Vries’’). Buchet (1912) has recently referred the specimen to Oenothera suaveolens Desfontaines = O. grandiflora Solander. I am unable to agree with either of these opinions and shall present evidence that the plant was close to certain forms of Oenothera iennis. The sheet bears the label HERB. MUS. PARIS. with the state- ment at the bottom ‘Collection de l’Abbé Pourret, extraite de l'Herbier légué par M. le Dr. Barbier. 1847.’ On this label, in the handwriting of Spach are the names “Onagra vulgaris Spach” and “‘Oenothera biennis Linné.” At the left is a list of old names representing synonymy, copied by Abbé Pourret, and below this list his clerk wrote the name Oenothera biennis L. De Vries states that the plant was probably collected by Abbé Pourret in the garden of the museum at the time of his visit to Paris in 1788. M. Gagnepain, however, is not satisfied with the evidence for this view and writes that the history of the sheet is unknown to him. An examination of the specimen itself (PLATE 38) shows the following characters. I. STEM AND FOLIAGE. The long unbranched stem bears ellip- tical, petioled leaves very different from the sessile or almost Sessile, broad-based leaves of De Vries’s Lamarckiana. The ab- sence of approximate flowering branches is against any relationship to grandiflora. The appearance of the small buds in the axils of the lower leaves is characteristic of some forms of Oenothera biennis. The pubescence of the stem is described by M. Gagnepain as very like the specimen of grandiflora and not at all like the specimen of Vries’s Lamarckiana sent for comparison. 528 Davis: LAMARCK’S EVENING PRIMROSE 2. INFLORESCENCE. The bracts of the inflorescence are not broad at the base and sessile as in the Lamarckiana of De Vries. They are narrow-elliptical and short-petioled. 3. Bups. The size and form of the buds present perhaps the most important characters on the sheet. They are short and stout, and these characters alone make it impossible that the plant could have been O. grandiflora Solander. (Compare PLATE 38 with PLATE 37.) Forms of O. biennis frequently show these peculiarities. The sepals have a greater pubescence than those of grandiflora. 4. FLowers. The flowers are medium-sized, petals probably between 2 and 2.5 cm. long. They are not large enough for grandiflora or for the large-flowered forms of De Vries’s Lamarck- jana. The stigma (s, PLATE 38) appears to be at about the level of the anthers, the style not extending well beyond as in the types mentioned above. The flowers, in size and in the relation of the stigma to the anthers, agree with forms of diennis. 5. CAPSULES. The capsules appear to be of the biennis type, which is similar to that of De Vries’s Lamarckiana. In conclusion, the forms of the leaves and bracts distinguish this plant of Abbé Pourret from the Lamarckiana of De Vries’s cultures. The size and form of the buds, the size of the flowers, and the position of the stigma distinguish it from O. grandiflora Solander as well as from the larger-flowered forms of De Vries’s Lamarckiana. All of the characters described above are repre sented in the assemblage of forms included under the name Oeno- thera biennis. Since we know nothing of the rosette, general habit, and lower foliage of this plant, it is quite impossible to follow its determination further. SHEET 3. SPECIMENS REFERRED BY DE VRIES TO Oenothera grandiflora The specimens on this sheet (PLATE 39) are SO imperfect and their form so abnormal that a satisfactory determination of their identity is probably impossible. De Vries (1901, footnote to P: 316) considered them to be Oecnothera grandiflora Aiton =“ grandiflora Solander (O. suaveolens Desfontaines). Davis: LAMARCK’S EVENING PRIMROSE 529 The sheet bears a label of Michaux with ‘‘Ameriq. sept.” On this label in the handwriting of Desfontaines is “‘ Oenothera suaveo- lens Hort. Paris.’’ Above this name has been written ‘‘ Oenothera grandiflora Poiret Encycl.,’’ and below, Spach wrote ‘‘Onagra vulgaris grandiflora Spach.”’ A second label bears the name “Oenothera grandiflora,’ probably in the handwriting of André Michaux. M. Gagnepain states that the specimens were im- ported as dried plants from North America. The chief interest in this sheet lies in the fact that Desfontaines evidently considered the specimens to be his own species Oenothera suaveolens. Both specimens are entire plants, the smaller about 3.5 dm., the larger about 5 dm. in height. They are unbranched and ob- viously dwarfed. The leaves are petioled as in grandiflora, but those of the smaller plant are much below the average size for this species. The stigma (s, PLATE 39) shown in the flower of the smaller plant seems to be above the tips of the anthers as in grandiflora. The pubescence of the stems and sepals, from notes of M. Gagnepain, appears to be somewhat similar to grandiflora; it is not that of De Vries’s Lamarckiana. There appear to be no characters on these plants that might not have been those of O. grandiflora Solander under very unusual or abnormal conditions. There is, however, little or nothing in these specimens that is typical of grandiflora, and apparently nothing that determines a relationship to any other Oenothera. It is hardly possible that plants so different from one another grew together in the same environment and it seems more probable that they were quite unrelated. They remain to us as the flotsam of the herbarium, plants of whose precise origin and parentage we know nothing. DIscUSSION The reader will have noted that throughout this paper the name Lamarckiana has been kept strictly for the plant that has come down to us from the cultures of De Vries, a plant well known to scores of botanists and grown in numerous botanical gardens. If this paper has shown that Lamarck’s plant in the gardens of Paris at about 1796 or earlier, the type of Oenothera Lamarckiana Seringe (1828), was a form of Oenothera grandiflora Solander (1789) the former name becomes a synonym of the latter. The Oenothera 530 Davis: LAMARCK’S EVENING PRIMROSE of De Vries’s cultures is left without a name or at least without the authority of Seringe. I propose, however, that the name “* Oenothera Lamarckiana De Vries” be kept for this plant, which has been the subject of such extensive experimental study by De Vries and whose origin and behavior is a matter of such great interest to the geneticist. The name when written “ Oenothera Lamarckiana De Vries”’ is clear to all who have knowledge of the relation that this plant bears to the mutation theory. If there were evidence that “0. Lamarckiana De Vries”’ is or ever was a component of the American flora as a native species, there might be some reason to change its name. However, the evidence indicates that Lamarckiana has come to us greatly modified, that its parentage is far from pure, that it is in fact of hybrid origin. We are dealing with the product of the garden, and as such the plant may reasonably be exempt from a change of name that would carry endless confusion through the literature of experimental morphology. Should any taxono- mist contemplate the introduction of a new name let him first ponder the inscription over the grave of William Shakespeare. The introduction of Oenothera grandiflora Solander into England in 1778 marked a very important date in the development of the Oenothera flora over parts of Europe. This species undoubtedly holds the key to many puzzling herbarium sheets and records. Botanists do not yet realize how definite is our knowledge of this native American species and how clear is our information on its history. (See MacDougal, 1905, p. 7.) Oenothera grandiflora Solander was discovered by William Bartram in 1776 near Tensaw, Alabama, on an expedition under- taken at the request of John Fothergill, M.D. Solander’s original description in Aiton’s Hortus Kewensis, 1789, from material grown at Kew, states that O. grandiflora was introduced by John Fother- gill in 1778. A herbarium specimen in the British Museum from ‘Hort. Fothergill 1778” makes it evident that Bartram must have sent seed to Fothergill. The species still occupies its original station in Alabama, where it was rediscovered in 1904, and there is abundant herbarium material from this source; also, there ar strains under cultivation by myself and others. As striking a" American novelty as this large-flowered species would naturally be- Davis: LAMARCK’S EVENING PRIMROSE 5381 come widely distributed, which explains its presence in Paris some- what earlier than ?1798, when Lamarck’s description was published. Escaping from the gardens, the plant has been reported as growing wild at various stations in England and France, Following in the wake of its distribution to European botanical centers came the inevitable description as new species of forms derived from the original. O¢enothera suaveolens Desfontaines and Lamarck’s plant, Oenothera Lamarckiana Seringe, were undoubtedly such deriva- tives and must be considered as forms of Oenothera grandiflora Solander. The identification of Lamarck’s plant with Oenothera grandiflora Solander has very greatly modified the problem of the origin of “ Oenothera Lamarckiana De Vries.” The problem has become far more tangible. I have recently (Davis, 1911, p. 226, and 1912, p. 379) criticized adversely the evidence that has been offered to show that Lamarckiana was known previous to 1778 when grandi- flora was introduced into England. With Lamarck’s plant assigned to grandiflora we pass from the eighteenth century to periods when we may hope for more direct evidence than that furnished by the old accounts and figures. We know that as a cultivated plant handled by seedsmen O. Lamarckiana first appeared about 1860, when it was placed on the market by the firm of Carter and Company of London, who state that their seed came from Texas. The identification by Lindley of these plants with O. Lamarckiana Seringe was undoubtedly in- Correct. I have recently described and figured (Davis, 1912, p. 417) Certain well preserved specimens of an Oenothera in the Gray Herb- arium from a plant grown at Cambridge, Massachusetts, by Dr. Asa Gray in 1862. Evidence is there given which indicates that this plant held a close genetical relationship to these same cultures of Carter and Company, perhaps not more than one or two genera- tions removed from the original plants. These specimens show characters in part those of De Vries’s Lamarckiana and in part like Srandiflora. If this plant grown by Dr. Gray was representative of the cultures of Carter and Company their plants must have differed from the Lamarckiana of today in a number of important Particulars, | regard this herbarium sheet as the most important new known bearing on the problem of the origin of Oenothera Lamarckiana, Its relation to the writer’s working hypothesis that 532 Davis: LAMARCK’S EVENING PRIMROSE Lamarckiana arose as a hybrid between biennis and grandiflora has been fully discussed in the paper mentioned above. Although Carter and Company state that they received their seed from Texas, it must be borne in mind that we have at present no confirmatory evidence that such a plant as they describe or as that represented on the sheet in the Gray Herbarium is native in the southern or southwestern United States. Here is a problem that well deserves the attention of botanists in these regions, who should make every effort to bring such a type to light that seed may be sent to the workers in the experimental gardens. If such a form grew in Texas no further back than 1860 it may surely be expected there today. It is possible that the cultures of Carter and Company arose in England and that their association with a Texan source may have been some mistake on the part of the seedsmen. We have several accounts of large-flowered Oenotheras in England at dates previous to 1860. The most important and the earliest is that in Smith’s English Botany (22: 1534. 1806) with the excellent figure of Sowerby. This account describes at this early date (1806) very extensive growths of an interesting form on the sand banks along the coast a few miles north of Liverpool. At the present day “ Oenothera Lamarckiana De Vries” and variants from this type ae established and flourishing over extensive tracts in the same region north of Liverpool through the sand hills of Lancashire. It 1s not impossible that the Lamarckiana of Carter and Company may have come from such regions. ey The problem of the origin of ‘‘Oenothera Lamarckiana De Vries must be approached from two sides. The English botanists have the problem of the history of such an QOenothera flora as that of the Lancashire sand hills, and collections should be searched with the greatest thoroughness for herbarium sheets that may of assistance in tracing its development. American botanists have the problem of the discovery and isolation by cultures of the large-flowered Oenotheras throughout the south and west, which might have a direct relationship to Lamarckiana or which might be one of the parents of a possible hybrid. A good beginning was made in the rediscovery of Oenothera grandiflora Solander but the search should be pushed further. UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA. Davis: LAMARCK’S EVENING PRIMROSE 533 REFERENCES CITED Buchet, Samuel. Le cas de |’Oenothera nanella de Vries. Bull. Soc. Bot. France IV. 12: 18. 1912. Davis, B. M. Some hybrids of Oenothera biennis and O. grandiflora that resemble O. Lamarckiana. Amer. Nat. 45: 193. I9QII. Davis, B. M. Further hybrids of Oenothera biennis and O. grandiflora that resemble O. Lamarckiana. Amer. Nat. 46: 377. 1912. De Vries, Hugo. Die Mutationstheorie. Leipzig, vol. I, 1901. Lamarck. Encyclopédie Méthodique Botanique 4: 554. ? 1798. MacDougal, D. T., Vail, A. M., Shull, G. H., & Small, J. K. Mutants and hybrids of the Oenotheras. Carnegie Institution Pub. 24. 1905. Seringe, N.C. De Candolle, Prodromus 3: 47. 1828. Sherborn, C. D., & Woodward, B. B. On the dates of publication of the natural history portions of the ‘‘ Encyclopédie Méthodique.”’ Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. VII. 17: 577. June 1906. Solander, D. Aiton, Hortus Kewensis 2: 2. 1789. The effect of guanidin on plants * OSWALD SCHREINER AND J. J. SKINNER INTRODUCTION Guanidin has been found in some plants. It may arise from the oxidation of arginin. Arginin is a decomposition product of proteins and exists in plants, and it has also been found in soils. Interesting in this connection is the appearance of guanidin in seed- lings, as reported by Schulze,t which probably results by further changes from arginin. Guanidin can also be formed by the oxidation of guanin in the laboratory. Guanidin was shown to be toxic to plants, first by Kawakita § and later in this laboratory.|| According to Shibata, J who studied the effect of Aspergillus niger on a number of nitrogenous com- pounds, this mold had no effect on guanidin. Hutchinson and Miller** include guanidin among the nitrogenous compounds assimilated by plants. In the earlier experiments in this laboratory the guanidin carbonate was studied in various concentrations of distilled water. The wheat plants were killed in 9 days in solutions stronger than 100 parts per million. In all the lower concentrations, including 1 part per million, the wheat plants were seriously injured This harmful effect of guanidin has since then been more * Contribution from the Laboratory of Soil Fertility Investigations, Bureau of Soils. T Schreiner, O., and veprnien E. C. The presence of arginin and histidin in ett § Kawakita, I. On the behavior arg dint to plants. Bull. Col. Agr. Tokio 6: 181. 1904 —05. || Schreiner, O., Reed, H. S., and Skinner, J. J. Certain organic constituents of soils in relation a soil fertility. U.S. Dept. Agr. Bur. Soils Bull. 47. 1907. { Shibata, K, Ther das Verlisinted von Amide spaltenden Enzymen bei teeny s Beitrage 5: 384. 1904 ** Hutchinson, H. B., and Miller, N. H. J. ER eet Someatiation: STERN and organic ‘SA = nitrogen by higher plants. Centralbl. Bakt. 30: 513. I9gIl. 536 SCHREINER & SKINNER: EFFECT OF GUANIDIN ON PLANTS thoroughly studied, and in this later work nutrient culture solu- tions, 66 in number, have been used, comprising all the combina- tions of potash, phosphate, and nitrate, as explained below. EXPERIMENTAL METHODS Wheat seedlings were grown in aqueous culture solutions con- taining the ordinary fertilizer salts, calcium acid phosphate, sodium nitrate, and potassium sulphate. Some of the cultures contained calcium acid phosphate only, some sodium nitrate only, and some potassium sulphate only. Other solutions were com- posed of mixtures of two salts, sodium nitrate and calcium acid phosphate, sodium nitrate and potassium sulphate, and calcium acid phosphate and potassium sulphate. Still other solutions had all three constituents in various proportions. The concentra- tion of all the solutions was 80 parts per million of the fertilizer ingredients, P2Os, NH3, and K,O. In cultures containing only one fertilizer salt, for instance calcium acid phosphate, the concentra- tion was 80 parts per million of P2Os. If two salts were present, for instance calcium acid phosphate and sodium nitrate, the concentration was 80 parts per million of POs + NH. If all three salts were present, the concentration was 80 parts per million of P.O; + NH; + KO. The ratios of the constituents varied in 10 per cent stages. In all, there were 66 different cultures of nutrient solutions. ; For a more detailed explanation of this triangular scheme and the principles involved in preparing culture solutions in definite progression of its constituents, the reader is referred to earlier publications.* Two sets of cultures were prepared; to one set was added merely the nutrient salts, while to each culture of a similar - guanidin carbonate was added in amounts of 25 parts per million in addition to the nutrient salts. The culture solutions were con- tained in wide-mouth bottles, holding 250 c.c., and 10 wheat seed- lings grown in each culture. The culture solutions were changed every three days, four changes being made in the course of US * Schreiner, O., and Skinner, J. J. Some effects of a harmful organic ae stituent. U.S. Dept. Agr. Bur. Soils Bull. 70. 1910. Ratio of phosphate, and potassium on absorption and growth. Bot. Gaz. 50: I. 1910. SCHREINER & SKINNER: EFFECT OF GUANIDIN ON PLANTS 537 experiment. The solutions were analyzed for nitrates immediately after each change. The phosphate and potassium were deter- mined on a composite solution of the four changes. Observations on the general development of the plants and the effect on root growth and appearance were made during the experiment, and photographs were taken. For the purpose of preparing the 66 culture solutions needed in this investigation, stock solutions of the three salts, calcium acid phosphate, sodium nitrate, and potassium sulphate, were prepared separately. The salts were chemically pure salts and were dissolved in each case in physiologically pure water. For the calcium acid phosphate solution 1.776 grams of CaHy4(POx)s. H,O per liter were used. This solution has a concentration of 1,000 parts per million of P.O;. The sodium nitrate solution was prepared by using 5,000 grams of NaNO; per liter. This solution is equivalent to a concentration of 1,000 parts per million of NHs. The potassium sulphate solution was prepared by dissolving 1.852 grams of K,SQ, per liter. This solution has a concentration of 1,000 parts per million of K,O. The amount of culture solution used in each culture bottle being 250 c.c., it follows that every 2 c.c. of these 1,000 parts per million stock solutions will represent 8 parts per million in the culture solution when this is diluted to the capacity of the bottle; i. e. the successive addition of 2 c.c. of the stock solution gives the 10 per cent differences desired in putting up the 66 solutions. In putting up the 66 cultures it was found desirable to calibrate each bottle for 250 c.c. capacity and to number them consecutively from 1 to 66. Bottles in which the 250 c.c. mark was either high or low were discarded, only those being used that brought the surface of the liquid from one- half to one centimeter from the top. These 66 bottles were then arranged in a triangular form, as illustrated by FIG. 1 and 2. The necessary amount of the 1,000 parts per million stock Solution above described was measured from a burette. For in- Stance, in adding the requisite amount of nitrate to the set of cul- ture bottles the line of bottles P to K in FIG. 2 received no nitrate Solution, the next line of bottles received 2 c.c. each, the third ine 4 c.c, each, and so on, increasing 2 c.c. with each successive line, the culture at N receiving 20 c.c. of the nitrate solution. 538 ScHREINER & SKINNER: EFFECT OF GUANIDIN ON PLANTS Likewise, in adding the requisite amount of potash, the cultures in the line P to N received none, the cultures in the next line re- ceived 2 c.c. each, in the third line 4 c.c. each, and so on up to the culture at K, which received 20 c.c. of the potash solution. The phosphate solution is added in the same manner, none to cultures in line K to N, 2 c.c. to cultures in the second line, and so on up to the culture at P, which received 20 c.c. Each bottle received, therefore, a total of 20 c.c. of one, two, or three of the stock solutions, depending upon whether it was at the apex, along the sides, or in the interior of the triangle. All of the cultures were then diluted up to the 250 c.c. mark. In this investigation, as already mentioned, the culture solu- tion contained 25 parts per million of the guanidin carbonate. The amount of this carbonate to be added to each culture bottle of 250 c.c. was, therefore, 6.25 milligrams. Of the 250 c.c., 20 C.Cc. were already contained in the bottles in the form of the fertilizer salt solution. Therefore the solution with which the fertilizer salt solution in the bottles was to be diluted consisted of 6.25 milligrams of the compound dissolved in 230 c.c. of pure water or 27.17 milligrams per liter. A sufficient quantity of this strength of solution was prepared to fill the 66 bottles. As a means of comparing the cultures grown in these solutions containing the guanidin, it was necessary to put up cultures pre- pared in exactly the same way, except that pure water was used In all of this work physiologically pure water was used. This was prepared by shaking ordinary distilled water with a highly absorptive carbon black, as described in earlier publications,* which removes from the water any injurious property it may possess The culture solutions were now ready to receive the plants, which were thereafter grown in a greenhouse under suitable conditions. In this work it was necessary to have a large several hundred, and sometimes thousands of uni i. e. seedlings of the same age and equal development and genera Vitality. The manner of growing the seedlings and the method of inserting them in the above culture solutions were as follows: number, often form pean jae wig F ive * Livingston, B. E., et al. Further studies on the properties of unproductt soils. U.S. Dept. Agr. Bur. Soils Bull. 36. 1907. SCHREINER & SKINNER: EFFECT OF GUANIDIN ON PLANTS 539 Perforated aluminum disks were floated, by means of a raft prepared from sealed glass tubing, in such a way that the disks were kept just at the surface of the water when loaded with seeds. The wheat seeds, previously soaked in water, for about two hours, not longer, were spread evenly on the surface of the disks. The perforations in the 1.6 mm. thick aluminum were approxi- mately 3.2 mm. in diameter and 2mm. apart. The entire arrange- ment of raft and disks was floated in a porcelain-lined iron tank. The seedlings were used when the plumule was about 2 cm. high and just ready to emerge from the enveloping sheath. In this manner the 1,320 uniform seedlings required for each experiment were readily obtainable. The bottles used in these cultures were made of flint glass and were stoppered by means of a soft flat cork about 12 mm. in thickness and notched for holding the seedlings. The method of notching these corks consisted in cutting 10 vertical, triangular wedges from the circumference of each. Each wedge after being cut out was truncated, so that when it was replaced, a small triangular opening was left through which the plumule of the seed- ling passed. This hole was large enough to hold the seedling firmly and yet not bruise or injure it in any way by pressure. Around the circumference of the cork, in the upper half, a groove had been made sufficiently large to hold a small rubber band. After the wedges were inserted, the band kept them in place and allowed the cork with the seedlings to be handled readily and put into or taken out of the bottle without disturbing the plants. As already mentioned, these solutions were changed every three days. This was done by putting up other triangles of bottles Similar in every respect to the ones just described. The corks With the plants were then transferred from the old solution to the Corresponding new solution. EFFECT OF GUANIDIN ON WHEAT As already mentioned, two sets of the cultures were prepared ; One was used as a control; to the other was added guanidin car- bonate, 25 parts per million to each culture. The wheat seed- lings grew from February 15 to February 27, I9II, the solutions being changed every three days. 540 ScHREINER & SKINNER: EFFECT OF GUANIDIN ON PLANTS For the first few days no difference was noticeable between the control and the guanidin set. About the fifth day bleached spots appeared in the leaves in some of the cultures, producing an effect like a plant disease. The diseased spots on the leaves spread and became larger and more numerous. The spots appeared first on a few cultures, but when the cultures were arranged in the order of their composition the reason for this became evident. The guanidin effect showed itself first in the cultures high in nitrate and then spread to those lower in nitrate, until the series of no nitrate content was reached. In this series the guanidin effect was scarcely discernible. As the plants grew older, the guanidin effect became more and more marked; the bleached spots anidin, series B Fic. 1. Effect of guanidin on wheat plants; series A without gu with guanidin. coalesced and appeared most marked in the lower part of the leaves; the leaves broke finally, presenting on the whole an effect similar to that produced by a wilt disease and accompanied with considerable bleaching of the green parts of the plant. bees at least, was the effect in all of the cultures containing nitrate and was the more marked the higher the nitrate content. The series containing no nitrate whatever retained its green color and was not subject to collapse or wilting, although here and there some bleached spots appeared. SCHREINER & SKINNER: EFFECT OF GUANIDIN ON PLANTs 541 In FIG. I are shown the two sets of cultures. A is the normal or control set and B the guanidin set. The distinctly destructive effect of the guanidin is apparent in the blighted appearance of set B in striking contrast to the fine growth in the control cultures, which is even more marked than the photograph can show because of the deep green color of the normal set contrasted with the bleached appearance of the guanidin set. Fic. 2. Effect of guanidin on wheat plants. Nearer view of series B in FIG. I. In FIG. 2 a nearer and better view is had of this guanidin set. The plants are arranged according to the composition of their culture solutions, thus forming a triangle. By this arrangement the highest nitrate culture appears at N, the highest phosphate culture at P, and the highest potash culture at K. Itis apparent that the poorest plant development occurs in those cultures high in nitrate but is distinctly noticeable in every culture except in the line of cultures from P to K, which is the series containing no nitrate. The plants in this line of cultures are firm and erect, as can be seen in the photograph. In actuality this difference is accentuated by the nearly normal green color of this series, whereas 542 SCHREINER & SKINNER: EFFECT OF GUANIDIN ON PLANTS all other cultures, in addition to the dilapidated condition, had a decidedly bleached appearance. The effect of the nitrate in increasing the harmful effect of guanidin is also shown by the weight of the tops taken at the termination of the experiment. In TABLE I the first column gives TABLE I EFFECT OF GUANIDIN ON GROWTH AS INFLUENCED BY NITRATE areal NH, it te re Green weight of cultures, grams Resign ertilizer mix! ure, ri Contro = 100 parts per million Without guanidin bid Bey paces 4 80 1.656 0.520 31 55-65 42 4.178 T.990 47 45-64 64 6.860 3.412 48 6-63 56 9-449 5.031 53 28-62 48 12.3590 6.874 55 21-61 40 15.908 8.394 5? 15-60 32 18.649 11.491 62 10-59 24 21.601 13.602 62 6-5 16 23.327 15.709 67 Spay: 8 20.923 17.288 83 1-56 o 16.156 15-195 94 the series, the cultures of which have like nitrate content. The amounts of nitrate in each culture of these series are given in the second column. The third and fourth columns give the weight of the tops of the plants grown in the cultures without and with 25 parts per million of guanidin carbonate. It is at once apparent that the guanidin is very harmful to growth. The total green weight of the 66 cultures in the normal set was 151.2 grams against only 99.5 grams in the guanidin set. Placing the normal at 100, the growth in the guanidin set becomes 66. The last column gives the relative growth in each of the series of uniform nitrate content in the set. The culture that contained 80 parts Pe million NH, as nitrate gave a relative weight of only 31 a decrease in growth of 69 per cent, whereas in the series of cultures that contained no nitrate the relative growth was 94, 4 decrease of only 6 per cent below the control. As shown in the table, the relative weight of tops obtained increased with decreasing nitrate content. The effect of guanidin on growth, and especially the har influence of the nitrate, was considered so remarkable, particul mful arly SCHREINER & SKINNER: EFFECT OF GUANIDIN ON PLANTS 543 in the light of the previously observed beneficial effect of nitrate in conjunction with harmful compounds,* that the entire experi- ment was repeated, and it gave absolutely the same results. The plants grew from March 17 to March 29. Again the effect of the guanidin did not appear until about five days had elapsed, and again it showed itself first, and later most marked, in the high nitrate solutions. Again the no nitrate cultures were left practically unharmed. The total green weight for the normal set was 163.9 grams, and in the guanidin set it was 116.3 grams, a relative green weight of 71. The weights of the tops in the different nitrate series are given in TABLE II, the arrangement being TABLE II EFFECT OF GUANIDIN ON GROWTH AS INFLUENCED BY NITRATE NH, as nitrate in Green weight of cultures, grams hela lisurouth. Culture series fertilizer mixture, De os) Comeel == 200 parts per million Without guanidin With guanidin 66 80 2.201 1.003 46 55-05 72 4.040 2.040 50 45-64 64 7.275 4.021 55 36-63 56 10.359 57 28-62 48 13.387 7-544 56 21-61 40 17.394 10.110 58 15-60 32 20.821 13.204 63 10-59 24 22.769 16.952 74 6-58 16 25.614 18.141 q1 Ko 8 24.007 33.112 81 I-56 0 15.969 16.164 100 exactly the same as in TABLE I. The last column, giving the relative green weight of the different nitrate series, again shows the greater harmfulness of the guanidin in the series containing nitrate, which is especially marked in those high in nitrate. In the first experiment the solutions were also analyzed for Phosphate, nitrate, and potash. The results show a marked de- crease in the absorption of the nutrient salts on the part of the guanidin plants, although the roots themselves were not notice- ably affected, as is apparent from the plants visible in FIG. I and 2. The total phosphate, nitrate, and potash removed by the normal plants was diets milligrams, against only 1,088.5 milli- © Gillin, O., and Reed, H. S. The power of sodium nitrate and calcium Carbonate to decrease toxicity in see with plants growing in solution cultures. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 30: 185. 1908.—Schreiner, O., and Skinner, J. J. . Some 3 effects of a harmful organic soil constituent. Bot. Gaz. §0: 161. I9T0. 544 ScHREINER & SKINNER: EFFECT OF GUANIDIN ON PLANTS grams in the guanidin set. The phosphate removed was 427.3 milligrams in the control and 287.0 milligrams in the guanidin set; the potash was 723.7 milligrams for the control and 496.7 milli- grams for the guanidin set; the nitrate was 457.9 milligrams for the control cultures and 304.8 milligrams for the guanidin cultures. Tests of guanidin carbonate in quantities of 50 parts per million were also made in soil cultures. The physiological effect of the guanidin was again apparent in the spotting and bleaching of the leaves and was again most evident in the soils fertilized with nitrate. EFFECT OF GUANIDIN ON OTHER PLANTS The effect of guanidin was further studied by using plants other than wheat. In FIG. 3 is shown its effect on corn growing = le € : > Fic. 3. Harmful effect of guanidin on corn; no. I without guanidin, no. 2 with guanidin. in culture solution no. 41, containing 16 parts per million phos- phate, 32 parts per million nitrate, and 32 parts per million potash. Fic. 4 shows the effect of guanidin on cowpeas, the control and guanidin cultures being in duplicate. Fic. 5 shows its effect of the potato plant. In these tests guanidin was used in concentra SCHREINER & SKINNER: EFFECT OF GUANIDIN ON PLANTS 545 Fic. 4. Harmful effect of guanidin on cowpeas; no. 1 and 2 without guanidin, no. 3 and 4 with guanidin. tions of 25 parts per million. With all these plants the harmful effect on growth is clearly shown and the same general physiolog- ical action was manifested as in the case of wheat. Fic. 5. Harmful effect of guanidin on potatoes; no. 1 without guanidin, no. 2 with guanidin, INFLUENCE OF ORGANIC NITROGENOUS COMPOUNDS In regard to the influence of nitrate in increasing the harmful- hess of guanidin some further studies were made which indicate 546 SCHREINER & SKINNER: EFFECT OF GUANIDIN ON PLANTS that other nitrogenous compounds do not share this property with the nitrate. To solution no. 41, containing 16 parts per million phosphate, 32 parts per million nitrate, and 32 parts per million potash, 25 parts per million of guanidin were added, and wheat seedlings were grown in this solution as well as in a control without guanidin. A similar set of cultures was prepared with and without guanidin, but with this difference that the nitrate was omitted entirely and an equivalent amount of nitrogen in the form of asparagin was added to the culture solution. The plants grew from March 10 to March 23, 1911. The characteristic effects of guanidin were noticed in the culture containing nitrate but did not appear in the culture con- taining asparagin. The appearance of the cultures is shown in y . ient Fic. 6. Effect of guanidin with nitrogen in different forms; no. 1: nn < solution containing sodium nitrate; no. 2, same plus guanidin; no. 3, nutrient — containing asparagin; no. 4, same plus guanidin. FIG. 6, where no. 1 is the control with nitrate and no. 3 the control with asparagin. No. 2 and 4 are the guanidin cultures to be compared with each other and with their respective controls. No. 2 shows the wilting effect of the guanidin as well as the decreased growth. The colors of the various cultures brought out the differ- ence even more strikingly. The green weights given in TABLE il bear out the same point. SCHREINER & SKINNER: EFFECT OF GUANIDIN ON PLANTS 547 TABLE III EFFECT OF GUANIDIN IN CULTURE SOLUTIONS CONTAINING NITROGEN AS NITRATE ND AS ASPARAGIN Culture solution Green weight, grams oc elgg be soil erewcad Se ale uk 428 4 Cr Ee MOI ECON Ce Gs ot Pp eee au eee Sa 4.0 oo. CaHa(POs,)2 maw Os 4 25 parts per million guanidin ©... 65 5 6 0 es 5 ees 2.5 K2SO4 se Rs oo 8 5 Gas ow a ew nae og al Pee a tw ai eee ew ee 3.5 K:S0. “epi sje paragin + 25 parts per million guanidin............... cece eee eeee 3-3 ooo. Creatinin was also tried in this same manner. Creatinin was identified as a soil constituent in this laboratory * and also found to be a constituent in a number of plants.t Its effect on plants has been shown to be beneficial, its action being to replace nitrate in producing plant growth.t The results obtained by using creatinin as the source of nitrogen instead of sodium nitrate in conjunction with the guanidin are given in TABLE IV. TABLE IV EFFECT OF GUANIDIN IN CULTURES CONTAINING NITROGEN AS NITRATE AND AS Culture solution Green weight, grams ree bias ad C8 Viele CUES 2h ee PARES ESE ECs Eee ene RT eS 3-4 CaH«(PO.)2 — + 25 parts per million guanidin .........---0++eseeeee eee eee 2.4 {Gres Dose pa Dre Bini i Sere Nr ea all es aie eee a ae en a 3.0 oes inin + 25 parts per million guanidin.......----++-+++sreereeree 3.0 F< Gicecy, Shorey, E. C. The isolation of creatinin from soils. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 34:99. 1912. t+ Sullivan, M. X. The origin of creatinin in soils. Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc. 33: 2035. 1911. t Skinner, J. J. The beneficial effect of creatinin and creatin on growth. Bot. - 54: 152-163. f. z. 16 Au 1912 548 SCHREINER & SKINNER: EFFECT OF GUANIDIN ON PLANTS * Again the characteristic effect of the guanidin was observed in the cultures containing nitrate, and the depressed growth is shown by the green weight in the table. With creatinin the effect of guanidin was not apparent either in appearance or in the green weight obtained. SUMMARY Guanidin, as carbonate, is shown to be harmful to wheat, corn, cowpeas, and potato plants. It produces an effect similar to a physiological disease. The plant is normal for a few days, then begins to show a spotted appearance on leaf and stem. This effect develops until the plant is bleached to a considerable extent, with final collapse. This harmful effect of guanidin on plants is augmented by the presence of nitrate and increases with the amount of nitrate present. Sources of nitrogen, other than nitrate, did not show this same effect. The organic nitrogenous compound asparagin, as well as the beneficial soil constituent creatinin, appeared in fact to be able to counteract the effect of guanidin itself. U. S, DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE, BUREAU OF SOILS, WASHINGTON, D. C. Polycodium C. B. RoBINSON The statements by which Professor E. L. Greene* suggested the resuscitation of Rafinesque’s name require quotation in full, as they bring up many points open to controversy. “We have in the Eastern and Southern United States two groups of vacciniaceous shrubs either of which is at variance with all genuine Vaccinium in two important points of floral structure. The corollas in both groups are campanulate, while in both Vaccinium and Gaylussacia they are urceolate. The stamens also, in these campanulate-flowered shrubs, are of a structure so peculiar that, on the characters of this organ alone, a genus might reasonably be established, were concomitant characters wanting. Vaccinium and Gaylussacia are now everywhere admitted as distinct, yet, exclusive of the groups here under special notice, there is not the slightest difference of floral structure between the two. But these other shrubs depart widely from the characters of both Vaccinium and Gaylussacia not only in their open-campanu- late corollas, but in respect to their stamens, which organs are doubly marked by extremely long and slender anther-tubes, and two prominent horn-like projections on the back; so that nothing approaching these characters is found in any other genera allied to Vaccinium. “Twice in the early part of the century, botanists of first-class ability proposed the separation of these species from Vaccinium. afinesque in 1818, not distinguishing generic differences between those types represented by V. stamineum and V. arboreum respec- tively—perhaps not even knowing V. arboreum—proposed the V. Stamineum group for a genus under the beautifully appropriate name of Potycopium; and Nuttall in 1843, ignoring Rafinesque’s earlier proposition—just as later pretenders to taxonomic autoc- Tacy suppressed Nuttall’s work—sought to establish a new genus todendron with V. arboreum as typical, and Picrococcus with V. Siamineum for its type : “The characters of the two genera are well indicated by Nuttall, in the transactions of the American Philosophical Society, with the exception of one new and most significant peculiarity of the V. stamineum group which I alone seem to have observed. “od eembitsider:: ee * Pittonia 3: 323. 1898. 549 550 ROBINSON: POLYCODIUM It is this, that in this group the corollas are open in the bud! For from ten days to two weeks before the actual flowering, and even from the time that the buds are green and scarcely larger than a pin-head, the corolla is open and campanulate. This is another character otherwise unknown in the family of plants to which these belong. Certainly in Vacciniwm and Gaylussacia the buds are tightly closed, in an imbricate aestivation, until the corollas are full-grown and the anthers mature.” Now of vacciniaceous plants found within the limits of the United States, the genera that are almost universally recognized are Chiogenes, Gaylussacia, and Vaccinium. Even regarding these there is some controversy. Chiogenes is readily distinguished by the position of the ovary, only slightly inferior in flower, distinctly inferior in fruit, and while American and British authors of recent years have agreed in placing it near Vaccinium, German authors on the other hand believe the closest affinity to be Gaultheria; and it can hardly be denied that its position is somewhat intermediate, There is no doubt as to the identity of Gaylussacia, as it was published as monotypic, its type, G. buxifolia H. B. K., agreeing with many species now known from South America, 1n the possession of evergreen leaves and non-succulent fruit as well as of a 10-celled ovary. The only species described as a Gaylus- sacia from Mexico or Central America does not belong to the genus, all of the species so called in the United States have succulent fruit, and all but one have deciduous leaves. Niedenzu* has placed that one in'the Vitis-Idaea section of Vaccinium, and the other North American species in the Cyanococcus section of Vaccinium, retaining the name Gaylussacia for South American species only. Kuntze,f also, has taken up the name Adnaria Raf.t for Gaylussacia, but the most positive thing that can be said about Robin’s description,§ upon which Rafinesque’s was based, is that it does not agree with that of any species of the family found in America and in particular disagrees with Gaylussacia in the aed character relied on for its differentiation, the number of cells 1m the ovary. 1 * Engl. Bot. Jahrb. 11: 193. 1889. t Rev. Gen. Pl. 382. 1891. Fl. Ludov. 56. 1817. § Voy. Int. Louisiana 3: 422. 1807. ROBINSON: POLYCODIUM 551 Yet, taken on a summary of characters, there is probably no species found in Louisiana that is more likely to have been the basis for Robin’s description than Gaylussacia dumosa (Andr.) A. Gray. All of the remaining species of the family found north of the Mexican border are retained by many authors in Vaccinium. Generic or sectional segregation has been proposed on several characters, taken singly or in combination, the degree of union of the corolla, its aestivation, its shape, the presence or absence of awns on the anthers, the presence or absence of pubescence on the filaments, the presence or absence of false partitions in the ovary, the nature of the inflorescence, and tetramerous as contrasted with pentamerous flowers. In the Thibaudieae, the other subfamily of Vacciniaceae, general agreement has been reached that the primary basis of differentiation should be sought in the stamens. There is much reason to believe that this is equally true with regard to the Vaccinium group, but it would be useless to belittle the fact that the weight of botanical opinion has been otherwise. The most popular segregate has been Oxycoccus, from which Hugeria has further been discriminated. They differ from the remainder of the group and from one another in the degree of division of the corolla. Possibly Polycodium will prove the most acceptable of the others. But on what grounds should it be retained? Professor Greene’s claims for it are excessive, although indefinite, for he does not define ‘genuine Vaccinium.” It has a campanu- late corolla: so have V. arboreum Marsh.,* V. Vitis-Idaea L., V. poasanum Donn. Sm., V. confertum H. B. K., and others, differing from one another in various characters, and none except the first closely allied to Polycodium. The 10 stamens of Polycodium have pubescent filaments and 2-awned anthers: except in number they differ from the great majority of species of the eastern and southern United States, which have pubescent filaments but awnless anthers (section Cyanococcus), from most of those of the western States, which have 2-awned anthers but glabrous filaments (section Euvaccinium), but agree with many tropical American species, * No opinion is necessarily expressed in giving the name of this or any other Species as Vaccinium. 552 ROBINSON: POLYCODIUM such as V. leucanthum Schlecht., V. stenophyllum Steud., and V. cubense Griseb., none at all closely allied to Polycodium. This is not all, for in the United States no single character is as certain to ensure the instant identification of Polycodium as the long- exserted anthers; moreover, the tubes forming the prolongation of the anther cells are unusually long, both absolutely and rela- tively to the anther cells. But there is a Mexican species, Vaccin- ium Kunthianum Klotzsch, so closely related to Polycodium stamineum that neither Kunth nor Dunal* thought it worthy of specific rank. Its stamens were described as half-exserted, and figured as well exserted, but in no collection that I have seen, so identified by others or by myself, can they be considered as more than barely exserted, the anthers are shorter than in the other species, and the anther tubes only about one and a half times the length of the anther cells. In all other respects it is a perfectly good Polycodium, and if the genus is to be maintained, must be transferred to it, forming a section by itself, on the basis of the characters just stated. Finally, the anther awns are often revolute, but too much emphasis should not be placed on this, as it is not always constant within a single flower; at least, however, they are divaricate, but so they are in species which no one has suggested separating from Vaccinium, such as V. caespitosum Michx. The flowers of Polycodium are articulated with the pedicel; this is also true of certain species placed in Vaccinium by most authors, notably of the Disterigma species. That group, which does not come north of Mexico, was until recently treated by all authors as a section of Vaccinium, but Niedenzut and Héroldt so far separate it from that genus that they place +t in the Thibaud- ieae. On the basis of floral characters there seems to be no reason for so wide separation; indeed, unless Vaccinium is to be radically divided, I at least believe that there is as much reason for placing V. Myrtillus L. and its American allies in a different genus from V. corymbosum L. and its allies, as there is for so segre gating Disterigma from the latter. Drude§ has placed considerable 1839- * H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 267. pl. 253. 1819; DC. Prodr. 7: 568. + Engl. Bot. Jahrb. 11: 209. 1889. } Engl. Bot. Jahrb. 42: 282. 1909. § Engler & Prantl, Die Nat. Pflanzenfam. 4!: 32. 1889. ROBINSON: POLYCODIUM §53. emphasis on articulated pedicels as a means of distinguishing the Thibaudieae from the Vaccinieae but, unfortunately, has gone far beyond the facts. One character remains to which Professor Greene has called particular attention, the open aestivation of the corolla. All evidence that has been obtained confirms his statement on this point for every species of Polycodium, including V. Kunthianum. This does seem of such importance that the genus may properly be maintained; the other characters previously mentioned may be treated as collateral, by one who is dealing with the species of America north of Mexico, but it must be remembered that not one of them can be relied on to distinguish Polycodium from all other genera, even within the limits of North America. Rafinesque* published Polycodium thus: ‘‘67. The species of Vaccinium with campanulated corollas, must form a peculiar genus or subgenus, Polycodium. In fact the whole tribe of Ericacea or Bicornia must be newly modelled.’ And this is all, with one very important exception. The paragraph occurs in a review of Pursh’s Flora Americae Septentrionalis and may fairly be interpreted by reference to that work. Pursh divided Vac- ciniumt primarily into species with deciduous leaves and those with evergreen leaves, dividing each of these in turn on the basis of campanulate as contrasted with urceolate corollas. His species with deciduous leaves and campanulate corollas were V. stami- neum, V. album, V. arboreum, V. dumosum, V. frondosum, and V. pallidum; those with persistent leaves and campanulate corollas were V. Vitis-Idaea, V. myrtifolium, and V. crassifolium. Vac- cinium stamineum thus comes first, and V. album Pursh is regarded by most authors as the same species. Polycodium, therefore, may be held to be typified by Vaccinium stamineum L., but Rafinesque’s genus in its entirety was a mixture of widely differing elements, including representatives not only of Batodendron but of Gay- lussacia and of different sections still included in Vaccinium by nearly all authors. Picrococcus of Nuttall is based almost entirely on Vaccinium * Am. Monthly Mag. 2: 266. 1818. T Fl. Am. Sept. 1: 284-290. 1814. 554 ROBINSON: POLYCODIUM addition of a second species, Picrococcus floridanus, certainly congeneric with the former, of which more hereafter. Professor Greene is unduly critical of Nuttall for overlooking or disregarding such a publication as Rafinesque’s of Polycodium for the genus containing Vaccinium stamineum, and Nuttall was not the first offender. In 1836 Rafinesque himself has the fol- lowing:* ‘‘ADNARIA Raf. fl. lud. probably a subgenus of the Codorolla or Vacciniums with bell flowers, which see.” But Codorolla does not appear again, and Rafinesque did not consider this reference worth indexing. It is apparent that the adoption of Polycodium as a generic name, to be typified by Vaccinium stamineum L.., is barely justified. Before leaving the subject of generic subdivision in the Vac- cinium alliance it is desired to amplify a statement above made with regard to the importance of characters derived from the stamens. The anthers may be 2-awned or awnless. Ina solitary specimen, Wright 2202, referred to Vaccinium Ramonii Griseb., some anthers were found with a single central awn. Further examination showed that this was not a constant character, even within a single flower; but none of the anthers were awnless. The value of anther awns as a diagnostic character obviously depends upon the degree of their constancy, and final judgment will be influenced, consciously or unconsciously, by the nature of the grouping thus achieved. Examination of the flowers of every species but one, within the limits of North America, as well as of some extra- limital material, gives this result. There are 3, or more likely only 2, species, V. meridionale Sw., of Jamaica, V. consanguimeum Klotzsch, of Panama and Costa Rica, and V. multiflorum Benth., of Colombia, in which this character has to be handled with extreme caution. All of these are very closely allied; indeed, 1t § doubtful if the first two can be held distinct. In all of these the awns are very delicate and often closely appressed, to such an extent that they might escape detection, unless considerable care be taken in their search. Further, in V. meridionale they are often so reduced that they are practically wanting, yet otner H rt stamens in the same flower may possess them, slender and shor Re AONE SO ES found * New FI. 1:65. 1836. ‘ ROBINSON: POLYCODIUM 555 indeed, but certainly present. Moreover, V. multiflorum was described as having anthers alternately awned and awnless, yet a recent collection from near its type locality, Pittier 1182, agreeing otherwise with Bentham’s description, has all the anthers of such flowers as were examined 2-awned, with awns as described and found for this and for V. consanguineum. The plate* of V. meridionale is wrong in this respect. Yet, all these can be described as awned anthers, and on other grounds the alliance of the species is with those possessing awned anthers. Much search has failed to disclose a single other excep- tion, not only within the limits of a species but within the limits of what appear to be groups of related species. It may be added that the presence of pubescence, in whatever degree, on the filaments or the connectives—and when it occurs it is usually on both—is equally conclusive but of secondary impor- tance. Thus, if a vacciniaceous plant be found in America north of Mexico with awnless anthers and glabrous filaments, no further information is needed for its determination as Gaylussacia frondosa (L.) T. & G., except by those who consider G. nana (A. Gray) Small and G. tomentosa (Pursh) Chapm. to be specifically distinct from that species. Each of the other three combinations of these two characters will describe large groups of species. On the other hand, investigation of the relative length and degree of divergence of the awns and of the relative amount of pubescence on the filaments seems to indicate that these do not afford reliable characters except possibly in rare cases. Up to the present the following have been ascribed to Polyco- dium as distinct species: P. caesium Greene, P. candicans (C. Mohr) Small, P. elevatum (Banks) Greene, P. floridanum (Nutt.) Greene, P. Langloisii Greene, P. melanocarpum (C. Mohr) Small, P. neglectum Small, P. oblongum Greene, P. oliganthum Greene, P. revolutum Greene, and P. stamineum (L.) Greene; it has already been stated that another species awaits transfer, Vaccinium Kunthianum Klotzsch. The last having been separated on the basis of its shorter anthers, not or barely exserted, the character depended on as of next importance is the relation between leaves or bracts and the inflorescence. ch csceninenemsl * Sw. Ic. Ind. Occ. pl. 12. 1794. 556 ROBINSON: POLYCODIUM In the Vaccinium group as a whole there is a transition in this respect, and Polycodium is merely one case of many. In certain species, such as V. caespitosum Michx., V. scoparium Rydb., and V. Myrtillus L., the flowers are few in number on a branch borne in the axils of what are apparently quite normal leaves as to size, shape, and texture. In others the inflorescence is quite clearly racemose, or by contraction fasciculate, the pedicels subtended by bracteoles quite different in appearance from the vegetative leaves. This includes nearly all the species of the eastern United States. There is yet a third group, which almost perfectly links the two, the inflorescence being perhaps best described as a leafy raceme. These are mostly tropical plants. Incidentally, these three groups follow rather closely the lines indicated by the stamens. In the case of Polycodium there is a group ‘‘in which,” to use Nuttall’s expression* when describing Picrococcus floridanus, ‘the flowers appear truly axillar.”” Here also belong the names Polyco- dium caesium Greene, P. oliganthum Greene, and P. revoluium Greene. Nuttall’s type seems to have perished, which will cause trouble to those who believe this group to contain more than one species, for he has no sufficient description for more definite deter- mination. In the case of the other species duplicates of the type collections have been examined, and there seems no sufficient reason for holding them distinct. In separating P. revolutum from P. caesium Professor Greenef relies chiefly on the leaves of the former being more pubescent, more oval and obtuse, their margins revolute, the calyx lobes deeper, acute or acuminate instead of scarcely acute, and deeper corolla lobes. It is not possible to separate the series of specimens on these characters or any of them, not even those drawn from the leaves being especially unreliable, holding for the collections on which the species were based. There seems even less reason for segregating P. oliganthum. ‘ Now, the same thing happens in Polycodium as 1n se a cinium group in general; the leaves, in the axils of whic a . . . b e flowers are borne, are often reduced in size but still retain the ot : . . 2 characters of the typical leaves of the plant; yet again, they may * Trans. Am. Philos. Soc. Il. 8: 262. 1843. t Pittonia 3: 249, 250. 1897. ROBINSON: POLYCODIUM 557 be very greatly reduced although sometimes differing considerably within the same inflorescence. P. oliganthum approaches the former condition but seems to have been referred correctly to the P. floridanum group. The linking material affords some justifica- tion for the view that specific lines should not be drawn on this character, but the corolla in the group thus separated is always smaller, one half to one third of the length of that of the remaining species, and it seems preferable to consider it as distinct and as forming a single species only. Its range is from South Carolina to Florida, all of the types of the species proposed having come from the latter state. If this view be accepted, there seems no reason why its name should not be Polycodium floridanum (Nutt.) Greene. From the remainder it is exceedingly easy to separate Poly- codium neglectum Small by means of its glabrous branchlets and leaves. These characters hold definitely for large series of collec- tions, but there seem no others correlated with them, and the plants often grow side by side with those of P. stamineum. It is, therefore, a matter of opinion as to whether the two should be held distinct. | Polycodium melanocarpum was described by Mohr* as Vac- cinium stamineum melanocarpum without a definite type specified. It was raised to specific rank by Kearney,} who expressly stated that his own collections were not typical. Mohr, subsequently discussing it as a species, gives as the type locality “Mountain region of Alabama. More specifically, St. Clair County, near Ashville, July 1880.” The ground for separation was the succulent nature of the fruit and its color. Mohr also proposed two varieties, V. melanocarpum candicans and V. melanocarpum sericeum. In Small’s Flora§ the former variety becomes P. candicans (C. Mohr) Small, and Polycodium melanocarpum includes both the species and its variety sericeum; ‘“‘hypanthium usually more or less pubescent.”’ The seventh edition of Gray’s Manual goes further: “calyx white-tomentose.” Study of material in the herbarium of Sanaeeieeersen nade ORIN NE ERE * Bull. Torrey Club 24: 25. 1897. t Bull. Torrey Club 24: 570. 1897- } Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 6: 658. 1901. § Fl. SE. U.S. 894. 1903. 558 ROBINSON: POLYCODIUM the New York Botanical Garden led to the conviction that Vac- cinium melanocarpum of Gray’s Manual is a good species, but that it is not identical with Mohr’s species but with his variety sericeum only. On all sheets in the New York herbarium the character of pubescence on the hypanthium, always more or less definitely present on fruit as well, was accompanied by another character. The calyx lobes were accrescent in late flower or early fruit. This was easily evident to the eye, but on measuring, the balance of difference proved slight, the fruiting calyx being 1.5-2 mm. long in P. stamineum and 2.5-3 mm. long in the collections referable to sericeum. There was a single plant in which a glabrous hypanthium was accompanied by an accrescent calyx. This plant, on fine division, would be referred to P. candicans Small. Examination of material from the United States National Herbarium shows that the same is true of the collections there. But the specimen that Mohr seems to have considered as the type of his species has a glabrous hypanthium, and the calyx is not accrescent. So far, then, as Polycodium melanocarpum (C. Mohr) Small is concerned, there is room for difference of opinion; if the character of succulent fruit is considered sufficient, it may be maintained as a species, but no other sufficient reason has been found for holding it specifically distinct from P. stamineum. But the evidence is otherwise as regards V. melanocarpum sericeum. Typical forms of P. candicans (C. Mohr) Small differ notably from more typical P. stamineum in glaucescence, but the extremes are united by many intermediates, and no sharp line for separation has been found. Moreover, there is much reason for believing that this is a revival of P. elevatum Greene, the Vaccinium album of Pursh, although not the Linnaean species of the latter name, which does not belong to the family. Two species have not been discussed, P. oblongum G P. Langloisii Greene, of neither of which I have seen the types: Its author places the former in the P. floridanum group, but from the description and study of material which seems to match I am inclined to refer it to P. stamineum, to which also P. Langlois seems too closely related. The following new combinations give effect to © already stated. reene and nclusions ROBINSON: PoLycopium 559 Polycodium Kunthianum (Klotzsch) comb. nov. Vaccinium stamineum B H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 267. 1819. Vaccinium elevatum 8 Dunal, in DC. Prodr. 7: 568. 1839. Picrococcus elevatus 8 Nutt. Trans. Am. Philos. Soc. II. 8: 262. 1843. Vaccinium Kunthianum Klotzsch, Linnaea 24: 56. 1851. Polycodium sericeum (C. Mohr) comb. nov. Vaccinium melanocarpum sericeum C. Mohr, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 6: 658. 1901. Vaccinium melanocarpum Robinson & Fernald, in Gray, Man. ed. 7- 639. 1908. Not V. melanocarpum C. Mohr, 1897. NEw York BOTANICAL GARDEN. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE (1912) The aim of this ae is to include all current botanical literature written by Americans, published in America, or based upon American material ; the word Amer- ica being used in the esas | Reviews, and papers that “yas oe to forestry, agriculture, horticulture, manufactured products of vegetable origin, or laboratory methods are not included, and no attempt is. made to index the thesis ot ray tie An occasional exception is made in favor of some paper appearing in an American periodical which is devoted wholly to botany. Reprints are nn wGuckea unless they differ from the original in some important particular. If users of the Index oe call the attention of the editor to errors or omissions, their kindness will be apprec This Index is reprinted monthly on cards, and rarenanea in this form to subscribers at the rate of one cent for each card, lections of cards are not permitted ; each subscriber must take all cards published during 8 term of his subscription. Corre- spondence relating to the card issue should be addressed to the Treasurer of the Torrey _ Botanical Club, Alden, I. A contribution to the life history of Uvularia sessilifolia. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 439-446. pl. 34, 35. 9S 1912. Arber, E. A. N. On Psygmophyllum majus sp. nov., from the Lower Carboniferous rocks of Newfoundland, together with a revision of the genus and remarks on its affinities. Trans. Linn. Soc. Bot. II. 7: 391-407. pl. 42-44 +f. 2. Jl 1912. Banker, H. J. Type studiesin the Hydnaceae—I. The genus Manina. Mycologia 4: 271-278. 28 Au 1912. hree new combinations are made Barnhart, J. H. Jacquin’s Selectarum stirpium historia iconibus pictis. Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 13: 99, 100. Jl 1912. Batchelder, C.F. Two grasses new to New Hampshire. Rhodora 14: > 175. 23 Au ro12. Berger, A. Agave marmorata. Curt. Bot. Mag. IV. 8: pl. 8442. Jl 1912, From Mexico. Berry, E. W. Contributions to the Mesozoic flora of the Atlantic coastal plain—VIII. Texas. Bull. Torrey Club 39: shh pl. 30-32. 16 Au 19f2. Berry, E.W. Pleistocene plants from the Blue Ridge in Virginia. Am. Jour. Sci. IV. 34: 218-223. f. 1-5. Au 1912. 562 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Britton, E. G. Wild plants needing protection. 2. “Spring Beauty” (Claytonia virginica L.). Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 13: 91, 92. pl. 95. Jl 1912; 3. “Wild pink’ (Silene caroliniana Walt.). Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 13: 109, 110. pl. 97. Au 1912. Broadhurst, J. The genus Struthiopteris and its representatives in North America—II. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 357-385. pl. 26-29. 16 Au 1912. Includes a key to the petioled species, descriptions and illustrations of Struthi- opteris chiriquana, S. Shaferi, and S. vivipara spp. nov., and several new combinations. Brown, P. E., & Smith, R. E. Bacterial activities in frozen soils. Centralb. Bakt. Zweite Abt. 34: 369-385. 20 Jl 1912. Brown, N. E. Cotyledon subrigida. Curt. Bot. Mag. IV. 8: pl. 8445. Jl 1912. From Mexico. Chamberlain, C. J. Eduard Strasburger. Bot. Gaz. 54: 68-72. 10 Jl 1912. [Illust.] Chivers, A. H. Preliminary diagnoses of new species of Chaeto mum. Proc. Am. Acad. Sci. 48: 83-88. Jl 1912. Nine new species are described. Cockerell, T. D. A. Animals and plants described as new from Colorado in 1911. Univ. Colorado Stud. 9: 75-89. My 1912. A bibliography. Copeland, E. B. New or interesting Philippine ferns, VI. Philip. Jour. Sci. 7: (Bot.) 53-57. pl. 3-5. Je 1912. Copeland, E. B. New Papuan ferns. Philip. Jour. Sci. 7: (Bot.) 67, 68. Je 1912. Copeland, E. B. New Sarawak ferns. Philip. Jour. Sci. 7: (Bot.) 59- 65. Je 1912. Copeland, E. B. The origin and relationships of Taenitis. Philip. Jour. Sci. 7: (Bot.) 47-51. pl. 2. Je 1912. Cook, O.F. ‘‘Genes’’ not madein Germany. Science II. 36: 115; 26 Ji 1912. Cook, O. F. Physical analogies of biological processes. 493-498. Au 1912. Cook, O. F. Results of cotton experiments in I9II. Plant Ind. Circ. 96: 3-21. 17 Jl 1912. a Corne, F. E. Another station in central Vermont for Dryopterts Filix- mas and for the new hybrid Filix-mas X marginalis. Am. ree Jour. 2: 93-95. 3 Au 1912. Crabill, C. H. Results of pure culture studies on Phyllosticta Sacec. Science II. 36: 155-157. 2 Au 1912. 116. Am, Nat. 46: U. S. Dept. Agt: pirina INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 563 Darling, C. A. The determination of woods. Torreya 12: 201-208, 3S 1912. Darling, C. A. Mitosis in living cells. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 407-409. 16 Au 1912. Davidson, A. A new Frasera. Bull. S. Calif. Acad. Sci. 11: 77. pl. 1. Jl 1912. Frasera puberulenta. Davis, W. E., & Rose, R.C. The effect of external conditions upon the after-ripening of the seeds of Crataegus mollis. Bot. Gaz. 54: 49-62. 15 Jl 1912. Elder, M. E. Roadside plants of a high mountain park in Colorado, Torreya 12: 175-180. 9 Au 1912. Fernald, M.L. Galium brevipes in Minnesota. Rhodora 14: 175, 176. 23 Au 1912. Gee, W. P., & Massey, A.B. Aspergillus infecting Malacosoma at high temperatures. Mycologia 4: 279-281. f. 7. 28 Au 1912. Giissow, H. T. The nature of parasitic fungi. Their influence upon the host plant. Gard. Chron. 51: 183. 23 Mr 1912. Harris, J. A. Chloranthy and vivipary in the staminate inflorescence of Euchlaena mexicana. Torreya 12: 181-183. f. 2. 9 Au 1912. Harris, J. A. The formation of condensed correlation tables when the number of combinations islarge. Am. Nat. 46: 477-486. Au 1912. - Hastings, E.G. A method for the preservation of plate cultures for museum and demonstration purposes. Centralb. Bakt. Zweite Abt. 34: 432-434. pl. 1-3. 20 Jl 1912. [Illust.] auman-Merck, L. Observations d’éthologie florale sur quelques espéces argentines et chiliennes. Rec. Inst. Bot. Léo Errera 9g: 1-20. ~ 3. 1912. Hauman-Merck, L. Observations éthologiques et systématiques sur deux espéces argentines du genre Elodea. Rec. Inst. Bot. Léo Errera 9: 33-39. 1912. Hauman-Merck,L. Observations sur la pollination d’une Malpighiacée du genre Stigmaphyllon. Rec. Inst. Bot. Léo Errera 9: 21-27. f. 4. 1912. Hauman-Merck, L. Sur un cas de géotropisme hydrocarpique chez Pontederia rotundifolia L. Rec. Inst. Bot. Léo Errera 9: 28-32. 7.5. 10%, Hehre, H. An horticultural marvel—flowers directly from the seed. Bull. S. Calif. Acad. Sci. 11: 79. pl. 2. Jl 1912. Heller, A. A. The North American lupines—VI. Muhlenbergia 8: 61-71. pl. 6 +f. 7, 8. 23 Ji 1912. Includes Lupinus lignipes and L. confusus spp. Nov. 564 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Hoffman, C. A contribution to the subject of soil bacteriological analytical methods. Centralb. Bakt. Zweite Abt. 34: 385-388. 20 Jl 1912. Hunt, B. W. Fig breeding. Bull. Univ. Georgia 12: 107-110. Jl 1912. Jennings, H. S. Production of pure homozygotic organisms from heterozygotes by self-fertilization. Am. Nat. 46: 487-491. Au 1912. Jones, W. R. The development of the vascular structure of Dianthera americana. Bot. Gaz. 54: 1-30. pl. 1-4. 15 Jl 1912. King, W. L. The flora of Northampton County, Pennsylvania. Torreya 12: 97-107. f. 1. 10 My 1912; 124-132. 11 Je 1912; 165- 173. 11 Jl 1912; 183-189. 9 Au 1912; 208-215. 35 1912 Knowlton, C. H. New stations for Paspalum snentsiopiade Rho- dora 14: 174, 175. 23 Au 1912. Lager, J. E. Orchids. Gard. Chron. Am. 15: 41-45. Je 1912; 15: 85-88. Jl 1912. Lamb, W. H. The catalpa septum. A factor in distinguishing hardy catalpa. Proc. Soc. Am. Foresters 7: 80, 81. f. 1, 2. Mr 1912. [Lloyd, C. G.] Index of the mycological writings of C. G. Lloyd, vol. III. 1909-1912. 1-16. . Cincinnati. 1912. Long, W. H. Two new — of rusts. Mycologia 4: 282-284. 28 Au 1912. Tricella acuminata gen. et sp. nov. and Peridermium incons picuum sp. NOV. Lovell, J. H. Bees which visit only one species of flower. Pop. Sci. Mo. 81: 197-203. Au 1912. Lunt, J. R. Succisa pratensis in Massachusetts. Rhodora 14: 174 23 Au 1912. Lutz, A.M. Triploid mutants in Oenothera. Biol. Centralb. 32: 385- 435. f. 1-7. 20 Jl 1912. Mann, A. The preparation of unbroken pollen mother-cells and other cells for studies in mitosis. Science II. 36: 153-155. 2 Au 1912+ Merrill, E. D. Sertulum bontocense. New or interesting plants collected in Bontoc subprovince, Luzon, by Father Morice Vanovet- bergh. Philip. Jour. Sci. 7: (Bot.) 71-107. Je 19 ‘ Murrill, W. A. The Agaricaceae of the Pacific saoculh Mycologi4 4: 231-262. 28 Au 1912. i scribed in Lepiota (15), Venenarius (3), Crepidotus (1), Plus teolus (2), Gymnopilus (14), Pholiota (4), and Hypodendrum (t). Nash, G. V. Winter-killing of evergreens. Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 13+ 110-120, Au 1912. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 565 Olsson-Seffer, P. Castilla en zijn cultur. Dept. Landb. Suriname Bull. 27: 7-57. Ap 1912. Translated from the English manuscript by J. Kuijper. Phillips, F. J. Emory oak in southern Arizona. U. S. Forest Serv. Cire. 201: 1-15. pl. 1-5. 27 Jl 1912. Piper, C. V. On the identity of Dolichos unguiculatus Linnaeus. Torreya 12: 189, 190. 9 Au 1912. Quehl, L. Echinocactus violaciflorus Quehl spec. nov. Monats. Kak- teenk. 22: 102-105. 15 Jl 1912. [Illust. Ramaley, F., & Elder, M.E. The grass-flora of Tolland, Colorado, and vicinity. Univ. Colorado Stud. 9: 121-141. f. 7, 2. My 1912. Reed, C. A. The pecan. U.S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 251: 7-58. §. t=25.- 12 Jl 1912. 4° ‘ Ey + Ge ne +7 Se nk sth Hicoria Pecan. I f h ld b hab g flowering habit, occurrences of fungous diseases, e Robbins, W. W. Algae in some Colas: oils: Colorado Agr. Coll. Exp. Sta. Bull. 184: 24-36. pl. 1-4. Je 1912. Robbins, W. W. Preliminary list of the algae of Colorado. Univ. Colorado Stud. 9: 105-118. My 1912. Roig y Mesa, J. T. Cactdceas de la flora Cubana. Rev. Facult. Let. Ci. Univ. Habana 14: 301-350. My 1912. [Illust.] Rolfe, R. A. Evolution of the Orchidaceae. Orchid Rev. 20: 204-207. (Continued from vol. 19, p. 192.) Jl 1912. Schreiner, O., & Skinner, J. J. The toxic action of organic compounds as modified by fertilizer salts. Bot. Gaz. 54: 31-48. f. 1-5. 15 Jl 1912. Seaver, F. J., & Clark, E. D. Biochemical studies on soils subjected to dry heat. Biochem. Bull. 1: 413-427. pl. 7. Mr 1912. Also includes information on the growth of fungi as affected by heat. Shafer, J. A. Botanical exploration in Oriente, Cuba. Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 13: 92-99. Jl 1912. Sill, W.H. Grape culture in Pennsylvania. Dept. Agr. Pennsylvania Bull. 217: 9-66. f. 1-52. 1912. Includes a chapter on fungus diseases of grapes. Skinner, J. J., & Beattie, J. H. Effect of asparagin on absorption and growthin wheat. Bull. Torrey Club 39: 429-437. dl. 33. 9S 1912, Thompson, W.P. The structure of the stomata of certain Cretaceous conifers. Bot. Gaz. 54: 63-67. pl. 5, 6. 15 Jl 1912. ; , O.I. Viable Bermuda grass seed produced in the locality of Raleigh, N. C. Jour. Elisha Mitchell Sci. Soc. 28: 95. Au 1912. ailes, G. H. Some desmids from alpine stations in Colorado. Univ. Colorado Stud. 9: 119, 120. My 1912. 566 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Waldron, L.R. Hardiness in successive alfalfa generations. Am. Nat. 46: 463-469. f. 1, 2. Au 1912. Weberbauer, A. Pflanzengeographische Studien in siidlichen Peru. Bot. Jahrb. Beibl. 48: 27-46. 27 Au 1912. Weingart, W. Cereus Vaupelit spec. nov. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 106-109. 15 Jl 1912; 127. 15 Au 1912. Weingart, W. Kakteengelande am Rancho San Agustin in Guatemala. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 118. 15 Au 1912. [Illust.] Weingart, W. Zu Cereus trigonus var. costaricensis Weber. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 121. 15 Au 1912. Wernham, H. F. New Rubiaceae from tropical America—I. Jour. Bot. 50: 241-244. pl. 520, 521. Au 1912. Describes Carmenocania and Pseudohamelia gen. nov., and Pseudohamelia hirsuta, Carmenocania porphyrantha, Malanea roraimensis, Ixora Funckii, I. nica- raguensis, Galium Trianae, G. larecajense, and G. Fraserii spp. no Wester, P. J. A contribution to the history and mE nomencla- ture of the cultivated Anonas. Philip. Jour. Sci. '7: (Bot.) 109-123 pl. 6-11. Je 1912. Whetzel, H.H. A destructive disease of eons: Florists’ Exchange 34: ate 566. f. 1-4. 1451 Disc $s the economic pertanc, nee and control of “the American Botrytis eh of the peony Wilcox, E. V., & Kelley, W.P. The effect of manganese on pineapple plants and the ripening of the pineapple fruit. Hawaii Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 28: 7-20. pl. 1, 2. 10S 1912. Wolf, F. A., & Lloyd, F. E. Oedema on manihot. Phytopathology 2: 131-134. pl. rr +f.7. Au 1912. Zahlbruckner, A. Neue Flechten—VI. Ann. Myc. 10: 359-394: Au 1912. i Derm ence sa geenean Mycoporellum californicum, Opegrapha Hasset, bas nut Hassei spp. nov. from California; Lecanora confluescens sp. Nov. from Uraguay; Caloplaca hiss sp. nov. from Montevideo. BuL_. ToRREY CLuB VOLUME tt Ruclh eva ty He Lave Flora HOVE Leer ns 5 ofa Wes Memo ty rem P E f , hey fre GVAl® . caniy 4 pete, 30, PLATE : w ~I LAMARCK’S PLANT, TYPE OF OENOTHERA LAMARCKIANA SERING E BuLi. TORREY CLUB VOLUME 30, PLATE 38 OENOTHERA FROM THE COLLECTION OF ABBE POURRET BuLL. TORREY CLUB VOLUME 39, PLATE 39 SPECIMENS REFERRED BY DE VRIES TO OENOTHERA GRANDIFLORA MEMOIRS OF THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB A series of technical papers on botanical subjects, published at irregular intervals. Price $3.00 a volume. ot offered in exchange . 1, No. 1; not furnished sepuratedy : Bailey, Liberty aie aoe of the types of various species of thé genus Carex. 889. Pages 1-85. ae 1. 1, No. 2;. not furnished pe ely : i artindale, Isaac ese ly. Marine = of the ores Siew coast and adjacent waters of Staten Island. oy 87-111. 24 Au No. 3; price, 75 cents ao Spruce, Richard. efaticae phate nae, in Andibus ‘Boliviae orientalis, annis 1885-6, a cl. H. H. Rusby lectae. , Pages 1 say 20 Ja 1890. ol. 1, No. 4; price, 75 cents: at ess _# Sturtevant, Edward Lewis. On seedless fruits. tee 141-187. 30 My 18g0, | Mg ore 2, No. 1; not furnished separately : alsted, Byron David. Reserve food-materials in buds and surrounding. care Pages 1-26, oie I, 2. 10S 1890. = 1. 2, No, 2; price, 75 cents a Vail, Anna Murray, & Hollic ic, Charles oe Coniniinations to the botany. of Virginia, Stages 27-56, plates 7, g. . 23 D : : : Vol. 2, No. 3; not eee deferens a _ Holm, Herman Theodor. Contributions to the k wider’ of the foretell ot os _ some North American plants. Pages 57-108, ie 5-19-15 Ap 1891. : : Vol. 2, No. =; price, 75 cents "Wheel ock, William Bfner. The genus Polygala in North America. = 109- 152. 30D 18or. Vol. 3, No 1; not furnished separately oem John Kunkel, & Heller, Amos: “Arthur. Flora of western North Carolina ie nd contiguous territory. Pages oa 20 F nae. Bee & ol 3, No. 2; price, $ ee orong, Thomas. — Naiadaceae of onus heii 2 (ith illustrations of all the pial: Pages shes poroee 1893. ag Roe 3, No. 3; not furnished separately : i Rusby, H ‘An enumeration ret res A arate cyrert in | Bolivia by Mogae! = orb: Te " Pages 1 -67. 28 Ap 1893. 5S : Vol. 4, No. 1; not oe separat tely : : ee Underwood, Lucien Marcus. dadex He, tee Part L, iia. Pages 2 ce I-91. _ 10 Je 1893. Le eo __ Vol. 4, No. 2; not furnished separate tly Small, J John Kunkel, & Vail, Anna Murray. Report on explora. — tion of southwestern Virginia during the season of a8 Pages 95-29, a _ 15-82. 18 N 1893-17 Ap 1894. . oe Vol. 4, * He. 3; price; go cents “es : a by, Henry Hurd. An carenepatics eae the rer collected in Bolivia it Mi = tang. Fat 2. Baa 203-274. 10 Mr-17, ies | : Vol. 4, No. 4; price, 50 ce | de Stockton.’ ha tamced nies: Ba "Pages 59h 2 Bite A ~8. se ie Be r Tanne 5: price, “75 cents: oe . 8, Per Axel. The North American Ss es of Pa and ‘elated — ; ee 297-374 15 1 1896. ay eee a Sev 3 price, $3.00 te det OF eee and Spermapata. growing witht cultivation in- ‘nor _ North America. Pages D 1893-31 “Vol é on a price ae = _ Rusby, Henry H n enumeration of the plants collected in Bolivia. by Migu _ Bang. Part 3. sgh as I-130. 17 .N 1896. Be 2; not furnished separ eles. Vol. 6, No. ately : Grout, Abel Joel. A revision of the North Aacon tsothectaceae and Brachythea pane Pa wage mo 30 Jl 1897. oe es 6, No. = ae ice, 50 ¢ : Sian. is cy Elliot life histo t aie enuien ( Haematococcus inh ome 211- ae plates 86, Seas Steetbol oie 1899. Vol. 4; price, 50 cents hie 6, No. _ Underwood, Lucien Marcus. A review of “ee genera of ferns proposed prior acs 1832. Pages 247-283. 1 D 1899. ol. 6, No. 5; price, 25 cents : Fink, Bruce. otes on lichen distribution in the upper Mississippi v: _ Pages = tens 1 D 1899. Howe, Marshall Avery. T ya208 , plates Tee tb 5 Au 1899. Fed : Vol. 8, No. 1; not furnished separately : syd, Francis Ern The ogra embryology of the Rubiaceae. ch ghee fe -4. 26 Au 1899. Part LE Pages 27-112, plates 15 F 190 Vol. 8, No. 2; price, $1.0 ; i Evans, Alexander William. The Z cjeuneae of he’ ‘United States ‘aa — seers It 3-183, plates ote 15 F 1902. é 8, No. te sang és cents : dtton, Bllzabeth Gertrude, _ The life “history “Vie Pages 185-211, plates 2 oe ye 3° Au 1902. Es : tps 9; price, $3.00 , Ernest Stanley. onograph of the Bipsiphiitue: Pages 9 ss O ante ne jee "sold except in ee sets of the Memoirs ol. 10; price, $3.00 Bete a, Edward Sandford. History of Pre-Clusian botany in its relation to i-xii,. FAA: gos pe wake a | ee a price, $1.75: ae ee The Nowh American Sendabiaeat: Pages 1-19 FE es I ; ft Se : Vol. 11, No. 2; price, $1.7 ae , ‘Tracy Elio ‘othricaceae ‘and Chaetphoraceae of the United: 5 eye I 35-25% Bates 20-42. 200 et : ; price, $1.50: A gr 12, No. a of See he vidence and Andros Pedacere ( mee oe : : - Vol. 12, No. 3; ee 75 cents : . 3 Elsie, ‘Studies. in plant regenerati pte 195-240. : eo Oh 13; price, mers Specie a “variations © of Biotian ch ; fe 1-419, plates em z ‘Vol. 14, No. 1; Asey icey $1.25: : tudy Ss the J Larerne of the “VOL. 39 DECEMBER 1912 = NO. ee BULLETIN OF THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB = €ditor PHILIP DOWELL i : Associate €Cditors _ JEAN BROADHURST MARSHALL Avery Howe re | Ernest Dunsar CLARK HERBERT MAULE RICHARDS — _ ALEXANDER WILLIAM EvaNS NORMAN TAYLOR ag ae a CONTENTS A taxonomic study of the Pteridophyta of the Hawaiian Islands—II (Plates 40-44) WINIFRED J. ROBINSON 567 _ New West Indian Lejeuneae—II (Plate 45) . oS or yet anane cites W. EVANS 603 — PUBLISHED FOR THE CLUS THE NEW ERA PRINTING COMPANY LANCASTER, PA. | THE TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB President EDWARD S. BURGESS, PH.D. * .: : § \ Vice-Presidents ‘ JOHN HENDLEY BARNHART, A.M., M.D. Y. HERBERT M. RICHARDS, Sc.D. Secretary and Treasurer BERNARD O. DODGE, Pu.D. Dept. of Botany, Columbia University New York City MEETINGS _ Meetings twice each month from October to May inclusive: the second Tuesday at 8:00 P.M,, at the American Museum of Natural History; the last Wednesiy, we at 3:30 P.M., in the Museum Building a the New York Botanical Garden. ae PUBLICATIONS. ( All sul subscriptions sa other business communications relating to the poblteatond of the Club should be addressed to ae Seen Bernard O. Dodge, Dept. is Botany, Columbia University, New Yor : aoe Bulletin. _ Monthly, established 1870. Price, $3. 00 a year; aaah naorbers xo reserved ie the completion B N should be Menuet to Philip Dowell, Editor, Port Richmond, N. Y. “Mo nthly, esta blished 1901, Price, $1.00 a year, Manuscripts in Editor, Museum, Eastern Parkway, ‘Brooklyn, N. Y. ‘Memoirs. Occasional, established 1889. (See last pages of cover. +e ; Catalogue of ocd and apasicite within r00 miles York £69; 1888. Price, $1.00 Vol. 39 No. 12 BULLETIN TORREY BOTANICAL CLUB _ DECEMBER - 1912 A taxonomic study of the Pteridophyta of the Hawaiian Islands—II WINIFRED J. ROBINSON (WITH PLATES 40-44) 5. POLYPODIACEAE Plants various in habit. Rootstock erect or creeping; leaves circinate in vernation, blades simple to quadripinnate; sporangia covering the lower surface in a uniform layer or arranged in linear, roundish, or oval sori; these indusiate or non-indusiate; sporangia stalked; annulus incomplete. Sporangia scattered over the under surface of the leaf _ blade in a uniform layer. 1. Elaphoglossum. Sporangia in definite sori. Sori marginal or submarginal. Indusium present. Sori continuous or interrupted, indusium formed of the more or less modified leaf margin. Indusium opening inward. Sporangia arising from a contin- uous veinlike receptacle, connecting the ends of the veins, _Indusium single. 2. Pieris. Indusium double. 3. Pleridium. con flexed in fertile leaflets Veins free. : 4. Pellaea. Veins anastomosing. 5. Doryopteris. ie (The Buttetiy for November 1912 (39: 519-566. pl. 37-30) was issued 18 N ror. oe 567 ; 568 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE FP AWAIIAN ISLANDS Separate lobes of _ margin reflexed as Leafstalks dies. eens Leafstalks brownish, dull. istinct in sinus of leaf. Sori crowded. Indusium opening outward. Pinnae strongly developed on an- terior side Sori transverse on the ex- panded tips of free or anas- tomosing veins, segments a slightly developed on pos- terior side. Pinnae developed on both sides of the midrib, though not uall equally. Indusium attached only at the base; pinnae jointed to the midrib. Indusium attached on three sides. Ultimate segments cune- ate. Ultimate segments not cuneate but toothed or lobed Indusium absent; sporangia sunken in a marginal groove. Sori dorsal, with or without indusia. Indusium partly inferior, hood-shaped. Indusium superior or wantin ndusium wantin Sporangia istlowing the veins. Under surface covered with a waxy powder. Under surface not covered with a waxy powder. Sporangia in definite, roundish sori. Leaves non-articulate. Leaves articulate Veins free Veins FAA with free cluded veinlets. Lal Lal 6. oO. Adiantum. ypolepis. . Schizostege. Diellia. Odontoloma. . Nephrolepis. . Odontosoria. 13. Microlepia. nn ‘ Vittaria. . Filix. . Ceropteris. 17. Coniogramme. . Dryopteris (in part). . Polypodium. phytes in the forests. ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN IsLANpS 569 Veins Penge leaf blade simp Veins OS, leaf blade pinnatifid Indusium present. Sori roundish or oval. Veins free Indusium circular, attached in the center. Indusium reniform or orbicu- lar, Kien ees at the side or in thes Veins anastomosing. Veins eT, regularly to form one or more areolae, with free included veinlets. Veins anastom g copiously, with few uaa veinlets. Sori elongate, on the veins or crossing them. Leaf blades simple. f blades pinnate to quadri- pinnate. Veins free; sori oblique to the midri Sori simple 0 on the outer of bait esi or cro Sori cacnbe oat Sori usually curved, often crossing the veinlet. Sori double, usually open- ing outward. Veins ae sori par- el to the m Sori continuous. Sori interrupted. ty ° ty NO cl oo 23, 24. iS) un 26. bo ~ 29. 30. . Polystichu . Phymatodes. . Phlebodium. m, . Dryopteris (in part), Cyrtomium. Tectaria. . Neottopteris. Asplenium. Sadleria. Doodia. I. ELAPHOGLOSSUM Schott, Gen. Fil. p/. 14. Mostly tropical plants found growing upon rocks or as epi- . Athyrium. . Diplasium. 1834 Rootstock erect or creeping; leaves articu- late, simple; blades of fertile leaves usually narrower than those of sterile leaves; veins usually free, occasionally anastomosing; Sporangia covering the lower surface of the leaf, non-indusiate. Type species: Elaphoglossum conforme (Sw.) Schott. 570 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS Veins free. Leaves densely covered with brown scales. E. hirium. Leaves smooth or bearing minute scattered scales. Rootstock slender, 1-5 mm. in diameter. Leaf blades oblong-lanceolate, acumin ate. E. micradenium. Leaf blades linear or linear-oblanceolate, acute or somewhat obtuse. E. aemulum. Rootstock stout, 2-4 cm. in diameter; leaf oblanceolate, : obtuse. E. Wavwrae. Veins not free. Veins anastomosing freely throughout. E. reticulatum. Veins united by a marginal vein. E. gorgonium. ELAPHOGLOSSUM HIRTUM (Sw.) C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 308. 1905 Acrostichum hirtum Sw. Jour. Bot. Schrad. 18007: 10. 1801. Acrostichum squamosum Sw. Jour. Bot. Schrad. 1800: 11. 1801. Not Cav. : Acrostichum vestitum Lowe (paleaceum in plate); Hook. & Grev. Ic. Fil. 2: 235. 1831. Not Schl. & Cham. Linnaea 5: 605. 1830. Elaphoglossum squamosum J. Sm. Jour. Bot. Hook. 4: 148. 1841. Elaphoglossum vestitum J. Sm. Ferns Brit. & For. 106. 1866. Acrostichum micans Mett. in Kuhn, Linnaea 36: 50. 1869. TYPE LOCALITY: Azores (?) DistriBuTION: Exposed ridges at 900-1,200 m. elevation, also on banks of streams in woods, tropical countries. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Wilkes Expedition C, Ni Robinson 272 V; 274 V; 283 V; Maui, Lichtenthaler N; Heller 2688 C, N; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 99 C, N; Hillebrand C; Lindley C; Miss Sessions C; ex Herb. John Donnell Smith N. The description of E. hirtum by Swartz in Jour. Bot. Schrad. 1800?: 10. 1801 is inadequate but is amplified in Syn. Fil. 194. 1806. ELAPHOGLOSSUM MICRADENIUM (Fée) Moore, Ind. Fil. 12. 1857 Acrostichum micradenium Fée, Mém. Foug. 2: 43- 1845. Elaphoglossum nitidum Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. 79- 1854- TYPE LocaLity: Hawaiian Islands. DisTRIBUTION: On rocks and trees from 300 m. elevation UP- wards; Hawaiian Islands. ILLusTRATIONS: Fée, Mém. Foug. 2: $l. 8, f. I. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. pl. 9, f. 3. 1854. 1845; Brack. ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 571 SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Wilkes Expedition N; Maui, Lichtenthaler N ; Oahu, Robinson 49 V; 75 V; 110 V; Safford 875 N; Kauai, Heller 2621 C, N; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 97 C, N; Hillebrand C; Wilkes Expedition C. ELAPHOGLOSSUM AEMULUM (Kaulf.) Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. 71. 1854 Acrostichum aemulum Kaulf. Enum. 63, 1824. Olfersia aemula Presl, Tent. Pterid. 235. 1836. Acrostichum Helleri Underw. in Heller, Minn. Bot. Stud. 1: 771. 1897. TYPE LOCALITY: Oahu. DIsTRIBUTION: On trees at 900~—1,200 m. elevation; Tropical America, Africa, India, Malaysia, and Australia. ILLUSTRATION: Underw. in Heller, Minn. Bot. Stud. 17: 42. 1897. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Robinson; Oahu, Chamisso B; Forbes BM; Kauai, Heller 2709 C, N; Kuntze 23037 C; Hawaiian Islands, Gaudichaud C. ELAPHOGLOSSUM WAwWRAE (Luerssen) C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 318. 1906 Elaphoglossum aemulum Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. 71. 1854. Not Kaulf. Enum. Fil. 63. 1824. Acrostichum Wawrae Luerssen, in Wawra, Flora 58: 420. 1875. TYPE LOCALITY: Kauai. DistRIBUTION: In forests and on dry shaded rocks at 1,200 m. elevation; common; Hawaiian Islands. ILLUSTRATION: PLATE 40. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, District of Puna, Wilkes Expe- dition N; District of Waimea, Wilkes Expedition N; Mauna Loa, above 2,400 m., Wilkes Expedition N ; Maui, Lichtenthaler N; Mann & Brigham N; Robinson 309 V; 315 V; 355 Vi Kauai, Forbes 530 BM; Heller 2808 C, N; Hawaiian Islands, Bailey C; Baldwin 98 C,N; Wilkes Expedition C. Brackenridge named his specimens of Elaphoglossum Wawrae E. aemulum and gave Kaulfuss’s description of Acrostichum aemulum (Enum. 63. 1824), with slight changes, in his report, transferring the species from Acrostichum to Elaphoglossum (Brack. 572 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. 71. 1854). However, his specimens in the U.S. National Herbarium at Washington do not correspond with Kaulfuss’s description of A. aemulum in dimensions or in other characters. The series of specimens noted above seems to repre- sent but one species as indicated by the texture, uniform punctua- tions, and revolute margins of the leaves, and by the oblong- lanceolate scales of the rhizome. The dimensions of the leaves are fairly constant with the exception of a few plants, as Baldwin 98 and Wilkes Expedition, Hawaii, District of Puna, which are smaller than the others. ELAPHOGLOSSUM RETICULATUM (Kaulf.) Gaud. Voy. Bonite Bot. 1846 Acrostichum reticulatum Kaulf. Enum. 64. 1824. Acrostichum crassifolium Gaud. Voy. Freyc. Bot. 303. 1828. Hymenodium crassifolium Fée, Mém. Foug. 2: 91. 1845. Anetium reticulatum Presl, Epim. 176. 1849. Hymenodium reticulatum Moore, Ind. Fil. 19. 1857. TYPE LOCALITY: Oahu, Chamisso collector. DIsTRIBUTION: On trunks of trees and on rocks, common, Hawaiian Islands. ILLUSTRATIONS: Fée, Mém. Foug. 2: pl. 63.f.1. 1845; Gaud. Voy. Bonite Bot. pl. 79. f. 1-4. 1846. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Wilkes Expedition N; Oahu, Heller 2114C, N; Mann & Brigham 182 N; Robinson 27 V; 106 V; 114 V; Kauai, Heller 2567 C, N; Robinson 436 V; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin ror C; Hillebrand 112 C; Wilkes Expedition C3 ex Herb. John Donnell Smith N. ELAPHOGLOSSUM GORGONIUM (Kaulf.) Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp- 74. 1854 Acrostichum gorgonium Kaulf. Enum. 63. 1824. Olfersia gorgonea Presl, Tent. Pterid. 235. 1836. Aconiopteris obtusa Fée, Mém. Foug. 2: 80. 1845. Olfersia obtusa Moore, Ind. Fil. 1: 17. 1857. Acontopteris gorgonea J. Sm. Hist. Fil. 128. 1875. Acrostichum pellucido-marginatum Christ, Verh. Nat. Ges. Basel II: 255. 1895. TYPE LOCALITY: Oahu. ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN IsLANDS 573 DISTRIBUTION: On ground in wet woods at 600-700 m. eleva- tion, Hawaiian Islands, Society Islands. ILLUSTRATION: Fée, Mém. Foug. 2: pl. gr. 1845 SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Mann & Brigham 286 N; Maui, Lichtenthaler N; Robinson 303 V; Oahu, Heller C, N; Robinson 4V; 48 V; Wilkes Expedition N; Kauai, Heller C; Robin- son 833 V; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin too C; Miss Sessions C; ex Herb. Mt. Holyoke College C. 2. PTERIS.-L. Sp.Ft. 1073. 1753 A cosmopolitan genus of various habit. Rootstock usually creeping; leafstalk articulate; blades variously divided; sori mar- ginal, linear, continuous upon a slender receptacle, connecting the tips of the free veins, indusiate. Type species: Pteris arborea L. Leaf blade broadly oblong, bipinnate; sterile pinnae broader than fertile pinnae, segments of former irregularly crenulate, segments of latter entire; midrib not winged. P. excelsa. Leaf blade ovate to ovate-oblong, bipinnate to quadripinnate; midrib winged throughout or terminal pinnae decurrent. Midrib winged toward the apex, the terminal pinnae decurrent; leaf pinnate; pinnae linear-lanceolate, simple, or the lowest pair often bi-tripartite. Midrib winged throughout; leaf quadripinnate; pinnae varying from linear-lanceolate and entire to oblong and crenate-den- tate. PTERIS EXCELSA Gaud. Voy. Freyc. Bot. 388. 1829 Pieris terminalis Wall. Cat. no. 101. 1828 (nomen). Pteris owahuensis Presl, Tent. Pterid. 145 (nomen). 1836. Type LocaLity: Hawaiian Islands. Distripution: In damp gulches at elevations of 600-900 m.; Northern India, Malaysia, and Fiji Islands. ILLUSTRATION: Hook. Sp. Fil. 2: 136. 1846. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Robinson 226 V; 235 V; Maui, Bailey C; Robinson 306 V; Oahu, Forbes BM; Hillebrand 407 V; Robinson 104 V; Kauai, Heller 2649; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 18; Wilkes Expedition 11 C; Miss Sessions C. PreRIs CRETICA L. Mant. 130. 1767 Pteris nervosa Thunb. Fl. Jap. 332. 1784- Pteris serraria Sw. Jour. Bot. Schrad. 18007: 65. 1801. P. cretica. P. irregularis. 574 ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS Pieris pentaphylla Willd. Sp. Pl. 5: 362. 1810. Pieris triphylla Mart. & Gal. Mém. Acad. Brux. 1S: 51. pl. 14. f. 7. 1824, Pieris scabripes Wall. Cat. no. 94. 1828. Pteris melanocaulon Fée, Mém. Foug. 7: Sl. Bh.-19. fo Le TBE Pteris Treacheriana Baker, Jour. Bot. 17: 65. 1879. Pteris lomarioides Colenso, Trans. N. Z. Inst. 13: 380. 1881. TYPE LOCALITY: Crete. DISTRIBUTION: On ground and on trees, tropical countries. ILLUSTRATIONS: Mart. & Gal. Mém. Acad. Brux. 15: 51. Pl. 14.f.I. 1824; Fée, Mém. Foug.%: 31. pl. 10: f.2.. 1957 SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Maui, Bailey C; Bishop B; Hillebrand B; Oahu, Heller 2782 C: Hillebrand B; Robinson 22 V; 25 V; 42 V; Kauai, Knudsen 39 B; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 19 B, C. PTERIS IRREGULARIS Kaulf. Enum. 189. 1842 Pteris alata Gaud. Voy. Freyc. Bot. 391. 1829. Pteris regularis E. Bailey, Haw. Ferns 26. 1883. TYPE LocALITy: Hawaiian Islands. DISTRIBUTION: In woods and shady gulches 300-900 m. eleva- tion; Hawaiian Islands. ILLusTRATION: Gaud. Voy. Freyc. Bot. pl. 79. 1829. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Hillebrand B, K; Maui, Batley C; Hillebrand B; Wilkes Expedition C; Oahu, Bennett 85 B; Chamisso C; Forbes BM; Gaudichaud B; Heller 2335 C; Hille- brand B; 79 B; Lindley K; Macrae B; Mann & Brigham 162 C; Meyen B; Nuttall K; Robinson 12 V; 56 V; 61 V; 65 V; 116 V; Kauai, Knudsen 40 B; 41 B; 60 B; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 17 B, C; Douglas 31 K; Gaudichaud 184 B; Hillebrand K; Knudsen 29 B; 42 B; Miss Sessions C; Wilkes Expedition C. Bailey (Haw. Ferns 25. 1883) believed that two species had been confused under the name P. irregularis and sought to clear up the difficulty by describing P. regularis. The variations shown by leaves growing upon the same plant permit placing the several forms in one species. 3- PTERIDIUM Gleditsch, in Scop. Fl. Carn. 169. 1760 Rootstock wide-creeping; leaves distant, not articulate, trl- angular to deltoid-ovate, ternately compound; sorus linear, follow- _ Site te aa ge (ei ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN IsLANDs 575 ing the vein which connects the tips of the otherwise free veins: indusium double, the outer formed from the incurved margin of the frond, the inner attached to the receptacle on the inner side and enclosed by the outer indusium, both ciliate at the margin. Type species: Pieris aquilina L. * PTERIDIUM AQUILINUM (L.) Kuhn; v. Decken, Reisen Ost. Afr. Bot. il... 1879 Pieris aquilina L. Sp. Pl. 1078... 1784. Cincinalis aquilina Gled. Syst. Pl. 290. 1764. Asplenium aquilinum Bernh. Jour. Bot. Schrad. 1799': 310. 1799. Pieris psittacina Presl, Del. Prag. 185. 1822. Pieris arachnoidea Kaulf. Enum. 190. 1824. Allosorus aquilinus Presl, Tent. Pterid. 153. 1836. Eupteris aquilina Newman, Phytologist 2: 278. 1845. Paesia aquilina Keyserl. Polyp. Cyath. Herb. Bung. 22. 1873. Ornithopteris aquilina J. Sm. Hist. Fil, 298. 1875. TYPE LOCALITY: Europe. DISTRIBUTION: Common through tropics and North Tem- perate zones. ILLUSTRATIONS: Diels, in E. & P. Nat. Pf. 1: 296. 1899; Waters, Ferns 93. 1903. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Baldwin 17; Mauna Loa, Wilkes Expedition C; Maui, Bailey go C; Kauai, Heller 2416 C; 4o C; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 20 C, N ; ex Herb. John Donnell Smith 77. In the Olinda woods at 1,300 m. elevation on Mt. Haleakala, Maui, plants of Pteridium aquilinum attain such size that it seems hardly possible that they are of the same species as the dwarfed, leathery, and resistant forms that grow upon the exposed rocks at from 2,000 m. to 3,000 m. elevation. Further study may show that they are distinct species, but for the present their differences must be considered ecological rather than taxonomic. 4. PELLAEA Link, Fil. Sp. 59. 1841 Xerophilous plants, usually found upon rocks. Rootstock short, erect; leaves cespitose, articulate; blades consisting of I to 3 nearly uniform leaflets; sori marginal, borne upon the ends 576 ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS of unconnected veins; indusium formed by the reflexed margin of the leaf. Type species: Pieris atropurpurea L. PELLAEA TERNIFOLIA (Cav.) Link, Fil. Sp. 59. 1841 Pteris ternifolia Cav. Desc. Pl. Dem. 266. 1802. Pteris peruviana Poir. in Lam. Encyc. 5: 718. 1804. (Reduced to synonym in supplement.) Pieris subverticillata Sw. Syn. Fil. 103. 1806. Allosorus ternifolius Kunze; Klotzsch, Linnaea 20: 339. 1847. ?Pellaea Weddelliana Fée, Mém. Foug. 8: 4. 1857. Cheilanthes ternifolia Moore, Ind. Fil. 255. 1861. Nothochlaena ternifolia Keyserl. Polyp. Cyath. Herb. Bung. 30. 1873. TYPE LOCALITY: Peru. DISTRIBUTION: At elevations of 1,500 m. in dry exposed places in the mountains, Chile to Texas; Hawaiian Islands. ItLustraTions: Hook. & Grev. Ic. Fil. 2: pl. 126. 1829; Lowe, Ferns Brit. & Exot. 3: pl. 24b. 1857. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Lichtenthaler N; Mann & Brigham 262 N; Safford 884 N; Wilkes Expedition N; Maui, Bailey C; Robinson 312 V; Kauai, Wilkes Expedition C, N; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 15 C, N; Lindley C; Moore C; Remy 4° C; Miss Sessions C; ex herb. Kew Gardens C. 5. DORYOPTERIS J.Sm. Jour. Bot. Hook. 3: 404. 1841 Rootstock short, erect; leaves cespitose, palmate or pedate, coriaceous; petiole black, polished; veins free or anastomosing, indistinct; sori marginal; indusium usually revolute with age. Type species: Pteris hastata Raddi. Leaf blades broadly deltoid; ultimate segments lanceolate. D. decipiens. Leaf blades ovate-cordate; ultimate segments linear. D. decora. _ DoryorTerIs DECIPIENS (Hook.) J. Sm. Hist. Fil. 289- 1875 Pteris pedata Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. 107. 1832. Not Willd. Doryopteris pedata Brack. Fil. U.S. Expl. Exp. 403. 1854- Pteris decipiens Hook. Sp. Fil. 2: 209. 1858. Litobrochia decipiens Moore, Ind. Fil. 342. 1862. ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 577 TYPE LOCALITY: Hawaiian Islands. DIsTRIBUTION: In crevices in rocks at 350 m. or more eleva- tion, Hawaiian Islands. ILLUSTRATION: Hook. Exot. Ferns pl]. 34. 1858. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Wilkes Expedition N; Maui, Batley C; Lichtenthaler N; Oahu, Heller C: Mann & Brigham 136 N; Wilkes Expedition N; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin (3-27 C; Hillebrand C; Moore C; ex Herb. John Donnell Smith 67 N. DoryopTeris DECORA Brack. Fil. U.S. Expl. Exp. 103. 1854 Pieris decora Hook. Sp. Fil. 2: 210. 1858. Litobrochia decora Moore, Ind. Fil. 342. 1862. TYPE LocALITY: Hawaiian Islands. DISTRIBUTION: On exposed rocks at elevations of about 600 m., Hawaiian Islands. ILLustraTION: Brack. Fil. U.S. Expl. Exp. pl. 13. f. 1. 1854. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Mann & Brigham N; Wilkes Expedition N; Maui, Bailey C; Safford 882 N; Kauai, Heller 2654 C, N; Heller C; Lanai, Hillebrand N; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 22 C, N; Wilkes Expedition C. 6. ADIANTUM L. Sp. Pl. 1094. 1753 Delicate ferns, inhabiting moist, shady localities. Root- stock creeping or suberect; leafstalks slender, usually dark and lustrous, not articulate; blades pinnate to pinnately decompound or tripinnate; sori terminal upon the free forking veins within the reflexed lobes (indusia) of the leaflets. Type species: Adiantum Capillus-veneris L. ADIANTUM CAPILLUS-VENERIS L. Sp. Pl. 2: 1096. 1753 Adiantum Capillus Sw. Jour. Bot. Schrad. 18007: 83. 1801. Adiantum emarginatum Bory; Willd. Sp. Pl. 5: 449. 1810. Adiantum Wattii Baker, Jour. Linn. Soc. 18: 381. 1881. Adiantum Levingei Baker, Ann. Bot. 5: 207. 1891. TYPE LOCALITY: Southern Europe. DisTRIBUTION: On ground or moist rocks in tropics and subtropics. ILLUSTRATIONS: Hook. Brit. Ferns 41. 1861; Ettingsh. Farnkr. 44. f.5. 11-17. 1865. 578 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Wilkes Expedition N; Maui, Bailey 41 C; Oahu, Hitchcock C; Lichtenthaler N; Mann & Brigham N; Remy 241 B; Robinson V; Safford 880 N; Kauai, Forbes 306 BM; Heller 2479 C, N; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 14 B, C; Moore C; Miss Sessions C; Wilkes Expedition 5 B. SPECIES INQUIRENDA Adiantum Bennettit Carruth. in Seeman, Fl. Vit. 346. 1873 Hillebrand states that a specimen of this plant collected by Lieut. Strickland is in the herbarium of the British Museum, but it cannot be found there at the present time (1911). 7- HYPOLEPIS Bernh. Neues Jour. Bot. Schrad. 17: 34. 1806 Rootstock slender, wide-creeping; leaves pinnate to quadri- pinnate, herbaceous, hairy; leafstalk not articulate; veins free; sori borne in the sinuses of the segments; indusium formed by the small reflexed marginal lobe of the leaf. Type species: Lonchitis tenutfolia Forst. Leaf blade quadripinnate; petiole brownish at base, stramineous a intervals on rootstock between leaves about 12 cm. H. punctate. Leaf blade bipinnate; leafstalk purplish red; intervals on rootstock between leaves 4-6 cm H. flaccida. HyPoLepis punctata (Thunb.) Mett. in Kuhn, Fil. Afr. 120. : 1868 Polypodium punctatum Thunb. FI. Jap. 337. 1784. Not Swartz. Polypodium Paepigii Kunze; Klotzsch, Linnaea 9: 50. 1834. Phegopteris punctata Mett. Ann. Lugd. Bat. 1: 222. 1864. Phegopteris punctata var. glabra Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 562. 1888. Hypolepis tenuifolia Underw. in Heller, Minn. Bot. Stud. 1: 782- 1897. Nephrodium punctatum Diels in E. & P. Nat. Pfl. 14: 177. 1899- TYPE LOCALITY: Japan. DISTRIBUTION: Japan, China, Stiles Polynesia, Australia, New Zealand, Hawaiian Islands. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Heller 2778 C. H. tenuifolia (Forst.) Bernh. and H. punctata Mett. may be synonyms, though the term ‘‘arborescens”’ in Forster’s original ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN IsLANDsS 579 - description does not apply to the Hawaiian plant nor to the plants ‘from Japan, China, and the South Pacific Islands, which are labeled ‘‘ Hypolepis tenuifolia” in herbaria. Hypolepis flaccida (Hilleb.) comb. nov. Phegopteris punctata var. flaccida Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 563. 1888. TYPE LOCALITY: Hawaiian Islands. DISTRIBUTION: Hawaiian Islands. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Baldwin 80 PD 8. SCHIZOSTEGE Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 631. 1888 Rootstock erect; leaves clustered, bipinnate at the base, bipinnatifid above, cyatheoid; sori oblong, marginal upon the T- shaped expansions of the veins, which occasionally anastomose; indusium coriaceous. Type species: Schizostege Lydgatei Hilleb. SCHIZOSTEGE LypGaTEI (Bak.) Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 632. 1888 Cheilanthes Lidgatii Baker; Hook. & Baker, Syn. Fil. 475. 1874. Pieris Lydgatei Christ, Farnkr. Erde 167. 1897. TYPE LOCALITY: Oahu. DISTRIBUTION: On ground, Oahu and Maui, Hawaiian Islands. ILLUSTRATION: PLATE 41. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Maui, Gulch of Waihee, Hillebrand B; Oahu, Valley of Wailupe, Lydgate & W. F. Hillebrand B; Koolaulua Mts., between Punahua and Kaipaupau, Forbes BM. The specimens noted above are the only collections of this species that have been recorded, and an interval of about twenty- five years elapsed between the collections made upon Oahu. The habit of Schizostege closely resembles that of Pteris biaurita L., but the relation is no closer than that of Cheilanthes to Pteris or of Pellaea to Cheilanthes. Schizostege was a monotypic Hawaiian genus until Copeland (Philip. Jour. Sci. 1: Suppl. 2. 1906) described two Philippine species, S. pachysora and S. calocarpa, both of which he states Tesemble Cheilanthes to a greater extent than they resemble Pteris. 580 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS O. DIELiIA: Brack. Pil. Us: 5S. Expl. Exp: 217.18 Rootstock short; leaves cespitose; veins forking, uniting to form oblique areolae, free at the margin of the leaf or united by a transverse vein upon which the sporangia are borne; sori distinct; indusium linear-oblong, parallel to the margin of the leaf and opening outward. Type species: Diellia erecta Brack. Leaf blades pinnate. Leafstalk and midrib smooth. Pinnae not more than 3 mm. broad, linear, zigzag from the alternate crenations of the margin. D. centifolia. Pinnae more than 3 mm. Leaf 8-10 cm. high, coriaceous; pinnae rhomboid-ovate above, orbicular below. D. pumila. Leaf more than 10 cm. high, chartaceous; pinnae lanceolate, chiens D. erecta. Leafstalk and ae ibs Pinnae cut into pereen segments. D, Alexandri. Pinnae not cut into cuneiform segments. Pinnae lanceolate, acute, repand. D, falcata. Pinnae el caudate, laciniate. D., laciniata. Leaf blades tripinnatifid to innate. lades tripinnatifid, pty -jugate. D. Knudsenit. Blades quadripinnatifid, 40-50-jugate. D. Mannii. Diellia centifolia (Hilleb.) comb. nov. Lindsaya centifolia Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 621. 1888. TYPE LocALITy: Halemanu, Kauai. DISTRIBUTION: Known from type locality only. ILLUSTRATION: Diels in E. & P. Nat. Pfl. 1*: 211. f. 114D. 1899. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Kauai, Knudsen 35 (type) B. It seems possible that Diellia centifolia may have arisen from @ cross between Diellia falcata and Diellia Alexandri, by which it inherited the position of the sori from the former parent and the modified form of the pinnae from the latter parent. Dr1e.uia pumiLa Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. 219. 1888 TYPE LOCALITY: Oahu. DISTRIBUTION: In crevices of rocks, rare; Oahu, Hawaiian Islands. ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 581 SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Oahu, Hillebrand B; Nuuanu Valley, Oahu, Hillebrand B. This species is represented at Kew by Wilkes Expedition 2, which is probably a cotype if not the type specimen. DIELLIA ERECTA Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. 218. 1854 TYPE LOCALITY: Mountain forest, Western division of Maui. DISTRIBUTION: Hawaiian Islands. ILLuUsTRATION: Brack. Fil. U.S. Expl. Exp. pl. jr. f. 2. 1854. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Maui, Baker C; Baldwin B; Hillebrand B; Kauai, Van Ingen C; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 28 B; Moore B; ex Herb. Lindley C. DIELLIA ALEXANDRI (Hilleb.) Diels in E. & P. Nat. Pfl. 14: 212. 1899 Lindsaya Alexandri Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 622. 1888. TYPE LOCALITY: Halemanu, Kauai. DISTRIBUTION: Known from type locality only. ILLUSTRATION: Diels in E. & P. Nat. Pfl. 14: 211. f. 114G, H. 1899. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Kauai, Knudsen B; Maui, Baldwin C, V; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 12 C. DIELLIA FALCATA Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. 219. 1854 TYPE LOCALITY: Kaala Mountains, Oahu. DIsTRIBUTION: On dry, open ridges, Hawaiian Islands. ILLUSTRATION: Brack. Fil. U.S. Expl. Exp. pl. jr. f.7. 1854. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Maui, Hillebrand B; Oahu, Hillebrand B; Kauai, Van Ingen C; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 29 C. Diellia laciniata (Hilleb.) comb. nov. Lindsaya laciniata Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 621. 1888. TYPE LocALity: Halemanu, Kauai. DIsTRIBUTION: Known from type locality only. ILLUSTRATION: Diels in E. & P. Nat. Pfl. 14: 211. f. 114H, F. 1899. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Halemanu, Kauai, Knudsen B. Hillebrand’s B variety subbipinnata has more symmetrical 582 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS pinnae than the type. His variety y, as represented in the Berlin herbarium, is a monstrosity. DIELLIA KNupDsENTI (Hilleb.) Diels in E. & P. Nat. Pfl. 14: 212. 1899 Lindsaya Knudsenii Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 623. 1888. TYPE LOCALITY: Halemanu, Kauai. DISTRIBUTION: Known from Hawaiian Islands only. ILLUSTRATIONS: Diels in E. & P. Nat. Pfl. 14: 213. f. 114L-N. 1899. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Kauai, Knudsen 19 (type) B. Diellia Mannii (Hilleb.) comb. nov. Microlepia Mannii D. C. Eaton in Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 212. 1867. Davallia Mannii Baker in Hook. & Baker, Syn. Fil. ed. 2. 471. 1874. Lindsaya Mannii Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 624. 1888. Humata Mannii Diels in E. & P. Nat. Pfl. 14: 209. 1899. TYPE LocALITY: Kauai. DistriBuTION: Hawaiian Islands. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Maui, Bishop B; Kauai, Baldwin 10 B, C; Forbes 333 BM; Knudsen 38 B; Mann & Brigham 546 B; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin V. to. ODONTOLOMA J. Sm. Jour. Bot. Hook. 3: 415. 1841 Rootstock creeping, slender, scaly, much branching; leafstalk not articulate; blades membranaceous, dimidiate; veins forking, free or united in pairs at their apices; sori submarginal, discrete, indusium attached by a broad base, free laterally and apically, opening outward. Type species: Odontoloma pulchella J. Sm. OponToLoMA Macraranum (Hook. & Arn.) Brack. Fil. U. 5. Expl. Exp. 226. 1854 Davallia Macraeana Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. 108. 1832: Acrophorus repens Moore, Ind. Fil. 91. 1857. Acrophorus Macraeanus Carruth. in Seeman, FI. Vit. 336. TYPE LOCALITY: Hawaiian Islands. 1869. ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 583 DIsTRIBUTION: Hawaiian Islands, common. ILLUSTRATION: Hook. & Grev. Ic. Fil. pl. 143. %829. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Wilkes Expedition C; Maui, Baldwin B; Baldwin 7 B; Robinson 203 V; 367 V; 360 V; Oahu, Forbes BM; (Honolulu) Hillebrand C: (Konhuanui) Hillebrand B; (Nuuanu) Willebrand B; Macrae B: Robinson 163 V; 1903 V; 613 V; Wilkes Expedition C; Kauai, Robinson gag: Ns ge Vs. 437-Ns 400 V: Remy C; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin B; Gaudichaud B; Wilkes Expedition B. Odontoloma Macraeanum differs from Lindsaya repens in that the sori are submarginal rather than marginal, as they are in the latter, and are discrete rather than confluent. Superficially they are much alike. 11. NEPHROLEPIS Schott, Gen. Fil. pl. 3. 1834 Terrestrial or epiphytic plants, mainly found in the tropics; thizome creeping or suberect; leafstalk not articulate; blades pinnate, usually coriaceous, spreading or pendent; pinnae approx- imate, articulate; veins free, forked, each terminating in a puncti- form apex, which bears a calcareous scale on the outer side; sori borne apically upon the upper branch of a vein, thus forming a single row parallel to the midrib; indusium circular or reniform. Type species: Nephrolepis exaltata (L.) Schott. Rootstock bearing tubers; indusium opening toward apex of pinna. _N.. cordifolia. R 1 indusi i bliquely toward margin tnd 1 eo a } ASUULSLUCA WILTLOUT , Y S be 5 of pinna. N. exaltata. NEPHROLEPIS CORDIFOLIA (L.) Presl, Tent. Pterid. 79. 1836 Polypodium cordifolium L. Sp. Pl. 1089. 1753. Aspidium cordifolium Sw. Jour. Bot. Schrad. 18007: 32. 1801. Aspidium undulatum Afz.;Sw. Jour. Bot. Schrad. 18007: 32. 1801. Aspidium tuberosum Bory in Willd. Sp. Pl. 5:234. 1810. Nephrolepis tuberosa Presl, Tent. Pterid. 79. 1836. Nephrolepis pendula J. Sm. Jour. Bot. Hook. 4: 197. 1842. TYPE LOCALITY: West Indies. DIsTRIBUTION: On ground and on trees; tropical countries, Japan, New Zealand. ILLUSTRATIONS: Raddi, Pl. Bras. 1: pl. 46. 1825; Diels in E.-& P. Nat. Pfl. 14: 205. f. arr. | 1899. 584 RoBINsON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Robinson 225 V; Forbes 201 BM. : Mr. J. F. Rock, botanist of the Forestry Station of the Hawai- ian Department of Agriculture, reports having found N. cordi- folia (L.) Presl [N. tuberosa (Bory) Presl] on Punaluu Trail above Kaliiuao, Oahu, on Mr. James Castle’s place. He also says that he has specimens of the same plant in his herbarium, which were collected by Mr. Lyons, a missionary on the islands, about fifty years ago. N. cordifolia, introduced into the Hawaiian Islands from Japan, is used as a border plant in gardens. NEPHROLEPIS EXALTATA (L.) Schott, Gen. Fil. pl. 3. 1834 Polypodium exaltatum L. Syst. ed. 107: 1326. 1759. Aspidium exaltatum Sw. Jour. Bot. Schrad. 18007: 32. 1801. Nephrodium exaltatum R. Br. Prod. Fl. N. Holl. 148. 1810. Aspidium Schkuhrii Bl. Enum. Fil. Jaw. 147. 1828. Nephrolepis cultrifolia Presl, Tent. Pterid. 79. 1836. TYPE LOCALITY: Jamaica. DISTRIBUTION: Epiphytic on trees; common in tropical countries. ILLusTRATIONS: Plumier, Fil. Am. pl. 63. 1703; Sloane, Hist. Jam. 1: pl. 31. 1707; Schkuhr, Krypt. Gew. pl. 320. 1809 (not Mett. Fil. Hort. Lips. pl. 26. f. 1-5. 1856); Raddi, Pi. Bras. 1: O40. 1825. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Wilkes Expedition C; Maui, Robinson 305 V; Oahu, Chamisso B; Heller 1987 C; Macrae B; Meyen B; Kauai, Heller 2873 C; Kuntze 23041 C; Robinson 0 V; 154. V; 423 V; 425 V; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 73 C; Gaudi- chaud B, C; Miss Sessions C. 12. ODONTOSORIA Presl, Tent. Pterid. 129. 1836 Rootsteck short, creeping; leafstalks not articulate; blades 2-3- pinnate; ultimate divisions cuneate, usually truncate; veins simple or forked, if sterile, punctiform at the apex. Sori apical or sub- apical; indusium semiorbicular, attached at the base and sides, truncate at the apex. Type species: Davallia biflora Kaulf. ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN IsLANDs 585 ODONTOSORIA CHINENSIS J. Sm. Bot. Voy. Herald 430. 1857 Trichomanes chinensis L. Sp. Pl. 1099. 1753. Adiantum chusanum L. Sp. Pl. 1095. 1753. Adiantum chinense Burm. FI. Ind. 236. 1768. Trichomanes cuneiforme Forst. Prod. 330. 1786. Davallia chinensis J. E. Sm. Mém. Acad. Turin 5: 414. 1793. Davallia chusana Willd. Sp. Pl. 5: 414. 1793. Davallia tenuifolia Sw. Jour. Bot. Schrad. 18002: 88. 1801. Adiantum tenuifolium Poir. in Lam. Encyc. 1: 44. 1810. Davallia remota Kaulf. Enum. 223. 1824. Microlepia tenuifolia Mett. Fil. Lips. 104. 1856. Stenoloma tenuifolium Fée, Gen. Fil. 330. 1852. Lindsaya chinensis Mett. in Kuhn, Fil. Afr. 67. 1868. TYPE LOCALITY: Bojei, Mauritius. DISTRIBUTION: Tropical countries. ILLUSTRATIONS: Mett. Fil. Lips. pl. 27. f. 1-4. 1856. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Kuntze 1904 C; 23089 C; Robin- son V; Maui, Bailey C; Oahu, Capt. Haines B, C; Heller aja7 ©; 2325 C; Robinson 3 Vi 25 V; 165 V; Knudsen 16 B; Wilkes Expedi- tion 13 B; Kauai, Kuntze 23034 C; Molokai, Hillebrand B; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 1z B, C; Chamisso B; Gaudichaud B: Miss Sessions C; Wilkes Expedition C. 13. MICROLEPIA Presl, Tent. Pterid. 124. 1836 Rootstock slender, creeping; leafstalk not articulate; blades various in size and texture; veins free, once or more than once forked; sori cup-shaped, upon a tooth or a sinus; indusium mem- branaceous, attached at sides and base, opening‘outward. Type species: Microlepia brasiliensis Presl. Leaf blade bipinnate, coriaceous, paleaceous. _ M. strigosa. Leaf blade tripinnate, chartaceous, glabrate. M. Speluncae. MICROLEPIA sTRIGOSA (Thunb.) Presl. Epim. 95. 1849 Trichomanes strigosum Thunb. FI. Jap. 339. 1784. Dicksonia strigosa Thunb. Trans. Linn. Soc.'2: 341. 1794. Dicksonia japonica Sw. Jour. Bot. Schrad. 18007: 92. 1801. Davallia polypodioides Don, Prod. Fl. Nepal. 10. 1825. ~ Microlepia cristata J. Sm. Jour. Bot. Hook. 3: 416. 1841. 586 ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS Davallia strigosa (Sw.) Kunze, Bot. Zeit. 6: 542. 1848. Microlepia Khasiyana Presl, Epim. 95. 1849. Microlepia japonica Presl, Epim. 95. 1849. Davallia Khasiyana Hook. Sp. Fil. 1: 173. 1856. Dennstaedtia strigosa J. Sm. Hist. Fil. 265. 1875. TYPE LOCALITY: Japan. DisTRIBUTION: Tropics and subtropics, common. ILLUSTRATIONS: Hook. Sp. Fil. 1: pl. 47A, 57A. 1856. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Robinson 253 V; 261 V; Maui, Baldwin B; Robinson 356 V; Oahu, Beechey C; Heller 2012 C; 2327 C; Meyen B; Wilkes Expedition B, C; Kauai, Forbes 423 BM; Heller 2480 C; 2803 C; Molokai, Hillebrand B; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 8 B, C; Miss Sessions C. The specimens vary as to the amount of pubescence, those collected in certain very moist localities, such as the Olao woods (Robinson 253 V, 261 V), being much more furfuraceous than those collected in drier localities, as Heller 2803. The variation from narrowly to broadly lanceolate is not correlated with this, nor is there any correspondence in size with the greater size of Microlepia hirta, hence Hillebrand’s variety hirta may be disregarded. MICROLEPIA SPELUNCAE Moore, Ind. Fil. 93. 1857 Polypodium Speluncae L. Sp. Pl. 1093. 1753- Davallia flaccida R. Br. Prod. Fl. N. Holl. 157. 1810. Aspidium Speluncae Willd. Sp. Pl. 5: 269. 1810. Microlepia polypodioides Presl, Tent. Pterid. 125. 1836. Microlepia flaccida J. Sm. Jour. Bot. Hook. 1: 427. 1842. Davallia Speluncae Baker in Hook. & Baker, Syn. Fil. 100. 1867. Type LocaLity: India. DISTRIBUTION: Tropics and subtropics. ILLUSTRATION: Pluk. Phytog. pl. 244. f.2. 1692. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Hillebrand B; Maui, Batley C; Oahu, Heller 2072 C; Hillebrand B; Robinson V; Kauai, Heller 2650 C; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin B, C; Miss Sessions C. 14. VITTARIA J. E. Smith, Mém. Acad. Turin 5: 413. Pl. 9.f. 2 1793 Epiphytic plants of tropical regions; rootstock slender, creep- ing, scaly; leaves clustered, linear, grasslike, sessile or short- ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 587 stalked, articulate; veins anastomosing to form a single row of areolae on either side of the midvein; sorus upon a linear recep- tacle formed by a marginal or intramarginal groove on each side of the leaf, non-indusiate. Type species: Pteris lineata L. VITTARIA RIGIDA Kaulf. Enum. 193. 1824 TYPE LOCALITY: Oahu. DISTRIBUTION: On trees, Polynesia. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Robinson 204 V; 252 V; Oahu, Chamisso B; Heller 2054 C; 2532 C: Robinson 152 V; 521 V; 522 V; Kauai, Kuntze 23039 C; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 96 C; Lindley C; Wilkes Expedition 3 C; Moore C. This is the species wrongly referred by Hillebrand to V. elongata Sw. (Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 551. 1888), the type of which is from India. In the Indian plants the ventral lip of the sorus is shorter than the lateral lip, so that the sporangia are invisible, and the leaves are nearly three times as long as those of the Hawaiian plants. 15. FILIX Adans. Fam. Pl. 20. 1763 Delicate rock ferns, found mainly in temperate regions. Root- stock short, erect; leaves clustered, not articulate; sori medial, subglobose; indusium attached by a broad base on the inner side, free above, soon reflexed. Type species: Polypodium bulbiferum L. Filix Douglasii (Hook.) comb. nov. Cystopteris Douglasit Hook. Sp. Fil. 1: 200. 1846. Cystopteris sandwichensis Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. 234. 1854. TYPE LocALITY: Hawaiian Islands. DIsTRIBUTION: Hawaiian Islands. ILLUSTRATION: Hook. Cent. Ferns pl. 55. 1854 SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Wilkes Expedition N, Herb. D. C. Eaton; Maui, Wilkes Expedition N; Hillebrand B; Lichtenthaler N; Mann & Brigham N; Oahu, Hillebrand B; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin C; Brackenridge N. 588 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 16. CEROPTERIS Link, Fil. Sp. 141. 1841 Rootstock creeping or short oblique, covered with brown, linear-lanceolate scales; leaves cespitose; leafstalks not articulate; blades bipinnate to tripinnate, covered below with a waxy powder; veins free; sori following the course of the veins, non-indusiate. Type species: Acrostichum calomelanos L. Leaf blades bipinnate with a pinnatifid apex; powder on lower surface yellow. C. ochracea. Leaf blades tripinnate; powder on lower surface white. C. calomelanos. Ceropteris ochracea (Presl) comb. nov. Gymnogramme tartarea var. 8B Hook. & Baker, Syn. Fil. 384. 1867. TYPE LOCALITY: South America. DistriBuTIoN: In moist thickets, tropical America, Costa Rica, Natal, and Hawaiian Islands. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Oahu, Forbes BM; Robinson V. Mr. C. N. Forbes notes: ‘‘I find the species to be widely spread over the whole group (Hawaiian Islands), especially along the irrigation ditches. The golden variety is much less common than the silver.”’ @ This fern has been reported from the Philippines, where it has been thought to be an escape. CEROPTERIS CALOMELANOS (L.) Link, Fil. Sp. 141. 1841. (As C. calomelaena) Acrostichum calomelanos L. Sp. Pl. 1072. 1753. Gymnogramma calomelanos Kaulf. Enum. Fil. 76. 1824. Neurogramme calomelanos Diels in E. & P. Nat. Pfi. 1‘: 264. 18994 TYPE LOCALITY: West Indies. DisTRIBUTION: In open places, in wet ground, West Indies, South America, Hawaiian Islands. ILLUSTRATIONS: Plumier, Traité Foug. pl. go. 1795; Sloane Hist. jam. $f. 30. 7. 2..-1735: SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Oahu, Forbes 1 BM; Robinson V. 17. CONIOGRAMME Fée, Mém. Foug. 5: 167. 1852 Mostly terrestrial plants. .Rootstock creeping; leaves not articulate, pinnate or bipinnate, light green, glabrous, or slightly ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 589 pubescent beneath, chartaceous; veins free, 1-3-forked; sori linear, continuous upon the veins and forking with them, non-indusiate. CONIOGRAMME FRAXINEA (Don) Diels in E. & P. Nat. Pfl. 14: 262. 1899 Diplazium fraxineum Don, Prod. Fl. Nepal. 12. 1825. Gymnogramme pilosa Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. 22. 1854. Not Mart. & Gal. 1842. Gymnogramme javanica Hook. Syn. Fil. 381. 1867. Not Blume 1828. TYPE LOCALITY: Nepal. DIsTRIBUTION: In wet woods at 900-1,200 m. elevation, Hawaiian Islands. ILLUSTRATION: Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. pl. 4. f. 1. 1854. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Hillebrand B; Robinson 200 V; Wilkes Expedition N; Maui, Bishop 68 B; Hillebrand B; Mann & Brigham 486 N; Robinson 314 V; 358 V; Oahu, Robinson 44 V; 53 V; Kauai, Forbes BM; Heller 2637 C, N; Knudsen 100 B; Lichtenthaler N; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 095 C, N; Wilkes Expedition N. 18. _DRYOPTERIS. Adans. Fam. Pl.2:.20. . 1763 Rootstock erect or creeping, usually short; leafstalk not articulate; blade pinnate to quadripinnate; veins free or those in adjacent lobes connate; sori round to elliptical; indusium, if present, usually reniform, with narrow sinus. Type species: Polypodium Filix-mas L. Sp. Pl. 1090. 1753. Veins free. Indusium present. Leaf blades bipinnatifid; basal pinnae reduce Under surface paleaceous with Seah babs ingled with resinous dots. D. globulifera. Under surface densely covered, at least as to leafstalk and midribs, with linear-lance- olate, long-acuminate scales. Blades coriaceous; scales light brown; veins more than once forking. D. paleacea. testes Se scales dark brown; simple or once forking. D. fusco-atra. Leaf oes slants to quadripinnatifid; basal pinnae not reduced. 590 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS { Under surface smooth. Blades bipinnate above, tripinnatifid below, deltoid. Blades tripinnate above, quadripinnatifid elow, deltoid-ovate Under surface glandular or scaly. surface glandular Blades cordate-ovate (20-40 cm. X 16-32 cm.); sori margina Blades oblong-lanceolate (10-25 cm. —8 cm.); sori medial. Under surface scaly. Blades bipinnate; paleaceous with light brown scales Leafstalk and midrib densely covered on ferruginous scales, leaf delt Leafstalk pate midrib sparsely covered i — 9°) wit rown, m- branaceous scales, leaf lance- olate. Blades tripinnate; paleaceous with dark brown or black linear scales. Indusium wanting. es ies to tripinnate. Midribs covered with abundant dark fibrillose scales. Blades coriaceous, punctate, with scattered resinous granules on their lower surfaces. es chartaceous with no_ resinous granules. Midribs smooth or merely pubescent with whitish hairs. Pinnules linear-lanceolate, acuminate, I cm. or more ee leafstalk stramineous. Pinnules oblon eae closely set; eafstalk att brow: Blades \ doemada ameter to auadiinat ‘Ultimate segments sharply sasha. primary and secondary midribs sien scaly. Ultimate segments entire or with appressed eeth, midribs stramineous, smooth or fibrillose. Basal scales of leafstalk mahogany- colored, spreading; sori submarginal. * Basal scales of leafstalk pale, appressed; sori medial. Veins connate. Leaf blades pinnate, under surface covered with resinous glands; sori submarginal; indusium present. S ie) S ~) D. S 8 nuda. . glabra. . latifrons. . parvula. . squamigera. . hawaitiensis. rubiginosa. honolulensis. . crinalts. Keraudreniana. rubiformis. . acutidens. unidentata. sandwicensis. . propingua. ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN IsLANps 591 Leaf blades pinnate to bipinnatifid, under surface without -resinous glands; sori variously placed; indusium present or wanting. Indusium presen Leaf blades SOR, basal pinnae reduced; under surface paleaceous with whitish hairs; sori medial upon secondary veins. D. parasitica. Leaf blades pinnate; basal pinnae not reduced; > under surface smooth; sori at base of second- ary veins, forming a row on either side of y veins. D. cyatheoides. Indusium absent or fugaciou Indusium absent; leaf a pinnate; under surface hairy as to veins and sori, D. stegnogrammoides. Indusium fugacious; leaf blades bipinnatifid; under surface not hairy D. truncata. DRYOPTERIS GLOBULIFERA (Brack.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 812. 1891 Lastraea globulifera Brack. Fil. U.S. Expl. Exp. 194. 1854. Nephrodium globuliferum Hook. Sp. Fil. 4: 96. 1862. Aspidium globuliferum Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 573. 1888. TYPE LocALITy: Hawaiian Islands. DIsTRIBUTION: At elevations of I,200-1,500 m., Hawaiian Islands. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Robinson 607 V; Wilkes Expe- dition N; Hillebrand B, C; Maui, Bailey C; Bishop B; Hillebrand B; Oahu, Lichtenthaler N; Robinson 67 V; 89 V; 525 V; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 67 C, N; Gaudichaud B; Hillebrand C; Kauai (var. bipinnata), Hillebrand 53 B. Dryopteris paleacea (Sw.) comb. nov. A spidium paleaceum Sw. Syn. Fil. 52. 1806. Aspidium parallelogrammum Kunze, Linnaea 13: 146. 1839. Dichasium parallelogrammum Fée, Mém. Foug. 5: 303. pl. 23. 1852. Lastraea truncata Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. 195. i. 27. 1854. TYPE LocaLity: Peru, South America. DistrIBUTION: On ground at lower elevations; Mexico to Peru; Hawaiian Islands. ILLUSTRATION: Fée, Mém. Foug. 5: pl. 23. 1852. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Robinson 618 V; Wilkes Expe- 292 ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS dition; Maui, Batley C; Hillebrand B; Robinson 385 V; Oahu, Gaudichaud B; Lichtenthaler N; Kauai, Bishop BM; Forbes 444 BM; Heller 2749 C, N; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 65 C, N. Dryopteris paleacea is closely allied to the widely distributed Dryopteris Filix-mas, but the crowded pinnae, the truncate form of the pinnules, the form and number of the scales of the rachis distinguish it from the more lax and open form of the latter. Dryopteris fusco-atra (Hilleb.) comb. nov. Aspidium Filix-mas var. fusco-atrum Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 575. 1888 TYPE LOCALITY: Hawaiian Islands. DisTRIBUTION: At high elevations, Hawaiian Islands. ILLUSTRATION: PLATE 42. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Maui, Hillebrand 24 B; Oahu, Forbes BM; Kauai, Bishop B; Heller 2589 C, N; 2746 C; Hillebrand C; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin B; Hillebrand 24 B; Mann ©& Brigham 255 N; Miss Sessions C. The lax character of the leaves and the dark color of the scales are excellent field marks by which to distinguish this fern from Dryopteris paleacea. DryYoPTERIS NUDA Underw. in Heller, Minn. Bot. Stud. 1: 780. 1896 Aspidium glabrum Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 576. 1888. (Not Mett.) TYPE LOCALITY: Kauai. DIsTRIBUTION: Hawaiian Islands. ILLUSTRATION: PLATE 43. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Robinson 251 V; Maui, Bishop B; Hillebrand B; Robinson 335 V; 339 V; 393 V; Oahu, Baldwin B; Hillebrand B; Robinson 1908 V; Kauai Heller 2750 (type) ©; Hillebrand B; Robinson 818 V. This fern strongly resembles Dryopteris spinulosa but is a much more compact, rigid form and has more acute ultimate divisions. DRYOPTERIS GLABRA (Brack.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. PI. 2: 812. 1891 Lastraea glabra Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. 200. 1854. Aspidium glabrum Mett. Aspid. 59. 1858. Aspidium glabrum var. quadripinnatum Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 576: 1888. ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OCF THE HAWAIIAN IsLanps 593 TYPE LOCALITY: Hawaii. DistTRIBUTION: High forests, Hawaiian Islands. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Wilkes Expedition N ; Robinson 208 V; 627 V; Maui, Bailey C; Lindley C; Robinson 374 V; 307 V; Oahu, Halerman 63 B; Kauai, Robinson 421 V. Wilkes’s specimen in the National Herbarium is labeled SDs nov.,’’ hence it is probably a cotype if not his type of Bracken- ridge’s Lastraea glabra. This is a much more graceful fern than Dryopteris nuda, which has been confused with it by some authors. DRYOPTERIS LATIFRONS (Brack.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 813. 1891 Lastraea latifrons Brack. Fil. U.S. Expl. Exp. 196. 1854. Nephrodium latifrons Hooker, Sp. Fil. 4: 138. 1862. Aspidium latifrons Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 217. 1868. TYPE LOCALITY: Hawaiian Islands. DISTRIBUTION: Common at elevations of 600—1,200 m., Hawai- ian Islands. . SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Maui, Bailey C; Lanai, Hillebrand B: Molokai, Hillebrand B; Oahu, Forbes 1082 BM ; Heller 2899 C, N; Lichtenthaler N; Mann & Brigham 189, 195, 196 N; Macrae C: Robinson 93 V; 172 V; 182 V; Wilkes Expedition N; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 69 B, C, N: 129 B; Gaudichaud B; Van Ingen C; ex herb. Kew C; ex Herb. John Donnell Smith 623 N; 624 N. Dryopteris parvula sp. nov. Aspidium glabrum var. pusillum Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 577. 1888. Not Dryopteris pusilla (Mett.) Kuntze. Caudex short, oblique, covered with linear-lanceolate, light brown scales 7-10 mm. long; leafstalk slender, 6-7 cm. long, grooved ventrally; blade chartaceous, ovate-oblong, 12-20 cm. long, bipinnate; lobes of pinnae spinulose, marginal cells trans- parent; both surfaces of blade and stipe covered with globular glands; veins free, simple or once forking; sori borne dorsally on the veins; indusium reniform; sporangia biconvex; spores reni- form, rugose. TYPE LOCALITY: Kauai, at 1,600—2,000 m. elevation. DIstrIBUTION: Hawaiian Islands. 594 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS ILLUSTRATION: PLATE 44. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Kauai, E. Johnson (type) B; Hawaiian Islands, Hillebrand C. This very delicate fern is a miniature Dryopteris glabra (Brack.) Kuntze in form but is easily distinguished from this plant by its glandular exterior in addition to its small size. DRYOPTERIS SQUAMIGERA (Hook. & Arn.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. PI. 2: 813. I8ol Nephrodium squamigerum Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. 106. 1832. Lastraea squamigera Brack. Fil. U.S. Expl. Exp. 198. 1854. Aspidium squamigerum Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 217. 1868. TYPE LOCALITY: Kaala Mountains, Oahu. DisTRIBUTION: At elevations of 600-1,200 m., Hawaiian Islands, Viti Islands, Society Islands; rare. ILLUSTRATION: Hook. Sp. Fil. 4: 270. 1862. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Oahu, Wilkes Expedition N; Kauai, Heller 2841 C, N; Lanai, Lichtenthaler N; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 70 C, N. Dryopteris hawaiiensis (Hilleb.) comb. nov. Aspidium hawatiense Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 575. 1888. Dryopteris Filix-mas C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 265. 1905. TYPE LocaLity: Mauna Kea, Hawaii. DIsTRIBUTION: Hawaiian Islands. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Mauna Kea, Hillebrand (type) B; Hawaii, Hamakua, Hillebrand B; Maui, Robinson 390 V; 395 Vi Oahu, Lichtenthaler N; Hawaiian Islands, ex Herb. John Donnell Smith N. DRYOPTERIS RUBIGINOSA (Brack.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 813+ 1891 Lastraea rubiginosa Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. 201. 1854. Nephrodium rubiginosum Hook. Sp. Fil. 4: 143. 1862. Aspidium rubiginosum Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 217. 1868. TYPE LOCALITY: Hawaiian Islands. DisTRIBUTION: Hawaiian Islands. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Hillebrand B; Robinson 285 V; 621 V; Wilkes Expedition (type) N; Molokai, Hillebrand B; ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN IsLANDS 595 Lichtenthaler N; Oahu, Hillebrand B; Robinson 1 36 V; Safford 900; Kauai, Hillebrand B. Dryopteris fijiense (Hook.) C.:Chr. is a closely related species but may be distinguished from D. rubiginosa (Brack.) Kuntze by its more open divisions, by the ciliated margin of its pinnules, and by its ciliated indusia, in contrast to the compact form and entire margins of the pinnules and indusia of D. rubiginosa. Compare Hook., A 2d Century of Ferns i. 67. 1861; also Hook. Sp. Fil. 4: 143. 1862. DRYOPTERIS HONOLULENSIS (Hook.) C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 274; 1905 Polypodium honolulense Hook. Sp. Fil. 4: 288. 1862. Polypodium Hillebrandii Hook. Sp. Fil. 4: 254, 1862. - i Not 4: 228. 1862.) Phegopteris honolulense Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 7s ato, . 1007; Phegopteris Hillebrandii Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 566. 1888.: TYPE LOCALITY: Oahu. DIsTRIBUTION: On ground at elevations of 700-1,300 m., Hawaiian Islands. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Kauai, Robinson 383 V; Lanai, Hille- brand B, C; Molokai, Hillebrand B, C; Oahu, Hillebrand B,C; Remy B; Robinson 170 V; Kauai, Hillebrand B; Robinson $21; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 77 B, C; Lydgate B. There is a strong superficial resemblance between Dryopteris honolulensis (Hook.) C. Chr. and Dryopteris latifrons Brack., but the small submarginal, naked sori distinguish the former. DRYOPTERIS CRINALIS (Hook. & Arn.) C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 259. 1905 Polypodium crinale Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. 105. 1841. Phegopteris crinalis Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 218. 1867. TYPE LOCALITY: Oahu. DIsTRIBUTION: Hawaiian Islands. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Hillebrand B, C; Molokai, Hillebrand B; Kauai, Forbes 269 BM; Johnson B; Heller 2587 C; Robinson 412 V; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 75 C; Baldwin B; Baldwin V. Young specimens of D. crinalis are gray green in color, while mature specimens are rusty in appearance owing to the leathery texture and scaly under surface of the leaves. 596 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS DRYOPTERIS KERAUDRENIANA (Gaud.) C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 272. 1905 Polypodium Keraudrenianum Gaud. Voy. Freyc. Bot. 362. 1829. Phegopterts Keraudreniana Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 218. 1867. Nephrodium Keraudrenianum (Gaud.) Diels in E. & P. Nat. Pfl. 1*: 177. 1899. TYPE LOCALITY: Hawaiian Islands. DIsTRIBUTION: In forests, Hawaiian Islands. ILLUSTRATION: Gaud. Voy. Freyc. Bot. pl. 7. 1829. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Robinson 336 V; Wilkes Expedi- tion C; Maui, Hillebrand B; Molokai, Hillebrand B; Kauai, Forbes 96 BM; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 78 C; Baldwin V; Gaudichaud (type) B; Hillebrand B, C. Although Dryopteris Keraudreniana and Dryopteris rubiformis are very similar in habit, they may be easily distinguished by the stramineous midrib and broad lanceolate pinnae of the former in contrast with the reddish midrib and narrow linear pinnae of the latter. Both support their weight by the attachment of the tips of the leaves to other plants, in a vinelike coil. If the leaf curves so that the end finally reaches the soil, it does not take root. . Hillebrand’s variety tripinnata (Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. oe 1888) has toothed segments in its pinnules, but this difference 1s too slight to warrant its separation from the species. Dryopteris rubiformis nom. nov. Polypodium procerum Brack. Fil. U.S. Expl. Exp. 14. 1854. Not Dryopteris procera (Baker) Kuntze. Phegopteris Keraudreniana var. procera Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 562. 1888 TYPE LocaLity: Hawaiian Islands. 3 DisTRIBUTION: In open places on the mountain sides, Hawat- ian Islands. ILLUSTRATION: Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. pl. 3. 1854- SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Maui, Hillebrand B; Kauai, Robinson 423 V; 829 V; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 04 C; Wilkes Expedition & The reddish stem and midrib of this fern, together with its tendency to curve and rest its weight upon other plants 1m 4 ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 4597 thicket, suggest the appearance of blackberry vines by the road- side. The type was collected upon the U. S. Exploring Expedition of 1854. DRYOPTERIS ACUTIDENS C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 250. 1906 Phegopteris spinulosa Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 566. 1888. Not Dryopteris spinulosa (Miill.) Kuntze. Polypodium spinulosum Baker, Ann. Bot. 5: 459. 1801. TYPE LOCALITY: Southern slope of Haleakala, Maui. DisTriBuTION: Along banks of streams, at elevations of 400- 1,400 m., Hawaiian Islands. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Hillebrand B, C; Oahu, Robin- son 177 V; Maui, Hillebrand B, C; Robinson 384 V; 604 V; 614 V; Kauai, Heller 2874 C; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 76 C; Hillebrand B; Lydgate B. There is a marked superficial resemblance between D. acutidens C. Chr. and the North American D. dilatata (Hoffm.) A. Gray, but there is no trace of an indusial covering for the sorus in the youngest specimens of D. acutidens. DRYOPTERIS UNIDENTATA (Hook. & Arn.) C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 299. 1905 Polypodium unidentatum Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. 105. 1832. Phegopteris unidentata J. Sm. Ferns Brit. & For. 170. 1866. Nephrodium unidentatum Diels in E. & P. Nat. Pfl. 14: 174. 1899. TYPE LOcALITY: Hawaiian Islands. DIsTRIBUTION: In forests at 600—1,200 m. elevation, Hawaiian Islands. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Hillebrand B; Maui, Hille- brand B, C; Molokai, Hillebrand B, C; Oahu, Robinson 104 V; Kauai, Hillebrand B, C; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 79 B, C; Gaudichaud B; Hillebrand B; Baldwin V. Hillebrand’s variety paleacea of this fern is apparently a form that has arisen from ecological causes rather than a stable variation; thus the tall habit and light color are characteristic of the plants growing in the deep forest at higher elevations than that of the dark green plants with short caudex. 598 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS DRYOPTERIS SANDWICENSIS (Hook. & Arn.) C. Chr. Ind. Fil. 290. ee 1905 Polypodium sandwicense Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. 105. 1832. Phegopteris sandwicensis Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 7: 218. 1867. TYPE LOCALITY: Hawaiian Islands. DISTRIBUTION: In forests, Hawaiian Islands, Viti Islands, and Pitcairn Island. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Hillebrand B; Maui, Hillebrand B; Lanai, Hillebrand B; Molokai, Hillebrand B, C; Oahu, Hille- brand B, C; Kauai, Heller 2838 C; Hillebrand 66 B; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 79a B; Hillebrand B; Knudsen 158 B; 150 B; 160 B; Lydgate B. DRYOPTERIS PROPINQUA (R. Br.) Gilb. Bull. Torrey Club 23: 454- 1896 Aspidium unitum Sw. Jour. Bot. Schrad. 18007: 32. 1801. Not Dryopteris unita (L.) Kuntze. Nephrodium propinquum R. Br. Prod. Fl. N. Holl. 148. 1810. Aspidium resiniferum Kaulf. Enum. 237. 1824. Aspidium propinquum Sw. Adnot. 67. 1829. Nephrodium resiniferum Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. 105. 1832- Aspidium Ecklonii Kunze, Linnaea 10: 546. 1836. Nephrodium Ecklonii Presl, Epim. 49. 1849. TYPE Locaity: Australia. DistRIBUTION: Very common in swamps in tropical countries. ILLUSTRATION: Schkuhr, Krypt. Gew. pl. 33). 1809. : SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Oahu, Beechey C; Robinsen 90 V; Maut, E. Bailey C; Kauai, Forbes 37 BM; Heller 2594 C; Robinson 405V; 467 V; 474 V; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 66 B, C; Gulick B; Hillebrand B. Dryopteris propinqua has caused much confusion because cet tain transitory characters, such as the hairs on the surface of the leaf and at the margin of the indusium, have been considered as specific. ; ; This species is rarely in fruit though it grows abundantly 1n the roadside ditches from sea level to 1,500 m. elevation. DRYOPTERIS PARASITICA (L.)K untze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 811. ie Polypodium parasiticum L. Sp. Pl. 1090. 1753. ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HawallAN IsLanps 599 Polypodium dentatum Forsk. F1. Aeg.-arab. 185. 1775. Polypodium nymphale Forst. Prod. 81. 1786. Polypodium molle Jacq. Coll. Bot. 3: 188. 1789. (Not Schreb. 1771 nor All. 1785.) Aspidium molle Sw. Jour. Bot. Schrad. 18002: 34. 1801. Aspidium parasiticum Sw. Jour. Bot. Schrad. 18002: 35. I8or. Aspidium patens Sw. Jour. Bot. Schrad. 1801': 280. 1803. Aspidium nymphale Schkuhr, Krypt. Gew. 1: 36. pl. 34. 1806. Nephrodium molle R. Br. Prod. Fl. N. Holl. 149. 1810. Nephrodium parasiticum Desv. Mém. Soc. Linn. 6: 258. 1827. Nephrodium nymphale Desv. Mém. Soc. Linn. 6: 258. 1827. Polystichum molle Gaud. Voy. F reyc. Bot. 326. 1828. Aspidium violascens Link, Hort. Berol. 2: ES. 38335: Nephrodium violascens Fée, Mém. F oug. 5: 305. 1852. TYPE LOCALITY: India. DIsTRIBUTION: In open places between 1,400-1,600 m. eleva- tion. Tropics, subtropics, and New Zealand. ILLUSTRATIONS: Rheede, Hist. Hort. Malab. 12: 7. 1753: Schkuhr, Krypt. Gew. pl. 34. 1806. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Robinson 223 V; Oahu, Heller 2011 C; Robinson 170 V; 188 V; 192 V; Kauai, Robinson 800 V; 805 V; 811 V. There is a marked superficial resemblance between Dryopteris parasitica and D. globulifera, but the former is distinguished by its hairy epidermis and indusia in addition to the short lobes of its pinnae, while the latter has glands upon its epidermis and indusia, and its pinnae are deeply cut. DRYOPTERIS CYATHEOIDES (Kaulf.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 812. 1891 Aspidium cyatheoides Kaulf. Enum. Fil. 234. 1824. Polystichum Dubrueilianum Gaud. Freyc. Voy. Bot. 333. 1828. Nephrodium Dubrueilianum Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. 105. 1832. Nephrodium cyatheoides Presl, Tent. Pterid. 81. 1836. Aspidium cyatheoides Mett. Aspid. 110. 1858. TYPE LOCALITY: Oahu. ; DIstRIBUTION: On ground in the lower forests and along rivers, Hawaiian Islands, New Guinea, Sumatra. 600 RoBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS ILLUSTRATIONS: Gaud. Voy. Freyc. Bot. pl. 9. 1828; Presl, Tent. Pterid. pl. 2. f. 5. 1836; Hook. Sp. Fil. 4: pl. 247, 1862. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Robinson 232 V; Wilkes Expe- dition C; Molokai, Hillebrand B; Oahu, Anderson B; Bennett 11 B; Bennett B; Chamisso B; Heller 1991 C, N; Lichtenthaler N; Macrae B; Meyen B; Remy 13 C; Robinson 21 V; Wilkes Ex- pedition N; Kauai, Heller 2857 C; Hillebrand 85 B; 87 B; Mann & Brigham 152 N; Wilkes Expedition N; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin B, C; 63 C; Beechey C; Wilkes Expedition C; Gaudichaud B; Lindley C; Miss Sessions C; Wilkes Expedition B; ex herb. Kew Gardens 2 specimens C, The tips of young leaves of this fern are eaten by the Hawaiian natives as a salad. There is an interesting superficial resemblance between Dryop- teris cyatheoides and D. stegnogrammotdes. DRYOPTERIS STEGNOGRAMMOIDES (Baker) C. Chr, Ind. Fil. 294. 1905 Polypodium polycarpon Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. 104. 1832. Not Swartz. Stegnogramma sandwicense Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. 26. pl. 4. 1854. Not Dryopteris sandwicensis C. Chr. Polypodium sandwicense Hook. Sp. Fil. 5: 5. 1864. (Not 4: 267. 1862.) Polypodium stegnogrammoides Baker, Syn. Fil. 317. 1867. Phegopteris microdendron D. C. Eaton in Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. P7216. 1867. Nephrodium polycarpon Diels in E. & P. Nat. Pfl. 14: 179. 1899. TYPE LOCALITY: Hawaiian Islands. DISTRIBUTION: Hawaiian Islands. ILLUSTRATION: Brack. Fil. U. S. Expl. Exp. pl. 4. 1854. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Robinson 617 V; Molokai, Hillebrand B; Lindley C; Macrae B; Kauai, Forbes 239 BM; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin B; Gaudichaud B. ' Hillebrand (Fil. Haw. Is. 560. 1888) describes the caudex of Dryopteris stegnogrammoides as erect, but the specimens collected by the writer had prostrate rootstocks. His variety depauperata probably owes its decreased size and pubescence to its expose ROBINSON: PTERIDOPHYTA OF THE HAWAIIAN IsLANps 601 situation upon the rocks, a theory which seems the more tenable from his statement that a corresponding form of Dryopteris cyatheoides is associated with this variety of D. stegnogrammoides in such localities. DRYOPTERIS TRUNCATA (Poir.) Kuntze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 2: 814. 1891 Polystichum truncatum Gaud. Voy. Freyc. Bot. 332. pl. ro. 1828. Nephrodium truncatum Presl, Tent. Pterid. 81. 1836. Nephrodium Hudsonianum Brack. U. S. Expl. Exp. 189. pl. 25. 1854. Aspidium Hudsonianum Mann, Proc. Am. Acad. 72 317. 18G7. TYPE LocaLity: Brazil. DistTRIBUTION: Malaysia, Polynesia, Ceylon, Northern India, Brazil. ILLUSTRATIONS: Gaud. Voy. Freyc. Bot. pl. 10. 1828; Brack. Fil. U.S. Expl. Exp. pl. 25. 1854 SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Hawaii, Wilkes Expedition N; Oahu, Heller 2334 C, N; Mann & Brigham N; Robinson 152 V; 192 V; 522 V; 523 V; Safford 869 N; 870 N; Maui, Bailey C; Kauai, Heller 2843 C, N; Hillebrand B; Hawaiian Islands, Baldwin 64 B; C; 65 B; (Baldwin) V; Gaudichaud B. Poiret gives the habitat of Dryopteris truncata as Brazil. Baker (Syn. Fil. 295. 1874) gives a range of distribution through the subtropics, which Christensen follows. The representation of this genus in the herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden does not indicate that this is so cosmopolitan a species. ‘i Sores = poy eras ate oa iv seg New West Indian Lejeuneae—ll ALEXANDER W. EVANS (WITH PLATE 45) In the first paper of this series, published in the BULLETIN for August 1908, six species of Lejeuneae from various islands of the West Indies were described and figured. One of these species, Leiolejeunea grandiflora, was proposed as the type of a new genus; the others belonged to genera that had been more or less fully discussed by the writer in a series of papers on the Hepaticae of Puerto Rico.* In the present paper three additional species are considered, all from the island of Jamaica. The genera to which they belong, Diplasiolejeunea, Leptocolea, and Rectolejewnea, are likewise among those discussed in connection with the Puerto Rico Hepaticae. The type specimens of the new species are preserved in the herbarium of the writer at New Haven, Con- necticut. Diplasiolejeunea Johnsonii sp. nov. Pale green or yellowish, growing in depressed mats: stems 0.12 mm. in diameter, abundantly but irregularly branched, the branches obliquely spreading, similar to the stem but usually with smaller leaves: leaves of stems and leading branches closely im- bricated, the lobe obliquely to widely spreading, distinctly convex, the margin usually revolute in apical and postical portions, orbicular-ovate, 1.1-1.5 mm. long, I-1.2 mm. wide, antical margin rounded at the base and arching across the axis, outwardly curved to the broad and rounded apex, postical margin also curved; lobule inflated in carinal portion, otherwise more or less appressed to the lobe, obovate, 0.75 mm. long, 0.4 mm. wide, keel arched, forming a continuous line with the revolute portion of the lobe, free margin scarcely involute except at the very base, apical tooth obliquely spreading, triangular, acute or obtuse, tipped by a single conical or rounded cell, rarely by two superimposed cells, mostly four or five cells long and three to five cells wide at the base, proximal tooth obtuse and much shorter, usually consisting of a single projecting cell reinforced by a second cell coalescent with * Bull. Torrey Club 29: 496. 1902. Et seq. 603 604 Evans: New WEst INDIAN LEJEUNEAE the inner surface of the lobule, hyaline papilla usually distal: cells of lobe averaging about 18u at the margin and 30 X 25y in the median and basal portions, walls more or less thickened, with small but distinct triangular trigones and occasional intermediate thickenings: underleaves contiguous or subimbricated, broadly cuneate, about 0.3 mm. long (0.15 mm. to the bottom of the sinus) and 0.45 mm. wide, bifid about one half with broad and rounded obliquely spreading divisions and an acute sinus: inflorescence autoicous: 9 inflorescence borne on a leading branch or on a more or less abbreviated branch, the innovation usually simple and sterile but sometimes bearing a second female flower; bracts obliquely spreading, sharply complicate, the keel with a very narrow wing, bifid about one fourth, the lobe narrowly oblong- obovate, 0.75 X 0.18 mm., rounded at the apex, lobule a little shorter and narrower, 0.68 X 0.15 mm., rounded at the apex; bracteole ovate, 0.68 mm. long, 0.3 mm. wide, bifid about one eighth with erect rounded to obtuse divisions and a broad obtuse sinus; perianth oblong-obovate, 1.1 mm. long, 0.6 mm. wide, trun- cate at the apex and with a very short beak, more or less compressed and sharply five-keeled: ¢ inflorescence occupying a short branch, not proliferating; bracts mostly in from four to six pairs, im- bricated, inflated, subequally bifid with a strongly arched keel and rounded divisions: bracteoles oblong-quadrate, bifid about one third with rounded divisions: mature sporophyte not seen. (PLATE 45, FIGURES 1-6.) On bark of trees. Jamaica: Cinchona, D. S. Johnson (14), April 1903; Evans (250 in part), July 1903. No. 14 may be designated the type. It can not be stated with certainty whether D. Johnsonti is gemmiparous or not. A few young gemmae were observed on the lower surface of a single lobe, but they may not have devel- oped in this situation. The species is characterized by the strongly convex lobes with the apical and postical margins tending to be revolute, by the peculiar teeth of the lobules, by the broad and rounded divisions of the underleaves, by the autoicous inflores- cence, and by the rounded divisions of the perichaetial bracts and bracteoles. The revolute portion of the lobe usually involves the junction of the lobe with the lobule, one effect being that the end of the sinus is displaced to the lower surface of the lobe. The apical tooth of the lobule is in the form of a triangle about as broad as high, and the apex is sometimes slightly curved to one side. The proximal tooth looks at first as if jt were composed of a Evans: NEw WEstT INDIAN LEJEUNEAE 605 single projecting cell. Closer inspection, however, shows that the conditions are more complicated, and that a second cell on the inner surface of the lobule is coalescent with this projecting cell and with the two cells at its base. In other words the lobule is two cells thick where the proximal tooth is situated, a peculiarity which has not yet been recorded in any other member of the genus. The divisions of the underleaves often attain a width of from ten to twelve cells. » Five species of Diplasiolejeunea are now definitely known from Jamaica, the others being D. pellucida (Meissn.) Schiffn., D. brachyclada Evans, D. unidentata (Lehm. & Lindenb.) Schiffn., and D. Rudolphiana Steph. Since these species occur also in Puerto Rico, they have been described and figured by the writer.* Two of them, D. brachyclada and D. Rudolphiana, agree with D. John- sonti in being autoicous, while the two others are definitely dioic- ous. In D. Rudolphiana and D. unidentata, which seem to be closely related to the new species, the lobes of the leaves, although convex, are not revolute in the vicinity of the keel, so that the end of the sinus is not displaced. The underleaves in these two species have much in common with those of D. Johnsonti, and their divisions are fully as broad; they show, however, a distinct nar- rowing toward the apex. Their lobular teeth show much more striking differences. In D. Rudolphiana the apical tooth is re- markably long and slender and is usually subparallel with the axis instead of being broadly triangular and spreading obliquely. In D. unidentata the tooth is oblique and about as long as in D- Johnsonii, but it is more slender and is usually tipped with two superimposed cells, a condition rarely found in the new species. The most important differences in the proximal teeth have already been mentioned. In the material collected by the writer D brachyclada grows mixed with D. Johnsonii, but the two species are amply distinct. The underleaves of D. brachyclada have narrow and sharply pointed divisions, the apical teeth of the lobules are often truncate or t-shaped and are usually only one cell broad, the perichaetial bracts and bracteoles are more deeply bifid, and the divisions of the latter are acute. Similar differences * Bull. Torrey Club 39: 209-225. pl. 16,17. 1912. 606 Evans: NEw WEst INDIAN LEJEUNEAE will separate D. Johnsonii from D. pellucida, which latter, more- over, almost invariably grows on leaves. Leptocolea appressa sp. nov. Pale green, growing in closely appressed mats: stems 0.05 mm. in diameter, sparingly and irregularly pinnate, the branches ob- liquely spreading, similar to the stem but with somewhat smaller leaves: stem leaves imbricated, the lobe widely spreading, falcate, ovate-oblong, 0.5-0.6 mm. long, 0.3-0.4 mm. wide, broad and rounded at the apex, antical margin arching considerably beyond® the axis, strongly outwardly curved from base to apex, postical margin straight or slightly curved, forming a rounded indentation with the keel, margin very minutely crenulate from projecting verruculae; lobule inflated throughout, ovate, 0.14 mm. long, 0.08 mm. wide, keel arched, apical tooth consisting of two cells in a row, proximal tooth shorter, consisting of a sharp or blunt pro- jecting cell, teeth separated by a very narrow sinus containing a marginal hyaline papilla; stylus (at base of lobule) consisting of a papilla; cells of lobe averaging 5u at the margin, 9 X 7y in the middle, and 20 X 7u at the base, wall more or less uniformly thickened but without distinct trigones except in median and basal regions, each cell bearing a median verrucula on the free outer wall except in the basal portion of the leaf; ocelli usually four, arranged in a short median row and averaging about 35 X 23u: inflorescence autoicous (but many plants apparently unisexual): 9 inflorescence borne on a more or less elongated branch, innovating on one side, the innovation usually short and sterile; bracts obliquely spread- ing, complicate, keel sharp but without a wing, lobe oblong- obovate, 0.45 mm. long, 0.25 mm. wide, rounded at the apex, margin as in the leaves, ocelli several, forming an elongated patch several cells wide, lobule obovate, 0.25 mm. long, 0.2 mm. wide, rounded and irregularly dentate at the apex; perianth about one fourth exserted, obovate, 0.45 mm. long, 0.4 mm. wide, truncate at the apex with a distinct beak, five-keeled in the upper part, the lateral keels sharp, antical keel low and short. postical keels obtuse but extending almost to the base, lateral keels minutely and irregularly denticulate from projecting cells, surface otherwise On bark of trees. Jamaica: John Crow Peak, Evans (104), Evans: New West INDIAN LEJEUNEAE 607 July 1903; Clyde Valley, Evans (270), July 1903. No. 104. may be considered the type. Although L. appressa is fairly large it is not conspicuous be- cause both stems and leaves are firmly appressed to the bark. The ocelli form a striking feature of the species and are almost always arranged in a row of four, extending from the base of the lobe outward and thus simulating a short nerve (FIGURE 8). Thecon- trast in size between the ocelli and the adjacent leaf cells is usually marked but sometimes, especially on the carinal side of the row, one or two series of cells are distinctly elongated and form a sort of transition between the ocelli and the ordinary cells. Occa- sionally similar elongated cells are to be observed in small number near the outer extremity of the row. The peculiar contents of the ocelli, however, will serve to distinguish them in case of doubt. The new species produces gemmae in greater or less abundance, and these agree in method of development and in general structure with those found in other members of the genus.* Each consists at maturity of a flat broadly orbicular disk, about 0.07 mm. long and 0.09 mm. wide (FIGURE 16). The margin is very vaguely crenu- late from projecting cells, there are three organs of attachment, and each half of the gemma shows twelve cells, their relative position indicating that the apical quadrants in the young gemma cut off four segments apiece... The gemmae bear a marked resemblance to those of Leptocolea scabriflora (Gottsche) Evans, a widely distributed species in the American tropics. A close relative of L. appressa is Leptocolea floccosa (Lehm. & Lindenb.) comb. nov.,f a species originally described from the Philippines but since reported from both Java and Japan. In this species, which grows on leaves, the plants are closely appressed, just as in L. appressa, the ocelli (usually four in number) form a short false nerve, and the outer surfaces of the leaves are minutely roughened by rounded verruculae borne singly on the cells. The East Indian plant, however, is somewhat smaller, the lobes measur- *For a discussion of the genus Lepfocolea see Evans, Bull. Torrey Club 38: 251-286. pl. 11, 12. t= Soo aa fac amine & Lindenb. in ee Pug. Plant. §: 26. 1832. a floce Lehm. & Lindenb. in G. L. & N. Syn. Hep. 324. 1845. Lejeunea PRP floccosa ey Hedwigia 29: et 1890. Cololejeunea floccosa Schiffn. Conspect. Hepat. Archip. Indici 243. 1898. 608 Evans: New West INDIAN LEJEUNEAE ing about 0.35 X 0.25 mm. or even less, the lobes are less falcate and spread more obliquely, the leaf cells are a little larger, averag- ing about 12 X 8u in the middle of the lobe, the margin is entire, and the lobes are bordered by a smooth band from three to five cells wide except near the end of the keel, where it is narrower. According to Schiffner the lobule in L. floccosa is unidentate, but the specimens from Japan, which agree in all other respects with Schiffner’s description and figures,* show bidentate lobules as in most members of the genus. The proximal tooth is remarkable in being the longer of the two, measuring from two to four cells in length and two or three cells in width at the base. It is sharply acute or even acuminate and is either straight, when it continues the free margin, or else it is more or less strongly curved toward the end of the keel. An exceedingly short indentation separates the proximal from the apical tooth. The latter consists normally of two cells, as in L. appressa, but is sometimes reduced to a single cell. Instead of spreading widely from the margin it extends toward the proximal tooth, thus tending to fill up the indentation between them and making it difficult todemonstrate. The hyaline papilla could not be clearly made out in the fragmentary material examined by the writer. Two other species which are apparently close to L. appressa are Lejeunea (Colo-Lejeunea) platyneura Spruce,t of Brazil, and Cololejeunea peraffinis Schiffn:,t of Java. Both are known to the writer by description only but should probably be referred to the genus Leptocolea. They are distinguished by false nerves com- posed of ocelli, but these are arranged in two or more rows instead of in a single row. Lejewnea platynenra grows on leaves, its leaf cells are considerably larger than in L. appressa, measuring in the middle of the lobe 25-334 (according to Spruce), and there are further differences in the bracts. In C. affinis the median leaf cells measure about 14 X 8u (according to Schiffner), and the lobular teeth are more complex than in L. appressa. * Nova Acta Acad. Caes. te -Carol. 60: 242. pl. 9, f. 11-13. 1893. t Hep. Amaz. et And. 299 t Nova Acta Acad. Caes. eC, 6o: 242. pl. 9. f. 8-10. 1893. Evans: New WEstT INDIAN LEJEUNEAE 609 Rectolejeunea Maxonii sp. nov. Pale green, becoming whitish or yellowish with age, growing in depressed mats: stems 0.05 mm. in diameter, copiously and irregularly branched, the branches widely spreading, usually simi- lar to the stem but occasionally microphyllous: leaves loosely imbricated, the lobe plane, widely spreading, slightly falcate, broadly ovate, 0.5 mm. long, 0.4 mm. wide, antical margin more or less rounded at the base, then strongly outwardly curved to the broad and rounded apex, postical margin slightly curved or straight, forming a continuous line with the keel or slightly indented at the junction, margin slightly and irregularly crenulate from projecting cells; lobule usually well developed, inflated, broadly ovate, 0.1 mm. long, 0.09 mm. wide, keel more or less arched, free margin involute to the apex, apical tooth short and straight, hyaline papilla in a shallow indentation, sinus slightly lunulate; cells of lobe plane or more or less convex, averaging about 12u at the margin, 22y in the middle, and 27 X 22u at the base, apparently uniformly thickened but showing upon careful focusing minute trigones and rare intermediate thickenings; ocelli none: underleaves distant, orbicular, about 0.17 mm. long, bifid about one half with erect, usually obtuse or rounded divisions and an obtuse to acute sinus, cuneate at the base, margin entire or vaguely and irregularly crenulate from projecting cells: in- Roredceue: dioicous: 2 inflorescence sometimes borne on a leading branch, sometimes on a more or less abbreviated branch, in- novating on one side, the innovation sometimes simple and sterile but often soon again floriferous; bracts obliquely spreading, com- plicate, the keel sharp but not winged, lobe plane or nearly so, oblong-ovate to oblong-obovate, 0.5—0.6 mm. long, 0.35 mm. wide, rounded at the apex or very obtusely pointed, lobule ovate to oblong, 0.3 mm. long, 0.15 mm. wide, obtuse to rounded at the apex, margin of bracts as in the leaves; bracteole free from the bracts, ovate to obovate, 0.45 mm. long, 0.3 mm. wide, bifid about one third with rounded to subacute divisions and a narrow acute sinus; perianth about half exserted, obovate, 0.75 m long, 0.55 mm. wide, slightly emarginate at the apex with a chert but distinct beak, the upper angles rounded, cuneate at the base, compressed, antical keel low and short, postical keel long, two- angled, surface smooth or (especially along the keels) slightly and irregularly roughened from projecting cells: o inflorescence at first terminal on a more or less elongated branch but soon be- coming intercalary through apical proliferation; bracts mostly in from two to six pairs, slightly imbricated, strongly inflated with an arched keel, shortly bifid with rounded divisions, the lobule 610 Evans: New West INDIAN LEJEUNEAE a little shorter than the lobe; bracteoles similar to the underleaves but smaller, restricted to the base of the inflorescence: capsule about 0.3 mm. in diameter; spores greenish, minutely verruculose, irregular in form, about I2u in short diameter; elaters about Ou in diameter, with a single spiral. (PLATE 45, FIGURES 17-27.) On bark of trees. Jamaica: Cinchona, L. M. Underwood (495), February 1903; W. R. Maxon (7361), April 1903; Evans (243 in part), July 1903. No. 1361 may be regarded as the type. The microphyllous branches mentioned in the description are not abundant in the material examined, and little can be said in regard to their significance. In typical cases a branch of this char- acter (FIGURE 18) exhibits the peculiarities associated with the genus Microlejeunea. The lobes of the leaves are ovate and suberect and measure only 0.18 X 0.11 mm., while the lobules are relatively large and measure about 0.13 X 0.1mm. Such leaves are not very different from the rudimentary leaves found at the base of an ordinary branch, and it is possible that a microphyllous branch is simply one in which juvenile characters persist. Although similar branches have not yet been observed in other members of the genus, their occurrence would not be surprising. A short time ago the writer proposed a new species of Rectole- jeunea from the Bahama Islands, under the name R. Brittoniae,* and pointed out its close relationship to the widely distributed R. phyllobola (Nees & Mont.) Evans.t The new plant from Jamaica belongs in the same group of species. In its dioicous inflorescence it agrees with R. Brittoniae and differs from R. phyllo- bola; in the restriction of its perigonial bracteoles to the base of the spike it agrees with R. phyllobola and differs from R. Brittoniae. Vegetative reproduction is apparently of rare occurrence in R. Maxonti. When it takes place it is by means of caducous leaves, just as in the other known members of the genus, but these leaves are not borne on specialized shoots. In this respect, as well as in most of the characters drawn from the leaves, leaf cells, and perianths, it agrees further with R. Brittoniae and R. phyllobola. The underleaves, however, afford a few additional differences. el ee ae * Bull. Torrey Club 38: 209. pl. 9. f. 1-12. 1o01T. Tt For a discussion of the genus Rectolejeunea see Evans, Bull. Torrey Club 33* I-16. 21. 7,2. 1006. Evans: New WEst INDIAN LEJEUNEAE 611 They are somewhat smaller than those of R. Brittoniae but re- semble them more closely in other respects than they do those of R. phyllobola. Their divisions are broad and triangular and are usually tipped with a single cell, making them obtuse (FIGURE 22), in rarer cases they are distinctly rounded at the apex (FIGURE 23), while in still rarer cases they are acute and tipped with two super- imposed cells (FIGURE 24). This last condition, it will be re- membered, is the usual one in R. phyllobola. YALE UNIVERSITY. Explanation of plate 45 The figures were drawn g& . writer, and most of them were prepared for publication by Mr. Stanley C. Diplasiolejeunea Johnsonii Same 1. End of a vigorous shoot, postical view, Maa a es tooth of a lobule, Sr 3. Proximal tooth of the same lobule, 200. x of an underleaf division, X200. 5, 6. Bract and bracteole from a single inv phot X35. The figures were all coon from the type specimen. eptocolea appressa Evans. 7. Stem bearing a female branch with a perianth, postical view, X35. 8. leaf, antical view, X35. 9. Cells from middle of lobe, X265. 10. Cells from rags of lobe, X265. 11. ee of a row of ocelli with neighboring cells, X265. . Apex of lobule, X265. 13, 14. Bracts from a 8 involucre, X45. 1h tie section of perianth in upper third, 5 Gemma, X265. "The figures were all drawn from the type speci Rectolejeunea Maxonii Evans. 17. Part of a plant with two ae inflorescences and a eB postical view, X35. 18. Part of a microphyllous branch, postical view, ee . Cells from middle of lobe, X265. 20. Cells from margin of lobe, 200. x of an underleaf division, typical structure, X200. 23, . Apices of cael divisions, deviations from the typical structure, X200. 25, Bract and bracteole from a single involucre, X35. 27. Transverse section of a care near apex, X35. The figures were all drawn from the type specimen. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE (1912) aim of this Index is to include all current botanical literature written by Americans, published in America, or based upon American material ; the word Amer- ica pte used in the broadest sense. eviews, and papers that relate exclusively to forestry, agriculture, horticulture, cies products of vegetable origin, or laboratory methods are not included, an no attempt is made to index the literature of bacteriology. An occasional exception is Reprint some important particular. If users of the Index will call the attention of the editor to errors or omissions, their kindness will be appreciated. This bn dex is reprinted monthly on cards, and furnished in this form to subscribers at the rate of one cent for each card. Selections of cards are not permitted ; each ere must take all cards published during the term of his subscription, Corre- spondence relating to the card issue should be addressed to the Treasurer of the Torrey Botanical Club, Anderson, W. A. Occurrence of Euphorbia lorifolia and tapping experi- ments. Hawaii Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 37: 14-16. 8 Au 1912. Andrews, A.L. Notes on North American Sphagnum, III. Bryologist 15: 63-66. Jl 1912; 70-74. S 1912. Bachmann, F. M. A new type of spermogonium and fertilization in Collema. Ann. Bot. 26: 747-760. pl. 69. Jl 1912. Bailey, I. W. The evolutionary history of the foliar ray in the wood of the dicotyledons: and its phylogenetic significance. Ann. Bot. 26: 647-661. pl. 62, 63. Jl 1912. Bailey, W. W. Some interesting April flowers. Am, Bot. 18: 66-69. Au 1912. Baker, C. F., & Essig, E. O. Host index to California Coccidae. Monthly Bull. State Com. Hort. California 1: 740-763. S 1912. Barbour, J. H. Sacred plants of India. Proc. & Trans. Nova Scotian Inst. Sci. 13: xxviii—xlii. 26 Au 1912. Blake, S. F. Sisymbrium officinale in three states. Rhodora 14: 190- Bédeker, F. Reisebeobachtungen, -erfahrungen und -betrachtungen. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 137-143. 15S 1912. Britton, E.G. Wild plants needing protection. 4. ‘Wild columbine” (Aquilegia canadensis L.). Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 13: 123, 124. pl. 98 Au1gi2; 5. ‘“Bird’s-foot violet” (Viola pedata L.). Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 13: 135, 136. pl. 99. S 1912. 613 614 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Brown, N. E. Philodendron Broadwayi. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. 1912: 343, 344. S 1912. A plant from the West Indies. Brown, N. E. Xanthosoma cordifolium. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. 1912: RES. SOL: A plant from British Guiana. Brown, P. E. Bacteriological studies of field soils—I. The effects of liming. Centralb. Bakt. Zweite Abt. 35: 234-248. 16 S 1912; —II. The effects of continuous cropping and various rotations. Centralb. Bakt. Zweite Abt. 35: 248-272. 16S 1912. Castillo, L. Ensayo de biolojia comparada entre plantas i animales. Bol. Bosques, Pesca i Caza 1: 46-54. Jl 1912. Clapp, G. L. The life history of Aneura pinguis. Bot. Gaz. 54: 177- 193. pli O-T2. 21S 1912. Clarke, C. H. A suggestion for summer observations. Rhodora 14: 177-184. pl. 97-99. 30S 1912. Clute, W. N. Nephrodium deltoideum. Fern Bull. 20: 20, 21. Au 1912. [Illust.] Clute, W. N. Phlox argillacea. Am. Bot. 18: 65, 66. Au 1912. [Illust.] [Clute, W. N.] Pteridographia. Fern Bull. 20: 26-28. Au 1912. Contai t (1) New Panama club mosses. (2) Filmy ferns in dry regions. (3) The bracken as a weed. (4) Alaska fern. (5) Woodwardia on Cape Cod. [Clute, W. N.] Rare forms of fernworts—XXI. Another form of the Christmas fern. Fern Bull. 20: 24, 25. Au 1912. ° Clute, W. N. The yellow butterfly weed. Am. Bot. 18: 71-73. Au Cockerell, T. D. A. Tragopogon in Colorado. Torreya 12: 244-247- 4 O 1912. Coons, G. H. Some investigations of the cedar rust fungus—Gymno- sporangium Juniperi-virginianae. Ann. Rept. Agr. Exp. Sta. Univ. Nebraska 25: 217-242. pl. 1-3. 1912. Cunningham, G. C. The comparative susceptibility of cruciferous plants to Plasmodiophora Brassicae. Phytopathology 2: 138-142. Au 1912. Darling, C. A. Handbook of the wild and cultivated flowering plants. vii-vili + 1-264. Syracuse. 16 O 1912. Dodge, C.K. The fern flora of Michigan. Fern Bull. 20: 6-19. Au 1912. Drummond, J. R. Agave disceptata. Curt. Bot. Mag. IV. 8: pl. 8451. Au 1912. From Central America? -_ INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 615 Emerson, R. A. The unexpected occurrence of aleurone colors in F2 of a cross between non-colored varieties of maize. Am. Nat. 46: 612-615. O 1912. Essed, E. Cacao canker. West Ind. Bull. 12: 302-308. 1912. Fawcett, G. L. Report of the pathologist. Ann. Rep. Porto Rico Agr. Exp. Sta. 1911: 37-39. 3S 1912. Includes notes on plant diseases, soil biology, and royal palm root nodules. Fernald, M.L. The inland variety of Spiraea tomentosa. Rhodora 14: 188-190. 30S 1912. Fernald, M.L. A purple-fruited ash. Rhodora 14: 192. 30S 1912. “Fraxinus americana L., forma iodocar pa, n. f., fructibus purpureis.”’ Fink, B. A college course in plant pathology. Phytopathology 2: 150-152. Aw 1912, Fink, B., & Stover, W. G. Laboratory exercises in plant physiology and ecology. 1-30. Oxford. 1 Jl 1911. Fredholm, A. A possible inference to be drawn from studies of cacao canker. West Ind. Bull. 12: 308-310. 1912. Gain, L. Note sur la flore algologique d’eau douce de |’Antarctide Sud-Américaine. Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris 17: 371-376. 1911. Includes Nostoc — N. Borneti, Cosmarium antarcticum, and Trochiscia tuberculifera spp. nov. ; Gernert, W.B. Anew aibepeies of Zea Mays L. Am. Nat. 46: 616- 622. O1912. [Illust.] Glaser, R. W., & Chapman, J. W. Studies on the wilt disease, or “flacheria’”’ of the gypsy moth. Science II. 36: 219-224. 16 Au 1912 Dikcase attributed to Gyrococcus flaccidifex gen. et sp. n Goodding, L. N. New southwestern ferns. Mablenbergie 8: 92-94. 40> 1912: Includes descriptions of five new species. Graves, H. S. Broadleaf maple. Acer macrophyllum Pursh. U. 5. Forest Serv. Silv. Leaflet 51: 1. 17 S 1912. Graves, H. S. Red alder. Alnus oregona Nutt. U. S. Forest Serv. Silv. Leaflet 53: 1-4. 185 1912. Graves, H.S. Western hemlock. Tsuga heterophylla (Raf.) Sargent. U. S. Forest Serv. Silv. Leaflet 45: 1-6. 145 1912. Gydrffy, I. Molendoa tenuinervis Limpr. in America arctica. Bryolo- gist 15: 75-81. pl. 3. S 1912. Harding, H.A. The trend of investigation in plant pathology. Phyto- pathology 2: 161-163. Au 1912. Harper,R. A. The structure and development of the colony in Gontum. Trans. Am, Micro. Soc. 31: 65-83. pl. 5. Ap 1912. 616 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Harris, J. A. On the significance of variety tests. Science II. 36: 318-320. - 6.51012; Harris, J. A. On differential mortality with respect to seed weight occurring in field cultures of Phaseolus vulgaris. Am. Nat. 46: 512- $254 7S 1912. Harris, J. A. On the relationship between the bilateral asymmetry of the unilocular fruit and the weight of the seed which it produces. Science IT. 36: 414, 415. 27S 1912. Hedgcock, G.G. A Cronartium associated with Peridermium filamen- tosum Peck. Phytopathology 2: 176,177. Au 1912. Cronartium filamentosum (Peck) Hedgcock comb. nov. Hedges, F., & Tenny, L.S. A knot of citrus trees caused by Sphaerop- sis tumefaciens. U.S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 247: 5-74. pl. 9 3. 1°68. 17 Aw tore. Heide, F. Lentibulariaceae ( Pinguicula). Meddelelser om Groénland 36: 441-481. f. 1-16. 1912. Heller, A. A. The Nevada lupines—VII. Muhlenbergia 8: 85-91. pl. 11, 12 + f. 12, 13. 30 S 1912. Lupinus variegatus and L. intermontanus spp. nov. Heller, A.A. New combinations—IX. Muhlenbergia 8: 60. 31 My 1912;—X. Muhlenbergia 8: 96. 30S 1912. Heller, A.A. The North American lupines—VII. Muhlenbergia 8: 82-84. f. rz. 10 Au 1912. Includes Lupinus borealis sp. nov. Heller, A.A. Pinus ponderosa and Pinus Jeffreyi. Muhlenbergia 8: 73-79. pl. 7-10. 10 Au 1912. Herre, ‘A. W. C. T. ‘New or rare Californian lichens. Bryologist 15: BI-87.. S'19k2. Includes Trimmatothele Umbellulariae, Heppia alumenensis, and Legania shas- tensis spp. nov. Higgins, J.E. The pineapple in Hawaii. Hawaii Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 36: 1-34. f. I-15. 21 Je 1912. Hill, E. J. Additions to the fern flora of Indiana. Fern Bull. 20: 25, 26. Au 1912. Hill, E. J. The rock relations of the cliff-brakes. Fern Bull. 20: I-5. Au 1912. Hori, S. A new leaf rust of peach. Phytopathology 2: 143-145. /l. 23,14. AW 1912. Puccinia Pruni-persicae sp. nov. Howe, M. A. Reef-building and land-forming seaweeds. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 54: 137, 138. Mr 1912. An abstract of an illustrated paper presented at the centenary anniversary meeting. Reprinted also in Bot. Jour. 2: 66. Au 1912. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 617 Hubbard, F. T. Nomenclatorial changes required by some Gramineae of the seventh edition of Gray’s Manual. Rhodora 14: 165-173. 23 Au 1912; 14: 184-188. 30S 1912. Jensen, C. N. Fungus flora of the soil. Cornell Univ. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 315: 415-501. f. 100-134. Je 1912. Jones, L. R. Potato diseases in Wisconsin and their control. Univ. Wisconsin Agr. Exp. Sta. Circ. 36: 1-10. Je 1912. Jones, L. R., Giddings, N. J., & Lutman, B. F. Investigations of the potato fungus Phytophthora infestans. U.S. Dept. Agr. Plant Ind. Bull. 245: 5-100. pl. 1-10 + f. r-10. 10 Au 1912. Kennedy, P. B. Alpine plants—IX. Muhlenbergia 8: 59. f. 6. 31 My 1912;—X. Muhlenbergia 8: 72. f. 9. 23 Jl 1912;—XI. Muhlenbergia 8: 95. f. 14. 30S 1912. Kraemer, H. The medullary ray cells in Rhamnus Purshianus. Am. Jour. Pharm. 84: 385-388. S 1912. Lloyd, F. E. The guayule—a desert rubber plant. Pop. Sci. Mo. 81: 313-330. f. 1-16. O 1912. Long, W. H. Notes on three species of rusts on Andropogon. Phyto- pathology 2: 164-171. Au 1912. Describes culture experiments with Puccinia Ellisiana Thuem, Uromyces Andro- pogonis Tracy, and Puccinia Violae (Schum.) D. C. Lundager, A. Some notes concerning the vegetation of Germania Land, northeast Greenland. Meddelelser om Grénland 43: 349-414. pl. 17 +f. 1-18. 1912. Lutz, A. M. Triploid mutants in Oenothera. Biol. Centralb. 32: 385- 435. f. 1-7... 20 Jl 1912. Marsh, C. D. Absorption of barium chloride by Aragallus Lamberti. Bot. Gaz. §4: 250-252. 21 5S 1972. McGeorge, W. Physical and chemical properties of latex of Euphorbia. Hawaii Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 37: 1-13. 8 Au 1912. McLendon, C. A. Mendelian inheritance in cotton hybrids. Bull. Georgia Exp. Sta. 99: 143-228. f. 1-20. Au 1912. Meinecke, E. P. Parasitism of Phoradendron juniperinum Libocedri Engelm. Proc. Soc. Am. Forest. 7: 35-41. pl. 1, 2. Mr 1912. Metcalf, H. Diseases of the chestnut and other trees. Trans. Massa- chusetts Hort. Soc. 1912: 69-90. I9I2. Meyer, R. Echinocactus Monvillei Lem. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 131, $32.° 15 5 19%2. Meyer, R. Echinocactus myriostigma S.-D. var. nuda R. Meyer var. nov. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 136,137. 15S 1912. Meyer, R. Uber die Gattung Discocactus Pteiff. (Untergattung 618 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Discocactus K. Sch.). Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 113-115. 15 Au 1912. Miller, E. C. A physiological study of the germination of Helianthus annuus. II. The oily reserve. Ann. Bot. 26: 889-901. Jl 1912. Morse, W. J. Does the potato scab organism survive passage through the digestive tract of domestic animals? Phytopathology 2: 146- 149. pl. 15. Au 1912. Concludes that the germs are able to pass the digestive tract of both the horse and the cow without being destroyed Moyer, L.R. Some Minnesota roses. Am. Bot. 18: 70,71. Au 1912. Murrill, W. A. The McClatchie herbarium. Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. ag% 287; 240. 3 TGI2. ; Nash, G. V. (Poales) Poaceae (pars). N. Am. Fl. 17: 99-196. 18S 1912. Includes new species in Schizachyrium (4), Andropogon (1), Amphilophis (1), Sorghastrum (1), Aegopogon (2), and Paspalum Nelson, A. Contributions from the Rocky Mountain herbarium. XI. New plants from Idaho. Bot. Gaz. 54: 136-151. f. 1, 2. 16 Au 1912. Includes descriptions of 16 new species. Norton, A.H. Plants apparently new to the Maine catalogue. Rho- dora 14: 176. 23 Au 1912. O'Byrne, F. A woodlot survey in Oxford Township, Butler County, Ohio. Miami Univ. Bull. 11: 7-58. Jl 1912. [IIlust.] O’Gara, P. J. Urophlyctis Alfalfae, a fungus disease of alfalfa occurring in Oregon. Science II. 36: 487, 488. 11 O 1912. Osterhout, W. J. V. Reversible changes in permeability produced by electrolytes. Science II. 36: 350-352. 13 S 1912. Parish, S. B. Additions to the flora of southern California. Muhlen- bergia 8: 79-82. 10 Au 1912. Patouillard, N. Quelques champignons du Costa-Rica. Bull. Soc. Myc. France 28: 140-143. 15 Jl 1912. Six new species and two new varieties described. Peck, C. H. Report of the state botanist, 1911. N. Y. State Mus. Bull. 157: 5-139. pl. 124-130 + pl. VII, VIII. 1 Mr 1912. Includes the New York species of Clitocybe, Laccaria, and Lapses Thirty- eight new species of fungi are described Perkins, J. Beitrage zur Flora von Bolivia. Bot. Jahrb. 49: 170-176. 27 Au 1912. ludes Andreaea robusta, Campylopus subjugorum, C. Edithae, Leptodontium ferrugineum, Tortula ciliata, Grimmia Pflansii, and Anoectangium Pflanzit spp. nov- Also contains a short list of f ungi. Phillips, R. L. A few notes on the chemical composition of bee bread. Torreya 12: 243, 244. 40 1912. INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE 619 Prescott, A. The osmundas. Fern Bull. 20: 21-24. Au 1912. Quehl, L. Die Bliite des Echinocactus nidulans Quehl. Monats. Kakteenk. 22: 127. 15 Au 1912. Reddick, D. Field laboratory equipment. Phytopathology 2: 172- 174. Au I9QI2. Rehm, H. Ascomycetes exs. Fasc. 50. Ann. Myc. 10: 353-358. Au Includes notes on several American species of ey Rehm, H. Ascomycetes novi. Ann. Myc. 10: 389-397. Au 1912. Includes one new species each in Mycobilimbia, S Abe and Fabraea from America. Rigg, G. B., & Dalgity, A. D. A note on the generations of Polyst- phonia. Bot. Gaz. 54: 164, 165.f. 7. 16 Au 1912. Safford, W. E. Notes of a naturalist afloat—IV. Am. Fern Jour. 2: 65-82. 3 Au 1912. Sahasrabuddhe, G. M. The study of sugar-cane varieties with a view to their classification. West Ind. Bull. 12: 378-387. 1912. Schock, O. D. Fighting the chestnut tree blight. Am. Forest. 18: 575-579. $1912. [Illust.] Shafer, J. A. Botanical exploration in Pinar del Rio, Cuba. Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 13: 136-147. 5S 1912. Sharp, L. W. Spermatogenesis in Equisetum. Bot. Gaz. 54: 89-119. pl. 7, 8 16 Au 1912. - Shull, G. H. The primary color-factors of Lychnis and color-inhibitors of Papaver Rhoeas. Bot. Gaz. 54: 120-135. 16 Au 1912. Skinner, J. J. Beneficial effect of creatinine and creatine on growth. Bot. Gaz. 54: 152-163. f. 1. 16 Au 1912. Skinner, J. J. Influence of phosphate on the toxic action of cumarin. Bot. Gaz. 54: 245-249. 215 1912. Skottsberg, C. Die Gattung Bolax Commerson. Bot. Jahrb. Beibl. 48: 1-6. f. 1-4. 27 Au 1912. Skottsberg, C. Tetrachondra patagonica n. sp. und die Latent Stellung der Gattung. Bot. Jahrb. Beibl. 48: 17-26. f. 1-8. 27 Au 1912. Small, J.K. The kaffir orange. oe N. Y. Bot. Gard. 13: 127, 128. f. 1. Ausgt2. Strychnos spino Smith, E.F. Bacillus Coli, a cause an plant disease. Phytopathology 2: 175, 176. Au 1912. A note explaining priority of publication on the su Smith, E. F. Bacterial mulberry blight. pu stoaibowey®: 175. Au 1912. 620 INDEX TO AMERICAN BOTANICAL LITERATURE Smith, J. D. Undescribed plants from Guatemala and other Central American republics. XXXV. Bot. Gaz. 54: 235-244. 21S 1912. Incl new species in Eugenia (1), Anguria (2), Gurania (1), Alloplectus (3), Besleria (1), Hieronyma (1), Croton (2), Acalypha (1), Conceveiba (1), Ampelocera (1), and Phyllanthus (1). South, F. W. The application of Mendelian principles to sugar-cane breeding. West Ind. Bull. 12: 365-377. 1912. South, F.W. Fungus diseases of cacao. West Ind. Bull. 12: 277-302. 1912. Includes popular descriptions of the diseases and a list of species with their common names, etc. Speare, A. T. Notes on Hawaiian fungi. I. Gibellula suffulta n. sp. Phytopathology 2: 135-137. pl. r2. Au 1912. Sprague, [T. A.] Begonia (Hydristyles) Cuninghamei. Kew Bull. Misc. Inf. 1912: 340, 341. S 1912. A plant from Bolivia. Sprague, T. A. Columnea glabra. Curt. Bot. Mag. IV. 8: pl. 8453. S 1912. A Costa Rican plant. Standley, P.C. Wootonella, a new genus of Carduaceae. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 25: 119, 120. 29 Je 1912. Stevens, N. E. Polystictus versicolor as a wound parasite of catalpa. Mycologia 4: 263-270. pl. 75. 28 Au 1912. Stout, A.B. A fungous infection of the ear. Jour. N. Y. Bot. Gard. $3 120; 127,,: Au. 1622. Aspergillus nigricans Cooke. Taylor, N. On the origin and present distribution of the pine-barrens of New Jersey. Torreya 12: 229-243. f. 1, 2. 4 0 1912. Thaxter, R. New or critical Laboulbeniales from Argentine. Proc. Am. Acad. Arts & Sci. 48: 155-223. S 1912. Includes nine new genera and sixty-five new species. Thaxter, R. Preliminary descriptions of new species of Rickia and Trenomyces. Proc. Am. Acad. Arts & Sci. 48: 365-368. S 1912. Includes 18 new species of Rickia and 4 of Trenomyces. Watson, J. R. Plant geography of north central New Mexico. Bot. i, WOE, SQ. 194-217. f. 1-7. 21 S 1912. Wolf, F. A. The perfect stage of Actinonema Rosae. Bot. Gaz. 54: #18-234. pl. 73. 21.5 1612. Includes Diplocarpon gen. nov. INDEX TO VOLUME New names an d the final members of new combinations are in heavier type. Abies dees ch Mertensiana, 100; t pepe Novae-caesareae, 390, 405; Patto ae) Pfaffiana, 388; Snowii, 390, 405 cal ‘es uataale 33 pruinosa, 7 Aiivowerac 38 Acer platanoides, 408; rubrum, 407;| Anetium reticulatum, 572 saccharinum Anticlea, 108; coloradensis, 108; elegans, ue eae gorgonea, S72s obtusa, 572 108; porrifolia, 108, 109; vaginata, 108, Acorus Calam 109 Acro oiler orus Piacdnaans: sie repens, 582 | Apios Apios, 80 Acrostichum, 258, 571; mulum, 571, | Aphanolejeunea, 222, 224, 329 5723 lomelanos. chee crassifotium, Arabis Bases, siliqua, 326; lignifera, 326; 572; gorgonium, 572; Helleri, 571; ve a 326; subpinnatifida, 326 hirtum, 570; lineatum, 275; mica , | Ara 570; micradenium, 570; _ pellucido- Aralia alta die 403; decurrens, marginatum, 572; reticulatum, 572; 04; Saportana, 403, 404; Welling- pacing 275; hg an » 570; vesti- ton nana, a 402-404; Wellingtoniana , 570; Wawr a Vaughanii, 388 Actinosiemon poo tinsireds <7 Araucaria tdi teabnals 380; Jeffreyi, 389 Adiantum, 568, 577; lehneke, 577; | Arenaria cephaloidea te congesta, 316; Capillus, S77; - Cal ee RA dawsonensis, 316; diff sa, 316; Fendleri chinense, 585; chusanum, 585; emargi- diffusa, 316; lift 316; laxiflora, natum, 577; Levingei, 397 tehuabainvee: 316; por » 316; peploides major, 585; be iscag 577 ATi silla, 316; ee se fo Adnaria, inert “ithophila Aenothera- iiactiions: 510) (521; siesta bro culata ora, 521 Ailanthus glandulosa, 420 ALDE A contribution to ee life sees ory of tho paced sessilifolia, Pronid jubata, 2 ubescens, pid Alisma brevipes, eri, 101; Plantago-adtatica, IOI Alismacea ppperacas Allium, 16, ne 2; Cepa, 15, 17, Allosorus aquilinus, 575; rae elas 576 Alnus, Alopecurus aristulatus, 102; fulvus, 102; 315; Edwardsii, ol e meri, 315: “stricta, 315; strictiflora I 313; carneus, pubescens, 313; pubes- Aneiants ee pono ee 423 . M. Protoplasmic stream- longi- fasc ookeri, 102; S aiaeathan ¢ toa: ita. Ai heab hier elatius, 103 Artabotrys odoratissi ssima, 502 rotaxopsis, 3 Arth ; | Ascobolaceae, i hide of culture and ae redone of the archicarp in tain species of the, I ecobcies. 140, 141, 144-146, 149, 150, , 149; amoenus 170-379, 187, ’ ing in geal A455 4, 186, 190, 193, zylophilus, ior eae 93 621 622 Ascodesmis, 139, 186, 191; nigricans, 141, 145, 148, 152, 169, 170 ‘Astenhianue, 187; Aurora, 152; carneus, 144, I47-149, I51, 152, 169, , 186, 190, 193, 457, 491; glaucellus, 152; granuliformis, 152; Holmskjoldii, 152; lacteus, 152; sporus, 152; mi utissimus, 152; ochraceus, 146, 152, 190; pilosus, saccharinus, 143, 148; sarcobius, 152, 169, I 193 Asparagin, effect of, on absorption and wth in wheat, 429 Aspergillus, 149, 190; niger, 535 Aspidium cordifolium, 583; cyatheoides, oe Ecklonii, os altatum, 584; Filix-mas fusco-atrum, 2; glabrum, 592; glabrum wala 593; glabrum quadripinnatum, 92; globuliferum, 91; hawaiiense, 594; Gat set 01; juglandifollum macrosorum latifrons, 593; molle, 599; ny mphale, 99; paleaceum, 5091; parallelogram- mum, os parasiticum, 599; patens, 599; quum, 8; resintt erum, 508; Henin 594; Schiubrii, 584; Speluncae, 586; squamigerum, 4; tuberosum, ‘ ndulatum, 583; unitum, 598; violascens, 599 Asplenium, 258, 569; aquilinum, 575; Spi i Athyrium, Atriplex ees ; M Azolla, 232 Baptisia sated 69 mete stg 549, 553 BEAT d SKINN dscihb Biect ‘of esparagin on ahaceein and grow wheat, Benzon venustum, 388, 390, 399 BERR W. Contri ibutions to Messole flora of the Atlantic coastal plain—VIII. 387; Notes on the enus eee 341 BICKNELL, The ferns and Die pn plants of Nuciuiaee ee: 69; 415 Bicornia, 553 Bidens Gartade Blechnum, 257-259, 261, 276; attenu- atum , 275; Capense, 367, n nifoliu Plumieri, 269; polypodioides, sh : INDEX sessilifolifum], 373; Spicant, 275; stoloni- fe 5; .tubulare, 379; 379; hah ss 37 subbifoliatum, 234 trych ; ns Boudiera, 152; Cluisschli, S23; ae rrr “atm oo e, 303; m formosum, 389, 390, tok. yh Abeaiicewe esate BRAINERD, Violet hybrids between species of the palmata group, 85 Brassicaceae, 322 BRITTON, N. L. Studies of West Indian —I The genus Struthi- sors is and its represetitatives in North America, 2 ee 2 a odiaea capitata, III; capitata sa edees tII; papi Tit; gran ny heen 110, TIT; insularis, 141; volubilis, 1 Caeoma nitens, 113-116 eee ae, 69 Calam ageie: 103; lucida, ; Vaseyi, 103 Canines, 422 Callit one oe 422 Callitris, Catyptridium Pan ey 314 Canangium Brandesanum, 103; rubes- 504; odor- atum Cameraria opr ifolia, 5; latifolia, 5, 6; 6; oblongifolia, 6; retusa, 5 aryopliyliaceae, 3 at7 se of changed polarity in Spirogyra elong ig. i Cassia Cha hrista, 69 Cathartolinum agrees sum Celtis Douglasii, 305; sen 3053 reticulata, a 304; rugo Cerastium arvense fuegianitrn, SIA, SI5s fuegianum, 314; strictum, 315; ther- male | Ceropters, een 588; calomelanos, 588; ssi ata: 201; islandica, 201 | Chara, 46 : Cheilanthes, 579; Lidgatii, 579; termi- Cheilejcnes fey te 279 ee nthus, 3} arioss 324; aridus, » 324; apes, sperrimus, 324; Bakeri, quay chelcantheite 323; elatus, 323; — 323; nivalis, 324; nivalis amoenus, 324; Pallasii, 324; be gies ae syrticola, 323; Wheel- Cheirinia, 323; amoena, 324; argillosa, INDEX 324; arida, 323; aspera, 323, asperrima, 324; Bakeri, 324; teak. carpa, 325; Siig crore! 3233 mer 323; imconspicua, 323; lis, 324; oblastectite, wey 3253 Pallasii, a4 rion 324; syrticola, 323; Wheeler Cleaned iaceae, 3 Chenopodium Siceiliciiiee: — desic- ca fit 311; lanceolatum, 1; lepto- phyllum, 310; nario “ed 310; esi dorem edie, 311; paganum, 311; prater- icola, 310; rubrum, anes suce viridis Sri: viride, _ Chiogenes, 550 Chloris eetnel ca, 103 pa zanthe brevicornu, 310; spathulata, 399 Cibotium, 242; Chamissoi, 242, 243; glaucum, tre 244; Menziesii, 242, 243; pruinatum, 243 Cinna ar arundinacea, 1 103 Cinnamo omum, 400; ellipsoideum, 388; on rii, 388; membranaceum, 390, 401; , 388 Cincinatis aquilina, 575 Ciss Ss 0 Bi cl vate Pisciendvas geo 9; spinosum, 10 Clusia clarendonensis, 7 occulus, 400 0-212, 222-234, 329; sa, 607; per- 8 affinis, 608; Pla atyneura, 60 Colura, 2 Colurolejeune Colutea pr rimordialis, 300, 396 Commelinace carat coop og 560; sage a 589 Contribution to the history of Uvularia cesslifolia ra ay Contributions to the Mesozoic flora of the Atlantic pai plain—VIII. Texas, 387 Coprinus, 186 te rema Conradii, 422 ee ces vetustum, 390, 404 17 Cracca virpiniens: Cuba, Undescribed species from, 9 Cuba, The pete Ginoria in, 12 Cubonia s Sendiaghaisiic: 3890 talum penduliforum, 502 Cystopteris Dontglnell 587; sandwichen- S, 587 623 Cystopus, I Cytisus scoparius, 70 DacuHNowskI, A. The relation of Ohio bog bona to the chemical nature of peat soils, 53 Danthonia spicata, 103 DARLING, C. A. Mitosis in living cells, fe) Davallia biflora, 584; chinensis, 585; vo usa na, 585; flaccida, 586; Khasiyana, 586 na, 582; Mannii, 582; poly podioides, 585; remota, 585; ae, 586; stri ene B. M. m ae (Oenothera Lamarckiana Ser- nge) a oe of Oenothera grandiflora paw i der?, 519 ethane. Fiedler: 320, 322; coelesti- num, 320; yeri, 322; Helleri, 321; ners 320; ae 322; re- ticulatum, 322; sc m, 321; scopu- lorum, sae, visidum, 323; xylorrhizum, 321 Dendropanax arboreum, I, 2; blakeanum, 4; brachypodum, ad ordifo lium, 4; siuaninne 2; elong rote 3; grande, 4; gran ndiflorum m, : epee rifolium, 2; nutans, 2; pendulum, 2, 4; samydi- folium, I Dendropanax in the West Indies, 1 Dennstaedtia strigosa, 586 D h i 103; pungens, 103 “ chinensis, 502, 504; crinitus, 507; ; desmanthus, 508; Desmos, “504, 50 5; = Fee ninco us, das , ’ steno- us, 50 ee Wrayi, 5073 eer ae 506 roper generic name for t eailed neers of the Old World, tai Devoaia trachycarpa, 170 Diastoloba, 280 Dichasium parallelogrammum, 591 gposnacanpey II0, III; congesta, I1I; multiflora, 1 | Dicksonia glau japoni 585; Menziesii, tees edad: 243; dee goatee ne ohne bavi nose 241; emargina glabra » 240; glauca, cad soul " thicarlé, em 240; Acted is, 239, 241 Didymoglossum humile, 246 | Diellia, 568, 580; "Alexandr 580, a ce ae lia, 580 ecta, 580 81; falcata, 580, 58 t; Knudsen sto, 583 becintata, Saag 581; Mannii 2: pumila, 5 Diospytos p 388;S pi, 388 624 INDEX nese Sagan 200, 2 252).222; 224, | Empetraceae, 320, — peatiices. 216; brachy- Endolepis shoiicetede 31 hr at7, 22 0, 222, 225, 605;| Ephed ah shee 100; viridis, 100 , i e 210-225, 605, 606; pellucida mallei- en birt hypnokdes, 104; lutescens, 104; formis, 215, 222; Rudolphiana, 220-— 104; secundiflora, 104 + 05; unidentata, 217, | ier col nie Kingii, 103 E a, 553 , 2227-224. 925;-605 Diplasolejeunes, Vegetative reproduc- | Ericales, 405 iocoma cuspidata, 102; hymenoides, Diplasium raxineum, 589 te) Diplusodon ginorioides, 13 Eriogonum, 308, 309; androsaceum, 309; Dipterostemon, pe capitatus, I1I;| angulosum, 309; aureum, 308, 309; ga III; pauciflorus, 111; pul- Baileyi, 309; bicolor, 309; biumbel- chellus, 111 latum, ; campanulatum, 307; chlor- Discoid pamiaad in Radula, 329 anthum, 308; clavellatum, 309; comp haat 552 situm, 309; corymbosum, 308; crassi- Dopce, B. O. Methods of culture and folium, 308; croceum, 307; deflexum, 7 ig morphology of the archicarp in 309; densum, 309; depauperatum, 309; certain species of the Ascobolaceae, 139 depressum, 308; dichotomum m ni deflexa, 328; densiflora, 327, ; : glacialis a a2. ‘enue os, liferum, 309; puberulum, 309; pulvi- pectin, Dondia calceoliformis, 313 elatum, 300 od ige 308 Hookeri, 309; Doodia, 276, idahoense signe, 309; lepto- D , M. J. Variation in the floral phyllum, snes pi denrree ied 309; Mearn- structures of Vitis, 37 sii, 300; micranthum, 309; microthe- Doryopteris, 567, 576; decipiens, 576; cum, 307; neglectum, 307; nidularium, decora, 576, 577; pedata, 576 309; nutans, 309; ochrocephalum, 309; Draba andina, 3 328; aurea, 328; Ordii,. 309; orenden 07; 4 aureformis, 328; ecumbens, ‘ lium depressum, 308; Parryi, 309; luteola, ta, 32 328;| natum, 309; racemosum, 309; ramosis- praealta, 328; reflexa, 328; surculiera, rng 300; subisuss frigidum, 328; uber, ab yellowstonensis, 3 salicinum, 308; Shockleyi, 309; Dryopteris, ‘568, 569, 589; acutidens, so, ee att 309; spathuliforme, 597; crinalis, 590, 595 OI, 307; spergulinum, 309; strictum, 308, 599-601 ; dilatata, 5973 fijiensis, a 300; sabyeniariin: 309; sulca nha: 399; Filix-mas, 592, 504; fusco-atra, 580, eee 309; Thomasii, 309; Thomp- 502; glabra, 590, 592, 504; globulifera.| _sona 309; thymoides, 309; tric 5 ; hawaiiensis, , 504; , 309; tristichum, 308; turbi- honolulensis, 590, 595; Keraudreniana, natum, 309; umb: ai 397; umbe s 90, 506; latifrons, 590, , 595;| ferum, 307; villiflorum, 309; vimineum, 5 nuda, 590, 592, 593; paleacea, 580, sor, 300; Wetherillii, aoe Wri ghtii, 309 592; parasitica, 591, 508, 599; parvula, | Erodium cicutarium, 41 599, 593; propinqua, 590, 598; pusilla, | Erysimum, 323; alpestre, _ nae, : : . igi : asperu 593 iformis, ; rubiginosa,| 324; argillosum, 324; m, 323: 599, 594; sandwicensis, 590, 598, 600;| as alpestre, 324; asperum incon- spinulosa, 592, squamigera, 590, icuum, : , 324; cheir- 594; stegnogramm S, 591, 600, 6or; anthoides, 323; ela 323; Incon- truncata, 591, 601; unidentata, 590, 597| spicuum, 323; nivale, 324; oblan Effect of eapiPine sa on absorption and/ latum, 324; officinale, 323; parviflorum, growth i eat, 42 23; m, 325; radicatum, 324; : Effect of pao on plants, 535 syrticolum, 323; Wheeleri, 324 : Eichhornia, 16, 19, 21, 22; speciosa, 15 ebpbeacg 441 Elaeagia cubensis, 10 EsTABROOK, H., and LiviNGsTON, Paphocicosen, 567, 560, 571; aemulum, 2B €. Oo servation s on the degree of 579, 571; conforme, 569; gorgonium, tomatal sabltaaro in certain plants, 15 570, 572; hirtum, 570; paseuineuares Padianthe ps 70; nitidum, 570; squamosum, 570; | Eucallitr reticulatum, 570, 572; ventas, 570; “i cal swat Geinit 390, 402 awrae, 570, 571 areca 318; Drummondii, 318 Riko rbia Cyr waridalel 422; maculata, Elymus, 107 421; polygonifolia, 421; Preslii, 421 INDEX Euphorbiaceae, 421 Eupteris aquilina, 575 — lanata, 312; subspinosa, 312, as ‘? A. W. Hepaticae of Pue eo aS eek eanes, soe New West Indian Lejeuneae—II, 603 Falcata monoica, 80; Pitcheri, Ferns and flow Sane Aenea of oaks The—IX, 69; Ferns Delias "tropical America New, 2 285 Festu TOS ;9 46) stris, 105; canta 106; dasyclada, 105; ngii, Sieh! ont ura, 105; ingen Nisytit 05; pacifica, 105; reflexa, at ras Thurber, 105; dae 105; Watsonii, ro ginko daphinogenoides 390, 304; glas- oea Pils, kee 7 ona 587 Fili Nee ust, Be a: 342 Frenelites, 343 Frenelopsis, 343. 346, 347; bohemica, 346 Papen 346; ramosissima, “ie FROM) ae D. Sexual sipcioog = spore encom bien of the flax rust, Frullania, 279, 280, 284, sa kes na, nde 280; Bolanderi, 279, 284; Brittoniae, 280, 283, 284; cleistosto 84; dilatata, 280, 283; eboracensis, 279, 280, 281, 283, 284; —, 280; inflata, 280; plana, 280, 84; riparia, 280, 283, 284; saxic oe 280; na, 280; squarrosa, 221; Tam- arisci, Frullaniae, Vegetative reproduction in the New England, 279 Funkia, 19, 22; ovata, I Gaultheria, 550 Ga — 540, 550; buxifolia, 550; dumosa, 551; frondosa, 555; nana, 555; 2 Genus Struthiopt eris and its representa- tives in North America, The, 257, 357 Geraniaceae, 415 Gera rag carolinian m, 415} molle, ere ie gg nae: + 415 ; arborea, 13; iced, 13; ginori- 240; gee iiensis, Oty longissima, 240; Ow hensis, 2 625 Gleicheniaceae, 237, Gonocorm Apia SA ote 245 Guanidin, the effect of, on plants, 535 ve Guatteria, 5 Gymnoascus, 186; ruber, 186 Gymnoconia i oo 08 230 113; 154, 116 pb ae igs: calomelanos, 588; javan- ica, 589; sa, - tartarea, 588 Gymnos spermae, 39 sidnare ciclo aee GE II9Q, 128 Ss aaa Douglasii, 236 Hawaiian Islands, A taxonomic Piped of the oe of the, 227, 567 sy asta nu Pe Hepat Hepatiae of Puerto Rico—XI._ Diplasi- Hoes neetiact heceaveckion. 106; "Ringii, 06 a Merten aca, 100; Pat- tonian: H 2 rab speciosa, 240 ropantha, 280 “set tet oblongifolia, 245 Ho one era, III; coronaria, 110; pulchella, eke —— 106; a a 106; montanense, 106; murinum, Howe, 7 Jr. The Fade i the Linnea barium with rema: Her Acharian material, 199 Hugeria, 551 Humaria, 190, i granulata, 191, 195 Humata Mannii, 582 ymeni paggeuae Saeleetvinl 572; reticu- latum, Hymenophyllum, 244, 245, 247: Bald- 247; lanceolatum, 247, 248; ga hy iy gre recurvum, 247; t ig 247 oe 237, 244 Hypoc , 190 H harry "568, 578; flaccida, 578, 570; punctata, 578; Sra SE DY 578, 579 Ilex, gg bronxensis, 426, 427; fastigiata, 426; glabra Ta, 425; oe 426, 427; ily padifolia, 426 Ilicaceae, 425 Index to American Botanical Literature, 29, 81, get ie 249, 203, 349, 411, 447, 511, 613 Inga cre! ciaek ges Isatis, 20, 22; tinctoria, 15 amaica, Message species from, 7 neaceae, Jun 5 cus colum sad 110; silo. ees elem 110; mexi 626 nig 110; Regelii. 110; KSEE ; Tracyi, 110; uncialis bas) Jungermani floccosa, cor, * spnorangs 213, 214; unidentata, 217, 2 tutowucs eae, 99 Juniperites ee 342 Junipe horizontalis, 100; Knig ii, ae monosperma, 99; pros- trata, 0; Sabina procumbens, 100; TO utahensis, 99, 100; virginiana, 99 Lachnea melaloma, 170; stercorea, 147, 190 Larix decidua, 408 Lasiobolus, 187; ce aipain 142, 152, 168, 169; pulc eeingigs Lastraea glabra, a, degra vie 5901; latifrons, 593; rubiginosa, 594; squami- gera, 594; truncata, I thyrus maritimus, 79; pilosus, 79; tuberosus, 80 Laurophyllum minus, 390, 402 Laurus, 387; plutonia, 390, 401; proteae- folia Leiolejeunes grandiflora, 6 ' Lejeunea, 210, 32 es 603; "A bifolia, 214; floccosa, 607; ocellulata, 213, 214; pellucida, pays platyn neura, 608; uni- dentata, 2 sot erin cyclos 107; minima, 107; or, 107; "perp lla, 107 Piscomeea Lepidium ire NS sais i ince pubescens, 322; medium pubescen s, 323; virginicum hacen pecs: Leptocolea, 210, 222-224, 320, 603, 607; appressa, 6 risen floccosa, 607, 608; scabriflora, 607 Lespedeza, 753 wr ca ve Brittonii, 70; ns hee 78; frute ber 7e marta, 77; Nuttallii, 76; ss wibead. 753 Stuvei, 76; velutina, oa violacea, 77; virginica Letharia vu ulpina Lichens of = Siaaiaes Herbarium with remarks on Acharian material, The, 199 Limnia depresa, 314; spathulata, 314; utahensis, 314 399 vinnie dy 581; Plea an ain ensis, 585; Knudsenii + daci ata, 581; laciniata etic. ae _Mannii, 582; grate 583 9 oridanum, 419, 420; 420; medium, 410; striatum, 418; auicatum, 420; usitatis- imum, 118, 418; vir 8 pinnatifidum, 388, 305; quercifolium, 390, 305; Snowii, 395 LIVINGSTON, A. H. Obse | Me INDEX pbied ochia decora, 577; decipiens, 576 > 399 Litsea falcifolia E., and EsTABROOK, ations on the degree of tomatal ental in certain olanita 15 : pice costaricensis, cea, 364, rise ; raion oN perry xal- | faleormis pore : Gheis- WwW a as hte td rufa, Sc on _— 370- 3753 Wer 3753 93 ck- iolacea, 379; na, Lomaridium Herminieri, 267; Plumieri, 26 grea Neeser a 578 LORENZ, A. getative arnisgerate se in nee ase England Frullan 279 Loxsomopsis, 285; star ricensis ’ Epecetenyeins 286; ‘notabilis, 285, 288 Lychnis, 317, 318; affinis, 318; apetala, Si: eee As 3109; Dread aa8y Kingii, 319; montana, 318; Parryi, 319; striata, 318; = 318; triflora, per Lycopodiales Lysichiton ihe 107 286; MACKENSEN, B. Three new species of untia, with a discussion of the identity of Opuntia Lifdheimeri, 289 Magnolia Boulayana, 388; speciosa, 388, 390, 39 Malapoenna falcifolia, 390, 399 Malvales, 399 inrattio. peek anes 236; Douglasii, 236 Marattiaceae, Marattiales, ao Marsilea crenulata, 233; quadrifolia, 233; sig arsileaceae, 232, Matteuccia, Max te WR Notes on the North American species of poenionnars ey 23 sie canon clarendonensis, panini lupulina, ki sativa, ibomia canaden 75° cheek taka: ma eceuliistins natans, 233; 743 INDEX Melampsora Lini, jot 120-122, 127; 128; Rostrupi, 113, Melandrium 317, eee api 318; petalum, 3195 tifolium, 318 Phe sito asttte Melilotus alba a, i officinalis, Melodorum, 503; fiat. es: lati- folium, 50 Mertensia paegs Speiae: 241; emarginata, re ex 240; glabra, 240; a ca, 23 hawaiensis, 241; pinnata : Mespilodan hne Methods of culture and the morphology in certain of the Metzgeria, 279, iopsis cristata, 585; ace da, 586; hirta, ae, ; japonicé 586; Khasiyana, 586; Mannii, 582; pol podioides, 586; Speluncae, 585, 586; strigosa, ne tenuifolia, 585 Mitozis 1 in living cells, Monascus, 1 pian» spathilata, 311 Montia Via uccs, Siac 456, 457, 464-466, 471, 473-478, 482, 484-486, 488, 480, 495, 497; stolonifera, 456, 457, 464- : ~] hg > oo * a co ) rs) | ~I srgnata, 390, 303; longa, 388 Articiies « Myrtales, Pia Nantucket, eee of, 6 urtium tachvearpum, 322 583; pmb, pb 584; a, 58 = tuberosa, 58, "384 wait des elie anum, 599 polycarpon ro- pinquum, ier} punctatum, pai resini- ferum, 598; rubiginosum, 594; squami- pacha 594; truncatum, 601; unidenta- i rate : Digesciear: 509 calomelanos, 588 New Pics ‘acs Tropical America, 285 New West Indian Lejeuneae—II, 603 Nitella, 46 Notes on the genus Widdringtonites, 341 492-| O ings ferns and flowering 627 Notes on two Jamaica plants, 1 Notes on the North American soutien of Phaner pecnraigahy Notes on s of Solanum, 11 Rovhechducag ternifolia, 576 fey Obione phyllostegia, 312; tetraptera, II Observations on the degree of stomatal movement in certain plants, 15 Ocotea, nip Octoclini eRe Og 568, 582; Macraeanum, 582, 83; pulchellum, 582 ieee ag) ey a Tg 585 Oenothera, 109, 9-521 bie 15, Se, 527, 528, 532; granditor, Reet, 532; Lamarcki- 51 on suaveolens, 520, 522, yh 527-529, 531 Olfersia os, 571; gorgonea, 572 Onagra vulgaris, 527 Onoclea, 259, 273; Boryana, 378; lineata, 360; poly podioides, 27t 275% aah nt, 275; striata, 375 » 235 ; pendulum, 235 oncinnum, 234, 2353 mudieaule 235; pendu- gatum, Opuntia convexa, 290; Gri iffithsian na, nis leptocarpa, 289 ; Stadler. 289, 29) macrorhiza, 280, reflexa, texana, 2 Opuntia Lindheimeri, _ new species of Opuntia, with a discussion of the identity of, 28 petrenaras 400; alabamensis, 390, 400, gti > Ornithoptes aquilina, 575 uspidata, 102 borealis, 275; 258; ly podi oides, 271; procera, 383; regalis, 258; Spicant, 257, 258, 273, 275; Struthi- opteris, 258, 259 Oxalidaceae, 417 Oxalis cymosa, 417; stricta, 417, 418 Oxycoccus, 551 Paesia aquilina, 575 alaeocassia laurinea, 390, 396 Paliurus ae nena 401 Panicum ni 102 taria occidentalis, 106; pennsyl- vanica, I Parrya macrocarpa, 326; platycarpa, 326 Parthenocissus, 39, 50 628 INDEX Pellaea, 567, 575, 579; ternifolia, 576; | Podophyllum, 441 Weddelliana, he Podozamites snip ad 390, 391 Phaeopeziza Nuttallii, 171 Po ane 502, Phanerophlebia, cto a, 24, 26;| Polycodiu con 551-553, 556, 557, guatemalensis, 23, 26, 28; juglandi- caesium, eee, 556; candicans, 555, 558; folia, 23-25; pumila, 23, 25; macrosora, elevatum, 555, 558; floridanum, 555; - see obilis, ae 2 = remotispora, 23, 550, 558; Kunthianum, 559; Langloisii, mbonata, 2 555, 558; melanocarpum, 555. 557, 5583 hia shecamsati fae on the North neglectum, 555, 557; oblongum, 555 American species of, 558; oliganthum, 555; revolutum, 555, Phegopteris crinalis, 595; Hill elon ene 550; sericeum, 559; stamineum, 552, 5953 ier nitak sis Ses Keraudreniana, 555) 557) 55 596; audre procera, es ;| Polygala cruciata, 421; polygama, 421; HC ota on, punctata, 578; verticillata, 421; viridescens, 421 e, 421 aoa te Sg punctata glabra, | Polygalaceae 578; sandwicensis, 598; spinulosa, 507; Polygonaceae, 306 97 P uni identata, olypodiaceae, 2 Phlebodium, 560 Po lypodium, 285, 568; mage Re Phragmidium, 120; oe crinale, 595; dentatu 599 sis, oe 122; speciosum, 113 eo 20, tomum, 240; Sealeuiae® 584; HL Sgn iolaceum, 113, 119 27, 589; glaucum, 239; Hillebrandii, 595; Piviaiyect. arene 456, eh ea 466, ets et 5955 eperoge 287, 288; 71, 488, 492 audrenian 596; lineare, 240; Phylites aristolochiaeformis, 388; rhom- neoeleg 599; eeieenale 599; Paepigil, eus, 388 578; parasiticum, 598; pectinatum, 239; Phymatodes, 569 polycarpon, 600; procerum, 596; punc- rence didymocarpa lanata, 322; tatum, 578; sandwicense, 598, 600; 22 Speluncae, 586; spinulosum, 597; steg- Piva parietina nogrammoides, 600; trifurcatum, 285, Picea alba, 99; ei, 99; canadensis, 287; unidentatum, Polystichum, 569; Du hvac 599; Prekert) o> 1 AS case of slerkaed molle, 599; truncatum polarity in Spirogyra elongata, 500 Popalue: SOT. 388: REE NRO 302; Picrococcus, 540, 5533 elevatus, 559; balsamifera, 301; balsamifera candi- floridanus, 554, 556 cans, 302; Besseyana, 302; candicans, os nds 186 301; Fremontii, 303; harkeriana, es : ae 304; hastata, 301; Sargentii, 301, 302 : Devdas: Pa 2 cielo 243 trichocarpa, 301 e Pinus Mertensiana, 100 Porella, 280, 3295 Lge om ~ Plagiogyra, 257 Portlandia Harrisii, 8; niten Platanus primaeva, 388 rs acess Plicaria violacea, 170 Pot — erfoiats ror; Richard- » 104; alpicola, 1 ampla, 104; ; 4; andina, 105; arctica, 105; arida, 104, Prinos ‘pecetolona 105; brevipaniculata, 105; Buckleyana, | Proteoides daphn cael ’ 104, 105; caesia strictior, 105; cali-| Prot toplasmic streami eetk Ace or, 455 fornica, 105; callic roa, 105; crocata, | Pseu ae m avicennioides, 10; pung- i : igens, 10 e a. cidentalis, ; Gra a, | Pteridophyta, Sis, 105; interior, 105 teridophyta the Hawaiian Islands, juncifolia, 105; Kin 06; laevigata,| A taxonomic study of the, 227, 105; laxa, 104; longiligula, 105; Mult- Pteridium, 567, 574; aquilinum, 575 : nomae, 104; nemoralis, 105; nervosa, | Pteris, 567, 573, 5793 alata, 574) 105; nevadensis, 105; occidentalis, 105; aquilina 5 ss 575: densis, 104; Pattersonii, 104; ph arborea, 573; atropurpurea, 57° nicea, 104; pratensis, 104; pratericola,| aurita, 579; ica, 573; decipiens, 105; pseudopratensis, 104; purpuras-| 576; de 577; excelsa, 573; Ur cens, 104; rupicola, 105; Sandbergii, #04; laris, 573, 574; lomarioides, 574; serotina, 104; Sheldonii, 10s; subpu Lydgatei, 579; melanocaulon, 574; purea, 104; tenuifolia, 104; Tracyi, ei nervosa, 573; owahuensis, 573; annem triflora, 104 576; pentaphylla, 574; peruviana, 579) Poaceae, 102 psittacina, 575; regularis, 574; scab- INDEX ripes, 5743 serraria, 573; fobs ape. 573 576; wanes we ie Ow o © oat i= BB; Lal pal Pyronema, 190, I9T; Pyronema, The viability of the spores of, 63 ner ae 149, a Radicula trachycarpa, 322 adula, 210, 329, 338; complanata, 329, 331, 332, 336, 338; flaccida, 329-339 Hedingeri, °329;.: 334) 335; 337, ase. 339; Lindbergiana, 329, 338; protensa, 32 Be: ito oe 329;. 338; ae ins 329 ; fraxinea, 201; Ranunculus Macounii, 319; repens, 319; rivularis, Rectolejeunea, 611; set en 610, 611; Pe a 279; Maxonii, 6009, 611; phyllobol Relation rg oe io bog vegetation to the chemical nature of peat soils, The, 53 4 Rhus, age ee ser cretacea, 307; glabra, ; hirta, reddita, 397; sot teiecmia. 390, pe 406; Uddeni, 145, 148, 149, 186, eus, 152; ascus, 143, 148, 152; sexdecimsporus, 152 ogatie oo ad viscosa, 74 Rosi B. codium, 549 5 yakonione ‘t ny Le Eek pe of the aE of the Hawaiian Islands, 227, 567 Rondeletia saxicola, 8 “i sales, 396 nga nid aoe a 101; maritima, I RypB Py, As. St udies on the Bosky epunuis flora, 99, 301 Sabina ondgeanso ae 100; ieee semng Saccobolus, 1 de eratus, ae ~ Kerverni, en neglects 152, 168, 169, 193; violasce 152 esmos the proper Des: generic name « for the so-called Unonas Is of the Old World, 501 rhe I0I; arifolia, 102; arifolia nuior, 102; cuneata, 102; paniculata, Sacina occidentalis, 317 Salicaceae, Salicales, 394 alix, 387, 439; Boon shugo 304; arbusculoides, 304; arguta erythro- a, 304: Beieank 304; bella, 304; conjuncta, cordata, 304; - Dru ndiana, 304; eryt oma, 304; Fernaldii, 304; fragili 4393 glaucops, 303; glaucops Xmonticola 3; Hookeriana, 304; lasiolepis, 304; lucida, 304; MacCalliana, 304; monti cola, 303; petiolaris, 49; Sandbergii, ot saskatchewana, 304; Seemanii, epgpae 30 Gulodchlaaan: Si Iviniaceae, ste Salviniales, 232 Sapindales, 396 _ ndus Morrisoni, 388, 390, Sapranthus, 502; nicaraguensi tet 02 Schizaea, ch australia, 238; dicbiotonsé: 237; ro 238 Sc hizostege, re 579; 579; Lydgatei, arpa, paps aguae a, 579 Schincacee | SCHREINER, ok nd SKINNER, . J. phe effect of . on aaa AVER, J. Studies in ophilous fungi—III The viability png! Ap spores of Pyronema Sequoia, 389 Seubertia, 111 Sexual fusions and spore development of e flax rust, Silene, 317; gone 318 sinosing Sisymbrium cbicicate. 323 Sitanion, 106; brevifo piace — ciliatum, 107; elymoides, 107; sulare, 107; lanceolatum, 107; se eiidtines. 106; marginatum, 107 SKINNER, J. and BEATTIE, H. Effect of asparagin on absorption and growth in wheat, 4 SKINNER, J. J., ec Sc caress ©. Fhe effect of messes on plan , M. New ferns rahe Tropical America , 285 Smeloweki americana, 327; lobata, 327; ovata, 327 Solanum bahamense, baham subarmatum, I1; Blodgett i doe en erboeeli ia mense Solan Sophia leptowyi, dnt vest - 5 ordaria, 630 INDEX Sparganiaceae, 10 Sparganium angu Ma lium, ror; longi- pedunculatum, 101; simplex, ror 49 Spicanta attenuata, 272; borealis, 275; Ghiesbreghtii, 277; L’Herminieri, 268; onocleoides, 271; polypodioides, 272 Spirogyra communis, 509, 510; elongata, Spirogyra ap olga A case of changed polarity in, Sporobolus vaginacolos, 103 Stegania, 257, 2 Stegnogramma ad icense, 600 Stellaria alpestris, 315; borealis, 315; longipes, 315; stricta, 315; subvestita, 315; valida, 315 y + 342 a occidentalis, 108 Ste —— 257372 Ste ioe: a tenuifolium, 585 Sterculia lugubris Bee 399, 406 Stibasi * I i Neb noides, 102; membr augur 102 Str irion, III; californ nicum, Prete sania 257-250, 261, She 364, 373, 377; chiriquana, ere 380; 266, 269, 270, 271; cha deci 259, 360 violacea, 350, Se hie 376, bl vivipara : 357, 358, 364, 373, gant Th viability of the a of Pyronema, 6 Studies on the Rocky Mountain flora, Stud dies of West Indian plants—IV, 1 Symplocarpus foetidus, 4 439 Tabernaemontana_ discolor, 12; ochro- leuca, 12 | Taxonomic study of the Pteridophyta of ii ple gage Peeucrae 227, 507 Tec ans Teloschistes chrysophithalmus, 201; flavi- capensis, 20 Petraclinis. 342 * exas. pagina ree to the Mesozoic flora of the Atlantic coastal plain— VIII, 38 Tectaria, 569 Thalictrui columbianum, coe mega- arpum, 320; venulosum, Thecothes, 187; Pelletieri, “ 152, 164, ae Thelebolus, 139, 186; Peptic: 143, 170 es gramineus, 342 ie ales fg Thyopsiella, Tofieldia es 108; occidentalis, 108 Toxicodendron hb ge 424; vulgare, 42 eet coscordion Trachycolea , 28 Trade acantia, oe bracteata, 108; lara- miensis, phe ccidentalis, 107; s opu- - um, IO universiatis, 107; virginica ciden a Pncwates nes One 390, 405 Trichomanes, 244; apiifolium, 245: Bauer- ianum, 244, 2 hinen- Draytonianum, 246; eminens, 245; Bnlicherianum, pe hurl; as - meifoliu 245; minutulum nutum, ie: ARR HOTS Pee ree vulum, 244, 245; radicans, 245, 246; sandvicense, 246; saxifragoides, 245; pephacd-npge ‘245; speciosum, 246; strigosum, 585 Trifo caetpg arvence, 73; aureum, 72; dubium, 73; hybridum, 73; yrerngnesre: Bik Ray atense, 73, 74; procumbens, 73; ens, 74 Trillium, 439 Tr ee 114-116; Ulmariae, 113, II Triteleia, : Tit poe a, 100; Mertensiana, 100; Pattoni- eran: 389 re europaeus, 69 a af ue Undese beds apecies from Cuba Undescribed species from Jam Unona, 501-504; acutiflora, oe ee ata, 501; Brandesana, 504; cochin- chinensis, 506; crassipetala, 502; crin- ita, 505, 507; dasymaschala, 5°97; INDEX desm mant tha, 505, 508; De esmos, 504 longifior: ora, 507; prose crag 502; pana mensis, 501; panno 506 endl: flora, 502; praecox, aon, st eno opetala, 505, 507 15 uncinata, 502; violacea, 502; viridiflor. 06; Wrayi, 505, 507 xylop biidien, 502; zeylanica, 506 Unonopsis, 501 me yces Caladii, 113; Lilii, 114; Scirpi, 115 Urtics Breweri, at cardiophylla, st ete 305, 306; strigosissima, 305; is, 305. urease. 305 bhi 394 snea ead «oo 201; floridana, 201 awre lat ifolia, 504; ‘monilifera, 502 Uvular ia sesslifolia, 4 439-441 Uvularia sessilifolia, A contribution to the life Ralocy of, 439 Lapacoanse 549-554, 556; album, 553; arboreum, 549, 551, 5533 caespitosum, 552, per ‘confertum, 551; eum, 554, 555; crassifoliam, 5533 m, $54; m Variation in the floral structures of Vitis, Vatica, 406 Vegetative reproduction England Frullaniae, 27 Veratrum Fochecholtsiadun, 108 m robustum in the New hirsu iva, 79; spears 78; vitioss ny 92% palmata, 96; Riewntale « sororia, ee hirsutula x Sto ; hirsutula « triloba, 95; Fate sate fe ‘latiuscula x triloba, 94, 95; palmata, 85-89, 97; palmata dilatata, 92, 96; palmata X 631 a 8 “ he palmata x triloba, 96; mata X villosa, 95; papilionacea, ‘ ah eg fe papilionacea x Stoneana, 93; papilio sa, 96; triloba, 88-07; gerne 89, 90, 91; villosa X ata asarifolia palm Violet hybrids between species of the , 85 10 6, 50, 51; aestivalis, 43; 43, 48, 49; Labrusca, 40, 48; vinifera, 39, 42, 48; vulpina, 38-45, 48, 49, 5 Vitis, Variation in the floral structures or, Vitis, General floral habits of, Special variation in flower parts, Vittaria, 568, 586; elongata, 587; ebid. 587 Roi Negeas cote a 318; affinis, 318; apetala, 319; attenuata, 319; Drum- mondii, ae gii, 319; mon tana, 318; Parryi, striata, 318; Taylorae, 318; Pa: Hache 318; uniflora, 31 Was Lamarck’s evening prim rose (Oeno- Serin 46, gifolius, 346; Reichii, 346; ocd ls, 344, 346 347; Ungeri, 342 Widdringtonites, govieng on nae ai ~ Wicin. . Discoid Radula, 329 Woodwardia, 276 Xylopia, 504; frutescens, 504; grandiflora, 502; muricata, 504; salicifolia, 504 amia lanceolata, ek arsscys lliaceae, 1 Zizyphus, 398; ons ensis, 390, 398, 4 rele oom alpinus, 108; dilatatus, ae 110; gramineus, 109; edius, ; 110; Nuttallii, set paniculatus, 110; porrifolius, 108; , 10 Zygnema pecti nies BuLL. Torrey CLus VOLUME 39, PLATE 40 PLANTS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS. SCTED ON THE ISLAND OF KAQAL. ON KAHOLUAMANOA, A WAIMEA, eA Sires ‘ ae ELAPHOGLOSSUM WAWRAE (Luerssen) C, Chr. BuL_. Torrey CLus VOLUME 39, PLATE 4I SCHIZOSTEGE LYDGATEI Hilleb. Apex and basal pinna BuLi. Torrey CLus VOLUME 39, PLATE 42 PLANTS OF THE Hawa COLLECTED ON THE SLANE OF sauen: AnD y HAN ISLANDS. 1, OE TWEEN THE HANASLOr ee FeR, DRYOPTERIS FUSCO-ATRA (Hilleb.) W. J. Robinson Buti. Torrey CLUB VOLUME 39, PLATE 43 DYOPTERIS NUDA UNDERW. BuLL. ToRREY CLuB VOLUME 39, PLATE 44 5 by Mee Fy DRYOPTERIS PARVULA W, J. Robinson Butv.” TORREY CLUB VOLUME 39, PLATE 45 1-6. DIPLASIOLEJEUNEA JOHNSONII Evans 7-16. LEPTOCOLEA APPRESSA Evans 17-27. RECTOLEJEUNEA MAXONII Evans